07. Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations (2017 Edition)

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR
BUILDING WORKS
AND
OTHER INSTALLATIONS
(2017 EDITION)
Published by Housing and Development Board, Republic of Singapore.
No part of this document may be reproduced or copied in any form or by
any means without the prior permission of the publisher.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS
AND OTHER INSTALLATIONS
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2 PILING 2-1
SECTION 3 EXCAVATION 3-1
SECTION 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 4-1
SECTION 5 METAL FORMWORK 5-1
SECTION 6 SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION 6-1
SECTION 7 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 7-1
SECTION 8 HOUSEHOLD SHELTER 8-1
SECTION 9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK 9-1
SECTION 10 RESERVED 10-1
SECTION 11 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 11-1
SECTION 12 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK 12-1
SECTION 13 ROOFING 13-1
SECTION 14 CONCRETE FLAT ROOF 14-1
SECTION 15 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY 15-1
SECTION 16 IRONMONGERY 16-1
SECTION 17 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 17-1
SECTION 18 METALWORK 18-1
SECTION 19 FLOOR FINISHES 19-1
SECTION 20 WALL FINISHES 20-1
SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL AND BROADBAND COAXIAL 21-1

CABLING INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 22 GLAZING 22-1
SECTION 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING 23-1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken
into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
HDB, being a ISO 14001 certified organisation, is committed to be the leader in environment management. The details of HDB's
environmental policy can be found in the Corporate Philosophy at HDB Website http://www.hdb.gov.sg
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 24 UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION 24-1

CABLE, TELECOMMUNICATION AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE
SECTION 25 CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT 25-1
SECTION 26 LANDSCAPE WORKS 26-1
SECTION 27 MULTI-STOREY CARPARK 27-1
SECTION 28 ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION / UTILITIES CENTRE / 28-1

DUSTBIN COMPOUND
SECTION 29 EATING HOUSE 29-1
SECTION 30 MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING) 30-1
SECTION 31 FABRICATION AND PROVISION OF REFUSE BINS, LITTER BINS, 31-1

BULK CONTAINERS AND TROLLEYS
SECTION 32 SELF-COMPACTING CONCRETE 32-1
SECTION 33 OPTIMISATION OF PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE 33-1

CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM
SECTION 34 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE WALL PANELS AND BLOCKS 34-1
SECTION 35 DRY INTERNAL PARTITION WALL 35-1
SECTION 36 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER, GAS 36-1

AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 37 SANITARY INSTALLATION 37-1
SECTION 38 WATER INSTALLATION 38-1
SECTION 39 GAS PIPE INSTALLATION 39-1
SECTION 40 EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES, RETAIL AND 40-1

SERVICES FACILITIES
SECTION 41 MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION) 41-1
SECTION 42 TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND TELEMONITORING SYSTEM 42-1

INSTALLATION
SECTION 43 BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION 43-1
SECTION 44 DRY/WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION 44-1
SECTION 45 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION 45-1
SECTION 46 CENTRALISED CHUTE FOR RECYCLABLE (CCR) SYSTEM 46-1
The contents of this index on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken
into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 49 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS 49-1
SECTION 50 SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS 50-1
SECTION 51 MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES 51-1
SECTION 52 CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS 52-1
SECTION 53 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES 53-1
SECTION 54 LUMINARIES 54-1
SECTION 55 EARTHING SYSTEM 55-1
SECTION 56 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 56-1
SECTION 57 PUBLIC LIGHTING 57-1
SECTION 58 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES 58-1
SECTION 59 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP), 59-1

GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS
SECTION 60 OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING 60-1
SECTION 61 TELEVISION (TV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION 61-1
SECTION 62 TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING 62-1
SECTION 63 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 63-1
SECTION 64 VENTILATION SYSTEM 64-1
SECTION 65 FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION 65-1
SECTION 66 REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION 66-1
SECTION 67 AUTOMATIC STANDBY GENERATOR SET 67-1
SECTION 70 LISTS OF APPENDICES 70-1
SUMMARY OF UPDATES TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS AND INSTALLATIONS

(2017 EDITION)
The contents on this page shall not be deemed to be part of the Specifications or be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
SECTION 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Page
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations 1-1
1.1.2 Reserved 1-3
1.1.3 Payment Of Employer's Bills Expenses, Etc 1-3
1.1.4 Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS 1-3
1.1.5 Diversion of Services 1-4
1.1.6 Stamp Duties 1-4
1.1.7 TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary 1-4
1.1.8 Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion 1-4
1.1.9 Provisional Sum Items 1-5
1.1.10 Prime Cost Sums 1-5
1.1.11 Overclaim Leading To Overpayment 1-5
1.1.12 Reserved 1-6
1.1.13 Existing Ground / Road Levels 1-6
1.1.14 Raising Or Lowering Of Existing Sewer Manholes And Other Services Manholes 1-6
1.1.15 Work Method And Trade Demonstration 1-6
1.1.16 Reserved 1-7
1.1.17 Site Layout Plan 1-7
1.1.18 Site Offices, Canteen and Rest Area 1-7
1.1.19 Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus Devices, Etc 1-10
1.1.20 Reserved 1-13
1.1.21 Provision Of Transport 1-13
1.1.22 Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities 1-13
1.1.23 Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures 1-15
1.1.24 Construction Site Hoarding Design 1-16
1.1.25 Site Management 1-18
1.1.26 Employment of Contractor's Site Personnel 1-18
1.1.27 Contractor's Work In Connection With Subsidiary Contracts 1-26
1.1.28 Cables/Services Detection 1-26
1.1.30 Damage To Public/Private Property 1-26
1.1.31 General Housekeeping 1-27
1.1.33 Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection 1-27
1.1.34 Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc 1-27
1.1.35 Provision Of Respiratory Masks 1-28
1.1.38 Research Work 1-28
1.1.39 Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms 1-28
And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
1.1.40 Handing Over Of Completed Works And Certification Of Substantial Completion 1-30
1.1.42 Management Of Defects Rectification 1-31
1.1.43 Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic 1-33
1.1.44 Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone 1-33
1.1.45 Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings 1-34
1.1.46 Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements 1-34
1.1.47 Completion Of Site Works 1-34
1.1.48 Erection Of Temporary Buildings 1-35
1.1.49 Goods And Services Tax 1-35
1.1.50 Works And Materials Warranty 1-36
1.1.51 Cost Of Water And Electricity 1-36
CONTENTS
Page
1.1 GENERAL (CONT'D)

1.1.52 Site Control And Security 1-38
1.1.53 Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather 1-38
1.1.54 Shortfall In Floor Area 1-39
1.1.55 Registered Trade Subcontractors And M&E Subcontractors 1-39
1.1.56 Insurance Policies 1-40
1.1.57 Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site 1-42
1.1.58 Provision Of Building Service Centre 1-43
1.1.59 Prohibition Of Dogs in Construction Sites 1-44
1.1.60 Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures 1-45
1.1.61 Computer Hardware And Software 1-45
1.1.62 Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claims And Request For Variation Works 1-49
1.1.63 Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc 1-51
1.1.64 Provision Of Keys Envelopes During Handover 1-51
1.1.65 Scheduling Of PE Submission 1-52
1.1.66 Earth Control Measures 1-53
1.1.67 Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites 1-55
1.1.68 Material Samples Display Room 1-62
1.1.69 Audit of M & E Systems 1-62
1.1.70 Environmental Management 1-63
1.2 MATERIALS
1.2.1 Metric Components 1-64
1.2.2 Materials And Workmanship 1-64
1.2.3 Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials 1-64
1.2.4 Reserved 1-64
1.2.5 Approval Of Samples And Trade Names 1-65
1.2.6 Sample Unit And Quality Standards 1-66
1.2.7 PSB Quality Certificate 1-69
1.2.8 Storage Facility For Cement 1-69
1.2.9 Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site 1-69
1.2.10 Ready-Mixed Concrete From Approved Suppliers 1-70
1.2.11 Water 1-70
1.2.12 Supply Of Concreting Materials 1-71
1.2.13 Aggregates For Non-Concreting Works 1-72
1.2.14 Provision Of Spare Tiles 1-73
1.3 LABOUR
1.3.1 Labour Laws 1-74
1.3.2 Keeping Records Of Workmen 1-74
1.3.3 Employment Of Illegal Immigrants (Prohibition) 1-74
1.3.4 Biometric Time Attendance System for Manpower Data Collection 1-74
1.3.5 Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements 1-75
1.3.6 Employment Of Skilled Tilers 1-76
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT

1.4.1 Provision Of Construction Equipment 1-76
1.4.2 Technical Specification 1-77
1.4.3 Recovery For Non-Provision 1-78
1.4.4 Maintenance 1-79
1.4.5 Approved Construction Equipment 1-81
1.4.6 Provision And Deployment Of Equipment To Improve Site Productivity 1-82
1.5 SAFETY
1.5.1 Site Safety Measures 1-84
1.5.2 Safety Infringement 1-95
1.5.3 Reporting Of Accidents And Dangerous Occurrence 1-95
1.5.4 Requirement For Tower Crane Data Logger E-Alert System 1-96
CONTENTS
Page
1.6 NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES 1-98
1.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ON SURVEY WORKS 1-98
1.8 CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE OF WORK 1-100
1.9 SHORTENED TIME FOR COMPLETION BASED ON ACCEPTED ALTERNATIVE OFFER 1-101
1.10 WORKER’S QUARTER 1-101
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Bldg Spec
Page 1-1
SECTION 1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations
In the Specifications, the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to
them except where the context otherwise requires :
"SO Rep" shall mean the Superintending Officer's Representative.

"as approved" shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
"as directed" shall mean as directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
"or other shall mean as approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative and
approved" as further defined in subclause 1.2.5 "Approval Of Samples And Trade
Names" of the General Specifications.
"as required" or shall mean as required or as shown or as indicated or as specified in the
"as shown" or Drawings and/or Specifications.
"as indicated" or
"as specified"
The following abbreviations are used in the Specifications :
ABGSM = Association of British Generating Set Manufacturers

AC or ac = alternating current
AISI = American Iron & Steel Institute
Amp or amp = Ampere
AMCA = Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI = American National Standard Institute
AS = Australian Standard
ASTM = American Society for Testing and Material
AVA = Agri-Food & Veterinary Authority of Singapore
BCA = Building And Construction Authority
BS = British Standard
cm = centimetre
cm² or cm2 = square centimetre
cm³ or cm3 = cubic centimetre
CPF = Central Provident Fund Board
CP = Code of Practice
dB = decibel
DC or dc = direct current
DIN = Deutche Industrie - Normen
DU or du = dwelling units
EIA = Electronic Industry Association
EMA = Energy Market Authority
MEWR = Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources
EPR = Ethylene Propylene Rubber
FSSD = Fire Safety and Shelter Department
GS or gs = Galvanised Steel
g = gram
HDB = Housing & Development Board
HRC = High Rupturing Capacity
HVAC = Heating Ventilation Air-Conditioning
Hz = Hertz
IDA = Info-Communications Development Authority of Singapore
IEC = International Electrotechnical Commission
IECEE = IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of Electrical Equipment
IP = Index of Protection
ISO = International Organization for Standardization
ITE = Institute of Technical Education
JIS = Japanese Industrial Standard
KA or kA = Kilo Ampere
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-2
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations (Cont'd)
kg = kilogram
KN or kN = kilonewton
kPa or KPa = kilopascal
KV or kV = kilovolt
kW or KW = kilowatt
Kwh or kWh = Kilowatt hour
LEW = Licensed Electrical Worker
MCB = Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCCB = Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MSSL = Market Support Services Licensee
MW = Megawatt
m = metre
Max or max = maximum
Min or min = minimum
ml = millilitre
mm = millimetre
mV = millivolt
m² or m2 = square metre
mm² or mm2 = square millimetre
m³ or m3 = cubic metre
mm³ or mm3 = cubic millimetre
MHz = Megahertz
MOM = Ministry of Manpower
MRT = Mass Rapid Transit
MS or ms = mild steel
N = newton
NEA = National Environment Agency
No. or no. = number
Pa = pascal
ONORM = Osterreichisches Normangsinstitut (Austrian Standard)
PBTS = Public Basic Telecommunications Service Operators
PE = Professional Engineer registered under the Professional Engineers Board,
Singapore
PLS = Product Listing Scheme
PowerGrid or Grid = PowerGrid Ltd
PSB = TUV SUD PSB Pte Ltd
PTL = Public Telecommunication Licensees
PUB = Public Utilities Board
PVC or pvc = Polyvinylchloride
RC or rc = Reinforced Concrete
RCCB = Residual Current Circuit Breaker
rms = root mean square
SAC = Singapore Accreditation Council
SCV =- StarHub Cable Vision Pte Ltd
SINGLAS = Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
SMRT = Singapore MRT Ltd
SPSL = SP Services Ltd
SS = Singapore Standard
SWA = Steel wire armoured
SWG = Standard Wire Gauge (British)
SingTel = Singapore Telecommunications Ltd
TIA = Telecommunications Industry Association
UHF = Ultra High Frequency
UL = Underwriters Laboratories Inc
m = micrometre
uPVC or UPVC = Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride
V = microvolt
V = Volt
VHF = Very High Frequency
v/v = measured by volume
W = watt
w/w = measured by weight
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-3
1.1.1 Definitions, Abbreviations And Interpretations (Cont'd)
XLPE = Cross linked polyethylene

ºC = degree Celsius
% = percent
± = plus or minus
≤ or < = less than or equal to
≥ or > = greater than or equal to
< = is less than
> = is greater than
Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
The clause or subclause headings in the Specifications shall not be deemed to be part thereof or be
taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract.
All clauses including all subclauses under them in the Specifications shall be deemed to be directed at
the Contractor unless expressly specified otherwise to the contrary and the Contractor shall perform
and/or comply with such instructions, directions, requirements and obligations specified in the
Specifications and required under the Contract.
All Acts of Parliament, statutes, regulations, bye-laws, orders, local and foreign standards and codes of
practice specified shall be deemed to refer to the latest and shall be deemed to include any
amendments, and/or modifications and/or additions and/or re-enactments thereto.
1.1.2 Reserved
1.1.3 Payment Of Employer's Bills, Expenses, Etc
The Contractor shall duly and punctually pay to the Employer the billed and any other expenses incurred
by the Employer in respect of the supply of materials, services, etc.
The Contractor shall also pay to the Employer interest at the rate of seven and a half percent per annum
(7.5% p.a.) or such other rate as may be determined from time to time by the Employer in respect of
any arrears of payment or other outstanding sums due and payable to the Employer, from the due dates
until payment in full is received by the Employer.
The Employer reserves the right to set off such bills and expenses against monies due or becoming
due to the Contractor before payment of the balance, if any, to the Contractor. In this respect, all
Employer's bills and other expenses due from the Contractor shall have priority over debts due to third
parties.
1.1.4 Contract Payment By GIRO/EPS
All payments under the Contract by the Employer to the Contractor shall be effected through the Inter-
bank GIRO System and/or other Electronic Payment Systems.
The Contractor shall submit all the necessary forms, such as Inter-bank GIRO (IBG) form, etc., duly
completed and signed, to the Finance Department, HDB, HDB Hub, 480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh,
Singapore 310480; within fourteen days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to effect payments
through such Systems.
In the event the payment arrangement through such Systems terminates for whatever reasons, the
Contractor shall re-submit all the necessary forms to the Finance Department within 14 days from the
date of the termination.
The preceding requirements shall not be applicable to payments by the Employer to the Contractor in
approved foreign currencies, where required under the Contract. Under such a case, the provisions
under the clause "Tenders In Approved Foreign Currencies" including all subclauses under it shall
apply.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-4
1.1.5 Diversion of Services
Where in the case the SO Rep is of the opinion that it becomes essential to divert permanently any
sewer, drain, pipe, cable, or other services, the cost for the diversion shall be borne by the Employer.
Provided always that such diversion does not form part of the Works.
1.1.6 Stamp Duties
The Contractor shall have all documents required by or arising out of or in connection with this Contract
properly stamped to comply with the Stamp Duties Act. The cost and expense arising out of this
obligation, including all stamp duties required, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to
have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
1.1.7 TOL Fee For Land Outside Contract Boundary
Where the Contractor requires land outside the contract boundary for the setting up of Construction
Equipment and other temporary facilities for the Works, the Contractor shall check on the availability of
such land and apply to the relevant Authority or Lands Management Section of HDB for the use of such
land. In the event the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands Administration Section allows the Contractor
the use of such land, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense comply with all the terms and
conditions, pay all TOL (Temporary Occupation Licence) fees, bear all costs and expenses for the use
and maintenance of and access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority or HDB's Lands
Management Section.
Such land allocated shall solely be used for the purpose of executing Works under the Contract only.
Any payment for unused materials or goods stored at such land shall be subject to the provisions in
Option Module B "Unused Materials or Goods not Delivered to Site" of the Conditions.
1.1.8 Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion
In the event of re-arrangement of the completion of the Works into separate phases or sub-phases, the
rate of liquidated damages in respect of each phase or sub-phase of the Works shall be re-computed
according to the following rates and pro-rated against the original amount specified in the Appendix To
Public Sector Standard Conditions Of Contract For Construction Works.
$
Rental Flat (30m²) 15.00 per unit per day
Rental Flat (40m²) 20.00 per unit per day
Studio Apartments (35m²) 15.00 per unit per day
Studio Apartments (45m²) 20.00 per unit per day
2-Room Flat (36m²) 15.00 per unit per day
2-Room Flat (45m²) 20.00 per unit per day
3-Room Flat 25.00 per unit per day
3 Gen-Room Flat 45.00 per unit per day
Electrical Substation 1,800.00 per no. per day
Link Building/Linkway/ 40.00 per 1,000 m² of total area within the contract
Siteworks/Landscaping works boundary per day
Carpark Lot 5.00 per lot per day
Motorcycle Lot 1.50 per lot per day
Shop )
Market )
Foodcourt/Fastfood/ )
Coffee House/Restaurant/ ) 1.00 per m² of internal floor area per day
Eating House/Kiosk/ )
Offices/Chidcare Centre/ )
Various Centres )
Civil Engineering Works ) 500.00 per phase per day (for Contract Sum less than
or equal to $2 million)
) 35.00 per phase per day (for every subsequent
$100,000.00 exceeding $2 million)
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-5
1.1.8 Liquidated Damages For Delay In Completion (Cont'd)
For the purpose of this clause, the internal floor area shall be defined as the total floor area in the
commercial unit/centre including the floor area occupied by toilet, store, kitchen, staircase, etc within
the commercial unit/centre. The internal floor area shall be measured as follows :
(a) Partition Wall/Column
For partition wall/column, to measure up to the centre line of partition wall (party wall) which
separates 2 adjoining units.
(b) External Wall And Party Wall Along Corridor
For external wall and party wall along the corridor, to measure up to the external face of the
wall surrounding the floor slab.
1.1.9 Provisional Sum Items
Where Provisional Sum Items are included in the Contract, they shall be inclusive of all costs necessary
in carrying out or supplying the work, materials or goods. These Provisional Sum Items shall be
inclusive of the Contractor's profit and overheads but shall be net of trade and cash discounts.
1.1.10 Prime Cost Sums
Where Prime Cost Sums (hereinafter referred to as P.C. Sum for the purposes of this subclause) are
provided for any work, materials or goods, these sums shall be inclusive of carriage but exclusive of
Contractor's profit and attendance. These P.C. Sum shall also be net of trade and cash discounts.
The Contractor shall allow and separately price for profit and attendance in respect of such P.C. Sum
in the Form of Tender.
P.C. Sum shall be deducted from the Contract Sum and in lieu thereof shall be added the sums due to
the Contractor for the said work, materials or goods. The sum allowed by the Contractor in the Contract
for attendance in respect of any P.C. Sum shall be fixed regardless of whether the actual sum expended
is greater or lesser than the P.C. Sum. In respect of profit, the amount to be paid shall be the percentage
quoted by the Contractor against the actual sum expended in relation to the P.C. Sum.
Should the work, materials or goods for which a P.C. Sum is provided in the Contract be not required,
or if the Employer chooses to carry out or supply the aforesaid work, materials or goods by his own
workmen or by other contractors, which the Employer is contractually entitled so to choose, then such
P.C. Sum together with the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract shall be
deducted in full from the Contract Sum.
Should the Contractor himself be engaged or instructed to carry out or supply any work, materials or
goods under a P.C. Sum, the profit and attendance allowed by the Contractor in the Contract in respect
of the P.C. Sum shall be deducted in full from the Contract Sum. In such event, the amount to be paid
to the Contractor for the work, materials or goods shall be inclusive of the Contractor's overheads and
profit for the work, materials and goods.
1.1.11 Overclaim Leading To Overpayment
If at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract, the Contractor is found to have over-claimed and was paid for more than
the value of the Permanent Works carried out and/or approved unfixed materials at the Site, the SO
Rep shall be empowered to deduct from the Contractor's subsequent payments the sum overpaid
together with the Employer's charge, and interest calculated at the rate of seven and a half percent per
annum (7.5% p.a.).
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-6
1.1.12 Reserved
1.1.13 Existing Ground / Road Levels
The existing ground/ road levels/ drain invert levels as shown in the drawings are approximate. The
Contractor shall note that existing ground/road levels and drain invert levels may not necessarily be the
same as shown in the drawings. He is to ascertain this and visits the Site prior to the tender and is
deemed to include whatever extra cost of cut and fill in the Contract Sum. In the event of the Contractor
failing to visit the Site, the tender shall be deemed to have been submitted with his satisfaction of the
actual levels on Site and other related ground conditions. The Contractor is deemed to have made
necessary provision in the Contract Sum to cater for additional earthwork arising from the difference in
levels found on Site and that shown in the drawings and no claims or compensation shall be entertained.
1.1.14 Raising Or Lowering Of Existing Sewer Manholes And Other Services Manholes
The Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum the cost of raising or lowering of existing sewer
manholes and other services manholes / chambers, and their related works within the contract boundary
to suit and match the proposed driveways and platform levels.
1.1.15 Work Method And Trade Demonstration
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the work methods of various trades as
required by the SO Rep to ensure good in-process quality control and reasonably acceptable final
workmanship. A marking system, where applicable, showing inter alia, the control, grid and level
reference lines shall be included in the work methods.
The Contractor shall also ensure that sub-contractors engaged for each trade shall also comply with
the work methods approved by the SO Rep. As instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall conduct
trade demonstration for all critical work methods as approved prior to full scale production in the
contract.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the work methods proposed by the Contractor will not
ensure good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep may require the Contractor to make at his own
cost and expense such modifications to the original work methods as the SO Rep may consider
necessary or appropriate.
The Contractor shall employ only skilled workers who are capable of executing the Works in accordance
with the work methods approved by the SO Rep. When there is a change in subcontractors, the SO
Rep may instruct the Contractor to re-conduct the relevant trade demonstration if deem necessary.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor’s work methods, revised work methods or any details and
information provided under this subclause shall not in any way relieve the Contractor’s liabilities or
obligations under the Contract.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-7
1.1.16 Reserved
1.1.17 Site Layout Plan
After the Contract is awarded, submit a site layout plan to the SO Rep indicating proposed locations of
all temporary structures (for example site offices, workers' quarters, canteens, stores, hoistways,
Construction Equipment and labour lines) for approval before their erection. Notwithstanding such
approval, the Contractor shall relocate any such structures at his own cost and expense when required
to do so by the SO Rep.
All such materials and structures shall be kept away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and
services lines.
Should any hoistway or structure be erected without the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
pull down and re-erect the hoistway or structure in an approved position within seven days from the
date of instruction by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide for the maintenance of all such structures in a clean, hygienic and safe
condition for the duration of the Works.
All such structures and hoistways shall be removed on Substantial Completion of the Works.
1.1.18 Site Offices, Canteen And Rest Area
1.1.18.1 Within 21 days from the date of taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall erect site offices and
a site canteen complying with the requirements of the MEWR and shall remove them on Substantial
Completion of the Works or at a time approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's Standard Drawings may
be used as a guide in designing the site offices and canteen. Submit proposals for the design (inclusive
of PE calculations), configuration and layout for the approval of the SO Rep taking full consideration the
site constraints and conditions. Locating the site offices and canteen at the first storey void areas shall
only be considered under special circumstances and subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Should
approval be given to set up the site offices and canteen at the first storey void areas, ensure and make
all provisions necessary to protect the structures and finishes. When such void areas are required by
the Employer for other purposes, remove and re-erect the site offices and canteen at alternative
locations all at the Contractor's own cost and expense. No claim whatsoever shall be entertained in
such event.
1.1.18.2 Rest Area
The contractor shall submit a proposal to SO’s Rep for approval on the provision of a rest area for the
workers to rest and have their meal breaks upon the commencement of the project particularly during
the piling and sub structure stage and before the setting up of the site canteen and workers quarter.
The rest area can be in the form of temporary containers (minimum 2 Nos of 20 feet metal containers)
that shall be well kept and well ventilated with fans or air-conditioning. The Contractor shall also be
responsible to ensure that the workers rest and have their meal breaks at the rest area provided. In the
event of non-compliance, SO’s Rep reserves the right to take contractual actions against the contractor
as specified under the Clause of “Nuisance and Irregularities” and cost recovery.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-8
1.1.18 Site Offices, Canteen And Rest Area (Cont’d)
1.1.18.3 Site Offices
The following rooms shall have at least the minimum stipulated areas and complete with basic facilities,
fittings and furniture and made available at all times for use by the SO Rep and the Employer's officers
:
No. of Items
Facilities, Furnitures and Resident
S/N SO Rep Meeting Computer
Fittings Technical Officer
Room Room Room
Room
1. Room (Minimum size & able to 24 m2 24 m2 34 m2 8 m2
accommodate all facilities specified)
2. Tables and Chairs :
a) 1.5m x 0.8m office 4 4 - -

table complete with at
least 3 drawers
b) 1.5m x 0.8m working - Maximum 2 - -

table complete with
storage space for
drawings
c) 0.8m wide side tables for - - - 1
computer and its peripherals
d) 1.2m x 0.8m table - - 6 -
e) Chairs with hand rests 4 4 - -
f) Chairs without hand 4 2 15 2

rests
g) High Chairs without hand - Maximum 2 5 -
rests (for working table)
3 Steel Cabinet complete with 1 Maximum 3 - -

Shelves and Double-Leaf Doors
with lock
4 Soft Board complete with 1 1 2 1

Accessories
5 White Board complete with 1 1 1 -

Accessories
6 Key cabinet - 1 - -
7 Air-Conditioner of Minimum 10,000 2 2 2 1

BTU Output
8 Telephone Installation
a) Separate telephone line 1 1 - 1

b) Telephone set 1 1 - 1
9 Drawing Rack complete with - 2 - -

Drawing Holders
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-9
1.1.18.3 Site Offices (Cont’d)
No. of Items
Facilities, Furnitures and Resident
S/N SO Rep Meeting Computer
Fittings Technical Officer
Room Room Room
Room
10 Electrical Installation,
Connections and Accessories
(The illumination level in the
meeting room and the SO Rep
room shall be set at 300 to 400
lux)
a) 40W Fluorescent lighting 4 4 4 2
b) 13 Ampere socket outlet 2 2 2 3
c) 15 Ampere socket outlet 2 2 2 1
The doors leading to the SO Rep room, the Resident Technical Officer room and the meeting room
shall be provided with locksets and all the keys to the locksets shall be given to the SO Rep.
1.1.18.4 Site Canteen
The structure of the site canteen shall be a steel column-roof truss design, anchored to a reinforced
concrete base and footings. All structural steelwork shall comply with the requirements specified in
Section 17 “Structural Steelwork” including all clause and subclause under it. The Contractor shall
further submit detailed structural plans and design calculations, certified by his PE to the SO Rep not
later than three months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or two weeks before
the actual commencement of the Works, whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall bear all
consequences for late submission. The Contractor shall erect the site canteen in strict compliance with
his Professional Engineer's plans and calculations. The Works shall be supervised by the Contractor's
PE. His PE is also to ensure that the site canteen is designed in compliance with the Technical
Guidelines for the Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Sites, including any amendment
thereto, issued by FSSD; and the Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations (2000 edition)
including any latest requirements by BCD, BCA. Not later than two weeks after the completion of the
Works, the Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate of Supervision, stating that he has carried out such
supervision work and is fully satisfied that the Works have been constructed in accordance with his
structural plans and design calculations as approved by the SO Rep.
The site canteen is to be enclosed with half-height panels. The panels are to be made of fire-rated
colour-bond galvanized steel sheet complete with 42mm thick rockwool panel (sandwich concept). Solid
block wall are to be installed only at the preparation and dapur areas where wall tiles are provided. All
solid block wall facing the external/exposed shall be plastered and painted with at least 3 coats of algae-
resistant emulsion paint. No timber or other combustible material shall be used for the site canteen.
Notwithstanding the Employer’s Standard Drawings being adopted as a guide, the site canteen shall be
provided with the following facilities and amenities:
No. of Items
S/No. Facilities, Furniture and Fittings Refreshment Preparation Dapur
Area Area Area
1. Wash basins 1 1 -
2. Wash area - 1 -
3. Wall / Ceiling mounted fans 4 - -
4. Ceiling mounted lightings 4 2 2
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-10
1.1.18.4 Site Canteen (Cont’d)
All canteen counter tops, dining tables and benches are to be wrapped with linoleum or other approved
waterproof material. The concrete base shall also be 100mm above the surrounding level to keep the
floor area dry. Adequate scupper drains graded to discharge into public sewer / septic tank are to be
provided for washing purposes. Discharge into the site’s perimeter cut-off drains shall not be allowed.
All roof purlins and runners are to be concealed with false ceiling made of softboard or other approved
materials for aesthetic purposes.
The site canteen is to be sited at a well-ventilated location, away from vehicular accesses and refuse
collection areas for hygiene purposes. The location and layout of the site canteen shall be subjected to
approval of the SO Rep.
1.1.18.5 The Contractor shall allow for the maintenance of the site offices, canteen, rest areas and all the
facilities, furniture and fittings therein in a clean, habitable and good working condition to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall pay all charges for the provision and use of the telephone and
electricity at the site offices and canteen.
1.1.18.6 Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned facilities, furniture and fittings after the
commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and provide the
same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and provision plus
charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor
or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
1.1.19 Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc
(a) Facsimile Machine
The Contractor shall provide 1 number of plain paper (A4 size) facsimile machine at the site
office. Facsimile machine of the thermal paper type shall not be acceptable. Such machine shall
be kept in the Resident Technical Officer room throughout the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The facsimile machine shall
be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or Employer's officers only. The Contractor should
provide another facsimile machine for their own use.
The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the
continuous proper, good and efficient working conditions and maintenance of such facsimile
machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the vendor to the SO Rep for checking when
requested. The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
(b) Digital Camera On Site
The Contractor shall provide a digital still camera on the Site throughout the Time for Completion
and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the purpose
of photographing site occurrences (within the Site) by the SO Rep. The digital still camera shall
have zooming functions and be capable of taking pictures at a digitized resolution of at least 2.1
million pixels. The digital still camera shall have an expandable and removable memory storage
media with a minimum capacity of 128 Mbytes, and be provided with all the necessary softwares
and accessories for editing and transferred digital images from the camera to the computer
hardware. The Contractor shall bear all the costs and expenses incurred arising from usage of
the digital camera and shall be responsible for its continuous and proper functioning.
(c) Torch Lights
The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of torch lights on the Site at all times for use by
the SO Rep, Resident Technical Officer and/or representatives from other Authorities. These
torch lights shall be in good working condition and sufficiently bright enough for use.
(d) Metal Detector
The Contractor shall provide a battery-operated portable metal detector for the purpose of
detecting metal reinforcement embedded in cement mortar joints of brickwalls. The detector
must have either a light or buzzer indicator to indicate the presence of metal.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-11
1.1.19 Provision Of Equipment, Apparatus, Devices, Etc (Cont'd)
(e) Moisture Meter
The Contractor shall provide a portable, battery operated, digital LCD display moisture meter
with integral electrode pins for measuring moisture content of timber doors and frames delivered
to the Site. The moisture meter shall be capable of measuring actual moisture content of wood
in the range from 8% to 44% (minimum) with a 1% indicating tolerance at 0 to 40 degrees Celsius
ambient temperature. The meter shall also possess a built-in device for performing simple
calibration checks.
(f) Safety Helmets And Safety Boots
The Contractor shall provide sufficient safety helmets and safety boots for use by the Employer's
officers and visitors visiting the Site throughout the Time for Completion and any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The ownership of the safety helmets
and safety boots shall be reverted back to the Contractor upon the satisfactory Substantial
Completion of the Works.
The requirements are as follows :
(i) Safety Helmets
(a) white colour with HDB logo in front of helmet.

(Colour code for HDB logo : Pantone 485)
(b) complete with canvas chin straps and sweat resisting lining.
(c) comply with SS98:1987.
(ii) Safety Boots
(a) at least 24 cm in height

(b) black/brown colour with steel toe cap
(c) long-wearing
(d) of great flexibility and resilience
(e) slip proof, resistant to oil, acid and heat
(f) nail proof
(g) of excellent insulation
(h) comfortable and light
(i) comply with SS105:1987
The Contractor shall immediately replace those safety helmets and safety boots which the
SO Rep considers to be not in good working condition.
(g) Stationery For Resident Technical Officer
The Contractor shall provide stationery and other devices for site use by the Employer's officers
upon commencement of the Works. The list of stationery to be provided is as follows :
Item
Description Quantity (Maximum)
No.
1. Ball Point Pen (Black/Blue/Red) 2 no. each per Resident Technical Officer
2. Correction Fluid 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
3. Eraser (Pencil) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
4. Glue Tube 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
Hard Cover Book :
5. a) A4 size a) 5 each.
b) A5 size b) 5 each.
6. Manila File 25 no.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-12
(g) Stationery For Resident Technical Officer (Cont’d)
Item
Description Quantity (Maximum)
No.
7. Paper Clip :
a) Medium Size a) 2 boxes.
b) Large Size b) 2 boxes.
8. Pen Knife 2 no.
9. Pencil (2B) 2 no. per Resident Technical Officer
10. Perforator 2 no.
11. Pocket Notebook 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
12. Ruler (300 mm) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
13. Scissor 2 no.
14. Stamp Pad (Violet) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
15. Staple Machine (B3) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
16. Staples (B3) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
17. Calculator (without scientific functions) 1 no.
18. Colour Pencils 1 set
19. Highlighter of Assorted Colours 1 set
20. Scale Ruler 1 no.
21. Writing Pad (A4) 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
22. Hard Cover Ring File 40 no. plus 3 no. per building block
23. Ear Plugs 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
24. Rubber Stamp Max. 5 nos per contract
25. Retractable tapping rod 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
26. Measuring Tape of 7.5 metre Length 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
27. Laser Pointer 1 no. per Resident Technical Officer
28. CD Re-write able discs 1 box of 10 CDRW discs
Should the Contractor fails to provide any of the aforementioned stationery after the
commencement date of the Time for Completion, the SO Rep shall forthwith purchase and
provide the same on the Contractor's behalf and all costs and expenses for such purchase and
provision plus charges shall be recovered by the Employer from any monies due or becoming
due to the Contractor or be recovered as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
(h) Photo Copying Machine
Provide 1 number of plain paper photocopying machine at the site office with the following
specification:
(i) minimum 50 ppm in black and white;

(ii) Support paper up to 160gsm and A3+;
(iii) Auto paper selections;
(iv) Auto response sensor
The photocopying machine shall be kept in the Resident Technical Officer room throughout the
Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract. The photo copying machine shall be for the exclusive use by the SO Rep and/or
Employer’s officers only. The Contractor should provide another photo copying machine for their
own use.
The Contractor shall pay all charges, bear all costs and expenses and be responsible for the
maintenance of such photocopying machine. Produce the maintenance agreement with the
vendor to the SO Rep for checking when requested.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-13
(h) Photo Copying Machine (Cont’d)
The maintenance agreement shall cover the whole duration of the Time for Completion and any
time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
(i) Measuring Instrument for Tiles’ Lippage
The contractor shall provide an instrument for measuring tiles’ lippage from the commencement
of tiling works to the end of defects liability period. The instrument shall be approved by SO Rep.
It shall be properly maintained and kept on site.
The operation of the instrument shall comply with the manufacturer’s instruction. It must be able
to provide an accurate reading and have a calibration certificate from an approved accredited
laboratory at every 12 months interval or as and when required by the SO Rep.
1.1.20 Reserved
1.1.21 Provision Of Transport
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide suitable transport throughout the Time for
Completion and any time periods where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, for the
SO Rep and other Employer's officers, from the nearest bus stop or MRT station or site or public carpark
near to the Site, to the Site, including the return journey, for the discharge of their official duties. Such
pick up point shall be decided by the SO Rep. The vehicle shall be driven by the Contractor's own
personnel.
1.1.22 Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities
1.1.22.1 Access Roads And Protective Crossings
The Contractor shall repair and maintain all access roads serving the Site and provide temporary
protective crossings over existing drains, channels, footways, etc throughout the Time for Completion
and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall
be responsible for making good all damage and/or clearing away on Substantial Completion to the
requirements of the relevant Authorities and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
1.1.22.2 Reserved
1.1.22.3 Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation
The Contractor shall engage a Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW) of at least an ‘Electrical Technician’
Grade to design all temporary electrical installations necessary for building operations and works of
engineering construction. The installations shall comply fully to the requirements as stated in the latest
edition of Singapore Standard CP 88 applicable at the date of closing of the Tender. Throughout the
Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract,
the Contractor’s LEW shall ensure good safety standards and practices and including the following :
(a) For re-development sites, the Contractor is strongly encouraged to use M/s PowerGrid Ltd’s
power supply to provide temporary electricity supply during the construction stage. For new town
development sites, all electrical generator sets shall be licensed with valid EMA licence. A
minimum capacity of 75kVA generator shall be used at each block. However when the generator
is used for the passenger cum material hoist and other general purposes, the minimum capacity
of the generator for each block shall be upgraded to 100 kVA.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-14
1.1.22 Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities (Cont’d)
1.1.22.3 Temporary Electricity Supply And Installation (Cont’d)
(b) The electrical switch board which holds the ELCB shall be housed in a switch box located at
least 1.5 m from the floor level.
(c) Socket-outlet assembly complete with miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) and residual current
operated circuit breakers (RCCBs) is to be provided at each storey of the building block. The
precast refuse chute shall serve as a temporary service riser. The installation shall last the entire
Time for Completion unless authorized to be removed earlier by the SO Rep or when permanent
electricity supply is secured (whichever is earlier). The temporary incoming supply cable located
within the precast refuse chute shall be supported with insulated lock bands. Upon termination
of the temporary electricity supply, all cables and lock bands installed in the precast refuse chute
shall be removed and the surface of the precast refuse chute shall be made good to a smooth
finish.
(d) All sheaths of cables, sockets outlets and plugs are in good working condition.
(e) All cables are properly bound and do not cause obstruction to passageways, walkways and
stairs.
(f) All cables are properly supported with L-shaped galvanised steel brackets or insulated lock
bands and placed at a suitable height, away from any source which cause mechanical damage.
(g) All plugs, socket-outlets, socket-outlet assembly (SOA), cable couplers and plug adaptors are to
be of the standard industrial type and of minimum classification of latest edition CP 88.
(h) The supply to provide artificial lighting shall be taken from the socket-outlet assembly located at
each storey. 4 feet fluorescent lighting enclosed in suitable mechanical enclosure to a minimum
classification of IP 44 shall be used to provide lighting or to achieve a minimum lighting level of
400 lux.
(i) The Contractor shall provide sufficient temporary lighting, according to the instruction of the SO
Rep, for their workers/sub-contractors to carry out in-process construction works such as internal
plastering/skimming, wall and floor tiling, application of water-proofing membrane etc., within the
units or common areas of the building under construction.
1.1.22.4 Reserved
1.1.22.5 Temporary Store Room For Lift Parts
The Contractor shall provide a temporary storage space with a floor area of at least 50 m2 and another
temporary store room properly secured and complete with door and latch and with a floor area of at
least 15 m2 at the ground floor of each building block where lifts are to be installed. The temporary
storage space/temporary store room shall be used solely by the lift contractor for keeping lift parts during
the lift installation period which shall commence from the date of handing over of the lift hoistway and
lift motor room to the lift contractor.
If the abovementioned temporary storage space/temporary store room need to be removed to allow the
Contractor and/or other contractors to proceed with their work, the Contractor shall at its own cost and
expense first provide an alternative storage space/store room and arrange with the lift contractor to
vacate the original temporary storage space/temporary store room and transfer such lift parts to the
alternative storage space/store room. The location and type of temporary storage space/temporary
store room shall be approved by the SO Rep.
1.1.22.6 Temporary Use Of Lift
For each building block in the Works designed with lift facilities, the Contractor shall secure for the
temporary use of one lift upon completion of lift testing and commissioning by the lift contractor engaged
by the Employer. The Contractor shall execute an agreement with the lift contractor for the temporary
usage of the lift for a period of 1 month or longer prior to the Substantial Completion of each respective
building block. A copy of the executed agreement shall be given to the SO rep for record. All costs and
expenses incurred in complying with the provisions of this clause shall be deemed to be included in the
Contract Sum.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-15
1.1.22 Provision Of Temporary Site Facilities/Utilities (Cont'd)
1.1.22.6 Temporary Use Of Lift (Cont'd)
The temporary use of the lift shall be subjected to the terms and conditions stipulated hereunder. Such
terms and conditions shall be incorporated into the agreement to be executed between the Contractor
and the lift contractor. The terms and conditions shall be as follows :
(a) The Contractor shall seek the approval of the SO Rep for the use of the lifts.
(b) The Contractor shall arrange for a designated person to certify that the lifts are for temporary use
and seek approval from MOM before it can be used. Alternatively the lift contractor can arrange
for the inspection on behalf of the Contractor at a cost of $680.00 per lift.
(c) The Contractor shall provide proper protection such as plywood, adhesive tapes, etc. to the lift
cages, floors, car doors, architraves, transoms and landing doors, etc. The Contractor shall
ensure that the protection for the lifts is always in a proper condition. Any physical damage to
the lifts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(d) The Contractor shall engage a full-time lift attendant to operate each lift. Under no circumstance
shall a lift be left unattended when it is in operation.
(e) The Contractor shall ensure that the lifts are not over loaded.
(f) The Contractor shall take up additional insurance for the use of the lifts as temporary use lifts
and Public Liability coverage, naming the Employer and the lift contractor as the co-insured, for
the period of usage. Copies of the insurance policies shall be given to both the SO Rep and the
lift contractor before the lifts are allowed to be used. Alternately, the Contractor may pay the lift
contractor for taking up the insurance and public liability coverage on its behalf.
(g) The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily maintenance of the lifts, such as cleaning up
the cages and sills in order to prevent unnecessary breakdown and damage to the lifts.
(h) The lift contractor shall service the lifts once a month during normal working hours. In case of a
need for emergency service, the Contractor shall contact the lift contractor direct. The Contractor
shall pay the lift contractor a monthly maintenance fee of $630.00 per lift or pro-rated accordingly.
The lift contractor may stop the use of the lifts if the maintenance fee is not paid up.
(i) Smoking is strictly prohibited in the lifts.
(j) At least three days prior to handing over each building block to the Employer, a joint inspection
shall be conducted between the Contractor and the lift contractor for the purpose of handing the
lift back to the lift contractor. Any damage that occur during or as a result of or arising from the
temporary usage of the lift which affect the handing over of the lift to the Employer shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. All costs and expense for rectification and repair shall be borne
by the Contractor, subject to verification by the SO Rep.
1.1.23 Protective Roof For Temporary Site Structures
In addition to the requirements specified in subclause 1.1.18 (or as amended) "Site Offices and
Canteens" and other clauses and subclauses on temporary structures as specified, additional protective
materials for the roof shall be incorporated into the roof design of these temporary structures. The
protective material shall be made of 18mm thick timber ply. For site office and workers' quarters, the
timber ply shall be laid in dual double layers; with one double layer laid just beneath the metal roofing
sheet and another double layer at the bottom of the steel truss system supporting the metal roofing
sheet. For all other temporary structures, such as canteens, toilets, carpenter yards, etc, the protective
timber roof shall be laid in single double layer beneath the roofing sheet. However, at the sole discretion
of the SO Rep, such protective materials may not be necessary if the temporary structures are deemed
far beyond the nearest building block under construction. Under such cases, there shall be no
adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor's PE shall consult with the SO Rep on these protective
roofs before proceeding with the design of the temporary structures.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-16
1.1.24 Construction Site Hoarding Design
1.1.24.1 Hoarding Design
The contractor shall provide hoarding design with images depicting:
(a) the overall perspectives of the project;

(b) community images; and
(c) project information and construction progress.
This information would be put up together with the HDB and BCA project signboards.
The design of the hoardings shall follow the design templates shown in the drawings. It shall consist of
two main components:
- Hoardings panel comprising overall perspectives of the project and community images; and
- Hoardings panel with information on the project and construction progress
All hoardings images and designs used shall be printed at a resolution of at least 300 dpi and 10,000
pixels height, on adhesive laminate film that is waterproof, fade-proof and mounted on white or off-white
zincalume steel or galvanised steel flat panels. The Contractor shall ensure that the hoardings design
is durable, lasting throughout the time for completion including any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract. Any defective panels shall be replaced as and when directed
by Superintending Officer's Representative (SO Rep).
For all panels, the HDB logo, and the running red bar at the bottom of the design is to be in Pantone
485 (C0 100M 91Y K0).The background for the tagline panel in the three design variations is rendered
in different tones of red as shown in the drawings.
The hoarding images/designs shall be scaled proportionately to a 4m height (as shown in the drawings).
Where there is a need to have a raised concrete kerb at the bottom, the height of the sticker will be 4m
minus the allowance for the height of the kerb. The sticker will be pasted from the bottom of the metal
hoardings.
The Contractor shall submit a complete set of the hoarding workshop drawings to be endorsed by his
Professional Engineer (PE) for SO Rep approval. The proposed layout of the images and designs used
on the hoarding shall be indicated on the plans and elevation of the workshop drawings submitted.
All sites will use a mix of flat and corrugated panel hoardings, except for those with high pedestrian traffic
and visibility at all sides which will require flat panel hoardings throughout. The areas along the site that
require plain white/off-white flat panel hoardings and corrugated panel hoardings are shown in the tender
drawings. The guidelines used to determine which type of hoardings to use are as follows:
(a) Areas with low pedestrian traffic and/or low visibility: Corrugated panel hoardings
(b) Areas with high pedestrian traffic and/or high visibility: Flat panel hoardings
The hoardings design printed on adhesive laminate film will only be applied to the portions with flat
panel hoardings. As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall change the hoardings
type to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, at the cost and expense of the Contractor.
1.1.24.2 Position of Hoarding Design
(a) Hoarding Design With Information
Hoarding design with information on the project and construction progress shall be located at the
right side of the main entrance. It shall consist of the overall site layout plan, HDB project
signboard, BCA signboard and construction progress panel (as shown in the drawings).
(i) There shall be three stages indicated on the construction progress panel: Foundation
Works, Building Works and Finishing Works.
(ii) HDB will provide two images for each construction stage which will be the standard image
used across all HDB sites. The Contractor shall only use these images for the construction
progress panel.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-17
1.1.24 Construction Site Hoarding Design (Cont’d)
1.1.24.2 Position of Hoarding Design (Cont’d)
(a) Hoarding Design With Information (Cont’d)
(iii) The Contractor is to ensure that the HDB and BCA project signboards are in compliance
with authority requirements. These signboards will be mounted on the flat panel
hoardings.
(b) Hoardings design with perspectives
Hoardings design with perspectives of the project and community images shall be located at both
sides of the main entrance. At the right side, it shall be placed after the project information and
construction progress panel.
(i) There are three design variations (as shown in the drawings). The SO Rep shall select
and adopt the variation that best suits the configuration of the site. The Contractor must
ensure that in the placement of the hoardings design on the flat panels, no tagline or
community images are located where the hoarding bends around the edges of the
construction site.
(ii) The selected design variation shall be repeated throughout the required perimeter of the
site at an interval of 4m (as shown in the drawings).
(iii) After placement of the selected hoardings design on the flat panel, the balance portion of
the flat panel hoardings that cannot accommodate another design panel in its entirety can
be left bare.
As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove or relocate all or part of the
hoardings panels and reinstate the affected grounds to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the cost and
expense of the Contractor. On satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works, the hoardings panels
shall be cleared away upon the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-18
1.1.25 Site Management
Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
his approval the following details on site planning :
(a) Site organizational structure;

(b) Names, roles and responsibilities of Contractor's site management, technical and
supervisory staff;
(c) Manpower schedule for each trade;
(d) Schedule of heavy equipment and machineries;
(e) Measurement Plan and Survey method;
(f) Safety Management system;
Within 30 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for
his approval the Master Construction Programme for each building blocks and entire project.
Furnish the SO Rep with such further details and information as the SO Rep may require in regard to
the above items.
Should it appear to the SO Rep at any time that the site planning proposed by the Contractor is not able
to ensure a smooth progress and of good workmanship in the Works, the SO Rep is empowered to
require the Contractor to make, at the Contractor’s own cost and expense, all necessary modifications
to the plans.
Approval by the SO Rep of the Contractor's site planning details, revised site planning details and further
information provided under this subclause shall not in anyway affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's
liabilities or obligations under the Contract.
At least 14 days before the commencement of the Works by the sub-contractors or the supply of the
materials by the manufacturers / suppliers, the Contractor shall submit the names of his sub-contractors
for the Works and the manufacturers / suppliers of the materials to the SO Rep. Where the Contractor
changes his sub-contractors / suppliers, he shall also submit such information to the SO Rep 14 days
prior to the commencement of the Works or supply of materials.
1.1.26 Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel
1.1.26.1 Requirements For Employment Of Site Personnel

(For projects with 10 residential blocks or less)
The Contractor shall employ the site personnel as specified in the table below and station them full-time
on site upon the approval from the SO Rep.
The Project Manager, WSHO, ECO, Security Guard and at least 50% of the total number of the
stipulated site supervisors (Arch, structural or M&E) shall be employed and be full time on site from the
commencement date of the contract. The contractor is given up to one month from the commencement
date to deploy the WSH Co-ordinator, Site Clerk and the rest of the site supervisors.
Upon their employment, the site personnel shall be full time on site throughout the construction period
including any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, unless otherwise
approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-19
1.1.26 Employment Of Contractor’s Site Personnel (Cont'd)

(For projects with 10 residential blocks or less) (Cont'd)
Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed

Based On Contract Sum Value Fully Agreed &
Accepted Rate by
the Contractor &
the Employer For
Type of Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding the Cost &
S/N Not $10 Million $25 Million $50 Million $75 Million Exceeding
Personnel Expense Deemed
Exceeding But Not But Not But Not But Not $100 to be Allowed by
$10 Million Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding Exceeding Million the Contractor for
$25 Million $50 Million $75 Million $100 Million the Employment of
Each Personnel
$10,000 per
Project
1 One One One One One One Project Manager
Manager
per month
Workplace $7,000 per
Safety & Workplace Safety
2 Nil One One One One One
Health Officer & Health Officer
(WSHO) per month
$6,000 per
Workplace
Workplace Safety
Safety &
3 One Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil & Health Co-
Health Co-
ordinator per
ordinator
month
Site
Supervisor for $6,000 per
4a Architectural & One Two Three Three Four Four Site Supervisor
Structural per month
Works
Site
4b Mechanical & One One One One One One Site Supervisor
Electrical per month
Works
$5,000 per
Environmental
Environmental
5 Control Officer Nil One One One One One
Control Officer per
(ECO)
Month
$2,000 per
Security
6 One One One One One One Security Guard
Guard
per month
$2,000 per
7 Site Clerk One One One One One One Site Clerk
per month
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-20

(For projects with more than 10 residential blocks)
The Contractor shall employ the site personnel as specified in the table below and station them full-time
on site upon the approval from the SO Rep.
The Project Manager, WSHO, ECO, Security Guard and at least 50% of the total number of the
stipulated site supervisors (Arch, structural or M&E) shall be employed and be full time on site from the
commencement date of the contract. The contractor is given up to one month from the commencement
date to deploy the WSH Co-ordinator, Site Clerk and the rest of the site supervisors.
Upon their employment, the site personnel shall be full time on site throughout the construction period
including any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, unless otherwise
Number of Each Type of Personnel to be Employed

Based On Number of Residential Blocks Fully Agreed &
Accepted Rate by
the Contractor &
the Employer For
Type of the Cost &
S/N 11 Blocks 13 Blocks 15 Blocks 17 Blocks 19 Blocks 21 Blocks
Personnel Expense Deemed
to to to to to to to be Allowed by
12 Blocks 14 Blocks 16 Blocks 18 Blocks 20 Blocks 22 Blocks the Contractor for
the Employment of
Each Personnel
$10,000 per
Project
1 One One One One One One Project Manager
Manager
per month
Workplace $7,000 per
Safety & Workplace Safety
2 One One One One One One
Health Officer & Health Officer
(WSHO) per month
$6,000 per
Workplace
Workplace Safety
Safety &
3 One One One One One One & Health Co-
Health Co-
ordinator per
ordinator
month
Site
4a Architectural & Five Six Seven Eight Nine Ten Site Supervisor
Structural per month
Works
Site
4b Mechanical & Two Two Two Two Two Two Site Supervisor
Electrical per month
Works
$5,000 per
Environmental
Environmental
5 Control Officer One One One One One One
Control Officer per
(ECO)
Month
$2,000 per
Security
6 One One One One One One Security Guard
Guard
per month
$2,000 per
7 Site Clerk One One One One One One Site Clerk
per month
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-21
1.1.26.3 Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel
(a) Project Manager
The Contractor's Project Manager shall be qualified, competent and possess the skill, knowledge
and ability to manage and co-ordinate the project effectively. The Project Manager shall be the
Contractor's Representative as required under the Contract.
The Project Manager shall possess the following minimum academic qualifications and
experiences:
(i) For Contract Sum of $50 million and above, the candidate shall have a Degree in
Architecture, Civil / Structural / Electrical / Mechanical Engineering, Construction
Management, Building Science or Quantity Surveying with 3 years of relevant post-
graduate working experience in the building construction industry. The degree shall be
recognized either by the respective Professional Bodies, professional institutions or
Building and Construction Authority.
(ii) For Contract Sum less than $50 million, the candidate shall have:
(a) A degree in Architecture, Civil / Structural / Electrical / Mechanical Engineering,

Construction Management, Building Science or Quantity Surveying with 3 years of
relevant post-graduate working experience in the building construction industry. The
degree shall be recognized by the respective Professional Bodies professional
institutions or Building and Construction Authority; or
(b) A diploma in Architecture, Civil / Structural / Mechanical / Electrical Engineering,

Building Science, Building Management, Construction Management, Building
Services Engineering and at least 8 years of relevant working experience in the
building construction industry. The working experience should preferable be working
on past HDB projects and shall be recognised by HDB as relevant working
experience.
(iii) Irregardless of the contract sum, the Project Manager shall possess a Certificate in
Construction Productivity Management recognized either by the respective Professional
Bodies, professional institutions or Building and Construction Authority. The Project
Manager who is without “Certificate in Construction Productivity Management” shall
attend the course conducted by BCA Academy and obtain it within 12 months upon his
employment at the site. Where there is a need to attend the course conducted by BCA
Academy, the fee will not be reimbursed by HDB.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-22
1.1.26.3 Qualifications/Experience/Responsibilities Of Site Personnel (Cont’d)
(b) Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator/Workplace Safety & Health Officer (WSHO)
The Contractor's Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator shall possess recognised and
approved certification in construction safety to take charge of all matters related to safety. The
said Workplace Safety & Health Co-ordinator shall spend their time fully performing the following:
(i) To supervise safety and promote safety conduct;

(ii) To inspect and rectify any unsafe place of work;
(iii) To correct any unsafe practice; and
(iv) To ensure that the provisions of the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation made thereunder are complied with.
The Contractor shall employ a full-time Workplace Safety & Health Officer to comply with the
requirements under the Workplace Safety & Health Act, Workplace Safety & Health (Workplace
Safety and Health Officers) Regulations. The Workplace Safety & Health Officer shall implement
appropriate safety measures and ensure a safe work environment and safe work procedures in
accordance with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and Subsidiary Legislation including the
provisions of the Workplace Safety & Health (Construction) Regulations 2007 and the
requirements specified under the Contract.
(c) Site Supervisors
The Contractor's Site Supervisors shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant
skills, knowledge and the ability to supervise and co-ordinate the Works; and with any of the
following requirement:
(i) Possess a National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years
of similar capacity relevant working experience in the building construction industry; or
(ii) Possess a recognised Diploma in Architecture / Civil / Structural / Mechanical / Electrical

Engineering, Building Science, Building Management, Building Services Engineering,
Construction Management and at least 3 years of relevant working experience in the
building construction industry; or
(iii) Possess a Degree (foreign university) in Architecture / Civil / Structural/ Mechanical /

Electrical Engineering, Building Services, Construction Management and at least 2 years
of relevant working experience in the local building construction industry ; or
(iv) Relevant working experience of minimum 15 years working in past HDB projects.
Notwithstanding the requirements as specified in (i) to (iv) (inclusive) above, where the
Contractor is required to employ the Site Supervisor for mechanical/electrical Works, the Site
Supervisor must be suitably qualified under the mechanical/electrical engineering academic
qualifications and with the relevant work experiences and also received adequate safety and
health training to ensure that the work which he oversees or supervises can be carried out safely.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(22)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-23
(d) Environmental Control Officer (ECO)
The Contractor shall employ Environmental Control Officer (hereinafter referred to as "ECO" for
the purposes of this subclause) to comply with the Environmental Public Health Act –
Environmental Public Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999. The
ECO shall be employed on a full-time basis where the Contract Sum is above $50 million or on
a part-time basis where the Contract Sum is between $10 million and $50 million. The ECO shall
be responsible for monitoring and advising the Contractor on the following main areas:
(i) Control of disease-bearing vectors and rodents.

(ii) Proper management and disposal of solid waste.
(iii) Control of noise and dust pollution.
(iv) Drainage and silt control.
(v) Air and water pollution control.
(vi) General housekeeping management of the project/Site.
The ECO shall conduct regular site checks and take prompt corrective actions to ensure that the
workers' quarters, canteens, toilets, site offices and other facilities and general surroundings of
the Site are kept clean, tidy and hygienic at all times. In addition, the ECO shall also ensure that
the Site is kept mosquito-free at all times.
The ECO shall possess a “Certificate of Competency (CoC) in Earth Control Measures (ECM)
for Construction Site Personnel”. The ECO who is without “Certificate of Competency (CoC) in
Earth Control Measures (ECM) for Construction Site Personnel” shall attend the course
conducted jointly by PUB and IES (Institute of Engineers Singapore) and obtain it within 6 months
upon his employment at the site.
The ECO shall compile and submit environmental related data to the SO rep upon request. This
data can include:
(i) Water, electricity and diesel consumption on site.

(ii) Concrete wastage on site.
(iii) Amount of construction debris generated on site.
The ECO shall also compile a record of on any checks by the authorities (eg. NEA for noise &
vectors, PUB for ECM) and the result of such checks. This record shall also be submitted to SO
rep upon request.
If the Works have been certified more than 95% completed, the contractor may write to NEA’s
Regional Office to seek approval to allow the ECO to perform on a part-time basis and copied
to SO rep. There shall be no cost recovery from the contractor if NEA is agreeable to allow the
ECO to perform on a part-time basis.
(e) Security Guards
(i) The Contractor shall employ Security Guards from a Security Agency licensed by the
Singapore Police Force with a minimum Grade of “C”. The Contractor shall inform the SO
Rep in writing on the security agency who supplied the Security Guards, within two weeks
from the commencement date of the Time for Completion.
(ii) All Security Guards shall at all times be in proper uniform of their security agency with
their names and identification tags on. Essential security enforcement equipment such as
whistle, torchlight, walkie talkie etc shall be provided to them. They shall respond within
five to ten minutes whenever they are called either through telephone or walkie talkie.
They shall also have the necessary access to the telephone at the Contractor's site office
during and after normal working hours for emergency reporting purpose. The Security
Guards must not be armed with weapons that are disallowed by the Singapore Police
Force.
(iii) A proper guard post with adequate security lighting and communication facilities shall be
erected at every major entrance to the Site. All temporary gates/openings along the
fencing/hoarding shall be guarded by a Security Guard during normal working hours and
locked up after normal working hours.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(23)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-24
(e) Security Guards (Cont’d)
(iv) The Security Guards shall be responsible for the general security of the Site and shall
ensure that unauthorized personnel and vehicles do not entered the Site. They shall also
responsible for the security of the contractor and HDB's site offices during and after
normal working hours.
(v) The Security Guards shall be employed to perform site security duties on a 24 hour basis.
A minimum of one (1) Security Guard shall be on duty at any one shift including Sundays
and public holidays throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. No Security Guard shall leave the
Site until he is properly relieved by a replacement, even if his shift has ended.
(vi) A proper record of the Security Guards' attendance must be kept and made available to
the SO Rep upon request.
(f) Site Clerk
The Contractor shall employ a full-time Site Clerk at the site office to answer all in-coming calls
during office hours and to attend to the clerical works as and when directed by the SO Rep. The
Site Clerk shall be proficient in basic software; and equipped with good public relations skills
and able to handle phone enquiries competently.
This requirement is not required if there are no occupied residential buildings, hospital,
schools, institutions of higher learning, homes for aged sick, etc within 150m from the
construction site.
1.1.26.4 Replacement Of Site Personnel
The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses if any of the site personnel is found not carrying his duties to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
1.1.26.5 Compliance With Requirements And Submission

Of Information Of Site Personnel
(a) The employment of the site personnel shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep within one month from the commencement of works, the
name, identity card numbers and documentary evidence of the educational qualifications and
experience of all the site personnel employed by the Contractor.
(b) In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements and keep records and submit
information to the SO Rep or HDB upon request to show compliance with the requirements.
(i) The Contractor shall keep records indicating the number of days the site personnel are
employed for each month.
(ii) Except for the security guards and safety supervisors, all the site personnel employed
shall be on the Contractor's monthly payroll. The contractor shall keep record of monthly
CPF or levy contributions as proof of employment.
(iii) If any site personnel is found to be working in more than one running site, the particular
site personnel will be barred from working in all the Employer's sites for a period of two
years from the date of the breach. It shall be the Contractor's duty to bring to the attention
of the site personnel the contents of this clause.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(24)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-25
1.1.26.6 Inclusion Of Cost And Failure To Employ The Site Personnel
(a) The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
to be incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
(b) In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site personnel, required by the
Contract or not employing such site personnel for the period or periods required by the Contract,
without prejudice to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted
to the Employer at the rate or rates as specified for each of the respective site personnel per
month and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the
Contractor. These rate or rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the
Contractor and the Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the
employment of each of the respective site personnel for each month.
For the purpose of this clause, each of the site personnel shall be employed by the Contractor
for at least 20 days within a calendar month before he can be considered as being employed for
that particular month under the Contract, except where expressly specified otherwise. In the
event that the first and/or the last calendar month of the Time for Completion or any time period
where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, have less than 20 days, each of the
site personnel shall be employed for the full number of days in the said first and last calendar
month of the Time for Completion or any time period where liquidated damages are imposed
under the Contract.
In the event that the deployment of the site personnel fails to comply with the requirements, the
cost recovery for the period of non-deployment shall be based on the stipulated monthly rates
on pro-rated basis.
(c) Notwithstanding other provisions in this clause, if the Contractor incurs additional costs and
expenses over and above the agreed rates specified herein in complying with the requirements
stipulated in this clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs and expenses in
full.
1.1.26.7 Application For Release Of Site Personnel
The SO Rep may consider a request by the Contractor in writing to release any of his site personnel
from the obligations of this clause if the Works has been certified more than 95% complete. It shall be
up to the absolute discretion of the SO Rep to decide whether the Contractor's site personnel can be
released and the number of site personnel to be released as provided for under this clause. A written
approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained in this respect.
1.1.26.8 Superintending Officer's Decision
All differences and/or disputes arising under this clause including all subclauses under it (including
questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(25)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-26
1.1.27 Contractor's Work in Connection with Subsidiary Contracts
For completed service roads, driveways and drains within the Site contract boundary, the Contractor is
obliged to maintain washing and cleaning; and making good any damage arising from their own actions
to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. If the Contractor fails to carry
out his obligations as aforesaid, the SO Rep may exercise his right under Clause on "Nuisance and
Irregularities' to impose a charge against the Contractor. Alternatively, the SO Rep may engage other
parties to execute the outstanding works and all costs and expenses incurred shall be borne by the
Contractor.
For lift installation works, after taking over of the lift door jambs from the lift contractor, the Contractor
has to schedule and complete all the brickworks (beside the lift door jambs) at all lift walls in a building
block within the stipulated time period as specified below :
Maximum Period for Building Works

Number of storeys
(ie. Brickwork) per building block
Less than or equal to 30 storeys 2.0 weeks
Equal to or higher than 31 storeys 2.6 weeks
The Contractor may use the lifts temporarily for their material hoisting and other works associated with
the preparation for handing over subject to the terms and conditions in his agreement with the relevant
lift contractor.
The Contractor shall be liable for any delay of the building completion arising from the late completion
of the brickwall at the lift lobbies to enable the lift contractor in carrying out the lift assembly works within
the lift shaft at each building block.
1.1.28 Cables/Services Detection
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and have ascertained
its nature and made provision in the Contract Sum or prices for the type of ground conditions, constraints
and underground services.
The Contractor shall provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services
prior to the commencement of excavation or any other work such as driving of piles, piling of earth
electrode and lightning conductors or poles and columns which are liable to damage existing buried
services. The Contractor shall engage EMA licensed cables/services detection workers to carry out all
cables/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or area of other work shall be checked
for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes in a grid formation to cover the
entire area of work.
The extent of checking carried out shall be properly documented and countersigned by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be liable for all costs and charges incurred if he damages any services.
The Contractor shall seek assistance from the relevant Government Department or Statutory Board if
he has any query on the location of existing cables/services belonging to the Government Department
or Statutory Board. In the case of PowerGrid or SPSL cables/services, the Contractor may seek
assistance from the Cable Damage Prevention Unit, PowerGrid or SPSL.
In addition, the Contractor shall engage the services of EMA Registered Excavator Operator only for all
excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ EMA Registered Excavator Operator, no
excavation Works shall be allowed.
1.1.29 Reserved
1.1.30 Damage To Public/Private Property
In the event damage is caused to public/private services or property such as cables, pipes, fittings and
fixtures etc. by the Contractor whether by accident or otherwise leading to black-outs or other nuisance
or inconvenience to the public or is likely to bring the Employer into disrepute, all costs and expenses
incurred for necessary reinstatement or repairs including charges shall be recoverable by the Employer
from the Contractor by deduction from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due
by the Contractor to the Employer.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(26)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-27
1.1.31 General Housekeeping
(a) Periodic Cleaning Up
All rubbish and debris shall be cleared from the Site and buildings under construction at least
weekly or from time to time as they accumulate or when so directed by the SO Rep. Particular
attention shall be directed to those areas where other tradesmen or contractors will be working
in.
Housekeeping shall be carried out in such manner and at such times so as not to cause any
inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to
minimize the risk of dust pollution
(b) Provision Of Bins For Waste And Debris
During the course of construction, the Contractor shall provide proper bulk bins of adequate size
for the proper storage of construction wastes, chemical wastes and debris in compliance with
the relevant legislative requirements or regulations imposed by MEWR.
(c) Dumping Of Debris And Rubbish
The Contractor shall dispose of all unwanted debris, rubble or excess earth at MEWR approved
dumping grounds/sites. All charges levied for the use of the dumping grounds/sites shall be
borne by the Contractor.
If the Contractor indiscriminately dumps construction debris, rubble or excess earth on land
owned by the Employer or the Government without written permission, he shall remove all such
debris, rubble, or excess earth from such land at his own cost and expense. Further to this, SO
Rep may exercise his contractual right and impose an administrative charge for the irregularities
committed in accordance with Clause on “Nuisance And Irregularities”.
1.1.32 Reserved
1.1.33 Time Required For Contractor For Preparation Of Handing Over Inspection
The Contractor shall complete the Works or any phase or sub-phase thereof as set out in the Letter of
Acceptance in accordance to the Time for Completion or any subsequent extensions of time approved
by the Superintending Officer.
All completed Works or any phase or sub-phase thereof shall be handed over to the Employer within or
by the Time for Completion or any subsequent extensions of time approved by the Superintending
Officer, prior to the issue of any Certificate of Substantial Completion.
The Contractor shall note that the Time for Completion has been computed to include the time allowed
for preparation of handing over inspections. Therefore, the duration required for the preparation of and
the handing over inspections shall be incorporated into the Programme for the Works or revised
Programme, if any, to be submitted to the SO Rep for approval, as required under the Contract.
1.1.34 Restriction On Use Of Project Information For Publicity, Etc
The Contractor shall ensure that he or his subcontractors/suppliers do not quote or make reference to
the project design, products, technologies or methods of construction used in the Works for trade
promotion, advertisement, publicity, etc or for any other purposes without the written approval of the SO
Rep. This requirement shall not be applicable to proprietary products, technologies or methods of
construction introduced by the Contractor or his subcontractors/suppliers.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(27)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-28
1.1.35 Provision Of Respiratory Masks
Building contractors are required to provide suitable respirators for their outdoor workers, as well as the
supervising consultants' site staff and HDB officers at the sites, when the haze level at the site reaches
a very unhealthy level with a 24-hr Pollutant Standards Index (PSI) value measured by NEA exceeding
200 or upon appropriate public advisories by NEA
The air-purifying respirators must have an efficiency to filter 95% of 0.3 micron diameter fine particle
size, commonly referred to as N95.
The contractor shall start to purchase and stock up the N95 respiratory masks when the haze condition
is getting into the unhealthy range with the PSI Index value exceeding 100.
1.1.36 Reserved
1.1.37 Reserved
1.1.38 Research Work
The Contractor shall provide and render all necessary assistance to the SO Rep or other authorised
persons conducting research work or procuring publicity materials on any aspects of the construction
Works in progress. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall also provide all brochures,
quotations, sub-contract agreements, invoices, etc from his subcontractors, suppliers and specialists
for goods and services provided for the Works, all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
1.1.39 Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms,

Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
(a) Programme Requirement For Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer

Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
The Contractor is required in the programme for the Works to be submitted under the Contract
and any revised programme to show completion of the following items of works to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep within the time periods specified below :
Item of Works Specified Time Period
a) Pump Rooms a) 3 calendar )

months ) In each case prior to the expiry of the Time for )
Completion, or where there are sections, phases
b) Consumer Switch b) 5 calendar ) or sub-phases, prior to the expiry of the Time )
Rooms months for Completion as specified in the Letter of )
Acceptance for the respective sections, phases
c) Lift Wells c) As specified ) or sub-phases containing the item(s) of works; )
including in the table or by any subsequent extension of time certified )
Machine Rooms marked ## by the Superintending Officer for the completion
hereunder ) of the Works or such sections, phases or sub-phases.
)
d) MDF Room d) 6 calendar ) Prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion, or )
months where there are sections, phases or sub-phases, prior
) to the earliest expiry of the Time for Completion as )
specified in the Letter of Acceptance for the respective
) section, phase or sub-phase containing a residential )
building block or by any subsequent extension of time
) certified by the Superintending Officer for the )
completion of the Works or such section, phase or )
sub-phase containing the residential building block.
)
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(28)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-29
1.1.39 Earlier Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch Rooms,

Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (Cont'd)
(a) Programme Requirement For Completion Of MDF Rooms, Consumer

Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms (Cont'd)
## Specified Time Period for Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms

(In each case prior to the expiry of the Time for Completion, or where there
are sections, phases or sub-phases, prior to the expiry of the Time for
Storey Height Completion as specified in the Letter of Acceptance for the respective
of Building sections, phases or sub-phases containing the item(s) of works; or by any
Block subsequent extension of time certified by the Superintending Officer for the
completion of the Works or such sections, phases or sub-phases)
For Lift stopping at every storey
7 and below 4.50 months (i.e. 3.50 months + 1 month*)
8 to 12 4.75 months (i.e. 3.75 months + 1 month*)
* where the Contractor is required to undertake the temporary usage of tested and commissioned lifts
(installed by others engaged by the Employer) for testing, commissioning of the Works and other
building related Works prior to the certification of Substantial Completion.
This arrangement shall not be construed as giving rise to separate sections, phases or sub-
phases of the Works. If the Contractor fails to complete any of such items of works within the
respective specified time period or if the Superintending Officer shall certify in writing that in his
opinion the Contractor despite previous warning by the SO Rep in writing fails to proceed with
any of such items of works with due expedition and without delay, the Employer may himself
complete such item or items of works or may employ any other contractors to complete such
item(s) of works.
All costs and expenses for such completion including the Employer's charges shall be recovered
by the Employer from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor under the Contract or may
be recovered by the Employer as a debt due from the Contractor without prejudice to any other
remedies available to the Employer. In the event of the Employer completing any such item(s) of
works, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of the Time for Completion or to any
loss or expense in connection with or in consequence of the Employer carrying out such item(s)
of works.
The Defects Liability Period in respect of any such item(s) of works (whether completed by the
Contractor or the Employer) shall not commence until the Substantial Completion of the
respective sections, phases, or sub-phases in which such item(s) of works is (are) included.
(b) Payment In Connection With Work On MDF Rooms, Consumer Switch

Rooms, Pump Rooms And Lift Wells Including Machine Rooms
The Employer and Contractor agree that five per cent of the value of the building part of the
Works as indicated by the Contractor in the Form of Tender or as amended by the Employer
(if applicable) is deemed to be the value of the items of works representing the MDF Rooms,
Consumer/Switch Rooms, Pump Rooms and Lift Wells including Machine Rooms irrespective of
whether the Works include all or only one or more of such items of works. At any time during the
carrying out of the Works, if in the opinion of the Superintending Officer, the progress of the
Works is such that the Contractor is unable or unlikely to complete such Rooms and Lift Wells
within the Specified Time Period for any of such Rooms and Lift Wells, the Superintending Officer
shall be empowered to exclude from any certificate issued under Clause 32.2 of the Conditions
up to five per cent of the said value of the building part of the Works. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to comply with the
requirements of this subclause or clause. For the avoidance of doubt no such sum shall be
excluded from the Final Account Certificate.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(29)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-30
1.1.40 Handing Over Of Completed Works And Certification Of Substantial Completion
(a) The Works can be considered as substantially completed only upon:
(i) Obtaining a Temporary Occupation Permit and a Temporary Fire Permit; and
(ii) Successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and the
Employer’s Inspection Team.
(b) The Contractor shall conduct thorough inspections of the Works to ensure that all Defects are
rectified and the Works have been completed to fully meet the requirements of the Contract and
the workmanship standards as displayed in the approved Sample Units or Sample Panels before
the handing over inspection by the SO Rep and the Employer’s Inspection Team.
(c) The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep in advance to request for a handing over inspection and
the following functional tests:
% of Units To Be
S/N Type Of Test Tested Per Block
1 Chokage Test For Main And Secondary Stack Pipe 100 %
2 Leakage Test For Refuse Chute Flushing System 100%
3 Water Pipe Pressure For Concealed Pipes 10% of Total DU
4 Gradient Test For house Drains 100%
5 Gradient Test For House Sewer Lines 100%
6 Water Test For Main Roof 100%
7 Water Test For Scupper Drains 100%
8 Watertightness Test For Window/Wall Joints Min 5 Windows
9 Watertightness Test For Precast Wall Joints Min 10 Joints
10 Water Test For Toilet And Kitchen 25% of Total DU
Upon receipt of the Contractor’s request, the SO Rep shall arrange for a joint inspection date
with the Employer’s Inspection Team. The Employer’s Inspection Team shall be present to
witness the functional tests. In the event the tests fail to meet the requirements of the Contract,
the Contractor shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and without
delay and arrange for re-tests in accordance with the requirements under the Contract.
(d) If the Works are considered to have met the requirements of the Contract including the approved
workmanship standards and there is no major Defect detected during the handing over
inspection, the Works shall then be taken over by the Employer’s Inspection Team. Otherwise,
the SO Rep shall give the Contractor a list of outstanding Defect for rectification. The Contractor
shall proceed to rectify the Defect with due diligence and expedition and without delay. The
Contractor’s liability to rectify the Defect under this subclause shall not be limited to the list of
Defect given by the SO Rep, but shall include all other Defect surfaced in between the handing
over inspections. Upon completion of the Defect rectification, the Contractor shall notify the SO
Rep in writing that all outstanding Defect found in the inspection, as well as all apparent Defect
surfaced in between the handing over inspections have been rectified and to request for another
handing over inspection. The provision of the preceding sub clause (c) above shall apply, mutatis
mutandis.
(e) If the Contractor is unable to hand over the Works to the Employer after two handing over
inspections, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause on “Nuisance and Irregularities”.
(f) The Contractor shall on Substantial Completion of the Works, remove all rubbish, Construction
Equipment and surplus materials, wash and scrub clean all floors, staircases, pavings, drains
and all parts of the buildings and leave the Works in a clean and hygienic condition fit
for habitation. The Site and periphery shall be cleared of all rubbish left from the Contractor's
work.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(30)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-31
1.1.41 Reserved
1.1.42 Management Of Defects Rectification
1.1.42.1 Employment And Deployment of Site Supervisor
The Contractor shall employ and deploy the number of site supervisors full time on the Site for every
day where Defect rectification Works is carried out during the Defects Liability Period (DLP) as specified
hereunder :
No. Of Site Supervisors For Architectural And

Total No of Dwelling Units
Structural Defect Rectification Works
Less than 800 One
Equal or more than 800 Two
The Contractor's site supervisor shall be qualified and competent and possess the relevant skills,
knowledge and the ability to co-ordinate and supervise the Defect investigation and rectification Works;
and possess either one of the following academic qualifications and experience:
(a) National Certificate in Construction Supervision (NCCS) and at least 5 years of similar capacity
relevant working experience in the building construction industry;
(b) Recognized Diploma in Civil/Structural/Mechanical/Electrical Engineering, Building Science,

Building Management, Building Services Engineering and at least 3 years of relevant working
experience in the building construction industry;
The SO Rep shall be empowered to instruct the Contractor for a replacement at the Contractor's own
cost and expense if any of the site supervisor is found not carrying out their duties to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
In the event of the Contractor not employing the number of site supervisors required by the Contract or
not employing such site supervisors for the period or periods required by the Contract, without prejudice
to the Employer's rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate
of $133/- per day per site supervisor not employed and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the
Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as
a debt from the Contractor. This rate shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the
Contractor and the Employer as the cost and expense allowed by the Contractor for the employment of
a site supervisor for each day.
Notwithstanding other provisions in this subclause, if the Contractor incurs additional cost and expense
over and above the agreed rate specified herein in complying with the requirements stipulated in this
subclause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional cost and expense in full.
On expiry of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor may put forth a written request to the SO Rep
for the release of the site supervisor. A written approval from the SO Rep shall be obtained with this
request.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(31)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-32
1.1.42 Management Of Defects Rectification (Cont’d)
1.1.42.2 Standby Plumber And Electrician For Restoring Essential Services
(a) The Contractor shall also provide a stand-by plumber and a stand-by electrician for 24 hour
stand-by duties for every day, including Sundays and Public Holidays, throughout the Defects
Liability Period. The plumber and electrician need not be stationed on the Site but would be
called upon to rectify Defect causing disruption to essential supply such as water and electricity
(b) The Contractor or his representatives shall be contactable 24 hours a day, for every day,
including Sundays and Public Holidays throughout the Defects Liability Period by means of
telephone, handphone, radio pager, facsimile or any other suitable modes of communications
(c) The stand-by plumber and/or stand-by electrician shall attend to such Defect within 30 minutes
from the time a request for their services is made. They shall carry out the rectification
expeditiously and in a workmanlike manner to restore the essential services quickly to minimise
any inconveniences to the residents. In the event the stand-by plumber and/or stand-by
electrician fail to attend or fail to attend within the time frame stipulated, the SO Rep shall exercise
his right to impose charges under clause on 'Nuisance and Irregularities".
1.1.42.3 Information of Key Personnel
Within fourteen days from the Date of Substantial Completion of the 1st building block, the Contractor
shall submit to the SO Rep for his approval the following:
(a) Name and contact numbers of the Contractor's key management staff and the appointed site
supervisors for Defect investigation and rectification Works within the Defects Liability Period;
(b) Name and contact numbers of the relevant manufacturers, suppliers and specialist contractors
etc.,
(c) Name and contact numbers of the stand-by plumber and stand-by electrician.
1.1.42.4 Defects Investigation And Rectification During Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall within fourteen working days from the date of written notification by the SO Rep,
at the Contractor's own cost and expense, investigate, repair, rectify and make good to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep all Defect, imperfections, shrinkages and other faults arising from or out of the use of
materials or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract or from neglect or failure of the Contractor
to comply with any obligation on his part under the Contract which may become manifest.
Prior to the commencement of any Defect rectification Works, the Contractor shall submit the schedule
of repair and method statement for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall mobilise only
skilled and certified workers who are capable of executing the Works in accordance with the method
statement as approved by the SO Rep. All Works must be attended to and supervised in person by the
appointed site supervisor.
Dust and noise must be minimised, whenever possible and cleaning up must be carried out daily if the
unit is occupied and/or after the repairs. Inconvenience caused to others should be minimised by
completing the Defect rectification Works in the shortest possible time.
If the Contractor fails to carry out his obligations as aforesaid, the SO Rep may exercise his rights under
Clause on "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.
Without prejudice to the foregoing provisions, the SO Rep shall have the right to engage other persons
or contractors to repair, rectify and make good all such Defect, imperfections, shrinkages and other
faults if the same are not repaired, rectified and made good after fourteen working days from the date
of written notification by the SO Rep, and the cost and expense incurred shall be recovered from the
Contractor. In addition, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under clause on "Nuisance And
Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(32)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-33
1.1.42 Management Of Defects Rectification (Cont’d)
1.1.42.5 Rectification of Defects Prior To Issuance Of Final Completion Certificate
For the purpose of certifying completion of Defect rectification prior to the issuance of the Final
Completion Certificate, one month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor
shall arrange with the HDB Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed
after this joint inspection shall be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from
the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. A second final joint inspection shall be arranged to verify
the completion of Defect rectification.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final joint inspection, the SO
Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause on "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against
the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep shall in addition have the right to engage his
own workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and
charges imposed shall be recovered from the Contractor.
1.1.42.6 Protection to Lift Interior During Defect Liability Period
The contractor shall provide protection to all interior finishes of lift car in residential blocks and MSCP.
6mm thick veneer plywood shall be used to protect the lift car walls and top while 12mm thick veneer
plywood shall be used to protect the lift car base. Handrails protection shall be made of cloth tape or
masking tape.
The contractor shall seek BSC or Town Council approval before the removal of lift car protection. If the
Contractor fails to rectify and make good any defects, the employer reserved the rights to exercise his
rights under Clause on “Nuisance and Irregularities” to impose charges against the Contractor.
1.1.43 Precautionary Measures To Be Taken During A Disease Pandemic
The contractor shall be required to implement necessary precautionary measures as advised by

Ministry of Health or other relevant Authorities during a disease pandemic. Based on the
recommendations from government's advisory, the contractor shall follow up expeditiously to plan for
such contingency and stock up necessary supplies or equipment (e.g. thermometers) so as to be able
to implement the required measures in a short notice.
1.1.44 Works Within Railway Protection Zone And Railway Safety Zone
The Contractor shall comply with the Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice for Railway
Protection and the Mass Rapid Transit (Rail Protection, Restricted Activities) Regulations for
construction of the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone and railway safety zone.
The Contractor shall submit proposals on the effective measures for the protection of MRT above
ground structure together with the detail of activities of mobile cranes, tower cranes and other
mechanical equipment adjacent to the MRT line structures to the SO Rep for approval at least one
month prior to the use of such Construction Equipment. No jib or lifting appliance or any other moving
or stationary part of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall encroach within 6.0 m on plan from
the edge of the nearest MRT above-ground or at-grade structure unless the Construction Equipment is
restricted to work beneath the structure. The foundation of the mechanical Construction Equipment shall
be certified structurally sound and adequate by the Contractor's PE prior to its installation.
Auto cut-off system shall be installed for tower cranes to prevent the top of the boom to swing closer
than 6.0 m from edge of the viaduct structure. The jibs of the cranes must always be pointed away from
the MRT line structure. The temporary access shall be stable and level for the Construction Equipment
to move on. Regular checks shall be carried out to ensure that all mechanised Construction Equipment
are in good working condition at all times. Only experienced, trained and competent operators shall be
employed for mobile cranes, tower cranes and other mechanical equipment. Temporary height
restriction gantry with signboard shall be installed 6.0 m away from the edge of both sides of the viaduct
structure for any access passing underneath the MRT line structures.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(33)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-34
1.1.45 Recovery Of Legal Costs For Court Proceedings
All legal costs, charges and expenses (including but not limited to solicitors' fees as between solicitor
and client) incurred by the Employer for the purpose of or incidental to the enforcement by the Employer
of any rights and remedies under the Contract or any other contracts between the Employer and the
Contractor or in respect of any garnishee proceedings which may be brought or commenced against
the Employer by the Contractor's creditors may be deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor including any retention monies, financial bonds or security deposits or
other bonds.
1.1.46 Novation, Assignment And Direct Submission Of Warranties And Agreements
In the event the management and maintenance of the Employer's properties or the Works or any part
thereof shall be taken over by a duly constituted Town Council, the Employer shall have the right to
arrange for and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable) shall agree and accept to the whole or
part of the Contract to be novated and/or assigned to the aforesaid Town Council upon the same terms
and conditions.
The Employer shall also have the right to require and the Contractor and his Specialist (if applicable)
shall agree and accept that any Deeds of Warranty and/or Maintenance Agreements and/or Bonds
and/or Deposits required under the Contract shall be executed and submitted direct to and for the
benefit of the aforesaid Town Council.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs, expenses, stamp duties
and losses arising from compliance with these provisions.
1.1.47 Completion Of Site Works
The Contractor shall take note that Site Works refer to all site structures/facilities, such as, but not
limited to, children playground/hard courts/footpaths and landscaping works, such as earth mound
formation, turfing, trees and shrubs planting where included in the Works.
Facilities and landscape works shall be planned, co-ordinated and completed in stages in the following
manner:
(a) When a group of blocks has been handed over, landscape works and facilities around the group
shall also be completed and opened for public use 1 month after the last block of the group is
handed over. The table below shows the number of stage completion required based on the
number of residential blocks in the contract.
No. of Residential Blocks Number of Stage for Completion of

Site Works
1-4 1
5-9 2
>9 3
The stages of site works to be completed shall be planned by the Contractor and submitted to
the SO Rep for approval.
(b) MSCP roof garden shall also be opened for public use not later than the completion of stage 1
in the table above.
In the event the Contractor fails to complete the above to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and the
Employer, the SO Rep may exercise his right under Clause on “Nuisance & irregularities” by imposing
demerit points and administrative charges on the Contractor.
Roof garden and/or landscape deck of a residential block shall be handed over together with the block.
If the Contractor fails to handover the roof garden and/or landscape deck together with the residential
block by the Time for Completion or any subsequent extension of time approved by the Superintending
Officer, the rate of liquidated damages for the whole phase as stipulated in the Appendix shall be
imposed for every day the Works for the phase so remains incomplete.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(34)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-35
1.1.48 Erection Of Temporary Buildings
In addition to the submission of the site layout plan, the Contractor shall further submit detailed structural
plans and design calculations, certified by his PE, for temporary buildings of two storeys or higher, to
the SO Rep not later than three months from the commencement date of the Time for Completion or 2
weeks before the actual commencement of the Works for such proposals whichever is earlier. The
Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission.
His PE may make use of the Drawings in the Standard Construction Detail Manual as a guide to the
design and submission of the temporary buildings in compliance with the Technical Guidelines for the
Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Sites, including any amendment thereto, issued by
FSSD; and the Building Control (Temporary Buildings) Regulations (2000 edition) including any latest
requirements by BCD, BCA.
The Contractor shall erect all such temporary buildings in strict compliance with his Professional
Engineer's plans and calculations. The Works shall be supervised by the Contractor's PE.
Not later than two weeks after the completion of the Works, the Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate
of Supervision, stating that he has carried out such supervision work and is fully satisfied that the Works
have been constructed in accordance with his structural plans and design calculations as approved by
the SO Rep.
1.1.49 Goods and Services Tax
The Contractor shall not include in the rates and prices quoted in the Contract Sum, the GST chargeable
for the supply of goods, services or Works required in the Contract. All rates and prices quoted shall be
exclusive of the GST.
The Employer shall reimburse the Contractor any GST charged on the goods, services or Works
supplied.
The Contractor shall declare his GST status in his Tender. The Contractor shall clearly indicate whether
he is, or whether he will be a taxable person under the GST Act. The Contractor shall, if available,
furnish the GST registration number to the Employer.
The Contractor will be deemed to be a taxable person if no declaration to the contrary is made in the
Form of Tender. The Contractor who declares himself to be a non-taxable person under the GST Act
but who becomes a taxable person after he has been awarded the contract shall forthwith inform the
Employer of his change in GST status. The Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement by the
Employer of any GST charged on the goods, services or Works he supplies after his change in GST
status.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(35)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-36
1.1.50 Works And Materials Warranty
(a) In every case where the Specifications require the Contractor's Specialist to co-warrant the
Works and/or materials to be executed or supplied under the Contract, such Specialist, subject
to such other requirements as may be prescribed in the Specifications, may only be employed
by the Contractor with the Employer's prior written approval, and the Employer will approve such
employment if the Specialist gives his written undertaking to execute the Deed of Warranty
prescribed in the Specifications. If such written undertaking is not given, then the Contractor
shall appoint an alternative Specialist willing to give the written undertaking. The employment of
any Specialist who refuses to give his written undertaking will not be recognised by the Employer,
and no Specialist may commence any work or supply any materials before his written
undertaking is given.
(b) The Employer's prior written approval of such Specialist's employment shall not in any way affect
or diminish the Contractor's contractual obligations to the Employer in respect of any Works or
materials executed or supplied by such Specialist on behalf of the Contractor, and the provisions
of this subclause shall not in any way affect or diminish the Employer's entitlement to withhold
the payment of any sums due to the Contractor by reason of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's
failure to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified.
1.1.51 Cost Of Water And Electricity
The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate supply of water and electricity for the Site including
for the purposes of conducting tests on the Works. Where directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall
provide and allow other contractors on the Site employed by the Employer, free and unrestricted use of
the water and electricity for carrying out testing and commissioning of such other contractors' works.
The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses for the water and electricity consumed at the Site
including the cost of water and electricity consumed for carrying out testing and commissioning by such
other contractors employed by the Employer on the Site. Where applicable, the SO Rep may at his
sole discretion, direct the Contractor to transfer the account for the water and electricity supply to the
Employer or such Town Council(s) or such other party. The Contractor shall be deemed to have
included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses to be incurred by him for compliance with the
requirements stipulated in this subclause.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(36)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-37
1.1.52 Site Control And Security
1.1.52.1 Identification Pass
The Contractor shall provide serially-numbered security identification pass to each of his workers and
subcontractors' workers. The identification pass shall consist of the worker's photograph, name,
identification card number or passport number and name of the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue
temporary entry pass, on a day to day basis, to workers from other contractors employed by the
Employer or other Government/Statutory Board authorities or other companies carrying out works on
the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling and issuing these security identification passes and
temporary entry passes. The Contractor shall maintain an updated list of the passes issued for
accountability and to facilitate enforcement checks. The Contractor shall ensure that all workers on the
Site wear and display their passes prominently and securely at all times while working on the Site.
1.1.52.2 Erection And Removal Of Temporary Metal Hoarding
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a continuous metal
hoarding around the entire contract boundary before the commencement of the Works. The hoardings
shall be erected at not less than 300mm away from any permanent structure such as footway, drain,
pipeline etc.
The Contractor shall refer to the drawings for the location and type of hoardings to be used. Should the
Contractor fail to comply with this requirement, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose any action
deemed necessary and any cost and expense incurred thereof including charges shall be recoverable
from the Contractor.
As and when instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove, relocate, reconstruct all or part of
the hoardings and reinstate all the affected grounds to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the cost and
expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit a complete set of workshop drawings to be endorsed by his PE and
The Contractor shall provide metal gates/doors for the main and side entrances. Location of these
entrances shall be approved by the SO Rep. There shall be a maximum of two entry points for the
entire Site, unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep. The metal gate at the main entrance (for
vehicular traffic) shall be closed and locked up after working hours when construction activities have
stopped. A side entrance beside the main gate shall be provided for passage of workers and visitors
that can be monitored by the Security Officers. These entrances/gates and the perimeter shall be well-
lit during the hours of darkness (7.00 pm to 7.00 am).
(a) The following minimum requirements for the flat panel hoardings shall be complied with:
(i) Contractor shall use a minimum of 0.60mm thick steel with zinc/aluminium alloy coating
for the metal hoardings. All exposed metal sheet surfaces of the metal hoardings shall be
finished with paint coating.
(ii) The full height of the hoardings shall be 6m which comprises of an overhang roofing that
has a vertical height of 1m. There will be no netting (as shown in the drawings).
(iii) Corrugated panel shall be used for the overhang roofing.
(iv) There shall be no struts at the exterior of the hoardings where it is visible to the public.
(v) The colour for the flat/corrugated panel hoardings and the overhang roofing must either
be white or off-white. For example, if white is selected, Contractor to ensure that it is
consistently applied throughout the project site.
(b) The following minimum requirements for the corrugated panel hoardings shall be complied with:
(i) Contractor shall use a minimum of 0.42mm thick steel with zinc/aluminium alloy coating
for the metal hoarding. All exposed metal sheet surfaces of the metal hoardings shall be
finished with paint coating.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(37)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-38
1.1.52 Site Control And Security (Cont’d)
1.1.52.2 Erection And Removal Of Temporary Metal Hoarding (Cont’d)
(ii) The full height of the hoardings shall be 4m with no overhang roofing and no netting (as
shown in the drawings):
(iii) The colour for the flat/corrugated panel hoardings and the overhang roofing must either
be white or off-white. For example, if white is selected, contractor to ensure that it is
consistently applied throughout the project site.
The Contractor shall use timber posts and horizontal bracings of common grade timber under strength
Group A of Singapore Standard CP 7 and/or steel members of Grade S275.
A minimum of Grade 30 concrete foundations shall be used.
‘DANGER - KEEP OUT', 'NO TRESPASSING' and ‘WORK IN PROGRESS’ signages in four official
languages are to be displayed on the exterior side of the hoardings. These signages should be printed
using the template provided and only mounted on the corrugated hoardings where required and not on
the flat panel hoardings. The size of these signboards is specified in the drawings.
The position of the lightings is critical in achieving a professional look and feel for the entire project.
The lightings (fluorescent tube lights) shall not be installed on the design panel to avoid covering the
messages or community photos on the hoardings design panels, but shall be located above it instead.
The Contractor is to ensure that the hoardings erected is illuminated adequately to requirements, or as
and when instructed by SO Rep.
The hoardings and gates shall be maintained at all times to ensure no deterioration of the structures
and fading of the paint works throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract.
On satisfactory Substantial Completion of the Works, the hoardings shall be cleared away upon the
1.1.53 Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather
The assessment of exceptionally inclement weather shall not take place until the expiry of the Time for
Completion or previously extended Time for Completion. Such assessment shall be made on the
following basis :
(a) There shall first be assessed the number of wet days and equivalent wet days (as specified in
paragraph (f) below) on which the Contractor has been substantially delayed in the carrying out
of the Works by rain (hereinafter called "delay days").
(b) A wet day shall be one where the rainfall figure as calculated as described in this paragraph
exceeds 10.2 mm during the 24 hour period used by the Meteorological Service. The rainfall
figure shall be the average island-wide rainfall calculated by the Employer using rainfall records
received by the Employer monthly from the 5 Standard Stations of the Meteorological Service.
(c) The expected number of wet days during the Time for Completion or extended Time for
Completion as the case may be shall be derived from the following table which is deemed to
record the average number of wet days for the respective months based on the Meteorological
Service's records between 2006 and 2015 (hereinafter referred to as "expected wet days"):
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun

7 4 9 9 6 5
Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
6 7 7 7 11 10
(d) For each month of the Time for Completion or extended Time for Completion as the case may
be there shall be assessed whether the number of delay days in that month is more than
(positive) or equal to (zero) or less than (negative) the expected wet days in that month.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(38)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-39
1.1.53 Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due To Exceptionally Inclement Weather (Cont’d)
(e) The positive, zero and negative monthly assessments made in accordance with paragraph (d)
above shall then be added together and a net total reached. If such total is a positive number
then such total shall constitute the extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather.
(f) The period commencing from excavation works to the completion of ground beams where the
ground floor slab is not a critical activity or the completion of ground floor slab where the ground
floor slab is a critical activity is hereinafter called "sub-structure construction period" and the
works carried out during such period is hereinafter called "sub-structure works".
For the assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather during the sub-
structure construction period, the respective monthly average number of wet days as specified
in paragraph (b) above shall be multiplied by a factor of 2.0 if the wet days are less than or equal
to 5 or by a factor of 1.6 if the wet days exceed 5. The product so derived shall be referred to
as "equivalent wet days" and are subject to a maximum of 30 days per month.
(g) If the sub-structure works do not commence on the first day of the month, then the number of
equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works commence shall be pro-
rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days for the construction of
sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in the said month.
Similarly, if the sub-structure works are not completed on the last calendar day of the month,
then the number of equivalent wet days for that month in which the sub-structure works are
completed shall be pro-rated in accordance with the proportion of the number of calendar days
for the construction of sub-structure works in that month to the total number of calendar days in
the said month. The assessment of extension of time due to exceptionally inclement weather
during the sub-structure construction period shall be based on the actual sub-structure
construction period of each building block, including multi-storey carpark / garage.
1.1.54 Shortfall In Floor Area
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense ensure that the flats constructed comply in all respects
with all Drawings and Specifications. In the event of any departure from such Drawings and
Specifications resulting in a shortfall in the floor area of any of the flats constructed as compared to the
same floor area as measured in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall
indemnify, reimburse and hold the Employer harmless in respect of any demands, claims, damages,
loss and/or expense (including any legal fees and expense that the Employer may incur) arising
therefrom. The Contractor shall remain so liable notwithstanding the issuance by the Superintending
Officer of any Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Completion Certificate and/or any Final
Account Certificate under the Contract.
1.1.55 Registered Trade Subcontractors And M&E Subcontractors
The contractor must ensure that their appointed first-level sub-contractors have valid Building and
construction Authority (BCA) or Ministry of Finance (MOF) registration at the time of appointment. If the
appointed first-level sub-contractor is registered with BCA, the contractor must ensure that the
appointed first-level sub-contractor is registered under the appropriate BCA workhead. The list of BCA
workheads can be obtained from BCA website at :
http://www.bca.gov.sg/ContractorsRegistry/contractors_registration_requirements.html
The first level electrical sub contractor appointed by the contractor must be minimum BCA Financial
Grade L4.
At least 14 days before the commencement of the Works by the subcontractors for the respective
trades, the Contractor shall submit the name of his subcontractors for the Works to the SO Rep. Where
the Contractor changes his subcontractor, he shall also submit such information to the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any eventual delay in the progress of the Works owing to his
failure to ensure the required on-time registration of his subcontractors and no extension to the Time
for Completion shall be granted on account of such delays.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(39)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-40
1.1.56 Insurance Policies
The Contractor shall warrant that the insurance policies issued in accordance with Clauses 27 and 28
of the Conditions shall include the following requirements :
(a) Insurance For Work Injury Compensation
(i) The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form as produced in Appendix A11.
(ii) The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-
contractors, and the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".
(iii) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
Contractor and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
The Policy shall firstly cover the whole of the original Time for Completion plus 6 months
and plus a further 12 months for Defects Liability Period.
(b) Insurance For Personal Injury And Property Damage
(i) The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and all his
sub-contractors.
(ii) The limits of liability shall be read as follows :
(a) In respect of any one accident : $2,000,000.00

(b) Unlimited for the period of insurance
(iii) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
(iv) The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read
30 days.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(40)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-41
1.1.56 Insurance Policies (Cont’d)
(b) Insurance For Personal Injury And Property Damage (Cont’d)
(v) The Policy shall expressly include coverage of the following risks :
(a) Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by the Insured's
sub-contractors or by such sub-contractors' employees.
(b) Death, bodily injury or damage to property caused or occasioned by or connected

with or arising from the ownership, possession or use by or on behalf of the Insured
of any equipment or machinery not expressly specified in the Schedule of such
equipment or machinery.
(c) Liability assumed by the Insured by agreement, unless such liability would have
attached to the Insured notwithstanding such agreement.
(d) Liability in respect of loss or damage to property belonging to or in the charge or

control of the Insured or of any servant or agent of the Insured.
(e) Liability in respect of injury to or illness of any person or loss or damage to any
property or land or building caused by vibration or removal or weakening of support.
(f) Liability in respect of injury, illness, loss or damage caused by or connected with
or arising from any commodity, article or thing supplied, repaired, altered or treated
by or to the order of the Insured, happening at any of the Insured's premises.
(vi) The Policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements :
(a) "This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's insurance obligations with regard to
personal injuries or death and injury or damage to property real or personal
(including property of the Housing & Development Board but not the Works
themselves) arising out of or in the course of or by reasons of the carrying out of
the Works stated in the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and
the Contractor (name of Contractor to insert)"
(b) "Each of the parties comprising the Insured shall for the purpose of this Policy be
considered as a separate and distinct unit and the words "the Insured" shall be
considered as applying to such party in the same manner as if a separate policy
had been issued to each of the parties and the insurers hereby agree to waive all
rights of subrogation action which they may have or acquire against any of the
aforesaid parties arising out of any accident in respect of which any claim is made
hereunder provided nevertheless that nothing in this clause shall be deemed to
increase the limitation on extent of Insurer's liability in respect of any one accident
or series of accidents as stated in the Schedule".
(c) "This Policy is extended to cover the employees and/or representatives of the
Housing & Development Board, consultants, other professional parties and
Resident Technical Officer whilst on the contract site as third parties".
(d) "Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the
Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor
on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event
of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things
reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the
Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".
(e) "All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(41)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-42
1.1.56 Insurance Policies (Cont’d)
(c) Insurance For Works
(i) The Policy shall be issued in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor.
(ii) The Works insured shall read the project title given in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance.
(iii) The sum insured shall be the same as the Contract Sum.
(iv) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the Site is handed over to the
(v) The period of notice for cancellation of the Policy, if such period is stipulated, shall read
30 days.
(vi) The policy shall expressly contain the following endorsements :
(a) "This Policy shall cover all the Contractor's Works insurance obligations stated in
the Contract between the Housing & Development Board and the Contractor (name
of Contractor to insert)".
(b) "Notwithstanding anything stated in the Policy to the contrary, cover under the
Policy shall not be suspended in the event of stoppage of work by the Contractor
on the contract site from any cause for a period not exceeding 90 days. In the event
of partial or total cessation of work, the Insured shall use diligence and do all things
reasonably practicable to protect the insured property. Subject otherwise to the
Terms Exceptions and Conditions of this Policy".
(c) "All deductibles shall be borne by the Contractor".
1.1.57 Contract Documents And Reference Material On Site
The Contractor shall keep at the Site a complete set of the signed contract documents described in the
Agreement, a complete set of the further or revised Drawings and instructions referred to in the
Conditions, and the relevant Codes Of Practice or Standards referred to in the Specifications. These
documents shall be made available for inspection and use by the Superintending Officer, SO Rep and
any other person authorised by the Superintending Officer in writing.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(42)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-43
1.1.58 Provision Of Building Service Centre
The Contractor shall provide an operationally ready Building Service Centre (BSC) upon the handover
of the first residential building block of the Works. The Building Service Centre shall remain open during
the Defects Liability Period for a period of 1 year from the date of the handover of the first residential
building block in the Works. The Contractor shall liaise with the Employer's Representative for a suitable
location within the Site at the void deck to host the Building Service Centre at least 2 months before the
estimated handover date of the first residential building block. The minimum room size of BSC is 20m2.
The Contractor shall use materials that are non-combustible and water-resistant properties to enclose
the BSC. Provision of metal gate in front of the aluminium framed glass door is required. The plan layout
of the items such as furniture, equipment within the BSC shall be submitted to Employer’s
Representative for comments before setting up. The Contractor shall also provide and install a wall
decal (a form of wall sticker) inside the BSC, on the wall facing the entrance. Wall decal has to be at
least 3.5m x 2.5m in dimension without major furniture obstructing the wall decal. Guide design (in PSD
format) will be provided by Employer, any other design of the wall decal has to be submitted to
Employer’s Representative for approval.
The Contractor shall employ a full-time staff to manage the Building Service Centre and attend to
resident's feedback and complaints. The staff hired must have the relevant working experience in
building trade and with educational qualifications with a minimum pass in at least 2 subjects at GCE 'A'
levels or a Diploma in Civil Engineering/Building/Architecture. The staff shall be bi-lingual and have a
pleasant personality and friendly disposition. The Curriculum Vitae of the staff shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for approval prior to the confirmation of employment of the staff by the
Contractor. The working hours of the staff shall be decided by the Employer’s Representative and is to
be taken into consideration in the employment contract of the staff. The Employer’s Representative
shall reserve the right to increase the number of staff managing the Building Service Centre by way of
a variation order.
The Building Service Centre shall be equipped with air conditioner of minimum 10,000 BTU output, a
minimum of 2 office desks with lockable drawers, 1.7m x 0.8m x 0.4m steel cabinet complete with
shelves and double-leave doors, 1 printer, 1 colour scanner, 1 photostating machine, 1 fax machine,
telephone with call waiting service, auto-message and voice recording machine with 120-hour recording
time, 40W fluorescent lighting, a 1 digital camera, torch lights, chairs , 0.3m x 0.3m aluminium
suggestion box, 2.4m x 1.2m soft board and white board with accessories, hot & cold drinking water
dispenser, drawing rack complete with drawing holders, timber shelves to display HDB’s renovation
guide booklets and catalogue, 2 potted plants and office stationary.
The Contractor shall subscribe to e-PTC e-mail account and pay prevailing subscription charges for the
duration that the Building Service Centre remains open.
The Contractor shall provide and install a signboard at least 1.4m x 1.0m before starting the operation
of the Building Service Centre. The design of the signboard shall be submitted to Employer's
Representative for approval.
The Contractor is also to provide and install two notice boards at the Building Service Centre. Each
notice board shall be of size: 1.8 m x 1.2 m with aluminium casing and aluminium frame door in-filled
with 5mm thick clear polycarbonate sheet.
Associated hinges, locksets including softboard with velvet finish and plywood to be provided and
installed. The notice boards are to be lighted with necessary lightings and wirings.
The Contractor is to maintain (e.g remove stain, markings, etc) and rectify, repair or replace the notice
board if there are wear and tear and/or damages. The rectified, repaired or replaced notice boards are
subject to the approval of HDB. The location of the notice boards shall be subjected to the approval of
HDB.
The Contractor shall pay for all rental and associated ancillary charges incurred by the Building Service
Centre during the period of operation including all utility bills for water, electricity and registration and
subscription charges for telephone, fax, internet broadband access, directional signboards guiding
residents to locate the BSC at various blocks, resident’s defects feedback forms, service survey forms
and BSC’s leaflets.
After closing the Service Centre, the Contractor shall reinstate and make good any Defect to the Works.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(43)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-44
1.1.59 Prohibition Of Dogs in Construction Sites
The Contractor shall not rear or keep dogs at the Site for any purposes or under any circumstances
whether or not the dogs are licensed with Agri-Food & Veterinary Authority of Singapore (AVA). The
feeding of stray dogs beyond contract boundary by any site personnel is also prohibited.
The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with this requirement and shall take the necessary
measures which include but not limited to the followings:
(a) Providing designated waste bins with covers for food waste disposal at canteens, worker
quarters, worker rest, recreation areas and other areas where workers will likely take their meals.
The waste bins should remain closed at all times to prevent dogs from foraging the disposed
food.
(b) Ensuring that the waste collector remove the food waste from the Site on a daily basis.
(c) Putting up notices at prominent areas within the Site as well as on the external face of the
hoarding to remind workers and members of the public not to feed stray dogs. Should the Site
has a canteen, the contractor shall also instruct the canteen operator to comply with the
requirement of “no feeding or keeping of dogs at the Site”.
(d) Having a system of regular site checks which should also cover the secluded spots within the
Sites where stray dogs could hide, such as under storage containers and behind canteen. The
Contractor shall keep a record of such checks indicating the days, time and names of site
personnel conducting the checks. The records shall be made accessible to HDB and the SO Rep
upon request.
(e) Having a system of regular reminders to all site personnel (canteen operators, security guards
and customer relations officers inclusive) on this requirement.
(f) Inform AVA immediately for assistance if the presence of stray dogs is found within or at the
vicinity of sites.
If the Contractor is found to have breached the above requirement, the SO Rep may exercise his
contractual rights and impose demerit points and an administrative charge as specified in Clause on
“Nuisance And Irregularities”.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(44)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-45
1.1.60 Lightning Protection To Temporary Structures And Metal Structures
The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary buildings such as site office, site electrical substation,
workers' quarters, site canteen, carpenter and bar bending sheds and temporary structures with
continuous metal such as steel framework, scaffolding, tower cranes, batching plants and mobile
machinery such as crawler cranes and concrete pumps are adequately and effectively protected from
lightning strike at all times. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with and complying
with latest edition of SS 555 and/or any latest requirements by the BCA.
Notwithstanding the provisions of SS 555, reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be
used as lightning conductors or earth electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any
structural component and steel reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings showing the design of the lightning protection system
duly signed by the Contractor's professional electrical engineer (PE) stating that the design complies
with latest edition of SS 555. The Contractor's professional electrical engineer shall provide a Certificate
of Supervision together with the earthing reports after the lightning protection installation is completed.
The Contractor's PE shall also conduct routine inspections including submitting earthing reports once
every 6 months to ensure that the Contractor has provided adequate and effective lightning protection
system for the Site. The inspection and earthing reports are to be submitted to the SO Rep and a copy
submitted to the Employer's Safety Unit, Building & Infrastructure Department.
1.1.61 Computer Hardware And Software
1.1.61.1 Computerised Project Management Software
Within one month from the commencement date of the Time for Completion, the Contractor shall provide
and implement a Computerised Project Management Software (hereinafter called the "CPMS" for the
purpose of this clause including all subclauses under it) during the Time for Completion and any time
period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The SO Rep and the Employer's
officers shall be allowed to have full and free access and usage of the CPMS at all times.
The Contractor shall use the CPMS which shall be installed on the Site to prepare the programme for
the Works based on the Critical Path Method. The programme for the Works shall include the duration,
early start/finish dates, late start/finish dates and floats for all activities involved in the Works. It shall
also include constraints and parameters such as fixed start/finish and target start/finish dates for the
activities and milestones for the different phases or stages of the Works.
The programme for the Works shall comprise of summary and detailed reports in textual and graphical
forms. It shall be updated monthly or as and when required by the SO Rep to indicate, inter-alia, the
critical path, actual start and finish dates of completed activities, actual start dates and percentage
completion of the activities in progress and target start and finish dates of the delayed activities, their
slippages and floats.
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep the actual programme for the Works within three weeks after
the Date of Substantial Completion.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(45)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-46
1.1.61 Computer Hardware And Software (Cont’d)
1.1.61.2 Computer Hardware
the Computer Hardware during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract and till closing of Building Service Centre (BSC).
Personal Computer
The Contractor shall provide THREE Personal Computers (hereinafter referred to as “PC”) for the
exclusive use of the SO Rep and unless specified otherwise, three units of PC for Building Service
Centre (BSC) operation. The PC shall comply with the following minimum requirements:
(a) An Intel Core i5-4670 Processor of 3.4GHz equivalent or faster processor;
(b) 4 GB DDR3 1600MHz Memory equivalent or better;
(c) 500 GB or more SATA 3.0Gb/s Hard Drive equivalent or better [The hard disk must have 2
partitions eg. C and D drive];
(d) An Intel® HD Graphics 4600 equivalent or better;
(e) One 18.5" LCD monitor equivalent or better;
(f) System BIOS updateable via software should be licensed flash BIOS of the latest version;
(g) One keyboard;
(h) One optical USB mouse or compatible;
(i) One DVD writer;
(j) Wireless enabled;
(k) Casing must be secure and comes with one good quality chassis lock of unique combination.
AIl keys to the lock shall be given to the SO Rep;
(l) Must include all the necessary features and accessories required to support the type of
broadband connection services specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it; and
(m) Loaded with the software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(46)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-47
1.1.61.2 Computer Hardware (Cont’d)
Personal Computer (Cont’d)
The PC shall be Microsoft certified.
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense provide and maintain Broadband Connection Services
via a major Broadband Service Provider (such as Starhub, M1, SingNet or equivalent to be approved
by the SO Rep) for the PC during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract and till closing of Building Service Centre (BSC) operation.
The minimum connection speed to be provided is as follows:
(a) 50 Mbps for cable broadband, or

(b) 100 Mbps for fibre
The broadband connection shall be catered solely for the PC. Access to the broadband connection
must be adequately secured with password protection to prevent unauthorised usage or network
eavesdropping.
Laser Printer
The Contractor shall provide ONE Laser printer equivalent or better complying with the following
minimum specifications :
(a) At least 16 MB of RAM and upgradeable to at least 160 MB;

(b) Able to print at least 20 pages of A4 per minute and 11 pages of A3 per minute;
(c) Automatic Duplex Printing Unit;
(d) Print at 600 x 600 dpi resolution or more;
(e) Support high speed bi-directional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel port (C-type connector);
(f) Support PCL 5e, PCL 6 and Postscript Level 3 emulation;
(g) Must be able to support printing in the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it; and
(h) Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The Contractor shall provide ONE Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) equivalent or better complying
with the following minimum specifications :
(a) Conform to industry standards as follows :

IEEE 446, NEMA PE1, ANSI C62.41, IEEE587B, IEC 801-146;
(b) Conform to the safety standards as follows :
UL 1778, CSA C22.2 and VDE;
(c) 10 minutes or more runtime at full load;
(d) Shall provide alert on AC power failure, power restore and diagnostic tests through
management software;
(e) Shall provide at least 3 output ports; and
(f) Must include all connecting cables joining the UPS output ports and equipment.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(47)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-48
1.1.61.2 Computer Hardware (Cont’d)
Colour Scanner
The Contractor shall provide ONE colour scanner equivalent or better complying with the following
minimum specifications :
(a) Flatbed, one-pass colour and monochrome

(b) At least 600dpi x 600dpi resolution
(c) Able to scan A4 size documents
(d) Support Universal Serial Bus(USB) port
(e) Shall include scanning software that can display the image file size to users at the preview screen
(f) Able to support all image formats including but not limited to,
 TIFF
 BMP
 JPEG
 FPX
 GIF
 WMF
 PDF
(g) Bundled with drivers for the software specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
1.1.61.3 Computer Software
the Computer Software during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the following licensed software packages
(full packs with original licences, documentation and media provided) for each PC provided under this
clause including all subclauses under it :
(a) Windows 8 operating system with provision to upgrade to Windows 10 and above;
(b) Microsoft Project 2013 or newer;
(c) Microsoft Office 2013 or newer;
(d) The latest firewall & anti-virus package; and
(e) Internet Explorer 11 and above.
Contractors should adopt the software listed above so as to ensure compatibility with HDB’s IT
environment and applications. Contractors may propose alternative software subject to HDB’s approval
and provided that the software does not pose any compatibility issues.
The Contractor shall purchase maintenance license for the Virus Scan softwares to cover the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. The PC
must be set to automatically scan for virus at least once a day when the PC is switched on.
1.1.61.4 Computer Software Licensing
All the Computer Software as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it shall be licensed
copies obtained from Authorised distributors or dealers. The Contractor shall at his own cost and
expense provide any software upgrade, to the latest version or release upon request by SO Rep during
the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that only authorised software are used with the Hardware and
obtain written approval from the SO Rep before installing any software other than the ones specified in
this clause including all subclauses under it, into the Computer Hardware System.
1.1.61.5 Approval and Testing of Computer Hardware and Software
The Contractor shall submit specifications and details of the Computer Hardware and Software as
specified in this clause including all subclauses under it to the SO Rep for approval BEFORE the
purchase of the Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such
necessary arrangement for the hardware and software to be tested at the relevant Consultant's office
and the subsequent delivery to the work site upon request by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(48)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-49
1.1.61.6 Installation/Upgrade/Removal of HDB Applications
The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense make such necessary arrangement for the
installation/upgrade/removal of HDB software at HDB office and the subsequent delivery to the work
site upon request by the SO Rep.
1.1.61.7 Computer Furniture and Accessories
The Contractor shall provide the necessary furniture and accessories at the site office to accommodate
and facilitate the usage of the Computer Hardware and Software. The PC designated for the exclusive
use of the SO Rep shall be located in a fully enclosed room within the site office. The room shall be of
minimum size 8 m² as specified. The room shall be provided with a lock and be partitioned in half-height
glass panels.
1.1.61.8 Computer System Maintenance
The Contractor shall ensure that the Computer Hardware and Software are in good working condition
and pay for all maintenance, license fees, subscription fees and etc for the Hardware and Software
during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract.
If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within one calendar month from the
commencement date of the Time for Completion or fails to rectify any Hardware or Software faults,
within one day, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to acquire or to rectify the faults and
all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from payments due to or becoming due to the
Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.
1.1.61.9 Security
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement and provision to prevent theft/burglary of the
Computer Hardware and Software. The Contractor shall replace any stolen or missing Hardware and
Software within 3 days of such occurrence, failing which the SO Rep will make the necessary
arrangement to acquire the systems and all costs and expenses thus incurred shall be deducted from
payment due to or becoming due to the Contractor or recovered as a debt due from the Contractor.
1.1.61.10 Unauthorised Usage
The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software are not used for any other purpose except
for those approved by the SO Rep.
1.1.61.11 E-mail Account
The Contractor shall apply for and maintain an E-mail account to facilitate transmission of information
and correspondence. Provide the E-mail address to the SO Rep within one month from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance.
1.1.62 Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claim And Request For Variation Works
The Contractor may be required to use an online web-based electronic submission system provided by
the Employer for the submission of the Monthly Claims for Progress Payment and Claim for
Authorisation / Variation Order (collectively and hereinafter known as e-submission system).
There will be no additional charges to be imposed by Employer for the use of the e-submission system.
If the Employer decided that the e-submission system is to be used, the Contractor shall at his own
expenses arrange to use e-submission system complying with the requirement hereinafter mentioned.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(49)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-50
1.1.62 Electronic Submission For Progress Payments Claim And Request For Variation Works (Cont’d)
The e-submission system shall be Secured Socket Layer encrypted, password-protected with role-
based workflow security features at the document/form level and have an audit trail.
The e-submission system shall be accessible by all relevant users from the Employer, Superintending
Officer, SO Rep and Contractor concurrently and all data accessed shall be confined to the Project and
the relevant role and scope of works.
All relevant parties in the workflow shall be timely notified by email to complete their respective area of
work.
The e-submission system shall comprise the following modules:
(a) Monthly Claims For Progress Payment
This module allows the Contractor to submit online, the values of the monthly progressive
valuation of work completed for the assessment and certification of the SO Rep as hereinafter
described but not limited to the following:
(i) This module shall capture the monthly detailed breakdown of the scope of works and
cost information as specified in the Contract showing both the Contractor’s claims and
the SO Rep’s corresponding assessment in terms of individual percentage of work done
for each work item.
(ii) The validation rules shall apply to each item of claim and shall be based on the following
rules or such rules to be given by the SO Rep:
(a) The SO Rep's certification should not be more than Contractor’s claim.
(b) The values submitted/certified for current month should not be less than previous
the month’s submission.
(iii) The Contractor shall not be allowed to amend the SO Rep’s valuation and vice-versa.
(iv) The following data shall be automatically uploaded each month into the e-submission
system and shall include but not limited to the following:
(a) Nett Contract Sum (Less Provisional Quantities / Sums)

(b) Probable Actual Contract Value (Adjusted For Variation Orders)
(c) Contractor's Cumulative Total Claim (excludes Loss & Expense)
(d) Contractor's Nett Claim for Month (excludes Loss & Expense)
(e) Total SO Rep's Estimated Value Computed (excludes Loss & Expense)
(f) Cumulative Certified Value of Work
(g) Value for each work category for apportionment under respective activity account
codes.
(b) Authorisation / Variation Order
This module shall include but not limited to the following:
(i) Allow the SO Rep to submit an Authorisation / Variation Order for the approval of the
SO for subsequent issue to the Contractor.
(ii) Allow the SO Rep to issue to the Contractor an Authorisation Order.
(iii) Allow the SO Rep to issue a Variation Order.
All the differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause (including questions relating to
interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision shall be final and
binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(50)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-51
1.1.63 Assignment Of Copyright Of Photographs, Etc
The Contractor shall assign the copyright of the photographs (including the
prints/slides/transparencies/negative) taken and all documents prepared under this Contract to the
Employer.
The Employer shall have unfettered rights to use or reproduce all the photographs (including the
prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) taken and all documents prepared by the Contractor under this
Contract for any purpose other than for the purpose for which the Contract was entered into.
In the event that the Contractor engages third parties to take the photographs (including the
prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) or prepare the documents, the Contractor shall procure the
assignment of the copyright from such third parties to himself and thereafter, assign the copyright to the
Employer.
The Contractor and/or any third parties are strictly prohibited from using or reproducing any of the
photographs (including the prints/slides/transparencies/negatives) taken and all documents prepared
under this Contract in any other publication or for any other purpose whatsoever.
1.1.64 Provision Of Keys Envelopes During Hand Over
Upon successful hand over of the Works to the Employer after inspection by the SO Rep and the
Employer's Inspection Team, the Contractor shall provide the necessary number of envelopes to
contain the household keys of each dwelling unit in the Contract. The envelope to be provided shall
fulfil the following requirements :
(a) C6 size (114mm by 162mm)

(b) Key envelope with string and white eyelet
(c) 120 gsm paper
(d) Colour - white
The Contractor shall propose the type of envelope to the SO Rep for approval.
The 2 external sides of the envelope may either be printed or stamped with the following information :
On the Front of the envelope –To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 18, the following
statement:
KEY TO PREMISES NO. ___________

and;
On the Back of the envelope:–To print/stamp in Arial Black Font Type of Font Size 12, the following
statements:
S/N Location No. of keys

1 Main Gate
2 Main Door
3 Master Bedroom
4 Bedroom 1
5 Bedroom 2
6 Balcony
7 Service Duct
8 Letter Box
9 Others
Total
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(51)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-52
1.1.65 Schedule Of PE Submission
The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the
table below :
Category Clause No. Description Of Works Date Of Submission
1.1.18 or as amended Site offices & canteen At least 2 weeks prior to erection
General 1.1.48 or as amended Temporary buildings At least 2 weeks prior to erection
1.1.67.8 or as amended Temporary chute At least 1 week prior to installation
Maintenance 1.4.2(c) or as amended Passenger cum material hoist At least 2 weeks prior to
foundation, masts & tie-back construction
The Contractor shall provide the required PE submission as specified for the Works as shown in the
table below :
Category Clause No. Description Of Works Date Of Submission
1.5.1(b) or as amended Access scaffold and working At least 2 weeks prior to erection
platforms.
Temporary structures.
1.5.1(d) or as amended Alternative system to safety At least 1 week prior to installation

net system
1.5.1(e) or as amended Working platforms for lift At least 2 weeks prior to

shafts, central refuse chute construction
and voids
Site Safety 1.5.1(f) or as amended Overhead shelters At least 1 week prior to construction
Measures
1.5.1(m) or as amended Tower cranes & other tall At least 1 month prior to
construction equipment construction
foundation & tie-back
1.5.1(n) or as amended Mobile crane & piling At least 2 weeks prior to

machine access construction
1.5.1(t) or as amended Temporary staircases At least 2 weeks prior to erection
3.15 or as amended Planking & strutting At least 2 weeks prior to the

Excavation
excavation work
Structural 4.18 or as amended Rectification of defective work At least 1 week prior to the
Concrete rectification work
4.19.2 or as amended Design of formwork At least 2 weeks prior to erection
Formwork 9.5 or as amended Formwork system for At least 2 weeks prior to erection
reinforced concrete water
tank
Metal Roofing 13.3.1 or as amended Metal roof structural plans & At least 2 weeks prior to installation
and Insulation fastening details
Sheet
For the avoidance of doubts, requirements for PE submission for other Works which are not shown in
the table above shall be as specified in the respective clauses and/or subclauses in the Specifications.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(52)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-53
1.1.66 Earth Control Measures
The Contractor shall be responsible to implement effective Earth Control Measures (ECM) during
construction stage at all time. The ECM shall be implemented according to the Code of Practice on
Surface Water Drainage and meet the requirement under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap
294.
The contractor shall note that ECM are meant for the containment and treatment of silty rainwater runoff
only, and not meant for the treatment of process water from construction activities such as slurry from
tunnelling, pipe-jacking and bore-piling works. Such process water should be handed and treated to
comply with the requirements under Environmental Protection and Management Act (Chapter 94A).
The Contractor shall take into account the provision of schematic diagrams outlining the ECM for the
whole duration of the construction activities, taking into account the various ECM requirements under
different phases of construction activities. The ECM plan shall be designed and endorsed by a Qualified
Erosion Control Professional (QECP) and form the basis for the Contractor to price for ECM. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have included all the costs and expenses for complying with all ECM
requirements in the contract sum.
The Contractor shall engage a QECP to design ECM. The Contractor shall implement ECM accordingly
to the QECP's ECM plan before earth works starts. During the course of construction works, the
Contractor shall engage his QECP to review the effectiveness of the ECM regularly, in tandem with the
various phases of construction works. The Contractor shall revise the ECM as and when advised by his
QECP.
The Contractor shall keep good records of the ECM operation and maintenance. The records shall be
made readily available to the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the advice of his
QECP.
The Contractor shall submit the ECM plan duly endorsed by his QECP to Director, Catchment and
Waterways (PUB) to obtain the necessary clearance before the earth works start, in the format as
prescribed by PUB. The ECM plan shall include the following content:
(a) Project Brief
The Project Brief shall include:
(i) Project description;

(ii) Name and address of site occupier;
(iii) Site area and contract period;
(iv) Location map and site plan;
(v) Construction phases and schedules.
(b) ECM Design Calculations.
(c) Erosion Control Plan.
(d) Sediment Control Plan.
(e) Site ECM Management System.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(53)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-54
1.1.66 Earth Control Measures (Cont’d)
1.1.66.1 Erosion Control Plan
The plan shall include minimise bare earth areas/slopes/stockpiles via sequencing and phasing the
earth works, paving up/covering bare earth surfaces with lean concrete, milled waste, erosion control
blankets, close-turfing, canvas etc.
1.1.66.2 Sediment Control Plan
The plan shall include:
(a) Concrete-lined cut-off drains (minimum C7 precast channel) along the perimeter of the
construction sites.
(b) Sealing of site hoarding.
(c) Ramp/curb at site entrance/exit.
(d) Separate drainage for bare earth surfaces and non-bare earth surfaces.
(e) Silt fence properly installed and embedded onto the ground along the internal and perimeter cut-
off drains.
(f) Silt traps.
(g) Holding sumps/ponds for silty water.
(h) Adequate silty water treatment systems to treat silty water before the discharge points into public
drain.
(i) Turbidity curtains for works in or adjacent to water bodies, such as canals, rivers, sea or in a
reclamation work.
1.1.66.3 Site ECM Management System
The Management System shall include:
(a) Daily ECM inspection and report by an ECM trained site staff.
(b) Regular ECM review and report by QECP.
(c) Monitoring and alerts of the treated runoff quality, and if required by PUB, CCTV with Silt
Imagery Detection System to monitor the discharge at the public drain.
The Contractor shall deploy an ECM trained site staff to supervise the operation and maintenance of
the ECM implemented on site as well as conduct daily checks. The site staff shall be the project
manager, a qualified ECO, RTO or Safety Officer, who has attained, or will attain within three (3) months
from commencement of contract, a valid certificate from attending and passing an IES-endorsed ECM
course for site staff, such as "Certificate of Competency in ECM for Construction Site Personnel
Course."
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(54)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-55
1.1.67 Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites
1.1.67.1 General Requirements
The Contractor shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act"
for the purposes of this subclause) and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental Public
Health (Employment of Environmental Control Officers) Order 1999, (hereafter referred to as "the
Order" for the purposes of this subclause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the
Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
1.1.67.2 Reserved
1.1.67.3 Noise Nuisance
Judicious management and control over the activities within the Site shall be exercised by the
Contractor for the abatement of noise nuisance. In this respect, the Contractor shall implement all
necessary noise control measures at his own cost and expense, to comply with the Environmental
Protection and Management Act (hereafter referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this sub-clause)
and its Subsidiary Legislations including the Environmental Protection and Management (Control of
Noise at Construction Sites) Regulations, (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for the purposes
of this sub-clause) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto throughout the Time for Completion
and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site and its surroundings and to
have satisfied himself as to the surrounding developments and construction activities. Prior to the
commencement of Works, the Contractor shall propose a noise management plan and execute the
appropriate noise control measures at his own cost and expense.
1.1.67.4 Noise Control At Construction Site
(a) Noise Management Plan
Within 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit a noise
management plan complying with SS CP 49: Code of Practice for Noise Control on Construction
and Demolition Sites (hereafter referred to as "the Code" for the purposes of this sub-clause) to
the SO Rep for approval. The noise management plan shall include, but not limited to the
following :
(i) comparison charts between baseline noise monitoring results prior to the commencement
of works and the anticipated noise emission levels during construction ;
(ii) identification of sensitive buildings, for example hospitals, schools, institutions of higher
learning, homes for the aged sick, etc., and residential buildings within 150m from the
construction site boundary ;
(iii) site utilisation plan, indicating the locations of site facilities and noise generating equipments
including, but not limited to generators, compressors and concrete pumps ;
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(55)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-56
1.1.67 Environmental Public Health Measures At Construction Sites (Cont’d)
1.1.67.4 Noise Control At Construction Site (Cont’d)
(a) Noise Management Plan
(iv) specification of the machinery, equipment and plant proposed to be utilised on site as well
as their indicative noise emission levels. Construction equipment and methods of work that
generates excessive noise will not be allowed to be used on Site ;
(v) identification of noise generating activities and delineate the sequence of work and
construction methods for such activities, as well as indicate the anticipated noise levels
accompanying each type of activity ;
(vi) propose noise control measures for noise generating activities along with the estimated
reduced noise levels in the form of administrative and engineering controls or other
measures deemed effective in noise abatement. Noise control measures shall take into
consideration site planning and layout (administrative controls), adoption of engineering
controls and behavioral considerations of site personnel ;
(vii) propose scheduling of works with due consideration to noise generating activities;
(viii) contingency noise abatement measures for unavoidable works that have to be carried out
after 7pm with the approval of the SO Rep ;
(ix) noise monitoring system to be implemented, which includes the details of instrumentation,
locations of installation, measured values of Leq and correction factor to be applied in the
presence of ambient noise ; and
(x) Public relations strategies to foster close community relationships throughout the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract,
such as signboards, newsletters, circulars, complaint handling procedures and
investigation, standard response time to public feedback and complaints and rapport-
building events or activities with residents.
In formulating the noise management plan, the Contractor shall take into account the working
days and hours, as well as consider the effects of construction noise on personnel working in or
around the site as well as the neighbourhood within proximity of the Site. The Contractor shall
take into account the nature of land use in the area, duration of works and the effect of
lengthening works period or other nuisances that may affect the neighbourhood.
(b) Noise Control Measures
The Contractor shall implement all noise control measures included in the approved noise
management plan, including any other noise control measures as instructed by the SO Rep or
NEA from time to time. Noise control measures shall include the following, where necessary to
comply with the Regulations :
(i) all machinery and plant shall be identified to be sound-reduced prior to entering the site ;
(ii) all plant, machinery and equipment shall be pasted with a weather-proof sticker clearly
indicating its noise emission level (at source) under normal operating condition ;
(iii) all machinery in operation shall have their covers properly shut at all times ;
(iv) noisy plant and equipment shall be housed in acoustic sheds or enclosures ;
(v) noisy activities shall be barricaded with portable noise barriers and panels ; and
(vi) noise barriers shall be erected prior to commencement of works.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(56)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-57
1.1.67.4 Noise Control At Construction Site (Cont’d)
(b) Noise Control Measures (Cont’d)
Noisy construction equipment (for example compressors) and installation (for example
temporary refuse chute) shall be sited away from occupied blocks. All construction equipment
shall be properly insulated and maintained to minimise its operating noise level. The SO Rep has
the discretion to require the Contractor to take necessary precautions, whether specified herein
or not, to maintain or to repair such construction equipment or to instruct their removal from site
when it is determined that the noise level generated from the construction works fails to comply
with the Regulations or the Code.
(c) Noise Monitoring System
The Contractor shall be required to set up the wireless, web-based real-time noise monitoring
system prior to the commencement of work on Site. The cost of setting up, operating and
maintaining the noise monitoring system shall be borne by the Contractor.
The system shall include an integrated solar-powered sound level meter complying with IEC
61672 (Type 1) or other comparable standards approved by the SO Rep. In addition, the system
shall provide wireless, real-time transmission of the sound level data to a secured (password-
protected) website, where data is presented for Leq 5 mins, Leq 1 hour and Leq 12 hours periods.
The system shall enable all current and historical sound level data recorded from the Site to be
retrieved from the website. The system shall also incorporate a short message service (SMS)
alert system to notify the designated recipients when the construction noise levels exceed the
permissible noise limits stated under the Regulations.
The sound level meter must comply with the following requirements:
(i) an integrating-averaging sound level meter set to frequency weighting ‘A’ ;
(ii) Equipped with a data logger for sampling the running value of ‘A’-weighted sound level
pressure levels with adequate memory to store 5-minute equivalent continuous readings on
a 24-hour basis for up to one month ;
(iii) Dynamic range shall be of at least 40 dB ;
(iv) The sound level meter shall have a laboratory calibration certificate dated not more than
three (3) months before the commencement date of the contract. The integrating sound
level meter shall be sent to an approved accredited laboratory for calibration at every six (6)
months interval or as and when required by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall install the sound level meter at a suitable location at the nearest occupied
building. The location is to be approved by SO Rep or NEA. The Contractor shall liaise with the
relevant authorities, for example Town Council, for permission to install the sound level meter.
Where there is no suitable location outside the Site, the Contractor may install the sound level
meter within the Site, subject to approval the SO Rep or NEA. The installed sound level meter
can be sheltered, but the microphone of the sound level meter must face the construction site
and in the line of sight of the construction activities without any physical barrier or obstruction.
(d) Sites In Close Proximity to Sensitive Buildings
For construction sites close to premises that are sensitive to noise disturbances, for example
schools, hospitals, institutions of higher learning, homes for the aged sick, etc., the SO Rep
reserves the right to direct the Contractor to implement any noise control measures deemed
necessary to reduce the noise disturbances regardless of the noise level generated and
compliance with the permissible noise levels in the Regulations. For the avoidance of doubt,
the measures could include, but not limited to erection of temporary noise barriers to shield
the affected buildings from excessive noise, switching to use of quieter machinery or
adoption of quieter construction methods, installation of air-conditioning systems within the
noise sensitive premises, etc. The Contractor shall also be responsible for dismantling all
temporary noise control measures and make good any affected premises when requested
by the occupier of the affected buildings. The Contractor shall obtain written permission from
the SO Rep prior to the dismantling of such measures. The cost of implementation of such
measures, including dismantling, shall be borne by the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(57)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-58
1.1.67.5 Preservation Of Trees
Where any existing tree(s) on the Site is stipulated to be preserved (hereinafter referred to as
"Preserved Trees" for the purpose of this subclause), the Contractor shall take all necessary precaution
to avoid damage or injury to such trees and its roots and comply with the following requirements :
(a) Treatment of Preserved Trees In Area Of Fill
(i) Tolerable Depth of Fill
The area around Preserved Trees shall not be filled more than 300mm in depth.
(ii) Construction of Well Around Trees
Well not exceeding 1 m in depth shall be constructed around Preserved Trees. The
minimum diameter of the well shall be 6 times the diameter of Preserved Trees measured
at the trunk 0.5 m above ground level. Details of the well shall be as shown in the
Drawings.
(b) Treatment Of Preserved Trees in Area of Cut
(i) Tolerable Depth of Cut
The area around Preserved Trees shall not be cut to a depth exceeding 300 mm.
(ii) Retention of Raised Planter Around Tree
An area around Preserved Trees shall be retained as raised planter to conserve the root
system. The minimum diameter of raised planter shall be 6 times the diameter of
Preserved Trees measured at the trunk 0.5 m above ground level. Details of retention of
raised planter are as shown in the Drawings.
(c) Protection Of Existing Trees From Physical Damage

By Equipment Etc During Construction
(i) All Preserved Trees shall be protected against damage during construction operation by
suitable fencing or armouring. The protection of Preserved Trees shall be placed before
commencing any excavation or grading operation/work and shall be maintained in repair
for the duration of the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract unless otherwise directed. The extent of fencing shall be
determined by the SO Rep. Fencing shall be erected all round not less than 1.2 m from
the trunk of Preserved Trees.
Individual Preserved Trees near heavy construction traffic shall be wrapped with gunny
sacks and 50 mm x 100 mm planks worn vertically as armour around the trunk and spaced
at no more than 50 mm apart to a height of 1.5 m above ground.
(ii) Any damage to Preserved Trees root system shall be repaired immediately by the
Contractor under the supervision of a qualified horticulturist. Roots that are exposed
and/or damaged during grading operations shall be cut off immediately and the inside of
the exposed and/or damaged area cleaned; cut surfaces shall be treated with approved
sealing compound and topsoil spread over the exposed root area.
(iii) Any damage to Preserved Trees branches shall be treated in accordance with the
Drawings.
(a) Branch Trimming Of Damaged Branches
(1) A first cutting is to be made at point A, 300 mm from the main trunk of
Preserved Trees; depending on the diameter of the branch being cut. The
depth of the cut shall not be more than ½ of the diameter of the branch.
(2) A second cutting is to be made at point B, parallel to cutting at point A. The
distance between these two cuttings shall be 75 mm to 150 mm.
(3) Make a shallow cut at C.
(4) Final cut is to be sharp and clear.
(5) 2 coats of anti-fungus wound sealant are to be applied on cut area.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(58)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-59
1.1.67.5 Preservation Of Trees (Cont’d)
(b) Wound Treatment
(1) Clean away ragged or loose edges of bark with a sharp pruning knife.
(2) Shape the wound into an oval, pointed at both ends.
(3) Coat the entire exposed surface with tree-wound paint.
(iv) If any Preserved Trees are severely injured by mechanical equipment, etc., the SO Rep
shall impose charges against the Contractor in accordance with Clause 1.6 "Nuisance
And Irregularities".
(d) Health & Condition Of Preserved Trees
(i) The Contractor shall ensure that:
(a) Compaction of soil around Preserved Trees shall be avoided.

(b) No materials shall be stored within the root system.
(c) There shall be no spillage of any nature within the spread of the Preserved Trees.
(d) There shall be no parking of vehicles underneath the Preserved Trees.
(e) There shall be no dumping of excavated materials, concrete, equipment etc.
within the spread of the Preserved Trees crown.
(f) Soil around Preserved Trees is properly cultivated to ensure that adequate supply
of air and water get to the roots.
(g) The site is drained in periods of heavy rainfall and irrigated during periods of
drought.
(ii) The Contractor shall also carry out any other routine maintenance of the Preserved Trees
eg. branch trimming, pesticide spraying etc. as instructed by the SO Rep.
(iii) If the growth of the Preserved Trees is stifled, the Contractor shall inter-alia bear the cost
of making good and charges in accordance with Clause on "Nuisance and Irregularities"
shall be imposed against the Contractor.
1.1.67.6 Temporary Site Access Within Site Boundary
The Contractor shall propose and construct a temporary site access within the Site boundary linking the
main construction entrance/exit to all building blocks, inclusive of multi-storey carpark building.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations endorsed by
the PE shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the construction of the access. The access
shall be of concrete or bituminous pavement or precast concrete plank. It shall be laid over well
compacted hardcore base or other suitable material to the Contractor’s PE design. The access shall be
inspected by the Contractor’s PE and certificate of supervision issued prior to use.
The precast concrete plank shall be 175mm thick with modular size of 1.20m by 2.20m. Contractor can
opt for any other size subject to SO reps approval. It shall be reinforced with welded mesh and the
edges shall be protected with angle iron. It can be cast with grade 40 eco-green concrete.
To ensure proper site drainage, properly-graded Type C7 composite channel cut-off drains shall be laid
along the perimeter of the construction site. Similar cut-off drains shall be laid along the access and
other areas where required. The drainage system shall comply with the requirements specified in
Clause on “Earth Control Measures” and sub-clauses under it.
The area between the temporary site access and the building blocks/multi-storey carpark shall be laid
with well compacted sub-grade with lean concrete surface.
The access shall be provided immediately after the completion of the first storey. The provision of
access prior to the completion of first storey shall comply with the requirements specified in Clause
1.5.1 (n) “Access For The Use Of Mobile Crane And Piling Machines Next To Build Area”. The access
shall be maintained in good working condition and free from water stagnation at all times throughout
the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the
Contract, or unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(59)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-60
1.1.67.6 Temporary Site Access Within Site Boundary (Cont’d)
As part of the housekeeping effort, the Contractor shall deploy workers to clear the mud
deposits/droppings regularly and maintain the access as clean and dry as practically possible. A heavy
duty vehicular washing bay shall also be provided at the main entrance/exit point abutting completed
public road. All tyres of vehicles shall be thoroughly clean if necessary before leaving the Site.
The area at main construction entrance/exit shall laid with concrete surface to improve the
maintainability of the site access. Where the access had been excavated for underground services work
(e.g. sewer construction, underground piping system draw pit), the Contractor shall use steel plate to
temporarily cover these excavated areas and the access shall be immediately reinstated to good
working condition upon the completion of the underground services work in accordance to PE design.
1.1.67.7 Temporary Sanitary Facilities
Within 21 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall provide temporary
sanitary facilities in suitable structures with adequate lighting, on the Site. Such temporary sanitary
facilities shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep. The Contractor may use the Employer's Standard
Drawings as a guide in designing the temporary sanitary facilities. The temporary sanitary facilities
shall comprise water closets and shower compartments in the proportion of 1 closet and 1 shower to
every 25 workmen, throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages
are imposed under the Contract. In addition, the Contractor shall provide separate sanitary facilities
with water closet and shower compartment for the exclusive use of the Employer's officers. Prior written
approval by the SO Rep shall be obtained before commencing the erection of these facilities.
The water closets shall be of the type, make and pattern approved by the MEWR and PUB (Water).
Provide and lay glazed wall tiles or other approved material to the internal walls of the temporary
sanitary facilities up to a height of 1.8 m from the floor. The doors to the cubicles of the temporary
sanitary facilities shall be of approved material.
All waste discharge from the water closets and all waste water from the temporary sanitary facilities and
from the Site shall be discharged into a public sewer. Arrange with the MEWR to carry out connection
work from the temporary sanitary facilities to the public sewer and pay all charges and maintenance in
connection therewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to and shall indemnify the
Employer against all liabilities in respect of such sewer connections.
Where a public sewer is not available or where it is not possible to connect to a public sewer, the
Contractor shall provide and install temporary septic tanks of the type, pattern and capacity approved
by the MEWR, to serve the water closets, showers and baths.
Prior to commencing the installation of the temporary septic tanks on the Site, the Contractor shall
engage a Licensed Plumber who shall submit his proposal to the MEWR and SO Rep for approval. The
proposal shall include the manner and frequency of post installation management and maintenance of
the septic tanks on the Site. The Contractor and his Licensed Plumber shall be fully responsible for any
mis-management or mis-use of the temporary sanitary facilities, which may result in the pollution of the
controlled water course.
1.1.67.8 Removal Of Construction Debris From Building Blocks
Before the commencement of Works on site, the Contractor shall submit proposal for the daily removal
of the construction debris from the building blocks to the SO Rep. for approval.
1.1.67.9 Pest Control And Surveillance
The Contractor shall engage an approved Pest Control Operator who is registered with the
(a) BCA under the Work Head for Pest Control

(b) NEA under the Control of Vector and Pesticide Act
to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work on the Site. In this respect, the Contractor
shall submit the name of the Pest Control Operator and proof of BCA/NEA registration to the SO Rep
for approval prior to carrying out the Works. The SO Rep may disapprove the Pest Control Operator
selected by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation and
extension of time arising from such decisions.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(60)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-61
1.1.67.9 Pest Control And Surveillance (Cont’d)
Pest Control measures and surveillance programmes shall fully comply with the requirements of NEA
as well as the following :
(a) The Contractor is required to submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme inclusive
of “Source reduction regime/strategy”, “Water bearing receptacle removal team” at the Site to
the respective NEA’s regional office and the SO Rep prior to commencement of the Works. The
frequency of fogging shall be in accordance to NEA’s requirement. Fogging is to be carried out
only by licensed Pest Operator using approved chemical.
(b) The Contractor shall maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of the pest control
and surveillance work that has been carried out. The site register shall be made available and
ready for inspection by the SO Rep when required.
(c) The Contractor shall submit monthly summarised returns of the site records required by NEA to
the respective NEA’s regional office.
(d) On the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall seal up all sanitary openings in the dwelling
units prior to the handing over of the completed Works all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
The Works required under this subclause shall include all necessary measures to prevent the Site from
becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors. The Contractor shall carry out site checks
at least once a week to detect and remove all breeding and harbouring grounds. If breeding or
harbouring of vectors is found at the Site, enforcement action may be taken against the Contractor by
NEA. The SO Rep may also exercise his right under Clause on "Nuisance & Irregularities" by imposing
charges on the Contractor.
1.1.67.10 Air Pollution By Construction Equipment
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to abate the discharge of smoke, fumes or obnoxious
gases from Construction Equipment and other equipment on the Site. When notified by the SO Rep
that a particular Construction Equipment or equipment is discharging excessive smoke, fumes or
obnoxious gases, the Contractor shall stop the use of that Construction Equipment or equipment, and
replace the same with acceptable Construction Equipment or equipment. No claims from the Contractor
for extension of Time for Completion or costs and expenses shall be allowed.
1.1.67.11 Reserved
1.1.67.12 Cleaning Of Public And HDB Maintained Roads And Drains
The Contractor shall ensure that all vehicles used by him, his servants or agents, or by his sub-
contractors or suppliers, their servants or agents (hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor's Vehicles"
for the purposes of this subclause) shall not dirty any public or HDB maintained roads and drains. In
this respect, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all such Contractor's Vehicles are properly
cleaned before they move onto these roads.
The Contractor shall check with the SO Rep if he is in doubt whether any road is a public or HDB
maintained road and the decision of the Superintending Officer in this respect shall be final and binding
on and conclusive against the Contractor.
In the event the Site abuts a public or HDB maintained road and the Contractor's Vehicles use the road
for site access, the Contractor shall provide a washing bay to wash and clean the Contractor's Vehicles
before they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. If vehicles of other contractors also use
such public or HDB maintained road for site access, the Contractor shall provide at his own cost and
expense, similar washing, cleaning facilities and services for these other contractors' vehicles before
they move onto the public or HDB maintained road. The Contractor shall also provide at his own cost
and expense, the same facilities and services for similar purposes in the event a road abutting the Site
becomes a public or HDB maintained road and is used for site access by the Contractor's Vehicles or
other contractors' vehicles.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(61)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-62
1.1.67.13 Restriction On The Use of Styrofoam in Construction processes
Where specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete", the use of styrofoam in the course of formwork
erection or concreting Works shall be disallowed.
The Contractor shall ensure that he or his sub-contractors do not use styrofoam in openings and
recesses.
1.1.68 Material Samples Display Room
Within 21 days from taking possession of the site, a Material Samples Display Room of 3m X 5 m (ie.15
m2) shall be provided at the Site office and situated beside the meeting room. A new air-conditioner set
and adequate lightings shall be provided to the Material Samples Display Room.
Appropriate and proper display racks/shelves shall be provided. The display room shall be maintained
neat and tidy at all times.
The following material samples, among others, shall be displayed upon HDB’s Technical
Professional/SO Reps’ approval if they are to be provided under the contract :
(a) Architectural materials:
(i) sanitary wares, pipes and fittings, solvent cement;

(ii) integral cultured basins and vanity tops;
(iii) water taps, pipes, valves and fittings;
(iv) shower sets and accessories;
(v) gratings;
(vi) rainwater downpipe system;
(vii) clothes drying racks;
(viii) doors, door holders, viewers and hinges, door locks, ironmongery;
(ix) windows, stainless steel screws, friction stays, window stoppers, gaskets;
(x) paint and primer;
(xi) foot-operated steel hoppers;
(xii) tiles, tile grout;
(xiii) parquet flooring and related products etc.
(b) Structural materials : Splice sleeves, sealants for precast joints, form ties etc.
(c) Civil Engineering Materials : Road marking paint, interlocking concrete blocks etc.
(d) Rendering/screeding/waterproofing/repair materials : Waterproofing membranes, prepacked

waterproof screed and prepacked skim-coat, polymer modified cement mortar etc.
(e) Electrical materials : Electrical conduits and fittings/CATV materials eg. sockets, switches, door
bells, splash proof guards, light fittings etc.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to provide and display the sample for other
building materials and components, especially newly introduced items, big ticket items and special
items, under the Contract where deemed necessary and fit all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
The approved material samples shall be provided and displayed before construction, erection or
installation. All approved materials shall be labelled with the Supplier's name and materials'
type/grade/model.
1.1.69 Audit Of M & E Systems
The Contractor shall test the M&E systems and rectify all Defect before submitting all M&E systems test
reports endorsed by the Consultant to HDB Building Quality Department. HDB Building Quality
Department reserves the right to audit any of the M & E systems installed by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall provide the necessary manpower, equipment and means of access for the audit by
HDB. The Contractor shall rectify all Defect detected during the audit and report to the Consultant for
verification.
For buildings under construction, the Contractor shall ensure compliance with the requirements of the
FSSD (such as dry/wet rising mains etc). The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to
enable the officers from FSSD, SO Rep, and/or officers from HDB Building Quality Department to carry
out any inspection and testing during the construction stage.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(62)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-63
1.1.70 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
1.1.70.1 Environmental Management Programme
(a) The contractor shall implement an effective Environmental Management Programme.
(b) The Programme shall including monitoring and tracking to minimise:
(i) Electricity consumption;

(ii) Diesel consumption;
(iii) Water consumption;
(iv) Concrete wastage
(c) The contractor shall submit data to the SO rep on a monthly basis and present it as a standing
item in the monthly meeting.
(d) The programme shall also include measures to be taken to raise awareness and promote
environment friendly habits amongst site personnel.
1.1.70.2 Environment Friendly Practices
(a) The contractor shall implement a system to facilitate the use recycled water obtained through
Earth Control Measure for:
(i) wash bay;

(ii) dust control;
(iii) tremie piles;
(iv) washing of site access.
(b) The contractor shall segregate metal and concrete waste from general construction waste for
recycling purpose.
(c) The contractor shall provide recycling bins near the site office to facilitate recycling.
(d) The contractor can use eco-green concrete, subject to Contractor’s PE approval where
necessary, for the base slab of:
(i) site office;

(ii) worker’s quarter;
(iii) canteen;
(iv) worker’s toilet;
(v) cube room
(e) To reduce energy consumption for the site office, the contractor is encouraged to :
(i) Use aircon with green rating;

(ii) Use white colour for the roof of the site office;
(iii) Use the east and west end for meeting room or toilet as it has lower occupancy;
(iv) Reduce the office ceiling height at about 2.4 m reduce air con and lighting energy
consumption;
(v) Provide UV film or blinds at site office windows;
(vi) Maintain office temperature at more than 24 deg C;
(vii) Provide door closer at doors where space is air conditioned
(viii) Design the site office toilet such that they do not need mechanical ventilation;
(ix) Use pedestal pan integrate with wash basin;
(x) Use motion sensor for lights and ventilation fan for toilet;
(xi) Orientate the site office in the north–south facing if feasible
(f) The contractor is encouraged to be familiar and closely follow the BCA’s Green and Gracious
Builder’s Guide. (e.g use energy efficient air conditioning system complying with Singapore
Energy Labelling Scheme, use T5 lights combined with motion sensors to reduce energy
consumption etc).
(g) The contractor is also encouraged to :
(i) Provide more greening on site to lower ambient temperature during construction period;
(ii) Elimination of environmentally unfriendly products and packaging
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(63)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-64
1.2 MATERIALS
1.2.1 Metric Components
All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, when metric
components are not available, their equivalent in imperial units may, subject to the approval of the SO
Rep, be used and such a substitution shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
1.2.2 Materials And Workmanship
As directed, furnish the SO Rep with approved documents to prove that materials are as specified. The
documents shall include but not be limited to any or all of the following, such that the authenticity of the
materials can be easily ascertained :
(a) shipping documents

(b) serial numbers
(c) warranty certificates
In the event that any documents submitted are not original copies, they shall be duly certified by the
originating parties. No information within the documents shall be tampered with, unless it is clearly
discernible that the items are not related to the materials specified in the Contract.
Where specific brand and model number are specified, or where alternative brands and model numbers
are offered by the Contractor and accepted by the SO Rep, it shall be deemed that the finished products
are entirely of original make by the registered manufacturer and fully supported by the Manufacturer's
warranty. In the event that any alteration is made to the goods by a local agent or any other
intermediary, the approval of the SO Rep shall be sought and the result of the alteration shall be fully
supported by the Manufacturer such that the Manufacturer's warranty is maintained.
All references to local or foreign standards and/or Codes of Practice shall be deemed to be inclusive of
the prevailing amendments to these standards and/or Codes of Practice.
Samples of materials shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before order is placed with the
supplier.
Such approval by the SO Rep shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract. The
Contractor shall ensure that the materials are free from any defects, damages or any other flaws.
1.2.3 Credit Terms And Conditions For Employer's Materials
For materials directly supplied by the Employer, a 2-month credit facility from the date of delivery may
be allowed. The Employer reserves the right to deliver the materials to the Contractor's site or other
designated locations even if he fails to re-confirm his earlier purchase order to the Employer. The cost
of the materials so delivered shall be deducted by the Employer from the Contractor by deduction from
monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or as a debt due by the Contractor to the Employer.
The Employer reserves its sole and unfettered discretion to withdraw such credit facilities without any
prior notice to the Contractor under any circumstance as it deems fit, including but not limited to where
a garnishee order is served on the Employer in respect of any contracts the Contractor has with the
Employer or where a petition in bankruptcy or winding up order is presented by or made against the
Contractor. Under no circumstances shall the Employer be liable to the Contractor's claim for any cost,
expense, profit and loss arising out of or in consequence of the withdrawal of such credit facility.
Where such credit facility is withdrawn, the Contractor has to pay the Employer in cash for all materials
he has ordered for the Works before the Employer will deliver the materials to the Site or allow the
Contractor to collect the materials.
Where the garnishee order is discharged or withdrawn or made absolute or where the petition in
bankruptcy or winding up order is withdrawn, the Contractor may apply to the Employer in writing, with
documentary proof, to have the credit facility reinstated. The Employer shall have the absolute right to
decide whether or not to reinstate credit facility to the Contractor and the Employer is under no obligation
to provide any explanation if it decides not to reinstate the credit facility.
1.2.4 Reserved
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(64)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-65
1.2.5 Approval Of Samples And Trade Names
Where trade names or catalogue numbers are specified in the Specifications and/or shown in the
Drawings, they are intended only to serve as a guide to the respective type and quality of material
required. Other material proposed by the Contractor may be used subject to the prior approval of the
SO Rep. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit samples of the proposed material to the SO Rep
for approval.
When a sample is approved by the SO Rep and subsequently work is carried out in accordance with
this approved sample, any cost difference resulting from the higher price of the approved sample as
compared with the price of the material as required and/or as shown shall not be payable to the
Contractor, unless the change of material is ordered by the SO Rep.
With the exception of lighting luminares, where the requirements for cost recovery are provided for
differently, in the event that the price of the approved sample is lower than that of the material as
required and/or as shown, the cost difference shall be recovered by the Employer by way of contract
variation in accordance with the following table :
Recovery (or Non-Recovery) by the Employer from the Contractor in the event that the price of the
approved material is lower than that of the material as required and/or as shown
Material as required Material proposed by Contractor

S/N Cost Adjustment
and/or as shown and approved by the SO Rep
1. On the HDB Materials List On the HDB Materials List No cost recovery
2. On the HDB Materials List Not on the HDB Materials List ) Cost Recovery
) by the
3. Not on the HDB Materials List On the HDB Materials List ) Employer from
) the Contractor
4. Not on the HDB Materials List Not on the HDB Materials List )
The HDB’s Materials List is posted at the following website : http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg
The ranges of outdoor luminaires under various categories are shown in HDB Material List. Upon award
of the contract, the Contractor shall propose three no. of outdoor lighting luminaires from HDB Material
List for each category specified in the tender drawings for SO Rep selection and approval. SO Rep shall
select the suitable lighting luminaires from the Contractor’s proposal for use in HDB projects. Upon
confirmation of the selection of the luminaires by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall place order for the
selected luminaires for the project use. There shall be no cost adjustment to the luminaires (indoor &
outdoor) selected within the same category in HDB Material List for use in the project.
For the purposes of this subclause only, the applicable HDB Materials List shall be the prevailing HDB
Materials List applicable at the time the Contractor submits the material for approval by the SO Rep.
Where cost recovery is required, the basis of such adjustment shall be the difference between the price
of the proposed material and that of the material as required and/or as shown (where one type of
material is specified) or that of the cheapest of the materials as required and/or as shown (where more
than one type of material is specified).
The Contractor shall point out to the SO Rep all items in the approved sample which do not comply with
the Specifications and/or Drawings.
Notwithstanding approval of the sample by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall be liable for any items in
the sample which do not comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings and which the Contractor has
failed to point out to the SO Rep.
Where the Contract requires the Contractor to obtain materials from the HDB Materials List or where it
is specified that materials provided are subject to the approval of the SO Rep, such requirements shall
not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that the materials used or selected by them:
(a) are free from defects, damages or faults;
(b) are of merchantable quality and fit for their intended purpose; and
(c) comply with the Specifications and/or Drawings.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(65)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-66
1.2.6 Sample Unit And Quality Standards
1.2.6.1 Sample Unit
The Contractor shall provide at his own costs and expenses, for the inspection, testing and approval of
sample units for each of the different dwelling unit types as instructed by the SO Rep. These sample
units shall be truly representative of the actual units to be constructed in every respect inclusive of all
architectural details, architectural and structural features, finishes, services, fittings, etc.
The Contractor shall comply with the Quality Standards specified under this clause for setting up of
sample units and sample panels. The specifications, drawings or details shall be read in conjunction
with the quality standards specified under this clause. In case of discrepancies between the
specifications, drawings or details and the quality standards specified under this clause, the Contractor
shall obtain approval from the SO Rep before proceeding with the works.
The approved sample units shall be used as reference for the standard and quality of workmanship and
materials that are acceptable to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that the completed Works
(including works that are not listed in the quality standards specified under this clause) are at least of
the same standard and quality as that in the sample units.
The Contractor shall commence to construct the sample units when the structural works of the first
building block reaches the fifth (5th) storey floor slab. The contractor shall complete the sample units
within three (3) months from the aforesaid commencement date for inspection and approval by the SO
Rep.
The Contractor shall maintain the sample units to a clean, neat and tidy condition at all times. Adequate
artificial lightings shall be provided where possible and as directed by SO Rep all at the Contractor’s
cost and expense.
Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep in respect of these sample units, the Contractor shall not
be released from any of his duties and obligations as required of him under the Contract.
1.2.6.2 Quality Standards For Architectural Works
S/N ITEMS QUALITY STANDARDS

1. Column/ Wall (Plaster • Walls meet at right angles (deviation not to exceed 4mm over
or skim finish) 300mm)
• Verticality of wall not more than 3mm per m
• Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2 m
• No stain marks, paints drips and any visible damage
• No crack
• No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
• Straightness of corners and joints
2. Ceiling /Beam (Skim • Beams meet at right angles (deviation not to exceed 4mm
finish) over 300mm)
• Alignment of ceiling/ beam not more than 3mm per m,
maximum not more than 5mm
• Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2 m
• No crack
• Straightness of corners and joints
• Surface should be visually even with no waviness or patches
due to patching works
3. Metal Gate and • Verticality (tolerance of max 3mm)
Frame • Evenly painted, no stain or scratches
• No dent, rust or mortar dropping
• Inner frame align with outer frame with consistent gap
• Welding at joints ground even or flushed
• Consistent gap between gate and finished floor (between
5mm to 10mm)
• No missing or defective accessories
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(66)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-67
1.2.6 Sample Unit And Quality Standards (Cont’d)
1.2.6.2 Quality Standards For Architectural Works (Cont’d)

4. Door  Alignment/level with walls
 No visible gaps between door frame and wall
 Door surface and joints properly sanded down and with
consistent varnish finish (including on top and bottom of door
leaf)
 Both leaves aligned when close (offset not more than 2mm)
 Consistent gap between door & frame (not more than 5mm)
 Consistent gap between door & finished floor (between 3mm
to 10mm)
 Consistent gap between door and unfinished floor level
(between 45mm to 55mm)
 Door gap between door frame & finished floor to comply to
FSSD’s requirements for fire-rated door
 Gap between HS door and unfinished floor level (not less
than 60mm)
 Warp not more than 2mm
 Ease in opening and closing
 No stain marks and any visible damage
 Door and frame corners maintained at right angles
 No sign of corrosion and any visible damage in ironmongery
or metal frame
 Verticality (tolerance of max 3mm)
 No missing or defective accessories
 No squeaky sound during swinging the leaf
5. Wall Tiles  No mortar stains or paint drips

 No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
 Consistent colour tone
 Consistent colour and neat pointing
 Alignment of joints with floor tiles where applicable
 Consistent joint size
 Lippage between 2 tiles should not be more than 0.5mm
 Surface unevenness not more than 3mm over 1.2m
 Verticality of wall not more than 3mm per m
 Walls meet at right angles not more than 4mm over 300mm
6 Floor:  Surface unevenness not more than 10mm within the unit
a) Unfinished floor  No foot print or indentation
 No mortar dropping
 No faeces stains
 No exposed rebar
b) Screed Finish • Ponding not deeper than 3 mm

• No crack
• No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
• Surface unevenness not more than 3mm per 1.2m
• No stain marks and any visible damage
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(67)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-68
1.2.6.2 Quality Standards For Architectural Works (Cont'd)

6 c) Floor Tile  Surface unevenness for dry areas (without fall) not more than
3mm over 1.2m
 Falls in wet areas should be in the correct direction towards
floor traps or discharge points
 Consistent colour and neat pointing
 Consistent joint size
 No mortar stains or paint drips
 No hollow sound when tapped with a hard object
 Lippage between 2 tiles should not be more than 0.5mm
 Consistent drop between kitchen and unfinished living room
floor (between 45mm and to 50mm)
 Alignment of joints with wall tiles where applicable
 Consistent skirting thickness
 Skirting tile shall be round-edged at one of the length
d) Timber floor  No cracks and warpage

 Timber strips to rest firmly on screed with no hollow sound
when tapped
 No visible gaps in between timber strips (joint width not more
than 0.5mm at localized areas)
 Edges of the floor to be properly sealed
 No unevenness between timber strips
 Surface unevenness (not more than 3mm per 1.2m)
 Consistent skirting thickness and no visible gap between wall
& skirting
 Uniformity in timber strip tone
 Surfaces are evenly varnished with no patchiness resulted
from touch up works
 No stain marks and any visible damage
e) Resilient (vinyl)  No stain marks and any visible damage / defects

strip flooring  No cracks and warpage
 No unevenness/lippage between resilient strips
 No visible gaps in between resilient strips (joints should not be
visible)
 Resilient strips to rest firmly on screed with no hollow sound
when tapped
 Uniformity in resilient strip timber tone
 Consistent skirting thickness and no visible gap between wall
& skirting
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(68)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-69
1.2.6.2 Quality Standards For Architectural Works (Cont’d)

7. Windows  Alignment / level with wall openings (offset not more than 5mm)
 No visible gap between window frame and wall
 No sign of rainwater leakage
 Ease of opening and closing
 When closed, tight fit with no gap
 No mortar droppings and paint drips on frames and glazing
 No sharp edges
 Window leaf and frame corners maintained at right angles
 Neat joint between window and wall internally and externally
 No visible gap between window leaf and frame (not more than
5mm)
 No dents, scratches or visible damage
 Accessories firmly secured and functioning
 No missing or defective accessories
 Glazing clean, evenly sealed with gasket for aluminium
windows
 Glazing no chips, cracks, scratches, mortar droppings, paint
drips
 No squeaky sound during swinging the leaf
8 Painting  No obvious brush line
 Surfaces are evenly painted
 Good opacity, no patchiness resulted from touch up works
 Free from peeling, blistering and chalkiness
 No tonal variation, discoloration and fading
1.2.7 PSB Quality Certificate
Where two or more alternative materials are proposed by the Contractor under subclause 1.2.5
"Approval Of Samples And Trade Names", the SO Rep may at his sole discretion give preference to
the use of a material that is approved under any of the PSB quality certification schemes.
1.2.8 Storage Facility For Cement
Where storage of cement is required, the Contractor shall provide adequate storage facilities at the Site
to accommodate cement up to two weeks' requirements for the Works.
The store to accommodate the cement shall be constructed so that each consignment of cement can
be separately stacked. Each consignment of cement shall also be used in the same sequence as they
are delivered, that is, on a "first-in first-out" basis.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cement stored at the Site is kept dry and properly protected against
loss or damage at all times.
1.2.9 Precautions Against Materials Being Taken Out Of Site
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of cement and all other materials delivered to
the Site and shall therefore ensure adequate protection and prevention of such materials from being
taken out of the Site. The SO Rep will not accept any excuse for materials taken out of the Site by the
Contractor, his foreman or other individual even without the knowledge of the Contractor who is deemed
to have provided for proper control against such malpractice. If it is established that cement or any
other material is taken out of the construction Site without specific written approval from the SO Rep,
this shall be deemed to be an irregularity and inter-alia, the right of the Contractor to compensation for
price fluctuations for all materials shall lapse.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(69)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-70
1.2.10 Ready-Mixed Concrete from Approved Suppliers
The Contractor shall obtain ready-mixed concrete from any of the pre-approved suppliers. Provide the
name and address of the ready-mixed concrete suppliers to the SO Rep. The use of ready-mixed
concrete shall be subject to the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep. All Delivery Orders for ready-
mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be endorsed by the Employer's Resident Technical Officer
and submitted to the SO Rep.
Failure to inform the SO Rep or non-compliance with the terms and conditions set by the SO Rep for
the use of ready-mixed concrete shall, inter-alia, result in the Contractor forfeiting his right under the
Contract to claim compensation for price fluctuations for all materials.
1.2.11 Water
Water approved by the SO Rep shall be used for building purposes except where specified in Clause 4.3
"Water". The Contractor shall pay for all charges and temporary plumbing required.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(70)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-71
1.2.12 SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS
1.2.12.1 Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Employer
Notwithstanding other provisions in the Specifications, the Contractor shall have the option to purchase
the following concreting materials from the Employer:
(a) Ordinary Portland Cement

(b) 20mm Granite Aggregate
(c) Concreting Sand
For the purpose of this clause, these materials to be supplied by Employer shall hereinafter be referred
to as the “Protected Materials” and their respective quantities indicated by the Contractor shall
hereinafter be referred as the “Protected Quantity” for the purpose of this clause only.
.
1.2.12.2 Quantity To Be Supplied
The Contractor shall indicate the respective quantities of the above materials to be purchased from the
Employer in Annex D – Part A of the Form of Tender, subject to the Maximum Protected Quantity
specified therein. The quantities indicated shall exclude the quantities required for Contractor’s source
of precast components supplied from overseas as the Employer only supplies the materials to sites
within Singapore.
The Contractor shall place his orders directly with the Employer and comply strictly with the "Conditions
For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer" as stipulated in Appendix A13. The Contractor shall
be deemed to have included all costs and expenses to be incurred by him in compliance with the
requirements stipulated in this clause in the Contract Sum.
The SO Rep reserves the right to allocate the monthly quantity to the Contractor as well as to nominate
the Employer’s supplier. The Contractor shall absorb the total quantity allocated to him. If the
Contractor's requirement is more than the Employer's capacity to supply, the SO Rep may direct the
Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources. In this event, the Contractor shall bear
any additional cost and expense so incurred.
1.2.12.3 Quantity To be Protected
The quantity to be covered under the provision of this clause shall be as stipulated in the Maximum
Protected Quantity (MPQ) or Protected Quantity (PQ) whichever applicable (hereinafter referred to as
the "Protected Quantity"). The Contractor shall be invoiced for the Protected Quantity at the Basic Price.
In the event that the source of any precast concrete components listed in Annex E of the Form of Tender
is obtained from the Employer, the Protected Quantity shall be reduced according to the quantities
indicated in the same Annex E and the Contractor shall be notified within one (1) month from the date
of the Letter of Acceptance.
In the event that the tender offer for Option B - Dry Internal Partition Wall System is accepted, the
Protected Quantity shall be reduced according to the quantities indicated in the Form of Tender.
The HDB posted prices of the Protected Materials at any time shall be deemed to be those in the HDB's
Monthly Price Lists which are also available for viewing at the Procurement Office, Basement 1 HDB
Hub.
The Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price for the Protected Materials
and Protected Quantity, at the date Fourteen (14) days before the closing date of the Tender (hereinafter
referred to as the "Basic Price"), for the Protected Materials. To illustrate: if a Tender closes on the
14th day of a particular month, the Contractor is deemed to have based his Tender on the posted price
prevailing on the last day of the preceding month.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(71)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-72
1.2.12 SUPPLY OF CONCRETING MATERIALS (CONT’D)
1.2.12.3 Quantity To be Protected (Cont’d)
In the event of the Contractor failing to obtain the Protected Quantity in full throughout the Time for
Completion and any time during which liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract, a shortfall
recovery shall be effected using the following formula:
Amount of Shortfall Recovery = PB x (QP - QA)
where: PB = Basic Price;

QP = Protected Quantity
(MPQ or PQ where applicable);
QA = Actual quantity purchased under this clause;
In a situation where the Employer is not able to supply in full the Protected Quantity and the SO Rep
has directed the Contractor to supplement his requirement from other sources, such purchases shall
not be covered by the provisions under this clause. However, for the purpose of ascertaining for shortfall
quantity, the quantity purchased from the Contractor's own source shall be included in QA when
determining whether the Contractor has obtained in full the Protected Quantity.
In a situation where the Contractor’s local production of precast concrete components are subsequently
carried out in overseas precast plants or where a change in the design of the Works or where the use
of crushed granite fines pursuant to clause 4.2.1 of the Specifications results in substantial changes to
the quantity of concreting materials required, upon request by the Contractor with sufficient
substantiation and verified by the SO Rep, the Protected Quantity may be reviewed and adjusted
subject to approval by the Employer.
For this purpose, the Contractor shall be required to maintain proper documentary evidence of the
delivery of each of the materials and such evidence shall be duly endorsed by the SO Rep.
1.2.12.4 Supply Of Concreting Materials From The Contractor’s Sources
The Contractor shall be allowed to use his own supply only after the Protected Quantity or Approved
Protected Quantity, whichever is applicable, has been used up. The Contractor shall be required to
seek the SO Rep’s approval in writing prior to using his own supply.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the quality of the concreting materials obtained from his own
supply shall fully comply with the Specifications.
1.2.13 AGGREGATES FOR NON-CONCRETING WORKS
Where the contractor intends to buy imported aggregates that fail the S2 or S3 Tests under the BCA
testing regime and use these aggregates for non-concreting works must seek prior written permission
from the SO Rep.
The contractor is required to inform BCA (Strategic Materials Department, Attn: Officer-in-Charge, e-
mail to tan_wee_kwang@bca.gov.sg and ken_lee@bca.gov.sg) of such purchases by providing the
following details and cc a copy of the e-mail to the relevant officer of the Employer within 7 days of
approval from the SO Rep to use the aggregates for the said project:
(a) Project Name;

(b) Project Location;
(c) Contact details of relevant officer of the Employer overseeing the project;
(d) Name of Importer of the Aggregates;
(e) Quantity of Aggregates (Tonnes) Delivered;
(f) Date of Delivery;
(g) Intended Non-concreting Use of Aggregates;
(h) The Contractor shall declare that he has obtained the SO Rep's permission for the intended non-
concreting use;
(i) Location and Quantity of Aggregates Used;
(j) Remarks.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(72)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-73
1.2.14 PROVISION OF SPARE TILES
The Contractor shall provide spare tiles for the tiles installed in the residential units according to the
table below.
Provision Per
S/No Location
Dwelling Unit
1 Kitchen Wall 5
2 Kitchen Floor 5
3 Toilet Wall 5
4 Toilet Floor 5
5 Living Room Floor 5
6 Balcony Tiles 5
7 Service Yard Skirting 5
8 Accent Tiles - Kitchen 2
9 Accent Tiles - Toilet 2
The spare tiles shall be properly wrapped with stretch film or any equivalent transparent protective
material that would enable visual inspection of the packaged tiles. The spare tiles shall also be secured
together by means of plastic strapping and protected at the corners with rubberized corner protectors.
The packaging shall be approved by the SO Rep.
The brand, code number and size of the tiles as well as relevant contact information shall be indicated
on a label and placed within the packaging for identification purpose. A typical sample of the labelling
is shown below:
COMPLIMENTARY TILES FROM HDB

TOILET WALL TILE *
Brand :
Code No :
Size :
Note: Please contact the Building Service Centre at Tel no. _________________ or Branch Office
Service Line at Tel no. ____-______ if you wish to return the tiles
*subject to location
*subject to location
For avoidance of tonal variation of the spare tiles, the Contractor shall keep record of each batch of tiles
installed in the residential units and set aside the spares tiles from the same batch.
All spare tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage or chipping. The spare tiles shall be placed
in the household shelter just before the residential units are handed over to the Employer.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(73)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-74
1.3 LABOUR
1.3.1 Labour Laws
The Contractor shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's working hours and holidays in
accordance with current laws and regulations. He shall keep records and produce them for inspection
by the SO Rep.
1.3.2 Keeping Records Of Workmen
The Contractor shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement of non-citizen workmen.
Work Permits from MOM shall be obtained for these workmen. The Contractor shall be held solely
liable for and shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all actions against the Employer for employing
foreign workmen without permits.
The Contractor shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on Site. These records shall include
the following information :
(a) Name of Workmen (and alias if any)

(b) Identity Card No./Passport No.
(c) Address
(d) Work Permit No., if any
(e) Expiry date of work permit
This information shall be recorded before any workman is allowed to commence duty. Appropriate
action will be taken by the SO Rep if the Contractor fails to record any of the abovementioned
information of any worker found at the Site.
1.3.3 Employment Of Illegal Immigrants (Prohibition)
For the purpose of this subclause "Illegal Immigrants" shall refer to any person who enters the
Republic of Singapore in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory
modification or re-enactment thereof.
The Contractor shall ascertain the legitimacy of all Foreign Workers employed by him and/or any sub-
contractor prior to employment and throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract. Clarification as to the legitimacy of Foreign
Workers may be made with the Immigration Authority, the Ministry of Manpower and/or the Police.
The Contractor shall ensure that no illegal immigrants are employed by him and/or any sub-contractor
in the execution of the Works. The Employer shall not be responsible for any such act or acts by the
Contractor and/or any of his sub-contractors and the Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for all
consequences arising thereof.
1.3.4 Biometric Time Attendance System for Manpower Data Collection
The Contractor shall propose, supply, deliver, install and set up; including testing and commissioning,
and subsequent maintenance of a biometric time attendance system for personnel entering or leaving
the worksite throughout the Time For Completion. The Contractor shall also propose the mode of
authentication (e.g. fingerprint, facial recognition etc.).
The system shall be located at all worksite entrance and exit for the purpose of electronically monitoring
and tracking the manpower usage throughout the Time For Completion.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed proposal to the SO Rep for approval within 14 days from the date
of the Letter of Acceptance. The proposal shall include, but not limited to, the following details:
(a) Type of system to be implemented;

(b) Track record of proposed system in similar projects and environment in Singapore;
(c) Proposed location(s) of the system at site;
(d) Type of access barrier (e.g. Tripod turnstile, flap barrier, swing barrier etc.)
(e) Installation method;
(f) Maintenance plan.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(74)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-75
1.3 LABOUR (CONT’D)
1.3.4 Biometric Time Attendance System for Manpower Data Collection (Cont’d)
The system shall be able to accurately monitor and track the manpower under their respective trade.
At each controlled access location, the system shall be able to achieve a maximum clearance time of 1
minute for every 10 persons.
The system shall be able to generate the manpower report according to Building & Construction
Authority’s current ePSS (Electronic Productivity Submission System) in Microsoft Excel format (please
refer to BCA’s website). The Contractor shall refer to BCA’s website (https://www.bca.gov.sg/epss/ ) for
the latest requirements on manpower submission to ePSS.
The system shall be able to generate raw data or output in the required format which shall include but
not limited to, the following details:
(a) Employee name;

(b) Date;
(c) Clock in time;
(d) Clock out time;
(e) Total number of working hours at site;
(f) Classification of workers (e.g. Tiler, painter etc.);
(g) Personal identification number (i.e. NRIC/ FIN/ WP no.)
(h) CoreTrade Registration ID
The system shall be able to generate trend charts to show the total manpower used in mandays under
the respective trade over time.
There shall be a real time monitoring and recording device installed at each controlled access point to
prevent any fraudulent attempt by the site personnel.
The system shall be equipped with suitable measure(s) (e.g. backup battery supply etc.) such that the
integrity of the manpower monitoring data is not affected during power outage. The Contractor shall
ensure that the system is protected against unauthorised editing of collected manpower tracking data,
virus or malicious software which may otherwise corrupt the system.
In the event of system breakdown, the Contractor shall ensure that there are alternative mean(s) to
continue to monitor and track the manpower under their respective trades. The Contractor shall bear all
cost and expenses in carrying out the necessary repairs and/or replacements to the equipment installed
to resume system operation.
The Contractor shall submit the manpower tracking data in the Contract to BCA through the ePSS at
monthly intervals or at other frequencies as required by BCA. A copy of the submitted manpower report
shall also be submitted to the SO Rep.
1.3.5 Allocation Of Man-Year Entitlements
Where materials, goods or products for the Works are to be purchased and/or obtained by the
Contractor from HDB and/or the Employer, the Contractor shall allocate Man-Year Entitlements to such
suppliers and/or contractors engaged by HDB and/or the Employer for the supply of such materials,
goods or products. This requirement shall be applicable for, but not limited to, the supply of precast
components and cut and bend steel reinforcement bars which are supplied by HDB and/or the
Employer.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising
from his compliance with the requirements stipulated in this subclause.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(75)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-76
1.3 LABOUR (CONT’D)
1.3.6 Employment Of Skilled Tilers
The Contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good workmanship for all tiling
Works. They shall possess Skill Evaluation Certificate on tiling works from local institutions. A list of
these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed
to commence work. These workers are also required to wear identification pass upon approval by the
SO Rep. The pass shall be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the Site, by their colour, size
or pattern.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
1.4.1 Provision Of Construction Equipment
Where the Contract comprises 200 or more dwelling and/or commercial units, the Contractor shall
provide for a minimum of one number concrete pump, one number crane and one number rough terrain
forklift to the Site.
Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall provide one tower or luffing crane and
one passenger cum material hoist per building block of six storeys and above regardless of the number
of units in the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications for
the construction of all building blocks.
1.4.2 Technical Specification
(a) Concrete Pump
The concrete pump shall be either trailer mounted or truck mounted type. The pump shall have
an output of at least 40 m³ per hour of compacted concrete.
The pump shall be used for casting of slabs from the second storey to the roof of all building
Blocks / MSCP.
The requirement for provision of concrete pump may be waived at the discretion of the SO Rep
if an extra crane over and above the specified requirements is used to transport fresh concrete.
(b) Crane
The crane shall be either crawler truck mounted, rough terrain or tower crane. The age of the
crane used on the Site shall not exceed 15 years.
The lifting capacity of the crawler truck mounted or rough terrain crane shall be at least 20 metric
tonnes.
The moment capacity of the tower crane shall be at least 50 metre-tonnes.
The crane shall be based on the Site during the concreting stage. The concreting stage shall be
defined as the duration of concreting work from the second storey slab to the roof of all building
blocks.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(76)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-77
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT (CONT’D)
1.4.2 Technical Specification (Cont’d)
(c) Passenger Cum Material Hoist
The design of the passenger cum material hoist shall be in accordance with BS 4465 or other
approved equivalent standards. The payload shall be at least one tonne and the travel speed of
the cage shall be at least 25.0 m per minute. For passenger cum material hoist serving buildings
of more than 16 storeys, each hoist shall have a minimum of 2 winches. The Contractor shall
ensure that the foundations, the masts and tie-backs for the passenger cum material hoist be
designed by a PE. The design calculations and detailings shall be certified by the PE. The
Contractor shall also ensure that his PE submit a Certificate of Supervision to the SO Rep not
later than two weeks after the completion of installation of each hoist.
The age of the hoist used on the Site shall not exceed 10 years.
The hoist shall be provided and commissioned for use before concreting the sixth storey of each
building block of six storeys and above.
Provide an overloading device to detect and stop the current if the hoist is overloaded.
Provide a siren warning device to warn users that the hoist is ascending or descending.
Provide a "one-way" locking device to the swing gate at every landing of the hoist in accordance
with the details shown in the Drawings or sketch attached.
Provide a bell system for all hoists. The bell shall be loud enough for the hoist operator to hear
whenever the hoist is required at a different level. There shall be a bell activation button at every
storey level for the purpose of calling the hoist operator to bring the hoist to that level.
(d) Rough Terrain Forklift
The rough terrain forklift shall have a lifting capacity of at least 2 tonnes and a lifting height of at
least 3.6 m.
The rough terrain forklift shall be provided on the Site not later than the completion of concreting
work for the sixth storey slab of the first building block or any other time as instructed by the SO
Rep and shall not be removed without his prior approval.
(e) Formwork System
Generally, the Contractor shall provide formwork system in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and design calculations of all
formwork system to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the Letter of Acceptance.
Trial setting out of the formwork system shall be carried out on the Site two weeks after approval
of the submission. Formwork support system of beams and slabs shall consist of rigid steel
props or steel frames of adequate strength.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(77)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-78
1.4.3 Recovery For Non-Provision
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses
incurred by him for compliance with the requirements stipulated in this Clause including all
subclauses under it.
In the event of the Contractor not providing all or any of the specified Construction Equipment to the
Site as required under this Clause, including all subclauses under it, without prejudice to the Employer's
rights under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates specified
hereunder and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming
due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor :
Type Rate Recoverable
Concrete Pump $100,000 per number

Crane $200,000 per number
Passenger cum Material Hoist $40,000 per number
Rough Terrain Forklift $60,000 per number
Formwork System $150,000 per set per building block
The above rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the Contractor and
Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the provision of the specified
Construction Equipment. In addition to the abovementioned recovery, the SO Rep may also exercise
his rights under Clause on "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against the Contractor.
In the event the SO Rep approves in writing that all or any of the specified Construction Equipment
need not be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or
rates specified above in this subclause and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from
any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from the
Contractor. In such event, the SO Rep may not impose any charge under Clause on "Nuisance and
Irregularities" against the Contractor.
In the event approval in writing is given by the SO Rep for the replacement of a concrete pump with an
extra crane over and above the specified requirement for provision of cranes, there shall be no recovery
by the Employer from the Contractor. In such event, the additional costs arising out of the replacement
shall not be reimbursed by the Employer to the Contractor.
Notwithstanding other provisions in this Clause including all subclauses under it, if the Contractor incurs
additional costs and expenses over and above the agreed rate or rates specified above in complying
with the requirements stipulated in this Clause, the Contractor alone shall bear such additional costs
and expenses in full.
All differences and/or disputes arising under this Clause including all subclauses under it, (including
questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer whose decision
shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(78)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-79
1.4.4 Maintenance
All Construction Equipment provided to the Site shall be kept in good working order at all times and the
Contractor shall comply with all statutory regulations in relation to the Construction Equipment.
(a) Mobile Crane
Before operating a mobile crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane
shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the condition
of parts/components by an Authorised Examiner. Any Defect found in the checking shall
be rectified immediately; and
(iii) Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised

Examiner.
The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
and keep all records and certificates of checking and testing in the site office for inspection by
the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
(i) Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. The licensed
crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months; and
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane
once in every six months.
(b) Tower Crane
Before operating a tower crane on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the crane. The latest overhaul servicing of the crane
shall be conducted within one year before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the condition
be rectified immediately;
(iii) Record of checking the installation and functioning of safety devices by the Authorised
Examiner; and
(iv) Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised

Examiner.
The Contractor shall maintain the crane in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall :
(i) Require a licensed crane operator to check the crane daily before operation. The licensed
crane operator shall have a Certificate of Competence;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the crane once in every three
months;
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the installation and functioning of the safety
devices once in every six months; and
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(79)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-80
1.4.4 Maintenance (Cont'd)
(b) Tower Crane
(iv) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the crane
once in every six months.
For every extension of height made on the tower mast and before operating the crane with the
new height, the Contractor shall engage the Authorised Examiner to conduct test and thorough
visual examination on the crane.
(c) Passenger Cum Material Hoist
Before operating a passenger cum material hoist on the Site, the Contractor shall submit the
following :
(i) Record of latest overhaul servicing of the hoist. The latest overhaul servicing of the hoist
shall be conducted within six months before transferring it to the Site;
(ii) Record of checking the connecting devices between parts/components and the conditions
be rectified immediately; and
(iii) Certificate of test/thorough visual examination of lifting equipment by the Authorised

Examiner.
The Contractor shall maintain the hoist in good working order at all times on the Site. Document
the SO Rep upon request. The Contractor shall:
(i) Require an authorised hoist operator to check and operate the hoist daily before
operation;
(ii) Engage a competent mechanic to conduct servicing of the hoist once in every three
months;
(iii) Engage the Authorised Examiner to check the connecting devices between
parts/components and condition of parts/components once in every three months. Any
Defect found in the checkings shall be rectified immediately; and
(iv) Engage the Authorised Examiner to carry out test and visual examination on the hoist
once in every three months.
(v) The swing gates are to be maintained, checked and certified to be in good working
condition by the Authorised Examiner every month.
(vi) Interlocking gates shall be provided at every lift landing level and they shall comply with
the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation including any
amendment or re-enactment thereto.
(d) Authorised Examiner
For the purposes of this Clause including all subclause under it, the Authorised Examiner is any
person who is approved by the Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health of the Ministry
of Manpower by a Certificate in writing for the purpose of carrying out examinations and tests on
lifting equipment in accordance with the Workplace Safety & Health (General Provisions)
Regulations.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(80)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-81
1.4.5 Approved Construction Equipment
All Construction Equipment used at the Site as specified hereunder shall be obtained from Approved
Suppliers registered with HDB. Such Construction Equipment are :
(a) mobile crane;

(b) tower crane;
(c) gondola;
(d) mast climbing platform; and
(e) metal scaffold.
The HDB Materials List can be inspected at HDB websites ; www.hdb.gov.sg or http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg
For Construction Equipment obtained from other sources, such Construction Equipment shall firstly be
registered with the HDB before the Contractor can use such Construction Equipment at the Site.
Where, such Construction Equipment is used at the Site for a duration of less than a week, the SO Rep
may at his sole discretion, waive the aforementioned requirement. Under such a case, there shall be
no adjustment to the Contract Sum.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(81)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-82
1.4.6 Provision And Deployment Of Equipment To Improve Site Productivity
(a) Construction Machinery And Equipment To Be Deployed At The Site
The Contractor shall provide and deploy suitable construction machinery and equipments to
improve site productivity. The Contractor shall submit the Machinery Utilization Plan within 3
months from the date of the Letter of Acceptance to the SO Rep for his approval. The
contractor shall provide for a minimum of one number of ride-on power trowel, one Boom lift,
one scissors lift and one telescopic handler.
Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall provide an Automatic Wheel
Washer per site entrance and a Mast work Platform per building block.
(b) Technical Specification
(i) Ride-on Power Trowel
The power trowel shall be used for power floating of finished concrete to achieve a smooth
finish in accordance to the Drawings and specifications.
The requirement for provision of the power trowel may be waived at the discretion of the
SO Rep if the contract does not require power floating of finished concrete.
(ii) Boom Lift and Scissors Lifts
The boom lift and scissors lift shall be used for any works that is needed to be carried out
at soft storey, void deck space and external façade.
The boom lift and scissors lift shall also be used for rectification works from the second
storey to sixth storey for both building blocks/MSCP during the handing over stage.
(iii) Telescopic Handler
The telescopic handler shall be provided on site not later than the completion of concreting
work for the sixth storey slab of the first building block or any other time as instructed by
the SO Rep and shall not be removed without his prior approval.
(iv) Mast Work Platform
The mast work platform shall be used for any external façade works (skimming and painting)
for each building block in preparation for handing over.
The requirement for provision of the mast work platform may be waived at the discretion of
the SO Rep if the layout of the building block does not allow for erection of mast work
platform.
(v) Automatic Wheel Washer
The automatic wheel washer shall be used to replace the manual manpower needed at the
site entrance to wash and clean the wheels of the vehicles leaving the site.
The Wheel washer shall be provide onsite upon completion of substructure works or at any
time instructed by the SO Rep and shall not be removed without his prior approval.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(82)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-83
1.4.6 Provision And Deployment Of Equipment To Improve Site Productivity
(c) Recovery For Non-Provision
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum for all costs and
expenses incurred by him in compliance with the requirements as stipulated in this Clause.
In the event if the Contractor does not provide all or any of the specified construction
equipment to the site as required under this clause, without prejudice to the Employer’s rights
under the Contract, the Contractor shall be indebted to the Employer at the rate or rates
specified hereunder and such indebtedness shall be deducted by the Employer from any
monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be recovered by the Employer as a debt from
the Contractor:
Construction Equipments Rate Recoverable
Ride-on power trowel $ 2,000 per Contract
Boom lift $ 24,000 per Contract
Scissors lift $ 24,000 per Contract
Telescopic handler $ 6,000 per Contract
Mast work platform $ 18,000 per residential block
Automatic wheel washer $ 25,000 per Contract
The above rates shall be deemed to have been fully agreed and accepted by the contractor and
Employer as the costs and expenses allowed by the Contractor for the provision of the
Construction Equipment. In addition to the abovementioned recovery, the SO Rep may also
exercise his rights under Clause on “Nuisance and Irregularities” to impose a charge against the
Contractor for his failure to provide and deploy the specified construction equipment.
In the event, the SO Rep approves in writing that all or any of the specified Construction
Equipment need not be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be indebted to the
Employer at the rates specified above in this sub clause and such indebtedness shall be
deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or be
recovered by the Employer as a debt from the Contractor. In such event, the SO Rep may not
impose any charge under Clause on “Nuisance and Irregularities” against the Contractor
Any difference and/or disputes arising from this Clause including all sub clauses under it
(including questions relating to interpretation) shall be determined by the Superintending Officer
whose decisions shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(83)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-84
1.5 SAFETY
1.5.1 Site Safety Measures
(a) General Requirement
The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Workplace Safety & Health Act (hereafter
referred to as "the Act" for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) and its
Subsidiary Legislation including the provisions of the Workplace Safety and Health
(Construction) Regulations (hereafter referred to as "the Regulations" for the purposes of this
clause including all subclauses under it) and any amendment or re-enactment thereto. The
subsidiary legislations are:-
(i) The Workplace Safety and Health (General Provisions) Regulations

(ii) The Workplace Safety and Health (Registration of Factories) Regulations
(iii) The Workplace Safety and Health (First-Aid) Regulations
(iv) The Workplace Safety and Health (Exemption) Order
(v) The Workplace Safety and Health (Composition of Offences) Regulations
(vi) The Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations
(vii) The Workplace Safety and Health (Risk Management) Regulations
(viii) The Workplace Safety and Health (Workplace Safety and Health Officers) Regulations
Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of
Registration, under the Act and its subsidiary legislation, The Workplace Safety And Health
(Registration Of Factories) Regulations.
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related
to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall
not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of
safe and sound practice.
The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions
shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the
SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his
workmen when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety
provisions, to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provisions are safe. The Contractor
shall submit a safety management system to the SO Rep within 14 days from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance for approval prior to the commencement of the Works.
The submission of the safety management system shall comply with and be kept in the site office
and made available for reference at all times.
The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen, exit/entry points of
buildings and passenger cum material hoist area.
The Contractor shall submit drawings, detailings and calculation for all temporary structures as
required, certified by his Professional Engineer, for approval at least one week before the
commencement of the Works unless otherwise specified. The approval of the SO Rep shall not
relieve the Contractor and his Professional Engineer of the need to ensure the adequacy and
sufficiency of the safety provisions.
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all cost and expense for the
safety provisions and for all additional costs that may arise from amendments to the Act and its
Subsidiary Legislation or changes in the requirements of MOM and the HDB.
The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the requirements
specified hereunder are strictly complied with at all times.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(84)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-85
1.5 SAFETY (CONT’D)
1.5.1 Site Safety Measures (Cont’d)
(b) Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain all metal access scaffold for all multi-storey
carpark/garage or buildings other than residential of 4 storeys and above or 12.0m in height and
above. This requirement may be waived, subject to approval by the SO Rep, where industrialised
and semi-industrialised methods of construction together with peripheral safety nets are
employed. Under such case, there shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor
shall allow free use of the scaffold by all sub-contractors, specialists, artisans and other
tradesmen employed by the Employer or the Contractor.
The metal access scaffold shall be of the type approved by the MOM. It shall comply with the
requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Scaffolding, CP 14 and any
amendment or re-enactment thereto. The metal access scaffold shall be prezinc galvanised or
other approved by the SO Rep.
The metal access scaffold shall be erected, or substantially extended to, or dismantled, by
approved scaffold contractor, in accordance with the Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations. The
metal access scaffold and any components therein shall be designed according to the CP14 and
Factories (Scaffolds) Regulations by a Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor (herein
referred to as “PE”) and they shall be removed only with the permission of the SO Rep. The PE’s
drawings and calculations shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the erection and
dismantling. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not duly overload the RC
structure. The submission shall be submitted before the commencement of the works.
The metal access scaffold, for access and finishing work, shall be erected ahead of the structural
work (including the construction of water tank rooms), from the second storey and shall be
supported by cantilevered platforms erected in accordance with the drawings of the PE. The
cantilevered platforms shall project about 1.1m from the edge of the building or any other
distance approved by the SO Rep. Where the structure does not allow the metal access scaffold
to be erected from the second storey or where the building is less than 12m in height, the
Contractor may erect the metal access scaffold from the first storey subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.
The material used for the metal working platform shall be prezinc galvanised steel and comply
with SS 280. The working platform shall be adequately secured to the metal access scaffold
frame at the required levels. The connections between metal working platform and metal access
scaffold frame, and between the working platforms shall be subjected to the approval of the SO
Rep. For any portion of the working platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor
may use timber working platform subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The working platform
shall be complete with at least 90mm high coloured toeboards and metal guardrails of at least
1.1m above the platform. The vertical distance between any 2 adjacent guardrails shall not
exceed 600mm. Any working platform or workplace and the guardrail immediately above it shall
not exceed 600mm. The working platform shall be at least 500mm in width and distance between
the edge of the platform shall not exceed 300mm from building edge
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire
external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the fence
closely. A 90mm high toeboard shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation, there
shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or
repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Maximum mesh size : 15mm square
(ii) Twine No. : Minimum 350D
(iii) Minimum 12 ply
(iv) Knot Type : Single or English knot
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(85)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-86
(b) Metal Access Scaffold And Working Platforms (Cont’d)
The overlying screening net shall be installed on the entire external face of the access scaffold
and its installation shall follow the erection of the metal access scaffold closely. The SO Rep
shall have the right to decide on the colour of the net all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.
The metal access scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tie-backs.
All tie-backs shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
(c) Prefabricated Mesh Barricade
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain a vertical prefabricated mesh barricade
(hereafter referred to as “mesh barricade” for the purpose of this clause including all subclauses
under it) for all peripheral open sides of construction level of building (excluding multi-storey
carpark/garage) where a person is liable to fall from height. Mesh barricade shall be of sound
construction and produced in the factory and installed at the construction level from the inside of
the building. Mesh barricade and its support shall be prezinc galvanised or other approved
equivalent by the SO Rep, easily installed and dismantled, and reusable throughout the
construction (super-structure) stage. External works of the building, such as painting, touching
up works, repair and redecoration, and other minor works, shall be carried out using mechanical
suspended scaffold or other vertical access equipment.
Where the use of mesh barricade is not feasible, as interpreted by SO Rep, during the
construction (super-structure) stage, the contractor can counter-propose localised alternative
system other than the use of metal access scaffold
Mesh barricade/ counter-proposals for localised alternative system, its vertical support and any
components therein shall be in modular sizes and designed according to the Workplace Safety
and Health (Construction) Regulations by a PE employed by the Contractor. The PE’s drawings
and calculation shall then be submitted to the SO Rep for approval within six weeks from the
Letter of Acceptance, before installation and use. Trial setting out of mesh barricade shall be
carried out on Site two weeks after approval of submission.
The mesh barricade shall be erected ahead of the structural work (including the construction of
water tank rooms) from the second storey and held by a supporting system designed by the said
PE. The height of the mesh barricade shall be at least 1.1m above the construction level. The
Contractor and his PE shall ensure that the substrate at which the mesh barricade is affixed to,
can resist the designed imposed loads. The PE shall satisfy himself that his proposal shall not
duly overload the RC structure.
Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to
cover the entire internal face of the mesh barricade. The installation of the net shall follow the
erection of the fence closely. Where necessary, a 90mm high toeboard shall be provided at the
base of the net from the inside of mesh barricade. After installation, there shall be no opening
between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be replaced or repaired immediately. The
net shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Maximum mesh size (square) : 15mm square

(ii) Twine No. : Minimum 350D
(iii) Knot Type : Single or English knot
(iv) Minimum 12 ply
The vertical supports of mesh barricade shall be effectively anchored to the building structure.
All vertical supports shall be painted with a bright colour for easy identification.
The mesh barricade shall be erected according to a pre-determined safe work procedure
established by the Contractor, or substantially dismantled, by trained erectors, under the
immediate supervision of a competent supervisor. The mesh barricade and its components shall
only be erected and dismantled by workers using life-line and safety belts or other equivalent, if
not better, means of preventing a fall.
The Contractor shall under no circumstance, use the prefabricated mesh barricade and vertical
supports for other purposes.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(86)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-87
(d) Personal Protective Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment to all workmen
employed on the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that such personal protective equipment
comply with the requirements of the Regulations. The Contractor shall also ensure that all
equipment are properly used by his workmen during the course of their work. The Contractor
shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen.
The forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times. The colour
code of safety helmets provided by the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the
Regulations. Three mirrors of sizes 600 mm x 1500 mm are to be installed for the workers to
check their personal protective equipment during Tool Box Meeting. The locations of these
mirrors are to be approved by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide life-lines and safety harness for workers who are required to carry
out work within 2m from any open sides; at or near the external of the building blocks, any floor
or top most construction level, lift shafts and void areas or any other locations as directed by the
SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
Approved Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) station shall be set up near the site entrance
where the PPE are issued/stored.
(e) Safety (Anti-Fall) Net
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a safety net system to catch person(s) falling whilst
working in any location from where he would be liable to fall.
The safety net system shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor
may propose an alternative system, to be certified by his PE, to the SO Rep for approval.
The safety net shall comply with SS 292 or other approved standards. The net shall be of
sufficient size and strength to catch any person for whose protection it is to be used and the net
shall be so located to cover the area of the possible fall.
The Contractor shall conduct a sample test on the safety net system, comprising the net and its
supporting structures, before it is installed. Subsequent tests shall be carried out when directed
by the SO Rep.
For all building blocks of four storeys and above, a peripheral safety net system shall be provided.
Initially the net shall be installed at the second storey. As construction progresses, it shall be
repositioned to follow the topmost working level but shall be kept at not more than 6.0m below
it. It shall be removed only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Where access scaffolding is used, or any alternative safety measure approved by the SO Rep is
used, a peripheral safety net system is not required.
The colour of the safety netting shall be approved by the SO Rep. Safety netting of orange colour
shall not be used unless such colour is specifically decided by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's
cost and expense.
(f) Working Platforms For Lift Shafts, Central Refuse Chute And Voids
The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his Professional
Engineer, for the erection of lift shafts and void walls except for central refuse chute. The lift shaft
and central refuse chute platforms shall effectively cover the voids at alternate storeys.
The lift shaft, central refuse chute and void wall platforms shall be left in place until approval is
given by the SO Rep to remove them.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(87)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-88
(g) Protective Shelter As Overhead Shelter
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain protective shelter as overhead shelter at every
point of entry/exit to buildings of two more storeys height. The protective shelter shall be
constructed immediately below the second storey. It shall protrude at least 3.0m from the building
edge. It shall have a clear width of at least 1.5m and a clear height of at least 2.0m as shown in
the drawings. If the protective shelter is intended for access by forklift, it shall have a clear width
of at least 2.0m and a clear height of at least 3.0m.
The contractor shall ensure that the protective shelter rest on a rigid base. The protective shelter
shall be aesthetically pleasing, free of rust and does not trap water. The access to, along and
egress from the entry/exit points shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of oil,
grease, water and other substances that may cause slipping and tripping.
The protective shelter shall be sufficiently strong enough to support a point load of at least 75
kg. It shall be endorsed in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements by a Professional
Engineer. The PE’s drawings, detailings and calculations shall be submitted for the approval of
the SO Rep.
The protective shelter can be made of curved metal roofing with a diameter of at least 1.5m or
pitched metal roofing with a slope of greater than one in two, with timber boarding below support
by steel pipes.
Alternatively, the Contractor can use the HDB patented protective shelter as shown in the Safety
Standard Detail Manual. The Contractor shall source on their own directly from suppliers. The
contractor can approach HDB’s Centre of Building Research (CBR) for more details on the
protective shelter.
(h) Peripheral Overhead Shelters
The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of more than 15m in
height. It shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the fourth storey slab. The
overhead shelter shall be at least 2m wide and erected at a height not more than 5m from the
base of the building, and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150 mm higher than the inner
edge. The overhead shelter shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 75-kg point
load.
(i) Barricades To Lift Openings, Voids, The Open Sides Of Buildings And Excavations
The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids and the open sides of buildings and
excavations where a person is liable to fall. The barricade shall be at least 1.1m high with 90mm
high toeboard and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a lateral point load of 50
kg. All services opening shall be fully covered and secured to prevent unauthorised removal.
(j) Mechanical Suspended Scaffold
Mechanical suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair and
redecoration and minor work. Where mechanical suspended scaffold system is to be used, the
Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration under the Workplace Safety & Health Act
from MOM and a written approval from the SO Rep prior to its installation and usage. The
mechanical suspended scaffold system shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore
Standard Code Of Practice For Suspended Scaffold CP20 and any amendment or re-
enactment thereto. Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffold
may be used for finishing Works. Life-lines shall be provided for the mechanical suspended
scaffold users to anchor their safety belts.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(88)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-89
(k) Authorised Operators For Machinery And Vehicles
The Contractor shall employ only qualified operators for his site machinery. The operator for the
machinery shall possess a Skill Evaluation Certificate (SEC) from the BCA Academy or other
approved training centre. For those machinery whereby BCA Academy or other approved
training centre does not conduct courses or practical tests for machinery operator, the Contractor
shall only authorise an experienced and trained operator who has at least a minimum of 2 years
experience in operating the machinery.
In the case of vehicles, which are operated within the contract boundary, the authorised operator
shall possess a minimum valid Class 3 driving licence from the Registrar of Vehicles (Singapore)
or its equivalent from their originating countries. The equivalent of a minimum Class 3 driving
licence shall first be verified by the respective embassy in Singapore and thereafter submitted to
the SO Rep for approval.
The Contractor shall record the particulars of the operators for the machinery and vehicles in the
prescribed form and submit to the SO Rep for approval one week before the commencement of
the Works. The prescribed form shall be updated and kept on the Site and made available for
inspection at all times.
(l) Safety Training
(i) Safety Orientation Course
The Contractor shall employ workmen who possess valid Safety Orientation Course
Certificates. The Contractor shall be required to ensure that his workmen attend a
prescribed safety refresher course at an interval of time to be decided by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(89)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-90
1.5.1 Site Safety Measures (Cont'd)
(l) Safety Training (Cont'd)
(ii) Safety Training Course
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send his employees/staff as stipulated
hereunder to MOM’s accredited training providers for appropriate safety training as shown
hereunder :
 Safety Training Courses Conducted by MOM’s Accredited Training Providers
Courses Applicable To
Specialist Diploma in Workplace Safety
Safety Personnel for registration as Workplace
and Health / Workplace Safety & Health
Safety & Health Officer (WSHO)
Officer (WSHO) Training Course
Construction Safety Course for Project Chairmen of Safety Committees, Project
Managers Managers and Engineers
Chairmen of Safety Committees, Managers,
Safety Management Course
Engineers and Supervisory Staff
Advanced Certificate in Workplace
Safety Coordinator
Safety and Health
Training Course for Safety Committee
Safety Committee Members
Members
Building Construction Safety Supervisor
Building Construction Foremen and Supervisors
Course
SIC (Manhole) for Supervisors Supervisors
Lifting Supervisors Safety Course Supervisors and Foremen
Industrial First Aid Course Workers, Safety Personnel and Supervisors
Industrial First Aid Refresher Course Trained First Aiders
Crawler Crane Operator Course:

New entrant programme
 Crane Operators
Refresher programme

Familiarisation programme
Erection of Metal Scaffold Erectors
Slingers/Riggers Course Workers, Foremen and Supervisors
Tower Crane Operator Course:

New Entrant Programme Crane Operators

Familiarisation Programme
Supervision of Metal Scaffold Erection Supervisors
Climbing Work Platform Operation Supervisors, workers and operators
Explosive Powered Tools Operation Workers and Operators
The safety training shall be applicable to all levels of employees/staff stipulated in this
subclause including top management at the work Site.
Particular attention shall be given to the needs of young employees/staff. Further training
shall be required where :
(1) Employees/staff are transferred or where employees/staff take on new

responsibilities or where a change in the work activity or work environment could
arise; and
(2) There is a change in the work equipment or systems of work in use.
Training shall be repeated periodically to ensure continued competence.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(90)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-91
(m) Tower Cranes And Other Tall Construction Equipment
The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions on the use of tower crane or other tall
Construction Equipment, imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore and Ministry of
Defence. In addition, the height clearance of tower crane or other tall Construction Equipment
shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before they are brought to the Site. Force limiting
device, speed limiters and moment limit switches shall be installed for all cranes.
The Contractor shall submit detailed layout drawings and safety requirement of the tower cranes
to MOM and the SO Rep for approval at least one month prior to their installation. The Safety
Factor for tower crane shall have a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of safety
for the tower crane. The Lifting load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader
beam and the lifting device. The tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest component
including the necessary lifting appliances. The slewing radii of the tower cranes shall not overlap,
unless the tower cranes are equipped with an anti-collision system. It is not permitted to be
hoisted over temporary building structures, outside the contract boundary and other sensitive
areas. The slewing limit switch shall be activated to stop the slewing action before the jib slews
into the overlap zone.
The jib of a tower crane shall not be allowed to slew outside the contract boundary lines without
the written approval of the SO Rep. The free standing mast of the tower crane must be certified
by the Contractor's PE prior to its use on the Site.
The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations of the type of foundation support
and the tie-back for the tower crane, duly endorsed by his PE, together with technical information
to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor's PE shall certify that the free standing height of the
mast is structurally adequate and sound before the tie-back is installed. No tower crane shall be
installed and supported on the constructed RC structure of a building.
(n) Access For The Use Of Mobile Crane And Piling Machines Next To Built-Up Area
Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to
existing buildings or public roads or MRT lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling
machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved by
the SO Rep. All such access shall be provided over adequate compacted hardcore base.
The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the cranes and piling machines and
for their lifting or pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load so as not
to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the access. The drawings and calculations endorsed
by the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the construction of the access.
The access shall be constructed according to the approved Drawings and maintained in a good
condition at all times throughout the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract. The access shall be inspected by the Contractor's PE
prior to its use.
(o) Warning Signs And Lights
The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900 mm x 600 mm at strategic points around
the periphery of the Site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the words
"DANGER - KEEP OUT" in the four official languages in red on white background with reflective
material and approved by the SO Rep. Warning lights shall be placed at similar positions at night
to serve as a warning.
If work is carried out near public roads, all signage shall comply with the recommendations of
the Temporary Road Signage Manual issued by the Land Transport Authority.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(91)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-92
(p) Mobile Crane
The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO Rep for approval
prior to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the crane
access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of the crane
access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the SO Rep. The boom
of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside the contract boundary
without the written approval of the SO Rep. All the hoisting area must be effectively barricaded.
The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of depressions,
excavated areas and other obstructions.
Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Safety Factor for mobile crane shall have
a minimum of 1.3, which includes the built-in factor of safety for the mobile crane. The lifting
load shall include the weight of the component, the spreader beam and the lifting device. The
tip-load shall have the capacity to hoist the heaviest component including all necessary lifting
appliances. A Permit-To-Hoist must be obtained before any hoisting operation is carried out. The
Contractor shall station a lifting supervisor on the Site to oversee and guide the crane operator
during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The cranes shall be tested by an "Authorised Examiner"
before its use on the Site irrespective of any valid test certificate. The Contractor shall ensure
daily checks are carried out by the crane operator and maintenance checks conducted once
every three months. The crane must have overhaul checks before it is used on the Site. Test
certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection records by the crane
operator, data on the Authorised Examiners and the Contractor's site engineer shall be properly
documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO Rep.
(q) Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger And Signalman
The Contractor shall comply with the Factories (Operation of Cranes) Regulations 1998. He
shall appoint at least one full time lifting supervisor to supervise all lifting operations of any crane
for the Site. However, where more than one crane is used on the Site, the number of lifting
supervisor employed by the Contractor shall be increased as required by the SO Rep. No lifting
activity shall be allowed without the supervision of the lifting supervisor.
The lifting supervisor shall have a minimum of 3 years of experience in construction work and
lifting operations. He must be a site foreman or site engineer and possesses a certificate on
Safety Instruction Course for Lifting Supervisor. He shall spend his time fully on all lifting activities
and ensure that unsafe conditions are rectified.
For lifting operation within the site not next to existing buildings, public roads or MRT lines, the
crane operators shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the operation of cranes.
The Contractor can employ crane operators with less than 2 years experience for lifting operation
on site but subject to the following conditions and approval by the SO Rep:
(i) The site must be situated in a non built-up area and not next to existing buildings, public
roads or MRT lines.
(ii) He shall enroll himself for the BCA Building Specialist Sponsorship (Crane Operations)
programme at the On-the-Job Training (OJT) stage and be subject to the passing
requirement of the programme.
(iii) Other measures as and when instructed by the SO Rep including the removal of such
crane operator if the crane operator is found to be not operating the crane in a safe
manner.
Notwithstanding other provisions within this clause, the employment of such crane operator will
not subject the Contractor to cost omission.
The Contractor can also employ apprentices from BCA Building Specialist Sponsorship (Crane
Operations) programme for lifting operation on site but subject to the following conditions and
approval by the SO Rep:
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(92)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-93
(q) Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger And Signalman (cont’d)
(i) The site must be situated in a non built-up area and not next to existing buildings, public
roads or MRT lines.
(ii) Contractor and crane supplier shall brief HDB on the risk assessment and control
measures prior to deploying an apprentice on site.
(iii) Tower crane operated by an apprentice shall be fitted with a data logger with e-alert
system. The alert system should be able to send real-time messages to his CAP mentor,
contractor’s PM, WSHO, consultant’s PM etc so that the apprentice’s performance could
be monitored and reviewed.
(iv) Tower crane is preferred to be sited on the inner side of building so that the building acts
as a buffer.
(v) Crane’s collapse zone must not overlap with existing buildings or public facilities when it
is free standing.
(vi) Apprentice shall operate the crane from the beginning of the construction. In the first few
months, he will get used to the crane without involving heavy lifting of precast
components.
(vii) Apprentice can only operate in the same crane on site till project completion and not
allowed to switch crane.
(viii) Apprentice shall not operate in a crane serving a building under construction with storey
height exceeding 25 storeys.
(ix) Apprentice shall pass a competency assessment under the BCA Building Specialist
Sponsorship (Crane Operations) programme before being allowed to lift heavy precast
components for installation.
(x) A maximum of one apprentice can be employed on each site.
(xi) Other measures as and when instructed by the SO Rep including the removal of the
apprentice if the apprentice is found to be not operating the crane in a safe manner
or/and not complying with the safety measures listed above.
Notwithstanding other provisions within this clause, the employment of apprentices from the BCA
Building Specialist Sponsorship (Crane Operations) programme will not subject the Contractor
to cost omission.
For lifting operation within the site which is next to existing buildings, public roads or MRT lines,
the crane operators shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in crane operation.
Nevertheless upon the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor is allowed to employ crane
operators with a minimum of 3 years experience in crane operation instead but shall subject to
the following conditions and approval by the SO Rep:
(i) The crane operators shall pass an assessment by BCA on their competency.
(ii) The contractor shall carry out risk analysis based on the positions of the cranes to decide
which cranes would be suitable for deploying such crane operators. Generally, this
means that such operators should operate tower cranes that are at least 50m away from
any existing buildings and facilities, and the collapse zone of the crane does not overlap
with existing buildings.
(iii) Other measures as and when instructed by the SO Rep.
Riggers and signalmen shall also be appointed for all lifting operations and they must have
completed an approved training course.
The crane operator, lifting supervisor, rigger and signalman shall carry out their duties strictly
according to the abovementioned Regulations and other duties as the SO Rep deems necessary
from time to time.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(93)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-94
(q) Crane Operator, Lifting Supervisor, Rigger And Signalman (Cont'd)
The Contractor shall submit a list of crane operators, lifting supervisors, riggers and signalmen
with their names, identification card or passport numbers, qualifications and years of experience
to the SO Rep for approval one week before the use of the crane. The list shall be updated and
kept on the Site at all times. The SO Rep reserves the right to examine the list as and when
required.
(r) Temporary Staircases
The Contractor shall provide and maintain 0.8m minimum wide temporary metal staircases from
one working floor to another. The staircases shall be placed against the adjacent staircase walls
or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction. The outer sides of the staircases
shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1m above the outer staircase strings. The bottom of the
staircases shall be covered fully with metal plate.
The Contractor shall engage a PE to design the staircases. The Professional Engineer's
drawings, detailings and calculation shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep before the
construction of the staircases.
(s) Gas Cylinders and Related Equipment
The Contractor shall use gas cylinders fitted with a low pressure gauge and a high pressure
gauge, a reducing valve with pressure regulator, and safety relief device. The gas cylinders shall
not be kept in the same room where welding, cutting or heating is being carried out or placed
within five metres of any source of heat. The gas cylinders must always be kept upright in a
wheeled-trolley.
The hose connecting a gas cylinder to an apparatus for cutting, welding, heating or other related
works shall be of good construction and sound material, free from Defect, properly maintained,
and not entangled or kinked.
A flashback arrester or any other similar device which stops flashback that is acceptable to the
Commissioner for Workplace Safety and Health must be fitted at every outlet of a gas cylinder
and every inlet of an apparatus.
The gas cylinders and hoses shall be colour-coded to conform to SS 152 : Indentification of
Contents of Industrial Gas Containers or any amendments thereof.
The Contractor shall engage a competent person to check the safety devices referred herein
once in every 6 months. The competent person is any person who is competent by education,
training and experience on the safety and operational aspects of the use of gas cylinders and
related equipment.
(t) Socket Outlet Assembly
The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain the socket-outlet assembly (hereinafter
referred to as "SOA" for the purpose of this subclause) for all temporary electrical installations.
The SOA shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of CP 88 (Code of Practice
For Temporary Electrical Installations in Construction & Building Sites). It shall be designed for
wall mounting or fitted with castors so that it can be moved around on the Site. Every electrical
equipment used shall be plugged directly into the industrial SOA.
(u) Others
The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards or fences or barriers around excavations, lift
pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The guards, fences and
barriers shall be of sound material, good construction and possess adequate strength.
At the site entrance gate, the Contractor shall provide a gantry fitted with a height control device
and a siren to control the height limit of construction vehicle/machinery when they leave the Site.
This limit shall comply with the requirements of LTA.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain storey number indicators of size 400mm x 400mm at
every staircase area and 900mm x 900mm at the metal scaffold enclosing passenger cum
material hoist. The indicators shall be displayed at alternate storeys starting from the second
storey.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(94)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-95
1.5.2 Safety Infringement
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for complying with the
safety requirements.
The SO Rep will conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures with the Contractor's
site safety supervisor or the Contractor's Representative. The Contractor shall rectify immediately any
contravention of or non-compliance with the Workplace Safety and Health Act and its Subsidiary
Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health (Construction) Regulations or safety measures specified. All
Works or part of the Works may be stopped when the SO Rep considers the working environment or
procedure is unsafe for Works to continue. In such event, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under
Clause on "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor and the Contractor
shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of Time for Completion.
If the contravention is not rectified by the subsequent inspection, the SO Rep may exercise his right
under clause on "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a further charge against the Contractor.
Upon any accident or dangerous occurrence, occurring on the Site, the SO Rep, HDB or any Competent
Authority may order a total or partial stoppage of the Works, depending on the nature and extent of the
accident/dangerous occurrence, to allow for investigations and/or to carry out remedial measures.
Under such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of
Time for Completion.
The SO Rep shall, at its absolute discretion, also exercise his rights under Clause on "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for the following type of incidents occurring in
the course of or arising out of or in consequence of the Works :
(a) Fatal accident, if the SO Rep or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident is the
result of the defaults, acts, omissions or negligence, in part or in whole, of the Contractor.
(b) Other accident which the SO Rep, HDB or Competent Authority is of the opinion that the accident
is the result of failure of the Contractor to provide necessary and sufficient safety measures
stipulated in the Contract or the Workplace Safety & Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation,
the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting) Regulations.
(c) Dangerous occurrence as classified in the Subsidiary Legislation, Workplace Safety and Health
(Incident Reporting) Regulations, Part II if the SO Rep, HDB or the Competent Authority is of the
opinion that the dangerous occurrence is the result of failure of the Contractor to provide
necessary and sufficient safety measures stipulated in the Contract or the Workplace Safety &
Health Act and its Subsidiary Legislation, the Workplace Safety and Health (Incident Reporting)
Regulations.
1.5.3 Reporting Of Accidents and Dangerous Occurrence
In the case of an accident or dangerous occurrence as classified under the Workplace Safety & Health
(Incident Reporting) Regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Commissioner and HDB within one
hour of an incident. After being informed of it, the SO Rep or HDB may at his discretion make a
preliminary investigation of the circumstances and record its findings.
Notwithstanding the aforementioned requirements, the Contractor shall also, make an incident
investigation and record it in the form set out in the INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT - HDB and
submit it to HDB within 10 days of the incident. Upon submitting this REPORT to HDB, the Contractor
shall arrange for the injured workman, witnesses and an interpreter, if necessary, to report to HDB to
furnish evidence relating to the incident.
If the Contractor fails to give any required notice or fails to furnish evidence of the incident as required
in this Clause, the SO Rep or HDB may at his absolute discretion exercise his rights under Clause
“Nuisance And Irregularities” to impose charges against the Contractor.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(95)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-96
1.5.4 Requirement For Tower Crane Data Logger E-Alert System
All the tower cranes shall be equipped with Data Logger with e-Alert system. The Data Logger e-Alert
System shall continuously record data of tower crane’s operation and send alert by short messages
commonly known as “SMS” to hand phone and short message to an email address immediately for any
critical event such as the followings:
S/N List of Critical Events
1. Overloading 100% load moment and above
2. Bypass of any safety device (e.g. Anti-collision)
3. Hoisting or working out of designated zone
4. Distance between crane to crane or crane to building structure is 3 meters or less.
5. Wind speed is 70 kph and above
6. Load moment is 100% or above with no activation of load moment or overload limit
switch
7. Load radius is out of working range with no activation of trolley/luffing slow or stop
limit switch
8. Hook height is out of working range with no activation of hoisting slow or stop limit
switch
9. No power to sensors for load, radius and hook height
10. Data Logger e-Alert system is tampered or any malfunction
The Data Logger e-Alert system shall include the following features:
(a) Battery-operated power backup for at least four hours.
(b) Data shall be securely stored inside the system and shall not be made available on public domain.
It shall not be portable or removable. The system shall be able to store data for the whole duration
of the tower crane operation until it is dismantled.
(c) Capable of self-detecting and reporting any tampering, malfunction or when the system is out of
calibration by alerting users by SMS and email.
(d) SIM card with a valid registered account shall be secured internally and capable of sending and
receiving SMS at all times to a minimum of 10 users. User may send a SMS to system to request
for status and report. The system shall automatically generate and reply on the requested
information through SMS and email at any time, even when the tower crane is not in operation.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(96)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-97
1.5.4 Requirement For Tower Crane Data Logger E-Alert System (cont’d)
(e) The Minimum Recording Parameters, continuous record every one second shall be as follow:
S/N Parameters Descriptions
1. Date and Time Current local date and time stamping
2. System ID Unique ID to identify the system
3. Crane operational - Hook height

information - Actual load, rated load and load radius
- Slewing angle measured clockwise from
North
- Luffing angle (for luffing jib crane)
- Wind Speed
4. Crane safety device status - Load moment and overload limit switches
- Hoisting, trolley/luffing and slewing limit
switches
- Faults of Load Moment Indicator (LMI) and
Anti-collision
5. Alert on Critical events Refer to List of Critical Events
(f) Reports in English language shall be automatically generated by the system without human
intervention, easily understood and provide comprehensive details. The content of the report
shall be tabulated and aligned with clear identification of columns and rows similar to Microsoft
Excel file format. Information on critical event shall be categorized and highlighted. The minimum
content information shall include the following.
S/N Information
1. Date and time of report generation
2. Project details (e.g. workplace number, contract number and contractor name)
3. Crane details and configuration
4. Date and time of crane operation
5. Critical event details
6. Lift details
The Data Logger e-Alert system shall be tested and commissioned before the tower crane is put into
operation. The commissioning report shall be submitted to the SO’s Representative and kept in the site
office.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(97)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-98
1.6 NUISANCE AND IRREGULARITIES
If the Contractor is found to have committed any of the following irregularities :
(i) Omitting building materials or labour, reducing the sizes of the materials, using inferior materials;
or materials constructed not according to the Specifications or Drawings;
(ii) Creating nuisance at the Site thereby causing inconvenience to the SO Rep or the public or
committing similar acts (such as not complying with site safety requirements, etc.) which are
likely to bring the Employer into disrepute;
(iii) Non-compliance with any part of the Specifications or Drawings, or non-fulfilment of any
contractual obligation.
the SO Rep reserves the right to impose on the Contractor, and the Contractor hereby fully accepts and
agrees to pay without dispute or question, a charge based on prevailing guidelines set by the Employer
but not exceeding $100,000/-, and for contract with a Contract Sum of less than $300,000/-, a charge
not exceeding 30% of the Contract Sum per occasion as agreed compensation to the Employer for the
inconvenience caused, investigation and administrative expenses incurred by the Employer and for
damage to the Employer's reputation and standing generally. Furthermore, the Contractor may be
barred from tendering for a specified period.
In addition to the above charges, the SO Rep or HDB is empowered either :
(a) to order any irregular work to be removed and made good to the satisfaction of the SO Rep or
HDB at the Contractor's own costs and expenses;
or
(b) in lieu of correcting work not done in accordance with the Contract, the SO Rep or HDB may
allow such work to remain and shall recover any cost differences between the specified
requirements and the non-compliance.
For nuisance committed on the Site, the Contractor shall take immediate action to cease the nuisance
committed upon instruction given by the SO Rep or HDB.
1.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ON SURVEY WORKS
1.7.1 General Requirements For Land Survey Services
The contractor shall engage a registered surveyor at its own cost and expense to provide Land Survey
Services to facilitate construction works and to carry out surveys for record purposes or for submission
to authority as and when requested by HDB during construction and post construction stage.
The cost incurred shall include the purchase of information and equipments required for the survey
works. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for the accuracy of all the survey works carried
out by its registered surveyor and for ensuring the works fully comply with the following ;
(a) the technical requirements and standards in the conduct of the surveys as specified in the
latest version of the land surveyors board directive on engineering and hydrographic survey
practices;
(b) the technical requirements and standards in the conduct of the surveys as specified in the
latest Singapore Land Authority (SLA) directive on cadastral survey practices;
(c) circulars that are issued from time to time by the Chief Surveyor, Singapore, SLA.
(d) all field works and office works are executed by the registered surveyor or qualified staff under
the registered surveyor direct supervision and direction;
(e) all documents and survey works pertaining to the survey are certified and dated by the
registered surveyor supervising the survey.
(f) Latest SLA’s Standard and Specifications for 3D Topographic Surveying (Mapping) in
Singapore
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(98)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-99
1.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ON SURVEY WORKS (CONT’D)
1.7.2 Engineering Survey Services (Construction Stage)
All forms of land survey services required for the purpose to facilitate the construction works or survey
works requested by HDB in relation to the construction of the projects are to be performed by the
contractor’s registered surveyor. Such surveys shall include the setting out of parcel boundaries, grids,
piles position, building blocks, minor sewer and service roads alignments, etc. piles eccentricity checks
survey, topographical survey of surrounding services and roads, as-built survey of services and
preparation of setting out plans, cross-sectional and longitudinal plans and surveys to monitor ground
settlement, where applicable.
The Registered Surveyor engaged by the Contractor to prepare the pre-computation plan shall ensure
the approved pre-computation plan tallies with the Consultants’ drawings. The Contractor receiving the
approved pre-computation plan shall also check that it tallies with the Consultants’ drawings. Prior to
the setting out of the piles position, the Contractor shall ensure that the distance between the piles
position and the parcel boundary, the distance between the piles position and the building block, and
the distance between the piles position and the gridlines are according to the Consultants’ drawings.
1.7.3 For Projects With Contract Sum of $50 Million and more
For projects with contract sum of $50 million and more, the contractor’s Resident Surveyor or Lead
Surveyor performing land surveying works on site must be a registered Technical Member of Singapore
Institute of Surveyors & Valuers (SISV) from 1 Jan 2017 onwards.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(99)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-100
1.8 CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE OF WORK
The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken note of all conditions for the construction and completion
of the Contract, in particular, the following conditions pertaining to this Contract and satisfy himself on
and make provision in the Contract Sum :
(a) The nature of sites and soils both above and below ground with respect to various stages of
construction in particular the possible existence of boulders/granite underground and other
buried materials which have to be removed from site.
(b) The provision of temporary access for traffic diversion while work is in progress to ensure
undisrupted movement of traffic at all times.
(c) The effect of existing properties, building structures / foundations.
(d) The availability, supply of and conditions affecting labour within the Time for Completion.
(e) The effect of other contractors or persons approved by the SO Rep, working within the contract
area.
(f) The probable adverse effect of the weather on the execution of the Contract.
(g) The effect of execution of works due to the presence of hard soil strata, existing services, etc.
(h) The means of access to facilitate the transportation and movement of construction equipment.
(i) The general ground levels, spot levels of the work site.
(j) The provision of earth drains; silt traps and the requirements to deal with drain diversion.
(k) All aspects of local conditions, physical or otherwise, at the site that pertains to or affects in any
way the construction works required at the site concerned.
(l) The effect of encountering various existing cables, pipes, sewers, etc. which may require
diversion.
(m) The effect of heavy vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
(n) The necessary re-instatement of all affected turfing areas and works affected by this contract.
The Contractor must also ascertain for himself the most convenient and expeditious method of carrying
out the work. The working conditions and the space to be made available as a work site should be
inspected and no claims will be allowed on the ground of lack of knowledge of the conditions under
which the work will be executed.
The Contractor shall note that all information regarding existing levels given in the drawings only serve
as a guide and he shall obtain his own information whenever he is doubtful.
No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any
misunderstanding or misinterpretation in respect of any such matter nor shall the Contractor be released
from any risks or obligations imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground
or on the ground that he did not or could not foresee any matter which might affect or
have affected the execution of the Works.
BLDG17/S01.DOCX(100)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-101
1.9 SHORTENED TIME FOR COMPLETION BASED ON ACCEPTED ALTERNATIVE OFFER
Where the Time For Completion is shortened based on Contractor’s accepted alternative offer, the
Contractor shall still comply with the following requirements and procedures:
Each building block or phase or sub-phase of the Works shall be considered by the SO Rep as ready
for handing over to the Employer only when the following requirements are complied with:
The surrounding apron, apron drains and brick-on-edge, if applicable, have been completed.
(a) Turfing of 5m width around the building edge or up to drain edge or road kerb, whichever is the
lesser, including all abutting footpaths have been completed.
(b) The supporting civil engineering Works, such as the minor sewer lines, the access road or service
road and road side drains leading to and around the building block have been completed and
ready to serve the building block, for cases where such civil engineering Works are incorporated
in the Works.
(c) The multi-storey carpark (MSCP) to serve the building block has been completed.
The Contractor shall comply with the preceding additional requirements and procedures in full before
the Superintending Officer issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have included in the Contract Sum, for all costs and expenses for complying with the
requirements stipulated in this clause.
The driveways and service road, together with the MSCP phase, shall be completed at least 1 month
ahead of the first residential block. Minor sewers shall be completed at least 2 months ahead of the
first residential block. The last phase (site works) shall be completed not later than 2 months after the
last residential block phase.
The Liquidated Damages as stipulated in the Appendix to Public Sector Standard Conditions Of
Contract (PSSCOC) of this contract shall still apply to the phases with shortened time for completion.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Sum, for all costs and expenses for
complying with the requirements stipulated in this clause.
1.10 WORKERS' QUARTERS
The Contractor shall be allowed to erect workers’ quarters at the Site at his own expense. These
workers’ quarters shall comply with all the latest requirements of Building Control (Temporary Buildings)
Regulations, the Technical Guidelines for Fire Safety in Temporary Buildings in Construction Work site
issued by FSSD and the Code of Practice for Temporary Housing Quarters on Construction Sites.
Where the SO Rep is of the opinion that the workers’ quarters may pose any possible concerns, the
Contractor shall take the necessary measures, at their own expense, to address these concerns.
Otherwise, the Employer reserves the right to have the workers’ quarter removed from the Site at
Contractor’s own expense.
The Contractor shall submit PE certified structural plans, fire safety plans, design calculations and
electrical wiring plans to the SO Rep for approval before the construction can begin. The erection of the
workers’ quarters shall be supervised by a PE and certified by him before it can be occupied. A copy of
all the plans, design calculations and Certificate of Inspection must be made available for checking at
the Site.
Sanitation and Hygiene standard shall comply with the Environmental Public Health Act and the latest
Code of Practice on Environmental Health (COPEH). Contractor shall arrange for an inspection by an
Environmental Health Officer upon completion of construction of the temporary housing quarters, prior
to occupation.
Contractors are allowed to house workers under the void decks and MSCP decks of uncompleted
permanent building(s). This shall comply with the fire safety requirements for temporary workers’
quarters in uncompleted permanent building on construction sites. No workers shall be allowed to be
housed in dwelling units under construction.
The temporary workers’ quarters shall only be used for housing of workers working within the
construction site. Perimeter hoarding shall be erected to segregate the workers’ quarters from the
construction zone. Workers’ quarters shall not be allowed to set up on Temporary Occupation Licence
(TOL) land managed by both HDB and SLA.
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-102
1.10 WORKERS' QUARTERS (CONT’D)
In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the following general requirements:
(a) No cooking by the workers shall be allowed.
(b) Each room shall have a minimum living space of 3 square metres per worker. Single/double deck
beds shall be provided. Personal lockers shall also be provided for each worker.
(c) The occupants shall maintain their own rooms and corridors of the workers’ quarters clean at all
times. The names, photos and particulars of occupants shall be clearly displayed outside their
rooms. These information shall be updated regularly. Workers shall not be allowed to exchange
rooms without prior approval from the Contractor. Instruction that can be understood by the
workers to maintain their own living premises in a clean and sanitary condition through proper
housekeeping shall be provided.
(d) Electrical installations/wirings shall comply with the latest edition of Code of Practice for
Temporary Electrical Installations. The installation shall be checked by a qualified electrician
monthly and records of such inspections shall be properly documented on the Site. No additional
wiring shall be allowed without prior approval by a qualified electrician. Proper lightning
conductors in accordance to latest edition of SS 555:2010 Lightning Protection shall be provided
at the workers' quarters. No electrical socket shall be allowed in the room. Contractor shall
provide minimum one USB charging point per worker.
(e) “No Smoking/No Littering” signboards shall be displayed at conspicuous locations. House rules
in appropriate languages shall be displayed in the workers’ quarters.
(f) Suitable provisions shall be provided for the washing of clothes and a separate area shall be
provided for hanging wet clothing.
(g) Suitable first aid materials shall be provided. Air-conditioned quarantine room to have minimum
2 single-deck beds for the first 200 workers. To provide additional bed per every increase in 100
workers. Adequate mosquito nettings shall also be provided.
(h) The workers’ quarters shall not be used for storage or handling of toxic and other harmful and
flammable substances. Any storage of such materials shall be located at least 5m away from the
workers’ quarters.
(i) The workers’ quarters shall be inspected daily by the Contractor’s supervisor.
(j) Exposed bare surfaces on the internal and external areas of the workers’ quarters shall be
painted.
(k) Organise training and awareness programmes for the occupants in first aid, health and safety,
fire fighting technique and evacuation procedures.
(l) If the temporary housing quarters are sited more than 100m away from the public road, a private
hydrant shall be provided to service these temporary housing quarters.
(m) Each room shall be provided with natural lighting and ventilation by means of windows, doors,
louvers or other similar openings and shall not be less than 10 percent of the floor space for each
room. For Workers Quarters in building under construction, mechanical ventilation shall be
provided if the natural ventilation requirement cannot be achieved.
(n) Contractor shall provide adequate measures to shield the workers away from the view of
Residents.
(o) At least 2 numbers of portable fire extinguishers of 13A rating each, shall be provided next to
every staircase on every floor of all accommodation spaces.
(p) A manual fire alarm shall be provided within the premises, such that it is within 30m from any
part of the building. A hand-held gong or any form of electric bell shall be deemed an acceptable
sounding device and such sounding devices shall be located such that they are audible from
every part of the building.
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 1-103
1.10 WORKERS' QUARTERS (CONT’D)
(q) The Contractor is required to provide an air-conditioned recreational room with television,
newspapers, board games and Wi-Fi within the worker’s quarter. The minimum GFA for the
recreational room shall be as follow.
Minimum GFA dedicated for recreational

No. of workers housed in a dormitory
room
50 to 300 50 sqm
301 to 500 75 sqm
501 to 1000 100 sqm
(r) The following sanitary facilities shall be provided for every 15 workers or less:
Water Closet (WC) Urinal (UL) Wash Basin (WB) Bathroom (BR)
1 1 1 1
Floor tiles to be used at toilets/bathroom for easy maintenance.
(s) The Contractor shall employ an additional security guard to be responsible for the general
security of the workers quarters. The requirements of this security guard shall follow those
stipulated in the Standard Specifications for Building Works Section 1 : “Employment of
Contractor’s Site Personnel”. The additional security guard shall be required to perform night
duties on a 12 hour basis.
(t) Pantry area with adequate hot & cold water points shall be provided.
(u) No containers are allowed to be used for workers’ quarters and toilets.
(v) Workers are not allowed to loiter at neighbouring estates such as HDB void decks and facilities
meant for residents’ use.
(w) Contractors intending to house more than 800 workers are to follow Foreign Employee
Dormitories Act (FEDA) standards.
Notwithstanding the above-mentioned requirements, the Contractor shall maintain the workers’ quarters
in a clean, tidy and hygienic condition and ensure that fire safety requirements and provisions shall be
observed at all times. The Contractor shall conduct one inspection per week to maintain a high standard
of the workers quarters. The inspection report shall be submitted to the Consultant PM.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for all damages and shall indemnify the Employer against all
liabilities in respect of the workers’ quarter provision on the Site. As and when instructed by the SO
Rep, the Contractor shall remove all or part of the workers' quarters. For workers' quarters that are
poorly maintained, the contractors will be penalized with demerit points/admin charges. If there is no
further improvement, the Employer reserves the rights to have the workers' quarters removed from their
site.
Section 2/.....
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Bldg Spec
Page 2-1
SECTION 2
PILING
2.1 SCOPE OF PILING WORKS
The Contract requires the supply of all materials, labours, tools, machinery and everything necessary
for the construction and complete installation of one or a combination of the following piling systems
under the supervision of the Superintendent Officer's Representative (SO Rep):
(a) H-Section Steel Piling

(b) Large Diameter Bored Piling
(c) Micro Pile System
(d) Jack in Piling System
(e) Reinforced Concrete Piling; and
(f) Timber Piling
Where the Tender Cost Breakdown of the Form of Tender provides for the rates of the specified piling
system to be indicated by the Contractor, the Contractor shall fill in all such tender rates clearly. Where
the Tender Cost Breakdown does not provide such rates to be filled in by the Contractor even though
the item of work involves piling, such piling work is deemed to be included in the Contract Sum for the
said item of work.
2.2 PILING EQUIPMENT/MACHINERY
The type of piling machine adopted shall be able to install piles taking into account the headroom
constraint and proximity of the piles to the existing building.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient piling machines and accessory equipment at any one time
throughout the contract period. The use of diesel piling machines is strictly disallowed in the contract.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary piling equipment/machinery to overcome obstructions such
as hard soil layers, concrete or rocks, etc. such that when these obstructions are encountered the piles
can be installed to the required depth for their sound performance.
2.3 EXPERIENCE OF CONTRACTOR/CONTRACTOR'S SPECIALIST FOR PILING WORKS
The Contractor shall assess the load capacity of the piles in the various ground conditions encountered.
He may engage a Piling Specialist for the piling works. The Piling Specialist so engaged shall be
registered under BCA Construction Work Head CR08 and of Financial Grade L5 and above. The Piling
Specialist shall also have a minimum of 5 years of relevant experience in large scale piling works and
sufficient equipment for the piling works. In addition, the Site Supervisor to be engaged by the Piling
Specialist shall have a minimum of 5 years of relevant experience in large scale piling works.
The Contractor shall submit the names of the Piling Specialist as well as the Piling Specialist's Site
Supervisor and proof of the relevant resources, experience and expertise for approval by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval of the Piling Specialist and Piling Specialist's Site Supervisor by the SO
Rep, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the works. Further, such approval shall not affect, vary
or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
If the Contractor is also registered under BCA Construction Work Head CR08 of Financial Grade L5
and above and with a minimum of 5 years of relevant working experience in large scale piling works,
the Contractor may seek the approval from the SO Rep to carry out the piling works himself. In addition,
the Contractor shall submit written evidence to show that he has sufficient equipment and the persons
to be engaged for the piling Works have had the required experience and expertise.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-2
2.4 WORK SCHEDULES
The Contractor shall submit a progress schedule showing the number of piling rigs, the rate of progress
and the time required for piling and follow up works to the SO Rep as soon as that site is handed to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the approved schedule otherwise he shall be liable
for Liquidated Damages.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep in writing the dates of arrival and departure of each piling rig at
every site. No piling rig shall leave a site without prior approval of the SO Rep.
2.5 SITE CONDITIONS AND CONSTRAINTS
The Contractor shall visit the project site to determine the nature of site conditions and extent of site
constraints e.g. poor soil condition. He shall consider the effects of the above condition/constraint may
have on his machinery movement, method of pile installation, temporary works or special equipment
required, etc. for the completion of foundation works, when he submits his tender.
2.6 PLATFORM LEVEL
The Contractor shall check and ensure that the platform level as indicated in the piling plans tallies with
the corresponding architectural plans and structural plans. The Contractor shall highlight to the SO Rep
if there is difference of platform levels indicated in different sets of plans before commencement of
works.
2.7 INFORMATION ON GROUND CONDITIONS
Geotechnical information concerning the site shall be provided to the Contractor. However, the SO Rep
/ HDB accepts no responsibility for the accuracy and/or comprehensiveness of any such information
provided. The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surroundings, and carry out all
independent investigations, satisfy himself as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the form and
nature of the site and nature of the Works and obtain all necessary information as to other
circumstances which may affect his tender price. If the Contractor wishes to carry out his own ground
testing, he shall submit his proposal to the SO Rep for approval prior to such tests and all expenses
incurred as a result of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. All such proposals must be submitted
not later than 2 weeks before the tender closing date for the project. The tender closing date will not be
extended for any ground testing requested by the Contractor.
No claim by the Contractor for additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any
misunderstanding or misinterpretation of any such matter or for the Contractor's failure to obtain all
necessary information nor shall the Contractor be released from any duties, responsibilities or
obligations imposed on or undertaken by him under the Contract on any such ground or on the ground
that he did not or could not foresee any matter which might affect the Works.
2.8 CABLES/SERVICES DETECTION
The Contractor shall visit and examine the site carefully and ascertain its nature and make provision in
the Tender Price for the type of ground conditions, constraints and presence of any underground
services.
The Contractor is to provide cables/services detecting devices to locate all existing cables/services prior
to the commencement of excavation or piling work. He shall engage PUB licensed cables/services
detecting companies to carry out all cable/services detection work. The proposed line of excavation or
piling work shall be checked for existing services in a systematic manner by making sufficient passes
in a grid formation to cover the entire area of work.
The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep where mains, pipe or conduit are encountered during excavation
and where any excavation is carried out adjacent to or under any existing cable, pipe, structure; or any
other such work that may be affected by subsidence, regardless of whether such work is shown on the
Drawings or not. If it becomes essential, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the SO Rep may direct and the
Contractor shall be paid for this additional work unless in the opinion of the SO Rep such additional
work has been necessitated by the Contractor's negligence, lack of foresight or faulty workmanship.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-3
2.8 CABLES/SERVICES DETECTION (CONT’D)
In the event that damages have been caused to the public services due to the Contractor's work or
otherwise, all expenditure for such necessary repairs etc incurred by the relevant public Authorities shall
be borne by the Contractor regardless of whether such repairs are due to accident or otherwise. The
costs for such repairs shall be deducted from monies due or becoming due to the Contractor or by direct
payment by the Contractor to the Authorities.
If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, it is essential to permanently divert any cable, pipe or other services,
the cost of diversion shall be paid for by the Employer.
2.9 NOISE, VIBRATION, DISTURBANCE AND SAFETY OF EXISTING BUILDINGS/STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Environmental Pollution Control Act and all
relevant authorities’ rules and regulations, in respect of work that affects the public. All piling operations
and excavation works shall be carried out without unreasonable noise, vibration and disturbance.
The Contractor shall bear all risks and responsibilities in carrying out the piling operations and
excavation works and shall be responsible during the progress of the piling operation and excavation
works for any damage or disturbance to existing or adjoining properties, or annoyance or nuisance to
residents and users of these properties.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the existing buildings/structures and shall include
in his contract sum the provision and construction of necessary and adequate shoring and supports
within existing buildings/structures, to underpin and strengthen the existing building foundations against
any adverse effect arising out of the execution of the piling operation and excavation works.
2.10 SITE SURVEY, GROUND MOVEMENT / VIBRATIONS CONTROL MONITORING
The Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) who will specify the method, procedure,
precautions etc, where piling / excavation works are to be carried out close to existing buildings or
structures at his own cost and expense.
The PE shall study the nature of the proposed piling / excavation works, ground conditions, existing and
proposed buildings and structures within the site, existing neighbouring buildings, structures, properties,
and gather any other relevant information in order to make the following necessary submissions to the
SO’s Rep or other relevant Authorities :
(a) The PE shall submit a vibration monitoring layout plan. The allowable vibration level must be
explicitly stated in the submission.
(b) The PE shall submit his design drawing on retaining works and instrumentation monitoring
programme. The allowable ground movements for excavation work must be explicitly stated in
the submission.
(c) The Contractor and his PE shall carry out a pre-construction survey on all the neighbouring
properties. A Registered Surveyor has to be engaged in the process if necessary. The Contractor
and his PE shall extend a copy of the survey report to the owners of all the neighbouring
properties.
(d) The Contractor and his PE shall carry out crack monitoring to measure movement across cracks
in vertical and horizontal directions.
(e) The Contractor and his PE shall carry out settlement monitoring.
When any of the following criteria is reached irrespective of whether damage has occurred, the
Contractor shall notify the SO Rep immediately.
(i) 5mm settlement or movement between consecutive readings.
(ii) 15mm total settlement of any part of a building/structure.
Four sets of the comprehensive reports shall be submitted within two weeks after the completion of the
monitoring works.
The Contractor and his PE shall be fully responsible on the adequacy of the above designs and
submissions. The PE shall be aware of his responsibility as spelt out by BCA’s circulars and
announcements in making the above submissions. All of the above requirements are to be complied
with before commencement of works.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-4
2.11 PROTECTION TO EXISTING FOUNDATION
While carrying out any excavation work, the Contractor shall exercise due care and diligence to protect
the existing foundation. Exposure of existing footing and piles under the pilecaps shall be avoided to
prevent disturbance to the bearing soil or the soil around piles. The costs and expenses for protection
during excavation are deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
2.12 STANDARD AND CERTIFICATES
All materials used in the installation of piles shall be obtained from approved manufacturers. Materials
and articles used shall comply with appropriate Singapore Standards (S.S.) where these exist,
otherwise British Standards (B.S.) or other approved Standards will apply. Where the standard given in
this document has been amended or superseded, the current Standard shall apply. Where British
Standards are given in this document, the corresponding Singapore Standards where existing shall
prevail. The recommendations in the appropriate Singapore Codes of Practice (C.P.) shall be referred
to during the construction where these exist otherwise British Codes of Practice or other approved
codes shall apply unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
In all cases where materials or articles are specified to comply with respective Standards the Contractor
shall, if required, obtain from the manufacturers and supply to the SO Rep the appropriate Certificate
of Compliance with the Standard.
2.13 TESTING OF MATERIALS
The SO Rep may appoint independent persons to carry out test on materials to be used in the works.
The cost of conducting any test shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise specified.
The SO Rep may cause a sample to be taken from each consignment of materials to be tested and the
results of such testing shall be accepted as final. Any material test that fails shall be considered not to
have fulfilled the requirements. In that event, the SO Rep may, without prejudice to other rights under
the Contract, order such further test(s) as he deems necessary, all at the cost and expense of the
Contractor. In addition, the whole consignment may be liable to be rejected and shall be removed from
site at the Contractor's own expense when directed by the SO Rep.
The costs of the failed tests together with all administrative expenses incurred shall be borne by the
Contractor. All the tests as and when directed by the SO Rep. must be carried out at HDB’s Engineering
Materials Laboratory or Accredited Laboratories
2.14 RESERVED
2.15 REMOVAL OF OBSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall allow for at his own cost, excavation in any material to remove obstructions which
prevent driving / drilling or which interfere with the proper alignment of the piles, timbering, backfilling,
restoration of ground surrounding the piles and any other works necessary to complete the operation
to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. No claims for standing time for rigs will be allowed in consequence of
any kind.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-5
2.16 PENETRATION AND SIZE OF PILES
The Contractor shall be required to install any size of the piles as shown in the specifications or drawings
and each pile in the position indicated on the drawings to the required depth.
The onus of obtaining the required resistance to withstand the required test load within the limit of
settlement shall rest with the Contractor but the piles shall not be installed unnecessarily beyond the
depth for them to develop the required test load. Should Contractor find that a longer penetration is
required due to poor ground conditions being encountered as work proceeds, this will be permitted only
if it is proved to be justified by examination and tests of the soils in the boreholes. The Contractor must
also state sound and acceptable basis for determining the penetration required.
If ground conditions indicate that the sizes of any subsequent piles as proposed and shown on the
drawings are inadequate then the Contractor shall produce sufficient evidence to prove that a larger
diameter would be more suitable. Conversely, where a pile is to be constructed in very good ground,
the Contractor must produce sufficient evidence to show that the reduced length of pile will be capable
of carrying the specified load. However, the Contractor must first obtain the approval of the SO Rep if
longer or shorter penetration is required.
2.17 TOLERANCE FROM TRUE POSITION
The centre of each pile at the cut-off level shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the
drawings by more than 75 mm in any direction. Should the deviation be more than the stated tolerance
in any direction, the affected pile is liable to be rejected and compensating piles shall be installed at
Contractor's own expense when directed by the SO Rep.
All additional cost of amendment in pile cap, beams, etc designed as a counter measure to the pile
eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance shall also be borne by the Contractor.
2.18 DAMAGED AND REJECTED PILES
Damaged piles and piles installed out of position or twisted shall be rejected and/or removed and
replacement pile(s) shall be substituted by the Contractor at his own expense even if piles of bigger
capacity are required.
Piles shall be installed truly vertical and any pile with an inclination exceeding 1 (horizontal) to 75
(vertical) is liable to be rejected and shall be similarly removed and replaced when ordered by the SO
Rep at Contractor's own expense.
In addition, the Contractor shall also bear the extra cost as a result of rejection and replacement or
supplemented by additional pile(s) due to an increase in size of pile caps, strengthening of the ground
beam, etc.
Piles which have risen or are disturbed as a result of installing adjacent piles shall be reinstated to the
original depth and resistance. Otherwise, it shall be replaced by compensating piles at the Contractor's
expense.
2.19 PILE VERTICALITY MEASUREMENT
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipments to facilitate the measurement of the verticality
of the piles. All such equipments shall be pre-approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-6
2.20 LOAD TESTS
(a) Standard Load Test (SLT)
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the number of standard load tests as specified
by the SO Rep for the whole Contract.
Unless otherwise required under the Contract, Standard Load Test shall be conducted on
working piles by loading the piles to twice their nominal working loads. The SO Rep shall decide
when testing can commence and the Contractor shall proceed with testing only after the
instruction of the SO Rep has been given to him to test the pile. As soon as a test pile has been
selected the Contractor shall prepare for the test without delay. All selected test piles must be
tested within two weeks from the date of selection.
Standard Load Tests shall be carried out on any such working piles as may be ordered by the
SO Rep.
(b) Ultimate load test (ULT)
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum the number of ultimate load tests (including the
installation of the test piles) and the pile instrumentations as specified by the SO Rep for the
whole contract.
2.21 ULTIMATE LOAD TEST
The Ultimate Load Test (ULT) on a test pile shall be conducted before the installation of the working
piles, and/or otherwise directed by the SO Rep. The ULT is conducted to determine the expected
settlement and the ultimate capacity of the pile, and to check the pile integrity. It shall be a pile different
from the working pile. Unless otherwise required under the Contract, No Ultimate Load Test shall be
conducted on a working pile.
For instrumented ULT, the pile is tested to 3 times nominal working load.
The Ultimate Load Test on a test pile will be deemed to fail if,
(a) its settlement under the test load
(i) exceeds 25mm at 2 times nominal working load; or

(ii) continues without further load increment before or at 2.5 times nominal working load; or
(iii) does not meet other requirements as specified in the relevant clauses of the SS CP4 for
Foundations; or
(b) any portion of the pile has failed, crumbled or distorted from its original position; or
(c) the load test cannot be completed for any reason.
In the event of failure of this ultimate load test on the test pile, instrumented or non-instrumented as the
case may be, ONE (1) further test (including the installation of the test piles) shall be carried out at the
Contractor's expense. In addition, for bored pile system, the compensating ultimate load test shall be
carried out as an instrumented bored pile at the Contractor's expense. If the subsequent test fails again,
the ultimate load test results may be used to assess the suitability of the pile type, pile design and layout
proposed, or more further tests (including the installation of the test piles) may be ordered by the SO's
Rep if deemed necessary all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.
2.22 LOADING OF TEST PILES
Adequate facilities and sufficient equipment shall be provided by the Contractor for at least two (2) load
tests to proceed simultaneously at any one time.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-7
2.22 LOADING OF TEST PILES (CONT’D)
(a) The test load may be applied to the pile by jacking against kentledge or anchor pile. The clear
distance between a test pile and any anchor pile shall not be less than 3 metres. Where piles
are in groups, the use of other working piles as anchor piles may be allowed subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding such approval the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for making good as the SO Rep considers necessary any damage to such anchor
piles which are used as permanent piles.
(b) Pile top levels of test piles shall be recorded immediately after selection and in any case before
the erection of kentledge platform. This shall be done by reading levels on two diagonally
opposite corners of the pile top.
(c) Before commencement of any pile load testing at site, contractor’s Professional Engineer (PE)
supervising the pile load test shall inspect all test equipment such as surveying level, oil pumps,
hydraulic jacks and other related equipment are functional and properly calibrated. Contractor’s
PE shall exercise vigilance to check and verify the calibration reports issued by the laboratories.
Contractor’s PE shall check that each of the test equipment used in the pile load testing bears a
valid calibration certificate, issued by a SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory to the full capability
or capacity of the test equipment. Contractor’s PE should also check for the SAC accreditation
mark on the endorsed calibration reports and certificates for the test equipment as proof that the
services has attained accreditation from SAC, before allowing them to be used for pile load
testing at site. All Certificates shall be submitted to the SO Rep to show the date of last checking
for accuracy. The last calibration date of all test equipment must not be more than three months
or as directed by the SO Rep.
(d) The hydraulic pump for the jack shall, when required, be encased in a steel or wooden box under
lock and key. The area surrounding the test pile shall be cordoned off by protective fencing.
(e) In the preparation of all test piles the Contractor shall ensure the rigidity of the supports at all
corners of the platform. If piles are required to support the platform they shall be installed at
Contractor's own expense.
(f) If any test is discontinued or fails to reach the specified load due to (a) faulty jack or gauge, (b)
unstable support of kentledge, (c) cracking in or damage to the pile, (d) the datums not being set
out properly, (e) unstable benchmark or scales, (f) pre-jacking or pre-loading or any other cause,
then the test shall be abandoned and the results disregarded. A further test shall be carried out
at Contractor's own expense.
(g) The settlement shall be measured to an accuracy of not less than half mm from a datum which
must be on an immovable structure or be on a pile and it shall not be affected by any movement
of the ground due to the test loading, driving of piles or any other causes.
(h) For Standard Load Test, the test load shall be imposed by equal increments at approved intervals
of load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being
maintained for at least 15 minutes until the full test load is reached. This test load at the nominal
working load shall be maintained for 24 hours before the operation to load the pile to its full test
load (2 times the nominal working load) is continued. The full test load shall remain for a period
of no less than 3 (three) days or as directed by the SO Rep. The results shall be plotted to
produce a load-settlement curve.
(i) For Ultimate Load Test, the test load shall be imposed by equal increments at approved intervals
of load equivalent to 25% of the working load of the pile with each load increment being
maintained for at least 15 minutes until the full test load is reached. This test load at the nominal
working load and at two times nominal working load shall be maintained for 24 hours before the
operation to load the pile to its full test load (3 times the nominal working load) is continued. The
full test load shall remain for a period of no less than 3 (three) days or as directed by the SO
Rep. The result shall be plotted to produce a load-settlement curve.
(j) All pile load test shall be carried out in compliance with CP4: 2003. Amongst other requirements,
a calibrated load gauge and a calibrated pressure gauge shall be used to measure the force
exerted on the pile under test.
(k) Axial Compressive Force Pulse (Rapid) testing shall also comply with the standards specified in
the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Designation: D 7383-08 or equivalent
standards.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-8
2.23 FAILURE OF STANDARD LOAD TEST
A Standard Load Test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceeds 25 mm at 2 times
nominal working load for driving steel piles, large diameter bored piles, jack-in piles, micropiles, precast
reinforced concrete piles and timber piles.
For pile subjected to negative skin friction, the standard load test can be performed in the normal
manner, but with its acceptance subject to satisfaction of an additional criterion that pile settlement at
the test load of 1.0 time column load plus 2.0 times negative friction should not exceed 10mm.
If a working pile so tested as herein specified, fails to sustain the full standard test load over a period of
3 days or as directed by the SO Rep then TWO further tests on other piles in any block at the same
area selected by the SO Rep shall be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at Contractor's own
expense. Where a pile fails under test, compensating piles, as directed by the SO Rep shall be provided
and the group retested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, the whole of the work shall be carried out
at the Contractor's own expense.
2.24 SOUNDNESS OF WORK
The Contractor shall be aware that load tests on piles are conducted for the purpose of studying the
behaviour of piles and in particular settlement under load. As not every pile can be tested, the Contractor
shall ensure that all piles are installed such that the total settlement or differential settlement shall be
limited to a maximum angle of 1:500 so that the building to be supported will not be damaged due to
settlement. For bored piles in buildings of ten(10) storeys or taller, the Contractor shall monitor and
submit the settlement records at various selected columns to the SO's Rep.
The acceptance of a few piles which pass the load tests does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility for the soundness of the whole of the pile foundation. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for ensuring that all the piles are installed to such a depth that the required resistance is
obtained.
2.25 ULTIMATE LOAD TEST AND STANDARD LOAD TEST REPORT
Three sets of test reports, endorsed by the Contractor's Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to
the SO Rep three working days after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain such
detailed information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis
of the test results, etc. In addition, for the Ultimate Load Test report, the actual coordinates (Northing
and Easting) of the test pile(s) must be indicated. These coordinates must be set out by the Contractor’s
Registered Surveyor. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form.
If the pile tested failed to sustain the required load or if the pile top settlement exceeds the permitted
settlement specified, the report shall also contain an analysis of the pile behaviour concerning the pile
settlement. Recommended measurement on improving the pile performance shall also be included.
2.26 MULTIPLE FAILURE OF WORKING PILES
A block containing up to 500 piles will be deemed to have failed if 5 tests therein fail.
In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall carry out sufficient further piling in accordance with the
contract document as will ensure the safety of the buildings which are to be carried by the piles. The
whole of such work shall be executed at the Contractor's expense, and the cost of amending pile caps
and ground beams arising out of this, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-9
2.27 CHECKING AND CUTTING OF PILES
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum, excavation, trimming of the pile, true and level, to the
cut-off level and any other necessary works for the completion of the operation.
Immediately after piling is completed in a block, the Contractor shall check and record the exact actual
position of every pile as compared with the positions indicated on the drawings. Excavation and cutting
of piles to the required cut-off levels (+/- 25 mm) shall follow immediately. Test loading of working piles
shall commence immediately after a selection is made by the SO Rep and may be carried out before
the completion of piling in the block.
In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to be responsible for the
measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles. The
Contractor shall make available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement
All the above works shall take no more than 3 (three) weeks as from the date the last pile is driven in
the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time.
The Contractor shall ensure that adequate number of licensed surveyors are available at the sites for
such work.
If the Contractor fails to comply with this requirement, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay
other persons to carry out the same and all expenses consequent thereof shall be deducted from the
monies due to the Contractor without prejudice to the Employer's right to claim any sum over and above
monies thus applied.
2.28 PILE PENETRATION AND ECCENTRICITY PLANS
Completed pile penetration plans and eccentricity plans (3 copies each) shall be checked and certified
by the Contractor's Licensed Surveyor and endorsed by a Professional Engineer directly employed by
the Contractor before submitting to the SO rep. The duly endorsed eccentricity plans and penetration
plans for each block must be submitted to the SO Rep not more than one month from the date the last
pile is driven in the block regardless of inclement weather or testing time.
2.29 SUM AND/OR RATES INSERTED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN THE TENDER COST
Breakdown of the Form of Tender shall be the full and inclusive cost and expenses to cover the supply
of plant, materials and labour for the execution of piling works in any ground, completely and as
specified including but not limited to the following:
(a) All preliminary works on site including the setting up of site office, test cube shed, water supply, washing bay,
etc.
(b) The provision and mobilisation of piling rig to install any size of piles including hammer or auger and all
necessary accessories, equipment, tools and appliances brought to the site, erection, movement of piling rig
from pile to pile and from building block to other building block within the piling site, dismantling and removal
on completion of the work on site.
(c) The installation of piles to any level below ground level including rocks and to a resistance as specified,
including the supply, use and removal of drilling mud or steel casings to support the borehole prior to
concreting or cement grouting.
(d) The setting out of all pile positions in accordance with the drawings.
(e) To excavate in any material and cut back piles to cut-off level as specified.
(f) To check the final position and cut-off level of all piles.
(g) The removal of all spoil, cement slurry and water from site or pile pits as directed by the SO Rep.
(h) The cleaning of the site on completion.
(i) The payment of all insurance, water and other charges.
(j) The observance of all other directions, instructions and clauses contained in all documents forming this
tender and the carrying out of the complete work to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and in accordance with
the Specifications.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-10
2.30 ADJUSTMENT TO CONTRACT SUM AND PAY LENGTH OF PILES
Upon completion, the value of piling works executed by the Contractor shall be determined by the SO Rep. The
Lump Sum for the whole of the piling works as entered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender shall then be adjusted
based on the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The adjustment (addition or omission) shall be the
net difference between the Lump Sum and the value of piling works executed by the Contractor. The addition or
omission amount shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum as the case may be.
(a) For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre) for the respective pile size is shown in
the Form Of Tender
The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total actual
pay length and the Basic Rate per metre.
The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile
to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
The Basic Rate for the respective pile size shall be derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (metre) for Respective Pile Size in the Form Of Tender*
The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and
the Basic Rate as derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*
The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of
Tender.
(b) For piling works where the Provisional Quantity (in metre tonne) for the respective pile size is
shown in the Form Of Tender
The value of the piling work executed by the Contractor shall be the product of the total metre-
tonne and the Basic Rate per metre tonne.
The metre-tonne of each pile shall be the product of the actual pay length of the pile and the
nominal working load of the pile. The actual pay length of each pile shall be measured from the
specified cut-off level of the pile to the end of the pile. The pay length shall be measured to the
accuracy of the nearest 10mm.
The Basic Rate for the respective pile type shall be derived as follows:
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for Respective Pile Type in the Form of Tender*
Provisional Quantity (metre tonne) for Respective Pile Type in the Form of
Tender*
The value of Standard Load Tests (SLT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for SLT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for SLT in the Form of Tender*
The value of Ultimate Load Tests (ULT) shall be the product of the actual number of tests and
Basic Rate = Lump Sum for ULT in the Form of Tender*

Provisional Quantity (No.) for ULT in the Form of Tender*
Note : * As shown in respective items of the breakdown of Total Lump Sum in the Form of
Tender.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-11
2.31 COMPLETION OF PILING WORK
Piling Works to a building block shall only be considered complete if the piles are piled, excavated, cut-
off, checked and recorded in the pile layout drawings for eccentricities and levels and compensated for
rejected piles.
2.32 H-SECTION STEEL PILING
2.32.1 Hydraulic Hammer Pile Driving Machines
The Contractor shall use only hydraulic hammer pile driving machines which are fully enclosed with
noise dampening enclosures and the usage of such machine shall comply with all relevant regulations
as well as provisions in this Specifications in regard to pollution control. Generator sets for electricity
supply and welding purposes shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and
shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on site.
2.32.2 Steel Pile Sections
The steel pile sections shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the
equivalent British Standard BS 4360 for mild steel. Before driving commences, all sections shall be
clean and free from any contamination or materials which will impair their strength.
2.32.3 Nominal Working Load
The nominal working loads of various sizes of piles are indicated in the Drawings
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-12
2.32 H-SECTION STEEL PILING (CONT’D)
2.32.4 Length of Steel Pile Sections
The length of new steel pile sections delivered to piling site shall be 12 m long. If the Contractor intends
to use steel pile sections of other lengths, the approval of the SO Rep must first be obtained prior to
their delivery to the stockyard or piling site.
2.32.5 Use of Jointed Sections
If the Contractor wishes to drive piles made up of remaining sections from site, he shall obtain written
approval from the SO’s Rep first.
Where jointed steel sections are proposed to be used for the installation of steel piles, the following
conditions must be complied with :-
(a) Jointed steel sections shall not be used in pile groups of less than 4 piles.
(b) For pile groups of four or more piles, the number of jointed section piles shall be not more than
one out of every four piles.
(c) The length of each jointed section shall not be longer than 12 metres nor should be shorter than
9 metres, comprising not more than three short sections shop-welded together, each short
section being not less than 3 metres. All joints shall have splice plates at both flanges.
(d) All jointed sections piles shall be straight, free from dents and corrosion pits. They shall be
measured and properly recorded before installation.
(e) All jointed section piles shall be fabricated from sections obtained from the same site. Jointed
section piles built up from sections imported from another site shall be strictly prohibited.
2.32.6 Quality of Welded Joints and Welders
The Contractor shall ensure and maintain a high standard of quality welded joints.
The quality of the welded joint between pile sections depends not only on the quality of the weld material
but also on the skill of the worker. The welder shall possess at least National Trade Certificate 3 (NTC
3) for Arc welding issued by a recognised and approved institute. Notwithstanding this, the welder shall
be subjected to re-qualifying by approved welding inspectors as and when required by the SO Rep.
A high standard of workmanship of welders shall be maintained to ensure a high standard of quality of
the welded joints.
All pile sections at each piling site must be neatly stacked in the "H" position to facilitate cutting of the
45 degree chamfer.
Before commencement of piling, each welder shall execute a sample joint for inspection. If the quality
of the welded joint is unsatisfactory, the welder will not be allowed to carry out welding until he has
proved by the way of a subsequent demonstration that he can perform a welded joint satisfactorily.
During piling, all welded joints of pile sections shall be checked. A welder who produces unsatisfactory
welds shall be replaced and shall not be allowed to carry out welding at any other site.
The contractor shall fabricate and supply adequate number of weld gauge for use by Consultant’s site
supervision staff.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-13
2.32.7 Record of Steel Pile Driving
Records of driving for every steel pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to
the SO Rep on site. The records shall include the following:
(a) set
(b) temporary compression
(c) full length and serial numbers of steel sections
(d) reduced level at top of pile
(e) reduced cut-off level
(f) pay length
(g) time of completion
(i) inclination of the pile
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before driving commences.
The method of measuring the set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The
above record must show a series of sets and temporary compressions measured during the process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile has commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
Immediately after a pile reaches its final set, the reduced level of the top of the pile section shall be
certified so that the exact pay length of the pile may be recorded.
2.32.8 Marking of Steel Sections
Serial number and length shall be marked in paint on every steel section on arrival to site.
Length of section shall be measured to the nearest 10 mm. Full record shall be submitted to the SO
Rep daily for checking.
2.32.9 "Dolly" or Follower Disallowed During Pile Driving
"Dolly' or Follower is strictly not allowed to be used during pile driving on site. The SO Rep shall exercise
his right under "Nuisance and Irregularities" Clause to impose charges against the Contractor for any
non-compliance.
2.32.10 Dynamic Pile Test For Steel H-Pile
The Contractor shall engage an independent testing specialist who provides at all times, operate and
maintain a set of portable equipment for the dynamic testing of pile foundations. The equipment shall
be the latest model of its kind, Model GCPC Pile Driving Analyzer or its equivalent. The equipment shall
also be equipped with the latest revision of the CAPWAP programme to perform data analysis of the
field data. The CAPWAP programme should include features for interactive or automated mode for
calculation and matching of the forces, velocity waves, calculation of CASE capacity, calculation of pile-
toe resistance vs toe movement for end-bearing piles, wave equation analysis using pile top
measurements, static load-settlement analysis based on the CAPWAP results and capable of giving
both numerical and graphic output and other utilities for the processing of the field data.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software owned by the third party testing specialist
are in good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit
specifications and details of the Hardware and Software for the SO Rep approval before carrying out
the dynamic pile test.
If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within 2 weeks after notification by
the SO Rep on the need to carry out the test, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to
engage other testing specialists to carry out the dynamic pile test and CAPWAP Analysis and all costs
and expenses thus incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor.
The portable dynamic testing equipment should be in a compact unit suitable for rugged use at the
piling site. The unit shall contain automatic signal conditioner, printer and a high resolution screen for
display. The printer should be capable of producing report quality graphs as well as printout of data in
the field. The Contractor shall ensure that qualified personnel viz. an engineer and a technician are
available at all times for the operation of equipment and for conducting the test.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-14
2.32.10 Dynamic Test Pile For Steel H-Pile (Cont’d)
the SO Rep one week after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain such detailed
information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the test
results, etc. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form.
2.32.11 Failure of Dynamic Pile Test
A Dynamic Pile Test shall be deemed to have failed if the maximum resistance of pile (RMX) at any
time during blow, using a Case Damping Coefficient (J) as approved by the SO Rep, is less than 2
times the nominal working load of a working pile under test.
If the force/velocity-time graph taken during the test does not indicate any abnormality, the SO Rep may
allow the Contractor to re-tap the pile and another Dynamic Pile Test may be carried out all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
If a working pile so tested fails and is rejected by the SO Rep, then TWO further Dynamic Pile Tests on
other piles in any building block at the site may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the
Contractor's cost and expense. In addition, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep shall be
driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
When the integrity of the pile from a Dynamic Pile Test is doubtful to the SO Rep, the Contractor is
required to show proof that the integrity of the pile is acceptable to the SO Rep. Otherwise,
compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
2.32.12 Bracing of Steel Piles
When penetrations of steel piles are short or when site conditions warrant the need to strengthen the
steel piles against movement, the Contractor is required to brace the piles as directed by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall include in his Contract Sum the cost of bracing these steel piles with steel sections
or reinforced concrete.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-15
2.33 LARGE DIAMETER BORED PILING
2.33.1 System of Piling
The system and equipment offered by the Contractor for installation of large diameter bored piles:
(a) shall be capable of sinking bored holes with a range of diameters between 600 mm and 1800
mm and to a depth ranging from 10 m to 60 m depending on the nature of the ground.
(b) may include, Flight Auger type system as the principal method for the work in general.
(c) shall be capable of being modified to deal with whatever strata encountered, by the addition of
further cutting or extraction or protective devices as may be required to deal with all ground
conditions including:
i. Water bearing ground
ii. Soft ground which caves in unless supported
iii. Medium stiff or stiff clays
iv. Sands or sandstone
v. Coarse gravels
vi. Very stiff clays
vii. Boulders and granite bedrocks
viii. Thinly bedded shales
ix. Tree roots or buried trunks
(d) shall generate the minimum degree of vibration when operating alongside weak structures or
until such depth is reached where vibrations may be dissipated without damage to existing
foundations.
(e) shall be capable of sinking and removing casings for the support of the boreholes to whatever
depth that may be required (to the full depth of the borehole where necessary) and without
disturbance to the ground surrounding the pile.
(f) shall be capable of under-reaming the bases of the piles.
The Contractor shall be prepared to work in all ground conditions.
2.33.2 Cement
All cement used in the works shall be from approved local manufacturers except otherwise permitted
by the SO Rep. Where cement is specified it shall comply with SS26 and BS12. The SO Rep may make
test of the quality specified at the Contractor's own expense. With each delivery, the Contractor may be
required to send to the SO Rep a memorandum of the quantity delivered and the manufacturer's test
certificate. Unless otherwise specified, the compressive strength test shall be used to determine the
strength of cement.
2.33.3 Aggregates
The materials used as aggregates shall be strong, hard, durable and free from clay lumps and organic
and other impurities. All materials and grading of aggregates shall comply with SS 31. Notwithstanding
the above, fine aggregates for concrete shall be clean well graded sand, free from clay, loam or organic
matter. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their use
as fine aggregates.
Coarse aggregates for concrete shall be clean crushed granite, well graded between the limits of 5 mm
and 20 mm. Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the SO Rep prior to their
use as coarse aggregates.
2.33.4 Steel
Steel reinforcement shall be obtained from local manufacturer or other manufacturers as may be
approved in writing by the SO Rep and shall comply with SS2, SS 18, SS 32, BS 4449, BS 4461, BS
4482 and BS 4483 wherever applicable. All reinforcement shall be free from scale and all loose rust. It
shall not be coated with any grease, oil, paint or adhering earth that may impair the bond between the
concrete and reinforcement.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-16
2.33 LARGE DIAMETER BORED PILING (CONT’D)
2.33.5 Testing of Concrete For Bored Piling Works
Where bored piles are included in the Works, a minimum of 4 cubes shall be cast for every 10m3 of
concrete or part thereof for the purpose of compression tests at 7 days strength and 28 days strength.
2 cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days. The SO Rep
shall exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose a charge against the
Contractor for every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age as
specified; in addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install
compensating piles that will ensure the safety of the building to be supported by the piles. The
compensating piles shall be installed all at the Contractor's cost and expense, and as directed by the
SO Rep.
The test cubes shall be made and cured in accordance with SS 78 and BS 1881. The cubes shall be
tested at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory.
2.33.6 Concrete Strength
The compressive strength of the concrete shall not be less than the strength in the following :
Class (Grade) of Compressive Strength N/mm2

Concrete 7 days 28 days
Grade 40 32 43
2.33.7 Ready-Mix Concrete
The Contractor must obtain prior approval from the SO Rep who will, inter alia, require to be satisfied
that the propose supplier will adhere to this Specification and that the quality and control of the mix are
satisfactory and comply with SS 119 and BS 1926. The SO Rep shall have access to the concrete
batching plant of the Contractor's ready-mix concrete supplier during all working hours of the plant. The
ready-mix concrete shall comply in all respects with the specified requirements for concrete as outlined
in this Specification, and the Contractor shall arrange and pay for the making of all requisite tests.
Ready-mix concrete shall only be transported in continuous mixing trucks and comply with the
manufacturer's operating standard. Appropriate retarder when used shall be subjected to the approval
of the SO Rep. No additional water shall be added to the ready-mix concrete.
2.33.8 Concrete Mixes
The Contractor shall submit, for the SO Rep's approval, a chart showing the design mix he proposes to
use in the ready-mix concrete. The SO Rep shall at his own discretion, instruct the Contractor to carry
out trial mix.
For concrete mix used, the Contractor shall inter alia state the weights of cement, granite and fine
aggregates, the type and amount of admixture and the water-cement ratio to be used in the mix.
Grade C32/40 concrete shall be used for concreting in the dry and for tremie concreting under water or
any other approved water-sealing fluid. In all conditions, the free water-cement ratio shall not be more
than 0.5 for Grade C32/40 concrete.
Notwithstanding the above, the slump for concrete measured by the standard slump cone shall be
between 100 mm and 150 mm and the cement content in any mix shall not be less than 360 kg/m3.
Where concrete is to be placed under water or where pile will be exposed to sea water, the cement
content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3. For tremie concreting, the slump for the concrete shall be
between 170 mm and 225 mm. The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to modify, alter
and improve the concrete mix, if necessary.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-17
For large diameter bored piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 600mm to 1800mm in
increment of 100mm. The nominal working loads of various sizes of bored piles shall be indicated in
the Drawings.
2.33.10 Steel Reinforcement and Stirrups
For bored piles subjected to compression, the cross-sectional area of the main steel reinforcement and
length of the reinforcement cage shall comply with CP4. Details of the steel reinforcement cage are
indicated in the drawings.
For bored piles subjected to both compression and uplift, the length of the reinforcement cage shall
extend to the base of the bored pile. The lap length of the reinforcement shall comply fully with the
relevant Singapore Standards CP65 : 1999.
The first top rung of stirrups where the reinforcing cage will be lifted shall consists of 3 layers of T10
bars, fully welded to the main steel reinforcing bars.
All other stirrups (one layer of T10 bar) shall be spot welded to the main reinforcing bars of the
reinforcing cage.
The lapping joint for the stirrups shall be 50mm (fully welded) or 200mm (without weld) and the weld of
the stirrups to the main reinforcing bars shall be able to withstand all condition of handling, transportation
and during concreting. The reinforcing cage should not be distorted in any way during these processes
and shall be vertical when lowered into the boreholes.
2.33.11 Plastic Circular Spacers
Plastic circular spacers of 55 mm thickness to provide 80 mm cover to the main reinforcement shall be
used. The spacers shall be placed at not more than one metre below the top of the reinforcement cage
and at not more than 4 m interval along the main reinforcement.
2.33.12 Trial Bore
The Contractor shall carry out trial bores by boring outside the pile location at his own expense to
determine the required depth or suitability of bored piles as directed by the SO Rep. Sufficient safety
measures must be provided to ensure protection against falling or tripping into the bored holes. The
bored holes must be covered up immediately after it has been inspected.
2.33.13 Boring and Concreting of Piles
(a) Boring shall be carried down to such soil strata determined from results of trial boring and soil
tests carried out previously as agreed by the SO Rep.
(b) The sides of all boring shall be kept intact and no loose material shall be permitted to fall to the
bottom of the bored holes. The Contractor's equipment shall be capable of sinking a steel casing
to support and keep the side of the bored hole intact when directed by the SO Rep.
(c) In cases where soil conditions are sufficiently stiff to hard to dense, and steel casings are not
necessary, temporary casings of at least 5 m long shall be placed in the bored holes before
inspection of bored holes by the SO Rep. These temporary casings must project at least 1 m
above ground to prevent fall of loose materials or persons into the bored holes. All bored holes
waiting for concreting shall be set up with the temporary casings at all times.
(d) All bored holes shall be inspected by the SO Rep on site prior to placing of concrete. All loose
material likely to affect the strength of the pile shall be removed forthwith by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(e) The Contractor must provide all facilities to enable the SO Rep to carry out his inspection safely.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-18
2.33.13 Boring and Concreting of Piles (Cont’d)
(f) Holes reamed out at the base shall likewise be clean and firm before placing of concrete.
(g) If ground water is found in the borehole and it affects the excavation and removal of soil from the
borehole, or if it causes the collapse of the sides of the borehole, or if the side collapses
irrespective of the presence of water, then steel casing of appropriate length and size shall be
installed in the bored hole.
(h) All concrete placed in boreholes shall be lowered by hoppers with exceptional care so as to
prevent segregation. Tremie pipes extending to the full depth of the pile shall be used for
concreting under water.
(i) The top of the pile shall be brought up at least 500 mm above the cut -off level of the pile to
permit all laitance and weak concrete to be removed and to ensure that it can be properly keyed
into the pile cap. Any defective concrete in the head of the completed pile should be cut way and
made good with new concrete well bonded into the old concrete
(j) All boreholes shall be protected from the possibility of ground surface water entering the hole
from the time the boring is completed and ready to be concreted until the pile is complete. No
concreting shall commence until the hole has been inspected and the above precautions made.
(k) Reinforcement cages shall be supported centrally and firmly within the hole so that no movement
will occur during the concreting operation
(l) For soft and collapsible soils, the boreholes shall be temporarily cased or stabilized with suitable
stabilizing fluids (e.g. polymer or bentonite slurry) approved by SO Rep.
2.33.14 Record of Each Pile
A record of each pile shall be kept by the Contractor and a copy shall be submitted to the SO Rep within
1 day after the installation of the respective pile.
This record shall include the following information:
(a) Length of pile measured from cut off level

(b) Length of pile measured from ground level
(c) Diameter of pile
(d) Ground level
(e) Cut-off level
(f) Length of reinforcement cage
(g) Water table below ground level
(h) Length of casing
(i) Strata of ground penetrated and where boring stops
(j) Result of tests on concrete cube
(k) Time for commencement and completion of boring and concreting works
(l) Grade of concrete used
(m) Volume of concrete used and Concrete slump
(n) Other information as required by the SO Rep.
(o) Dry or tremie concreting
The form of this record must be approved by the SO Rep before piling commences.
The Contractor shall also be required to provide log-book for use by the SO Rep for recording of the
above information on site.
2.33.15 Piles in Same Group or in Close Proximity
The Contractor must submit proposed sequence of installation of piles in a group or in close proximity
to the SO Rep for approval. The SO Rep reserves the right to order changes to the approved sequence
of piling if he considers it necessary to do so.
Generally, no two piles in the same group or in close proximity may be allowed to be bored and/or
concreted on the same day, unless with the written approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-19
2.33.16 Installation of UPVC Pipe And Wire For Pile Penetration Checking
The Contractor shall install in all bored piles an approximately 16mm Nominal Internal Diameter hollow
UPVC pipe of approved quality with a prelaid 3mm diameter wire inside the UPVC pipe within each
cast-in-situ pile. The Contractor shall be paid separately for the installation of these UPVC pipes with
wires based on the pay length as a variation to the tender sum. The payment for the UPVC pipe with
the wire shall be based on the pay length (measured from the specified cut-off level of the pile to the
end of the pile) as recorded and verified in the “As-Built Pile Penetration Plan”. The UPVC pipe with
prelaid wire shall be placed from the base of the bored hole to the ground level for checking the length
of each completed bored pile immediately after concreting and capped.
The UPVC pipe shall include joints and stoppers at the top and bottom ends of the pipe and the 3mm
diameter wire shall be prelaid inside it from bottom of the pile to 0.5m above the cut off level prior to
capping of the UPVC pipe. The prelaid wire, UPVC pipe thickness, glue length for joints, strength of
pipe material and other qualities must be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative
before the commencement of work. Notwithstanding this, the pipe thickness and joint length between
pipes shall be not less than 3mm and 150mm respectively.
The pipes shall be installed vertically and concrete counterweights shall be used at the base of the
UPVC pipe to ensure the verticality of the pipe. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipe is vertical and
free from any obstruction which may prevent measurement of its length at a later date. The prelaid wire
shall not be removed from the UPVC pipe and the contractor shall facilitate in the measurement of the
pile length after the hacking of the bored pile to cut off level.
In the event that substantial ground water is present in the borehole and the pile has to be formed by
tremie concreting underwater or any other approved fluid, the Contractor shall not be required to install
the UPVC pipe with wire.
The Contractor shall note that the Employer attaches great importance on the condition of the UPVC
pipes and prelaid wires. Where UPVC pipes are found choked or damaged or missing or without the
prelaid wires during construction and pile penetration checking, the Contractor shall not be paid for the
installation of these UPVC pipes with wires. In addition, during the conduct of pile penetration checking
of selected piles for a block, a UPVC pipe is considered choked if the prelaid wire is unable to be
extracted from the UPVC pipe for pile penetration checking.
For the payment of UPVC pipes with wires installed for this block, the Contractor shall be paid only for
the total pay length of UPVC pipes with wires installed in the block excluding UPVC pipes that are found
choked or damaged or without the prelaid wires during construction and pile penetration checking. In
addition, an administrative charge may be imposed on the Contractor for the chokage of UPVC pipes.
2.33.17 Instrumented Bored Piles Load Test
The Contractor shall install the types and number of instruments as shown in the drawings for
conducting the instrumented pile load test as follows:-
(a) Weldable type vibrating wire strain gauges, or equivalent, which measure strain in the cast-in-
situ concrete bored pile during the load test, shall be used. Each vibrating wire strain gauge shall
have, at least, a maximum strain range of + 1500 microstrain, and a thermal coefficient of
expansion of 10 x 10 –6 per oC . The pick-up sensor used shall be mounted on top of the
vibrating wire strain gauge and shall be of a constant oscillation type, or equivalent.
(b) 8 mm diameter stainless steel telltale rod extensometers to measure the axial compression
between the pile and the pile top.
(c) Heavy-duty signal cables shall be used to connect the pick-up sensors to a terminal box at
ground level.
(d) The vibrating wire strain gauge shall be welded directly onto a single reinforcement bar
positioned at the center and extended to the base of the pile. The central bar must be held in
position vertically by means of horizontal ties connected to the reinforcement cage and shall be
of the same diameter as the main reinforcement bars of the steel cage. The position and number
of strain gauges that will be installed in the pile shall be as directed by SO’s Rep.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-20
2.33.17 Instrumented Bored Piles Load Test (Cont’d)
(e) The reinforcement bar must be grounded to provide a flat surface before the strain gauges are
welded on. The pick-up sensors must be firmly secured on top of the strain gauges by means of
suitable clamps. Every strain gauge/pick-up sensor assembly shall be adequately rustproofed
and waterproofed.
(f) The 8mm diameter stainless steel telltale rod extensometers shall be installed vertically in the
pile. 12mm internal diameter steel pipe shall be used for the protection of the telltale rod
extensometer. An anchor plate must be provided at the toe of the telltale rod. All joints are to be
properly welded to avoid grout ingress. A reference head and a depth micrometer must be
provided for measuring the relative axial compression of the pile.
(g) Proper protection must be provided for the strain gauges, pick-up sensors, cables, and telltale
rods during all stages in the casting of the pile. The contractor shall carry out function test for the
strain gauges and sensors :
(i) after installation onto the steel reinforcement
(ii) after hoisting and lowering of the steel reinforcement into the bore hole
(iii) after concreting the pile
(h) A Linear Vertical Displacement Transducer (LVDT) shall be placed on a magnetic stand fixed to
the pile top and the probe of the LVDT shall be seated on top of a brass reference head at the
top of each stainless steel rod. A readout unit shall be used to monitor the movement of the tell-
tale extensometers.
(i) Equipment, tools, heavy-duty cables, readout unit and other accessories must be in good
working condition and calibrated.
(j) Test load increments and pile settlement measurement must be carried out in accordance with
the testing procedures detailed in Clause 2.20.
(k) The installation data for every instrument and test results shall be captured and recorded by the
contractor’s instrumentation specialist.
(l) Two sets of the comprehensive reports incorporating relevant soil logs and interpretation of
results, to be verified and certified by the contractor’s Professional Engineer involved in the
installation of the instruments, shall be submitted to the SO’s Rep within two weeks after the
completion of work.
(m) The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of all the instruments installed.
(n) The Contractor will carry out at his own cost, another instrumented pile load test as instructed by
the SO’s Rep if the test produces erroneous results due to damaged or malfunctioned
instruments.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-21
2.33.18 Dynamic Pile Test for Bored Pile
The Contractor shall engage an independent testing specialist who provides at all times, operate and
maintain a set of portable equipment for the dynamic testing of pile foundations. The equipment shall
be the latest model of its kind, Model GCPC Pile Driving Analyzer or its equivalent. The equipment shall
also be equipped with the latest revision of the CAPWAP programme to perform data analysis of the
field data. The CAPWAP programme should include features for interactive or automated mode for
calculation and matching of the forces, velocity waves, calculation of CASE capacity, calculation of pile-
toe resistance vs toe movement for end-bearing piles, wave equation analysis using pile top
measurements, static load-settlement analysis based on the CAPWAP results and capable of giving
both numerical and graphic output and other utilities for the processing of the field data.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Hardware and Software owned by the third party testing specialist
are in good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit
specifications and details of the Hardware and Software for the SO Rep approval before carrying out
the dynamic pile test.
If the Contractor fails to make available the Hardware and Software within 2 weeks after notification by
the SO Rep on the need to carry out the test, the SO Rep will make the necessary arrangement to
engage other testing specialists to carry out the dynamic pile test and CAPWAP Analysis and all costs
and expenses thus incurred shall be recovered from the Contractor.
The portable dynamic testing equipment should be in a compact unit suitable for rugged use at the
piling site. The unit shall contain automatic signal conditioner, printer and a high resolution screen for
display. The printer should be capable of producing report quality graphs as well as printout of data in
the field. The Contractor shall ensure that qualified personnel viz. an engineer and a technician are
available at all times for the operation of equipment and for conducting the test.
the SO Rep one week after the completion of the test. The test reports shall contain such detailed
information such as background, soil log, details of the test pile, test procedures, full analysis of the test
results, etc. The reports must also be properly bound in booklet form.
2.33.19 Failure of Dynamic Pile Test
A Dynamic Pile Test shall be deemed to have failed if the maximum resistance of pile (RMX) at any
time during blow, using a Case Damping Coefficient (J) as approved by the SO Rep, is less than 2
times the nominal working load of a working pile under test.
If the force/velocity-time graph taken during the test does not indicate any abnormality, the SO Rep may
allow the Contractor to re-tap the pile and another Dynamic Pile Test may be carried out all at the
Contractor's cost and expense.
If a working pile so tested fails and is rejected by the SO Rep, then TWO further Dynamic Pile Tests on
other piles in any building block at the site may be carried out as directed by the SO Rep at the
Contractor's cost and expense. In addition, compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep shall be
driven all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
When the integrity of the pile from a Dynamic Pile Test is doubtful to the SO Rep, the Contractor is
required to show proof that the integrity of the pile is acceptable to the SO Rep. Otherwise,
compensating pile(s), as directed by the SO Rep, shall be driven all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-22
2.34 MICRO PILE SYSTEM
2.34.1 Hydraulic Drilling Rig and Accessories
The Contractor shall use only electrically powered hydraulic drilling rigs to minimise noise generated
during drilling operation. The slurry circulation tanks shall be used to remove all spoil cement slurry and
water from the pile pits. Generator sets for the supply of electricity shall have adequate housing and
exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep prior to use on
site.
2.34.2 Installation of Micro Piles
The installation of the micro piles or any other sizes approved by HDB shall include inter alia the
following requirements:
(a) The quality of materials such as Grade 460 steel bar, cement grout, grout additive, splice
material, etc must be approved by the SO Rep. Equipment, tools and other accessories must be
in good working condition.
(b) All site safety precautions must be observed and safety measures provided and maintained
throughout the installation work.
(c) Grout shall be mixed from ordinary Portland cement complying to current British or Singapore
Standards and clean water supplied from the public mains. Whenever necessary, "Intrusion Aid"
grout additive shall be added to the manufacturer's recommendation to improve workability and
reduce shrinkage. The grouting shall be executed within such time as may be directed or
approved by the SO Rep. The strength of grout shall not be less than Grade 30.
(d) The installation of every micro pile and the test results of any one piling site shall be captured
and recorded and a comprehensive report, to be verified and certified by the Contractor's
Professional Engineer involved in the micro pile installation, shall be submitted to the SO Rep
within two weeks after the completion of the work at each piling site.
(e) Any other conditions that may be imposed by the SO Rep to ensure the safety and soundness
of each micro pile.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(22)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-23
2.34 MICRO PILE SYSTEM (CONT’D)
For micro piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 150mm to 300mm in increment of 25mm.
The nominal working loads of various sizes of micro piles shall be indicated in the Drawings.
2.34.4 Boring of Micro Piles
For soft and collapsible soils, the boreholes shall be temporarily cased or stabilized with suitable
stabilizing fluids (e.g. polymer or bentonite slurry) approved by SO Rep. Upon reaching rock or firm soil
strata, drilling may be continued without casing. Drilling in rock shall be executed with a down-the-hole
air hammer. Boring in soil can be done by wet or dry rotary drilling depending on the soil type and site
environment.
Upon completion of the drilling, the borehole shall be cleaned by flushing out any loose chipping/soil
particles from the inside of the casing with water or air.
2.34.5 Main Steel Component of Micro Pile
Axial steel component of the micro pile shall be in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
The main steel bars shall be joined by splicing. Splicing shall be of approved mechanical splicing.
Top anchorage of the micro pile shall consist of extension of the axial steel component of the pile
through a steel bearing plate. The circumference of the steel bars through the steel plate shall be
securely welded.
The contractor shall propose his method of reinforcement splicing or coupling to SO Rep for approval.
Upon approval of the method, the contractor shall proceed to fabricate samples of splicing or coupling
and send them to an approved laboratory for testing on its tensile strength. The splicing or coupling
shall be strong enough such that its tensile strength is higher than the reinforcement. Three samples
shall be tested and the results of the tests are to be accepted before installation of working piles. The
costs of fabrication of the test samples and testing are to be borne by the contractor.
2.34.6 Grout Mix
The proportion of grout according to minimum cube strength shall comply with the following
requirements:
Resistance to Crushing (cube strength)

Range of Water/Cement Ratio
7 days 28 days
0.40 to 0.45 24 N/mm2 33 N/mm2
The quantities of cement in the mix shall be measured by weight. Grout shall be mixed on site and shall
be pumped into its final position not later than half an hour after mixing. Grout shall be free from
segregation, slumping and bleeding.
2.34.7 Grouting
Grouting shall be placed using tremie method where grout mix is pumped into the bored hole by grouting
pump under low pressure and delivered using PVC hose or galvanised iron pipe in one continuous
operation until "good grout" appears at the top of the borehole.
2.34.8 Grout Test
4 test cubes shall be taken from the grout mix of every 3 m3 or a portion thereof for testing purpose for
each day when there is grouting works, unless further tests are required due to failure in complying with
the specified strength. 2 test cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 cubes shall be tested
at 28 days at HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory at the Contractor’s expense. The SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose a charge against the
Contractor for every cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age as
specified; in addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install
compensating piles that will ensure the safety of the building to be supported by the piles. The
compensating piles shall be installed all at the Contractor's cost and expense, and as directed by the
SO Rep.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(23)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-24
2.34 MICRO PILE SYSTEM (CONT’D)
2.34.9 Fabrication of Steel Bar
Spiral reinforcement (R6) is fixed around the bars to prevent bursting of grout under load. Lantern
centralisers are fixed to the bars at 3 m intervals to ensure sufficient grout cover to the steel bars. Steel
spacers are placed at 3 m interval to ensure that the bars are placed vertically.
2.34.10 Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for MicroPile
Where micro piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist
testing firm to conduct Pile Integrity Tests on the piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The
total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2 Nos or 2 % of the total number of piles in each building
block, whichever is greater.
The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time,
if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed.
The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialist’s testing firm to carrying out the test. The
pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation. During preparation, loose concrete, mud
or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound
concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small
impact hammer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a
technician. Upon completion of the Pile Integrity Test, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report
indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the SO Rep. Two
sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to
the SO Rep. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following:
(a) Contract name and number

(b) Block number
(c) Pile reference number
(d) Pile diameter
(e) Date of pile installation and date of testing
(f) Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile
(g) Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which cover concrete quality, location and severity of the
defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.
2.35 JACK-IN PILING SYSTEM
2.35.1 System of Piling
The jack-in piling system consists essentially of H-section steel piles, Reinforced Concrete piles or spun
concrete piles forced into the ground using a non-impact jacking system. The pile sections used shall
comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these exist, or the equivalent British Standards
or other approved standards, for example SS EN (including the National Annex). The Contractor shall
ensure that when concrete piles are used, they would not be damaged during handling and
transportation.
The nominal working loads are indicated in the Drawings.
2.35.3 Resistance and Penetration of Piles
The resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 2.5 times the nominal working load of the pile. The
Contractor shall install all working piles to such a depth that the required resistance is obtained. The
minimum depth of pile shall not be less than 7.0 metres below the cut-off level of the pile or as may be
agreed by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(24)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-25
2.35 JACK-IN PILING SYSTEM (CONT’D)
2.35.4 Installation
During pile installation, the hydraulic pressure of jack corresponding to depth of pile penetration shall
be recorded at every 0.5 metre depth intervals.
Except for pile joining, each pile shall be jacked in continuously until the required penetration of required
resistance as shown on the pressure gauge of the jack is achieved.
A minimum jacking pressure of 2.5 times the nominal working load shall be maintained for at least 2
minutes. The final set recorded shall not exceed 10 mm.
Before the commencement of installing each pile, the platform of the piling rig shall be checked for
plumb in any two directions or spirit level and shall be maintained during the entire process of the pile
installation.
The pile shall be marked with paint at every 1m interval to enable easy determination of pile penetration.
(a) Installation of Jack-In Spun Pile
The following procedures shall apply:
(i) The pile shall be jacked into the ground with a jack-in force of a minimum of 2.5 times the
nominal working load
(ii) Jacking shall be continued until practical refusal and meeting the “termination” criteria
(b) Termination criteria:
(i) Settlement of the pile is less than or equal to 10mm between two cycles after holding for
2mins/cycle
(ii) If the settlement is larger than 10mm, the re-jacking process shall be repeated until the
‘termination’ criteria are achieved
Dolly or Follower may be used as and when necessary. When dolly or follower is to be used, the
penetration depth of dolly or follower shall not exceed the pile cut-off level.
2.35.5 Welded Joints of Jack-In Spun Pile
Electrodes used shall comply with shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards, where these
exist, or the equivalent British Standards or other approved standards, for example SS EN (including
the National Annex).
Welded joints shall have a minimum 5-minute cooling time before resuming pile installation.
2.35.6 Quality of Welded Joints and Welders
Where applicable, the quality of welded joints and welders shall comply with subclause “Quality of
Welded Joints and Welders” under Clause 2.32.6 of this Specification.
2.36 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILING WORK
2.36.1 Penetration Of Driven Piles
The pay length of driven piles shall be the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off level
of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the SO’s representatives and the
Contractor and endorsed by the SO Rep. The concrete pile shall be marked with red paint at every 1m
interval to enable easy determination of pile penetration. The Contractor shall install UPVC pipe of
approved quality and approximately 16 mm diameter in all the precast piles as shown in the Drawing
for Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(25)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-26
2.36 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILING WORK (CONT’D)
2.36.2 Precast Concrete Piles
Precast concrete piles can be non-prestressed or prestressed, obtained from the approved supplier.
The design, manufacturing, handling, transportation, lifting and driving shall be in accordance with CP4,
'Code of Practice for Foundations'. The position of lifting points shall be clearly specified. The piling
system proposed shall be verified by design calculation that the pile section and area of steel required
shall be sufficient to safely resist all stresses arising from handling, transportation, driving and lifting,
and in no case shall the percentage of area of steel to pile cross-section be less than 1% for non-
prestressed concrete pile, and 0.3% for prestressed concrete pile using high tensile strength tendons.
The details for splicing of pile sections and method of splicing shall be submitted and for the approval
of the SO Rep. Joints shall be designed to resist possible uplift due to nominal eccentric moment of
column.
2.36.3 Materials For Precast RC Piles
All materials used for precast RC piles shall where appropriate, comply with Section 4 "Structural
Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Minimum 28-day strength of concrete in the
piles shall be 40 N per sq mm.
For precast reinforced concrete piles, the sizes of the square piles shall be 150mm, 175mm, 200mm,
230mm, 260mm and 300mm. The nominal working loads of precast reinforced concrete piles shall be
indicated in the Drawings.
2.36.5 Pile Hammer And Set
Where piles are included in the Works, impact hammer, either single-acting or double-acting, or
hydraulic hammer shall be used in driving piles. However, diesel drop hammers shall not be used. The
hammer shall be capable of producing sufficient kinetic energy to drive the piles to the required set
without causing damage. The type of hammer and the height of drop of the hammer shall be first
approved by the SO Rep. If hydraulic hammer is used, ensure that the hydraulic hammer provided is
suitable for the piling of all sizes of reinforced concrete piles without causing damage.
The allowable set for the final 10 blows of piles, which is dependent on factors such as pile size, pile
penetration, hammer size and subsoil condition, etc. shall be proposed by the Contractor’s PE and shall
be approved by the SO Rep before being adopted as a criterion on the Site. The ultimate resistance of
all piles shall be a minimum of 3 times the given nominal working load of the pile section. The onus for
obtaining the required resistance shall rest with the Contractor.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(26)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-27
2.36.6 Construction Equipment And Experience For Driving Piles
The Contractor shall submit together with the Tender, a progress schedule and full details of the
Construction Equipment to be committed on the Site. A resume showing the experience of the
Contractor and operators in piling work shall also be submitted.
2.36.7 Casting Yard
At least one month before the commencement of piling Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO
Rep for approval of the following :
(a) location and contact number of casting yard;

(b) date of casting;
(c) type, length and number of piles to be cast;
(d) pile design drawing(s) (if alternative systems of piling are used).
2.36.8 Warranty
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the
Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage to the super-structure resulting from defective
execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep. The warranty period shall be one year after the completion of the super-
structure.
2.36.9 Driving Of Piles
No pile shall be driven before concrete reaches its 28-day working cube strength. Notwithstanding the
earlier achievement of the specified 28-day strength, no pile shall be driven until a period of at least 14
days has elapsed after casting of the pile. Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct
locations true to line both laterally and longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings. Piles shall be guided
at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain their correct position
by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been wrongly aligned
may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of the SO Rep.
A dolly shall not be used as an aid to driving a pile to its final penetration unless approval has been
obtained from the SO Rep. Where a dolly is used, the allowable set for the final blows of a pile shall be
reduced to account for higher energy loss in the dolly-pile head system. The magnitude of the reduction
shall be determined by site observation and shall not be less than 25 percent.
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than
75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear the cost of amendment of pile caps, ground beams and
other structural work designed to counter pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible tolerance, as
directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses.
2.36.10 Raking Pile
For raking piles, the piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the specified inclination. The
maximum permissible deviation of the installed pile from the specified inclination shall be 1 in 40.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(27)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-28
2.36.11 Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO
Rep on site and a copy to be kept by the Contractor. The record shall include the following items :
(a) Set
(b) temporary compression
(c) penetration from ground level
(d) length of pile and size of section
(e) ground level
(f) cut-off level to the top of pile
(g) time of starting and time of completion
(h) inclination of the pile
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile commences, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
2.36.12 Damaged Or Rejected Piles
All piles which are cracked, broken, or damaged in any manner during transportation, handling or driving
shall be rejected. All piles driven unduly out of position, or driven out of plumb in excess of 1 in 75, or if
no set can be obtained after driving for a considerable length well in excess of estimated penetration
based on soil data and site condition, shall be rejected. In situation where a dolly is used, the pile shall
be rejected if it does not achieve the allowable set and the full length of the dolly has been utilised to
drive the pile.
2.36.13 Compensating Piles
All piles driven into ground and rejected shall be replaced with compensating pile or piles at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. The position and number of compensating pile(s) as decided by
the SO Rep shall be such that the concentricity of the pile group is not altered. The Employer will only
pay the cost for the original number and size of pile(s) in the pile group as shown in the Drawings. In
the computation for payment, the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings and the pay length
of the compensating pile shall be taken. If two or more compensating piles are used to replace the
rejected pile, the computation shall be based on the size of the original pile as shown in the Drawings
and the shortest pay length of the compensating pile (which compensate the particular rejected pile, as
decided by the SO Rep). If there are two or more rejected piles in the same pile group and there is no
indication which compensating piles are for which rejected piles (as decided by the SO Rep), the
computation for payment shall be based on the sizes of the original piles as shown in the Drawings and
the two or more shortest pay length of the compensating piles.
2.36.14 Cutting Of Piles
Excavate and cut off the pile to the required level shown on the pile layout Drawings or otherwise
directed by the SO Rep. Checking and recording of cut-off level shall be followed up immediately.
Precast concrete pile shall be stripped to the cut-off level to expose the longitudinal reinforcement bars
leaving the dressed head of the pile projecting 75mm into the pilecap. The longitudinal steel shall be
left projecting 600mm above the dressed head level and cast into the pilecap.
In the cutting of piles, the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to be responsible for the
measurement of pile eccentricities and cut-off levels, including those for compensating piles, and to
check and endorse the pile eccentricity drawings for submission to the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
make available all facilities and equipment for the SO Rep to confirm the measurement.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(28)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-29
2.36.15 Failure Of Working Load Test
A working load test shall be deemed to have failed if the settlement exceeds 25mm at 2 times the
nominal working load.
If a working test pile fails to sustain the full working test load over a period of not less than 3 days as
decided by the SO Rep, then 2 further tests on other piles at the same site selected by the SO Rep
shall be carried out. Where a pile fails under test, additional adjacent piles, as directed by the SO Rep,
shall be driven and the group re-tested if deemed necessary by the SO Rep, and the whole of the work
shall be carried out at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. That part of the Works shall be deemed
to have failed if 2 or more piles fail out of a piling area containing up to 150 piles, or 3 or more piles fail
out of a piling area containing 151 to 750 piles.
In the event of such failure, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, carry out sufficient further
piling to the satisfaction of the SO Rep to ensure the safety of the structures carried by the rejected
piles.
2.37 TIMBER PILING
2.37.1 Construction Equipment And Experience For Driving Piles
Submit together with the Tender, a progress schedule and full details of the Construction Equipment to
be committed on the Site. A resume showing the experience of the Contractor and operators in piling
work may also be submitted.
2.37.2 Penetration Of Driven Piles
The penetration of driven piles shall be the actual length measured from the bottom tip to the cut-off
level of the driven piles. The penetration of every pile shall be recorded by the Contractor in the
presence of the SO Rep. The timber piles shall be marked with red paint at every 300mm or other
suitable interval to enable easy determination of pile penetration.
2.37.3 Timber Piles
Timber piles specified shall be from the HDB Materials List and of approved brands/trademarks. Timber
piles shall be 100mm x 100mm, 125mm x 125mm, 150mm x 150mm or 175mm x 175mm square sawn
timber foundation piles with an allowable tolerance of ±5mm, produced from the species Kempas or
Keruing. The safe working load shall be 8.5 N per mm2 in direct compressive stress and with an ultimate
resistance of all piles of not less than 3 times the nominal working load.
The centre line of pile shall not deviate from the straight line joining the mid points of the butt and toe
by more than 25mm for any pile up to 6m in length, or 38mm for pile over 6m in length.
Use only timber piles produced under the ISO 9000 or PSB (Singapore Quality Mark/Product Listing
Scheme) Certification Scheme Suppliers.
Each batch of piles delivered to the Site shall be subjected to random sampling, for testing by an SAC
accredited laboratory, in accordance with the following frequency :
(a) For every contract supply, a minimum of two tests;

(b) For supply up to 1,000 metre run, the first test will be carried out from any batch of piles,
subsequent test will be made at each interval of 1,000 metre run, the number of test will depend
on the quantity of supply but subject to a minimum of two tests for each contract as stated in (i)
above.
All piles shall be pressure-treated with copper-chrome-arsenic wood preservative under a pressure of
not less than 14.0 kg per cm2, with minimum depth of penetration of preservative of 25mm and with a
net dry salt retention in the outermost 25mm of pile of not less than 16kg per m3. All methods of chemical
treatment and testing shall be in accordance with SS 72 : 1988 or BS 4072. The SO Rep shall exercise
his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor for
each test that fails to comply with the above requirement. In the event that any test by SAC accredited
laboratory resulted in failure, remove the batch of piles from which the random sampling is obtained
completely from the Site. Should the Contractor negligently or wilfully transport the same batch that had
failed previously to the Site again, this act shall be deemed to be an infringement and Clause 1.6
"Nuisance & Irregularities" shall apply.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(29)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-30
2.37 TIMBER PILING (CONT’D)
2.37.4 Steel Box Joint
Join two piles by using a mild steel welded box joint 450mm long made from 4.5mm thick plate and coat
with bituminous paint and approved by the SO Rep before use.
2.37.5 Pile Hammer And Set for Pile Driving
Use free drop hammer to drive the timber pile. The hammer weight for driving 175mm x 175mm pile
shall be 1.5 tonnes, and for driving 150mm x 150mm, 125mm x 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall
be 1 tonne. The hammer shall drop a minimum of 1300mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for
175mm x 175mm pile shall be not more than 15mm. The acceptable set for the last 10 blows for 150mm
x 150mm, 125mm x 125mm or 100mm x 100mm pile shall be not more than 20mm.
The ultimate resistance of all piles shall be a minimum of 3 times the given nominal working load of the
pile section. The onus for obtaining the required resistance shall rest with the Contractor.
2.37.6 Warranty
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper execution of the piling Works in accordance with the
Specifications and the pile layout Drawings. Any damage or Defect to the inspection chambers and
main drain lines resulting from defective execution of the piling Works shall be made good by the
Contractor at his own costs and expenses to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
2.37.7 Driving Of Piles
Approved piles shall be driven accurately in the correct locations true to line both laterally and
longitudinally as indicated in the Drawings.
Piles shall be guided at the top and bottom during driving and shall be suitably constrained to maintain
their correct position by means of guides. No pile which has been deflected from its course, or has been
wrongly aligned may be forcibly brought back to correct alignment except with the written approval of
the SO Rep.
The centre of each pile shall not deviate from its true position as shown in the Drawings by more than
75mm. The Contractor shall execute and bear all additional costs of the amendment in pile caps, ground
beams, etc designed as a countermeasure to the pile eccentricities exceeding the permissible
tolerance, as directed. Alternately the SO Rep may direct compensating piles to be driven at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses.
During driving, protect the heads of all piles with the helmet of mild steel fitting closely around the pile.
A 25mm thick plywood covering the head of the pile shall be contained within the helmet to separate
the helmet from the head of the pile.
Rigidly & securely join all piles with metal box joints. The joints shall be driven to a tight fit with the pile
hammer and spiked to the section of both piles.
2.37.8 Piling Record
Piles shall only be driven in the presence of the SO Rep. The penetration and set of every pile shall be
subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Record of driving for every pile shall be submitted to the SO
Rep and a copy shall be kept by the Contractor on the site. The record shall include the following items:
(a) Set
(b) Temporary compression
(c) Penetration from ground level
(d) Length of pile and size of section
(e) Ground level
(f) Cut-off level to the top of pile
(g) No. of joints used
(h) Time of starting and time of completion
The method of measuring set and temporary compression shall be approved by the SO Rep. The above
record shall show a series of sets and temporary compression measured during the whole process of
driving. Once the driving of a pile is commenced, it shall continue until the final penetration or set is
reached.
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(30)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 2-31
2.37 TIMBER PILING (CONT’D)
2.37.9 Damaged Or Rejected Piles
All piles which are cracked, broken, broomed, split or damaged in any manner during transportation,
handling or driving shall be rejected. All piles damaged during driving, or driven unduly out of position,
or driven out of plumb in excess of 1 in 75, or if no set can be obtained after driving for a considerable
length well in excess of estimated penetration, where it should set based on soil data and site condition,
shall also be rejected.
2.38 PILING METHOD OF STATEMENT
The Contractor shall study the soil report and submit the method statement for piling and the type of
machinery to be used for the piling works for the approval of the SO Rep within one month of the issue
2.39 SOIL AND ROCK CLASSIFICATION
Soil and rock classification shall be in accordance with the latest edition LTA Civil Design Criteria for
Road and Rail Transit Systems or equivalent standard.
Section 3/.....
BLDG17/S02.DOCX(31)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-1
SECTION 3
EXCAVATION
3.1 USE OF SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR EXCAVATION WORKS
The Contractor shall provide all necessary measures, including but not limited to temporary structures,
shoring and/or sheet piling, to facilitate the carrying out of excavation Works and/or for heavy vehicular
movement within the Site. The cost of such temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling, etc shall
be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum. Notwithstanding such provisions, the Contractor shall,
in the course of excavation Works, take great care to prevent earth movements and/or upheavals in the
excavation. The Contractor shall also take precaution to prevent displacement and/or damage to the
piles due to any traffic movement from heavy machinery employed on the Site. If any pile in the
excavated pit is displaced or if the pile is damaged by earth movement and/or upheavals, the Contractor
shall be held accountable for the displacement and/or damage to the piles and shall bear all cost and
expenses incurred in remedial Works.
The Contractor may, if he wishes to, make reference to the Soil Investigation Report available from the
Employer to facilitate the Contractor in ascertaining the temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling
required. However, the Soil Investigation Report shall not form part of the Contract or to be taken into
consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall take
note that all the information in the Soil Investigation Report are only indicative of the likely soil conditions
to be encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable to the Contractor for the accuracy,
adequacy or completeness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall
ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the
Contract Sum for all costs and expenses whatsoever arising from and/or out of any inaccuracy,
inadequacy or incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.
3.2 RESERVED
3.3 DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL
The Contractor shall comply with the following site control requirements in addition to those required by
the Drainage Department, Public Utilities Board (PUB) :
(a) Submitting all proposals for temporary drains and silt control measures to the Head, Drainage
Department for approval before commencement of the Works;
(b) Providing adequate silt-control facilities including lined temporary drains at the Site boundary
surrounding the Site comprising of composite channel drains of adequate capacity (minimum
Type C7) to capture the surface run off with proper sump outlets subjected to the prior approval
of PUB and the SO Rep, close turfing on both sides of the perimeter drains, silt-trapping devices,
turfing, wash-bays incorporating proper discharge outlets, etc. to control silt and mud from the
Site to enter the drains;
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-2
3.3 DRAINAGE DEPARTMENT'S REQUIREMENTS ON SITE CONTROL (CONT'D)
(c) Maintaining regularly all such silt-control facilities to ensure their effectiveness and in a clean,
hygienic, pest free and good working condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, and desilting
all affected drains until Substantial Completion of the Works;
(d) Ensuring that the execution of the Works shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing
overland flow, existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains;
(e) Ensuring that runoff within, upstream of and adjacent to the Site can be effectively drained away
without causing flooding within the Site or in areas outside the Site;
(f) Ensuring that discharge consequent to de-watering from basement or trench excavation is
channelled into silt trapping devices before reaching existing drains;
(g) Implementing adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the work
areas and existing drains, to ensure that construction materials are not discharged or washed
into the drains.
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing at his own cost and expense, any
additional or more stringent measures as may be necessary to achieve satisfactory site control
standards as required by the Drainage Department, PUB on surface water drainage.
3.4 EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES
The Contractor shall not allow and be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into drains and
canals. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements strictly :
(a) Treatment Of Silt-Laden Water
Ensure that silt-laden water is not discharged directly or by pumping into drains or canals. The
silt-laden water shall be channelled to silt traps, sedimentation tanks or other measures for
removal of silt before discharging into drains or canals.
(b) Provision Of Silt Traps And Perimeter Cut-Off Drains
(i) Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be provided to ensure that
earth, silt, mud, etc are not discharged into drains or canals. Details of these facilities
shall be duly designed and endorsed by a PE engaged by the Contractor. These facilities
shall be constructed before the commencement of the Works.
(ii) Silt traps, perimeter cut-off drains and other facilities shall be desilted and maintained at
least once a week or more often if necessary to effectively prevent the discharge of silt
from the Site.
(c) Protection Of Exposed Earth Surfaces
Provide and carry out close turfing promptly to prevent soil erosion at the Site. All exposed earth
surfaces not affected by construction activities shall be planted with turfing on an immediate
basis. Where necessary to prevent soil erosion, the Contractor shall also carry out progressive
turfing on Site. In cases where turfing is not practical or not effective in protecting exposed earth
surfaces which are left bare and undisturbed for more than one month, such surfaces shall be
protected from soil erosion by spraying with bitumen based emulsion or other effective methods
to be approved by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor
shall ensure that the methods are effective in the prevention of soil erosion.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-3
3.4 EROSION AND SILT CONTROL MEASURES (CONT'D)
(d) Excavated Material
(i) All surplus excavated materials shall be carted away to the disposal ground immediately.
The surplus excavated material shall not be stockpiled on the Site.
(ii) Earth materials stockpiled on the Site for construction work shall be within properly
contained areas and covered to prevent the earth from being washed into drains or canals.
The locations for stockpiling the earth shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
Notwithstanding the approval of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that earth is not
washed into drains or canals.
(iii) The Contractor shall only carry out trench excavation work provided the rate of
construction keeps pace with the rate of excavation.
(e) Treatment Of Mud Slurry
Check and ensure that mud slurry from drilling, tunnelling, diaphragm wall construction and jet
grouting, etc, are not discharged into drains or canals.
3.5 SURFACE EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall grub up and clear all shrubs, vegetable matter, bushes, roots and other
obstructions encountered on the Site. No tree shall be removed without written permission from the SO
Rep.
Any top soil which covers the Site shall be carefully scraped and piled up at a suitable location, with the
use of mechanical or manual labour, for subsequent use in turfing or tree planting. The Contractor shall
salvage whatever existing top soil there is on the Site, failing which he shall be liable to reimburse the
Employer for the loss. No top soil shall be removed from the Site without the permission of the SO Rep.
3.6 SITE FORMATION LEVEL
The existing ground levels and proposed platform levels for the building platforms and open areas for
the Works are as indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor is deemed to have made necessary
provision in the Contract Sum to cater for earthworks (cutting and filling) required arising from the
difference in levels between existing ground levels and proposed platform levels indicated in the
Drawings. There shall be no adjustment of the Contract Sum if the difference between the existing
platform levels indicated in the Drawings and the actual existing platform levels on site is within
±150mm.
The Contractor shall top up, fill, compact and level up to the proposed platform levels as indicated in
the Drawings with suitable excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to the required
level in layers of not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram and
consolidate. Upon approval by the SO Rep, backfilling shall commence as soon as practical and
completed expeditiously and without delay.
Where excavated earth within site is not suitable for filling up to the proposed platform levels as
indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense fill up with suitable imported
earth approved by the SO Rep. All surplus excavated earth or unsuitable earth shall be removed from
the Site and disposed of at the Contractor own disposal ground and entirely at his own cost and
expense.”
3.7 EXCAVATION GENERALLY
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited and examined the Site carefully and to have ascertained
the nature thereof and the kinds of materials to be excavated, and to have made provision in the
Contract Sum to cover for the type of materials to be excavated.
Prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall carry out a pre-construction survey of
the neighbouring properties and comply with the requirements of BCA and any other requirements as
required by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall set out the lines
and structures for the inspection and approval of the SO Rep. Original ground levels shall also be taken
and submitted to the SO Rep for record.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-4
3.7 EXCAVATION GENERALLY (CONT'D)
Excavation shall be carried out neatly in accordance with the Drawings, in whatsoever material may be
found, including hard rock or other hard material which requires breaking up by pneumatic drills and the
excavated materials shall be used as filling if required.
The Contractor may be allowed to carry out the excavation by his own methods subject to the approval
of the SO Rep.
The excavated materials may be temporarily stockpiled on the Site during the course of the Works
provided there is sufficient space available and such stockpiling shall not cause obstruction at the work
Site and such stockpiling shall be covered to prevent the excavated materials from being washed into
the drains and canals. In areas of poor soil, all excavated materials shall be completely removed from
the Site. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for all damages caused by the non-removal or
improper stockpiling of excavated materials on the Site.
The SO Rep may prescribe and limit the lengths and/or widths and/or depths of excavation to be
proceeded with at any one time.
Excavation shall not be carried down in the first instance to a depth nearer than 150mm to formation
level. The bottoming-up to formation shall be done by hand immediately in advance of placing hardcore,
concrete or other Permanent Works unless directed otherwise by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
also take such steps as are necessary, in the opinion of the SO Rep, to prevent damage to the formation
owing to exposure to the atmosphere and the trampling of the formation by workmen. Where, in the
opinion of the SO Rep, the formation is softened or spoilt by the Contractor, the soft or spoilt areas shall
be excavated and filled with Grade 15 concrete at the Contractor's own costs and expenses.
No Permanent Works shall be constructed in any excavated area or position until the SO Rep has
inspected and approval given to commence further work.
The entire excavation Works shall be formed and left complete and as accurate to the widths, levels,
contours and slopes or as otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
The Contractor may be provided with a site to dump and spread the surplus excavated materials as
directed by the SO Rep. Alternatively, the Contractor may be required to dispose of any surplus
materials and shall if so required provide lorries for transport and shall make all necessary arrangements
for the use of an approved dumping ground and bear all costs and expenses thereof. The Contractor
shall not deposit surface excavated materials on private land unless he can produce the written
permission of the owner of the land.
3.8 EXCAVATION IN ROCK
Any rock or boulders encountered in excavation to the required depths shall be removed by wedging,
blasting or other means as the SO Rep may direct, all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
When blasting is required, the Contractor shall obtain prior written permission from the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall comply with the Local Laws and Regulations and any requirements imposed by the
relevant Authorities with regard to blasting operations.
The SO Rep shall be fully informed by the Contractor as to the steps and precautionary measures taken
to safeguard the surrounding properties. The Contractor shall be liable for any accident, damage or
injury to any person, property or thing, resulting from the use of explosives. Prior to the start of blasting
operations, the Contractor, in the presence of the SO Rep, shall conduct a survey of all structures within
120m of the site where blasting is proposed, and any other structures which the SO Rep considers may
be affected, in order to determine the existing or pre-blast condition of these structures. Prior to
commencing blasting operations, a written report, supported by photographs where necessary, listing
any existing defects in the structures, shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
When blasting operations are being carried out, any road affected shall be closed to traffic and the
appropriate signs erected.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-5
3.9 ERRORS IN EXCAVATION
The Contractor shall excavate to such depths only as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the SO
Rep. Any excavation done to a greater depth than is necessary shall be filled with concrete of such
proportions or with such compacted material to the required formation levels as directed by the SO Rep.
The cost of such filling shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.10 EXCAVATION FOR PILE CAPS
The Contractor shall excavate for pile caps and complete excavation expeditiously after the piling
contractor has cut off excess length of piles.
The Contractor shall take care and precaution to avoid damaging or displacing the piles and the
Contractor shall be held fully responsible for any damage or displacement to piles in the excavation
pits.
Any water accumulating in excavated pits shall be pumped dry to facilitate construction of pile caps.
3.11 TEMPORARY COVERS
Prior to excavation for footing foundations, the Contractor may erect temporary covers over the area to
be excavated to prevent rainwater from getting into the excavations. However, when such temporary
covers are instructed to be erected by the SO Rep specifically, they will be paid for as a variation.
3.12 KEEPING EXCAVATIONS DRY
The whole of the excavations shall be kept free from water arising from rain, drains, floods or other
causes by pumping, bailing, drainage or other means. Should any water get into the excavations, the
Contractor shall remove such water, excavate the affected wet soil and fill up the excess excavation
with Grade 15 concrete, all at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
3.13 BACKFILLING
The Contractor shall backfill with selected excavated material around foundation excavations, etc up to
the required level in layers not exceeding 300mm thick or in such layers as directed and carefully ram
and consolidate. Upon approval by the SO Rep, backfilling shall commence as soon as practical and
completed expeditiously and without delay.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
The Contractor shall allow for spreading and levelling on Site or transporting off the Site, all surplus
excavated material which remains after completion of backfilling and compaction of excavations,
including the surplus excavated material left by the services departments of the relevant local
authorities.
3.15 PLANKING AND STRUTTING
The term "planking and strutting" shall be deemed to cover whatever method the Contractor adopts to
uphold the sides of excavations to prevent damage to adjoining properties, earth movement and injury
to workmen. The Contractor shall be held responsible for upholding the sides of all excavations and
shall provide all planking and strutting to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Such planking and strutting
shall be designed and supervised by the Contractor's PE
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-6
3.16 PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS

AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES
3.16.1 Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor and his Pest Control Operator (the Pest Control Operator hereinafter referred to as the
“Specialist”), executing the Works as required in this Clause including sub-clause have to ensure that
the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they
are required (hereinafter referred to as the “Performance Requirement”). In the event the Works, goods
or materials to be used as specified in this Clause including sub-clauses are upgraded in order to meet
the Performance Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no
extra cost to the Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not
in any way affect the Contractor and his Specialist’s duties and obligations arising under the Contract.
3.16.2 Scope Of Work
Chemically pre-treat the soil for the protection of buildings against subterranean termites. The treatment
shall be for residential building blocks and mixed development with commercial building blocks. The
ground below multi-storey carparks, linkways, link buildings, precinct pavilions shall not be treated.
Other low rise buildings not for residences or storage of merchandise shall not be treated. The areas to
be chemically treated shall include:
(a) The entire ground floor slab area prior to the laying of the concrete floor slab. The area below
the basement, lift pits and drop-off porch shall be excluded; and.
(b) All round the building perimeter prior to concreting the apron area. The width of the treatment
shall follow the perimeter defined by the apron slab but shall not exceed 2.0 m in width.
The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the National Environment Agency (NEA)
pertaining to such soil treatment work and such compliance shall form part of the Scope of Work. The
Contractor shall also comply with the requirements specified in the Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS), product labels and instructional materials supplied by the chemical and equipment
manufacturers or their licensed representatives.
In addition, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Work Method statement, stipulating the strategic work
processes control and personnel responsible etc., to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement
of such Works.
3.16.3 Chemical To Be Used
The non-repellent active ingredients (AI) and products to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil for
works which are within or/and outside Water Catchment areas, shall be those approved by the National
Environment Agency (NEA) The Contractor may propose either one of the following active ingredients
listed in the table below.
Active Ingredient (AI) Concentration of AI / Dilution rate / Application Rate

An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (Al)
concentration within the range 8.6%w/w to 9.6%w/w of Fipronil.
Dilution rate 1:160
Fipronil Acceptable range of concentration after dilution is 0.05%w/w to
0.07%w/w.
Application rate of 5L per m2 or the soil is saturated, whichever occurs
first.
An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (AI)
concentration within the range 17.2%w/w to 19.4%w/w of Imidacloprid.
Dilution rate 1:400
Imidacloprid Acceptable range of concentration after dilution is 0.04%w/w to
0.06%w/w.
first.
An aqueous suspension concentrate having an active ingredient (AI)
concentration within the range 20.1%w/w to 22.5%w/w of Thiamethoxam.
Dilution rate 1:240
Thiamethoxam Acceptable range of concentration after dilution is 0.09%w/w to
0.20%w/w.
first.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-7

AGAINST SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES (CONT’D)
3.16.3 Chemical To Be Used (Cont'd)
Any other non-repellent active ingredients approved by NEA but not listed above shall be submitted to
the SO Rep for approval for use prior application on site
(refer to the NEA website: http://app2.nea.gov.sg/soil_Termiticide.aspx for approved list).
Prior to the start of each treatment, the Contractor shall propose to the SO Rep the size and the location
to be treated. The Contractor shall conduct all the calculations required to ensure accurate application
and dilution rates for the termiticide and submit, to the SO Rep prior to the application on the Site. The
SO Rep shall be informed for all dilution and mixing procedure by the Contractor.
The Contractor is only to mix/dilute the exact amount to be used on the Site. No premixing will be
permitted. No mixing offsite prior to its use on the Site will be allowed. All chemicals mixed on the Site
MUST be completely used on the Site. No chemical mixed for use on the Site shall be permitted to be
removed or disposed off without the approval of the SO Rep.
The diluted chemical shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated. The total volume of flow of
diluted chemical used will be measured /metered using a Flow Meter. Other methods for measuring the
flow of diluted chemicals will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall submit the report to the SO Rep on the Application rate and Dilution rate of the
chemicals at the end of each site treatment and/or as directed by the SO Rep.
The Report shall contain the following information:
Date of Application DD/MM/YYYY

Amount of Area Treated XX.XX m2
Amount of Concentrate Termiticide used XX.XX Litres
Amount of Diluted Chemical used XX.XX Litres
Amount of Diluted Chemical unused after the treatment XX.XX Litres
This report must be verified and signed by the SO Rep at the end of each treatment.
3.16.4 Chemical Preparation
Preparation of chemicals shall be conducted in strict accordance with the Product Labels. All emergency
measures shall compile with the recommendation of the Material Safety Data Sheet that will come with
each chemical. All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required for the chemical
preparation and the PPE required for the site will be used at all times.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the instructions on handling of the chemicals for the following
procedures are in accordance with the published safety information. A declaration document on these
safety procedures on handling of chemicals shall also be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
the commencement of such works.
(a) Washing of hands

(b) Washing of equipment used
(c) Calibration of equipment used on site
(d) Pre-application Checklist
(e) Mixing Procedure
(f) Dilution Procedure
(g) Amounts of diluents used
(h) Type of diluents used
(i) All PPE required for the works to be carried out
No work shall commence without these procedures and safety documentations submitted to the SO
Rep.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-8

3.16.5 Time of Application
Treatment shall be carried out immediately before the lean concreting of the floor slabs and apron areas.
Soil treatment shall not be carried out when the soil is saturated, eg. during or immediately after rainfall.
Verify the ground water table before soil treatment is conducted. For this purpose, the Contractor shall
at his own cost and expense, excavate trial holes of more than 0.5m deep measured from the level of
the soil to be treated. The Contractor shall submit a report on the ground water table to the SO Rep
prior to commencing the soil treatment As required by National Environment Agency (NEA), soil
treatment shall not be carried out if the ground water table is 0.5m or less below the level of the soil to
be treated, and in such event the Employer is entitled to recover from the Contractor the value of work
so omitted by way of a variation order. The variation order shall be priced based on the applicable or
analogous or pro-rated rates in the Rates times the untreated area measured flat on plan.
Notwithstanding such cost recovery, the Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for
the provision of warranty for the work and the cost recovery shall not absolve the Contractor from his
responsibilities to rectify future occurrence of Defect in respect of the work under the warranty. The
restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with National Environment Agency (NEA)'s
requirements shall not in any way affect or diminish the Contractor’s responsibilities under the warranty.
Provided always that in the event chemical pre-treatment of the soil for the protection of buildings
against subterranean termites is omitted altogether from the Scope of Work for a building block either
on account of National Environment Agency (NEA)'s requirements or by reason of an Authorisation
Order, then the provision of a warranty for the chemical pre-treatment of the soil for that building block
shall be deemed to be waived by the Employer.
3.16.6 Application Procedure
Immediately after the soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be securely covered with black
polythene sheet. A layer of lean concreting shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet.
When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered immediately with black
polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one (1) metre into the untreated areas. The polythene
sheet, especially their overlapping parts, shall be properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all
rain water runs into the surrounding temporary drains.
3.16.7 Application Equipment
All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable condition. A list of all
equipment to be used on the Site shall be provided to the SO Rep. Also all these equipment must be
accompanied with last service date records prior to their use on the Site.
3.16.8 Provision Of Temporary Drainage
Temporary drainage of adequate capacity shall be provided around the whole area to be treated with
an outlet connected to a sump.
3.16.9 Quality Control Sampling
To verify the concentration of the chemical used, one (1) sample of the chemical shall be taken randomly
on each day of application as directed and witnessed by the SO Rep and stored in a one (1) litre
container, properly marked with the date and location of the sample taken. The samples taken shall be
kept under lock and at a cool and dry location in the SO Rep room. The keys shall be kept by the SO
Rep. The SO Rep shall select the required number of samples for concentration test according to the
schedule of material tests. The selected samples are to be sent to an accredited/approved laboratory
not more than three (3) calendar days after samples taken.
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost and expense containers of one litre capacity for the
collection of the samples. The sample container must be able to protect its contents against Ultra Violet
Light
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-9

3.16.10 Failure of Test On Chemical Concentration
The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 “Nuisance and Irregularities” to take action
against the Contractor for each sample that fails to attain within the range of the acceptable
concentration as specified in the foregoing requirement in the subclause “Chemical To Be Used.
Due care shall be exercised by the Contractor when mixing and preparing the chemical on site. For any
areas that were deemed to have failed the minimum concentration, immediate re-treatment by the
Contractor is required at no additional cost to the Employer. However, if the slab were already placed
and the Chemical Concentration were found to be below an acceptable level, Slab-Injections of the
previously used chemicals shall be introduced to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at no additional cost to
the Employer.
3.16.11 Approved Pest Control Operators
Only Pest Control Operator who is registered with the BCA under the work head for Pest Control shall
be engaged to execute the pre-treatment of soil. The Pest Control Operator shall hold a valid letter for
the chemical to be used from NEA. In this respect, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Pest
Control Operator, proof of BCA registration, letter for the chemical to be used from NEA and the type
and details of chemicals to be used (including the rate of application) to the SO Rep for approval prior
to commencement of the treatment.
In addition, the Contractor shall also ensure that the Pest Control Operator produce a letter of support
from the supplier confirming the availability of the chemical to be used for the Works.
The SO Rep reserves the right to disapprove the use of the type of chemical and/or the Pest Control
Operator so selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim and there shall
be no adjustment to the Contract Sum nor extension of Time for Completion arising from or out of such
decision by the SO Rep.
3.16.12 Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in
the Deed of Warranty for Pre-Treatment of Soil for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-terranean
Termites as produced in Appendix A1. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit
such Deed of Warranty to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep
may at its sole discretion decide.
In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted to
such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as
produced in Appendix A1(TC) to such Town Councils. The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted
immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the
SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In
the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within
the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the
Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per
Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission
by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty
3.16.13 Re-treatment During Warranty Period
If subterranean termite infestation should occur in the treated buildings within the warranty period, the
Contractor shall re-treat the soil using the Post-Construction Soil Treatment method at his own costs
and expenses. Drilled holes shall be patched and walls and/or floors refinished.
In addition, in the event of additions or extensions to the buildings during the warranty period, the Pest
Control Operator and the Contractor shall be informed and shall also execute soil treatment to extend
the chemical barrier to cover such additions or extensions. The costs of such extensions of soil
treatment shall, however, be borne by the Employer.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-10

3.16.14 Safety Precaution
Provide and exercise safety precautions during all treatment processes.
Personnel engaged in the soil treatment shall wear protective clothing eg. goggles, long sleeved shirt
and long legged trousers or an overall type garment, impervious footwear and gloves as specified in
the foregoing requirements.
Spray drifts beyond the area to be treated shall be avoided. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent
accidental spillage of the chemical. Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials.
The affected soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the National
Environment Agency (NEA)'s dumping grounds.
Signs in the areas of application shall be posted to warn workers and the public that the area has been
treated with poisonous chemicals.
Unwanted chemicals and containers shall be disposed off safely at the National Environment Agency
(NEA)'s dumping grounds.
3.17 FINISHED PLATFORMS, SLOPES AND EMBANKMENTS
Platform levels shall be the level at the top of surface drains around the building. The Contractor shall
finish the open spaces between buildings with a fall of not less than 1 in 80 towards surface drains.
The Contractor shall cut, trim and adjust all slopes and banks to give gradual and regular slopes with
no abrupt change of direction, or as directed by the SO Rep.
3.18 SERVICES ROUTES
The Contractor shall clear all obstructions from proposed sewer, electrical, water, gas, telephone and
Rediffusion services routes and either fill or excavate ground to within 70mm of proposed final platform
level as directed by the SO Rep at any time during the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract.
Such instructions may be given separately for each of the services at different times and each instruction
shall be carried out within seven days.
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 3-11
3.19 ELECTRICAL CABLE PIPES AND TRENCH
The Contractor shall excavate and lay 4 no. of 150mm diameter UPVC pipe at a depth of 750mm from
the trench in the PowerGrid/SPSL switch room to the position as shown in the Drawings. The pipes
shall be laid on 100mm thick mass concrete bed of 600mm width. One end of the pipe shall project
600mm beyond the surface drain or as shown and the other end shall be flushed with the trench. The
trench shall be covered with removable RC slabs of 300mm width, capable of supporting a minimum
load of 100 kg. Sand shall be provided to fill the trench after installation of the cables into the trench.
Excavate and lay 2 no. of 100mm diameter UPVC pipe and 1 no. of 50mm diameter UPVC pipe at a
depth of 300mm from the floor of the HDB switchroom to the positions as shown in the Drawings.
Pipes used shall be free from leakage, distortion and cracks. Gaps between pipes and trench wall shall
be patched up with cement mortar and made watertight. A length of drawn wire strong enough to pull
in the cable, shall be provided in each pipe. The drawn wire shall project 600mm at both ends of pipe.
All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class C (wall thickness 6.6mm) type, complying with the
requirements of SS 141:1976.
3.20 TELEPHONE CABLE DUCTS
The Contractor shall provide and lay where shown 100mm diameter underground UPVC pipes to serve
as ducts for telephone cables. Ducts shall turn with gradual bend and continue to extend 600mm
beyond aprons, drains and paths outside the building. Provide threading wires for electrical cable ducts.
The number of pipes required are as shown in the Drawings.
3.21 DRAIN CASCADES
The Contractor shall excavate and lay cascade drains where surface drains flow down steep slopes or
banks.
Cascades shall not exceed 600mm in length and 300mm in each drop with top of sides finished straight
and parallel to slope of ground.
3.22 PUB REGISTERED EXCAVATORS
The Contractor shall in addition, engage the services of PUB Registered Excavator Operator only for
all excavation Works. In the event the Contractor fails to employ PUB Registered Excavator Operator,
no excavation Works shall be allowed.
Section 4/.....
BLDG17/S03.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-1
SECTION 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
4.1 CEMENT
4.1.1 General Requirements
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and
manufacture and comply with the following standards:
Type Relevant Standard

Ordinary Portland Cement SS EN 197
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement SS EN 197
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work.
When requested by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall produce a certificate showing the date and place
of manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall, in the
presence of SO Rep, be required to take samples for testing. The samples shall be sent for testing at
the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the
relevant standard shall be rejected.
The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed
bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised
boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be
stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in
the same mix.
Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed
in writing of any change in the source of supply.
Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall
not be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.
4.1.2 Supply From The Contractor’s Source
(a) Certificate Of Compliance
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of his own supply comply fully with the Specifications
and Approved Standard. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter
of Acceptance inform and seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing of his source of supply
together with the following documents:
(i) Test Reports showing that the Contractor’s supply is tested according to and in
compliance with SS EN 197.
(ii) If the Contractor’s supply is obtained from a local mill, a copy of the ISO 9000 certification
on the mill.
(iii) If the Contractor’s supply is imported, a letter of supply declaration from the overseas
manufacturer.
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratory. The test reports shall not be dated more than three (3) month from the submission
date of the test reports to the SO Rep.
Other than due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor shall not be
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required to
seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with
the documents laid down hereinabove.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-2
4.1 CEMENT (CONT’D)
4.1.2 Supply From The Contractor’s Source (Cont’d)
(b) Test Requirements
The Contractor shall, in the presence of SO Rep, be required to take and send samples taken
from his own supply during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated
damages are imposed under the Contract for testing at the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory.
:
The Cement shall be tested (minimum one test quarterly) in accordance with the Approved
Standard for Physical and Chemical Test. The test for Elemental Analysis is not required. The
number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where
liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be minimum of one test quarterly.
The Contractor offering from two different supply will have both sources subjected to the test
requirements.
All costs and expenses in carrying out all the tests and arranging and sending the test samples
to the Approved Laboratory as required in the Contract including the cost of samples shall be
4.2 AGGREGATES
Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS EN 12620. Where
crushed granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed
30%. The upper sieve size (D) for fine aggregates shall be 4 mm.
Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with
SS EN 12620.
Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced
concrete, unless otherwise specified.
All-in aggregates as specified in SS EN 12620 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials
inferior to granite shall not be used. The upper sieve size (D) for coarse aggregates shall be 20 mm and
the lower sieve size (d) shall be 4 mm.
Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling
of different materials and contamination. Aggregates used for concrete batching plant on site shall be
covered with a light roof cover. Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to
facilitate moisture compensation during concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on
the Speedy method or other approved equivalent method approved by the SO Rep.
The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have
them tested for compliance with Approved Standards of SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097, ASTM
C295 and ASTM C289. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB’s Engineering Materials
Laboratory. Aggregates failing to comply with the Approved Standards shall be rejected.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-3
4.2 AGGREGATES (CONT’D)
and Approved Standards. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter
together with test reports from SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories for each source of his
supply on the following properties:
(i) 20mm Aggregate
(a) particle size distribution - sieving method;

(b) flakiness index;
(c) shape index;
(d) volume stability – dry shrinkage;
(e) aggregate resistance to fragmentation;
(f) bulk density;
(g) particle density and water absorption;
(h) fines content;
(i) shell content;
(j) acid soluble sulphates content;
(k) sulphate content;
(l) humus content (lighter than Organic Plate No. 3);
(m) chloride content (not more than 0.01%);
(n) potential alkali-silica reactivity (Mortar Bar Method)
(o) petrographic examination;
(p) other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
(ii) Concreting Sand

(b) fines content (not more than 3.00%);
(c) humus content (lighter than Organic Plate No 3);
(d) chloride content (not more than 0.01%);
(e) bulk density;
(f) particle density and water absorption;
(g) assessment of fines (Methylene Blue Test);
(h) potential alkali-silica reactivity (Mortar Bar Method)
(i) magnesium sulphate soundness;
(j) elemental analysis (in percentage):
- Silica as SiO2
- Aluminium Oxide as AI2O3
- Iron Oxide as Fe2O3
- Titanium Oxide as TiO2
- Calcium Oxide as CaO
- Magnesium Oxide as MgO
- Chromium Oxide as Cr2O3
- Sodium Oxide as Na2O
- Potassium Oxide as K2O
- Sulphate as SO4
- loss on Ignition at 900 0C
(k) acid soluble sulphates content;
(l) volume stability – dry shrinkage;
(m) petrographic examination;
(n) any other element(s) which may exist in the concreting sand; and
(o) other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-4
(a) Certificate Of Compliance (Cont’d)
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required seek
the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the
documents laid down hereinabove.
The quality of the aggregates to be supplied shall comply in every respect with the Specifications
and Approved Standards, and the conditions, analysis and test requirements laid down in the SS
EN, BS EN, ASTM (especially SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097) classification for
concreting purposes. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows:
(i) 20mm Aggregate
Properties Frequency of Test

Particle size distribution - sieving method Minimum one test quarterly
Flakiness index
Shape index
Volume stability – dry shrinkage
Aggregate resistance to fragmentation
Bulk density
Particle density and water absorption
Fine content
Minimum one test six-monthly
Shell content
Acid soluble sulphate content
Sulphate content
Humus content
Chloride Content
Potential alkali-silica reactivity
(Mortar Bar Method)
Petrographic examination Minimum one test
The Contractor shall be required to send their 20 mm aggregate supply for the Mortar-Bar
test under ASTM Standard C1260 if the need arises.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-5
(b) Test Requirements (Cont’d)
Properties Number of Test

Particle size distribution - sieving method
Fines content (not more than 3%)
Humus content
(lighter than Organic Plate No 3)
Chloride content (not more than 0.01%)

Bulk Density
Minimum one test monthly
Assessment of fines (Methylene Blue Test)
Elemental analysis (in percentage):

(i) Silica as SiO2
(ii) Aluminium Oxide as Al2O3
Volume stability – dry shrinkage
Full list of properties as specified in the

subclause “Certificate of Compliance”.
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources will have both sources subjected to the
test requirements.
4.3 WATER
Potable water supplied by the Public Utilities Board shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout.
For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be
used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited.
4.4 ADMIXTURES
When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture,
admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS EN 934 for approval by the
SO Rep prior to the use of the admixture.
Admixture used shall comply with SS EN 934 or the relevant British European Standards. Requests
for permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered
when accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s).
The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture
uniformity tests in accordance with SS EN 934 or the relevant British Standards.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-6
4.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
4.5.1 Description
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reinforcement for concrete shall consist of plain mild steel
and high yield reinforcement bars complying with BS 4449 and welded steel fabric complying with SS
561.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth or any
other material that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause
corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
Where reinforcement is to be welded, it shall comply with CP 65 / SS EN 1992. The Contractor shall
obtain the approval of the SO Rep in writing prior to any welding of reinforcement.
4.5.2 Testing
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling before any cutting,
bending or other fabrication is undertaken. If deemed necessary, the SO Rep may cause samples to
be taken from reinforcement already fixed in position.
Samples for the tests shall be sent for testing at the accredited laboratory under Singapore Accreditation
Council (SAC), or other accredited body under the Mutual Recognition Arrangements (MRA) with SAC.
For each sample, 3 bars shall be taken for testing. Reinforcement not complying with the appropriate
Specifications shall be removed and replaced.
4.5.3 Galvanised Steel
Galvanized steel reinforcement as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with BS EN ISO 1461. The Contractor shall obtain galvanizing service or galvanized steel reinforcement
only from those in the Approved List.
The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table D1 of BS EN ISO 1461. For steel with diameter of
6mm and above, the mean coating (minimum) mass shall be 610 g per m2 and the local coating
(minimum) shall be 505 g per m2. The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If
the coating appearance of any galvanized reinforcement be found otherwise, such reinforcement shall
not be used as a galvanized reinforcement. Store all galvanized reinforcement in a dry and well
ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small areas of galvanized coating
damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application
of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 85% zinc dust, expressed as a
percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanized
reinforcement to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The coating
weight shall be determined using the gravimetric method in accordance with BS EN ISO 1460 and the
nominal density of the coating (7.2g/cm3). Certificates of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep
for verification.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-7
4.6 FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT
4.6.1 On Site Fabrication
All reinforcement shall be accurately cut and bent to the dimensions and shapes shown in the Drawings.
Bends shall be cold-formed by machine or by other approved means which produce a gradual and even
bending action. Reinforcement incorrectly bent shall not be used unless the method for straightening
and rebending will not cause any cracking, and approval for rebending is given by the SO Rep.
Reinforcement shall be securely tied with steel wires. The projecting ends of the steel wires shall be
directed away from the formwork so as not to encroach into the concrete cover.
Reinforcement shall be adequately supported by approved spacers and chairs to maintain the specified
concrete cover. Plastic spacers shall be used for all bottom slab reinforcement. Steel bar chairs bent
according to the Drawings or proprietary-type chairs shall be used for top slab reinforcement. The part
of the chair that need to rest on formwork shall be coated with plastic for isolation and protection.
Other than for slabs, both plastic and concrete or mortar spacer blocks may be used. Concrete or
mortar spacer blocks shall be provided with tying wire, and shall not be lower in compressive strength
and durability characteristics than the surrounding concrete. All spacers shall be obtained from sources
Sleeve jointing for reinforcement may be used provided that the strength and deformation
characteristics have been determined by tests carried out by a competent testing authority and
Fabrication and placing of reinforcement in each part of the Works shall be approved by the SO Rep
before any concrete can be placed thereon.
Reinforcement shall not be displaced during concreting. Reinforcement projecting from Works being
concreted or already concreted shall not be bent without approval by the SO Rep and shall be protected
from accidental deformation and damage.
4.6.2 Prefabrication At Factory
All column link cages and rectangular column cage reinforcement with T16 main reinforcement bars
(except for open links) and all beam cages with beam cage code prefixed with "J" provided to apartment
blocks shall be prefabricated in a factory approved by the SO Rep.
The rectangular column cage reinforcement shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T16 main
reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the column links and bent into column cage
reinforcement. The "J" series beam cage shall be prefabricated as welded mesh with the T13 or T16
main reinforcement bars welded to and holding in place the stirrup links and bent into beam cage
reinforcement.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-8
4.7 CONCRETE MIXES
4.7.1 Designed Mix
For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the
SO Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Concrete Grade 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Cement Content (kg per m3) 275 300 325 350 400
Maximum Cement Content (kg per m3) 550 550 550 550 550
Maximum % of Fine Aggregate to Total Aggregate 50 50 50 50 50
Maximum Water to Cement Ratio 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40
For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14mm and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be
increased by 20 kg per m3 and 40 kg per m3 respectively.
In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 10 N per mm2. If a current margin other than that
recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his
consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available;
however, such mix shall comply with the Specifications.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable,
workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified or as shown.
4.7.2 Trial Mixes
The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump or flow shall be verified
by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep. The mix shall be judged for suitable workability
as well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may be
considered suitable if :
(a) the designed maximum consistency is achieved in accordance with BS EN 12350-5 if a flow test
is specified; and
(b) the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified characteristic
strength by at least 10 N per mm2 or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to
be exceeded by this amount.
Trial mixes may not be required if concrete is supplied by prequalified ready-mix concrete suppliers
4.7.3 Mix Adjustment
Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the
mix without prior approval of the SO Rep.
An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg per m3 and above, or the percentage of fine
aggregate by 5% and above, or any change in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is
considered a change in mix design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design
used in relation to the specified requirements.
If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-9
4.8 BATCHING
Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and
due allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting
this amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall
be measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within ±3% of the quantity of cement, water or total
aggregate being measured, and with ±5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of
work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be
calibrated with known weights and volume measures.
4.9 MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and
continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete
is uniform in colour and consistency.
The mixing time shall be as follows :
(a) Pan mixer - minimum 30 seconds

(b) Truck mixer or drum mixer - minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m3 of concrete
plus 0.25 minute for each additional 1 m3.
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion
of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry
mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer.
The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for
more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall
be free from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.
4.10 READY-MIX CONCRETE
All concrete used in site casting for the Works shall be obtained from pre-approved Ready-Mixed
Concrete suppliers under the Singapore Accreditation Council's Certification Scheme for RMC.
Ready-mix concrete shall comply with SS EN 206. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.7
"Concrete Mixes" including all subclauses under it.
No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the
concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being
discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final
position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-10
4.11 WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY
The workability shall be such that the concrete can be well compacted, worked into the corners of the
shuttering and around the reinforcements, gives the specified surface finish and attain the specified
strength. Minimum of S3 Slump Class in accordance with SS EN206 shall be provided. For concrete to
be placed by pumps, higher workability shall be required subject to approval by the SO Rep. The mix
design shall ensure that this workability is obtainable.
On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on the Site at the discharge point of the mixer
by means of the slump test in accordance with BS EN 12350-2. If the measured slump is less than 100
mm, the concrete shall be rejected.
As an alternative, flow test to BS EN 12350-5 or other means of assessing workability may be

considered subject to approval by the SO Rep.
No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing.
4.12 TRANSPORT AND PLACING OF CONCRETE
Canvas sheet or other means shall be provided to ensure openings of mixer truck hopper to be covered
during transport of concrete from batching plant to the site.
All concrete shall be transported from the batching plant to the place of final deposit as speedily as
possible before it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed the 2 hours workability
retention time. Where retarders are used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the
SO Rep. The method of vertical transit shall be such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or
contamination of the ingredients.
In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with :
(a) Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating
movement of the pipe.
(b) Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement
mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be
concreted.
(c) When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted
inside but no free water shall remain in the pipe.
(d) Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat
by covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and
rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well
wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and
shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be
dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set
concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent
position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position.
For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In
walls, columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not
exceeding 1m deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not
normally exceed 30 minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made
subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-11
4.12 PLACING OF CONCRETE (CONT’D)
No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other
measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.
All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval
for night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the
concreting.
4.13 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. It shall be compacted using
approved immersion type mechanical vibrators. Sufficient numbers of vibrators in serviceable condition
shall be used on the Site to compact the concrete at the rate at which it is placed, and a minimum of
two standby vibrators shall be readily available for emergency use in case of breakdowns.
The concrete shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the
steel reinforcement. It shall be compacted to give a dense and compact concrete, free from voids of
any kind. Steel reinforcement shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
4.14 CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE
After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and
shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The
exposed surfaces of concrete shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the
SO Rep. The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the
manufacturer's instruction. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the
time the application is completed, the Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing
compound again. However, the application of the curing compound may be exempted subject to the
approval of the SO Rep, if continuous wetting for at least 72 hours by rain on the concrete surface
occurs immediately after the concrete sets. This waiver shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth and vegetation, and the
excavated ground shall be kept free of any water by pumping or other means of drainage. Approved
means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading,
moving vehicles, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influences that would impair
the strength and durability of the concrete. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances
shall be free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a
further period of 3 days from the time of concrete placing or as otherwise instructed thereafter.
Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good by the
Contractor.
4.15 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and
shall be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes,
such joints shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregates removed therefrom.
Immediately before placing new concrete, the joints shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich
cement grout.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-12
4.16 QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS
(a) Testing of Structural Concrete
Concrete shall be tested for compliance in strength and durability requirements, except for the
following non-structural Works :
(i) Foot paths and paved areas;

(ii) Ramps and steps;
(ii) Hardcourts;
(iv) Inspection chambers and drain lines;and
(v) Floor screed
The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 100mm cubes.
The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in
accordance with BS EN 12390. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test,
compressive strength test, core test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO
Rep.
(b) Sampling
On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be
taken according to the following rates :
(i) Samples Taken At Sites
Where samples are taken at sites, samples shall be taken for every 40 m³ of concrete or
part thereof, of each grade of concrete. At least 1 sample shall be taken from each batch
chosen by the SO Rep.
(ii) Samples Taken At Precast Plants And Ready-Mixed Concrete Plant
Where samples are taken at ready-mixed concrete plants, for every 40 m3 of concrete or
part thereof, at least 1 sample shall be taken from a batch. Each sample cannot be used
to represent the Works for more than one Contract or project.
The sampling of concrete cubes in the precast plants shall be carried out by the precasters
under the Approved Precast Concrete Supplier listed in the HDB Materials List.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor is still liable for ensuring that the precast
components quality satisfies the Drawings and Specifications requirements. In the event
that the precast components quality fails to meet the requirements in the Drawings and
Specifications, the Contractor shall be liable for the defective precast components. All
defective precast components which failed the strength requirement shall be removed or
otherwise rectified accordingly to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses. No extension of time for completion shall be allowed for the
rectification of such works.
A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of
concrete whose properties are to be determined. The sample shall be taken at the point of
discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast to
achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required
before demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-13
4.16 QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS (CONT'D)
4.16.1 General Requirements (Cont'd)
(b) Sampling (Cont'd)
At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The
remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall
be tested at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory or other approved accredited testing
laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring
system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the
proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test results shall be
uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Employer shall recover all testing fees charged by the
HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory for testing of cubes including those sampled from ready-
mixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes for
the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a
relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in
custody by a person designated by the SO Rep but shall not kept by the Contractor. The test
cubes to be tested at HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory shall be collected by the SO Rep
from the designated site at regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the
designated collection site and the Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site
on the day of collection. The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to hand over the
cubes to the HDB’s appointed contractor for the collection of cubes.
(c) Cube Identification
The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency
or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency
identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a
minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The reader must be able to read all 125kHz RFID tags,
including tags starting with hex codes of '2800' and ‘2868’. The Contractor shall include the
appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and
tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of the cube data and tag IDs shall be done within
the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed on the cubes while the concrete
is still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube surface. The
Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For damage or
loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the Employer's
purchase price.
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the
Contractor to the Employer.
(d) In-Situ Strength And Cover
The concrete cover shall comply with the requirements of CP 65 / SS EN 1992. The in-situ
strength of the concrete shall be assessed in accordance with SS EN 13791 where applicable.
The strength shall comply with the specified grade, taking into account the variability with in-situ
strength.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-14
4.16.2 Compliance Of Strength Requirement
The 28 day strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early
strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes.
For precast concrete, the 3 day strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early
strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified
by the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength
shall be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any
precast component should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the
age of 28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first
four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength
plus half a fixed current margin of 6 N per mm². Thus, the minimum average strength shall be :
Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Average
Strength at 28 days (N 23.0 28.0 33.0 38.0 43.0 48.0 53.0
per mm²)
(b) The sample strength is at least the level specified below :
Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Individual
Sample
17.0 22.0 27.0 32.0 37.0 42.0 47.0
Strength at 28 days (N
per mm²)
(c) The characteristics strength shall meet the requirement of the specified concrete grade.
If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be
sought to lower the strength level as specified in subclause (a) above.
For samples taken on the Site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the
requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are
tested at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep
shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.
Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete Works may be stopped and not be
continued until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed
for such stoppage of the concrete Works.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-15
4.17 TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE
In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance
with SS EN 206-1.
For the 28 day strength non-compliance, the quality of the sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by
carrying out tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical,
the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.
The tests may include non-destructive methods, the taking of core samples, load tests or a combination
of several methods as follows :
Compressive Strength of Individual Sample Test on Structure

Grade
(N per mm2) after 28 days
20 14.5 to below 17.0 )
25 18.5 to below 22.0 )
30 23.0 to below 27.0 )
35 27.0 to below 32.0 ) Non-destructive method and/or core test
40 31.5 to below 37.0 )
45 35.5 to below 42.0 )
50 40.0 to below 47.0 )
20 below 14.5 )
25 below 18.5 )
30 below 23.0 )
35 below 27.0 ) Non-destructive method and core test
40 below 31.5 ) and/or load test
45 below 35.5 )
50 below 40.0 )
The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with latest CP 65 / SS EN 1992
and assessed in accordance with latest SS EN 13791 / BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall
not nullify the establishment of non-compliance specified under Clause “Compliance of Strength
Requirement”.
4.18 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which fails to meet the quality as assessed in Clause
"Testing Of Hardened Concrete" shall be determined by the SO Rep. They may range from:
(a) qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause
1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against
carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be
structurally sound by a PE engaged by the Contractor; or
(b) the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial
measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised
and certified by a PE engaged by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses; or
(c) the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete and the costs and expenses in removing all
poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All defective concrete Works such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and
plumb, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to
the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-16
4.19 FORMWORK
(a) Material
The Contractor shall use system formwork, for the construction of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete
structures. The use of alternative system shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep and no
adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be effected under such case.
Unless specified otherwise, all formwork shall comply with SS 580. It shall be true to the shape
and dimensions as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall provide appropriate types of system formwork that produces high quality
off-form finish and concrete lines and surfaces complying with requirements of SS 580. For
cases of non-compliance with the foregoing requirements, the SO Rep reserves the right to
instruct the Contractor to carry out rectification Works. The form face in contact with concrete
shall be free from dirt, adhering grout, projecting nails, splits and other Defect.
Formwork shall be coated with an approved form oil which is compatible with the required finish.
Such oil shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, not injurious to concrete and shall not become
flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Diesel oil and liquids which retard the setting of
concrete shall not be used. The same type of approved form oil shall be used for all Works. The
application of the form oil shall be such that no reinforcement is coated by the oil and there shall
be no accumulation of the oil on the formwork.
Formwork to curved surfaces shall be of steel or other material approved by the SO Rep to give
a good surface finish.
(b) Use Of System Formwork
Prior to the commencement of the construction work, the Contractor shall submit the details of
the types of system formwork and the material to be used for the approval of the SO Rep.
Manufacturers’ data submitted should be supported by tests at SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratory or other approved laboratory.
The Contractor shall also submit the details of the design of the system formwork and the
supports for the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the
strength and adequacy of the system formwork shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor
and/or his Professional Engineer.
4.19.2 Design
Formwork shall be designed to SS 580 and comply to WSH (Construction) regulations. Formwork shall
cater for the appropriate method of placing and compacting the concrete. Adequate number of braces,
ties and struts shall be provided so that the formwork shall be able to withstand the pressures resulting
from whatever method of placing and compacting concrete adopted, and maintain the required position,
slope and profile. The Contractor shall submit the details of the design of the formwork and the supports
for approval by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding the approval by the SO Rep, the strength and adequacy
of the formwork and supports shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor and his PE.
Metal props shall be used to support formwork, except at irregular places where timber props may be
more suitable or practical. Use of timber props shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
4.19.3 Construction
Formwork shall be constructed sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout from the concrete at
all stages of placing and compacting.
The arrangement of the formwork shall be such that it can be dismantled and removed readily from the
cast concrete without causing shock, disturbance or damage. For beams and slabs, the arrangement
shall be such that the formwork and supports for the slab soffits and beam sides can be removed without
disturbing the formwork and supports of the beam soffits.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-17
4.19 FORMWORK (CONT’D)
4.19.3 Construction (Cont’d)
Where steel props are used, such steel props shall be prezinc galvanised or galvanised by other
methods. Obtain approval from the SO Rep before using such galvanised steel props.
Supports to an upper floor shall rest on the lower floor only if the lower floor has developed adequate
strength to bear the load. If in the opinion of the SO Rep, the lower floor does not have the required
strength to carry the supports to the upper floors, then the method adopted to support the formwork of
the upper floor shall have to be approved by the SO Rep. All props to a floor which itself supports the
formwork of an upper floor shall only be removed 3 days (minimum) after such upper floor is cast.
Connections in formwork shall be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped or otherwise secured. Ties
that are anchored against the timber shall pass through a plate washer of at least 50 mm in size and of
sufficient thickness so that the load is transferred to the timber without any visible deflection or
penetration into the timber. Only cast-in steel spreader ties shall be used to separate and restrain the
formwork faces. The voids formed by the removal of the plastic cones after the dismantling of formwork
shall be patched up using non-shrink grout. Concrete separators shall not be permitted.
The Contractor shall be required to make allowances for any settlement or deflection of formwork which
is likely to arise during construction. The soffits of beams and slabs shall be given a camber to allow
for deflection after striking of formwork. The magnitude of the camber shall be approved by the SO
Rep.
Formwork across structure joints shall be erected such that it overlaps adjoining finished concrete by at
least 200mm and holds tightly against it. Formwork shall be provided and run continuously at
construction joints.
Bolts to be permanently installed in concrete, fixing, boxouts, cores and other devices used for forming
openings, holes, pockets, recesses and other cavities shall be as rigid as the formwork itself to prevent
the leakage of any grout. No holes shall be cut in cast concrete except with the approval of the SO
Rep.
4.20 STRIKING OF FORMWORK
The minimum period before striking of the formwork for ordinary Portland Cement concrete shall be in
accordance with the following table :
Minimum Period
Type of Formwork Remarks
Before Striking
All vertical or side formwork 12 hours )

) The period shall commence from
Soffit formwork to slabs and 3 days ) the time of last pour of concrete
beams )
Props to slabs and beams 14 days ) After striking of formwork, props

) shall be immediately put up to
Props to cantilever slabs and 21 days ) support the structure
cantilever beams )
For residential building blocks where metal formwork (HDB Modular Formwork Design System or
similar) and Grade 40 concrete and above are specified, the provision of props and re-props shall be
as stipulated in the Drawings.
Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock or vibration and in the manner and order approved
by the SO Rep.
After striking of formwork, any honeycombed surface and defective or damaged concrete work arising
from improper work procedures shall be immediately made good as directed by the SO Rep and at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Any remedial measures carried out without the knowledge and
approval of the SO Rep shall be liable for rejection and re-execution.
All holes formed by tie bolts shall be filled with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or
higher grade than the surrounding concrete as specified in Clause 4.26 "Cement Mortar And Grout"
including all subclauses under it.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-18
4.21 OPENINGS AND RECESSES
Provide openings and recesses in the reinforced concrete structure, including PVC sleeves where
required, for the installation of sanitary pipes and fittings, service ducts or pipes, CATV,
telecommunication and electrical cables and trunking, as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall
leave openings in the lift motor room floor to the requirement of the lift contractor or as instructed by the
SO Rep. No opening or opening greater than the sizes shown in the Drawings shall be formed without
the prior approval of the SO Rep.
No coring or hacking of holes through existing structural elements shall be permitted. However, holes
not exceeding 20 mm in diameter may be drilled through these elements. If any steel bar obstructs the
drilling through of a hole, a new position shall be selected slightly offset to avoid the obstructing bar.
Under no circumstances shall any steel bar be cut or removed without the written consent of the SO
Rep. For holes with diameter greater than 20 mm, submit drilling proposals to the SO Rep for approval.
All openings in slabs shall be formed with sides tapering slightly downwards and trimmed on all sides
with mild steel bars as shown in the Drawings. Check and ensure accuracy in the position, alignment,
size and shape of all openings and recesses. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make the necessary
rectification.
Remove all formwork other than PVC sleeves required from openings and recesses after the concrete
has set and ensure that the openings are not blocked up. Recesses for vertical electrical trunking shall
be finished smooth.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in structural elements
such as floor slabs, walls, columns and beams with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar
or higher grade than the surrounding concrete, after installation of the services by the Contractor or
other contractors.
4.22 BUILDING ACCURACY
After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the SO Rep to check
the deviation of the reinforced concrete Works from specified dimensions shown in the Drawings. All
measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep. Works complying with SS 580 Grade
II shall be deemed acceptable.
4.23 PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS
4.23.1 General
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be provided in the positions
and constructed and sealed with waterproofing materials as detailed in the Drawings.
All exposed vertical sides of columns and walls and undersides of beams at expansion joints shall be
covered with 0.7mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at 300mm centres or
otherwise as shown in the Drawings.
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all joint waterproofing
materials shall comply with the Drawings and the manufacturers' recommendation. Alternative joint
waterproofing materials may be used subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Submit supporting
technical information, test reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials.
All waterproofing materials provided at public access areas shall be protected with non-shrink grout.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-19
4.23 PERMANENT STRUCTURE JOINTS (CONT’D)
4.23.2 Waterstops
Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt jointed according to SS
EN 1992-3 and the Manufacturer's recommendations. Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the
formwork to prevent displacement during concreting.
4.23.3 Sealing Compound (Permanent Structure Joint)
For permanent structure joints, sealing compound for external use shall be one of the three generic
types namely polyurethane, polysulphide and silicone. They shall comply with ASTM C920 or other
approved.
4.23.4 Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant
Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) it shall only be used in horizontal joint and be subject to compression throughout its length;
(b) Good adhesion;
(c) Water resistant;
(d) Non-staining
4.23.5 Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane
Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) Minimum joint movement capacity of ±10% of joint width at 25°C;

(b) Resistant to dilute acids and alkali.
4.23.6 Bituminous Sheeting
Bituminous sheeting with fibre shall comply with the following requirements :
(a) Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion);
(b) Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight;
(c) Minimum tensile strength of 50 kg per cm²;
(d) Ozone and ultra-violet resistance.
The strip shall be applied to the joints by burning and affixing on each side of joint to a width not less
than 70mm leaving the middle part free to take any movement at the joint without damage.
4.23.7 Polyethylene Foam Backing Rods
Polyethylene foam backing rods used as mortar stops in panel joints shall have the following properties :
(a) Minimum compressibility of 75% of original volume at 25°C:

(b) Excellent resilient properties;
(c) Density between 35 kg per m³ and 45 kg per m³;
(d) Totally resistant to common acids, lubricants and detergents;
(e) Totally resistant to water infiltration by capillary action;
(f) Suitable for up to 70°C.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-20
4.24 APPARATUS
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use for all Works on the Site :
(a) Concrete slump test apparatus complying with BS EN 12350-2 or flow test apparatus complying
with BS EN 1230-5. One set of the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location;
(b) Steel or cast iron moulds complete with rod in accordance with BS EN 12390-1 for casting
100mm concrete test cubes and 100mm mortar or grout test cubes. A minimum number shall
be provided such that no stripping of the cube is required prior to the 24 hours setting and
hardening period;
(c) Three measuring cylinders of 250ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest 2.0 ml, for
determination of silt content (field settling method);
(d) An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate;
(e) One digital concrete rebound hammer equipped with an electronic transducer which converts
the
rebound of the hammer into an electric signal and displays it in the selected stress units;
(f) One surveying level or theodolite complete with the necessary accessories;
(g) One electronic calculator with statistical functions;
(h) One 5.5m measuring tape; and
(i) One spirit level.
4.25 MASS AND LEAN CONCRETE
Mass and lean concrete shall compose of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates in the
nominal ratio by weight of 1:2:4. Where, however, a denser and more workable concrete can be
produced by a variation in the ratio of fine aggregate to that of coarse aggregates, this ratio may be
varied within the limits 1 to 1.5 and 1 to 3, provided that the weights of fine and coarse aggregates,
each measured separately, shall nevertheless be equal to the sum of the weights of fine and coarse
aggregates appropriate to the nominal mix. The concrete shall be mixed as specified in the foregoing
requirements in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. Reinforced concrete shall
not be laid directly onto earth surfaces. A blinding coat of 40mm minimum thickness of lean concrete
shall be laid on well prepared firm ground before any reinforcement is placed in position.
4.26 CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT
4.26.1 General
For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one part cement to one part sand, mixed with
water so that water-cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall compose of
cement and water-cement ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by
the SO Rep.
4.26.2 Grouting For Prestressed Concrete Ducts
Grouting for prestressed concrete ducts shall be as specified in Clause 7.15 "Grouting".
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-21
4.26 CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT (CONT’D)
4.26.3 Precast Concrete Joints
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled
with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be
waterproof.
Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or concreted and these shall be
carried out by trained workers. In the case where a joint need not be grouted, mortar packed or
concreted immediately, such work shall be completed not later than 28 days after erection. The
respective mix design shall be free of lime and chloride. They shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink
and possess strength equal or higher than that of precast concrete. Curing for at least 3 days shall be
provided. Designed mixes shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
4.26.4 Testing Method And Compliance For Load Bearing Grout And Mortar
The method of sampling and testing prescribed in ASTM C109/C109M shall be adopted. The
compressive strength shall be determined by crushing test on 50mm cubes. For each casting day and
for each grade of grout or mortar, three samples shall be taken from three separate batches. One cube
shall be cast from each sample for testing at 28 days.
The compliance of the 28 day strength shall be judged, based on the average compressive strength of
3 cubes from 3 samples taken on the same day, in accordance with the strength requirement specified
in the Drawings. In the event of non-compliance, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6
"Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
If the average compressive strength of the 3 cubes is less than the design strength, the quality of the
sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by carrying out appropriate tests on hardened concrete in the
structure. In the event that such tests are not practical, the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any
test.
4.27 FOUNDATIONS
All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and
to the exact depths required. Provide, maintain and remove any necessary planking and strutting,
sheet-piling or cofferdams, and by pumping or other approved means keep the excavations free from
water.
In the case of loose or disturbed ground, the bottom of excavation for pile caps shall be well rammed
and those for footings shall be excavated further to a sound layer. The whole work shall be approved
by the SO Rep before it is covered with a blinding layer not less than 40mm thick. The required cover
of concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely above the blinding layer.
Excavation for all foundation work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 3 - "Excavation"
including all clauses and subclauses under it.
4.28 PILE CAPS
Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall employ a Registered Surveyor to check
and verify the eccentricities and the cut-off levels of all piling work in the ground against pile eccentricity
Drawings provided and pile cap details in the Drawings, and shall notify the SO Rep in the event of any
discrepancy.
Straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring pile caps, carry out
excavations, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of pile caps.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-22
4.29 LIFT PITS
For lift pits below ground level, the concreting to the bottom and walls shall be carried out in one
operation without construction joints and bolt holes up to the underside of ground beams and slabs.
Forms ties used to connect opposite faces of formwork shall be cast-in steel spreader ties. Concrete
separators shall not be permitted. Where in the case water reducing admixture is used in the concrete
mix, furnish information concerning the water reducing admixture for approval by the SO Rep prior to
its use. Water reducing admixture shall be mixed with the concrete in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
All external wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproof by coating with three coats of bitumen solution
complying with BS 3416 or other cold applied bituminous coating as approved by the SO Rep. The
concrete surface shall be clean and dry before application of the first coat, and ample time for each coat
to dry shall be allowed. The total dry thickness of the coating shall be 0.6mm minimum.
4.30 FIRST STOREY SLAB
After backfilling and lean concrete to the first storey of residential building block are completed, the
Contractor shall engage a licensed registered surveyor to verify the position of all column/wall grid lines
and submit such report to the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall be informed of any deviations from the
Drawings.
4.31 FLOORS
After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforce concrete floors shall be trowelled smooth with
a steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied to the floor slabs
except where specified otherwise. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel reinforcement is not
displaced or lowered during trowelling.
For areas which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be struck off to a
level or fall as required using a long timber trowel. The surface shall be densified by a jitterbug tamper
or trowelling after the bleeding has stopped in order to eliminate settlement and plastic shrinkage cracks.
Before it hardens, it shall be brushed with a stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.
4.32 ROOFS
4.32.1 General
Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with power
trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings. The finished roof slab shall be
cured immediately with an approved curing compound.
Roof access openings, 900mm x 900mm clear with 200mm upstanding kerbs, shall be constructed at
the positions as shown in the Drawings.
100mm x 100mm mortar angle fillet shall be neatly provided around all upstands, pipe supports,
RC stumps, walls and ventilating stacks.
The finished concrete roof shall be protected against mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects
during subsequent work on the roof.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(22)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-23
4.32 ROOFS (CONT’D)
4.32.2 Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test
After the completion of all structural work on the roof, the roof slab shall be tested for watertightness
and to ensure no water stagnation. Where the reinforced concrete roof is to be protected by a watertight
secondary roof, no water test or ponding test will be conducted.
The watertightness test shall be carried out by ponding with water to a minimum depth of 25mm for
24 hours. The water used for the test shall be that used for the watertightness test of the RC water
tanks. At the end of the watertightness test, the soffit of the slab especially the area around the pipes
shall be examined for any dampness or leakage.
Immediately after discharging the water off the roof, the top surface shall be examined for any water
stagnation. Water collected beyond a layer of 5mm measured from the top surface of the roof in any
area is considered a stagnation.
After any rectification, hacking and refilling around pipes installed after the first test, the localised area
shall be retested at the Contractor's own cost and expense for watertightness, water stagnation or both
as deemed necessary by the SO Rep.
4.33 DRIPS
Drips shall be formed along edges of soffit to concrete roof slabs, hoods, underside of balconies,
cantilevered beams and slabs and other parts of the building where rainwater is likely to adhere in
drops.
4.34 RC STRUCTURE CANNOT BE USED AS LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Reinforced concrete structure and foundation shall not be used as lightning conductors or earth
electrodes. Lightning conductors shall not be embedded in any structural components and steel
reinforcement shall not be used as part of the protection system.
4.35 INSTALLATION OF FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR FOR COLUMNS
The Contractor shall provide and install encased fibre optic sensors at 10 different 1st storey columns
of each building above 10 storeys. Where the columns are precast, the Contractor shall provide such
sensors for the precaster to install in the precast columns. The locations of the sensors shall be
approved by the SO Rep and as-built drawings indicating actual position of sensors must be submitted
upon successful installation. The sensors shall have connecting cables terminating with a socket at the
column face to enable the SO Rep to take readings. The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of readings per
block to HDB during the construction stage to verify that the sensors are in working condition.
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(23)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 4-24
4.36 MONITORING DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT OF COLUMNS
For buildings 10 storey or higher and supported on pile foundation, the Contractor shall install and
monitor 10 numbers of settlement points per block.
The location of the settlement points and the bench marks shall be selected by the SO Rep before
installation. These settlement points are to be installed on the first storey columns and they have to be
installed before construction works are allowed to proceed for the 2nd storey, unless otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep. The instruments and equipment used to take the readings shall have a
minimum accuracy of 0.5mm. Readings shall be taken by after the settlement points are first installed
and subsequently on every 3 floors, and/or when directed by the SO Rep. In addition, one set of reading
is to be taken for the completion of the structural roof slab and another set of reading is to be taken
before the building block is handed over.
The contractor is required to submit two sets of monitoring reports certified by a Registered Surveyor
on the above readings within 1 week after the completion of each reading. The format shall be pre-
The contractor shall take all necessary action to protect the settlement points so that they are not
damaged or subject to vandalism throughout the contract period. In the event that the settlement points
are damaged, lost and/or vandalized or become defective, the contractor shall install additional points
and/or take all necessary remedial action as instructed by the SO Rep.
Section 5/......
BLDG17/S04.DOCX(24)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 5-1
SECTION 5
RESERVED
Section 6/.....
BLDG17/S5.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-1
SECTION 6
SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION
6.1 PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
6.1.1 Area Of Usage
Precast concrete components shall be used in areas as shown in the Drawings.
6.1.2 Surface Finishes
External surface treatments or finishes of the precast concrete components shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
6.1.3 Suppliers
The precast concrete components shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep. The list
of approved suppliers is posted at the following website: http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg and can be found in
HDB’s Materials list.
The Contractor shall submit the names of his suppliers, the written contractual agreements between
themselves and the suppliers and the quantities to be supplied by each supplier for the precast concrete
components within four weeks from the date of the Letter of Acceptance or whenever there is a change
in the supplier.
6.1.4 Safety Measures For Precast Transportation
For the precast supply from the Contractor’s appointed sources, the Contractor shall obtain the approval
from the relevant authorities as and when necessary for precast transportation. The Contractor shall
comply with prevailing traffic regulations and prevent damage to public roads, overhead structures,
trees, lamp posts, sign boards, decorations, cables and road related facilities in the precast
transportation.
The Contractor shall carry out risk assessment and analysis complying with the Workplace Safety and
Health (WSH) Act and Regulations for the work procedures related to precast transportation. In this
regard, the Contractor shall submit a Safety Manual on precast transportation, which shall include but
not limited to the following key activities, for SO Rep’s approval:
(a) Securing of Precast Components
The Safety Manual shall include the method to secure precast components on trailer. Trade
demonstrations shall be conducted and photographs shall be provided to supervisors and
loading workers for better understanding.
For precast components to be delivered in horizontal position, sling belts and stoppers shall be
provided on the trailer to prevent slipping and toppling of precast components.
For precast components to be delivered in vertical position, if galvanised wires and chain block
are used, the Safety Manual shall indicate clearly the type and size of wire, type of chain block
and the tying method. The Contractor shall provide secondary securing method using chain or
sling belt to supplement galvanised wires and chain block if necessary.
For trailer mounted with steel frames, the Contractor shall ensure steel frames and the
connections to trailers are sound for delivery purpose. The Safety Manual shall include a system
of regular checks on the conditions of the steel frames.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-2
6.1.4 Safety Measures For Precast Transportation (Cont’d)
(b) Loading on Trailer
The Contractor shall specify in Safety Manual to avoid over-loading of precast components on
trailer. The overall height from ground to the highest point on trailer shall be checked to ensure
compliance with the prevailing traffic regulations. In addition, for trailer with steel frame, load
balancing of precast components at two sides of trailer shall be checked before leaving the
precast factory. For non-compliance found, the driver shall be informed and remedial actions
shall be taken before leaving the precast factory.
(c) Transportation
The Contractor shall specify in the Safety Manual that the driver should observe the speed limit
and prevailing regulations during the precast transportation. The driving experience of drivers
employed for precast transportation shall be specified where necessary to exclude inexperience
driver from precast transportation. Continuing road safety education and appropriate disciplinary
actions for non-compliances shall also be included in the manual to prevent speeding during
transportation.
The Contractor shall ensure the transportation fleet like prime-movers and trailers are well-
maintained. The routine maintenance shall include periodic regulatory inspection by the
authorities, daily checks by driver on brakes, signal, lighting, tyres. The timber platform shall be
in safe condition for the loading workers and the trailer shall be free from loose debris for precast
transportation.
6.2 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
6.2.1 Design
Structural precast concrete components shall be designed in accordance with CP 65 / SSEN 1992. The
Contractor may propose alternative design subject to the written approval of the SO Rep.
Joints, connections and sealants shall be designed for protection against water, weather, corrosion and
fire so as to provide continued water and weather tightness and structural integrity of the buildings.
The positions and capacities of all lifting and erection inserts of precast concrete components shall be
carefully considered for all loads induced by manufacturing, lifting, handling, storage, transportation and
erection. A minimum safety factor of 3 shall be used to design the lifting and erection inserts, lifting
hooks and erection devices. Submit precasting and erection techniques for precast concrete
components including structural calculations and details for the lifting and erection devices.
Should the load bearing joints and connections be grouted, mortar-packed or concreted, submit
respective mix design for approval by the SO Rep and carry out tests in the mix design in accordance
with appropriate code or proprietary requirements. Method of installations adopted shall ensure that
the joints and connections can be fully grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
Non-load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining structures shall be filled
with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by proprietary sealants and backing rod.
The SO Rep may, at his absolute discretion, instruct the Contractor to apply special coatings or epoxy
bonding compounds to connections and joints of precast concrete components, be it welded, bolted,
dowelled, grouted, mortar-packed or concreted.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-3
6.2 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE (CONT’D)
6.2.2 Drawings
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for precast concrete components for approval by the SO
Rep based on the time tabulated in the master building programme, unless otherwise instructed by the
SO Rep. Shop drawings shall be prepared in accordance to approved structural drawings.
(a) Shop Drawings
The shop drawing shall include the following details:
(i) The dimension and weight of the component and size, position and details of lifting and
erection inserts and reinforcement details;
(ii) The handling techniques for precasting, storage and transportation;
(iii) The minimum concrete strength for precast concrete components required for handling,
demoulding, storage, transportation and erection;
The Contractor shall be required to check and/or ensure the following:
(iv) The details for such precast concrete components are adequate and suitable for the
Works and that there is no discrepancy. The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all
costs and expenses for all rejections, reinstatements and reproductions of such precast
concrete components directly and/or indirectly resulting from and/or out of any
inadequacy, unsuitability and discrepancy in the Drawings;
(v) The handling techniques for precasting, demoulding, storage and transportation adopted
shall not over-stress such precast concrete components. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to provide at his own cost and expense, any additional steel reinforcement
bars required for his handling techniques to ensure that such precast concrete
components are not damaged or over-stressed during handling;
(vi) Ensure the adequacy and suitability of the size, position and details of lifting and erection
inserts and any additional reinforcement bars required for handling and erection purposes
shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to commencement of the
production work;
(vii) The minimum concrete strength of precast concrete components required for handling,
demoulding, storage, transportation and erection are checked and submitted to the SO
Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the production work.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-4
6.2 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE (CONT’D)
6.2.2 Drawings (Cont'd)
(b) Erection Drawings
Prior to carrying out trade demonstration for precast concrete components installation, the
following drawings shall be submitted for approval by the SO Rep.
Erection drawings showing :
(i) Erection sequences and handling requirements.
(ii) Calculation and details of method of positioning and sizes of backers/shims, temporary
props, struts, bracings and their installation method.
(c) Waterproofing Joint Drawings
Waterproofing joint drawings to show the procedure and sequence of installation of the
waterproofing materials on the Site in relation to the erection sequence and handling
requirements.
6.3 MANUFACTURING
6.3.1 Concrete Batching Plant
The Precaster shall maintain the concrete batching plant in good working order at all times. The
concrete batching plant shall be calibrated once in every six (6) months by an accredited laboratory in
accordance with SS EN 206-1 and SS 544. Any errors found during calibration shall be rectified
immediately.
Proper documentation and records shall be kept in the office in precast plant for inspection by the SO
Rep upon request.
6.3.2 Shop Drawings
Precast concrete components shall be produced in accordance with approved shop Drawings. Shop
drawings shall be based upon the approved structural Drawings and shall be submitted to the SO Rep
for approval as per sub-clause 6.2.2 "Drawings".
6.3.3 Moulds
Check and ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and dimensions
of the precast concrete components to be produced. The moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to produce
the casting tolerances and finishes specified.
Rubber seal or equivalent shall be used in all horizontal and vertical mould joints to prevent leakage of
mortar or cement paste. Moulds shall be designed to prevent damage to concrete from :
(a) restraint as the concrete shrinks;
(b) the stripping operation when the precast components are lifted from the mould; or
(c) dimensional changes due to demoulding of prestressed components.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-5
6.3 MANUFACTURING (CONT’D)
6.3.4 Manufacturing Requirements
Submit proposals for marking identification and date of casting of each precast concrete component for
the approval of the SO Rep prior to the commencement of manufacturing.
Surface finish requirements shall be consistent with the standard achieved by the use of high quality
concrete and properly designed forms or moulds having rigid and smooth surfaces. Such surface
finishes including surface airholes shall be to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Prior to mass production of precast concrete components, each type of the following precast
components shall be produced at yard for SO Rep’s approval: one façade, one wall, one column, one
staircase and one household shelter. The SO Rep may at his absolute discretion require more sample
panels to be produced for his approval.
The Contractor shall provide remedial work at his own costs and expenses to precast concrete
components that are not satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross variation from the
specified finish may cause rejection of the precast concrete components and the Contractor shall
replace the precast concrete components.
Allow for the incorporation of all requirements of all trades whose work requires blockouts, recesses,
notches, embedded metal work or any other items affecting the precast concrete components involved.
All reinforcements shall be positioned in the moulds with the prescribed concrete covers as shown on
the Structural Drawings. Approval shall be sought from the SO Rep if such work cannot be incorporated
into the precast concrete components.
Aluminium window frames, may either be installed on site or cast-in together with the precast concrete
components.
In all cases the aluminium window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious
material by wrapping with self adhesive protective tape. There shall be adequate lapping over the joints
of two protective tapes. The protective tapes shall completely adhere to the frame and provide
protection to it.
In the case of aluminium window frame being installed on site, check and ensure:
(a) the safety and integrity of the aluminium window frame and that no part of the precast concrete
is hacked;
(b) the watertightness between the aluminium window frame and precast concrete component.
6.3.5 Manufacturing Tolerances
Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast components shall be as follows unless otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep :
(a) Position tolerances for cast-in items measured from datum line locations as shown on approved
Drawings:
Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves etc : ±10mm

Flashing relets, at edge of panel : ±6mm
Reglets for glazing gaskets : ±3mm
Groove width for glazing gaskets : ±2mm
Electrical outlets : ±13mm
(b) Position tolerances for placement of reinforcement :
Reinforcing bars and meshes shall be located within 12mm of the position as shown on the
approved shop Drawings, but in casting, no reinforcement shall encroach on the specified
minimum cover.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-6
6.3 MANUFACTURING (CONT’D)
6.3.5 Manufacturing Tolerances (Cont'd)
(c) For casting tolerances, the overall height and width measured at the face adjacent to the mould
when cast shall be as follows :
3m or under : ±3mm
> 3m to 6m : +3mm
: -5mm
> 6m to 9m : +3mm
: -6mm
Each additional 3m : ±2mm per 3m
Angular deviation of plane : +2mm per 150mm depth of side mould
Thickness : +6mm
: -3mm
Openings (cast within one member) : +6mm
Out of square (difference in length : 3mm per 3m or 6mm total whichever is greater
of two diagonal measurements)
The casting tolerances specified above shall be compatible with the installation requirements of
precast concrete components, which may have attachment of sash, door frames, window frames,
louvres sunshades and other materials.
(d) For after casting tolerances, the bowing and warpage shall be as follows:
Without intermediate support dimension : 1 panel

240
With intermediate support dimension : 1 panel

360
6.3.6 Curing and Protection of Concrete
Fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and shall not be subjected to any
vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The exposed surfaces of concrete shall
be cured with an appropriate curing compound or other curing methods as approved by SO Rep. The
curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the manufacturer’s
instruction. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the time the
application is completed, the Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing
compound again or other curing methods approved by SO Rep. However, the application of the curing
compound may be exempted subject to the approval of the SO Rep, if continuous wetting for at least
72 hours by rain on the concrete surface occurs immediately after the concrete sets. The waiver shall
not constitute a variation to the Contract.
6.3.7 Inspection Of Manufacturing
Contractor shall make provision for the SO Rep to inspect the manufacturing plant and the precast
concrete components at all times. Such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility
in manufacturing an acceptable product.
The SO Rep shall, at his discretion, reject any precast concrete component on Site and at the
manufacturing plant that does not comply with the design requirements.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-7
6.4 HANDLING
The precast concrete components shall be handled and transported in a way consistent with their
shapes and design in order to avoid excessive stresses or damages. Precast concrete components
shall be lifted only at appropriate points shown on the approved precast shop Drawings.
Check and allow for:

(a) adequacy of design reinforcement to resist handling stresses;
(b) provision of additional reinforcement if required;
(c) exact number, size and location of lifting inserts or other devices; and
(d) Proper supports and support locations for storage and transportation.
The Contractor may propose alternative handling techniques to ensure that all precast concrete
components are successfully fabricated, delivered and installed safely without causing structural
damage, detrimental cracking, architectural impairment, or permanent distortion.
6.5 STORAGE
Storage of precast concrete component on site and at manufacturing plant shall be adequate to permit
easy access and ready for handling of the stored precast components. It shall have a clean, hard, level
and well-drained surface to permit well-organised storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping,
cracking, discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast components. No precast component shall be
placed on the ground. They shall be stored with due protection from staining or physical damage.
6.6 ERECTION
6.6.1 Inspection Of Precast Concrete Components
Prior to the erection and installation process, the Contractor shall establish an acceptable quality
standard for the precast concrete components with the SO Rep. The Contractor shall ensure only
precast concrete components that meets the established quality standard and manufacturing tolerances
are erected.
The Contractor shall ensure that precast concrete components are prepared and erected within the
specified erection tolerances, and installed according to approved drawings and waterproofing details.
The SO Rep may reject any precast concrete components which are not complying with the design or
specification requirements on Site at any point of time, including after installation.
No permanent jointing or connection between a precast concrete component and other precast concrete
components or in situ structures shall be carried out without the prior approval of the SO Rep. Any
unauthorised erection or installation work may be rejected and necessary action will be taken against
the Contractor.
6.6.2 Quality Control
Only competent workers who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete components and apply
necessary waterproofing detail should be employed.
Methods of erection shall be such as to avoid soiling, cracking, chipping and damage to cast-in items. Only precast
concrete component with minor chipping and spalling, and non-structural crack may be installed before carrying out
repair by approved patching method and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. If such minor defects are not easily
accessible for repair after erection, the precast concrete component shall be repaired prior to erection.
Check and ensure the accuracy of location of all bearing surfaces and all anchorages for precast concrete
components. Any deviations from the Drawings noted shall be corrected according to method approved by SO Rep
prior to the start of erection. Bearing surfaces, notches, bolts, connection angles or plates shall be checked as to
level, line and grade.
Whenever inserts or lifting hooks are used for erection purposes, their location and type of anchor used shall be
checked for compliance with the location as specified in the Approved Workshop Drawings. Anchorage length and
exposed length of lifting hooks shall be checked for compliance with that specified in the design. The inserts or lifting
hooks shall be properly secured before casting. If slings are used, the precast concrete components shall be marked
so that the slings are placed at the proper locations.
Field conditions shall be determined by actual measurement so that precast concrete components and joint sealants
installed satisfy design or specification requirements and are within the specified erection tolerances. As and when
instructed by the SO Rep, the precast concrete components shall be cleaned and repaired after installation.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-8
6.6 ERECTION (CONT'D)
6.6.2 Quality Control (Cont'd)
Ensure that good construction practice is adhered to while the precast concrete components are on the
Site and bracing or props shall be provided to maintain the required position, stability and alignment of
precast concrete components prior to permanent jointing or connection.
Each precast concrete component shall be individually adjusted and accurately positioned within the
erection tolerances. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be kept correctly aligned and positioned, and
uniform joint widths as specified in the Drawing shall be maintained as erection progresses.
Adjustments or changes in connections shall be reviewed and approved by the SO Rep.
6.6.3 Defect And Repair
Ensure that no defective precast concrete component shall be delivered. The decision by the SO Rep
to reject defective precast concrete components shall be final. The Contractor shall replace the rejected
precast concrete components at his own costs and expenses. The rejection criteria shall be made on
engineering basis as well as visual appearances.
Damaged precast components shall be either patched up or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep. Major repairs should not be attempted until an engineering evaluation is made to determine
whether the precast component will be structurally sound.
Method of repairs shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the commencement of repairing
work
6.6.4 Erection Tolerance
For correct performance and appearance of the structures, check and ensure that the precast
components are located in the centre of their theoretical location on the building and adjusted to
accommodate adjacent components, proper joint width, and alignment with adjacent precast or in-situ
members. Unless otherwise instructed by the SO Rep, the permissible erection tolerances shall be as
follows :
(a) Distance Between Edge Of Panels At Joint
For panels with dimensions

(normal to the joint) up to 6m : ±5mm
For each 3m increment in excess of 6m : ±2mm
(b) Joint Taper (Panel Edges Not Parallel)
Per linear 300mm of joint : ½mm

Minimum allowable : 2mm
Maximum for entire length : 9mm
(c) Panel Alignment
Alignment of horizontal and vertical joints : 3mm

Jog in alignment of matching edges : 3mm
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-9
6.6 ERECTION (CONT'D)
6.6.4 Erection Tolerance (Cont'd)
(d) Location Of Openings
In precast concrete components : ±6mm
(e) Verticality Of Wall
Entire height of building : ±40mm

1st to 4th floor : ±20mm
Each storey height : ±10mm
(f) Parapet Alignment At Common Corridor
Deviation in plan from straight line parallel to specified linear building line :
Any interval less than 6m : ±1mm per metre

Any 50m length : ±25mm
Coping level :
Any interval less than 6m : ±5mm

Any 50m length : ±25mm
(g) Verticality Of Column
Verticality tolerance for columns shall be similar to that for walls.
(h) Column Alignment At 1st Storey
In between columns up to 6m apart : ±10mm

Entire length of building : ±30mm
6.7 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS
Provide and install precast prestressed concrete planks as shown :
(a) Design Criteria And Materials For Precast

Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications
The design criteria and materials for precast prestressed concrete planks shall be :
Low slump concrete shall be used for the production of precast prestressed concrete plank. The
strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 40 N per mm², and at transfer shall not be less than
25 N per mm². The use of calcium chloride, ions or other salts is strictly prohibited. The minimum
grade of concrete for the cast-in-situ structural topping shall be 40 N per mm².
The Contractor shall submit the records of the allowable strands slippage to SO Rep for approval.
(b) Manufacturing Tolerances For Precast

Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications
The manufacturing tolerances shall be as follows :
(i) Length : +3mm
(ii) Cross-sectional dimensions : ±1mm

(width or depth)
(iii) Flange thickness : ±1mm
(iv) Horizontal alignment (sweep) : 1.25mm or 1/1,000th of overall length,

whichever is greater
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-10
6.7 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)
(b) Manufacturing Tolerances For Precast

Prestressed Concrete Plank Specifications (Cont’d)
(v) Position of anchors and inserts : +2.5mm of centre line location shown on
the Drawings
(vi) Position of strands : ±2mm
(vii) End squareness : ±3mm
(viii) Blockouts : ±10mm of centre-line location as shown

in the Drawings.
(ix) Maximum camber deviation allowed : ±5mm from designed camber
(x) Difference in soffit level at mid-span between adjacent members or between a precast
prestressed concrete plank and an adjacent reinforced concrete slab after installation
shall not be more than 3mm.
(xi) Position of reinforcement designed : ±10mm primarily for connections
(xii) Position of handling device : ±20mm
(c) The following requirements shall be complied with :
(i) Underside shall be smooth and dense.
(ii) Other than minor chips, hairline surface crack and spalls on the top side all other defects
shall not be allowed. The top surface shall be such that it is suitable for composite action
with cast-in-situ structural topping.
(iii) Vertical ends shall be sawn or off-form finish.
(iv) Major openings or holes shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings. These and
any other smaller openings made in the field shall be to the approval of the SO Rep.
(v) Patching-up will be acceptable provided the structural adequacy of the product and the
final appearance are not impaired. Prior to any patching-up work, submit proposal for the
execution of such work for approval by the SO Rep. In any event, all patching up work
shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(d) Product Delivery, Storage And Handling (Factory)
Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, the Contractor shall
comply with the following:
(i) Precast prestressed concrete plank shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing,
stockpiling, transporting and erection operation only at the lifting or supporting points, or
both, as shown in the shop Drawings and with approved lifting devices which shall have
a minimum safety factor of 3.
(ii) All transportation, site handling and erection shall be performed with acceptable
equipment and methods and by experienced personnel.
(iii) All planks shall be stored off ground.
(iv) All planks shall be so placed that identification marks can be read.
(v) Planks shall be so stacked that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged during
retrieval.
(vi) The use of upper member of a stacked tier as storage area for shorter length of precast
members or heavy equipment is strictly prohibited.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-11
6.7 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PLANK SPECIFICATIONS (CONT'D)
(e) Erection
Where precast prestressed concrete planks are included in the Works, their erection shall comply
with the following :
(i) Precast planks shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided for
such purposes. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided and they shall have a
minimum load factor of 2.0 times the dead load plus construction loads.
(ii) Planks shall be properly aligned and levelled as required by the approved shop drawings.
Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably levelled out by jacking, loading
or any other feasible methods acceptable to the SO Rep.
(iii) Field welding shall be carried out by qualified welders using equipment and materials
compatible to the base materials.
(iv) Precast prestressed planks may be drilled or 'shot', provided no contact is made with the
prestressing strands. Any spalling resulting therefrom shall be repaired to the satisfaction
of the SO Rep.
(v) Final inspection and acceptance of erected precast prestressed planks shall be made by
the SO Rep to verify conformity with plans and the Specifications.
6.8 PRECAST PRESTRESSED HOLLOW CORE SLAB SPECIFICATIONS
Provide and install precast prestressed hollow core slab as shown in the Drawings.
The requirements for precast prestressed hollow core slab shall be the same as those specified for the
precast prestressed concrete plank except for the following :
(a) Manufacturing Tolerance
Position of void - Vertical : ±3mm

Horizontal : ±3mm
(b) Erection
(i) Core plugs shall be inserted before erection.
(ii) All ends of hollow core slabs shall be seated with approved concreting materials to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep.
6.9 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF SUPPLY AND ERECTION SCHEDULES
Submit respective supply and erection schedules detailing the type and quantity of the precast concrete
components to the SO Rep for approval within three months from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
Adhere strictly to the approved respective delivery and erection schedules.
6.10 MATERIALS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS
All materials used in the precast concrete works shall be in accordance with Section 4 "Structural
Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
6.11 STRUCTURAL PRECAST AND CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS
Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall apply for all structural
precast and cast-in-situ Works.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-12
6.12 WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS
6.12.1 Waterproofing And Sealant Materials For Joints
(a) General Requirements
The SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any type of sealants if their performance is
deemed to be unsatisfactory.
All sealant materials used at public accessible areas such as common corridor, stair-cases, stair-
landings etc shall be protected with non-shrink mortar or grout.
(b) Performance Of Waterproofing Materials
Waterproofing materials for joints shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete"

(c) Application Of Sealant Materials
Ensure that joints and joint sealants of precast concrete structures are correctly installed, so as
to provide continued water and weather tightness of buildings with minimum maintenance.
Joints surface preparation, primers, sealant compounds and backup materials shall be installed
to give the highest standard of materials and workmanship; these shall conform to all applicable
requirements as specified in the Specifications.
Whenever possible, sealants shall be applied with a power-actuated gun. The gun shall have a
nozzle of proper size and provide sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints.
All compound smears, primers, solvents etc used in caulking and sealing work, shall be
immediately and entirely removed from adjacent materials as the work progresses.
(d) Joint Width And Sealant Depth After Installation
The joint width shall depend on the dimension of the panels and its coefficient of expansion.
The maximum joint widths and maximum expansions for the common sealants shall be :
Maximum Maximum Movement in

Type of Sealant Joint Width Tension or Compression
(mm) (%)
Butyl; 20 ±10
Acrylic; 20 ±15 to ±25
One Part Polyurethane; 20 ±20
Two Parts Polyurethane; 20 ±25
One Part Polysulphide; 20 ±25
Two Parts Polysulphide; 20 ±25
The normal design joint widths shall be 14 or 15, 25 as shown in the Structural Drawings.
For joints up to 13mm wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. For joints over
13mm wide, the depth shall be equal to one-half the width, but not less than 13mm. Sealants
installed shall not be less than 6mm wide or 6mm deep.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-13
6.12 WATER AND WEATHER TIGHTNESS (CONT’D)
6.12.1 Waterproofing And Sealant Materials For Joints (Cont’d)
(e) Sealant Backup Fillers
Backup fillers shall be used in joints to control the depth of the sealant, to facilitate tooling of the
sealant, and to serve as a bond breaker which prevents the bonding to the back of the joint.
Acceptable backup materials shall be those which compress and respond to movements. These
include the rod type of sponge materials such as foamed polyethylene, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber. The backup materials shall also be
compatible and non-staining to the selected sealants.
(f) Joint Preparation
Before sealing the joints, concrete surfaces shall be smooth, clean and free of all mortar dust or
other contaminants that may affect adhesion. Sealant and primer shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer, and the primer shall be as recommended for the particular sealant used.
6.12.2 Water And Weather Tightness Test
The joints in the superstructure shall be subjected to tests for water and weather-tightness. Internal
floors shall be tested prior to any tiling work. Testing shall be conducted only when all pipes, trunking,
etc have been installed and the penetrations sealed, unless otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall, in his own cost and expense, document and carry out their own water and
weather-tightness during construction stage to ensure compliance. All water tests (specified or not
specified) shall be witnessed by the SO Rep.
(a) Method and Frequency of Testing
Joints shall be tested with the method and frequency as described below:
(i) Structural Roof, Access Balcony Roof And Lift Motor Room Roof
Water tightness test shall be carried out on all roofs with precast joints in accordance with
Clause 4.32.2 "Watertightness And Water Stagnation Test".
(ii) External Walls
For external walls, a continuous jet of water shall be sprayed on the joint corresponding
to 600 litres per hour from a water hose having a nozzle velocity of 2m per second and a
cone scatter of approximately 60 degrees held at a distance of 1.2m from the wall surface
under test. The duration of the test shall not be less than 1 hours. The hose shall be
placed with the nozzle in line with the vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so
that the jet cone will cover a vertical and two horizontal joints as shown in the Drawings.
For external walls, the following tests shall be conducted for each building block:
Building Height Frequency of tests

20 tests for vertical joints,
Up to 20 stories
20 tests for horizontal joints
Up to 30 stories
Up to 40 stories
Up to 50 stories
These tests shall be carried out at any location as instructed by the SO Rep.
The joint shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears
at the joint or internal side of any part of the building, during spraying and after the
completion of the spraying. In the event that any joint fails the watertightness test, the
Contractor shall investigate the causes of failure and seek the approval of the SO Rep on
the rectification method.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-14
6.12.2 (a) Method and Frequency of Testing (Cont'd)
(ii) External Walls (Cont'd)
For each test which fails, five additional tests shall be carried out at joint locations as
instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
To avoid delay in handing over of the block, the contractor shall plan the water-tightness
tests to be carried out and completed within 2 month before handing over inspection of
the block
(iii) Gable End Walls
All gable end walls shall be tested by spraying water at every intermediate 5 storeys from
the top-most floor level for a duration of 1 hour. The hose shall be placed with the nozzle
in line with the vertical joint at the top of the walls. Water shall not seep into any part of
the building during the test.
(iv) Refuse Chute
All refuse chutes shall be tested by spraying water from the top of refuse chutes. The
water shall spray vertically downwards on all internal walls for a duration of 1 hour. No
seepage of water from the joints shall be permitted during the test.
(v) Floor Joints Of Precast Slabs
Floor joints of concrete slabs using precast prestressed concrete plank and precast
prestressed concrete hollow core slab with minimum 50mm in-situ concrete topping need
not be tested.
Floor joints of precast slabs using either precast prestressed (or non-prestressed)
concrete plank or precast prestressed concrete hollow core slab without in-situ concrete
topping or with concrete topping thickness less than 50mm shall be tested.
The floors of those areas (or dwelling units) to be tested shall be flooded with water to a
depth of 25mm for a period of one hour replenishing when necessary. The areas (or
dwelling units) shall pass the test if no dampness or seepage from the dwelling units under
test occurs in any adjoining areas (of dwelling units ) or common area during the test.
Two units (or dwelling units) per floor shall be tested. The locations of these units (or
dwelling units) to be tested shall be decided by the SO Rep.
For each unit (or dwelling unit) that fails the water test, two additional units (or dwelling
units) shall be selected by the SO Rep for testing.
(vi) Kitchen/Bathroom/Toilet Areas
(1) Carry out water test to the following items prior to any tiling work in accordance
with the procedure described below :
(i) All joints between the floor slab and floor traps in the bathroom and kitchen;
(ii) All joints between the branching off for water closet and floor slab;
` (iii) All floor joints between the precast slabs and walls in bathroom and kitchen;
(iv) All floor joints between the precast slabs in bathroom and kitchen.
(2) The gratings to floor traps in the bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked
temporarily with polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded
with about 25mm depth of water at the highest level of the slab. The amount of
water shall be maintained for four hours, replenishing when necessary during which
the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for signs of leaks.
Towards the end of this test, the water will be allowed to drain off. During this
process there shall be no sign of chokage in the system.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-15
6.12.2 (vi) Water Test Failure
In the event of failure of a test on any joint, the Contractor shall rectify the joint and repeat the
test. This procedure shall be repeated until the tests on the joints comply fully with the passing
criteria. Furthermore, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject the use of any waterproofing
materials or joint details that perform unsatisfactorily during water tests at no cost to the
Employer.
Under no circumstances shall the Contractor be allowed to carry out his own water test without
the presence of the SO Rep. All water test (specified or not specified) shall be witnessed and
certified by the SO Rep as well as the Contractor's Representative.
6.13 FLEXIBLE LOOP CONNECTOR (FACADE)
The Contractor may propose flexible loop connector as alternative façade connection subject to the
written approval of the SO Rep at no adjustment to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall ensure that
the proposed façade flexible loop connection detailing are able to provide water and weather tightness
to the building subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Design load shall comply with relevant building
codes.
The precast joint shall be filled with grade 70 non-shrink grout. A layer of flexible cementitious
waterproofing membrane shall be applied onto the precast joint and allowed to cure according to
manufacturer’s specification prior to the filling up of the precast joint. The non-shrink grout shall be
pumped into the precast joint in a “bottom-up” method.
The test specimen of the proposed flexible loop connector(s) consisting of two loops shall satisfy the
following criteria:
(a) 1st crack = 7kN

(b) Ultimate failure load = 14kN
6.14 PRECAST FERROCEMENT SUNBREAKERS
6.14.1 General
Unless otherwise specified, the requirements specified in Clauses 6.1 to 6.6 (inclusive), 6.9 to 6.11
(inclusive) and 6.13 including all sub-clauses under them shall be applicable to this Clause including all
sub-clauses under it.
6.14.2 Scope
Provide and install precast ferrocement sunbreakers complete with fixing accessories to the locations
as shown in the Drawings.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-16
6.14 PRECAST FERROCEMENT SUNBREAKERS (CONT’D)
6.14.3 Shop Drawings
All structural and architectural drawings on this provision shall only serve as a guide. Prepare and
submit workshop drawings on all relevant details including :
(a) Reinforcement detail of sunbreaker panels in elevations and sections.
(b) Fixing and connection details.
(c) Necessary steel bolts, hooks or other approved materials required for handling and erection
purposes. The size and location of these materials shall be clearly indicated in the details.
6.14.4 Materials (Precast Ferrocement Sunbreakers)
(a) Cement
Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement"
(b) Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".
(c) Water
Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".
(d) Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all
subclauses under it. In addition, all welded mesh and steel bar used shall be galvanised in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. 1.5mm diameter at 25mm spacing wire mesh shall be
galvanised with zinc coating of 325 g per m² and 250 g per m2 minimum for average coating and
local coating shall have minimum proof stress of 300 N per mm².
(e) Admixtures
Admixtures shall be as specified in Clause 4.4 "Admixtures".
6.14.5 Source Of Material
The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources approved by the
SO Rep.
6.14.6 Technical Specifications
(a) Mix Design
The ferrocement sunbreaker panels shall be cast from a mix design which satisfy the following
requirements :
(i) minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2.
(ii) maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45.

(iii) air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2,200 kg per m³.
(iv) 28 days average cube strength from three test cubes shall be not less than
40 N per mm².
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast ferrocement sunbreaker, submit a proposed mix
design to the SO Rep for approval.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-17
6.14 PRECAST FERROCEMENT SUNBREAKERS (CONT’D)
6.14.6 Technical Specifications (Cont’d)
(b) Other Properties
(i) Initial Surface Absorption Test (ISAT) shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881.
The hardened panel shall have ISAT value less than that stipulated below :
Time (min) 10 30 60
ISAT Value (ml/m²/s) 0.100 0.055 0.035
(ii) Carbonation depth of hardened panel at installation shall be less than 3mm.
(iii) Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall have a cover
measurement of less than 5mm, but not less than 3mm.
(c) Finishes
The panel shall be cast on a steel base mould with the finish surface cast-face down. The finish
surface is the external surface of the sunbreaker elevation where the tile and motifs are located.
(d) Dimensional Tolerances
All tolerances shall be as specified in sub-clauses 6.3.5 "Manufacturing Tolerances" and 6.6.4
"Erection Tolerance".
6.14.7 Manufacturing Process
The panel shall be cast flat on a steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators and the
top surface shall be steel trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be galvanised and adequately
supported with approved spacers.
After setting and demoulding, the panels shall be marked and neatly stored with easy access and
visibility to every piece.
All panels must be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the curing method,
duration and facilities prior to actual production. The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of
moist curing.
Prior to commencement of the production, at least one sample of the panels shall be produced, erected
and installed at site for the approval of the SO Rep. Make adjustments to the manufacturing process
or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.
Maintain a record of daily work progress on a proper drawing showing where panels of a particular date
of manufacture have been installed.
6.14.8 Quality Assurance Works For Precast Ferrocement Sunbreakers
For precast ferrocement sunbreakers, the requirements for inspection and testing, sampling rate and
passing criteria shall comply with those requirements for Ferrocement Roof Slabs as specified in
Section 14 "Concrete Flat Roof" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-18
6.15 PRECAST FACADES WITH CAST-IN WINDOW FRAME
6.15.1 Protection Of Cast-In Window Frames
The Contractor shall ensure that cast-in window frames are protected from damage before delivery to
precast plant.
Cast-in window frames shall be protected from dirt, grout, grease, deleterious materials and surface
scratch with quality translucent self-adhesive tape of light colour for inspection of window frame quality
at precast plant prior to casting, as well as for inspection at site upon the delivery of precast facades.
The self-adhesive tape shall be made of durable material that could withstand the weathering. The
protective tape shall not stain or stick to the aluminum surface, or leave a sticky surface upon the
removal.
The Contractor shall ensure that the wrapping with self-adhesive tape is robust to withstand handling
during casting, storage and transportation to site. The adhesive tape shall be intact with cast-in window
frame along the edges with no visible gaps.
The corners of cast-in window frames and intersections of window frame members shall be adequately
wrapped with sufficient laps and returns to prevent ingress of concrete grout during casting. All fastening
screws, joints and gaps that are in contact with the wet concrete shall be sealed adequately to prevent
grout ingress during casting.
Cast-in window frames with torn, loose wrappings, and frames with visible gaps at edges that will be in
contact with wet concrete shall not be used for casting. The Contractor shall make good or replace the
poorly protected window frames at his own costs and expenses.
6.15.2 Quality Control At Window Factory
The Contractor shall ensure that adequate quality assurance measures are in place in the production
and the assembly of cast-in window frames. The quality assurance checks on surface defects such as
dent, scratch and other defects such as dimension out of the manufacturing tolerances, warp, twist,
skew, track misalignment, shall be conducted at the window factory before the wrapping up with the
protective tape.
A label / sticker shall be provided at one location on the internal face of cast-in window frame to indicate
the product serial number, window marking (including its orientation such as top, left or right-hand side,
if applicable) on each cast-in window frame. This to facilitate down-stream traceability and inspections,
and prevent mistake in the placement of window frame in precast production.
For sliding window, the Contractor shall provide internal bracing to control the sagging of horizontal
aluminum members adjacent to the window opening during handling and precast production process.
The cost for measures taken to enhance the window identification, control the alignment of aluminum
members during handling and for quality assurance in precast production is deemed to have been
included in the tender sum.
6.16 QUALITY CONTROL AT PRECAST PLANT
6.16.1 Inspection Upon The Delivery Of Cast-In Window Frames
The Contractor shall ensure that cast-in window frames delivered to precast plant are of good quality at
the point of receiving. The inspections at precast plant shall include, but not limited to inspections on
the workmanship of protective wrapping, dimension and surface defects such as dents and scratches.
6.16.2 Storage Of Cast-In Window Frames
Cast-in window frames shall be stored at a sheltered yard to prevent deterioration of protection system
due to weathering. The storage shall be demarcated, barricaded and raised to prevent soiling,
contacting with deleterious materials and accidental damage.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-19
6.16 QUALITY CONTROL AT PRECAST PLANT (CONT’D)
6.16.3 Care And Protection During Casting And Transportation
The Contractor shall ensure cast-in window frames are handled with care during the production process.
At least an experienced engineer, supervisor and a team of skilled workers shall be assigned for the
production of precast facades with cast-in window frame, repair and delivery.
Any part of cast-in window frames which is in direct contact with the dummy frames, bracings and
stoppers of the mould system, additional protective material shall be provided to prevent any premature
damage to the cast-in window frames. Additional protection may be needed to prevent grout leakage at
the corners. To avoid excessive staining due to dropping of fresh concrete, protective measure shall be
taken to cover the window frames during the casting process. For the transportation from precast plant
to site, the Contractor shall ensure adequate measures are provided at the critical contact points
between the precast facades and the steel frames on the trailers to prevent damage to the cast-in
window frame.
Before casting, the Contractor shall exercise due diligence and care in the precast production to ensure
that the orientation of cast-in window frame is checked when it is placed on the mould. The position of
the cast-in window frame shall also be measured and checked against the approved precast shop
drawings before casting. Upon the demoulding of precast facades, the orientation, position of cast-in
window frame and the clearance between the aluminum members shall be measured to detect any
possible sagging or bulging occurred during the casting.
6.16.4 Water-Tightness Test
The Contractor shall provide the equipment, labour and material to conduct water-tightness test at the
precast plant to ensure there is no water seepage at the interface joint between the cast-in window
frame and adjacent concrete.
The water-tightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the
joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for testing
and each point shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The location of test shall be selected by the SO Rep.
The velocity of the water at each nozzle shall be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered
from each nozzle shall be 600 litres per hour. The nozzle shall be held at a distance 1m away from the
joint/interface and pointed towards the joint/interface horizontally.
10% of the precast facades with cast-in window frame shall be tested for the water-tightness at the
interface joint. The Contractor shall carry out the water-tightness test as soon as the precast production
is commenced to ascertain the initial casting workmanship, as well as the performance of the cast-in
window frames. The SO Rep shall decide on the window type or window configuration and the location
on window frame to be tested. The SO Rep reserves the right to adjust the percentage of testing
depending on the quality and performance cast-in window and the test results.
6.16.5 Functional Test
For quality assurance, the Contractor shall check the functionality and the performance of cast-in
window frames randomly at the early stage of the project. This is to ensure that any inadequacy of the
bracing system can be detected early. For sliding windows, the inner frames shall be installed for
repeated sliding operations to check for smoothness, alignment and safety in operation. For casement
and top-hung windows, the inner frames shall be tested by repeated opening and closing to check for
smoothness, alignment and safety.
6.17 INSPECTION AND PROTECTION OF PRECAST FACADE WITH CAST-IN WINDOW FRAME AT
SITE
6.17.1 Inspection Upon Delivery Of Precast Facades With Cast-In Window Frame
When precast facades with cast-in window frame are delivered to site, the Contractor shall check the
condition of the cast-in window frames before installation.
6.17.2 Protection of precast facades with cast-in window frame
The precast components with cast-in window frame delivered to site are protected with the translucent
self adhesive tape. At site, the Contractor shall provide additional protective material like bubble wrap
of minimum thickness of 5mm or any other materials which are equivalent in performance and subject
to the approval of SO Rep to further protect the cast-in window frames from impact and abrasive forces.
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 6-20
6.17 INSPECTION AND PROTECTION OF PRECAST FACADE WITH CAST-IN WINDOW FRAME AT
SITE (CONT’D)
6.17.3 Submission Of Window Shop Drawings And Delivery Of Cast-In Window Frames To Precast Plant
The Contractor shall submit the window shop drawings timely to SO Rep for approval within a
reasonable timeframe from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The timeframe for window shop
drawing submission shall tie in with the approved master construction programme for the initial delivery
schedule of precast components to prevent any delay in the precast supply.
The Contractor shall deliver mock-up cast-in window frames to precast plant to facilitate the mould
fabrication at the window opening. The timeframe for the delivery of mock up window frames shall be
carefully planned to tie in with the initial delivery schedule of precast components to site and tie in with
the approved master construction programme.
The Contractor is obliged at no extra cost to HDB to provide the mock up frames, make improvements
in the protective wrapping including increasing the number of layer if required to enhance grout
tightness, and on window frame construction where necessary.
The Contractor shall ensure sufficient lead time in the delivery of the cast-in window frames meant for
mass precast production, and for building up of the initial component stocks at precast plant to meet
the delivery subsequently. The Contractor shall plan the schedule diligently and take note of the
expected initial precast components delivery schedule for each block in the project, and tie in with the
approved master construction programme.
6.17.4 Mould Design And Fabrication Timeframe
The mould supplied by the Contractor shall facilitate the production of precast facades with cast-in
window frame. The moulds shall be robust and durable without causing misalignment of track, twisting,
skewing and warpage of cast-in window frame during casting and demoulding. The Contractor shall
design the bracings and stoppers as part of the mould system. The bracings and stoppers shall be
provided adequately at appropriate spacing to prevent misalignment and warping of cast-in window
frame during casting.
The Contractor shall order and fabricate required moulds diligently to tie in closely with the site progress
and the cast-in window frame delivery schedule. Mould fabrication and production planning shall be
submitted to the SO Rep as and when requested.
6.17.5 Repair Of Damaged Window Frame
For repair works involving the removal of concrete at the interface joint between the cast-in window
frame and adjacent concrete, the water-tightness test shall be conducted after the repair is completed
to ensure the joint is water-tight. The Contractor shall consider the accessibility and the safety aspects
when the rectification is required at site and/or precast plant. A method of statement of the repair shall
be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the rectification of defective cast-in window frame at
precast plant and/or site is carried out.
Section 7/.....
BLDG17/S06.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-1
SECTION 7
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
7.1 GENERAL
The following specifications on Prestressed Concrete shall be treated as additional clauses to those
required under Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
7.2 CONCRETE MIX
Only specially designed concrete mixes complying with the requirements specified in the Drawings shall
be used for prestressed concrete work. Details of the concrete mix proposals are to be submitted to SO
Rep for approval at least 6 in advance of concreting work so as to allow strength tests from trial mixes
to be made. Trial mixes shall be repeated until a satisfactory mix as regard to the cube strength and
workability has been achieved. Once the SO Rep has approved the mix, it shall be used for that work
and no departure shall be made from it either in properties of materials or in their relative proportions
unless authorised by the SO Rep who may require further trial mixes to be made.
All sampling and testing of constituent materials, fresh and hardened concrete, shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Singapore or other international standards. If the
strength of cube test results representing the prestressed concrete work fails to achieve the required
strength, the Contractor shall be subject to charges and shall carry out further tests and/or rectifications
to ascertain the in-situ strength of concrete as specified under Clause 4.16, 4.17 and 4.18 including all
subclauses under them.
Notwithstanding that all tests have been complied with, member which cracks during or after
prestressing operations to an extent which in the opinion of the SO Rep renders it unfit for its purpose
in the work shall be removed from the work and replaced.
7.3 PRESTRESSING STEEL
The prestressing steel, wire or strand used in prestressing tendons shall comply with the requirements
of ASTM-A416, BS 4486 and BS 5896. High tensile steel wires or high tensile steel strands shall be
supplied in coils of a sufficiently large diameter so that it shall retain its physical properties and shall be
reasonably straight when unwound from the coils.
A copy of the Manufacturer's test certificates covering each coil of prestressing steels to be used shall
be provided to the SO Rep. If test certificates relating to the material is not available, the Contractor
shall arrange for testing of samples. The SO Rep may require the Contractor to carry out further test
on the steel of each batch. All such testings shall be carried out by an approved testing authority.
All wires or strands shall be cut from certified coils. Keep proper records so as to enable identification
of the wires with the coil from which they are cut. The manufacture and assembly of tendons shall be
done in accordance with the best quality of workmanship appropriate to the prestressing system being
used. Tendons shall be made to the required length plus an allowance, where applicable, at each end
for stressing operation. Splicing of strands or wires forming a tendon shall not be permitted. Flame
cutting of wire or strand within 80mm of where tendon will be gripped by the anchorage or jacks shall
not be permitted. Care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not apply on the anchorage or on
the tendon, within 25mm of the anchorage.
A durable metal label on which shall be stamped the length of the tendon and the coil number of the
wire or strand used, shall be tied to each tendon. Care shall be taken that tendons of any type are not
damaged, kinked or bent. Tendons shall be kept free from loose or thick rust, oil, grease, tar, paint,
mud, or any other deleterious substances but a thin film of rust will be permitted.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-2
7.4 ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Anchorage devices shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. Each anchorage device shall be
capable of transmitting a force not less than the ultimate tensile strength of the tendon without
overstressing the concrete. Spiral or other reinforcement specified by the manufacturer as being
required for this purpose shall be considered part of the anchorage devices and shall be of the size and
dimensions recommended by the Manufacturer for the prestressing system being used. Certificates of
origin shall be provided for all anchorage devices.
No damaged or defective anchorage devices shall be used. All steel parts shall be protected from
corrosion and all threaded parts and fittings shall be protected by wrappings or plugs until used. The
anchorage devices shall be kept free from mortar, loose rust, grease, tar, paint, oil, mud or any other
coatings.
7.5 SHEATHING
All Sheathing shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be of the type suitable
for the prestressing system to be used and shall be strong enough for withstanding the placing and
compaction of the concrete without suffering damages or deformation. Internal and external diameters
of sheathing shall be within the limits specified in the design or approved by the SO Rep. The sheathing
and all splices shall be mortar tight. Steel sheathing shall be galvanised or lead coated. The
Manufacturer's value for the friction coefficients of the proposed sheathing shall be stated by the
Contractor. Enlarged portions of the sheathing at couplings or anchorages shall be of sufficient length
to provide for the extension of tendons.
Grout holes shall be provided at both ends of the sheathing and shall be at least 10mm diameter. Each
of the grouting holes shall be equipped with a plug valve or similar device capable of withstanding a
pressure of 1 N per mm² without loss of water, grout or air. Additional vents, with plug valves, shall
be provided at suitable points in the sheathing, including high and low points, for the purpose of bleeding
air and water to ensure the complete filling of the duct with grout. The number and location of these
additional vents shall be as specified in the design.
Sheathing for prevention tendons shall consist of plastic tubing or other approved material of a quality,
diameter and thickness approved by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall continue through end forms for at
least 25mm.
7.6 PLACEMENT OF TENDONS
(a) Post-tensioned Tendons
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, tendons shall be sheathed
and placed in position prior to concreting. Where permanent tendons cannot be placed,
temporary tendons or other methods approved by the SO Rep shall be used to stiffen the
sheathing. Tendons shall be handled with care and shall be pulled through the sheathing in such
a manner as to avoid damage or contamination to either the tendon or the sheathing.
Sheathing shall be securely fixed at points sufficiently close together to maintain a smooth tendon
profile throughout the length of the tendon within a tolerance of 3mm of the position shown. If in
the opinion of the SO Rep, the sheathing is liable to be damaged or deformed during concreting
work, the Contractor shall take additional precautions to maintain the position and shape of the
sheathing.
Any temporary opening in the sheathing shall be plugged and all joints between sheathing and
any other part of the prestressing system shall be effectively sealed to prevent the entry of mortar,
dust, water or other deleterious matter. Sheathing shall be neatly fitted at joints without projection
or reduction of diameter, and the joints shall be mortar tight.
Immediately after the whole of the concrete has been placed, all tendons therein shall be pulled
back and forth for about 300mm to ensure that they are perfectly free inside the sheaths. Ducts
stiffened by temporary tendons shall be checked by passing through a tendon identical with the
permanent tendon.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-3
7.6 PLACEMENT OF TENDONS (CONT'D)
(a) Post-tensioned Tendons (Cont'd)
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum concrete cover to the outside surface of any sheathing
shall be 50mm for beam soffits and 40mm elsewhere. This minimum cover shall be increased
by 15mm for members in contact with earth or water or over salt water and by 25mm for members
in contact with salt water.
Each anchorage device shall be set square to the line of the corresponding prestressing tendon
and shall be positioned securely to prevent movement during concreting. The anchorage
devices shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Any mortar or concrete which adheres
to the bearing or wedging surfaces shall be removed immediately. Provision shall be made for
covering anchorages with reinforced concrete after completion of stressing. The minimum cover
shall be 50mm over the anchorages and 40mm over the reinforcement.
(b) Pretensioned Tendons
Tendons shall be located as shown on the Drawings and suitable devices shall be provided to
ensure that the correct positioning of the tendons is maintained during casting.
When tendons are being placed, particular care shall be taken so that the tendons shall not come
into contact with the oiled surface of the forms or be otherwise soiled. Any oil, etc which might
collect on the tendons shall be removed by cleaning the affected tendons with a petrol-soaked
rag or by other approved methods.
The anchorages shall be such as to prevent any slip during the casting or curing operations.
Unless as shown otherwise in the Drawings, the concrete cover to the surface of any tendon
shall not be less than twice the tendon diameter or 25mm whichever is the greater. Such
minimum cover shall be increased by 15mm for members situated in earth or water or over salt
water.
7.7 CONCRETING
Concrete in one precast unit shall be placed in one operation continuously without interruption. The
Contractor shall provide such protective cover as and when required to avoid stoppage due to sudden
rain. No unit shall be removed from the mould or erected until sufficiently matured to ensure that no
damage shall be done to the unit. For post-tensioned construction, where necessary, temporary
openings shall be provided in the formwork to enable placing and adequate compaction of concrete,
especially around and underneath sheathing and anchorages.
Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the sheathing. Vibrators shall not come into contact with the
sheathing and if the sheathing is damaged during concreting, the whole or a portion of the concrete
cast may be rejected by the SO Rep. Sheathing shall be cleaned out within half an hour of completion
of each concreting operation by blowing oil-free compressed air through the length of the sheathing.
The concrete shall be moist cured until the prestress is applied.
7.8 CONCRETE STRENGTH AT TRANSFER
No post-tensioning of tendons or the release of pretensioned tendons shall take place until the concrete
has attained the minimum strength required as stated in the Drawings or as specified. These
requirements shall be ascertained from tests on concrete cubes made and cured under the same
conditions as the concrete member. Sufficient cubes shall be made so that if the stipulated strength is
not achieved, further cubes will be available for such additional testing as may be required.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-4
7.9 TENSIONING EQUIPMENT
All tensioning equipment shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. Hydraulic pumps shall be power
driven and the power unit shall be so adjusted that the rate of extension of the tendon is within the limits
recommended or as directed by the SO Rep. Dynamometers, and each set of equipment comprising
pump, jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated as directed by the SO Rep and the true force
determined from the calibration. Dynamometers, pressure gauges and scales shall permit force and
elongation to be determined within an accuracy of 2%.
Pressure gauges shall only be used as a substitute for dynamometers and shall be concentric scale
gauges complying with the requirements of BSEN 837-1 which requires gauges to be accurate to within
1% of their full capacity. They shall be selected so as to be used between the 50% and 90% of their
full capacity and shall not be less than 200mm in diameter. Where pressure gauges are used, a suitable
device shall be fitted so as to protect the gauge against sudden release of pressure. Provision shall
also be made by such means as a "tee" connection, for the attachment of a second gauge which shall
be attached and used as a check whenever so requested by the SO Rep.
7.10 TENSIONING PRECAUTIONS
All tensioning operations shall be carried out in the presence of the SO Rep in accordance with the best
practice applicable to the particular prestressed method proposed. The tensioning operation shall be
performed only by personnel trained and experienced in this type of work.
Care shall be taken during tensioning to ensure the safety of all personnel engaged on the work and of
other persons in the vicinity. Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be restrained should
they loose their grip on the tendons. No person shall be permitted to stand behind the jacks or close to
the line of the tendons while tensioning is in progress. The operation of jacks, the measurements of
elongation and associated operations shall be carried out in such a manner and from such positions
that the safety of all concerned is ensured. During actual stressing operations warning signs shall be
prominently displayed. Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, there is danger to the general public or to
property, special precautions in the form of substantial barrier shall be required.
7.11 TENSIONING FORCE
Unless otherwise specified, the tensioning forces required shall be that shown in the Drawings. The
tensioning force applied to any tendon shall be determined by direct measurement of the force and
checked by measurement of the elongation of the tendon. The secant modulus determined from test
samples or shown on test certificates shall be used when interpreting the measurement of elongation.
Allowance shall be made for any anticipated draw-in at the anchorage devices on release of the jack,
for elastic shortening of the member and for anticipated losses due to stressing of subsequent tendons.
The final forces in each tendon, as measured by the dynamometer, shall be within an accuracy of plus
or minus 3% of the values stipulated.
If, on completion of tensioning each tendon to the required force, the check measurement of elongation
differs from its required value by more than 5%, the SO Rep may direct that some or all of the following
steps be taken :
(a) Recalibration of equipment;
(b) Testing of tendon material to check secant modulus;
(c) Tendons released and restressed (secant modulus applicable to second stressing
to be adopted);
(d) Lubrication of tendons to reduce friction losses. Only water soluble oils shall be used
in ducted systems and these shall be washed out before grouting;
(e) Where only 1 jack is used previously, the tendon shall be tensioned from both ends
using 2 jacks;
(f) Other methods as directed by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-5
7.12 PRETENSIONING
The abutments and casting beds for pretensioning of tendons shall be strong enough to withstand the
required total prestressing force with adequate safety. The abutments shall be so constructed as to
provide protection at all times against injury or damage caused by slipping occurring in anchorages
during or after tensioning. Provisions shall be made for free and adequate movement of the member
at points of support in the direction of the expected shortening due to prestress without impairing the
rigidity of the forms during casting operations. Where necessary, provision shall be made in the design
of the casting bed for the use of external vibrators.
In the case where tendons are to be deflected, submit details of the proposed layout for each line of
tendons together with values for the portion of the force to be provided by the initial tensioning and for
the portion which will be provided by the elongation resulting from subsequent deflection of the tendons.
Tensioning shall not commence until the SO Rep has approved the values submitted.
Special care shall be taken to apply tensioning force smoothly at an even rate and to determine its value
with considerable accuracy. Tendons shall be marked for measurement of elongation and shall also
be marked at both the jacking and dead ends of the stressing bed so that any slip may be observed.
Should a slip of any of the tendons in a group of tendons tensioned together occur, the tensioning of
the whole group shall be released, tendons reset, and the whole group tensioned again. Alternatively,
the tensioning of the group of tendons can be completed without the slipped tendon(s) which can be
subsequently tensioned.
The prestressing force shall be transferred from the jack to the abutment of the stressing bed
immediately the required force (or elongation) has been reached and the pressure in the jack shall be
relaxed before any other operation commences. Tendons shall be deflected, where shown in the
Drawings and the required force maintained, by use of approved fixing devices strong enough to hold
the tendons firmly in their proper positions especially during concreting and curing, until the concrete
has attained the required strength.
In order that the required force is maintained after the tensioned steel has been anchored, an allowance
shall be made in assessing the value of the applied force for loss of stress due to yield in the anchorages
and for slip when the steel is wedged after tensioning. In long line beds, due consideration shall be
given to the friction caused by the varying shape and number of diaphgrams.
Prior to concreting, a check shall be made of the accuracy of alignment of forms and of the distance
centre to centre bearings, overall length, width, positioning of end blocks, tendons, sheathing and
anchorages and their connections, reinforcement, bearings, dowels and any other fittings shown in the
Drawings. Concreting of a member shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been
obtained.
Prior to transfer of the prestressing force from the abutments of the casting bed to the members, all
tendons shall be tested for tightness and any loose tendon found shall be reported to the SO Rep who
will decide whether the members are acceptable. All tendons shall be marked at each end of every
member so as to check the draw-in and any slip of the tendons. The procedure of release shall be
continuous and shall be performed in the shortest possible time without interruption. The prestress
shall be transferred to the members in such a manner that the tendons are released gradually and,
preferably, simultaneously. The method of transferring the prestress and the equipment proposed shall
be approved by the SO Rep prior to use. The SO Rep shall be present at every occasion of releasing
tendons. After prestress has been transferred to the members, the tendons between the members shall
be severed working along the line from the point or points of release. Every effort shall be made to
avoid injury to the concrete.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-6
7.13 POST-TENSIONING
The process of prestressing each member shall be continuous, the tendons being stressed in the order
indicated in the Drawings, and the operation completed without interruption in as short a time as
possible. No member shall be left partially prestressed without the permission of the SO Rep unless the
Drawings require the member to be prestressed in stages. In general, tensioning shall proceed
symmetrically to avoid lateral distortion and development of tension on one side. At no time shall the
permissible stresses in concrete and steel be exceeded.
Tendon ducts shall be cleaned out by blowing compressed air through them and anchorages shall be
thoroughly cleaned prior to commencement of tensioning. The protruding ends of tendons shall be
cleaned of any coating, such as rust, mortar, oil or mud which would lessen the grip of wedges of
anchorage devices. Tendons shall be checked before tensioning to see that they are free to move
inside the duct.
Special care shall be taken to set the jacks accurately in the line of the tendon. The force which is
applied initially to take up the slack of the tendon shall be sufficient to seat the jack firmly but shall not
exceed the amount normally associated with the particular method of post-tensioning. After taking up
the slack, the tendon shall, where possible, be accurately marked at both ends and elongations or draw-
in measured from these markings. When requested by the SO Rep readings of force and elongation
shall be taken at stages during the tensioning of a tendon and plotted to determine the zero error in
measuring elongation. Where tendons consist of a number of individual components, each component
shall be marked so that any slip may be observed.
In the case of slipping of one or more components or tendons of a group tensioned together, the SO
Rep may permit a compensating increase in the elongation of the remaining tendons of the group
provided that the jacking force does not exceed 80% of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the
remaining tendons. In the case of a tendon breaking or slipping after tensioning, the tendon shall be
released, replaced if necessary, and restressed. Under no circumstances shall the maximum jacking
force exceeds the rated capacity of the jacking equipment used, or 80% of the specified minimum
ultimate strength of the tendon whichever is less.
7.14 TENSIONING RECORDS
All tensioning data shall be recorded and submitted to the SO Rep for checking and retention :
(a) Pretensioned Tendons
The following data relating to the prestressing operation shall be recorded :
(i) Identification numbers of dynamometers, gauges, pumps and jacks;
(ii) Force applied if dynamometer is used; alternatively, pump or jack pressure and area
of piston;
(iii) Elongation remaining after anchoring.
(b) Post-Tensioned Tendons
The following data, where applicable, shall be recorded :
(i) Identification number of each dynamometer, gauge, pump and jack;
(ii) Identification particulars of tendons;
(iii) Initial forces (or pressures) when tendons are marked for measurement of elongation;
(iv) Final forces (or pressure) and elongations obtained on completion of tensioning;
(v) Elongation remaining after release of jacks;
(vi) Elongations obtained at intervals during tensioning, together with corresponding forces
(or pressures), if and when required by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-7
7.15 GROUTING
After post-tensioned tendons have been tensioned and anchored they shall be pressure-grouted as
soon as practicable. The grout mix and the method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved
by the SO Rep before grouting is commenced. The pressure at which the grout is to be pumped into
the duct shall be approved by the SO Rep and shall not normally exceed 0.7 N per mm².
The grout shall preferably be either a neat cement grout with a water to cement ratio not exceeding 0.4
or cement mortar (1:1 3/4 by weight). An approved expanding plasticising admixture shall be used.
Grout shall be mixed in a high speed mechanical mixer, for at least 2 minutes, until a uniform colloidal
consistency is produced. Mixing by hand shall not be permitted. Pumps shall be capable of continuous
operation with little pressure variation and shall have a system for recirculating the grout whilst actual
grouting is not in progress. Pumps shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and shall be capable of delivery
at pressures up to 1.0 N per mm². All equipment, especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed with
clean water after each series of operations and more frequently if necessary.
Grouting shall not be carried out while the shade temperature exceeds 38°C. All ducts and holes shall
be thoroughly flushed out with clean water followed by compressed air. Grout shall be injected into each
duct at a speed between 300mm and 600mm per second. A continuously steady flow of grout shall be
maintained until the duct is completely filled and pure grout issues from all vents and from the far end
and until all entrapped air has been expelled. The vents shall be progressively closed as required to
ensure the complete filling of the duct. The grout pressure shall then be held at the required value for
at least 1 minute after which the grouting end shall be plugged. All vents and ends shall be kept closed
until final setting of the grout has taken place. When directed by the SO Rep, duct openings shall be
inspected 2 or 3 days after grouting and topped up if necessary.
If serious leaks occur, the grouting shall be stopped, the duct flushed clean with water and the leakage
plugged before continuing with grouting. If a blockage occurs, pumping may be quickly transferred to
the far end of the duct if there are sufficient vents to ensure that the duct will be filled with grout.
Alternatively, ducts may be flushed with clean water to clear the blockage. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the complete filling of the ducts with grout. If several blockages occur the grout mix may
be rejected and a new mix designed.
On completion of grouting and after the grout has hardened sufficiently, any vents or grouting tubes
which extend to the surfaces of the concrete shall be cut off 25mm below the concrete surface and the
recess plugged with concrete. Tendons shall be cut back to give, when recesses are concreted, a
minimum of 25mm cover. Wire stubs (if any) may be bent into the recesses. Recesses shall be
concreted, or, when shown in the Drawings, shall be filled monolithically when other cast-in-place
concrete is placed.
Complete records shall be kept on all grouting of ducts and a copy of the records submitted to the SO
Rep.
7.16 PRESTRESSED MEMBERS
Workmanship displayed in the construction of prestressed members shall be of the highest order and
every endeavour shall be made to obtain accuracy of dimensions. The dimensions and shape stated
in the Drawings shall be taken to apply to the structure at the time of its completion when under self
weight alone. Except where stated otherwise in the Drawings or approved by the SO Rep, the
dimensions and profile of the formwork shall compensate for deformations due to prestress, etc so that
the dimensions and profile of the completed structure will conform to the Drawings. Submit details of
the magnitude of these deformations and the proposed method to allow for them. Construction of
formwork shall not commence until the approval of the SO Rep has been obtained.
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 7-8
7.16 PRESTRESSED MEMBERS (CONT'D)
For precast members, the date of casting, length of member and the identification number required by
the SO Rep shall be marked on every member. When requested by the SO Rep, the word 'TOP' and/or
lifting positions shall also be marked on the member. All accepted members shall be clearly identified
by marking in the presence of the SO Rep. Members shall not be lifted or handled until fully stressed.
At all times, and especially during transportation, members shall be secured in proper positions by
means of suitable packing pieces and braces. Members shall not be braced against one another but
shall be provided with independent bracing. Members shall be handled, lifted and supported carefully
at the positions and in the manner required by the Drawings. Where no method of lifting is shown in
the Drawings, submit for the approval of the SO Rep, details of proposals for lifting the members and
once approved no other method shall be used during the whole period of construction except with the
permission of the SO Rep.
Precast members shall be supported on timber bearers or other approved means, over their full width.
The ground or space between the bearers supporting the members shall be carefully cleared and
levelled so as to prevent the member from being accidentally supported other than on the approved
bearers. The bearers themselves shall be supported on firm foundation and, every precaution shall be
made to prevent subsidence from occurring. Members shall not be stacked on top of one another
except when approved by the SO Rep who shall determine the manner of stacking and the maximum
number of layers or height of the stacking. Each layer shall be separated from the next layer by bearers.
No precast member which is manufactured outside the Site shall be delivered to the Site without the
permission of the SO Rep. The granting of permission shall be dependent on each individual member
exhibiting satisfactory workmanship and finish and complying with the tolerance on dimensions and
prestressing force. In addition, test loading, if specified, and concrete strength tests of representative
members shall satisfy the requirements specified.
Section 8/.....
BLDG17/S07.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-1
SECTION 8
HOUSEHOLD SHELTER
8.1 SEMI-PRECAST HOUSEHOLD SHELTER
The Contract primarily requires the Contractor to construct semi-precast household shelters. The
Contractor shall comply with all requirements specified herein in this Section including all clauses and
(a) Approved Supplier
The precast household shelters shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep. The
list of approved suppliers is posted on the internet (http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg) under HDB’s
Materials List (ML).
(b) Precast Concrete Works
The requirements specified in the clauses and subclauses under Section 6 "Semi-Precast
Construction" shall apply for all structural precast Works.
(c) Manufacturing Of Precast Components
The precast household shelters shall be fabricated with proper quality control and shall be
fabricated in accordance with the approved Drawings. The door frame for the blast door shall
be cast in together with the precast household shelter. A removable steel bracing frame (Dummy
Door) to prevent the door frame from warping shall be used during concreting. The door leaf shall
be installed on the Site at a later stage as decided by the SO Rep.
In all cases, the blast door frames shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious
materials by wrapping with plastic sheets or other means to provide protection to the door frames.
The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the door frame, ventilation
sleeve and plate units and openings for electrical services.
Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by
pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep.
No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter.
Prior to mass production of the household shelters, the Contractor shall produce at least one
sample of precast household shelter together with the blast door installed for approval by the SO
Rep. These approved samples shall be used as references for the minimum standard and quality
to be achieved for all the precast panels of the household shelters.
The Contractor shall provide remedial work to any precast household shelters that are not
satisfactorily finished as decided by the SO Rep. Gross deviation from the specified finish may
result in the rejection of the precast household shelter.
The SO Rep shall reject any precast household shelter including those already delivered to the
Site, if it is found that such precast household shelter does not comply with the Drawings and/or
Specifications.
BLDG17/S08.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-2
8.1 SEMI-PRECAST HOUSEHOLD SHELTER (CONT'D)
(d) Transportation And Site Storage
The precast household shelters shall be delivered to the Site in a proper manner.
The Contractor shall ensure that the precast household shelters are able to withstand any
distortion in the shape during lifting, transportation and installation. They shall be handled in
such a manner so as to avoid excessive stress or damage.
The Contractor shall ensure proper site access and shall supply all necessary tools and
equipment for the efficient transportation of the precast household shelters to the designated
location at the Site.
The storage area shall be adequate to permit easy access and ready for the handling of the
stored precast household shelters. It shall have a clean, hard, level and well-drained surface to
permit well-organised storage, and to prevent warpage, bowing, chipping, cracking,
discolouration, staining or soiling of the precast household shelters. No precast household
shelters shall be placed directly on the ground without proper support. They shall be stored with
due protection from staining or physical damage.
(e) Installation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment such as cranes, temporary
staging, etc for the efficient installation of the precast household shelters. The installation
procedure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval and shall be strictly adhered to
thereafter.
The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the
household shelter is constructed properly according to the Drawings and/or Specifications.
No hacking of the concrete of precast household shelters shall be allowed.
8.2 CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE WORKS
(a) The requirements specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and
subclauses under it shall apply for all cast-in-situ Works.
(b) The Contractor shall ensure the correct alignment and positioning of the ventilation sleeve and
plate units and openings for electrical services where required.
(c) The Contractor shall exercise good construction practice and stringent control to ensure that the
household shelter is constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and/or Specifications.
No hacking of the concrete of household shelters shall be allowed. Concrete unevenness, if
required to be made good, shall be ground smooth by using grinders only.
Where honeycombs or segregation occur in the concrete, these shall be made good only by
pressure grouting with the approval of the SO Rep.
No plastering shall be allowed on the internal surfaces of the household shelter.
8.3 BLAST DOOR
(a) Approved Supplier
The household shelter blast doors shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep.
The list of approved suppliers is posted on the Internet (http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg) under HDB’s
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, the approved blast door shop drawings and the
written contractual agreement between himself and his supplier within two weeks from the date
BLDG17/S08.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-3
8.3 BLAST DOOR (CONT'D)
(b) Fabrication Of Blast Door
The blast doors shall be fabricated according to the details as shown in the approved shop
Drawings with good quality and workmanship acceptable to the SO Rep.
(c) Inspection/Testing Of Blast Doors
The Contractor shall allow for the inspection and testing of the blast doors by the SO Rep during
the course of fabrication.
Blast door shall be selected on the Site by the SO Rep for inspection/testing. The Contractor
shall cut them open to check for compliance with the approved shop Drawings and/or
Specifications.
Water-tightness tests shall be carried out on the door (closed and fully locked with the door
frame) to a minimum depth of 25 mm water for a period of 2 hours. Any seepage of water through
the door or gasket after the 2 hour period shall be considered a failure.
(d) Steel Sections
For components such as blast door frame, blast door leaf cladding panels and internal frame of
the door leaf, uncoated mild steel sheets to ASTM A366 or BS 1449 or other approved standards
subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall be used. Such components shall be treated with
approved Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primer and tested to the requirements stipulated
in subclause 8.3 (h).
For other mild steel sections (such as for small movable parts in the locking mechanism, if any),
grade 43A to BS 4360 or other approved standards subject to the approval of the SO Rep shall
be used. Such other mild steel sections shall be protected from corrosion by a method approved
by the SO Rep.
Small areas of corrosion protection coating damaged by welding, cutting or bending shall be
made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum
of 85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint, or other
method approved by the SO Rep.
(e) Locking Bolts and Shear Pins
Locking bolts and shear pins shall be of stainless steel to AISI Type 316.
(f) Gasket
The material for the gasket shall be Neoprene or EPDM rubber and shall meet the requirements
of Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber, either grade 2A3 or higher; or grade 2B3 or higher as
specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved
(g) Spray Painting To Blast Door Leaf
The blast door leaf which is Cathodic Electro-Deposition (CED) primed shall be spray finished
with 2 coats of approved enamel paint. Prior to the application of the enamel paint, the surfaces
shall be clean, dry and free from grease, oil or other foreign matter.
A full colour range of the enamel paint shall be submitted for selection and approval by the
SO Rep.
BLDG17/S08.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-4
8.3 BLAST DOOR (CONT'D)
(h) Painting To Blast Door Frame
Painting to Blast door frame which is Cathoidc Electro-Deposition (CED) primer shall be painted
on the Site with 2 coats of approved enamel paint. Prior to the application of the enamel paint,
the surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from grease, oil or other foreign matter.
A full colour range of the enamel paint shall be submitted for selection and approval by the SO
Rep.
The CED primer shall comply with the following requirements:
Performance /
Test Method Requirement
Properties
Adhesion ASTM D3359 5B
Shall withstand scratch test load of

Scratch Resistance SS 5 : Part F2
2000g
2H shall be the hardest pencil that do

Pencil Hardness ASTM D3363
not scratch the film
Dry Film Thickness SS 5:Part B1 20 microns 5 microns
500hrs:
No more than Density 2 Size 3 Blisters
Resistance to Salt SS 5:Part G10
(ISO 4628-2)
Water Spray
Degree of Rusting < Ri2 (0.5%)
(ISO 4628-3)
500hrs:
No more than Density 2 Size 2 Blisters
Resistance to SS 5:Part G7
(ISO 4628-2)
Humidity
Degree of Rusting < Ri1 (0.05%)
(ISO 4628-3)
BLDG17/S08.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 8-5
8.4 VENTILATION SLEEVE & PLATE UNIT
(a) Fabrication Of The Ventilation Sleeve & Plate Unit
The ventilation sleeve and plate units shall be obtained from a supplier approved by the SO Rep.
The list of approved suppliers is posted on the internet (http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg) under HDB’s
The ventilation sleeve & plate units shall be fabricated according to the details as shown in the
approved shop Drawings with good quality and workmanship acceptable to the SO Rep.
In all cases, the plates shall be protected from dirt, grout and other deleterious materials by
wrapping with plastic sheets or by other means.
(b) Testing Of Ventilation Sleeve & Plate Unit
One ventilation sleeve and plate unit shall be selected by the SO Rep for water-tightness test. It
shall be carried out by subjecting the inside of the closed sleeve to a minimum depth of 25mm
of water for a period of 2 hours. Any seepage of water through the gasket after the 2 hour period
shall be considered a failure.
(c) Gasket
The material for the gasket shall be Neoprene or EPDM rubber and shall meet the requirements
of Type 2 closed cell expanded rubber, either grade 2A3 or higher; or grade 2B3 or higher as
specified in Table 2 of ASTM D1056; or other approved
8.5 SEALING OF ELECTRICAL OPENINGS
After the installation of electrical wiring, the Contractor shall provide sealing to the concealed wiring
conduits in the household shelter wall to ensure that these are sealed air-tight. The method and type of
sealing shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Section 9/.....
BLDG17/S08.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-1
SECTION 9
REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK
9.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The concrete water tank Works shall include all structural, architectural and other work above reinforced
concrete main roof slab level and lift motor room floor slab level and low level concrete suction tanks as
shown in the Drawings. These include the following works :
(a) concrete water tanks and the supporting stumps;
(b) roof top pump room adjacent to concrete water tanks;
(c) lift motor room irrespective of whether it is connected to or far away from the concrete
water tanks;
(d) fascia walls fencing around the concrete water tanks;
(e) all roofs for the concrete water tanks, lift motor room, roof top pump room and other
roof structures including roof over void decks; and
(f) low level concrete suction tanks including supporting stumps.
The concrete water tank Works shall include the construction, completion and maintenance of the Works
and the provision of labour, materials, Construction Equipment and other items, whether of a temporary or
permanent nature, required in and for such construction, completion and maintenance in so far as these
are specified in or can be reasonably inferred from the Works.
Where in the case precast watertanks are shown in the Drawings, or proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall also comply with all other relevant clauses, subclause and sections of the Specifications.
9.2 WATER-PROOFING MEASURES
The construction of the concrete water tanks shall be in accordance with the latest SS EN 1992-3. Provide
and construct the concrete water tanks adopting closely the following waterproofing measures to ensure
the water-tightness of concrete water tanks :
(a) Grade 40 concrete with low water/cement ratio and high workability shall be used. The concrete
shall be designed with chloride-free retarding superplasticiser. The finished concrete shall be
dense, impermeable and durable.
(b) No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The water tanks
shall be cast in one operation to above the specified highest water level as shown in the Drawings.
The rest of the water tanks including the roof shall be cast in a second operation.
(c) The concrete tanks shall be tested in accordance with SS EN 1992-3 for water tightness 28 days
after casting.
(d) After passing the water test, the internal surface of the concrete tanks shall be coated with
approved type cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instructions of the SO
Rep.
BLDG17/S09.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-2
9.3 PUB APPROVAL
All materials used in the construction and repair of concrete water tanks shall be approved by PUB.
Certified copy of the PUB approval letter of the particular type of materials shall be submitted to the SO
Rep for approval prior to its incorporation into the work.
9.4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
The concrete used for the reinforced concrete water tanks shall be all as shown in the Drawings. The
Contractor shall comply with all relevant clauses and subclauses of Section 4 "Structural Concrete".
9.5 FORMWORK SYSTEM (REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK)
Unless otherwise specified, formwork shall be designed and constructed in accordance with clause 4.19
"Formwork" and clause 4.22 "Building Accuracy" including all subclauses under them, where appropriate.
Formwork can only be removed at least 7 days after concreting the concrete water tanks and the soffit of
the tanks be re-propped immediately until 28 days after casting.
Formwork shall be removed gradually without shock, disturbance and vibration, without damaging or
overloading the finished concrete work or structures, and in a manner approved by the SO Rep.
9.6 CONCRETING
All construction joints and concreting procedures for the Reinforced Concrete Water Tank Works shall be
approved by the SO Rep. Inform the SO Rep the area of concreting and the location of construction joints
and obtain his approval prior to the concreting of concrete tanks.
No construction joint below the specified highest water level shall be allowed. The entire concrete tanks up
to the soffit of the tank roof slab shall be cast in one operation. The tank roof shall be cast in the second
operation. All pipes shall be cast in-situ with the concrete tank in the positions as shown in the Drawings.
The following sequence of concreting the concrete water tank within the same day may be accepted by
the SO Rep if the Contractor could demonstrate that these will result in a monolithic and watertight
structure :
(a) Cast the lowest 500mm of the tank walls with concrete flowing into the tank floor slab;
(b) Level the tank floor slab to the thickness required; and
(c) Immediately after initial setting, the rest of the tank walls shall be cast and topped up to the soffit of
the tank roof slab.
The initial setting time varies with the workability of the concrete mix and shall be approved by the SO
Rep. As soon as the concrete starts to set, the walls shall be immediately topped up to the level required.
Any delay in the topping up operation may result in rejection of the concreting Works by the SO Rep.
No concreting Works shall be allowed without the presence of the Resident Technical Officer.
The concrete shall be highly workable and shall be compacted sufficiently to produce a dense
homogeneous mass and filling all voids. The concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance after
being placed in position and shall be continuously cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting.
9.7 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST
The Contractor shall test the concrete water tanks for watertightness in accordance with BS 8007. Cast in-
situ water tanks shall be tested 28 days after casting and precast water tanks shall be tested 7 days after
casting, or on attaining the 28 day concrete strength, whichever is earlier. The tank shall be filled
gradually with PUB water up to the overflow level. Starting from full tank, the period of test shall be at least
24 hours, during which the exposed surfaces shall show no sign of leakage and no damp patch.
If the tank leaks or shows any sign of dampness, it shall be repaired with approved type of epoxy resin
grout or other methods and the tank retested. If the tank fails the second test, the SO Rep reserves the
right to instruct the Contractor to remove and recast the tank.
BLDG17/S09.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-3
9.8 MORTAR BED FOR TILING
After passing the watertightness test, the internal surface of the concrete tank shall be coated with an
approved cementitious waterproofing membrane in accordance with the instruction of the SO Rep. On the
fully cured cementitious waterproof membrane, a mortar bed of about 10mm thickness shall be applied
with an approved prepacked mortar mix to receive the tiling. The prepacked mortar shall be mixed
mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Tiles shall be laid on this mortar bedding
within a week.
9.9 TILING
The concrete water tanks shall be tiled internally with approved types of heavy duty ceramic tiles. The
surface and texture of all the ceramic tiles shall be glazed. Dimensional and surface quality requirements
and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with ISO13006 unless otherwise stated. The
surface appearance shall be free from crack, crazing, hairline cracks, projections, depressions, flakes and
bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly formed corners and shall not be warped
or deformed in any manner.
Tile used shall be 100mm x 200mm x 8mm for rectangular reinforced concrete water tanks; and 45mm x
95mm x 8mm for circular reinforced concrete water tanks; level and regular in size with perfect corners
and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner. The dimensional tolerances shall be in
accordance to the following:
(i) Length Not more than 0.75%

The deviation, in %, of the average length of each tile from
the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width Not more than 0.75%

The deviation, in %, of the average width of each tile from
the average width of 10 test specimens.
(iii) Thickness Not more than 5%

The deviation, in %, of the average thickness of each tile
from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance to ISO13006 unless otherwise stated. The tests to be carried out are as
follow:
(i) Water absorption

The maximum water absorption of the ceramic tiles for concrete water tanks shall not
exceed 1%
(ii) Hardness
The scratch hardness of such tiles shall not be less than 5 on the Moh scale.
(iii) Slip Resistance
The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with SS 485: 2011.
Performance Criteria:
The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum friction test method with
a classification of X.
The Contractor shall submit an approval letter from PUB and a certified true copy of the test report from
an accredited laboratory under Singapore Accreditation Council(SAC), or other accredited body under the
Mutual Recognition Arrangements (MRA) with SAC for the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S09.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-4
9.10 CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES FOR INLET,

OVERFLOW, INTERCONNECTING AND WASHOUT PIPES
Provide and install high level concrete water tanks and low level concrete water tanks as shown in the
Drawings.
Provide and fix 100mm diameter stainless steel connecting pipe of minimum 450mm in length and
complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be welded to the
middle section of the connecting pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and cast in-situ in the
concrete wall so that the welded collar is embedded in the middle of the concrete wall. The pipe surface
for the portion embedded in the concrete wall shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and
perfect bonding between the pipe and concrete. The connecting pipe shall be positioned to give a
minimum clearance of 150mm from the external wall surface to the flange and 100mm from the internal
wall finished surface to the pipe end. For washout connecting pipe, it shall flush with the internal finished
surface.
Provide and fix for each roof water tank one inlet, one overflow, two interconnecting and one washout
connecting pipes as specified in the foregoing requirements. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall
be accordingly and correspondingly aligned. Roof water tanks with inlet pipes direct from the PUB shall
have two overflow pipes per tank.
Provide and fix for each suction tank one inlet, two overflow and one washout connecting pipes as shown.
Where connecting pipes to the concrete water tanks are to be provided for distribution mains, rising main
inlets, overflow pipes, washout pipes and others as shown in the Drawings, they shall be cast in the water
tank floor or wall.
All inlet connecting pipes receiving water directly from the PUB shall have flanges at both ends. The pipe
shall be positioned such that there is a minimum clearance of 100mm from the flanges to the internal wall
finished surface and 150mm to the external wall surfaces.
Roof tank inlet connecting pipes receiving water directing from PUB shall be provided with stainless steel
screwed boss flange conforming to BS EN 1092 for the installation of equilibrium ball float valves.
All stainless steel material used shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with
BS EN 1092. All Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipe (except overflow, warning and bypass pipes)
thickness shall be based on JIS G3459 Stainless Steel Pipes Schedule No. 20S.
Carry out cleaning and commissioning of the water tanks, including the use of chemicals for sterilisation of
the water tank and bear all costs and expenses for the commissioning of the water tanks.
9.11 OUTLET CONNECTING PIPES WITH FLANGES

AT TANK FLOOR SLAB
Provide and fix three outlet connecting pipes with flanges at tank floor slab to roof distribution mains for
each roof water tank. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 100mm diameter, minimum 500mm in
length and complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm thickness shall be
welded to the middle section of the connecting pipe and cast-in-situ in the water tank floor slab so that the
collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the portion embedded in the
concrete slab shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect bonding between the
pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the roof tank floor slab and the flange shall be
150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of the suction tank floor
slab.
There are a minimum of two water pumps to be installed for each suction tank. Provide and fix one outlet
connecting pipe for each water pump. The connecting pipe shall be stainless steel, 80mm in diameter,
minimum 400mm in length complete with flange. A 200mm diameter stainless steel collar with 9mm
thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the connecting pipes and cast-in-situ in the water tank
floor slab so that the collar is embedded in the middle of the tank floor slab. The pipe surface for the
portion embedded in the concrete slab shall be properly and suitably treated to ensure proper and perfect
bonding between the pipe and concrete. The clearance between the soffit of the suction tank floor slab
and the flange shall be 150mm and the connecting pipe shall protrude 100mm above the finished level of
the suction tank floor slab.
All stainless steel materials shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall conform to BS EN 1092.
BLDG17/S09.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-5
9.12 CONNECTING PIPES FOR OVERFLOW WARNING PIPES AND BYPASS PIPE
Provide and fix two 28mm diameter, minimum of 500mm long stainless steel pipes, complete with
connecting adaptor or flange of 80mm diameter on one end. A collar of 80mm diameter and 9mm
thickness shall be welded to the middle section of the pipe. The connecting pipe shall be positioned and
cast-in-situ in the concrete tank wall. The connecting pipe shall be protruded to give a minimum clearance
of 150mm from the external wall finished surface and 100mm from the internal wall finished surface.
All stainless steel materials used shall conform to AISI Grade 316.
Check and ensure that all the above are provided in accordance with the Drawings.
9.13 STAINLESS STEEL CONNECTING PIPES
Check and take necessary precautions to ensure that the stainless steel connecting pipes are not in
contact with the concrete tank reinforced steel bars during concreting.
Pipe wall thickness used for Grade 316 stainless steel connecting pipes shall conform to JIS G3459
Stainless Steel Pipe Schedule No. 20S. Minimum grade for filler or electrode shall be AISI Type 316L. All
welds for stainless steel shall be argon shielded and by TIG or MIG welding. Ensure that all oxides or
scales formed on welded surfaces are removed.
9.14 MANHOLE AND MANHOLE COVER
Provide access manhole to every roof level tanks and every pump room suction tanks in accordance with
the Drawings.
The manhole cover shall be complete with locking device and non-duplicable padlock with master key
provided in accordance to PUB’s latest requirements. The manhole cover shall be capable of being
opened fully in accordance with the Drawings.
All manhole covers are to be secured by bolting or fastening with stainless steel brackets in accordance
with PUB’s latest requirements.
Contractor shall provide sufficient number of hook wrench or C-tool (for locking or unlocking round nut) to
the respective Town Council’s request.
The fabricator and installer of stainless steel bracket and suppliers of round nuts and hook wrench shall be
from PUB’s latest approved lists.
.
9.15 ELECTRODE ACCESS
Provide access opening to every roof water tank for the mounting of three sets of electrodes as shown in
the Drawings. One access opening shall also be provided for one set of electrode to every pump room
suction tank.
Access openings for electrodes shall have 3mm thick stainless steel Grade 316 plate for mounting
electrodes. Electrodes for the roof water tank shall be protected from weather by an aluminium box.
9.16 AIR VENT
Air vents shall be provided near the top of the wall adjacent to the water tank room where booster pumps
are installed. Provide at least two 100mm diameter stainless steel air vents to every tank. All air vents
shall be fitted with elbow end and suitably covered by mosquito netting. The mesh size of the netting shall
not exceed 0.65mm. All the air vents shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings.
BLDG17/S09.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 9-6
9.17 CAT LADDER
Provide and fix external aluminium cat ladder in accordance with the Drawings.
One UPVC internal cat ladder shall be provided for each tank at the designated manhole and effectively
hooked to the stainless steel (AISI Grade 316) hook cast-in-situ to the tank, in accordance with the
Drawings.
9.18 EXTERNAL FINISHES
Provide external finishes to the external face of the concrete water tank.
The finishing materials, their colour, texture, quality and methods of application shall be in accordance
with the Drawings and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
9.19 STERILISATION OF WATER TANK
When all work pertaining to the concrete water tank is completed, the tank shall be filled with water for at
least 14 days to get rid of all odour, taste, chemicals, cement and other objectional particles.
The tank shall then be thoroughly cleaned, flushed and sterilised by the Contractor.
The sterilisation of the water tank shall be carried out in accordance with the Code of Practice on Water
Service issued by PUB (SS CP 48).
The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological examination and chemical analysis by (PUB), PSB or
an accredited laboratory under Singapore Accreditation Council (SAC), or other accredited body under the
Mutual Recognition Arrangements (MRA) with SAC.
Provide the water examination and analysis report (issued by PUB), to the SO Rep and the result of the
water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits for human consumption, failing which the Contractor
shall sterilise the water again until such requirement is met.
After satisfactory sterilisation, the manholes to the water tank shall be locked and no other work on the
water tank shall be allowed without a written permission from the SO Rep.
Section 10/.....
BLDG17/S09.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 10-1
SECTION 10
RESERVED
Section 11/.....
BLDG17/S10.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 11-1
SECTION 11
NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
11.1 CEMENT
Cement shall be as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".
11.2 AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Clause 4.2 "Aggregates".
11.3 WATER
Water shall be as specified in Clause 4.3 "Water".
11.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Clause 4.5 "Steel Reinforcement" including all subclauses
under it.
11.5 CONCRETE MIX
Unless otherwise specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it or in the
Drawings, the grade of concrete in accordance with Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses
and subclauses under it, shall be used for casting all non-structural concrete items in this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it. It shall be mixed, placed into position, compacted, cured
and protected as specified for structural concrete.
Precast concrete item shall be finished smooth and even, and shall not be installed into position in the
Works until 14 days have elapsed from the date of casting.
11.6 HARDCORE
Hardcore shall be hard, clean and dry stones, bricks, concrete or other approved material broken to
pieces varying from 50mm to 75mm in size. It shall be laid to the required thickness, blinded with sand
or quarry waste, well watered and consolidated with a power rammer or roller to an even surface, to the
11.7 APRONS, PATHS AND PAVED AREAS
Unless otherwise specified, all fillings under unsuspended ground floor slabs, aprons, paths, paved
areas and other areas as indicated shall be 100mm thick hardcore in accordance with Clause 11.6
"Hardcore" laid over well consolidated ground.
Unless otherwise specified, paths and paved areas shall be cast with Grade 25 concrete as specified
in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it and reinforced with one
layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric. The reinforcement shall be fixed at 25mm from the top of the
surface. Aprons shall be fitted with expansion joints at 3m to 4.5m maximum centres as indicated.
Joints along paths and aprons shall be saw-cut when the concrete has an age of at least one day. The
depth of the saw-cut shall be at least 20mm.
Paths and paved areas shall be finished with a minimum of two passes of power trowel without
sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient team of workmen to complete
the work before final set. The paths and paved areas shall be immediately cured for seven days with
approved curing compound or other approved methods.
BLDG17/S11.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 11-2
11.8 PAVING SLABS FOR PATHS AND PAVED AREAS
When paving slabs are specified, they shall be 600mm x 600mm x 50mm thick concrete slabs of
Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate obtained from approved manufacturer. Slabs shall
be laid on a bed of 75mm consolidated quarry waste and layer of sand at least 25mm thick and all joints
shall be grouted and pointed in 1:3 cement mortar.
Inform the SO Rep of the proposed suppliers. Samples shall be submitted for approval before bulk
ordering. Slabs shall be finished rough or patterned to give non-slip surface.
11.9 CONCRETE SURROUND TO INSPECTION CHAMBERS
Leave openings as shown in the structural Drawings in the aprons where manholes are located to
ensure a regular pattern and complete the rendering after manhole frames are placed in position. All
covers shall be aligned with reference to the building line.
11.10 REINFORCED SURFACE DRAINS
Reinforced concrete surface drains shall be constructed, as indicated in the Drawings.
11.11 RAMPS AND STEPS
Unless otherwise specified, reinforced concrete ramps and steps shall be Grade 25 concrete as
specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it, reinforced
with one layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric placed at 25mm from the top.
The concrete shall be finished with a minimum of 2 passes power trowel to ramps or 2 passes of hard
steel trowel to the treads without sprinkling with cement dust, cement grout or water. Ensure a sufficient
team of workmen to finish the works before final set. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven
days with approved curing compound or other approved methods.
11.12 PEDESTRIAN DRAIN CROSSINGS AND CONCRETE BOLLARDS
Drain crossings and reinforced concrete barrier posts shall be constructed to positions, dimensions and
details as shown.
11.13 PRECAST CONCRETE JAMB LINING TO WINDOWS
Precast concrete jambs and sills of windows where shown shall be 50mm thick, 370mm wide
reinforced with No. 10 welded steel fabric cast in 3 separate pieces, each having 2 No. mild steel
holdfasts 40mm x 3mm x 305mm girth, one end cast into section, the other end built into bed joints of
walls.
11.14 HEELSTONES
All door frames shall be fixed in accordance with the Drawings.
Heelstones shall be built up with 1:2 cement mortar mix in two or more operations to a height of
100/150mm as shown. It shall be carried out to the same section as the door frames and bonded into
walls and bedded in strong cement mortar on floor with surface hacked rough.
11.15 CONCRETE COPING
Cast-in-situ concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished in
plastering as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Precast concrete coping shall be to the details as shown in the Drawings and shall be finished smooth
and even.
BLDG17/S11.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 11-3
11.16 CONCRETE LINTELS
Concrete lintels shall be of the sizes and with the reinforcement as shown in the Drawings. Lintels shall
have exposed surfaces finished smooth and in line with the surfaces of adjacent walls.
11.17 SCUPPER CHANNELS TO ACCESS BALCONIES AND STAIRCASE LANDINGS
Scupper channels shall be formed on the floors of access balconies and staircase landings, and shall
be screeded to fall towards waste discharge stacks.
11.18 SLABS OVER CHANNELS
50mm thick precast cover slabs reinforced with No. B5 welded steel fabric shall be provided over
channels and cast at random lengths with 100mm x 25mm hand grips at both ends and housed onto
rebate sides of channels where shown.
11.19 COOKING SLABS AND PREPARATION TABLES
Cooking slabs and preparation tables shall be as specified in Section 29 "Eating House" including all
clauses and subclauses under it.
11.20 CONCRETE INFILL AROUND W.C. STOOLING
The Contractor shall attend to and backfill with 1:3:6 concrete mix around water closets after installation
or form concrete stooling where these are shown and finished as specified in Section 19 "Floor Finishes"
including all clause and subclauses under it.
Section 12/.....
BLDG17/S11.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-1
SECTION 12
BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
12.1 MORTAR MIX FOR BLOCK AND BRICKWORKS
All solid concrete block and clay brickwork shall be laid and compacted with approved prepacked mortar
mix. The prepacked mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Potable water supplied by the PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar.
12.2 SOLID CONCRETE BRICKS OR BLOCKS
All solid concrete blocks shall be machine-pressed and pressure vibrated cement sand blocks
complying with SS 271:1983.
No blocks shall be laid in position until 2 weeks after delivery to the Site.
12.2.1 Laying Of Solid Concrete Blocks
The solid concrete blocks shall be bedded with mortar as specified in Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block
And Brickworks". The work shall be carried up in a uniform manner with no portion raised more than
300mm above the adjacent portions. The corner shall be well bonded, plumbed and all perpends and
quoins kept true and square. Joints shall be of even thickness and shall not exceed 10mm thick. They
shall be raked to a depth of 5mm to 10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plastering.
The bonding bar system shall be as specified in Clause 12.4 "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding" including
all subclauses under it and shall be embedded into the horizontal joints.
90mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be constructed with 290mm/190mm x 90mm x 90mm blocks
and laid in stretcher bond, reinforced with minimum 64mm x 0.5mm thick expanded metal reinforcement
at every third course. The bottom-most expanded metal reinforcement shall not be more than 200mm
above the floor level. Laps of expanded metal reinforcement shall not be less than 100mm.
190mm thick solid concrete blockwall shall be laid in English bond and constructed with 190mm x 90mm
x 90mm blocks.
12.2.2 Plastering
The solid concrete blocks shall be plastered as specified in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all
12.3 CLAY BRICKS
All the clay bricks shall be of modular sizes. They shall be 200mm x 100mm x 100mm and/or 300mm
x 100mm x 100mm.
Average Work Size

Designation
Length Width Depth
200mm x 100mm x 100mm 187.5mm 88.5mm 88.5mm

300mm x 100mm x 100mm 287.5mm 88.5mm 88.5mm
BLDG17/S12.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-2
12.3 CLAY BRICKS (CONT'D)
12.3.1 Laying Of Clay Bricks
All bricks shall be well wetted before use and the top of brickwalls where left off shall be well wetted
before commencement of laying.
Except for facing bricks, all faces of brickwork shall be left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of
5 to 10mm while the mortar is green to form adequate key for plaster.
No four (4) courses of brickwork shall exceed 400mm in height.
12.3.2 Modular Common Clay Bricks
Brickwork as shown to be plastered shall be of modular common bricks. Plastering shall be as specified
in Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All common bricks shall
comply with the following requirements :
Requirement Standard
(a) Width of Brick 88.5mm ±3.5mm
(b) Compressive Strength Minimum 25 N per mm²
(c) Water Absorption Ratio Not more than 15% by weight
(d) Soluble Salt Content Not more than 1% by weight

(e) Efflorescence Slight (Not more than 10% of the brick surface area shall have
salt deposit)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with SS 103:1974. Test reports showing compliance with
the requirements stipulated in the above table shall be submitted to the SO Rep before the common
bricks are delivered to the Site. Tests shall be carried out on common bricks delivered to the Site to
ensure compliance.
12.3.3 Facing Clay Bricks
Unless otherwise specified, all facing clay brick shall be red facing clay bricks. All internal faces of clay
brick walls shall have joints raked off 5 to 10mm to take plastering. External faces shall be raked off,
consolidated and pointed with cement mortar mix of 1 part masonry cement to 3 parts of fine sand by
volume.
Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings during
construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stain, dust and cement mortar
droppings.
12.4 CAVITY WALLS AND BRICK CLADDING
(a) Wall Tie / Bonding Bar System
All brick walls and block walls shall be tied to the surface of reinforced concrete walls or columns
by a wall tie system. The brick walls and block walls shall also be laterally restrained at both
ends by fastening it to reinforced concrete columns with bonding bar system.
The wall tie system shall consist of 2 no. of wall ties held in place by lipped frame. The frame
shall have a pair of stoppers to allow each wall tie a vertical flexibility of 100mm for brick coursing.
The frame and wall tie shall be 2mm and 3mm thick respectively. The fabrication details of the
wall tie system shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Where the fabrication details are
different from those as shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall first obtain approval from the
SO Rep before proceeding any further.
BLDG17/S12.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-3
12.4 CAVITY WALLS AND BRICK CLADDING (CONT'D)
(a) Wall Tie / Bonding Bar System (Cont'd)
The fabrication details of the bonding bar system shall be similar to that of the wall tie system
except that the length of the bonding bar shall be 300mm and whereas that for the wall tie shall
be 70mm for brick cladding construction and 100mm long for cavity wall construction.
All wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be fastened with masonry drive pin to the reinforced
concrete column or wall. The masonry drive pin shall be made of stainless steel AISI Grade 304
and shall have a minimum pull-out strength of 1 kN from the concrete. The wall tie system shall
be spaced horizontally at 600mm centres to centres and so arranged such that individual wall
ties at each horizontally-spaced system are in a staggered manner. The detailed arrangement
of the wall tie system for a typical wall panel is shown in the Drawings.
Individual wall tie shall be embedded 50 mm into the mortar joints and at every fourth course of
the bricks.
The wall tie and bonding bar systems shall be hot-dipped galvanised. The coating mass to at
least 3 randomly selected points for individual wall tie/bonding bar and at least 3 randomly
selected points for lipped frame shall comply with the following:
(i) Wall ties/bonding bars ) Minimum average coating mass shall be 505g per m2
) or 70 microns in accordance with BS EN ISO 1460 ;
(ii) Lipped frame ) and
(iii) Minimum coating mass on individual point shall be 395g per m² or the equivalent thickness
of 55 microns in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.
The hot-dipped galvanised coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the
coating appearance of any galvanised wall tie system is found otherwise, such wall tie system
shall not be used. All galvanised wall tie system shall be stored in a dry and well ventilated place
to prevent the formation of white deposit on them. Small areas of galvanised coating damaged
by cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be made good by the application of at least
two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with minimum 94% of zinc dust, expressed as a
percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least 2 samples of the
galvanised wall tie or bonding bar system to be tested by an accredited laboratory to determine
the coating weight. The coating weight shall be determined using the gravimetric method in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1460. Original certificate of such tests shall be submitted to the SO
Rep for verification.
As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall within 24 hours make available one
elcometer on the Site for measuring the thickness of zinc coating.
(b) Cavity Wall Construction
The damp proof membrane (hereinafter referred to as "DPM" for the purposes of this clause)
shall be extended to 200mm above the floor level as shown in the Drawings. The DPM shall be
the type as specified in Clause 12.8 "Damp-Proof Membrane/Course" and shall be laid in
continuous stretch to the whole width of the wall.
The joints in the facing brickwall shall be completely bedded with mortar (except weep holes).
Polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the manufacturer's instructions shall be applied at joints
where the brickworks abuts reinforced concrete columns and beams as shown in the Drawings.
The erection of the facing brickwall shall be carried out first followed by the external plastering to
beams and columns. Rake off excess mortar from the inner face as the work proceeds to prevent
accumulation of mortar dropping at the base of the cavity.
Provide vertical joints without cement mortar as weep holes at 1st and 2nd course of the facing
brickwall and spaced at 900mm centres to centres in staggered arrangement.
Protect the facing brickwall against dust, contaminated moisture, cement mortar droppings
during construction. The completed facing brickwall surfaces shall be free of stains, dust and
cement mortar droppings.
BLDG17/S12.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-4
12.5 REINFORCEMENT TO SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK AND

CLAY BRICKWORK WALLS AND PARTITIONS
(a) Expanded Galvanised Steel Reinforcement
90mm clay brick walls and solid block walls shall be reinforced with minimum 64 x 0.5mm thick
expanded galvanised steel reinforcement at every 3rd course. The bottom-most expanded metal
reinforcement shall be 200mm above floor level.
Provide a minimum lap of 100mm at reinforcement joints. Embed reinforcement into bed joints
of wall and bonding bars. Blocks shall be built with the coursing and bonding as shown in the
Drawings and blocks correctly bedded.
(b) Bonding Bars System
The bonding bar system shall be as specified in Clause 12.4 "Cavity Walls And Brick Cladding"
12.6 POLYURETHANE SEALANT
Where external solid concrete block walls or brickwalls flush with reinforced concrete columns and
beams, polyurethane sealant with backer rod to the Manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied
at the joints between the walls and the columns and beams as shown in the Drawings. The depth of
sealant shall be 13mm minimum.
12.7 FOAM RUBBER STRIP INFILL
Provide and lay close-cell foam rubber strip infill to the top most joints between the internal walls (clay
brick, or solid concrete block) and the reinforced concrete beam or roof slab of top-most end corner
dwelling units as shown in the Drawings.
When the wall panel exceeds 5m in length, the foam rubber strip infill shall be interrupted by a cement
mortar of 1 in 3 mix by volume infill for a length of 900mm.
12.8 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE
Provide and lay damp-proof course (hereinafter known as "dpc" for the purposes of this clause) to all
walls complying with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m² laid to break joint on a
layer of cement and sand mortar laid immediately under the lowest course of blocks at ground floor
level or at a level 150mm to 220mm above ground level in brickwalls.
Except for bath/wc and kitchen, all other areas including living rooms, bedrooms and household shelters
of the first storey residential units shall be provided with damp-proof membrane. The damp-proof
membrane shall be laid to the underside of RC ground floor slab. The damp-proof membrane shall
comply with BS 6398 Type B (felt fibre base) weighing 3.3 kg per m². The substrate shall be float
finished to receive the damp proof membrane. The damp-proof membrane shall be strip bonded onto
the substrate with rubberised bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's recommendations. All laps shall
be 100mm wide and sealed with bitumen adhesive to the Manufacturer's instructions. Such damp-proof
membrane shall be applied also to the base of shoplets' counter at the first storey as shown in the
Drawings.
The damp-proof course and damp-proof membrane shall conform to the following :
(a) Base Material
(i) The minimum mass per unit area of the base material shall not be less than 0.34 kg per
m².
(ii) The fibre base shall consist of one or more absorbent sheet of felt made from a mixture
of animal and vegetable fibres.
BLDG17/S12.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-5
12.8 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE/COURSE (CONT'D)
(b) Bituminous Materials And Fillers
(i) The minimum mass per unit area of bitumen shall not be less than (1.6 + ½ excess mass
of dpc material) in kg per m².
(ii) The saturating material shall consist of bitumen having penetration within the range of 60
to 230 (inclusive) at 25°C when tested as described in BS 4691.
(iii) The coating material shall be oxidised bitumen stabilised by mineral filler and finished with
a surfacing material. The mass per unit area of mineral filler and surfacing shall be within
(0.9 +  excess mass of dpc material) in kg per m² to (1.5 + ½ of the excess mass of dpc
material) in kg per m².
(iv) When measured as described in BS 4692, the softening point of the finished coating
material shall not exceed the softening point of the oxidised bitumen by more than 20°C.
(v) The mineral filler shall consist of mineral granules or other materials. Not less than 90%
by mass of the filler shall pass a 425 micro metre mesh sieve complying with BS 410 and
not less than 50% of the mass shall pass a 212 micro metre mesh sieve complying with
BS 410.
(vi) The surfacing material shall consist of natural sand, mineral granules or other material
which will prevent adhesion between layers of the finished damp-proof materials in the
roll.
12.9 OPENINGS FOR LIFT DOORS
Leave openings for door to lift well where shown. Build up masonry Works after lift door frames are
fixed by the lift contractor and make good the walls. Floor screed at door shall have fall away from lift
well as shown in the Drawings.
12.10 MORTICES, HOLES, CHASES, ETC
Cut or leave mortices, recesses, holes, chases, grooves, etc. as and when required for bolts, pipes,
bearers, outlets, skirtings, etc.
Generally make good when necessary in cement mortar to match surrounding surfaces to the
12.11 SCAFFOLDING
Provide adequate scaffolding as specified in Section 1 "General Specifications" including all clauses
and subclauses under it to enable masons to work from the external side of external walls to achieve a
high standard of walling and pointing.
12.12 GROOVE LINES TO MASONRY WALLS
Form a grove in the mortar between the masonry walls and the reinforced concrete structures where
the two surfaces are flush.
12.13 70mm THICK SOLID BLOCK INFILL IN BEDROOMS,

LIVING/DINING AND KITCHEN
Where shown, 70mm thick solid block infill shall be constructed with 190mm x 90mm x 70mm thick solid
concrete blocks approved by the SO Rep. Connection of solid block infill to lightweight concrete panel
and to RC column or wall shall be as shown in the Drawings. The solid concrete panel infill shall be
finished with two coats of polymer modified mortar to match with the finished surface of lightweight
concrete panels.
BLDG17/S12.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 12-6
12.14 WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO EXTERNAL FULL HEIGHT

FACING BRICK WALLS
(a) General
The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external full height facing brick walls to test the
water tightness of external wall construction. The external full height facing brick walls shall
include full height facing brick walls directly facing the exterior but exclude walls along common
corridor and balcony parapet walls.
(b) Source of Water
The water used for filling up of reinforced concrete water tank before the sterilisation shall be
used for the water tightness test to the external full height facing brick walls. The Contractor
shall only be allowed to sterilise the water tank after completion of the water tightness test to the
external full height facing brick walls. PUB potable water shall not be used for the water tightness
test except for re-test cases.
(c) Method of Testing
10% of the units per building block with external full height facing brick walls sampled by the
SO Rep shall be tested for water tightness.
Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying
out the water test :
(i) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test

(ii) Procedure of the water test
(iii) Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate
(iv) The method to suspend the nozzle
The nozzle of the water jet shall be fixed at a distance of 1800mm to 2000mm away from the
surface of the external wall and incline at 30 degrees to the external wall as shown in the
Drawings. The capacity of water delivered shall be 300 litres per hour and the duration of testing
shall be 2 hours as shown in the Drawings.
The nozzle shall be placed in such a way that it covers the entire wall panel. Ensure that the
drawing of water from the water tank for testing shall not contaminate the water tank.
The wall panel shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage appears
at the internal surface of the wall panels or the adjacent areas during the spraying and within half
an hour after the completion of the spraying.
(d) Failure Of The Testing
In the event the water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall rectify the dampness and/or
leakage and carry out a second water tightness test. A further 10% of the units per building block
with external full height facing brick walls shall be sampled by the SO Rep for the second water
tightness test.
In the event the second water tightness test fails, the Contractor shall carry out water tightness
test to all external full height facing brick wall panels for the whole building block. The Contractor
shall rectify all leakages and repeat the test until all the external full height facing brick walls have
passed the test. In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any external facing brick
wall that perform unsatisfactorily during the water tightness tests.
Section 13/.....
BLDG17/S12.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-1
SECTION 13
ROOFING
13.1 OVER-RIDING CLAUSE
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this Section including all clauses
and subclauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this Section
including all clauses and subclauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance
Requirement, the Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the
Employer, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect
the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
13.2 CONCRETE ROOF FINISH
The finished concrete roof shall be kept free from mortar droppings and damages by heavy objects
during subsequent work to the roof. The roof shall be inspected by the SO Rep prior to the application
of waterproofing system. Should any area of the roof be found unsatisfactory, render it with 1:3 non-
shrink cement sand screed and approved bonding agent or other approved method at no extra costs to
the Employer.
13.3 METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION SHEET
13.3.1 Profiled Steel Roofing Sheets
Where shown in the Drawings, all profiled metal roofing and fascia sheets shall be 0.53mm "Zincalume
colourbond Kliplok Hi-ten" or 0.53mm coloured "Speed Deck Hi-ten" or other approved in single lengths
for each span. The colour shall be for one side and shall be selected by the SO Rep. Where shown,
provide 300mm upturn to roofing at jack roof. The Contractor shall check whether the design for the
roof can comply with the Manufacturer's specification before the actual laying of the structure.
The metal roof structural plans and fastening details, supported by design calculations, shall be
provided by the Contractor's PE. The design shall satisfy the Performance Requirements for its
intended use and that include withstanding wind load in accordance with CP3 Chapter V. The
Contractor's PE shall submit a Certificate of Supervision not later than two weeks after completion of
the Works, stating that he has carried out such supervision works and is fully satisfied that the Works
have been constructed with such structural plans and fastening details.
The accessories such as ridge capping, fascia capping, valley gutter, longitudinal and transverse
parapet flashings, cap flashing and corner moulds and others shall be of 0.6mm (24 SWG) "Colourbond"
or "Met Roof" or other approved to the shape and profile as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix also
the gutter to the shape, material and profile as shown in the Drawings.
The metal roofing, fascia sheets, flashings, copings, openings, pipe flashings, gutters and others shall
be provided and installed by an approved Specialist who can be an approved manufacturer or the
Manufacturer's duly authorised representative. If installed by the latter, the approved manufacturer
shall provide instruction as to the manner of assembly or installation of the roofing and shall further be
responsible for the work.
BLDG17/S13.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-2
13.3.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet
Provide and lay vertically to fall one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet
over steel purlins. Allow vertical lapping of 50mm minimum. The double sided reflective roof heat
insulation sheet shall be secured to ridge and eave purlins by self-drilling fasteners complete with 38mm
square metal washers.
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for
the metal roof to linkway.
The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite";
or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements :
(a) PSB Product Listing
The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.
(b) Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :

Side 1 (average) : 90% minimum
Side 2 (average) : 90% minimum
(c) Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :
BS 476 Part 7 : Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
- Index of Performance : 12 maximum
- Sub-index : 6 maximum
(d) Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :

Machine Direction : 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction : 4000g minimum
The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at intervals of not more than one metre.
The markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
BLDG17/S13.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-3
13.4 CLAY ROOF TILES AND HEAT INSULATION
13.4.1 Clay Roof Tiles
The clay roof tiles shall be the type as shown in the Drawings or as specified in the Supplementary
Specification. The colour of the roof tile shall be approved by the SO Rep.
(a) Performance Tests
The roofing tiles shall be tested for permeability in accordance with SS 70:1990. The tiles shall
be considered as satisfying the test if no water has dripped from the underside of the tile after
the 6-hour test.
The transverse breaking strength determined in the manner described in SS 70:1990 shall not
be less than the following :
Average - 900 Newtons

Individual - 675 Newtons
The test method for average water absorption percentage of tiles shall be in the manner as
described in SS 70:1990. The average and individual water absorption percentage of tiles shall
not be more than 8.0 percent and 10.0 percent respectively.
(b) Laying And Fixing Of Tiles
The roofing tiles and tile accessories shall be provided and laid by the Manufacturer or by his
duly authorised representative in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
Submit drawings to the SO Rep to show the details of fixing and fastening tiles to roof. Nails and
clips shall be of hot-dip galvanised or of non-ferrous metals. Nails shall be of sufficient length to
penetrate into the battens by a minimum of 20mm, but shall not protrude beyond the depth of
battens.
All tiles shall range straight in courses and vertical edges in line from eave to ridge. Upon
completion of all necessary trades, clean down the roof.
(c) Sealing Of Gaps
Gaps which occur through cutting of tiles at valleys shall be filled with bedding mortar. Any other
gaps shall be sealed by approved means to effectively seal off the gaps.
(d) Tile Accessories
Provide and lay ridge connecting tiles, lip tiles, ridge tiles, verge tiles, socket tiles, eave tiles,
flashing, eave comb, rafter grating, complete set of tile accessories for vent pipes (socket tiles,
pipe and cap/lantern) and other tile accessories to roof to form a complete roof system. Lead
flashing shall be 14.9 kg per m2 minimum and shall form a watertight joint to the profile of the
roofing tile.
13.4.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet
Provide and lay horizontally to fall, one layer approved double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet
over rafters. Allow minimum 75mm for lappings. The insulation sheet shall be nailed or stapled to
wooden rafters.
The double sided reflective roof heat insulation sheet shall be "Parsec Thermo-Brite II"; or "Super Brite";
or other approved double sided roof heat insulation sheet complying with the following requirements.
BLDG17/S13.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 13-4
13.4.2 Reflective Roof Heat Insulation Sheet (Cont'd)
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, reflective roof heat insulation sheet need not be provided for
the clay roof tiles to linkways.
(a) PSB Product Listing
The insulation sheet shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme.
(b) Reflectivity
The reflectivity shall be :

Side 1 (average) - 90% minimum
Side 2 (average) - 90% minimum
(c) Fire Tests
The fire tests shall be :

BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1
BS 476 Part 6
 Index of Performance - 12 maximum
 Sub-index - 6 maximum
(d) Tear Resistance
The tear resistance shall be :

Machine Direction - 4000g minimum
Transverse Direction - 4000g minimum
The entire surface of the insulation sheets shall be evenly laid to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The insulation sheet shall be indelibly marked and imprinted at interval at not more than one metre. The
markings shall show the Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.
13.5 SOUND INSULATION MATERIAL
Where sound insulation material is shown in the Drawings, the insulation material shall be one layer of
50mm thick, 60 to 80 kg per m3 density rockwool or other approved.
Section 14/.....
BLDG17/S13.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-1
SECTION 14
CONCRETE FLAT ROOF
14.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all roofing Works required under the Contract
comprising either one or both of the following systems:
(a) Ferrocement Secondary Roof Slabs;
(b) Complete System of Waterproofing Treatment and Panel Roofing.
These roofing Works shall be carried out by an approved roofing specialist.
Submit the name of the roofing specialist whom the Contractor intends to engage, to the SO Rep for
approval prior to the commencement of the roofing Works.
14.2 FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS
(a) Ferrocement Roof Slabs
(i) Materials - General Standards
(a) Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and

manufacturer and shall comply with SS EN 197.
(b) Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or crushed stone sand complying with SS
EN 12620.
Alternatively, Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) fines of sizes not more than
7mm can be used to replace the natural sand for up to a maximum quantity of 30%
by weight. The RCA fines shall comply to SS EN 12620.
(c) Water
Water used for mixing concrete, washing formwork and curing of concrete shall be
potable water supplied by the PUB.
(d) Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be welded steel fabric complying with SS 561.
(e) Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with BS EN 480 or SS EN 934.
(f) Solid Block Supporting Stool
Concrete block shall comply with SS271.
(ii) Source Of Material
(a) The Welded Mesh Fabric and Fine Mesh Fabric shall be obtained from sources
(b) The RCA shall be obtained from recycling plants listed in the NEA website
BLDG17/S14.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-2
14.2 FERROCEMENT SECONDARY ROOFING WORKS (CONT'D)
(a) Ferrocement Roof Slabs (Cont'd)
(iii) Design Specifications
(a) Slab Dimension
Details of the precast ferrocement slab shall comply with the Drawings. The precast
ferrocement slab shall be 900mm ±3mm long x 600mm ±3mm wide x 30mm ±2mm
thick. The difference in diagonal lengths of each panel shall not be more than
3mm.
Half size panel (450 ±3mm long x 600 ±3mm wide or 900 ±3mm long x 300 ±3mm
wide) shall be used where necessary so as to minimise the cutting of panels.
(b) Mix Design
The precast concrete slab shall be cast from a mix design which complies with the
following requirements :
(1) minimum cement to sand ratio by weight of 1:2
(2) maximum water to cement ratio by weight of 0.45
(3) air dry density of hardened concrete (including steel) not less than 2200 kg
per m³
(4) 28 days average cube strength of three cubes not less than 35 N per mm²
The amount of admixture in the mix design shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction.
Before commencing the manufacture of precast slabs, submit a proposed mix

design to the SO Rep for approval and carry out trial mix if deemed necessary.
.
(c) Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall consist of a layer of square wire mesh 3.25mm (minimum)
at 75mm spacing sandwiched between two layers of square wire mesh 1.5mm
(minimum) at 25mm spacing. The wires shall be galvanized with a zinc coating
weight of 65 g per m² minimum. The wires shall have a minimum proof stress of
300 N per mm².
(d) Finishes
The slab shall be cast on a steel base plate and the top surface shall be trowelled
finish.
(e) Other Properties
(1) For the initial Surface Absorption Test Value (BS1881), the hardened panel
shall have ISAT values less than that stipulated below:
Time (min) 10 30 60
ISAT Value (ml/m²/s) 0.20 0.15 0.1
(2) Carbonation depth of hardened panel before installation shall be less than
3mm.
(3) Cover tolerance shall be such that no more than 3 points per section shall
have a cover measurement of less than 3mm.
(f) Solid Block Supporting Stool
The shape and size of the solid block for supporting the slabs shall be in
accordance with the Drawings.
BLDG17/S14.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-3
(iv) Manufacturing Process
The slab shall be cast using steel base mould. The mortar shall be compacted by vibrators
and the top surface shall be trowelled smooth. All reinforcement shall be adequately
supported with approved spacers.
After setting and demoulding, the slabs shall be neatly stored with easy access and
visibility to every piece. During the first 7 days after casting, the slabs shall be placed on
their edge during transportation.
All panels shall be properly cured. Seek the approval of the SO Rep with respect to the
curing method, duration and facilities prior to the commencement of actual production.
The curing method shall be equivalent to 3 days of moist curing.
Samples of the panels shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of full production, and the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense,
make adjustment to the manufacturing process or equipment if so directed by the SO Rep.
(v) Installation Of Secondary Roofing System
On areas indicated for secondary roofing, the ferrocement panels shall be laid on top of
solid blocks supporting stool in accordance with the Drawings. The ferrocement panels
shall be placed with the off-form surface facing up.
All gaps at the edges of the secondary roof shall be sealed with 13mm x 13mm x 18 BWG
square shape galvanised wire mesh bent to shape. The bent-end (100mm) shall be
sandwiched between the slab and support leaving a gap of 10mm above the roof surface.
Where vent pipes protrude through the ferrocement slabs, openings shall be provided by
carefully sawing the slabs so as not to cause any cracking.
Ensure that the ferrocement slabs are not indiscriminately stack on the main reinforced
concrete roof slab prior to the commencement of installation of ferrocement slabs. The
position for the stacking of the secondary roofing slab shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Stacking shall be allowed only at column positions and shall be limited to one pallet per
column. The number of pieces per pallet shall not be more than the number of pieces
supported by the column as shown in the Drawings. Any Defect in the main roof structure
shall be made good as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
All slabs shall be indelibly marked and imprinted with the manufacturer's name before
delivery to the Site.
(vi) CATV/Lightning Conductor Crossing
Provide 150mm x 150mm (minimum) concrete curb crossing between water tank or lift
motor room and reinforced concrete fascia for cable routing as shown in the Drawings.
(vii) Quality Of Concrete Work
(a) Inspection And Testing
Provide facilities for the SO Rep to inspect the preparation and concreting Works.
On each concreting day, at least one sample shall be taken for the casting of 3
cubes for compressive strength test (size 100 mm cube).
BLDG17/S14.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-4
(vii) Quality Of Concrete Work (Cont'd)
(a) Inspection And Testing (Cont'd)
Samples of welded steel fabric shall be taken at the factory for the following tests :
(1) strength testing and bar size measurement (SS 561);
(2) galvanized coating weight (The method of testing shall be in accordance

with BS EN 10244-2).
Samples of ferrocement roof slab panels shall be taken at the factory and subject
to batch testing at a testing authority approved by the SO Rep, covering the
following aspects:
(1) Dimension measurement of panel;

(2) Cover measurement after cutting the panel;
(3) Density of the panel;
(4) Initial surface absorption test (BS1881);
(5) Carbonation test after cutting the panel.
(b) Sampling Rate
Reinforcement shall be sampled once per contract, 3 bars of each size shall be
taken per sampling as one sample. Ferrocement roof slab panels shall be sampled
at least once per contract, 3 pieces shall be taken per sampling as one sample.
(c) Passing Criteria
Tests shall be conducted on one specimen out of the three sampled. If the
specimen satisfies all requirements, the batch shall be deemed to satisfy the quality
requirements.
If the specimen fails any of the quality requirements, tests shall be conducted on
the remaining two specimens.
If two or more specimens within a sample fail to meet a specific requirement, the
material/product shall be deemed to have failed that specific requirement.
If the average result of the three specimens deviates from the required level by
15% or more, the batch of materials/products is deemed to have failed the specified
requirements.
(b) Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall seal openings in the roof slabs
with non-shrink cementitious mortar or grout of a similar or higher grade to match with those of
the surrounding concrete, after the installation of services by the Contractor and/or other
contractors.
The Contractor shall also provide polyurethane base liquid applied waterproofing membrane
around the service pipes at a radius of 300mm from the centre of the outlet. The application of
the waterproofing membrane shall be carried up the pipes at a minimum height of 100mm from
the floor surface.
BLDG17/S14.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 14-5
(b) Waterproofing Treatment To Pipe Penetration Area (Cont'd)
The surface to receive the membrane shall be free from dust, laitance and ground smooth if
necessary. The application of the membrane shall comply strictly to the recommendations and
instructions of the manufacturer and/or SO Rep.
After allowing for adequate curing, lay cement mortar to form a haunch around the pipes
sufficiently to cover the waterproofing membrane. Adequate measures shall be provided to
protect the membrane from being damaged during the screeding operation.
The mortar mix shall be of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume.
The waterproofing membrane shall comply with the technical performance requirements as
specified in subclause 19.3.2 "Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane".
Section 15/.....
BLDG17/S14.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-1
SECTION 15
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
15.1 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified, all timber delivered to site shall be properly seasoned to moisture content
not exceeding 20%. Timber shall be sawn straight, square, free from sap, shakes, waney edges, large
loose or dead knots, large bores or termite holes and other objectionable Defect.
Timber delivered to site shall be properly stacked under cover to ensure free air circulation round all
faces and minimum warping.
Any timber member or component which the SO Rep does not approve to be used shall be removed
from the site immediately and replaced with new members/components.
Any portion of the timber work that warps, develops shakes or other Defect within the Defects Liability
Period shall be removed. The defective work shall be replaced and rectified.
15.1.1 Structural Use Of Timber
The use of timber for structural purposes shall comply with SS CP7. Timber used shall be Kempas or
Keruing or Chengal or Balau, or other approved species of similar strength grade. Timber shall be
treated with copper/chrome/arsenic preservatives according to SS 72. As far as possible, holes in
timber shall be formed before preservative treatment. Holes and sawn surfaces of treated timber shall
be brushed with two coats of creosote or other approved preservatives. Bolts, nuts, screws, nails,
plates and steel section used for connecting timber shall be galvanised. Steel sections and plates shall
be Grade 43A steel to BS 4360. Bolts and nuts used shall be black bolts to BS 4190.
As soon as is practicable, and prior to the commencement of assembly, all structural timber delivered
to the Site shall be subject to random sampling for testing by PSB testing laboratory accredited under
SINGLAS in accordance with SS CP7. One test shall be done per contract. In the event that the test
fails, the Contractor shall remove the batch of timber from the Site. Another test shall be done on
another batch. If the second test fails, all timber shall be removed. A fresh batch shall then be obtained
from another supplier and tested accordingly.
The sample shall be tested for moisture content and checked for dimensional requirements. The
bending, compression and shear stresses shall also be determined. Preservative penetration and salt
content shall be determined in accordance with SS 72.
All carpentry work shall be sawn unless otherwise specified. All exposed timber shall be sanded to a
smooth finish. Painting where specified shall be in accordance with the instructions of the paint
manufacturer.
15.1.2 Joinery
Unless otherwise specified, all timber for joinery work shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti
Dark Red or Meranti Yellow or other approved.
Timber frames to flush doors, built-in or free standing furniture, walls, partitions, ceilings and others
shall be Kapur or Chengal or Balau or Meranti Dark Red or Meranti Yellow or other approved.
All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrot by planning and sand-papering to an approved finish.
Wrot timber shall be worked to the correct sizes and shapes shown in the Drawings. Sizes of timber
members indicated in the Drawings are nominal and a maximum allowance of 1.5mm shall be permitted
for each wrot face.
Take all measurements for joinery work at the building and verify it with the dimensions shown in the
Drawings. Where discrepancy occurs between the measurement shown in the Drawings and that taken
on the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the confirmation of the SO Rep before proceeding with the
Works.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-2
15.2 PREPARATION OF JOINERY WORK
Place order for all joinery and carpentry items required for the work within one month from the date of
the Letter of Acceptance. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay owing to his failure to place
order in good time. Preparation of joinery work shall commence at the beginning of the contract and
shall proceed until all joinery is ready. These shall then be stacked on the Site and protected from
weather.
15.3 FRAMING TOGETHER
All frames shall be put together with well proportioned and tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged
up tight and fixed with 10mm diameter hardwood pins. Leave pins projecting until immediately before
fixing in position.
Any member that warp, twist, split or develop any other Defect shall be replaced with new ones before
wedging up.
15.4 JOINERY WORK
All joinery work shall be made in strict accordance with detailed Drawings. Joints shall be formed in a
proper workmanlike manner, well proportioned and tight fitting. Dress all exposed surfaces of joinery
work. No nailing shall be permitted in joints for joinery.
Where glue joinery work is likely to come into contact with moisture, the glue shall be waterproof.
15.5 PRIME FRAMES
All joinery requiring painting shall be knotted, stopped and primed before fixing. The backs of all door
and window frames, and other frames in contact with masonry work shall be coated with two coats of
"Solignum", "Presotim" or other approved wood preservative. The preservative shall be allowed to be
thoroughly dried before fixing the frames. All sawcuts shall be similarly treated.
15.6 FIXING OF TIMBER DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES INTO CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Door and window frames shall fit neatly into the masonry openings. All crevices between frames and
walls, beams or other masonry shall be filled up with 1:3 cement sand mortar. Heads of window and
door frames which abut concrete structure shall be fixed with minimum 2 No. 75mm masonry drive pin
"Ramset Nails No. 2330" or other approved to the numbers as shown in the Drawings. The feet of the
door frames shall be fixed according to the details.
All nails shall be completely embedded in the frames and stopped with an approved sealer.
15.7 FIXING OF DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES TO MASONRY
Timber door and window frames shall be secured to masonry walls with 6 No. and 4 No. fishtailed
holdfasts as shown in the Drawings.
The ms holdfasts shall be 25mm x 3mm thick x 230mm girth, one end turned up and drilled and screwed
to frame and the other end tailed and built into the joints of walling.
15.8 FIXING OF TIMBER CILL TO WALL/CONCRETE CILL
Where shown, provide and fix minimum 2 No. of 10mm diameter x 75mm long mild steel dowel bar to
each timber cill. One end of the bar shall project 25mm into the groove of timber cill and the other end
shall be embedded 50mm into the groove of the wall or concrete cills. The grooves shall then be grouted
with cement mortar 1:3 mix. For timber cill longer than 600mm in length, the dowel bar shall be fixed
at maximum 600mm centres.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-3
15.9 TIMBER DOORS
Unless otherwise specified, all doors shall be constructed in accordance with the details as shown in
the Drawings. Sizes are nominal. The types of timber veneer and decorative inlays for main entrance
door, bedroom door and bathroom door shall be approved by the SO Rep. Unless otherwise specified,
plywood panels shall be Grade 2 and of moisture resistant quality. The framing for flush door core shall
be connected with corrugated metal fasteners or other approved joints for connections.
(a) Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be free from stains, adhesive marks, manufacturing faults and other
blemishes liable to impair the finish of the door.
(b) Moisture Content
At the time of delivery, the moisture content of timber for all timber components shall not be less
than 10 percent and not more than 15 percent. However, any difference in the moisture content
of timber shall not exceed 3 percentage units.
(c) Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS
2754.1 : 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed
and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
15.10 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAY
TO FLATS
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it shall
ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purpose of
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the
event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses
under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall do all
necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always to the approval of the SO Rep,
but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's duties or obligations arising under the
Contract.
15.10.2 General
Where in the case of half-hour solid timber veneered doors with decorative inlay to entrances of flats
are shown in the Drawings, provide and install such half-hour fire-rated solid timber veneered doors,
mild steel door frames and ironmongery as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The
complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and FSSD approval.
The dimensions and profiles of the mild steel door frames and door frame fixing shall be as shown in
the Drawings. The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 45mm to fit into the rebate of
the door frame profile. The type and colour of timber veneers and decorative inlays shall to the design
pattern and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
15.10.3 Shop Drawings And Sample
Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings, PSB test certificates and FSSD
approval for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for
the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-4
15.10.4 Ironmongery For Half-Hour Fire Rated Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlay
To Flats
Where specified, provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance
with the following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS
332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall
serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
(a) Schedule
The ironmongery items shall be :
(i) 4 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB; or "Posse" M4L10AB; or

“BLIY”-N27-FIR-US5; or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset
with 5-pin single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn
on the inside) and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish
shall be antique brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner
to clear the metal gate lockset.
(iii) 1 no. Brass rebated parts.
(iv) 2 no. 240mm x 27mm wide antique brass finish flush bolt.
(v) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer with privacy flap and a separate external rim
to prevent easy removal from outside the dwelling unit:
(a) “YTL” 1827AB
(b) “BLIY” 1827AB
(c) “Accord” E3855 AB or other approved
The position and details shall be as shown in the Drawings and to ensure that
the door viewer shall not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate. The privacy
flap shall be separated from the door viewer with a brass washer. The eye
viewer shall come with a separate external rim to prevent easy removal from
outside the dwelling unit.
(vi) 1 no. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action.
(vii) 1 no. Provide stainless steel dust proof socket and cover at base of door.
(b) Keys For Locksets
The lockset shall be provided with 3 sets of keys. These keys shall be handed over to the
Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.
(c) Grade Of Stainless Steel
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.
15.10.5 Certificates
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-
rated solid timber veneered door including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-
hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.10.6 Surfaces
The surfaces of doors shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9 "Timber Doors".
15.10.7 Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause 15.9
"Timber Doors".
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-5
15.10.8 Adhesive
Adhesive used in the manufacture of all timber doors shall comply with the requirements of AS 2754.1
: 1985 and shall develop a Type B bond quality or better. The adhesive shall be mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
15.10.9 Re-cycled Wood Door
Re-cycled wood doors shall be alternative if proposed for use.
All surface material and finish (veneer or laminates), door ironmongery and door accessories as
specified shall be applicable unless otherwise stated.
The re-cycled wood door shall be of re-cycled wood infill and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Workshop drawings shall be submitted for approval before commencement of installation. Unless
otherwise specified, plywood panels shown shall be Grade 2 and of moisture resistant quality.
(a) Surfaces
(b) Adhesive
The door shall attain the following physical properties:
Physical Properties /Performance Requirements

Density Minimum 650 kg/m3
Moisture Content 7-9%
Bending Strength 2.2-2.7kg/cm2
Nail Holding strength Minimum 65N/mm
Accelerated Weathering test:SS5: Part G9 Max 35% Gloss Loss
No de-lamination, blistering or other defects
Re-cycled wood door shall have infill of hard wood fibers, manufactured through high pressure and high
temperature steaming process. The re-cycled wood shall be “LHT Technical Wood” or equivalent, and
shall have acquired the Singapore Environment Council’s Green label.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-6
15.11 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS

TO SWITCH ROOM, PUB SWITCH ROOM, STORE ROOM, PUMP ROOM,
REFUSE ROOM, BULKY REFUSE AREA AND STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF
Contract.
15.11.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to switch rooms, PUB switch rooms, store rooms, pump rooms,
refuse rooms, bulky refuse areas and staircase accesses to main roof are shown in the Drawings,
provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with timber
door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors, timber
door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS 332 : 2007.
and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and approved by the FSSD.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates
and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
15.11.4 Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the following
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS 332 : 2007 and
shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide
to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall be at least half-hour
fire-rated and approved by the FSSD.
(a) Double Leaf
For double leaf doors :
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii) 2 no. Stainless steel locking eyes (4mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.
(iii) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless
steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other approved.
Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(iv) 1 no. "Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock under
master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other approved.
(v) 1 no. "Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.
(vi) 1 no. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other approved.
(vii) 2 no. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
silver finish.
(viii) 1 no. Approved stainless steel door selector.
(ix) 1 no. Provide stainless steel dust proof socket and cover at base of door.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-7
15.11 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS

TO SWITCH ROOM, PUB SWITCH ROOM, STORE ROOM, PUMP ROOM,
REFUSE ROOM, BULKY REFUSE AREA AND STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF (CONT’D)
15.11.4 Ironmongery (Cont'd)
(b) Single Leaf
For single leaf doors :
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii) 2 no. Stainless steel locking eyes (4 mm thick minimum) with hairline finish.
(iii) 1 no. "Abloy" PL 230 padlock under master key; or "Union" 3122/2 PL padlock
under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or
other approved.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC stainless
(v) 1 no. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
silver finish.
(c) Doors To Staircase Accesses To Main Roofs
For each door to staircase accesses to main roofs, in addition to the above-mentioned
ironmongery requirements specified, provide and fix one additional no. of 240mm x 27mm
stainless steel barrel shoot bolt fixed on the door leaf surface facing the roof .
(d) Grade Of Stainless Steel
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.11.6 Surfaces
"Timber Doors".
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-8
15.12 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED

COMPOSITE DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS FOR FLATS
Contract.
15.12.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to service ducts are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall
provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the service ducts
complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished
composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system
complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels and
FSSD approval.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop
drawings, PSB test reports, PSB and FSSD approval for the approval of the SO Rep. Further, a
complete sample shall be installed on Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.12.4 Ironmongery
shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve as a guide
to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
(a) Single Leaf
For single leaf doors:

(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. "Accord" CH-382; or “Forte” H6LR76ES or “BLIY” 70 or "YTL" 85; or other
approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both
sides.
(iii) 1 no. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
bronze colour.
(b) Double Leaf
For double leaf doors:

(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on both
sides.
(iv) 1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box
type).
(v) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box
type).
(vi) 2 no. Approved slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of
bronze colour.
(vii) 1 no. Approved stainless steel door selector.
(viii) 1 no. Provide stainless steel dust proof socket and cover at base of door.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-9

COMPOSITE DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS FOR FLATS (CONT’D)
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-
rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.12.6 Surfaces
"Timber Doors".
15.13 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE

DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all subclauses under it shall
complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred to as "Performance Requirement"). In the
Contract.
15.13.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to MDF Rooms and Telecoms Equipment Rooms are shown in
the Drawings, provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete
with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite
doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system complying with SS
332 : 2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and be listed in PSB Product Listing
Scheme Class 1A or Class 1B.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Provide shop drawings, PSB test certificates
and approval letter from the FSSD for the approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-10

DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM (CONT’D)
15.13.4 Ironmongery For Half Hour Fire Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors
To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room
schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule shall serve
as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required. All ironmongery shall comply
with SS 332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire rated and approved by FSSD.
(a) Double Leaf
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and
thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with
construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn
deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable
of being operated by PBTS master key.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" 150mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.
(v) 1no. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm stainless steel lever action flush bolt or other approved.
(vi) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
(vii) 1 no. Approved stainless steel selector.
(viii) 1 no. Provide stainless steel dust proof socket and cover at base of door.
(b) Single Leaf
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single cylinder and
thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale" 523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with
construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn
deadbolt with construction keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable
of being operated by PBTS master key.
(iv) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be in silver finish.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-11

DOORS TO MDF ROOM AND TELECOMS EQUIPMENT ROOM (CONT’D)
The Contractor shall submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the timber
surface finished composite doors, including timber door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least
half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.13.6 Surfaces
"Timber Doors".
15.13.8 Handover Of MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room
The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for the
changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.

COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE
(a) Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it
has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for
the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance
Requirement"). In the event the Works, goods or materials to be used as specified in this clause
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement,
the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always
to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's
duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
(b) General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with
door frames and ironmongery to protected staircase. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system
complying with SS 332 : 2007. and shall have PSB test certificates and PSB labels and be listed
in PSB PLS Class 1A or Class 1B.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.
(c) Shop Drawings And Sample
Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of
the SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before
full implementation.
(d) Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole work in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS
332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule
shall serve as a guide to the respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-12

COMPOSITE DOORS TO PROTECTED STAIRCASE (CONT’D)
(d) Ironmongery (Cont’d)
Schedule Of Ironmongery
(a) 4 no. Stainless steel door hinges for each door leaf.
(b) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim
line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver finish.
(c) 1 no. "Tiki" PH-20/BB/225 SS; or other approved stainless steel pull handles. The
diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the length shall be approximately 225mm.
(d) 1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be 1.2mm
minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the push plate.
(e) 1 no. "Alsecure" ASI/BC002/SS Ball Catch; or “Tiki” ACCORD RC/002 SS Roller Catch;
or “YTL” BC002 SS Ball Catch or other approved stainless steel Ball Catch or Roller
Catch.
(e) Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep, certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
15.15 FULL PANEL EXTRUDED PVC SWING DOORS
Provide and install extruded PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops, eating houses
and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The extruded PVC doors shall be obtained from
approved manufacturers and shall be made of high impact rigid PVC and shall comply with UL94 (Tests
for flammability of plastic materials) Class 94 V-O. The colour of the PVC doors shall be selected from
the following colour range :
(a) BS 18C31 (f) BS 24C33
(b) BS 10B15 (g) BS 00A05
(c) BS 00A01 (h) BS 04B17
(d) BS 08C33 (i) BS 08C31
(e) BS 06D45 (j) BS 14C31
Provide the above colour samples to the SO Rep for selection of colour of PVC doors.
Ironmongery to all PVC swing doors shall be as specified in subclause 16.4(D) "PVC Swing Doors".
15.16 NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS
TO FLATS, TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER
FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES
TO SERVICE DUCTS
15.16.1 The non fire-rated solid timber veneered entrance doors with decorative inlays to flats, timber veneered
with decorative inlays bedroom doors, timber door with laminate finish to bedroom and bath / wc, timber
flush doors to service ducts and timber flush doors with fixed timber louvres to service ducts shall be
approved by the SO Rep
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-13
15.16 NON FIRE-RATED SOLID TIMBER VENEERED ENTRANCE DOORS WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS
TO FLATS, TIMBER VENEERED WITH DECORATIVE INLAYS BEDROOM DOORS, TIMBER
FLUSH DOORS TO SERVICE DUCTS, TIMBER FLUSH DOORS WITH FIXED TIMBER LOUVRES
TO SERVICE DUCTS (CONT’D)
(a) Surfaces
(b) Adhesive

Accelerated Weathering test:SS5: Part G9 Max 35% Gloss Loss
No de-lamination, blistering or other defects
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-14
15.17 TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BEDROOM
All bedroom doors to be provided to residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors with 0.8mm thick
high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild steel door frames,
door frame fixing and ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall provide “wood grain” laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom
door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed.
The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates
shall be “Wilsonart”, “Nevamar”, “Pionite” or other approved.
15.17.2 Installation
The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as
recommended by the supplier.
All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.
15.17.3 Shop Drawings And Samples
Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete
sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.17.4 Surfaces
The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks,
manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.
“Timber Doors”.
15.17.6 Adhesive
(a) Surfaces
(b) Adhesive
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-15
15.17 TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BEDROOM (CONT’D)
15.17.7 Re-cycled Wood Door (Cont’d)

15.18 TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (FOR 3-
ROOM, 4-ROOM AND 5-ROOM FLATS)
All doors to bath/wc of 3-Room, 4-Room and 5-Room residential units shall be semi-solid timber doors
with 0.8mm thick high pressure plastic laminate finish. Such doors shall be installed complete with mild
steel door frames, door frame fixing and ironmongery.
The thickness of the door panels shall be approximately 38mm to fit into the rebate of the door frame
profile. The Contractor shall provide “wood grain” laminates to match the design pattern of the bedroom
door. The type, pattern and colour of laminate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
check with the SO Rep on the actual quantity of doors to be installed.
The high pressure plastic laminates shall meet or exceed NEMA Publication LD 3-2000. The laminates
shall be “Wilsonart”, “Nevamar”, “Pionite” or other approved.
The plastic laminates should be bonded to 6mm thick marine-ply using adhesives and techniques as
recommended by the supplier.
All exposed edges of the solid timber laminated door shall be finished with 12mm thick nyatoh lipping.
15.18.3 Shop Drawings and Samples
Before commencement of the work, provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete
sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
15.18.4 Surfaces
The surfaces of the laminate and timber door edging shall be free from stains, adhesive marks,
manufacturing faults and other blemishes liable to impair the aesthetics of the door.
“Timber Doors”.
15.18.6 Adhesive
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-16
15.18 TIMBER DOOR WITH HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH TO BATH/WC (FOR 3-ROOM,
4-ROOM AND 5-ROOM FLATS) (CONT’D)
15.18.7 Ironmongery For Semi-Solid Timber Door with Laminate Finish
The ironmongery items for each door leaf of laminated semi-solid timber doors shall be:
(a) 3 nos. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and ball
bearing complete with matching finish screws;
(b) 1 no. “Posse” J4LA630-AB or “YTL” LH630AB or “Accord” J4LA630-AB or “BLIY” LH630AB
or other approved antique brass finish lever handle lockset with emergency release
on the outside and thumb turn on the inside and solid brass lever handles on both
sides.
15.18.8 Rubber Stopper
Provide and fix 25mm diameter by 30 mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of every
bath/wc against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from damaging the
wall tiles. Fix the rubber stopper with stainless steel screw and raw plug.
(a) Surfaces
(b) Adhesive

Wet and Dry cycle test No de-lamination, blistering or other defects
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-17
15.19 TREATMENT OF ROOF TIMBER
All roof timber shall be treated with "Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved wood preservative applied
with brush in two coats. Timber may also be treated with approved pressurised process.
15.20 FIXING OF TIMBER WALL PLATE
Wall plates shall be fixed with 13mm diameter bolts cast 100mm into RC beams spaced at maximum
1.5m centres.
15.21 CEILING
Where shown ceiling material to dwelling units shall be of approved 1200mm x 2400mm x 12mm thick
non-combustible gypsum board. Boards shall be fixed to ceiling joists and noggings with 38mm
galvanised steel clout nails at maximum 150mm centre at all edges and intermediate fixing (along the
centre of the board) of galvanised steel clout nails shall be of maximum 300mm centres. Joints between
boards shall be covered with 38mm x 15mm nominal, moulded wood fillets at edge of wall and open
joint at intermediate joint.
15.22 PLYWOOD WITH LAMINATE PANEL DOOR AND TIMBER DOOR FRAME FOR SERVICE CLOSET
Provide and fix plywood with laminate panel door and door frames to service closet as shown in the
Drawings. The door panel shall be about 17mm thick plywood with light colour laminate finish on both
sides. For each door panel, provide and fix approved nickel plated concealed clip with hydraulic hinges
(self closing). Where the service closet panel door may knock against the wall or door closer, rubber
stopper should be provided or the panel door size be adjusted accordingly.
15.23 PROTECTION OF THE TIMBER DOORS
The factory varnished doors shall be covered by protection materials at the factory before delivered to
the Site. The protection materials shall be adequate to cushion the door surface against impact or
knocking during transportation and installation and to prevent staining. It shall not be removed, unless
instructed by the SO Rep, till the flats are fully completed.
The protection details shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep. The cushioning material for the
door surface could be cardboard, bubblefoam or other suitable materials of adequate thickness. The
materials used, including the adhesion tape, shall not cause staining to the doors in wet and dry
conditions. The design of the protection shall allow the protection material to remain intact during and
after the installation of the lock set and hinges at Site.
15.24 STORAGE OF DOORS
The Contractor shall also be required to provide one storage area per floor for the proper storage of the
main entrance doors, bedroom doors and bath / wc doors. The storage areas shall be kept in a dry
condition. The doors shall not be installed earlier than one month before the handing over inspection,
unless instructed otherwise by the SO Rep. They shall be brought to the various units just prior to their
installations.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-18
15.25 LAMINATED UPVC FOLDING DOOR
Where laminated UPVC folding doors are shown in the drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install
laminated UPVC folding doors with integrated architrave.
The laminated UPVC folding door shall be complete with laminated door frame with integrated
architrave, integrated concealed central folding mechanism, hinges, brass door handles, door catch
and recessed lockset. Lockset mechanism shall be of metal components.
The door shall be able to be folded to one side. No gap shall be visible between the joint of the panels
in the close operation.
The laminated UPVC folding door with UPVC frame, brass handle and metal lockset shall be obtained
from approved suppliers and shall comply with the technical requirements as shown in the table below:
No. of Specimens
Requirement
Test Door Door
(Average Value)
Leaf Frame
1. Durometer Hardness
3 2 70 Minimum
ASTM D2240 (Shore D)
2. Vicat Softening Temperature
2 - 75 Degrees Minimum
ASTM D1525
3. Density/Specific Gravity
3 2 0.65g per cm3 Minimum
ASTM D792 Method A
4. Flammability UL 94 3 - Class 94V-O
5. Chemical Resistance
3
- Detergent
Drops - No stains after 1 week
- Household Bleach
Each
- Urea 6%
6. Water Absorption
ASTM D1037
- After 2 hours 2 - 1.8% Maximum
7. Nail Pull-off Test
ASTM D1037
1.5mm/min crosshead speed 3 - 100N Minimum
Nail-1.7mm diameter/29.3mm
Av length
Laminated surface to be subjected to
600 cycles of water spraying and air
blowing. After 600 cycles, test sample
kept for observation in environment of
8. Wet & Dry Cycle Test 1 1
60-80% relative humidity for 2 weeks.
Sample should show no de-
lamination, blistering or any other kind
of defects
60,000 cycles. Lockset, including
9. Endurance of Lockset 1 - handle shall not be deformed,
damaged or inoperable after test.
Minimum 250N. Sample shall be
10. Compression Load of Handle 1 - tested on Universal Testing Machine
and shall not fail below 250N.
Surface shall withstand a scratch test
Scratch Resistance load of 1000g with no visible signs of
11 1 1
(SS 5: F2) damage.
Provide samples of the specified colour range to the SO Rep for selection of colour and textured pattern
for the UPVC door, door frame, handles and all ironmongery.
The laminates of the door leaf and door frame shall be of the colour Classic OAK or other approved
selection by the SO rep.
The Brass Lockset with Lever Handle with emergency release shall be of Antique Brass finish and
Model No. 313 – AB or other approved.
The Brass Recessed Pull Handle shall be of Antique Brass and Model No : 130 – AB or other approved.
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 15-19
15.26 LAMINATED UPVC SWING DOOR
Where laminated UPVC swing doors are shown in the drawings, the Contractor shall provide and install
laminated UPVC swing doors with integrated architrave.
The laminated UPVC swing door shall be complete with laminated door frame with integrated architrave,
brass door handles, door catch, recessed lockset and stainless steel hinges with antique brass finish.
Lockset mechanism shall be of metal components.
The laminated UPVC swing door with UPVC frame, brass handle and metal lockset shall be obtained
from approved suppliers and shall comply with the technical requirements as shown in the table below:
No. of
Specimens Requirement
Test
Door Door (Average Value)
Leaf Frame
Durometer Hardness
1. 3 2 70 Minimum
Vicat Softening Temperature
2. 2 - 75 Degrees Minimum
ASTM D1525
Density/Specific Gravity
3. 3 2 0.65g per cm3 Minimum
ASTM D792 Method A
4. Flammability UL 94 3 - Class 94V-O
Chemical Resistance
3
- Detergent
5. Drops - No stains after 1 week
- Household Bleach
Each
- Urea 6%
Water Absorption
ASTM D1037
6.
Nail Pull-off Test
ASTM D1037
7. 1.5mm/min crosshead speed 3 - 100N Minimum
Nail-1.7mm diameter/29.3mm
Av length
Laminated surface to be subjected to
600 cycles of water spraying and air
blowing. After 600 cycles, test sample
8. Wet & Dry Cycle Test 1 1 kept for observation in environment of
60-80% relative humidity for 2 weeks.
Sample should show no de-lamination,
blistering or any other kind of defects
60,000 cycles. Lockset, including
9. Endurance of Lockset 1 - handle shall not be deformed, damaged
or inoperable after test.
Minimum 250N.
Sample shall be tested on Universal
10. Compression Load of Handle 1 -
Testing Machine and shall not fail below
250N.
Surface shall withstand a scratch test
Scratch Resistance
11. 1 1 load of 1000g with no visible signs of
(SS 5: F2)
damage.
The laminates of the door leaf and door frame shall be Classic OAK or other approved selection by the
SO Rep. The Contractor shall provide samples of the specified colour range to the SO Rep for selection
of colour and textured pattern for the UPVC door, door frame, handles and all ironmongery.
Section 16/.....
BLDG17/S15.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-1
SECTION 16
IRONMONGERY
16.1 GENERAL
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the
requirements specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it, subject to the
approval of the SO Rep. The brand names specified in the Schedule shall serve as a guide to the
respective quality and profile of ironmongery required.
16.2 FIXING
All ironmongery shall be fixed with stainless steel screws, screw driven and countersunked to form a
sound connection. Screws shall not be hammered into position. If screws are found to be hammered
in, the whole fixture shall be taken down, and refixed in accordance with the Specifications.
16.3 GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL
16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC
Unless specified otherwise the following is the Schedule of Ironmongery for flats, shops, eating houses,
kiosks and services rooms :
(a) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered

Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlay To Flats
Refer to Clause 15.10 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors
With Decorative Inlay To Flats" including all subclauses under it.
(b) Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlays To Flats
(For Non Fire-Rated Doors)
Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for non fire-rated entrance door shall be :
(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws per door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "YTL" N28FIR-AT-US5; or "Accord" M4L10AB or "Posse" M4L10AB; or “BLIY”-

N27-FIR-US5 or other approved mortice lever on backplate lockset with 5-pin
single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside)
and solid brass lever handles on plates on both sides. The finish shall be antique
brass. The lever handle lockset shall be installed in a manner to clear the metal
gate lockset.
(iii) 1 no. 240mm x 27mm wide antique brass finish flush bolt.
(iv) 1 no. 90mm x 27mm wide antique brass finish flush bolt.
.
(v) 1 no. Antique brass finish door viewer with privacy flap and a separate external rim to
prevent easy removal from outside the dwelling unit:
:
(a) “YTL” 1827AB
(b) “BLIY” 1827AB
(c) “Accord” E3855 AB or other approved
The position and details shall be as shown in the Drawings and to ensure that the
door viewer shall not be obstructed by the entrance grille gate. The privacy flap
shall be separated from the door viewer with a brass washer. The eye viewer shall
come with a separate external rim to prevent easy removal from outside the
dwelling unit.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-2
16.4 IRONMONGERY FOR FLATS, SHOPS AND KIOSKS, ETC (CONT'D)
(b) Solid Timber Veneered Entrance Doors With Decorative

Inlays To Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors) (Cont'd)
(vi) 1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder :

(a) "YTL" DH-027; or
(b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or
(c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or
(d) “Forte” H6DH75ES; or
(e) other approved.
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably
be closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder
shall be in antique brass finish.
(c) Timber Veneered Bedroom Doors With Decorative Inlays
Unless specified otherwise, the ironmongery items for each door leaf of timber veneered doors
with decorative inlays shall be :
(i) 3 no. 102mm x 76mm x 3mm solid brass hinges (satin finish) with flat button tip and
ball bearing complete with matching finish screws
(ii) 1 no. “Posse” J4LA600-AB or “YTL” LH600AB or “Accord” J4LA600-AB or “BLIY”

LH610AB or other approved antique brass finish lever handle lockset with 5-pin
single cylinder and thumb turn (key on the outside and thumb turn on the inside)
and solid brass lever handles on both sides. The finish shall be in antique brass.
(iii) 1 no. Solid brass magnetic door holder :
(a) "YTL" DH-027; or

(b) "Accord" DH-027AB; or
(c) "Nikon" DH-027AB; or
(d) “Forte” H6DH75ES or
(e) other approved
The door holder shall be placed at the centre of bottom rail and its position shall preferably be
closer to the edge of the door subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The door holder shall be
in antique brass finish.
(d) PVC Swing Doors
For each door leaf of PVC swing doors shown with mild steel door frame :
(i) 3 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges
(ii) 1 no. Privacy knobset with emergency release :

(a) "Goal" US 4E; or
(b) "Accord" C 130SS; or
(c) "Tesa" 2503 CM; or
(d) "Lucky" Model 1030; or
(e) "Posse" 130-SS; or other approved
For each door leaf of PVC swing doors to toilet of kiosks, lock-up shops, shops and eating houses
shown without door frame :
(i) 2 no. 2.64mm thick (±0.14mm) 5052 aluminium alloy hinge and cotter pin 0.8mm thick
x 25mm long nylon bush.
(ii) 1 no. 80mm brass cabin hook and eye.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-3
(e) Swing Door To Service Balcony And Courtyard
Provide and fix to each door leaf of swing door to service balcony and courtyard, the following
ironmongery :
(i) 2 no. 122mm x 96mm x 3mm thick or 3 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm thick stainless
steel butt hinges in black or bronze colour finish. Tolerance for thickness of
stainless steel hinges shall be ±0.2mm.
(ii) 1 no. "Faultless" C8903 or "Lucky" Model 1711 or "Posse" C111AZ or other approved
double cylinder cylindrical lockset with key both sides. The lockset shall be in
bronze colour finish.
(f) Door Stopper To Bath/W.C., Service Balcony And Courtyard
Provide and fix a 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the glazed wall tile surface of
every bath / w.c. against which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from
damaging the wall tile. Fixing shall be with 25mm stainless steel or non corrosive screw and
rawl plug. Provide and fix similar 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper for swing door
to service balcony and to the wall surface of courtyard.
(g) Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances
Refer to Clause 18.24 "Metal Grille Gates To Flat Entrances".
(h) Rear Door Of Shops/Eating Houses
For each door leaf of rear doors of shops/eating houses :
(i) 3 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges
(ii) 1 no. Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset :
(a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles;
or
(b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles;
or
(c) “Accord” 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with brass chrome plated or stainless steel

lever handles; or
(d) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles;

or other approved.
(iii) 1 no. 90mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt.
(iv) 1 no. 240mm x 27mm stainless steel square shoot bolt.
(v) 1 no. 100mm stainless steel hook and eye.
(i) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surfaced Finished Composite Doors To Switch Room,
PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area,
And Staircase Access To Main Roof
Refer to Clause 15.11 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To
Switch Room, PUB Switch Room, Store Room, Pump Room, Refuse Room, Bulky Refuse Area
And Staircase Access To Main Roof" including all subclauses under it.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-4
(j) Ironmongery For Doors (Non Fire-Rated) To PUB Switch Room,

Switch Room, Pump Room, Store Room And Bulky Refuse Area
For doors (non-fire rated) to PUB switch rooms, switch rooms, pump rooms, store rooms and
bulky refuse areas, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule :
(a) Double Leaf
For double leaf :
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm
±0.2mm for each door leaf.
under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other
approved.
(iv) 1 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC
stainless steel cup handle; or "YTL-75" stainless steel cup handle; or other
approved. Fixing screws shall not be exposed on the external.
(v) 1 no. "Nikon" 225mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(vi) 1 no. "Nikon 150mm x 25mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt; or other
approved.
(b) Single Leaf
For single leaf :
±0.2mm.
under master key; or "Yale" 110.50 padlock under master key; or other
approved.
(k) Doors To MDF Room And Telecoms Equipment Room (Non-Fire Rated)
For doors (non-fire rated) to MDF rooms and Telecoms Equipment rooms, provide and fix :
(a) Double Leaf
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8 mm
± 0.2mm for each door leaf.
(ii) 2 no. 240mm x 27mm width AISI grade 304 stainless steel high barrel shoot
bolt.
(iii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single
cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale"
523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-
US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction
keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated
by PBTS master key.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-5
(k) (a) Double Leaf(Cont'd)
(b) Single Leaf
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8 mm
± 0.2mm for each door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "Abloy" deadlock 2295C complete with 4195 lockcase, 5781k single
cylinder and thumbturn and with construction keys; or "Yale"
523.50/214.62f26 deadbolt with construction keys; or "Falcon" D441-
US26D/70 satin chrome cylinder/thumbturn deadbolt with construction
keys; or other approved. The lockset shall be capable of being operated
by PBTS master key.
(iii) 2 no. "Nikon" C1 76mm x 76mm stainless steel cup handle; or "Goal" GC
The Contractor shall attend the handover of the MDF Room and Telecoms Equipment Room for
the changing of lockset from construction keys to master keys.
(l) Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors

To Service Ducts For Flats
Refer to Clause 15.12 "Half-Hour Fire-Rated Timber Surface Finished Composite Doors To
Service Ducts For Flats" including all subclauses under it.
(m) Ironmongery For Non-Fire Rated Doors To Service Ducts For Flats
For non-fire rated doors to service ducts for flats, provide and fix all ironmongery in accordance
with the following :
(a) Single Leaf
±0.2mm.
approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on
both sides
(b) Double Leaf
±0.2mm for each door leaf.
approved stainless steel cup handles passage latch with cup handle on
both sides.
(iv) 1 no. 200 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).
(v) 1 no. 300 mm x 20 mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish
(box type).
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-6
(n) Refuse Chute Aluminium Inspection Cover
For each door leaf of refuse chute aluminium inspection covers :
(i) 3 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.5mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. Stout hasp and staple of approved design.
(iii) 1 no. Padlock "Union" 3104-50mm brass or "Yale" 110-30 or "Abloy" PL 220 shackle
or other approved; with master key.
(o) Access Trap Door To Roof
For each door leaf of access trap doors to roofs :
(i) 1 no. Stout hasp and staple.
(ii) 1 no. Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or other approved.
(p) Doors To Electrical Substation
For doors to electrical substations, refer to the Drawings.
(q) Doors To Toilet Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
For each door leaf of toilet doors of utilities centres/dustbin compounds :
(ii) 1 no. Private knobset with emergency release :

(a) “Accord” C130; or
(b) "Goal" US 4E; or
(c) "Tesa" 2503cm; or
(d) "Lucky" Model No. 1030; or
(e) "Posse" 130; or other approved
(iii) 1 no. 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper to the wall surface against
which the door opens in a position effective in stopping the door from
damaging the wall tile.
(r) Doors To Store Of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
For each door leaf of doors of stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds :
(ii) 1 no. 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset :
(a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever handles;
or
(b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle; or
(c) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever handles;

or
(d) “Accord” 0706PZ/1406/1591SS" with stainless steel or brass chrome

plated handles; or other approved.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-7
(s) Doors To Fuel Store of Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
For doors to fuel stores to utilities centres/dustbin compounds :
(a) Single Leaf Door
Ironmongery shall be similar to sub-clause 16.4(S) "Doors To Store Of Utilities

Centre/Dustbin Compound".
(b) Double Leaf Door
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) x 1.8mm ±0.2mm thick stainless steel butt
hinges for each door.
(ii) 1 no. Rebated 5 pin double cylinder mortice lockset :
(a) "Tesa" R300 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel lever
handles; or
(b) "Abloy" 2390 with brass chrome plated or stainless steel handle;
or
(c) "Yale" 138L/520.50/210.62 with brass chrome plated lever

handles;
(d) “Accord” 0706PZ/1406/1591SS with stainless steel or brass chrome

plated handles; or other approved.
(iii) 2 no. 240mm x 27mm wide stainless steel barrel shoot bolt.
(t) Trap Door To Roof Of Booster Pump Room
For each door leaf of trap doors to roofs of booster pump rooms :
(i) 1 no. Stout hasp and staple.
(ii) 1 no. Padlock "Union" 3142 or "Yale" 110.60 or "Abloy" PL 3030; or

other approved.
(u) Louvred Door To Staircase Access To Main Roof
For each door leaf of louvred doors to staircase accesses to main roofs :
(i) 3 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel AISI grade 304 butt hinges,
thickness 1.7mm ±0.2mm
(ii) 1 no. Passage Knob Latchset :

(a) “Accord” 182; or
(b) "Goal" US 1E; or
(c) "Lucky" Model 1082; or
(d) "Tesa" 2505CM; or
(e) "Posse" 182-SS; or other approved.
(v) Escape Door At Consumer Switch Room

(Where The Length Of Switchroom Exceeds 6.5m)
Where escape door at the consumer switchroom is shown in the Drawings, provide and fix the
ironmongery as follows :
For each door leaf :
(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel AISI grade 304 butt hinges.
(ii) 1 no. "Accord 376"; or other approved single panic bolt. The panic bolt shall be of
aluminium die cast body with extruded aluminium guides, steel tube shoots
and cross bars and shall be in silver colour finish.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-8
(w) Ironmongery For Doors To Lift Machine Rooms
For doors to lift machine rooms, provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the followlng
schedule :
(i) 4 no. 100mm x 70mm (minimum) stainless steel butt hinges, thickness 1.8mm ±
0.2mm
(ii) 1no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or YTL-N28-FIR-AT-US32D or “BLIY” N-27-FIR

US32D or other approved half cylinder mortice lockset with stainless steel
lever handles on rose or on back plate on both sides.. It shall comply with
CP2:2000. The door shall be openable from the outside only by the use of a
key and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room.
(iii) 1no. "Dorma" TS 73 or "Tiki" 90 series or "NHN" model 1082 or "New Star" 5002 or
"Accord" 93 or "YTL" 800 or "Union" or other approved slim line door closer
with cushioned back checking action.
16.5 KEYS FOR LOCKSETS
Unless otherwise specified, 3 sets of keys shall be provided for each lockset provided and installed.
These keys shall be handed over to the Employer upon Substantial Completion of the Works.
16.6 LOCKSETS TO PUMP ROOM, STORE ROOM (FIRST STOREY),

BULKY REFUSE AREA, REFUSE ROOM, SWITCH ROOM,
LIFT MOTOR ROOM, STAIRCASE ACCESS TO MAIN ROOF
The locksets to pump rooms, store rooms (first storey), bulky refuse areas, refuse rooms, switch rooms,
lift motor rooms and staircase accesses to main roofs shall be provided under the master key and key-
aliked system.
16.7 MASTER KEY FOR PUB
Padlocks and locks provided to the doors of all rooms which the PUB and/or PowerGrid and/or SPSL
need access into shall be under one of the following master key series :
(a) "Abloy" - MK911047; or
(b) "Union" - G1HBG; or
(c) "Yale" MK48; or other approved
16.8 DOOR STOPPER TO HOUSEHOLD SHELTER
Provide and fix one number 25mm diameter by 20mm thick rubber stopper for every household shelter.
The stopper shall be fixed to the wall surface of household shelter against which the door opens in a
position effective in stopping the door handle from damaging the wall surface. Fixing shall be with 25mm
stainless steel or non corrosive screw and raw plug.
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 16-9
16.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCKSET
The Lockset for the flats shall comply with the following performance requirements when subjected to
the specified laboratory testing.
Door Type Properties / Tests Standard / Test Requirements

Method
Less than 0.1% corrosion

Salt spray test for 96
ASTM B117 Blister size no. 6, few to no.
hours (coating)
10 on surface
Less than 0.03% corrosion

Humidity test fro 240
ASTM D2247 Blister size no. 8, few to no.
hours (coating)
10 on surface
Main entrance /
Bedroom / Cross-cut adhesion
Bathroom ASTM D3359 5B
(coating)
0.01M HCL ASTM

Chemical resistance No colour change and no
D1308, spot method
for 12 hours (coating) blistering
(open)
Must be engraved and

Brand name
visible
Deadbolt endurance HDB method (by Deadbolt shall not be
test operating thumb damaged or inoperable
100,000 cycles turn) after test.
Main Entrance Latch shall not be jammed,
Door Cyclic endurance test
HDB method (by damaged, or inoperable
on lock lever
operating lever after test.
handle/latch
handle) Lever handle shall not sag
300,000 cycles
after test
Cyclic endurance test
HDB method (by Latch shall not be jammed,
on lock lever
Bathroom Door operating lever damaged, or inoperable
handle/latch
handle) after test.
150,000 cycles
Section 17/.....
BLDG17/S16.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-1
SECTION 17
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
17.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Steel of minimum grade S275 steel to BS EN 10025 and BS EN 10210 shall be used for all structural
members unless otherwise stated. The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and tolerance of all rolled
shape, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washers, studs, welds
and electrodes used and their design, installation and applications shall conform to the requirements of
the latest BS 5950 / SS EN 1993, SS EN 1994 and BE EN 1090-2. Unless indicated otherwise in the
Drawings, hot finished structural steel sections shall be used.
All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Defective, substandard or undersized members shall be rejected.
17.2 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Only qualified welders shall be allowed to perform welding work for structural steelwork. Provide the
SO Rep with the names of the welders to be employed on the steelwork, together with certification that
each of these welders has passed qualification tests conducted by competent authorities using Welder
Procedures covered in BS EN 287 or their equivalent. Welders shall have passed the qualification test
within the preceding 12-month period.
If required by the SO Rep, submit test samples made by the welders to be employed. Arrange for
any welder to re-take the test at the Contractor's own costs and expenses when, in the opinion
of the SO Rep, the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder.
Re-certification of the welder shall be made to the SO Rep only after the welder has taken and passed
the required test.
The SO Rep may require welded joints to be tested with radiographic or other suitable methods at the
Contractor's costs and expenses. Joints with defective welds shall be rejected.
Should any two weld positions from the work of any welder show defective welds, such welder shall be
permanently removed from the work.
17.3 FABRICATION
Check all dimensions in the Drawings before fabrication and any discrepancy shall be reported to the
SO Rep. Steelwork shall be fabricated to the required details as shown in the Drawings with sound
workmanship acceptable by the SO Rep. All steel members shall be cut to exact lengths and with ends
finished true and square so as to provide a good bed or joint.
Structural steelwork shall be fabricated and assembled in the shop to the greatest extent possible and
shall be performed by qualified mechanics or welders skilled in the type of work required.
Shearing, chipping, punching and welding of members shall be done carefully and accurately in
accordance with the Drawings. All burrs and shavings produced by the drilling or reaming operation
shall be removed.
Stiffeners shall be fitted neatly and tightly against flanges with ends milled or ground to secure an even
and full bearing against the flange angles. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with
the flanges.
Bearing surface shall be planed to true bed and abutting surfaces be closely fitted to ensure full bearing
and close contact between assembled members.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed finished surfaces shall be straight and smooth. Exposed welds
shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates, precisely cut, drilled or punched at right angles
to the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Holes shall be cleaned of
burrs or rough edges. Holes for bolts shall not exceed the external diameter of bolts by more than
1.5mm and shall be well aligned to permit bolts to be freely placed in position. Oversized or misaligned
bolt holes shall be rejected.
BLDG17/S17.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-2
17.4 STEELWORK DELIVERED TO SITE
Members delivered to site shall be straight, free from warping, twisting, distortion and accidental
damages. Defective and substandard members shall be rejected and removed from the Site.
All parts of steelwork shall be distinctly marked according to the marking as shown in the Drawings.
Care shall be taken at all times in unloading, handling, stacking and storing of steelwork to avoid
bending, twisting or otherwise distorting the steel members.
Contractor shall make available suitable measuring instruments to verify the dimensions of steel
members at site, such as, but not limited to, Vernier calliper and ultrasonic thickness gauges namely
Elcometer or its equivalent as and when required by the SO Rep.
17.5 ERECTION PROCEDURE
The method and sequence of erection of structural steelwork shall be duly approved by the SO Rep.
The presence of any temporary materials, falsework, braces, etc, required to ensure stability and safety
of structures shall be included in the proposed erection and shall be subsequently provided during
erection.
17.6 FIELD INSTALLATION
Field installation shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Shop fabricated members subjected to
possible damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent distortions or other damages. After
assembly, the various members forming part of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and
adjusted accurately before being fastened.
Splicing of members shall be permitted only where indicated in the Drawings. Fastening of splices of
compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into
close contact.
Bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members
are assembled and re-primed where exposed.
Drift pins may be used only to bring together the structural parts and shall not be used in such a manner
as to distort or damage the metal.
Member installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion by pressure
of concrete. Bracing shall be checked and maintained during concreting operation.
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors shall be strictly prohibited under
any circumstance.
17.7 ERECTION
Provide for all tools, machinery, cranage, equipment, falsework, temporary braces and everything
necessary for the proper erection of the steelwork. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for
the work and the workers.
Assembled frames or structures shall be neatly and carefully hoisted into position, securely and
sufficiently bolted or tack-welded and temporarily braced as required so as to make adequate provision
for all erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment and its operation.
Bracing members, either temporary or permanent, shall be provided as required as soon as practicable
and left in place as long as they are required for safety and stability.
No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, welded or permanently connected until the whole or
a major section of the steelwork is erected, checked for alignment, level, plumb and correctness and
Permanent connection shall be carried out and completed strictly in accordance with the Drawings as
soon as practicable after the approval of the SO Rep, with due care being taken not to interfere with the
existing steelwork in any way.
BLDG17/S17.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-3
17.7 ERECTION (CONT’D)
Safe working platform and accesses shall be provided for erection, welding, bolting and inspection
purposes. The HDB's Construction Safety Management Section shall be consulted on the safety
features of the platform.
Care shall be taken to remove any temporary braces, erection clips, etc to avoid any unsightliness upon
removal. All tack welds shall be ground smooth and holes shall be filled with weld metal and
smoothened by grinding. All tubular members shall be sealed with cover plate to prevent access of
moisture to the inside of the members.
Immediately upon erection, all abraded surfaces previously shop-primed shall be touched up with
approved priming paint.
Erection of roofing materials, if any, can only be proceeded when all steelwork for a block is completed
and sag rod, if any, is effectively installed in purlins and rigidly tied back to the apex of the roof.
17.8 STANCHION BASES
Stanchion bases and bearing plates as provided under columns, beams and girders or resting walls or
footing shall be fabricated, installed and set accurately to the required level alignment with full bearing
contact on support in accordance with the Drawings.
Hold down bolts shall be cast together with reinforced concrete support. They shall be correctly placed
and firmly held in position by template and accurately checked for level, alignment and centering before
concreting. The bolts shall be protected to ensure that they are not subsequently bent, distorted or
tampered with.
Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and aligned on levelling screws, steel wedges or
shims to correct elevations. After the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned
and the anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing area under the plates shall be set accurately using
approved type of high-strength non-shrink grout in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
Surface to receive grout shall be cleaned and moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed.
Exposed surfaces of grout shall be moist cured for 7 days. Wedges and shims shall be cut-off, flush
with edge of column base and bearing plates and shall be left in place.
17.9 BOLTING
All structural bolts as shown in the Drawings prefixed with the letter 'M' for metric series shall conform
with the following British Standards :
Type of Bolt Abbreviation Standards

Black Bolt Black BS 4190
High Strength Bolt HS BS 3692
High Strength Friction Grip Bolt HSFG SS EN 1993-1-8
Nuts and washers of the quality and strength compatible to the type of bolts specified shall be used.
All joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale,
dust, grease, paint and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the members.
All HSFG Bolts shall be installed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions.
All bolts shall be well screwed tight with at least one clear thread projecting beyond the nut when
tightened up. Care shall be taken in getting the nut as tight as possible without stripping the thread. If
after tightening, a nut or bolt is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer shall be discarded.
Where another face of the bolted parts has a slope, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to
compensate for lack of parallelism.
Bolts and nuts in a group of bolts shall be tightened in a staggered sequence from center outwards.
Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any
interposed compressible material.
BLDG17/S17.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-4
17.10 WELDING
Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS EN 1011 and by qualified welders
to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or
specified.
Electrodes shall be of approved type complying with BS EN ISO 2560 and shall be kept in a dry store
in unbroken packets.
Surface and edge of metal to be welded shall be accurately prepared in accordance with BS EN 1011
and shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material that would
prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding is being done.
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the welding term and symbols shown in the Drawings
and conform with BS 499. For unspecified welding, butt weld shall be full penetration weld with size
equal to the thickness of the members to be butt joined and fillet weld shall be 6mm fillet weld all around
the member.
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable. The effective throat
thickness of fillet weld shall not be less than those specified in the Drawings and all weld terminating at
the ends or sides of members shall be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not
less than twice the size of the weld.
Butt weld shall have correct weld preparation for the particular type of weld. The finished butt weld shall
be proud of the surface of the parent material by an amount not exceeding 10% of the throat thickness
of the weld and subsequently dressed off by grinding.
Fillet and butt welds shall be made with such a number of passes as may be necessary to ensure sound
thoroughly fused joints and with each deposit not exceeding 3mm of weld for each pass. Preceding
layers shall be thoroughly cleaned, wire-brushed to remove scale, slag before succeeding layers are
placed. Welds exposed in finished work shall be ground, dressed smooth and flush with adjacent
surface.
Welding work shall be carried out on a flat position whenever practicable. In assembling and jointing
parts of a structure, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to minimize shrinkage
stresses and needless distortion.
17.11 PAINTING (STRUCTURAL STEELWORK)
All steel area to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped, wire-brushed, free from dust, rust and
scale and shall be primed with a coat of lead and chromate free primer before erection, except for
galvanised steel area.
All galvanised steel area to be painted shall first be given one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer,
then primed with one coat of lead and chromate free primer of approved quality before erection.
Where surface treatment is specified in the Drawings, blast clean the surface to BS 7079, application
of one coat of zinc-rich epoxy primer to the Manufacturer's specification within 4 hours of blast cleaning
and two coats of Zinc Phosphate Priming Paint, one coat in the Workshop and one coat on the Site, to
the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Submit details of surface treatment to the SO Rep at least two weeks
before blast cleaning.
Steel members to be encased in concrete, connecting surfaces using HSFG Bolts and areas to be
welded shall be free from scale, dust, grease and shall not be painted.
After completion of erection, the steelwork shall be painted with at least one undercoat and one finishing
coat of the types and colours approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S17.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-5
17.12 PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS
Galvanised structural steel members and components as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip
galvanised to BS EN ISO1461. The Contractor shall obtain galvanising treatment service for structural
steel members and components only from those Approved Galvanisers Listed in HDB Materials List.
The coating weight of zinc shall conform with Table D.1 of BS EN ISO1461. For steel with diameter of
6mm and above, the mean coating (minimum) mass shall be 610g per m2 and the local coating
(minimum) mass shall be 505g per m2. For steel between 1mm and 5mm thick, the coating mass shall
be complied with the following coating minimum masses.
Average Coating Mass Minimum Permissible Value

Thickness Of Steel
g per m2 (minimum) (g per m2)
6mm thick and over 610 505
Under 6mm but not less than 3mm 505 395
Under 3mm but not less than 1.5mm 395 325
Under 3mm 325 250
The coating shall be continuous, smooth and free from flux stains. If the coating on the galvanised steel
member does not comply with the requirements as specified, the galvanised steel member shall be
rejected.
Galvanising shall be followed by chromating as a post treatment. Store all galvanised members and
components in a dry and well ventilated place to prevent the formation of white rust on them. Small
areas of galvanised coating damaged by welding, cutting or by excessively rough treatment shall be
made good by the application of at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint with a minimum of
85% zinc dust, expressed as a percentage by weight of the solid content of the paint.
Upon the instruction of the SO Rep, the Contractor shall send at least two samples of the galvanised
steel member or component to be tested by a competent authority to determine the coating weight. The
coating weight shall be determined by the stripping test in accordance with BS EN ISO1461. Certificates
of such tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
All structural steelwork and materials are subjected to inspection and testing by the SO Rep in shop
and field. The number and frequency of tests shall be determined by the SO Rep and at least 10% of
the welded joints shall be tested. However, such test and inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for furnishing satisfactory materials and work. The SO Rep reserves the right to reject
steel materials and/or workmanship which do not conform with the Specifications. The acceptance of
the SO Rep of any materials and work shall not prevent their rejection later if Defect are discovered.
The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities and bear all costs and expenses of everything
necessary for the SO Rep to inspect and test any part of the steelwork and measurement of stresses
and deflection, if required.
Any work shown to be defective shall be removed or rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep at the
Contractor's own costs and expenses. Notwithstanding the acceptance by the SO Rep of the rectified
work, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the soundness of the structure arising out of poor
workmanship and defective work.
The testing and inspection of welding shall conform to the following British Standards :
Type of Test Standard
Magnetic particle flaw detection test BS 6072

Penetrant flaw detection test BS EN ISO 3452-1
Ultrasonic examinations BS EN ISO 17640
Radiographic examinations BS EN ISO 17636-2
All required tests of structural steelwork and material shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory
under the Singapore laboratory Accredited Scheme of Singapore Accreditation Council.
BLDG17/S17.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 17-6
17.13 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
Where the Contractor is required to design for the structural steel Works, the contractor shall engage a
Professional Engineer (PE) to design and supervise such Works.
The Contractor shall ensure that his PE engaged consider and comply with the plan submission and
minimum design requirements.
17.13.1 Plan Submission
The contractor shall ensure his PE comply with the following :
(a) submit a complete design calculations and structural plans of his PE to HDB, Project
Development & Management Section 1 (C&S) for clearance.
(b) apply the permit to carry out Works prior to commencement of the affected Works.
(c) Upon completion of the building work, submit a set of as-built tracing and digital in pdf or other
approved format.
17.13.2 Technical Requirements
Should any external claddings/features inclusive of those at and above roof level be supported by the
main building structures, the submission shall be accompanied with a letter from the relevant Qualified
Person (QP) of the main building structures that certify adequacy of the building structures to support
external claddings/features designed by the contractor's PE.
In addition to comply with the required building code and standard, the design for all steel works shall
meet the following minimum requirements :
(a) the gauge thickness of purlins shall not be less than 3mm.
(b) the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 4mm for steel structures at lower than 4 -storey.
(c) the gauge thickness of steel members shall be 6mm or greater for steel structures at 4-strorey
and higher.
(d) Hold down bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanised, electroplated
or of stainless steel grade 316 satisfying acceptable standard and code of practice.
(e) Use open steel section, wherever possible, to facilitate direct connection of cladding, roofing
sheet and other architectural panels onto this steel section.
(f) Should the steel hollow section be used, there shall be no drilling through it for connection of
cladding, roofing sheet and other architectural panels. Necessary steel connecting plates or cleat
angles shall be used and welded up to steel hollow sections for securing the cladding, roofing
sheet and other metal panels.
Section 18/.....
BLDG17/S17.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-1
SECTION 18
METALWORK
18.1 GRADE OF STAINLESS STEEL
Unless as specified otherwise, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304.
18.2 NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM
Unless specified otherwise all aluminium shall be natural anodised and the anodic coating shall be
minimum 15 microns.
18.3 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING
18.3.1 General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and
others as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all
aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).
18.3.2 Performance
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop
drawings to ensure compliance with SS 212:2007.
18.3.3 Material
(a) Aluminium Alloy
All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy
6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS 212:2007.
(b) Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the fabrication
of the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN 10088. All
screws (except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other accessories which are
exposed shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix stainless steel friction
hinges shall be approved stainless steel screws precoated with epoxy coating as shown in the
Drawings.
(c) Rollers, Guides And Stoppers
Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides
and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and the colour of exposed parts shall be
black or bronze or other approved matching colour.
(d) Joints & Gaskets
All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of
gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212:2007..
Gaskets shall be neoprene or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-2
18.3 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING (CONT'D)
18.3.3 Material (Cont'd)
(e) Safety Device
Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them
from jumping track and shall be in black or bronze colour or other approved matching colour.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent window sashes from being inadvertently forced out
from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of safety
lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved material
(2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this function.
The dimension tolerance for gap between the safety device and sliding panel shall comply with
SS 212:2007. The sliding window shall pass the Jumping Track Test specified in SS 212:2007.
(f) Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene diene
monomer (EPDM).
(g) Hardware
For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or
316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top hung
windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. For casement with integrated
top hung window located directly above WC at bathroom, the cam handle shall be integrated
with a key lock set. Friction stays shall be of stainless steel type 304 (minimum). All crescent
locks and handles shall be finished in black or other approved matching colour.
(i) Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock
The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements:
(a) Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm;
(b) Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.
(ii) Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles
The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 shall comply
with the following requirements:
(a) Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-
in shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.
(b) Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement:
The operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-3
(g) Hardware (Cont'd)
(iii) Requirements of Improved Stainless Steel Friction Stays (with four screws)
The stainless steel friction stays shall comply with the following requirements :
Test Requirements
Resistant to 300N for 5 second No visible damage to window
obstructed stay
track Destruction Test Arm bent at 40 kg (392N) minimum
Strength of 200N for 5 second Shall be operable after test

maximum Stay track permanent deformed at 65 kg
opening stop Destruction Test
(638N) minimum
1000N for 1 min Window shall support the specified loading
Resistance to Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N) minimum
accidental
loading Destruction Test Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N)
minimum
50,000 cycles
Shall pass tests on
(sash > 600mm
- ease of fastener operation ; and
Endurance of width or > 0.45 m2)
- ease of movement of sash, after specified
Fastener 100,000 cycles
cycles
(sash ≤ 600mm
(no adjustment throughout the test)
width or ≤ 0.45 m2)
18.3.4 Finishes
The aluminium shall be finished by one of the following :
(a) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987.
(b) Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating
shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
The actual appearance of the finish shall be assessed by reference to samples to be agreed upon
between the Contractor and the SO Rep and thereafter maintained within agreed limits.
18.3.5 Temporary Protection And Prevention Of Damage
All bronze anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other
and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete
window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
18.3.6 Storage And Protection
Ensure and provide proper and safe storage for all materials delivered to the Site and the continued
proper condition of installed windows at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the
Employer.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-4
18.3.7 Installation
(a) Design and Profile of Aluminium Sections
The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and
top hung shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Complete samples of windows shall be installed at the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
(b) Detailing
All windows and other aluminium items shall be fixed strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of a
safety lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved
material (2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this
function.
Finger Grip handle integrated with the aluminium frame to be provided, where applicable, for all
aluminium casement window. The finger grip shall be an extruded piece from the lower window
frame and the colour to match with the whole window frame.
Window frames shall be fabricated to tolerances as shown below :
No Description Tolerance
1 Length +/- 1.5 mm
2 Straightness +/- 1.5 mm
3 Angles +/- 2o
4 Sides +/- 1 mm
5 Squareness +/- 4 mm
(Diagonals D1-D2)
(c) Cement Mortar Infill
The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to installation of window
frame. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before installation of
window frame.
Gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall shall
be filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency. Approved
backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly
compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant
(d) Application of Sealant
Provide and apply approved sealant to the external periphery of the aluminium framed windows
as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat
flush joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the manufacturer's
guides and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works
endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence
work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant
applicators.
Before sealing the joints, the surfaces shall be clean and free of all mortar dust or other
contaminants that may affect adhesion
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-5
18.3.8 Glazing
(a) Glass
All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the
factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing panel of casement and top
hung can be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass supplied shall comply with BS
952. All glass shall be relatively distortion-free.
Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm + 0.2mm green tinted float glass
with a shading coefficient of 0.75 except as shown in the table below:
Type of Glass &

No Items of Works Tolerances
Thickness
Alum. Casement window at Bedroom
1 6mm frosted + 0.2
(abutting air-con ledge)
3mm clear + 2
Alum. Casement window with top-
layers 0.38mm
2 hung (Double frame) at bath/wc + 0.2
Polar White PVB
(abutting air-con ledge)
+ 3mm laminated
Top-Hung of casement
3 6mm frosted + 0.2
window(Double frame)
Adjustable louvre window between
4 6mm float + 0.2
kitchen and service balcony/courtyard
6mm obscured
5 Glazing panel to vent of bath/wc (Non- transparent) + 0.2
wire glass
All glazing panel shall meet dimensional tolerances as shown below:
No Description Tolerances
1 Height +/- 2 mm
2 Width +/- 2 mm
3 Straightness of edge +/- 1 mm
(b) Glazing Accessories
All glazing accessories shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to the
(c) Protection
Use all means necessary to protect glass and glazing materials before, during and after
installation.
(d) Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately carry out all repairs and replacements necessary to the
(e) Fixing
Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly
anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam the
edges.
(f) Cleaning Up
Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections and
replace all damaged glass.
(g) Concealed Slide Bolt
Concealed Slide Bolt to be provided, where applicable, for all aluminium casement window.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-6
18.3.9 Performance Requirements For Sealant
All sealant for use between the aluminium window and wall/beam/column shall be approved by SO Rep.
It shall be polyurethane based complying with the following requirements:
Performance / Properties Test Method Requirement - ASTM C 920
No visible staining on white cement

Staining and Color change ASTM C510
mortar base
Extrusion Rate ASTM C1183 >10 ml/min
Vertical displacement <4.8mm

Rheological Properties ASTM C639 Horizontal displacement: No
deformation
Indentation Hardness ASTM C661 15 to 50
No transfer of sealant to PE film

Tack-Free time ASTM C679
(72 hrs)
Adhesion and Cohesion Total loss in bond and adhesion<9 sq

ASTM C719
under Cyclic movement cm
Loss in weight<10%
Effects of Heat Aging ASTM1246
No cracking and chalking
Effects of Accelerated
ASTM 793 No cracks (250hrs UV light)
Weathering
Peel strength>22.2N
Bond loss<25%
Adhesion-in-Peel ASTM C794
(for aluminium and mortar/concrete
substrates)
Material Identification ASTM E1252 Verification of base material
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-7
18.4 BRONZE ANODISED ALUMINIUM FRAMED ADJUSTABLE LOUVRE

WINDOWS WITH POLYPROPYLENE GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS
(EXCEPT BATHROOM WHICH USES ALUMINIUM GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS)
18.4.1 General
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium framed adjustable louvre window and glazing
complete with polypropylene glass holders/blade clips and all the relevant components to the locations
18.4.2 Performance
Adjustable louvre window shall meet the following performance requirements :
(a) Unlocking Test (SS 215:1979)
(i) Before Accelerated Wear Test
The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less
than 30 N and not more than 70 N.
(ii) After Accelerated Wear Test
The unlocking force on the hand lever of the adjustable louvre window shall not be less
than 5 N.
(b) Accelerated Wear Test (SS 215:1979)
After the testing, the window mechanism shall show no sign of buckling, warping, jamming, wear
and crack which could impair the effective operation of the window and the mechanism can still
be operated and locked in the closed position.
(c) Weathering In Laboratory Apparatus (DIN EN ISO 4892-2)
The polypropylene clips shall show no visual change after 750 hours.
(d) Salt Spray Test (ASTM B117 - 90)
Moderate amount of black patches and white deposits on the control mechanism after 750 hours.
18.4.3 Material
(a) Aluminium Alloy
All aluminium structural members shall be made of aluminium alloy 6063TF, 6063TE or 6063T5
complying with BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020
(b) Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the
fabrication of the windows shall be made from aluminium, non-magnetic stainless steel, mild
steel treated to give corrosion resistant properties complying with SS212:1988. All screws, bolts
and other accessories which are exposed shall be of approved matching colour.
(c) Glass Holders/Blade Clips
Glass holders/blade clips shall be injection moulded from ultra-violet radiation stabilised
polypropylene of Shell HMA 6100 + Pentax uVS LDR 3%; or other approved. The colour of the
holders/clips shall be black and shall be matt finish. The glass holders/blade clips shall be
designed such as to readily accept 152mm wide and 6mm thick blades. The holders shall be
designed to hold the glass firmly without the use of putty and in such a manner as to prevent the
removal of the glass from the outside of the closed window. The glass holders/blade clips and
drive mechanism shall be of a one piece moulding.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-8

(EXCEPT BATHROOM WHICH USES ALUMINIUM GLASS HOLDERS/BLADE CLIPS) (CONT'D)
(d) Mullion
The mullion shall contain an enclosed slot to accept the control handle.
(e) Control Mechanism
Control mechanism shall be produced from stainless steel AISI grade 304 or aluminium.
The control mechanism shall be designed such as to provide a positive snap lock and that all
components shall be easily replaced in case of failure.
(f) Control Handle And Cap
The control handle shall be produced from 6063 T5 grade aluminium of a minimum thickness of
2.5mm.
The control handle shall be encapsulated by an injection moulded protective cap complete with
an easy to operate tab.
The control handle and cap when in the closed position shall be flushed with the outer frame.
The control handle shall be powder-coated finished and in approved matching colour.
(g) Fixing
Fixing screws shall be concealed when the louvre blade clips are in the fully closed position.
(h) Joints And Gaskets
All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber.
(i) Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene, polypropylene pile or plasticized PVC.
18.4.4 Finishes
(b) Combined coating to comply with BS 4842, except the minimum thickness of coating shall be 9
microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
All bronze anodised aluminium adjustable louvre windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against
each other and significant surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped
with stout papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The
complete window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and
plaster splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-9

18.4.6 Storage & Protection
Employer.
18.4.7 Installation
The design and profile of the bronze anodised aluminium framed adjustable louvre windows shall
be similar to those as shown in the Drawings.
(b) Detailing
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window shall
be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
(c) Cement Mortar Infill
The size of the openings surrounding the window shall be checked prior to the installation of
window frames. Any deviation exceeding the allowable tolerances shall be corrected before
installation of window frame.
Any gap between the window and the adjacent structural member or in-fill non-structural wall
shall be filled with pre-packed cement mortar. The mortar shall be of the right consistency.
Approved backing piece formwork and tool shall be used to ensure that the mortar infill is properly
compacted and grooves are provided for application of approved sealant
(d) Application of Sealant
as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a neat
flush joint with the window frame. The application of approved sealant shall comply with the
manufacturer's guides and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing works
endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall be
submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to commence
work They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved sealant
applicators.
contaminants that may affect adhesion.
18.4.8 Glazing
(a) Glass
Unless otherwise specified, glazing panel of adjustable louvre windows shall be 6mm ±0.3mm
green gray/gray tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing panel to adjustable louvre windows between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall
be 6mm ±0.3mm clear float glass.
(b) Glazing Accessories
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-10

18.4.8 Glazing
(c) Protection
installation.
(d) Replacements
(e) Fixing
edges.
(f) Cleaning Up
18.4.9 Performance Requirements For Sealant
All sealant for use between the aluminium window and wall/beam/column shall be approved by SO Rep.
It shall be polyurethane based complying with the following requirements:
Performance / Properties Test Method Requirement - ASTM C 920
No visible staining on white cement

Staining and Color change ASTM C510
mortar base
Extrusion Rate ASTM C1183 >10 ml/min
Vertical displacement <4.8mm
Rheological Properties ASTM C639 Horizontal displacement: No
deformation
Indentation Hardness ASTM C661 15 to 50
No transfer of sealant to PE film

Tack-Free time ASTM C679
(72 hrs)
Adhesion and Cohesion Total loss in bond and adhesion<9 sq

ASTM C719
under Cyclic movement cm
Loss in weight<10%
Effects of Heat Aging ASTM1246
No cracking and chalking
Effects of Accelerated
ASTM 793 No cracks (250hrs UV light)
Weathering
Peel strength>22.2N
Bond loss<25%
Adhesion-in-Peel ASTM C794
(for aluminium and mortar/concrete
substrates)
Material Identification ASTM E1252 Verification of base material
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-11
18.5 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors complete with all the relevant
components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, bronze anodised extruded aluminium sliding doors shall be in accordance
with SS 268:1983 and its latest amendments.
18.5.1 Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.5.2 Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated to comply with BS 3987 to provide an anodic
coating of 25 microns.
18.5.3 Fastenings And Fixings
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or aluminium or
mild steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with SS 268-
1983. All screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour.
18.5.4 Hardware
Hardware such as locksets, guide, roller etc including its fixing shall be in accordance with SS 268:1983.
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they
shall be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable
without removing the outer frame from the structure. Locksets and guide shall be in black colour or
bronze colour or other approved matching colour.
Safety devices shall be provided to prevent the door panels from jumping track and the colour shall be
black or bronze or other approved matching colour.
Unless specified otherwise, the lockset shall be openable by key from the outside and lockable by an
open and shut control from the inside. The lockset shall be incorporated into the thickness of the door
jamb of the slider and secured by means of stainless steel screws.
For sliding door to private balcony not link to the main entrance door, the lockset shall be lockable by
an open and shut control from the inside.
Lockset shall be finished in black or bronze in colour or other approved matching colour.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-12
18.5 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS (CONT'D)
18.5.5 Joint Sealing Materials
Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials
that will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.
18.5.6 Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.
18.5.7 Glazing
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. The glazing panel conforming to SS 268 and SS 341 shall be min 10.76mm thick
laminated green grey/grey tinted safety glass with a shading coefficient of not more than 0.75.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing
materials.
18.5.8 Performance Tests
When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall arrange for performance tests as required in
SS 268:1983 and the following tests shall be carried out by PSB testing laboratory accredited under
SINGLAS :
(a) Roller (bearing device) - accelerated test of minimum 50,000 operations.
(b) Anodic coating (25 microns) )

)
or ) under copper accelerated acetic acid salt
) spray (CASS) test for 8 hours to achieve
Composite coating (aluminium 9 microns ) a rating of 8.
anodic coating and 7 microns for the )
liquid organic coating) )
18.5.9 Workshop Drawings
Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-13
18.5 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SLIDING DOORS (CONT'D)
18.5.10 Construction And Installation
The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall
provide instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.
All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The installed door
shall be protected against damaged by agents such as contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
18.5.12 Cement Mortar Infill
Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
18.6 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS
Provide and fix bronze anodised extruded aluminium swing doors complete with all the relevant
components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
18.6.1 Main Material
All aluminium alloy doors shall be made to BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020 or ASTM B221.
18.6.2 Surface Finish
The exposed surface of aluminium doors shall be treated and finished by one of the following :
(a) Anodic coating to 25 microns minimum complying with BS 3987
(b) Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except the minimum thickness of coatings shall be
9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
18.6.3 Fastenings And Fixings
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel or
aluminium or mild steel which has been treated to give corrosion resistant properties in accordance with
SS268-1983. All screws, rivets and other accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching
colour.
18.6.4 Hardware
The hardware and fixing shall be of suitable materials resistant to and suitably protected against
atmospheric corrosion. If materials or finishes which react adversely with aluminium are used, they
shall be separated from the aluminium by materials that do not do so. Hardware shall be replaceable
without removing the outer frame from the structure.
18.6.5 Joint Sealing Materials
Joint sealing materials shall be of synthetic butyl rubber or other approved water tightness materials
that will not harm adjacent materials or finishes.
18.6.6 Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be made from materials known not to react with aluminium and such that any
shrinkage, warping or adherence to sliding or closing surfaces shall not impair the performance of the
door. The strips shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-14
18.6 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SWING DOORS (CONT'D)
18.6.7 Glazing
All glazing panels shall be fixed to the aluminium frames in the factory as a complete system before
delivery to the Site. Unless otherwise specified, the glazing panel to the door conforming to BS 952
shall be 6mm ±0.3mm thick green grey/grey tinted float glass with a shading coefficient of not more
than 0.75. The glazing panel to swing door between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be
6mm ±0.3mm thick clear float glass.
Glazing beads, gaskets glass adapters and glazing compounds shall be of plastics or synthetic rubber
member or material that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass or other glazing
materials.
Provide two complete sets of workshop drawings showing all the detailing sections, plans and relevant
details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
When required, complete samples of doors shall be installed for approval by the SO Rep.
18.6.9 Construction And Installation
The aluminium doors shall be installed to the manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer shall
provide instructions as to the manner of assembly of the aluminium doors.
All bronze anodised extruded aluminium doors shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The installed door
shall be protected against damaged by agents such as contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The material to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
18.6.11 Cement Mortar Infill
Cement mortar infill shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
18.7 POLYESTER POWDER COATING ON ALUMINIUM
18.7.1 Where polyester powder coating on aluminium are required, the polyester powder coating shall be
super-durable architectural powder coating "Oxyplast APR" or "Tiger Drylac U Series 58" or other
approved. The powder coating shall comply with all the requirements as specified in these clause and
subclauses. Unless otherwise specified, all test procedures shall be in accordance with AAMA 2604-98
"Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance
Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions And Panels". The powder coating shall be applied by
approved applicator.
(i) Surfaces
Coatings shall be visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters or other surface
imperfections in the dry film state on the exposed surfaces when observed at a distance
of ten (10) feet (120 inches) from the metal surface and inspected at an angle of 90
degrees to the surface.
(ii) Thickness
The total dry film thickness on each significant surface of the coating on each piece shall
be 60µm - 100µm.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-15
18.7 POLYESTER POWDER COATING ON ALUMINIUM (CONT'D)
18.7.1 (a) General Requirements (Cont'd)
(iii) Minor Scratches And Blemishes
Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repairable with the coating manufacturer's
recommended product or system. Such repair shall match the original finish when tested
as outlined in the subclause "Dry Adhesion" specified hereunder. After application, allow
the repair coating to dry for at least 72 hours at 65-80 degrees F before conducting the
film adhesion test. The size and number of touch-up repairs shall be kept to a minimum.
(b) Test Specimens
Test specimens shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of the production
coated aluminium. A sufficient number of specimens on which to conduct instrument
measurements with flat coated surfaces of at least 6" long and 3" wide, shall be submitted to the
test laboratory.
(c) Metal Preparation And Pre-Treatment
A multi-stage cleaning and pre-treatment system shall be required to remove organic and
inorganic surface soils, remove residual oxides, and to apply a chemical conversion coating to
which organic coatings will firmly adhere.
The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminium extrusions and
panelling shall conform with ASTM D 1730, Type B, Method 5 or Method 7.
The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum of 30 mg. per sq. ft.
on the exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B 449, Section 6, Class 1. Processing shall
conform with that specified in ASTM B 449, Section 5.
(d) Colour Uniformity
Colour uniformity shall be consistent with the colour range as established between the approved
source and the applicator.
(e) Specular Gloss
Gloss values shall be within ±5 units of the manufacturer's specification.
The Standard gloss range reference values are :
Gloss Colours Specular Gloss Value

High 80 - Over
Medium 20 - 79
Low 19 or less
(f) Dry Film Hardness
No rupture of film per ASTM D 3363.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-16
18.7.1 (g) Film Adhesion
(i) Dry Adhesion
No removal of film under the tape within or outside of the cross hatched area or blistering
anywhere on the test specimen
(ii) Wet Adhesion
anywhere on the wet test specimen.
(iii) Boiling Water Adhesion
anywhere on the wet test specimen.
(h) Impact Resistance
No removal of film to substrate.
(i) Abrasion Resistance
Using the falling sand test method ASTM D 968, the Abrasion Coefficient Value of the coating
shall be 20 minimum.
(j) Chemical Resistance
(i) Muriatic Acid Resistance (15 Minute Spot Test)
No blistering and no visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.
(ii) Mortar Resistance (24 Hour Pat Test)
Mortar shall dislodge easily from the painted surface, and any residue shall be removable
with a damp cloth. Any lime residue should be easily removed with the 10% muriatic acid
solution described in the Clause "Muriatic Acid Resistance" of AAMA 2604-98. There shall
be no loss of film adhesion or visual change in appearance when examined by the unaided
eye.
(iii) Nitric Acid Resistance
Not more than 5 Delta E Units(Hunter) of colour change, calculated in accordance with
ASTM D 2244, when comparing measurements on the acid-exposed painted surface and
the unexposed surface.
(iv) Detergent Resistance
No loss of adhesion of the film to the metal. No blistering and no significant visual change
in appearance when examined by the unaided eye.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-17
18.7.1 (k) Corrosion Resistance
(i) Humidity Resistance (For 3,000 Hours At 100 Degrees F And

100% RH With Cabinet Operated In Accordance With
ASTM D 2247 or ASTM D 4585)
Formation of blisters not to exceed "Few" blisters Size No. 8, as shown in Figure 4,
ASTM D 714.
(ii) Salt Spray Resistance(3,000 Hours According To ASTM B 117

Using 5% Salt Solution)
Minimum rating of 7 on scribe or cut edges, and a minimum blister rating of 8 within the
test specimen field.
(l) Weathering
The coating shall maintain its film integrity and as a minimum meet the colour retention, chalk
resistance, gloss retention and erosion resistance properties specified hereunder. The SO Rep
shall request data relative to the long term durability of the colour/colours selected.
(i) Test Site And Duration
Test sites for on-fence testing are acceptable as follows : Florida exposure South of
latitude 27 degrees North at a 45 degree angle facing South for five years.
(ii) Colour Retention
Maximum of 5 Delta E units (Hunter) Colour change as calculated in accordance with

ASTM D 2244-85, Section 6.3 after the exposure test as per foregoing subclause "Test
Site and Duration".
(iii) Chalk Resistance
Chalking shall be no more than that represented by a No. 8 rating based on ASTM D 659
after test site exposure.
(iv) Gloss Retention
Gloss retention shall be a minimum of 50% after the exposure test.
(v) Resistance To Erosion
Less than 10 percent film loss after the exposure test expressed as a percent loss of total
film.
(m) QUV A340 (ASTM G53, 3000 Hours - 8 Hours UV, 4 Hours Condensation)
(i) Gloss Retention
70 - 100%
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-18
18.7.1 (n) QUV B313 (336 Hours - 8 Hours UV At 60 Degrees C,

4 Hours Condensation At 50 Degrees C)
(i) Gloss Retention
80 - 100 %
Shall be not more than 5 Delta E units of colour change.
18.7.2 Appearance
The powder coating on the significant surface shall not have any scratches through to the base metal.
It shall be of even colour and gloss with good coverage. It shall not have Defect such as excessive
roughness, flow lines, bubbles, inclusions, craters, blisters, dull spots, pin holes, scratches or any other
unacceptable flaws.
18.7.3 Colour
The finishing colour of the powder coating shall be selected by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall seek
approval from the SO Rep on the colour selection prior to the application of the powder coating.
All powder coated aluminium shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other and significant
surfaces shall be well protected during transportation. They shall be wrapped with stout papers,
cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete installation
shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster splashes or
droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
proper condition of them at the Site until such time the building is handed over to the Employer.
18.8 ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER
Provide and install aluminium roller shutters to shop fronts, eating houses and other premises as shown
in the Drawings.
Aluminium roller shutter shall be of pole operated aluminium slates complete with channel guide, angle
bolts, lock, removable mullion roller casing and all other necessary components. For individual shop
unit or eating house, same lockset (with master key) shall be provided to all aluminium roller shutters.
Slates shall be made from aluminium alloy extruded sections. Thickness of aluminium slates shall be
1.6mm thick (S.W.G. 16) and anodic coating shall be 15 microns minimum.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop
drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep
for approval prior to the installation.
When required, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-19
18.9 SAFETY FEATURE TO PREVENT FALLING WINDOW LEAF

FOR ALUMINIUM CASEMENT AND TOP HUNG WINDOW
The Contractor shall incorporate the safety features (patent application no. 9905170-8) to all the new
aluminium casement and top hung windows to be installed in the Works. The safety features shall
ensure that the window leaf will not be detached from the outer frame or friction stay accidentally even
if all the fasteners at the friction stay fail. The safety feature shall include:
(a) Incorporation of aluminium rails to the outer frame of the window to allow the friction stay to clip
onto the rails in the event of failure of the fasteners. The friction stays shall have features that
allowed them to be detach from the outer frame to facilitate the replacement of window leaves.
(b) Incorporation of aluminium rails to the inner frame of the window (window leaf) for the arm of the
friction stay to slot in between. The friction stay shall hold onto the rails in the event of failure of
the fasteners.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the aluminium casement and top hung windows
incorporating details of the safety features for the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
fabricate samples of the casement and top hung windows and demonstrate the function of the safety
features to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the installation of the windows.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their window manufacturer is licensed to use the patented
design. A copy of the licensing agreement between the window manufacturer and the patent owner
shall be submitted to the SO Rep together with the shop drawings.
18.10 ALUMINIUM BI-FOLD SLIDING DOOR
Provide and install natural/bronze anodised aluminium frame bi-fold sliding door as shown in drawings.
Aluminium extrusion shall be grade 6063 –T4, T5, or T6. Door shall be complete with concealed heavy
duty pivot and roller devices.
Provide flush thumb turn to operate concealed latch set. Thumb turn to match colour of door frame.
Provide one stainless steel flush shoot bolt, concealed handle on door leaf housing pivot. Provide
stainless steel dust proof socket & cover at base of door. No gap shall be visible between the two leafs
in close position. Frame of door to be fixed to beams and walls by galvanized steel brackets. All screws,
nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all accessories used shall be stainless steel.
Glazing shall be 8.38mm thick laminated clear glass.
The Aluminium Bi-fold door with frame, handle and metal lockset shall comply with the technical
requirements as shown in the table:
No. of Specimens Requirement

Test
Door Leaf Door Frame (Average Value)
Durometer Hardness
1. 3 2 70 Minimum
Vicat Softening Temperature
2. 2 - 75 Degrees Minimum
ASTM D1525
Density/Specific Gravity
3. 3 2 0.65g per cm3 Minimum
ASTM D792 Method A
Water Absorption
ASTM D1037
4.
60,000
cycles.
Lockset,
including
handle shall
5. Endurance of Lockset 1
not be
deformed,
damaged or
inoperable
after test.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-20
18.11 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAME AND

ALUMINIUM INSPECTION COVER
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and
aluminium inspection cover to the refuse chute on the roof top in accordance with the details inclusive
with the relevant components.
The aluminium cover shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill
with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and
1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The rockwool insulation material shall be of density 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance) and thickness of
38mm rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m². The noise reduction
coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture resistance shall
not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at
Class O.
When required, complete sample of inspection cover shall be installed on the Site for approval by the
SO Rep. All inspection cover and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the
Manufacturer/Supplier's instructions and recommendations.
18.12 BRONZE ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM LOUVRED VENTS
Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium louvred vents together with all necessary
components to pump room and other locations as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium louvred
blades shall be of 2.3mm thick minimum and shall be of aluminium alloys to BS 1470 or ASTM B209.
The aluminium vent including the aluminium louvred blades shall be anodised to a bronze finish and
the anodic coating shall be 25 microns.
18.13 THREE-WAY NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM

LETTER BOXES WITH MASTER DOORS
Supply and fix three-way natural anodised aluminium letter boxes to locations as shown in the
Drawings. These letter boxes shall be obtained from suppliers approved by the SO Rep.
The thickness of the aluminium sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings and the thickness tolerance
shall be ±10%. The anodic coating shall be not less than 25 microns for the extruded aluminium section
and not less than 15 microns for the aluminium sheets.
Letter boxes shall be provided for each residential unit. A minimum of two additional letter boxes shall
be provided for ground floor facilities to each building block as shown in the Drawings. In addition to
the two letter boxes, one additional letter box shall be provided for “For Returned Mail Only”. The
location of the “For Returned Mail Only” letter box shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The building block number, road name and postal code shall be engraved on the top frame and at the
location as shown in the Drawings. The unit number of the residential unit shall be engraved and
painted on the individual letter box aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings. The
actual block number, unit number, road name and postal code shall be decided by the SO Rep. The
phrase "For Returned Mail Only" shall be engraved and painted on the returned mail letter box
aluminium door and on the upturn as shown in the Drawings.
Submit complete set of workshop drawings for the approval of the SO Rep.
The keys for the letter boxes shall be kept in separate envelopes and numbered to correspond with
the numbers on the boxes and handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works.
Three keys shall be provided for each individual letter box.
The two master doors shall be provided with different key-aliked locksets approved by the SO Rep.
Three master door keys for the Town Council shall be provided for each building block and shall be
handed over to the Employer on Substantial Completion of the Works. Three master door keys for
Singapore Post shall be provided for each building block and shall be handed over to Singapore Post
on Substantial Completion of the Works.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-21

ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO MAIN ROOF
Where shown, provide and install natural anodised extruded aluminium frame and aluminium trap door
to main roof in accordance with the details as shown in the Drawings. The aluminium trap door shall
complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channels frame and infill with rockwool insulation as
indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section and 1.2mm thick aluminium
alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance) and its thickness
shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m². The
noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture
resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire
hazard indices at Class O.
Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, ms guides and approved padlock, hasps
and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of
fixing all as shown in the Drawings.
When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO
Rep. All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's

ALUMINIUM TRAP DOOR TO ROOF OF BOOSTER PUMP ROOM
The aluminium trap door shall be complete with 1.2mm thick galvanised steel "C" channel frame and
infill with rockwool insulation as indicated in the Drawings. The 5mm thick extruded aluminium section
and 1.2mm thick aluminium alloy lining shall be of natural anodised to at least 25 microns.
The density of rockwool insulation material shall be 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance) and its thickness
shall be 38mm. It shall be rigid enough to be able to withstand a working load of 500 kg per m². The
noise reduction coefficient shall be NRC 0.95 within the sound range of 125 Hz to 5000 Hz. Moisture
resistance shall not be more than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire
hazard indices at Class O.
Trap door shall be provided with smooth running sliding roller, ms guides and approved padlock, hasps
and staples secured to the concrete and doors by masonry drive pins or other approved means of
fixing all as shown in the Drawings.
When required, complete sample of trap door shall be installed on the Site for approval by the SO
Rep. All trap door and items shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer/Supplier's
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-22
18.16 WATER TIGHTNESS TEST TO THE JOINT / INTERFACE BETWEEN EXTERNAL

ALUMINIUM WINDOW AND THE ADJACENT STRUCTURAL COMPONENT OR IN-FILL WALL
(a) General
The Contractor shall carry out water test to the external joint/interface between the external
aluminium window and the adjacent structural member or in-full non-structural wall. The external
joints/interfaces shall refer to those directly facing the exterior. However, those along the
common corridor shall be excluded.
The Contractor shall, in his own cost and expense, document and carry out their own water and
weathertightness during construction stage to ensure compliance. All water tests (specified or
not specified) shall be witnessed by the SO Rep.
(b) Sample size and Method of Testing
SO Rep shall sample half height windows in 10% of the units per building block for testing. One
half-height window shall be tested in each selected unit. For building block with three-quarter
height or full-height windows, the SO Rep shall sample 25% of the total number of the windows
for testing. Watertightness shall be conducted at the following stages of work:
Percentage of watertightness test

Stage of work Three-quarter height or
Half height windows
Full height windows
Within 2 months before the handing over
10% 25%
inspection
The watertightness test shall be carried out using a continuous jet of water sprayed on the
joint/interface with a nozzle and water hose. For each window, four points shall be selected for
testing and each point shall be sprayed for 20 minutes. The velocity of the water at the nozzle
shall be 2m per second. The capacity of the water delivered shall be 600 litres per hour. The
duration of the testing for each window shall be 80 minutes.
The nozzle shall be held at a distance of 1m away from the joint/interface and pointed towards
the joint/interface horizontally.
Provide the following information to the SO Rep for approval at least 2 months before carrying
out the watertightness test:
(i) The entire equipment set up to conduct the water test
(ii) Procedure of the water test;
(iii) Pump capacity to deliver the required flow rate and velocity at the nozzle;
(iv) The method to suspend the nozzle
In the case where sunbreakers come into the way, the nozzle outlet shall be brought in between
the sunbreakers and the external window and pointed towards the joint/interface.
The joint/interface shall be considered to have passed the test if no dampness or seepage
appears at the internal side of the joint/interface or internal side of any part of the building, during
spraying and within half an hour after the completion of the spraying.
(c) Failure of the Testing
In the event that any joint/interface fails the watertightness test, the Contractor shall investigate
the causes of failure and seek the approval of the SO Rep on the rectification method.
For each window watertightness test failure, the Contractor shall carry out rectification and re-
test at the failed location. The SO Rep shall sample another two windows from the same building
block for testing.
In addition, the SO Rep reserves the right to reject any aluminium window installation that
perform unsatisfactorily during the water-tightness tests.
18.17 RESERVED
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(22)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-23
18.18 CLOTHES DRYING RACK
18.18.1 External Clothes Drying Rack
Provide and fix stainless steel clothes drying racks extrusion together with 3 nos. of fixed stainless steel
poles, stainless steel bended sections and other necessary components as shown in the Drawings. The
whole rack shall be securely fixed into the structure.
All stainless steel poles, stainless steel racks extrusion, stainless steel plates and stainless bended
sections shall be Grade 316 stainless steel with polished finish as shown in the Drawings. The outer
diameter of the poles shall be 25mm and the thickness shall be 2mm. All joints shall be fully welded to
a neat and smooth finish under factory quality control condition. The weld and adjoining area affected
by heat shall be chemically treated with approved acid and polished to prevent rusting.
Details of material are as follow :
(a) Stainless steel frame/support : 50mm x 50mm x 3mm thick (horizontal stainless steel rectangular
hollow section) and 40mm x 40mm x 3mm thick (vertical stainless steel rectangular bended
section), 3mm thick stainless steel clothes rack extrusion, 6 mm thick stainless steel base plate
and stainless steel reinforcement plate.
(b) Stainless steel poles : Approximate 2100mm length stainless steel pipes between supports or as
shown in the Drawings.
(c) End cap to pole : 1.5mm thick stainless steel sheet welded to stainless steel poles.
(d) Expansion stainless steel anchor bolts : “Hilti” or “Ramset” or other approved M10 x 90 with setting
indicator.
All design of stainless steel structures shall comply with BS 1449. The stainless steel welding
connection shall be designed to BS EN 1011-3:2000.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Fixing details shall comply with the Drawings
as shown.The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing the method of fixing, the detailed
sections, plans and relevant details and accessories, complete with PE endorsement and design
calculations (where fixing details deviate from Drawings) to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
installation.
The rack shall be well protected against moisture, cement and plaster splashes during construction.
The completed work shall be clean and free from dust and stain.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(23)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-24
18.18 CLOTHES DRYING RACK (CONT’D)
18.18.2 Internal Retractable Clothes Drying Rack
Provide and fix retractable clothes drying rack together with necessary components as shown in
drawings. Ceiling mounted rack shall be securely fixed such that the lowest point of the extended rack
is at a height of 1600mm above the floor level or otherwise approved by the SO Rep. Wall mounted
rack shall be securely fixed at a height of 1600mm above the floor level to the wall of the kitchen or
service yard to every flat or as directed by SO Rep.
The number and length of poles are as shown in drawings. Details of components for two types of racks
are as shown below.
Component Rack Rack

(Wall mounted) (Ceiling mounted)
Pole Natural anodized Aluminium grade 5052

Stainless steel AISI grade 304
Bracket Powder coated Aluminium grade 5052
Link Hollow section Stainless steel AISI

grade 304
Fastener Stainless steel anchor bolts
Other fixing Stainless steel wing nuts, nylon Heavy duty gear device, stainless steel
devices washers. wire rope with plastic insulation, and
nylon belt.
Endurance Rack retraction operation-20,000 cycles-No sign of damage or failure
The stainless steel welding connection shall be designed to BS EN 1011-3:2000.
Details shown in Drawings shall serve as a guide. The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings
showing method of fixing, detailed sections, plans and other relevant details together with PE
endorsement and design calculations to SO Rep for approval prior to its fabrication.
The rack shall be well protected against moisture, cement and plaster splashes and other materials
during construction. The completed work shall be clean and free from stains.
18.19 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL RAILING TO PARAPETS
All galvanised steel railing to parapets of access balconies shall be constructed as shown in the
Drawings. Galvanised steel railing shall be round hollow section of dimensions and thickness as shown
in the Drawings. The tolerance for the dimensions and thickness shall be ±0.5% and ±10% respectively.
All galvanised steel railing shall be fully welded to galvanised steel flat support fixed securely into the
structure as detailed in the Drawings. The dimensions and thickness of flat support shall be as shown
in the Drawings.
All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish.
All galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and
one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat
of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
18.20 RESERVED
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(24)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-25
18.21 FOOT-OPERATED STAINLESS STEEL REFUSE HOPPERS FOR

CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE
Provide and fix approved foot-operated stainless steel refuse chute hoppers to openings of centralised
refuse chute walls as shown in the Drawings. The refuse chute hopper shall be constructed of stainless
steel of grade 304. The surface shall be of hairline finish. All joints shall be welded in full and no spot
welding shall be used for the Works. All welds shall be smoothly and securely finished. The thickness
of stainless steel shall be as shown in the Drawings. Details of the foot-operating mechanism and foot
pedal shall serve as a guide only. Before installing, provide shop drawings for the approval of the SO
Rep. The hopper door shall be able to open when a load of 3.5 kg is placed on the pedal.
18.22 STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG
18.22.1 General
Provide and install stainless steel eyes with nylon anchors to parapets of access balconies, private
balconies and living rooms of residential building blocks as shown below or to any other locations as
directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's costs and expenses. Stainless steel eyes shall be of AISI
grade 304 stainless steel.
Description Eye-Anchors Location To Be Installed

(1) Flats along common corridor. 1 pair per unit Common corridor parapet/coping
(2) Flats with private balcony 1 pair per unit Private balcony parapet/coping
(3) Flats not along common corridor

and without private balcony 1 pair per unit Living room window wall
(eg. corridor end, stairs, etc)
(4) Executive Maisonette/Apartment 1 pair per unit Private balcony parapet/coping
18.22.2 Quality Of Materials
The nylon anchors shall be "Fisher S6-8", "Hilti HUD6-8", "Ramset DNP6-8", "Rawlplug M6-8"; or other
approved.
18.22.3 Dimensional Requirements
Eye-anchors shall conform with the following requirements :
Thickness of stainless steel = 5mm diameter ±0.5mm

Internal diameter of eye = 15mm ±1mm
Length of screw = 30mm ±2mm
Length of screw shank = 32mm ±2mm
Size of drill bead and depth of drilling for the anchors shall comply strictly with the
Manufacturer's/Suppliers written recommendations.
18.22.4 Samples And Verification Of Positions For Fixing
Samples of eyes and anchors shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to the carrying out of
the work. Before drilling is carried out, verify with the SO Rep and obtain his approval on the locations
and positions for the installation of eye-anchors.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(25)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-26
18.22 STAINLESS STEEL EYES WITH NYLON ANCHORS FOR NATIONAL FLAG (CONT’D)
Extreme care shall be exercised during installation to ensure that the parapets, copings, cills, etc. are
not damaged or cracked which may cause water seepage or other Defect. The Contractor shall make
good, repair or replace the damaged items at his own cost and expense to the full satisfaction of the
SO Rep. All over-drillings, wrong drillings and defective work shall be rectified by an approved method.
Notwithstanding the approval granted for the method of rectification, the Contractor shall be liable for
making good the defective Works.
After drilling, all cleaning of holes and preparation of surfaces for the insertion of nylon anchors shall
strictly comply with the Manufacturers'/Suppliers' written recommendations.
All fixing shall be accurately plumbed and aligned vertically and horizontally. The eye-screws together
with the nylon anchors shall be applied with approved epoxy resin before screwing into positions.
Ensure that all eye-anchors are fixed securely into the substrate to ensure a strong and firm grip. The
completed fixture shall be clean and free of stains and rusts or other undesirable materials.
The approved epoxy resin shall be one of the following :
(a) Araldite Injection System IS 650 or CI xh 160AB;

(b) SBD EPIK;
(c) Concretin IHL;
(d) Conbextra EPLV;
(e) Chemi-EPIS;
(f) Sho-bond BICS;
(g) Febset Grout No. 6 or Non-Flow;
(h) or other approved.
18.23 STAINLESS STEEL DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE FOR CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE
Provide and fix 2mm thick (minimum) stainless steel directional signage for centralised refuse chute
to each storey of residential building block. The size of the signage shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The exact positions shall be decided and approved on the Site by the SO Rep. The stainless steel
shall be of AISI Grade 304 and shall be in hair-line finish. Fixing of signage shall be by heavy duty
high bond double sided adhesive tapes.
All graphics and letterings shall be engraved and painted with the colour as indicated in the Drawings.
18.24 WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES
Provide and fix wrought iron steel gates to all entrance doors of flats.
The gates shall be constructed in accordance with the pattern and types as shown in the Drawings.
The gates shall be of the correct sizes to fit the entrance door frames and be obtained from approved
manufacturers. All welding and joints shall be neat and finished smooth. The gates shall have leaf
opening first on the same side as the lock on the flat entrance door. The particular type of wrought iron
steel gates shall be to the particular pattern to each apartment block as shown in the Drawings. All
rivets shall be finished with matching colour to the gate.
Provide workshop drawings for approval by the SO Rep. A complete sample shall be installed on the
Site for the approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(26)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-27
18.24 WROUGHT IRON STEEL GATES TO FLAT ENTRANCES (CONT’D)
Preparation
All welded joints shall be made smooth. Remove rust mechanically from the surface of wrought iron.
Clean the surface to remove oil, grease and dirt.
Painting
The Contractor shall seek the SO Rep approval on the painting system for the wrought iron steel gate.
The Contractor shall submit a range of colours for the SO Rep approval. The colour and finishing of the
gate shall be approved by the SO Rep. The painting system shall be:
(a) One coat of CED primer;

(b) One coat of acrylic based or PU based finishing paint with special effects and antique
appearance; and
(c) One final coat of clear acrylic based or PU based lacquer.
Steel Property and Coating Requirements
Steel and surface coating shall comply with the following requirements:
No Performance Test Requirements

Standard
Reduced section
1 Tensile strength of steel Min 402 N/mm2
tensile test
Phosphorus, P
Chemical composition of Spark Emission - 0.050% max.
2
steel Spectrometry Sulphur, S
- 0.050% max.
3 Adhesion ASTM D 3359 5B

Shall withstand a scratch test load
4 Scratch Resistance SS 5 : Part F2
of 2000g
2H shall be the hardest pencil that
5 Pencil Hardness ASTM 3363
do not scratch the film
SS 5 : Part B1 :
6 Dry Film Thickness 20 microns + 5 microns
Method No. 5
1000 hours :
Resistance to Continuous Less than 0.1% rusting;
7 SS 5 : Part G10
Salt Spray -Blister size no. 6 few to no.10 on
surface.
Resistance to Humidity 1000 hours :
under Condensation - Less than 0.03% rusting;
8 SS 5 : Part G6
Conditions (Cyclic - Blister size no.8 few to no.10 on
Condensation) surface.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(27)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-28
18.25 FAN HOOKS
Cast fan hooks into positions as shown; bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceilings of shops,
eating houses or other premises as shown in the Drawings.
18.26 NUMERAL ESTATE BLOCK NUMBER SIGNAGE
For each building block, including multi-storey carpark and precinct pavilion, provide and fix two
numbers of numeral estate block number signages. The locations of the signage shall be decided by
the SO Rep for multi-storey carpark and precinct pavilion. As for building blocks, the signages shall be
located at the fourth storey beam. The actual block number shall be made known later. The signage
shall be made of aluminium and shall be finished with bronze anodic coating to a minimum of 15
microns. Submit a sample of the signage to the SO Rep approval prior to their for installation.
18.27 CAT LADDER TO MAIN ROOF
Provide and fix to every access door to roof, aluminium retractable cat ladders and aluminium handrails,
aluminium cage enclosures and the hand holds above roof slabs as detailed in the Drawings. Hollow
blocks to which aluminium rungs are anchored shall be filled solid with cement mortar.
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix barricade to the front of lift motor room entrance which
is close to the roof edge.
18.28 PROFILED STEEL ROOFING SHEETS
Where shown, the profiled steel roofing sheets shall be as specified in Section 13 "Roofing" including
all clause and subclauses under it.
18.29 MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME
18.29.1 Material Requirements
Where shown, the mild steel door frame shall be 1.6mm thick and the overall dimension shall have a
tolerance of ±1.0mm to the profile as shown in the Drawings. Fixing to brick/block walls shall be secured
by mild steel fishtailed holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel fishtailed holdfast to the number
and dimension as shown in the Drawings to each side of the frame. Fixing frame to RC shall be by mild
steel bracket with CED primer or galvanised steel bracket with masonry drive pin on both sides all as
shown in the Drawings. Fixing to lightweight concrete partition shall be secured by 3 no. of mild steel
holdfast with CED primer or galvanised steel holdfast to each side of the frame. The holdfast shall be
welded to the partition reinforcement bar.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(28)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-29
18.29 MILD STEEL DOOR FRAME (CONT’D)
18.29.1 Material Requirements (Cont’d)
Approved Cathodic Electrodeposition Primer to mild steel door frames shall be applied in the mill/
plant/factory and shall comply with the requirements shown below:
Test Results
Adhesion Test
5B
ASTM D 3359-09
Scratch Resistance Test
The coating shall withstand a scratch test load of 2000g
SS5:Part F2:03
Pencil Hardness Test
2H shall be the hardest pencil that do not scratch the film
ASTM 3363-05
Dry Film Thickness (measured by Elcometer 300
Coating Thickness Gauge) 20 microns ±5 microns
SS5:Part B1:03 Method No. 6
Resistance to Continuous Salt Spray Tested for a period of 1,000 hours:

SS5:Part G1:03 - less than 0.1% rusting
- blister size no. 6, few to no. 10 on surface
Resistance to Humidity under Condensation Tested for a period of 1,000 hours:

Condition (Continuous condensation) - less than 0.03% rusting
SS5:Part G7 - blister size no. 8, few to no. 10 on surface
18.29.2 Installation Requirements
The Contractor shall install the metal door frames to good verticality within a tolerance of 3mm.
Measurement of the verticality for all the metal door frames shall be submitted to the SO Rep before
the installation of door leaf. Door frames installed without good alignment and verticality shall be
rejected.
The grouting of the joints between the door frame and the adjacent structure shall be carried out under
one separate operation. Before grouting, the door frame shall be checked for its verticality and proper
bracing. It is preferred that the door frame be installed after the block work.
18.29.3 Temporary PVC Clip Protection System For Mild Steel Door Frame
Prior to spray painting of ceiling and walls in the flat, mild steel door frame in the flat shall be protected
with PVC trunking protection system. The trunking shall fit the size of door frame. The whole length of
mild steel door frame shall be protected to minimise staining of door frame during spray painting of wall
and ceiling. The trunking shall be removed after the satisfactory completion of spray painting.
18.30 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED RAILINGS TO STAIRCASE
Provide and install galvanised steel railings to staircase as shown in the Drawings. The galvanised steel
hollow section handrails, balusters, hollow section supports and flat bottom rails shall be to the
dimensions and sizes as shown. The galvanised steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed
into the structure as detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down
to a smooth finish. Galvanised steel surfaces shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral
etching primer and one coat of lead and chromate-free primer and then painted with one undercoat and
one finishing coat of enamel paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(29)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-30
18.31 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED GRATINGS
All galvanised gratings shall be zinc coated by the hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with
BS EN ISO 1461. Every batches of galvanised gratings delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by
a certification letter or copy of invoice from the firm/company at which they are galvanised. For the
purposes of this clause only the term "gratings" shall be deemed to include the frames and their
miscellaneous components. Submit details of the galvanising treatment to the SO Rep for approval.
Thoroughly remove all welding slags from the gratings prior to galvanising them. Any welding slags
found remaining on galvanised gratings shall be rejected. Such rejected galvanised gratings shall be
removed from the Site immediately.
The galvanised gratings shall be tested for the zinc mass coating. The testing shall be performed at a
PSB accredited laboratory using magnetic or electronic thickness measuring devices.
Send all selected gratings for testing within one week of their delivery to the Site before their installation.
2% of the total number of gratings delivered to the Site subject to a minimum of three number of gratings
shall be selected for testing. The zinc mass coating to be tested shall be carried out at regular points
on the surfaces of the steel angles and flats. The total no. of points tested for each grating shall be not
less than 32. The results of the test at every point for one grating shall be averaged to determine the
average zinc coating weight of that grating.
The mass of zinc coating on each grating shall comply with the following average coating mass:
Average Coating Mass Minimum Permissible Value

Thickness Of Steel
(g per m2) (g per m2)
6mm thick and over 610 505
3mm to 6mm 505 395
1.5mm to 3mm 395 325
Under 1.5mm 325 250
Gratings which fail to achieve the requirements specified above shall be dealt with as follows:
(a) The SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a
charge against the Contractor for any grating where the zinc coating mass is less than the
average coating mass but greater than the minimum permissible value as specified.
(b) The batch of galvanised gratings from which any one of the representative samples fails to
achieve the minimum permissible value as specified shall be rejected. In addition, the SO Rep
shall exercise his right under clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose a charge against
the Contractor for each such failure. The rejected gratings may be sent for re-galvanising and
may be accepted if tests show that they comply with the requirements of the zinc mass coating.
18.32 METAL GRILLE TO COURTYARD, STAIRCASE AND END COMMON CORRIDOR
Provide and fix metal grille to courtyard (1st storey dwelling unit), to match with the front metal grille
gate and for staircase and end common corridor to the size and profile all as shown in the Drawings.
18.33 TEMPORARY BARRICADE MILD STEEL GATE
Where shown, provide and fix temporary barricade ms gate at first storey level to each and every
staircase. The profile, sizes, pattern etc shall be as shown in the Drawings. Fix temporary barricade
as and when required and instructed by the SO Rep. Remove such temporary barricades when
required by the SO Rep and to make good all Defect arising thereof.
Paint gate as specified in Section 23 - "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses
under it.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(30)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-31
18.34 MILD STEEL RAILINGS TO STAIRCASES
Provide and install mild steel railings to staircases as shown in the Drawings. The mild steel hollow
section handrail, balusters, hollow section support and flat bottom rail shall be to the dimensions and
sizes as shown. The mild steel hollow section supports shall be securely fixed into the structure as
detailed. All welded joints shall be fully welded and all welding shall be properly sanded down to a
smooth finish.
18.35 DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARDS AND STOREY INDICATOR PLATES
Provide and fix directional signboards and storey indicator plates to sizes and at locations as shown in
the Drawings. The directional signboards and storey indicator plates shall be made of 2mm thick
aluminium alloy sheets or plates conforming to BS EN 485, 515, 573 or ASTM B209 and finished with
15 microns thick anodic coating. The fixing of these items shall be carried out with stainless steel
screws with nylon plugs. Unless otherwise specified, the letterings and numberings shall be engraved
and painted in black.
18.36 MOTORISED ROLLER SHUTTER TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHAMBER
18.36.1 Scope
Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle bolts,
bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to
centralised refuse chamber.
18.36.2 Material
The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.5mm thick (minimum) zincalume steel curtain permanently
lock-seamed to form a continuous curtain or 0.8mm thick (minimum) galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick
natural anodised aluminium curtain interlocking slats with end clips to secure laterally. The guide rails
of the roller shutter shall be made of aluminium.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and wrap it around
the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material as the curtain to house the entire drum
assembly and integral chainwheel complete with chain for manual operation.
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the top one-third
of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment to prevent metal to metal
contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
18.36.3 Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Galvanised steel and zincalume
steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colourbond silicone modified polyester
coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected by the SO Rep.
18.36.4 Power Supply And Operating System
Tap power supply for the motor and all control devices of the motorised roller shutter from a 10 Ampere
TPN isolator in the centralised refuse chamber. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the
motor. Provide a built-in-auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall
automatically stop and reverse when it is obstructed during the closing operation. Either limit switch or
motor overload device shall be used for the activation of the stop and reverse action.
Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof plastic control box and mount it inside a
recess opening (325mm height x 225mm width x 160mm depth) located outside and on the right hand
side of the centralised refuse chute chamber viewing from the front. Provide the control box with
"Camlock" model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key No. 01/3S/N65; or other approved. The control box
shall contain "Up", "Down" and "Stop" buttons and one lever override control to switch from electrical to
manual operation. Indicating arrows pointing upwards and downwards shall be marked on the "Up"
and "Down" buttons. The motorised roller shutter shall stop automatically after the end of the opening
or closing operation. The "Down" button shall be incorporated with a delay timer to enable the motorised
roller shutter to commence closing after a preset time upon activation of the "Down" button. The setting
range of the timer shall be from 0 to 3 minutes. Set the timer at the 1 minute value.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(31)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-32
18.36 MOTORISED ROLLER SHUTTER TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHAMBER (CONT’D)
18.36.4 Power Supply And Operating System (Cont’d)
A second lever override control shall be provided within the centralised refuse chamber. When
activated, all lever override controls shall enable the roller shutter to be lifted up (minimum 1.5m height)
manually from the outside as well as from the inside. The outside control shall enable entry to the
refuse chamber in case of electrical breakdown or other emergency. The operator shall then be able
to roll up the shutter using the chain provided within the chamber.
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide.
Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed sections, plans, relevant details and accessories to
the SO Rep for approval prior to ordering the system.
18.37 CONTRACT SIGNBOARD
Provide, erect and maintain a contract signboard. The size of the contract signboard shall not be smaller
than the dimensions shown in the Drawings. However, the other details shown in the Drawings shall
serve as a guide. Before erecting the contract signboard, submit details and drawings of the proposed
contract signboard for the approval of the SO Rep. The position and location of the contract signboard
at the Site shall be approved by the SO Rep. The contract signboard shall be erected within one month
from the commencement of the Works and shall not be taken down without prior approval of the
SO Rep.
18.38 RESERVED
18.39 HOUSE NUMBER
(a) For Flat
Provide and fix wrought iron house number to each and every unit of flats. The house number
shall be fixed on to wrought iron steel plate by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes
or other concealed method. The wrought iron steel plate shall be painted in a colour matching
the wrought iron steel gate. The painting of wrought iron house number shall similar to the
wrought iron steel gates. The colour of the house number shall be approved by the SO Rep and
the house number shall be clearly visible. All numberings shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(b) For Shops And Other Premises
Unless otherwise specified, provide and fix bronze anodised aluminium or powder coated
aluminium house number to each and every unit of shops and other premises. The house
number shall be fixed by heavy duty high bond double sided adhesive tapes or other concealed
method. The anodic coating to aluminium shall be 15 microns minimum. All numberings shall
be as shown in the Drawings.
18.40 SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE ROOMS
Provide and fix sign plates to all services rooms as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified,
the sign plates shall be fixed on the doors. The thickness of sign plates shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The "Danger" sign plates shall be fixed onto door leaf and shall not block the ventilation
louvres. The letterings shall be engraved in red.
The "No Smoking" sign plates shall be provided for all switchrooms, PUB switchrooms and lift machine
rooms.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(32)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-33
18.41 SIGN PLATES FOR SERVICE DUCTS
Provide and fix sign plates to service ducts as shown in the Drawings. The sign plates shall be fixed at
position as shown in the Drawings.
18.42 LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE FOR TYPICAL UPPER STOREY
Provide and fix lift notice signages to the walls of every lift landing from the second storey to the top
most storey. The position of the signages shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall be
made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder coated aluminium
sheet cut outs with sign face of acrylic sheet as shown. The acrylic sheet shall be reverse silkscreen
graphics. The floor number indication shall be 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. The wordings
on the aluminium sheet shall be silkscreen printed and the colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design
for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone
number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. The
signages shall have an additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as
The entire sign hall be mounted onto the wall as shown in the Drawings. Provide shop drawings and a
sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
The powder coating shall be superdurable architectural powder coating and shall comply with Clause
18.7 "Polyester Powder Coating On Aluminium". The colour of the powder coating shall be approved
by the SO Rep.
18.43 LIFT NOTICE SIGNAGE AND NOTICE BOARD AT FIRST STOREY LIFT LOBBY
Provide and fix lift notice signage and notice board to the wall at the first storey lift lobby. The position
shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The signages shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using powder
coated aluminium sheet. The thickness of the aluminium frame and aluminium sheet shall be as shown
in the Drawings. The block number indication shall be of 3-dimensional injection moulded letterings. It
shall be attached with a notice board with an openable door panel. The hinges for the doors shall be
concealed. The sign face of the notice board shall be polycarbonate panel with reverse silkscreen
graphics and letterings.
Seek and obtain approval from the SO Rep on the actual block number, block layout plan, the design
for the logo and telephone number before providing the lift notice signages. The logo and telephone
number of essential maintenance services shall be provided in reverse self-adhesive sticker. Hardwood
frame with softboard covered with fine felt of approved colour shall be fitted in the notice board. The
signages shall have additional housing using extruded polycarbonate frame and acrylic panels as
shown in the Drawings. The entire sign shall be mounted onto the walls as shown in the Drawings.
The details shown shall serve as a guide. Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of
the lift notice plate, notice board and casing. Provide shop drawings to the SO Rep for approval prior
to the installation of the plate.
Site measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of the lift notice signages and notice boards.
Provide shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(33)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-34
18.44 PRECINCT DIRECTIONAL SIGNBOARD
The Contractor shall provide and fix precinct directional signboard to the details as shown in the
Drawings. The locations and number of precinct directional signboards shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an
openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the extruded
aluminium frame shall be as shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main
frame to ensure the signboard is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel
brackets as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut
out compartment with A2 size panel map sign face using acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics.
The bottom of the signage shall be perforated with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium
sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminaries
for illumination. The whole signboard shall be mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings.
The precinct layout shall be made known later in the course of the Works.
Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep for approval prior to their installations.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
accessories including connection with wiring from the nearest connection box.
by the SO Rep.
18.45 SIGNBOARD FOR BLOCK ENTRANCE
Provide and fix one number of signboard for the block entrance to the details as shown in the Drawings
for each building block. The signboard shall be located at the position as decided by the SO Rep. The
signboard shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an openable door panel.
The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The thickness of the aluminium frame shall be as
shown in the Drawings. Approved gasket shall be used along the main frame to ensure the signboard
is watertight. The frame shall be reinforced with zinc plated mild steel brackets with washers and screws
as shown in the Drawings. The signboard shall have powder coated aluminium sign face cut out text
mounted with 3-dimensionmal injection moulded lettering/number. The signboard shall be perforated
with holes as shown. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and acrylic sheet shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The signboard shall be fitted with luminaries for illumination. The whole signboard shall be
mounted to a concrete slab as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and fix all electrical cables. ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
by the SO Rep.
18.46 ILLUMINATED DIRECTIONAL SIGNANGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK
Provide and fix one number of illuminated directional signage for estate block per ingress as shown in
the Drawings. The signage shall be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with an
openable door panel. The hinges for the door panel shall be concealed. The sign face shall be
polycarbonate with text using transparent vinyl sticker reverse paste. The thickness of the aluminium
frame and polycarbonate shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be
attached to the signages as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a
100mm diameter powder coated aluminium support in ribbed detail and interlock with powder coated
multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in
the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall be made known later in the course of the Works.
Provide and fix all electrical cables, ballast, lamp holders, fluorescent tubes and other necessary lighting
by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(34)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-35
18.47 DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGES FOR ESTATE BLOCK
Provide and fix directional signages for estate blocks as shown in the Drawings. The locations and the
number of directional signages for estate blocks shall be as shown in the Drawings. The signages shall
be made from powder coated extruded aluminium frame with sign face using polycarbonate with text
front sticker paste using reflective stickers. The thickness of the aluminium sheet and polycarbonate
shall be as shown in the Drawings. Powder coated aluminium sheet shall be attached to the signages
as shown in the Drawings. The directional signages shall be mounted to a 100mm diameter powder
coated aluminium pole interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. A panel to house the layout map
shall be provided as shown. The panel shall be powder coated aluminium sheet of the thickness as
shown with sign face of acrylic sheet with reverse silkscreen graphics. It shall be mounted to the powder
coated aluminium support interlock with powder coated multi slot ring. The entire sign shall be mounted
to the floor embedded down to the ground as shown in the Drawings. The actual block numbers shall
be made known later in the course of the Works. Submit shop drawings and a sample to the SO Rep
for approval prior to their installations.
by the SO Rep.
18.48 FASTENING DEVICES FOR ALL EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES AND ATTACHMENTS
SUCH AS FLUOROCARBON COATED ALUMINIUM SUNBREAKERS, LOUVRES & PANEL
For all external building features and attachments like aluminium sunbreakers, cladding , clothes drying
racks, roof features; and metal railings/parapets exposed to the weather like those along common
access and private balconies .
The screws, bolts and nuts, rivets, brackets and other fastening devices shall be of stainless steel. The
finished stainless steel rivets shall have a combined large circular flat disc and dome-shaped head after
formation. The design and use of the stainless steel rivets shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
In the situation where the fastening devices like bolts and nuts are to be embedded in concrete or
approved structural grout, approved galvanised bolts and nuts and other approved galvanised fastening
devices can be used. The requirements in this clause shall take precedence over those specified in
other clauses on external building features and attachments and roof features, on the use of screws,
bolts and nuts, rivets and brackets and other fastening devices.
18.49 HOT DIPPED GALVANISED STEEL RAILING TO AIR CONDITIONER LEDGE
Provide and install hot dipped galvanised steel railings to air conditioner ledge as shown in the
Drawings. The galvanised steel section handrail and support shall be to the dimensions and sizes as
shown. The galvanised steel support shall be securely fixed into the structure as detailed. All welded
joints shall be fully welded and shall be properly sanded down to a smooth finish.
The galvanised railing shall be zinc coated by hot-dipped galvanising process in accordance with
Clause 18.31 “Hot Dipped Galvanised Gratings”.
The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings showing the method of fixing, the detailed sections,
plans and relevant details and accessories, complete with PE endorsement and design calculations
(where fixing details deviate from Drawings) to the SO Rep for approval prior to the installation.
Galvanised steel surfaces shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer and one
coat of lead and chromate-free primer and painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel
paint. The finishing colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(35)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-36
18.50 INTERNAL ALUMINIUM CLOTHES DRYING SLOT-RACKS
Provide and fix natural anodized aluminium clothes drying slot-racks together with the necessary
components as shown in the Drawings. A pair of aluminium clothes drying slot-racks shall be fixed to
the ceiling of kitchen or service yard with “Hilti” M8H-10/37P8 stud or other approved for all the flats.
Aluminium section and components shall be finished with natural anodic coating to minimum thickness
of 15 microns. Samples of aluminium clothes drying rack shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval
prior to installation.
18.51 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING
18.51.1 General
Provide and fix natural anodised extruded aluminium framed windows and glazing complete with all the
relevant components to the locations as shown in the Drawings.
Such extruded aluminium frame windows shall include sliding, casement, top hung, aluminium cills and
others as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium sliding and casement windows provided shall comply in all
aspects with SS 212:2007 (but excluding the modularly co-ordinating sizes).
18.51.2 Performance
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide only. The Contractor shall submit shop
drawings to ensure compliance with SS212:2007.
18.51.3 Material
(a) Aluminium Alloy
All extruded aluminium members shall be fabricated from designated treated aluminium alloy
6063T4, 6063T5 or 6063T6 complying with SS212:2007.
(b) Accessories
All screws, nuts, bolts, washers, fasteners and all other accessories to be used in the
fabrication of the windows shall be stainless steel type 304 minimum complying with BS EN
10088. All screws (except screws used to fix stainless steel hinges), bolts and other
accessories which are exposed shall be in approved matching colour. All screws used to fix
stainless steel friction hinges shall be approved stainless steel screws precoated with epoxy
coating as shown in the Drawings.
(c) Rollers, Guides And Stoppers
Rollers used shall be made of hardened synthetic resin with ball bearing at their cores. Guides
and stoppers shall also be of synthetic resin material and the colour of exposed parts shall be
approved matching colour.
(d) Joints & Gaskets
All joints shall be sealed with synthetic butyl rubber and all inner frames shall have insertion of
gaskets or other air gaskets or other air-tightening materials complying with SS 212:2007.
Gaskets shall be neoprene or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).
(e) Safety Device
Safety device shall be incorporated into all the glazed sliding window panels to prevent them
from jumping track and shall be in approved matching colour.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(36)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-37
18.51 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING (CONT’D)
18.51.3 Material (Cont’d)
(e) Safety Device
from the frame during and after installation. For sliding windows, allow for the provision of
safety lock device or stopper, made of 6-nylon or high density polyethylene or other approved
material (2 no. per sash), to be securely housed into the top rail of head section to perform this
function. The dimension tolerance for gap between the safety device and sliding panel shall
comply with SS 212:2007. The sliding window shall pass the Jumping Track Test specified in
SS 212:2007.
(f) Weather Strip
All weather strip shall be of approved neoprene or polypropylene pile or ethylene propylene
diene monomer (EPDM).
(g) Hardware
For sliding windows, crescent lock shall be provided and shall be of stainless steel type 304 or
316, aluminium die cast or zinc die cast with double locking device. For casement and top
hung windows, the cam handles shall be of aluminium or zinc die cast. For casement with
integrated top hung window located directly above WC at bathroom, the cam handle shall be
integrated with a key lock set. Friction hinges shall be of stainless steel type 304 (minimum). All
crescent locks and handles shall be finished in approved matching colour.
(i) Torque Testing Requirement For Crescent Lock
The crescent locks shall comply with the following torque requirements:
(a) Average torque shall achieve a minimum value of 7 Nm;

(b) Individual torque shall not fall below 6.5 Nm.
(ii) Resistance To Wear Test Requirements For Casement Handles
The casement handles when tested in accordance with BS 6462 clause 5.2.3 shall
comply with the following requirements:
(a) Cam handle in fully engaged position after 35 N was removed. Requirement: pull-
in shall not be reduced to less than 0.2 mm.
(b) Torque to turn the Fastener Handle to the fully engaged position. Requirement:
The operating torque when measured shall not exceed 5 Nm.
(iii) Requirements of Improved Stainless Steel Friction Stays (with four screws)
The stainless steel friction stays shall comply with the following requirements:
Test Requirements
Resistant to 300N for 5 second Passed
obstructed stay
track Destruction Test Arm beng at 40 kg (392N) minimum
Strength of 200N for 5 second Passed

maximum Stay track permanent deformed at 65
opening stop Destruction Test
kg (638N) minimum
1000N for 1 min Passed
Resistance to Stay track bent at 130 kg (1275N)
Destruction Test
accidental minimum
loading Sash remains intact 150 kg (1472N)
minimum
Passed (no adjustment throughout the
50,000 cycles
Endurance of test)
Fastener Passed (no adjustment throughout the
100,000 cycles
test)
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(37)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-38
18.51 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING (CONT'D)
18.51.4 Finishes

(b) Combined coating to comply with JIS H8602, except that the minimum thickness of the coating
shall be 9 microns for the anodic coat and 7 microns for the liquid organic coat.
All natural anodised extruded aluminium windows shall not be allowed to rub or slide against each other
papers, cardboard or other protective media which shall not be allowed to get damp. The complete
window installation shall be protected against damage by contaminated moisture, cement and plaster
splashes or droppings. The materials to be used for protection shall be in accordance with the
Employer.
The design and profile of all the anodised aluminium sliding windows, casement windows and
top hung shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(b) Detailing
Any clearance spaces between the window work size and the work surrounding the window
shall be sealed with an approved sealant when fixing is completed.
Window Frame Fabrication tolerances :
1 Length +/- 1.5 mm

2 Straightness +/- 1.5 mm
3 Accuracy of angles +/- 2o
4 Accuracy of sides +/- 1 mm
5 Squareness +/- 4 mm
(Diagonals D1-D2)
(c) Application of Sealant
as shown in the Drawings and ensure that all joints are sealed water tight and finished to a
neat flush joint with the window frame. The application of sealant shall comply with the
manufacturer's guides and instructions.
All sealant applicators shall possess a minimum of one year working experience on sealing
works endorsed by the sealant suppliers in the HDB Materials List. A list of these workers shall
be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval before they are allowed to
commence work. They are also required to wear identity pass to prove that they are approved
sealant applicators.
contaminants that may affect adhesion.
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(38)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 18-39
18.51 NATURAL ANODISED EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS AND GLAZING (CONT’D)
18.51.8 Glazing
(a) Glass
All glazing panel of aluminium sliding window shall be fixed to the inner aluminium frames in the
factory as a complete system before delivery to the Site. All glazing of casement and top hung
can be fixed to the aluminium frames at the Site. All glass shall be relatively distortion-free. All
glass except laminated glass supplied shall comply with BS 952.
Where shown in the Drawings, all tinted glass shall be 5mm ±0.2mm green gray/gray tinted float
glass with a shading coefficient of 0.75.
Glazing to adjustable louvre window between kitchen and service balcony/courtyard shall be 6
mm ±0.2 mm clear float glass.
Glazing panel to vent of bath/w.c. shall be obscured wired glass of thickness 6mm ±0.2mm.
Glass panel tolerances :
1 Height +/- 2 mm
2 Width +/- 2 mm
3 Straightness of edge +/- 1 mm
(b) Laminated Glass
Laminated glass supplied shall comply with SS 341 : 2001. The PVB interlayer for laminated
glass shall be from Solutia (Saflex RA41 or Saflex RB41) or Dupont (Butacite B52) or other
approved. The manufacturer’s logo shall be printed on the laminated glass.
(c) Glazing Accessories
(d) Protection
installation.
(e) Replacements
(f) Fixing
edges.
(g) Cleaning Up
Section 19/.....
BLDG17/S18.DOCX(39)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-1
SECTION 19
FLOOR FINISHES
19.1 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SCREED
19.1.1 Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement as specified in Clause 4.1 "Cement".
19.1.2 Aggregate
Aggregate shall comply with SS EN 12620. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be 10mm.
19.1.3 Preparation Of Surfaces
All surfaces to be screeded shall be clean and damp but not wet before commencement of screeding
work.
19.1.4 Locations
Non-structural concrete screed shall be of Grade 25 concrete with 10mm maximum size aggregate. It
shall be laid to floor surfaces in locations specified in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of Screed/Rendering"
and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
The screed shall be laid to fall towards water outlets or scupper drains and to finish to a surface directed
by the SO Rep.
19.1.5 Thickness
The minimum thickness of screed shall be 15mm for staircase half-landings and 25mm elsewhere or
19.1.6 Finishing And Curing
All concrete screeds shall be finished with a minimum of two passes power trowel. The finishing shall
be done without any sprinkling of cement dust, cement grout or water to the surface of the screed.
Ensure that the crew of the finishing team is sufficient to complete the job before final set of the concrete
screed.
The concrete screed shall be moist cured immediately for seven days or with approved curing
compound or other approved methods.
For areas that are not accessible for power trowelling, the screed shall be finished with hand steel
trowelling.
19.1.7 Reference Panel And Sample Panel
A "Reference Panel" shall be designated by the SO Rep reflecting the current standard of the industry
which is expected of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make himself available to view the designated
reference sample and establish a common understanding of the required standard.
At the commencement of screeding work, at least one "Sample Panel" shall be laid to the standard of
the Reference Panel. The Sample Panel shall be approved by the SO Rep and all remaining screeding
shall be carried out to the minimum standard of the approved Sample Panel. Sub-standard Works shall
be rejected and replaced to the established standard.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-2
19.2 CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING
19.2.1 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed
Factory pre-packed dry-mixed screed shall be used for all floor screeding. Approved pre-packed
waterproof screed (dry mix of cement and sand with powder waterproofing additive) shall be used for
areas where waterproof screed is specified. For mortar screeding to other floor areas, which do not
require waterproofing, approved pre-packed floor screed shall be used.
The pre-packed floor screed and waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right amount
of water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproofing screed shall comply with the following
performance requirements when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
Prepacked Waterproofing Screed

S/No Type of Evaluation Testing Method Requirement
 25 N per mm2
1 Average compressive strength ASTM C 109 : 2001
 40 N per mm2
2 Water penetration under 0.2/kgf/cm2 HDB Method (DIN 1084:Pt 5)  5mm at 28 days
3 Shrinkage Coutinho Ring No crack
4 Flow ASTM C 109 : 2001 80% -120%
5 Water absorption ASTM C 413 : 2001 < 5%
6 Flexural strength ASTM C 348 : 1997 > 2 N per mm2
7 Water Retentivity BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988 > 90%
Stiffening time
BS EN 1015 –9 : 1999 a)  360 mins
8 a) 1.0 N/ mm2
(Method A) b)  420 mins
b) 2.0 N/ mm2
Shrinkage value
9 Volume change ASTM C 827 : 2001 of not more than
1%
Prepacked Floor Screed

 25 N per mm2
1 Average compressive strength ASTM C 109 : 2001
 40 N per mm2
2 Shrinkage Coutinho Ring No crack
3 Flow ASTM C 109 : 2001 80% -120%
4 Water absorption ASTM C 413 : 2001 < 5%
5 Flexural strength ASTM C 348 : 1997 > 2 N per mm2
6 Water Retentivity BS 4551 : Pt 1 : 1988 > 90%
Stiffening time
BS EN 1015 –9 : 1999 a)  360 mins
7 a) 1.0 N/ mm2
(Method A) b)  420 mins
b) 2.0 N/ mm2
Shrinkage value of
8 Volume change ASTM C 827 : 2001
not more than 1%
For screeding of large areas, ready-mix screed may be proposed, subject to the approval of the SO
Rep. Contractor shall submit the mix design to obtain the SO Rep’s approval. Trial mix shall be
conducted to verify the mix in meeting the performance requirements.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-3
19.2 CEMENT AND SAND SCREED/RENDERING (CONT’D)
19.2.2 Preparation Of Surfaces
Before screeding, prepare the concrete surfaces by cleaning and damping slightly. Freshly laid screed,
where exposed to direct sunlight shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and
cracking.
19.2.3 Locations (Prepacked Screed/Rendering)
Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in
Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule Of Screed/Rendering" and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings.
Except for rendering to treads and risers of stairs, the rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets
or scupper drains, and finished to a level directed by the SO Rep. The gradient of the fall shall be
between 10 to 20mm per metre. Pre-packed screed to treads of stairs shall be laid level and finished to
a consistent fine rough texture to give a non-skid surface. The minimum thickness of the screed shall
be 15mm or as shown in the Drawings.
Where waterproof membrane is applied around the pipes and water outlets, pre-packed waterproof
screed shall be laid to cover the waterproof membrane, as shown in the Drawings.
19.2.4 Water Test To Internal Floor Slab
Water test shall be conducted to check the watertightness of the Bath/WC floor and the floor area
surrounding the pipes and water outlet in the kitchen and balcony.
In conducting the water test, the floor water outlet shall be blocked off temporarily with a polythene
sheet or by other suitable means and the floor shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 10mm
for 24 hours. For water testing the area surrounding the pipes or water outlets in the kitchen and balcony
where floor tile is not provided, temporary blocking shall be provided to confine water around the pipes
or water outlets. The water blocking detail shall be effective to maintain the water for the entire period
of testing, for the test result to be accepted.
The underside of the floor slab and the base of the adjacent walls, the discharge pipe, the pipe joints,
the pipe cleaning eyes shall be checked for signs of seepage and leakage, within half an hour after the
test period.
Water test shall be conducted at the Bath/WC floor and the pipe surround and water outlet in the kitchen
and balcony at the following stages of work :
Stage Of Work Frequency Of Water Test
Within one month after the application of the

All units
waterproof membrane and the protective screed
Within one month before handing over inspection All units
In the event that any seepage or leakage occurs, the Contractor shall be required to rectify the defective
Works as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. After the rectification, the
same water test procedure shall be repeated.
19.2.5 Rendering To Lift Pit
Approved pre-packed mortar shall be used to render the lift pit. Unless otherwise shown, the rendering
shall be of an average thickness of 18mm.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-4
19.2.6 Schedule Of Screed/Rendering
Unless otherwise specified, screed/rendering shall be laid to all floor surfaces as specified in the
Schedule below and also to other locations as shown in the Drawings :
Prepacked
Prepacked
Accommodation Location Waterproof Remarks
Screed
Screed
Kitchen *
Bath/WC *
Service Yard *
Bedroom *
All residential
units Required only
where floor finishes
Living /Dining *
are specified for
these locations.
Household
*
Shelter
Wash Area Next

To Refuse Chute *
Chamber
Wash Area *
Lift Lobby *
Utility *
Pump Room, For screeding of
Switch Room & * large area, Concrete
All Residential Screed (Grade 25)
MDF Room
Block Common may be used subject
Areas Public Staircase to SO Rep’s
*
Landing approval
Access Corridor &

*
Void Deck
Risers & Treads No rendering is

Of Public * required for precast
Staircase staircase
Room & Display
*
Area
Kitchen * Waterproof screed
Shop shall be used where
Bath/WC * the shop is at the
2nd storey & above
Service Yard *
*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-5
19.2.6 Schedule Of Screed/Rendering (Cont'd)
Prepacked
Prepacked
Accommodation Location Waterproof Remarks
Screed
Screed
Display Area *
Market produce Preparation Area * Waterproof screed
Lock-Up Shop shall be used where
Toilet * the shop is at the
2nd storey & above
Toilet * Waterproof screed
shall be used where
the wet market is at
Wet Market Bin Area * the 2nd storey &
above
Switch Room *
Refreshment
*
Area
Stall Waterproof screed
(Preparation & * shall be used where
Serving Area) the eating house is
Eating House at the 2nd storey &
Toilet/Bath/WC *
above
Wash Area *
Bin Area *
Room & Store *
Waterproof screed
shall be used where
Kitchen & Toilet * the restaurant is at
Restaurant the 2nd storey &
above
Service Area *
*Denotes the specified screed/rendering.
19.3 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT BATHROOM/TOILET,

KITCHEN, BALCONY AND SERVICE YARD
The Contractor shall provide and lay a liquid-applied flexible non-cementitious (water-based) waterproof
membrane or other approved flexible water-based waterproofing membrane to bathroom/toilet, kitchen
and service yard. The waterproof membrane shall be applied over the entire floor of the bathroom/toilet
with an upturn onto the pipes, door kerb and walls. The upturn shall be of minimum 50mm onto the
pipes and minimum 200mm onto the walls. The upturn onto kerb shall be as shown in the Drawings.
In the kitchen and service yard, the waterproofing membrane shall be applied around the floor water
outlets. Application shall be limited to a radius of 400mm from the centre of the outlet unless otherwise
specified.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-6

KITCHEN, BALCONY AND SERVICE YARD (CONT'D)
19.3.2 Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane
The flexible non-cementitious (water-based) waterproof membrane or other approved water-based

waterproofing membrane shall comply with the following performance/product specifications when
subjected to the specified laboratory testing:
Characteristics/Properties Testing Method Specifications
1) Verification of base polymer FTIR, DTA and TGA Polymer which undergoes
hydrolysis should not be
used
2) Volatile content TGA < 50%
3) Resistance to water penetration 0.2 DIN 1048, Pt 5: 1991 Depth of penetration should
Kg/cm² for 12 hrs (3 specimens are to (HDB METHOD) be 0
be cured for 3 days)
Observe : Depth of penetration (mm)
4) Adhesion to substrate (after 3-day ASTM D4541:93  0.2 N/mm2

cure) (N/mm2 )
condition as at cast
water immersion
5) Tensile strength (N/mm²) after 3-day ASTM D412 : 98a  1.2 N/mm2
cure
- Before aging
- After aging at 50oC, 14 days )
- Change in tensile strength (%) )
After immersion in the following )
chemicals for 72 hrs. at room temp: ) Value  1.0 N/mm2
a) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl Change in ) & -ve change  20%
tensile strength (%) ) no limit for +ve change
b) 1.25% (v/v) NH4OH Change in )
tensile strength (%) )
c) 3.70% (v/v) HCl Change in tensile )
strength (%) )
6) Elongation at Break (%) after 3-day ASTM D412 : 98a  150%

cure
- Before Aging
- After Aging at 50oC, 14 days )
Change in Tensile Strength (%) )
- After immersion in the following )
chemicals for 72hrs at room temp: )
)
a) 0.5% (v/v) NaOCl
Change in Elongation at break ) Value 120 %
(%) ) and -ve change  20%
b) 1.25%(v/v) NH4OH ) no limit for +ve change
)
Change in Elongation at break )
(%) )
c) 3.7% (v/v) HCl )
Change in Elongation at break )
(%) )
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-7

KITCHEN, BALCONY AND SERVICE YARD (CONT'D)
19.3.2 Specification Of The Waterproofing Membrane (Cont'd)
Characteristics/Properties Testing Method Specifications
7) Crack Bridging ASTM C836 : 95 a) No cracking at 2mm width

b) No cracks after 10 cycles
of stretching and closing to
a width of 1mm.
8) Hardness (after 2- hour cure) ASTM D2240 : 95  30

(Shore A)
9) Set to touch dry testing ASTM D1640 : 89 Should touch dry within 60 min.
Notes: 1. The concrete test block for the application of membrane under ASTM 412 (98a) and
ASTM C836 (95) shall have a compressive strength of 40 5N per mm2.
2. The thickness of the membrane applied for the testing shall be equal to or less than the
recommended thickness. It shall not deviate more than 0.2mm from the recommended
thickness.
Where the waterproofing membrane span across any joint which is likely to crack, the waterproofing
membrane shall be reinforced. To ensure compatibility with the waterproofing membrane, the
reinforcement shall form an integral part of the proprietary system for the flexible water-based
waterproofing membrane.
19.3.3 Application And Preparation Of Surface
The surface receiving the membrane shall be flat and even. For the surface of floor slab to be applied
with the membrane, the Contractor shall trowel the concrete to a level and smooth surface during
casting. Where concrete or brickwall surface receiving the membrane is rough and uneven, the
Contractor shall be required to level the surface with rendering.
45 degree mortar fillet with about 10mm leg length shall be formed to the edge between the floor and
wall or pipe. Prior to the application of the waterproofing membrane, the surface shall be prepared to
be free of dust and laitance, and wetted to damp without any surface water.
The Contractor shall apply the waterproofing membrane in two coats. The waterproof membrane if
packed in a two-part system shall be mechanically mixed with a proper mixer. The method of application
and the curing time between the two coats shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction
and/or recommendations. The Contractor shall provide measuring gauges for site checking of the wet
film thickness of the membrane at the time of application.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-8
19.4 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (COMMON AREAS AND NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS)
19.4.1 General
(a) Location and Extent
Provide and lay structure/texture, glazed and unglazed ceramic floor tiles to common areas, non-
residential units and to any locations as shown in the Drawings.
(b) Inconsistent Sizes
In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall within
the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all subclauses under it, the tiles
shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size groups.
(c) Embossment of Tiles
All ceramics tiles delivered to Site shall be embossed with brand name and country of origin at
the back of the tile. The brand name and country of origin should not deviate from the approved
tiles under the material listing, equivalent or alternative tile.
In the event that the country of origin deviates from the approved original, equivalent or
alternative tile, the SO’s Rep shall reserve the right to instruct Contractor to remove and replace
the tiles.
(d) Cut Tiles
All ceramics tiles delivered to site must be individually pressed and mould before rectification. In
the event that the SO’s Rep discovers any tile has been cut from a single larger tile, the SO’s
Rep shall reserve the right to instruct for the removal of all cut tiles and replaced.
19.4.2 Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles
The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the absolute
prerogative to select the type of tiles from the list of ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified
and no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep,
the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified comply with
the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it.
19.4.3 Testing Requirements
(a) Test Samples And Methods
All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The
test methods shall be in accordance with ISO 13006 unless otherwise stated.
(b) Test Certificate And Compliance Requirement
Provide test certificates by a testing laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the tests
mentioned in this clause and all other tests mentioned in the testing schedule.
Dimensional and surface quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be
accordance with Table A unless otherwise stated :
Table A : Requirements Compliance
Type of tile ISO 13006
(a) Structure/Texture Tile Annex G
(b) Glazed Tile Annex J
(c) Unglazed Tile Annex H
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-9
19.4 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (COMMON AREAS AND NON-RESIDENTIAL UNITS) (CONT’D)
(a) Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows :
Nominal Length Nominal Width Nominal Thickness
Structure/Texture Tile 300mm 300mm 9mm
Glazed Tile 200mm 200mm 8mm
Unglazed Tile 200mm 200mm 8mm
The dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance to the following :
Structure/
Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile
Texture Tile
(i) Length
The deviation, in %, of the
Not more than Not more than Not more
average length of each tile from
0.6% 0.75% than 0.75%
the average length of 10 test
specimens.
(ii) Width
average width of each tile from
0.6% 0.75% than 0.75%
the average width of 10 test
specimens.
(iii) Thickness
average thickness of each tile
5% 5% than 5%
from the average thickness of
10 test specimens.
(b) Surface Quality
The tiles shall be free from objectionable surface blemishes such as projections, depressions,
flakes, hairline cracks and bubbles. The tiles shall be level and regular in size with properly
formed corners and shall not be warped or deformed in any manner.
(c) Physical Properties
Structure/Texture Tile Glazed Tile Unglazed Tile
Water Absorption
Max of 0.5% Max of 6 % Max of 1%
Percent by mass
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-10
(d) Chemical Properties
(i) Staining Test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the latest
ISO 10545-14. The stain resistance shall be of Class 5 (stain
removed with running hot water) for the following staining
solutions:
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
(ii) Household stain : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the latest
resistance test ISO 10545-14. The stain resistance shall be of Class 5 (stain
solutions:
(a) Instant coffee (BS EN 16301) Brewed and freeze-dried

coffee powder 4g is solved in 100 ml hot (> 80 0C)
deionised water. Let it cool down to about 23 0C before
use.
(b) Freshly squeezed orange juice (at room temperature)
(iii) Slip Resistance : The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with
SS 485:2011.
Performance Criteria
The test shall be conducted under wet conditions using a
pendulum friction test method with a classification of X.
(iv) Reverse Staining : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :
Test (for Glazed Tile
only) (a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to
ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
shall also be checked for signs of tonality difference.
(b) Dry the tiles in a ventilating oven at 105oC for 48 hours.
(c) With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, “pond”

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height
of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or
glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total
“ponding” duration of 30 minutes.
(d) Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.
(e) Performance Criteria

The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces.
(v) In-Situ Slip : The contractor shall carry out two in-situ slip resistance tests
Resistance Test on floor tiles that have been laid at the common areas. The test
shall be conducted under wet conditions using a pendulum
friction test method, in accordance with SS 485: 2011. Each
test cover measurements over five different points. The
locations chosen for the two tests shall be at high pedestrian
traffic area, selected by SO Rep.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-11
(e) Slip Resistance Requirements For Outdoor Areas And Pedestrian Ramp Floor Finishes
(i) For Outdoor Areas
The slip resistance requirement for outdoor floor finishes shall be Classification X. The
slip resistance test shall be conducted under wet condition using a pendulum friction test
method in accordance with SS 485:2011.
(ii) For Pedestrian Ramp
The slip resistance requirement for pedestrian ramp floor finishes shall be Classification
W. The slip resistance test shall be conducted under wet condition using a pendulum
friction test method in accordance with SS 485:2011.
19.4.5 Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles
Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to locations as shown in the Drawings.
Structured / Unglazed Glazed

Accommodation Location
Textured tiles tiles tiles
Wash Area *
Refuse Chute Chamber *
Upper Floor Lift Lobby *
Ground Floor Lift Lobby *
Common
Areas Common corridor *
Void Deck *
Utility Room At Ground Floor
*
Lift Lobby
Toilet Adjoining Utility Room *
Stall
*
(Preparation And Serving Area)
Refreshment Area *
Eating House Toilet/Bath/W.C *
Bin Area *
Preparation Slab *
Wash Area *
Shoplet,
Toilet/Bath/W.C *
Lock-Up Shop
Display Area *
Market Produce
Shop, Bin Area *
Market Produce, Preparation Area *
Lock-Up Shop
Toilet *
Toilet *
Mini-Market Bin Area *
Floor *
Restaurant Toilet *
*Denotes the specified tile
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-12
19.4.6 Laying of Floor Tiles
The lift lobby, wash area, void deck and common corridor including the scupper drains shall be tiled.
The structured/textured ceramic floor tiles shall be laid to fall evenly towards water outlets. The gradient
of the fall shall be between 10 to 20mm per metre. Movement joints shall be provided at appropriate
locations and approved by the SO Rep. Movement joints shall be provided at not more than 6m centres.
UPVC expansion/movement joints shall be used and its colour shall match the floor tiles and approved
by the SO Rep.
Provide complete set of workshop drawings showing the laying pattern of floor tiles and/or wall tiles of
void deck, lift lobbies and access balconies, wash areas and other locations where tiling work is
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed section and other relevant
details required by the SO Rep. These drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to
the laying of floor tiles and/or wall tiles.
19.5 GLAZED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES FOR KITCHEN, SERVICE YARDS AND HOUSEHOLD
SHELTER
19.5.1 General
(a) Location For Laying Glazed Porcelain Tiles
Provide and lay rectified glazed porcelain floor tiles to kitchen, service yards, household shelter
and to any other locations shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall produce test reports from
accredited testing laboratory to show compliance with the specified requirements. The test
reports shall be submitted to SO Rep before commencement of the sample unit.
(b) Sorting Of Floor Tiles
In the event that the glazed porcelain floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but
fall within the allowable tolerances as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it,
the tiles shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other size
groups.
(c) Embossment of tiles
All glazed porcelain tiles delivered to Site must be embossed with brand name and country of
origin at the back of the tile. The brand name and country of origin should not deviate from the
approved tiles under the material listing, equivalent or alternative tile. In the event that the country
of origin deviates from the approved original, equivalent or alternative tile, the SO Rep shall
reserve the right to instruct Contractor to remove and replace the tiles.
(d) Cut Tiles
All glazed porcelain tiles delivered to site must be individually pressed and mould before
rectification. In the event that the SO Rep discovers any tile has been cut from a single larger
tile, the SO Rep shall reserve the right to instruct for the removal of all cut tiles and replaced.
19.5.2 Approved Glazed Porcelain Floor Tiles
The type of glazed porcelain floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including
all subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding any approval by
the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such porcelain floor tiles for such locations as specified
comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all sub clauses under it.

All test samples shall be randomly chosen from the same batch of delivery by the SO Rep. The test
methods shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006 ( Annex G ) unless otherwise stated.

mentioned in this clause including all subclauses under it and all other tests specified in the "Schedule
Of Material Tests". The Contractor shall provide test certificate during sample unit inspection
regardless whether it is from the original tile supplier, equivalent or alternative. The test certificate is
applicable to one site only and cannot be reused for another site.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-13
SHELTER (CONT’D)
The body of the glazed porcelain tiles shall not be made of red clay. Dimensional and surface quality
requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006
(Annex G) unless otherwise specified:-
(a) Dimensions
The permissible dimensions shall be as follows:
Service Yards and

Kitchen Floor Tiles Household Shelter
Floor Tiles
Nominal Length 300mm 600mm 600mm* 300mm
Nominal Width 300mm 300mm 600mm 300mm
Nominal
7.5mm 9.0mm 10.0mm 7.5mm
Thickness
* 600mm X 600mm applicable only to the open kitchen concept projects only.
Notwithstanding that, the SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the dimension
for the floor tiles at Kitchen, service yards and household shelter.
The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows:
(i) Length : Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than
1.0mm from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width : Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than
1.0mm from the average width of 10 test specimens.
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile not deviate by more than
0.5mm from the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
Average thickness of 10 tiles shall not be less than the

respective nominal thickness.
(iv) Straightness Of Sides : Maximum deviation of each tile shall not exceed 1.0mm
of the work size and chamfer edge of 0.5mm.
(v) Rectangularity : Maximum deviation of each tile shall not exceed 1.0mm
of the work size.
(vi) Flatness of Surface : Maximum centre curvature of each tile shall not exceed
1.0mm of the work size.
The maximum edge curvature of each tile shall not exceed
The maximum warpage of each tile shall not exceed
(b) Surface Quality
(i) Water Absorption : Shall be a maximum of 0.5%

(ii) Modulus of Rupture : Minimum average strength shall not be less than 35 N
per mm2.
(iii) Breaking Strength : Not less than 1300 N
(iv) Colour Tone : The colour tone of the tiles shall be consistent. The SO
Rep reserves the right to reject tiles that show colour
tone variation including such tiles that have already been
laid.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-14
SHELTER (CONT’D)
(d) Chemical Properties (Cont’d)
(i) Staining Test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the
latest ISO 10545-14. The stain resistance shall be of Class
5 (stain removed with running hot water) for the following
staining solutions:
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
(ii) Household stain : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the
resistance test latest ISO 10545-14 The stain resistance shall be of Class
5 for the following staining solutions:
(a) Instant coffee (BS EN 16301) Brewed and freeze-

dried coffee powder 4g is solved in 100 ml hot
(> 800C) deionised water. Let it cool down to about
230C before use.
(b) Freshly squeezed orange juice (at room

temperature)
(iii) Resistance to household : Minimum GB

chemicals
(iv) Slip Resistance : The Slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with
the latest SS 485. The test shall be conducted under wet
conditions using a pendulum friction test method with a
classification of Y.
The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using
dry floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of
minimum 0.4.
19.5.5 Ceramic Tile Skirting to Service Yard
Supply and lay 300mm x 80mm x 8mm matching ceramic tile skirting to the service yard. The tile
skirting shall match with the floor finish and shall be approved by the SO Rep.
19.5.6 Laying Of Floor Tiles
Laying of floor tiles shall be in accordance with clause 19.7 “Laying Of Ceramic Floor Tiles” including
all subclauses under it.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-15
19.6 POLISHED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES FOR LIVING ROOMS, BEDROOMS AND DINING ROOMS
19.6.1 General
(a) Location For Laying Polished Porcelain Tiles
Provide and lay rectified polished porcelain floor tiles to living rooms, bedrooms, dining room and
to any other locations shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall produce test reports from accredited testing laboratory to show compliance
with the specified requirements. The test reports shall be submitted to SO Rep before
commencement of the sample unit.
(b) Sorting of Floor Tiles
In the event that the polished porcelain floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes
but fall within the allowable tolerances as specified in this Clause including all sub clauses under
it, the tiles shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other
size groups.
(c) Machine Buffing to Floor Tiles
The Contractor shall ensure that machine buffing is to be carried out for all living room/bedrooms
floor tiling works after application of the tile grout during the construction stage and before the
handover of flats.
The Contractor shall submit the specifications of the buffing machine for the SO Rep approval
before commencement of living room/bedroom floor tiling works. Machine buffing shall achieve
consistent finishing of the tile grout and the tiled surface to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. It shall
also ensure cleanliness and restore the floor surface from light soil and scuff marks.
Floor tiling defects shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the SO Rep and floor surface free from
debris and all particles including sand prior to the commencement of buffing. The Contractor
shall also ensure that the buffing process is carried out in accordance with supplier’s
recommendation and work method statement, subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The
Contractor shall bear all the costs and expenses incurred arising from usage of the buffing
machine and shall be responsible for its continuous and proper functioning.
(d) Embossment of tiles
All polished porcelain tiles delivered to Site must be embossed with brand name and country of
approved tiles under the material listing, equivalent or alternative tile.
alternative tile, the SO Rep shall reserve the right to instruct Contractor to remove and replace
the tiles.
(e) Cut Tiles
All polished porcelain tiles delivered to site must be individually pressed and mould before
rectification. In the event that the SO Rep discovers any tile has been cut from a single larger
tile, the SO Rep shall reserve the right to instruct for the removal of all cut tiles and replaced.
19.6.2 Approved Polished Porcelain Floor Tiles
The type of polished porcelain floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including
all sub clauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding any approval
by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such porcelain floor tiles for such locations as
specified comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all sub clauses under it.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-16
19.6 POLISHED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES FOR LIVING ROOMS, BEDROOMS HOUSEHOLD
SHELTERS WITH DOOR FACING LIVING ROOM AND DINING ROOMS (CONT’D)
test methods shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006 (Annex G) unless otherwise
specified.
(b) Test Certificates And Compliance Requirements
mentioned in this clause including all sub-clauses under it and all other tests specified in the
"Schedule Of Material Tests". The contractor shall provide test certificate during sample unit
inspection regardless whether it is from the original tile supplier, equivalent or alternative. The
test certificate is applicable to one site only and cannot be reused for another site.
The polished porcelain tile shall be rectified with the edges trimmed to achieve precise dimension for
its length and width. The polished porcelain tiles shall not be made of red clay. Dimensional and surface
quality requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be in accordance with the latest ISO
13006 (Annex G) unless other specified:
(a) Dimensions
The dimensions shall be as follows:
Nominal Length : 600 mm

Nominal Width : 600 mm
Thickness : 10 mm
(i) Length : Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than
0.6mm from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width : Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.6mm
from the average width of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than
0.5mm from the average thickness of 10 test specimens
Average thickness of 10 test specimens shall not be less than
9.5mm.
(iv) Straightness of : Maximum deviation of each tile shall not exceed 0.6mm of the
Sides work size and chamfer edge of 0.5mm.
(v) Rectangularity : Maximum deviation of each tile shall not exceed 0.6mm of the
work size.
(vi) Flatness of Surface : Maximum centre curvature of each tile shall not exceed 0.8mm
of the work size.
Maximum edge curvature of each tile shall not exceed 0.8mm
of the work size.
Maximum warpage of each tile shall not exceed 0.8mm of the
work size.
(b) Surface Quality
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-17
19.6 POLISHED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES FOR LIVING ROOMS, BEDROOMS HOUSEHOLD
SHELTERS WITH DOOR FACING LIVING ROOM AND DINING ROOMS (CONT’D)
19.6.4 Technical Specifications (Cont'd)
(c) Physical properties
(i) Water : Shall be a maximum of 0.1%
Absorption
(ii) Modulus Of Rupture : Minimum average strength shall not be less than 35 N per
mm2.
(iii) Strength : Not less than 1300 N

Breaking
(iv) Colour Tone : The colour tone of the tiles shall be consistent. The SO Rep
reserves the right to reject tiles that show colour tone
variation including such tiles that have already been laid.
(d) Chemical properties
(i) Staining Test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the
latest ISO 10545-14 The stain resistance shall be of Class
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
resistance test latest ISO 10545-14. The stain resistance shall be of Class

(> 800C) deionised water. Let it cool down to about
230C before use.

temperature)
(iii) Resistance to : Minimum GB

Household Chemicals
(iv) Slip Resistance : The Slip Resistance Test method shall be in accordance
with the latest SS 485. The test shall be conducted under
dry condition using dry floor friction test with a coefficient
of friction of minimum 0.4.
The laying of floor tiles shall be in accordance with clause 19.7 “Laying of Ceramic Floor Tiles” including
all sub-clauses under it.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-18
19.6.6 uPVC LAMINATED SKIRTING
Supply and lay up to 6.0m long x 75mm x 15mm thick uPVC laminated skirting to living, dining areas
and to any other locations where polished porcelain floor tiles are laid. uPVC laminated skirting need
not be provided for floor finishes to internal of household shelters.
(a) Testing of Materials
The Contractor is required to carry out all the tests stated below on the uPVC laminated skirting
sample. The cost of conducting the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. Any material test
that fails shall be considered not to have fulfilled the requirements. The costs of the failed tests
together with all expenses incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
(i) Emission & Heavy Metal Test: ASTM D5116-10 & EN71-3:2013
(ii) Colour Fastness : PSB standard 1500 hrs test
(iii) Flammability : UL94: 1997, Class 94 V-O
(iv) Shore Hardness Test : ASTM 2240, 70
(v) Water Absorption Test : ASTM D1037, After 2 hr – 0.3% (Max);
After 24 hr – 0.8% (Max)
(vi) Density / Specific Gravity : ASTM D792 – Method A 0.76g per cm3 (Min)
(b) Fixing Mechanism
(i) Concrete Wall:
There shall be 2 components to the uPVC laminated skirting.
- There should be a backing bracket which shall be bonded by adhesive and nailed
to the wall at no more than 1.2 metre interval.
- The uPVC laminated skirting cover shall come in one piece (without any joints)
along the whole run of each wall and to clip-on to the backing bracket.
(ii) Drywall:
There shall be 2 components to the uPVC laminated skirting.
- There should be a backing bracket which shall be bonded by adhesive and

screwed to the wall at about 1.2 metre intervals. The screws shall be about 25mm
long and penetrate the drywall and the vertical studs of the drywall frame.
- The uPVC laminated skirting cover shall come in one piece (without any joints)
along the whole run of each wall and to clip-on to the backing bracket.
(c) Corner Details
The uPVC laminated skirting is to have mitred joints at the corner interface and to have the
open ends capped with consistent design laminate.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-19
19.7 LAYING OF CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work is
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles
shall be laid with its joints to coincide with the joints of wall tiles.
Provide complete sets of unit floor plans showing the laying sequence of living floor tiles to ensure that
freshly laid tiles are not step upon before the tile adhesive is fully set. These drawings shall be submitted
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the laying of floor tiles.
19.7.2 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed
Approved pre-packed screed and waterproof screed shall be used for all floor screeding required or
floor tiling, as shown in the schedule for rendering/screeding in Clause 19.2.6 "Schedule of
Screed/Rendering".
The pre-packed screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall be mechanically mixed with the right
amount of water as specified by the manufacturer.
The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the performance
specified in Clause 19.2.1 “Pre-Packed Mortar Screed”.
The pre-packed floor screed and pre-packed waterproof screed shall comply with the following
performance when subjected to the specified laboratory testing :
19.7.3 Workmanship
Lay ceramic floor tiles with tile joints coinciding with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO
Rep.
The tiles shall be laid to form an even and flat finished surface, with consistent joint width. Where there
is a water outlet, the floor tiles shall be laid evenly towards the water outlet.
Tile spacers shall be used for laying of floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile spacers shall
be fully inserted into the bedding to ensure that there is no abut joints between the floor tiles, and to
achieve the following joint width :
S/No Floor Tile Joint Width
Living Room /Dining

1 1.5mm to 2mm
Room/Bedroom
2 Kitchen 2mm to 3mm
Contaminants from the tile back shall be removed prior to the application of tile adhesive. Due care
shall be taken by Contractor to ensure that the floor tiles are not step upon before the tile adhesive is
fully set. Each tile shall be fully bonded to the floor rendering without hollow sound upon tapping.
Tile spacers shall be removed prior to grouting of tile joints. Contractors are to ensure that the tile
adhesive has fully set before the removal of the tile spacers.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-20
19.7 LAYING OF CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (CONT’D)
19.7.4 Storage and Protection
All tiles shall be handled with care to avoid breakage and chipping. They shall be stored in their original
packaging in a clean, dry area to avoid damage and contamination.
The Contractor shall provide temporary polyethylene sheet or other protective material approved by SO
Rep to cover the whole finished floor to protect it against damage or staining by cement and plaster
splashing or dropping and all other subsequent trades.
The protective material shall be sufficiently thick, impermeable to water and non-staining in wet and dry
conditions. It shall also be tough so that it cannot be torn or punctured easily at site.
The protective material shall be provided immediately during and after laying of tiles. Prior to laying of
the protective material, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the finished floor and ensure that the tiling
is completed with the workmanship to the SO Rep satisfaction. All tiled areas shall be thoroughly
cleaned before laying of the protective material.
The Contractor shall be required to carry out regular maintenance to ensure that the protection is firmly
in place and in serviceable condition at all times. The protective material shall not be removed until
such time that all other works have been completed and the building is ready for handover.
19.7.5 Inspection
Prior to the commencement of tiling Works, carefully inspect the installed Works of all other trades and
verify that all such Works are complete up to the point that tiling can properly commence.
19.7.6 Mortar Bed
(i) Waterproofing System To Bath/WC And Kitchen
After the waterproof membrane is applied to the floor and is cured sufficiently, prepacked
waterproof screed of minimum 10mm shall be laid to the membrane as protection layer against
damage from other trades.
Before floor tiling, the surface shall be swept clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt.
Lay prepacked waterproof screed to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly
towards the water outlet as specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be cured for at least
3 days before laying the tiles.
(ii) Floor Tiling At Areas Without Waterproofing
Prepare the concrete surface to be clean of any sand, loose mortar, grease and dirt. Lay
prepacked mortar mix to form the mortar bed to the required level with a fall evenly towards the
water outlet where specified in the Drawings. The mortar bed shall be allowed to cure for at least
3 days before laying the tiles.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-21
19.7.7 Tile Adhesive
The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of
application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling Works.
The tile adhesive delivered to site shall have the batch number, manufacturer and expiry date clearly
indicated in the packing. The Contractor shall submit documentation to show that all the tilers involved
in the project are properly trained in the mixing, handling and application of tile adhesive.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of floor tile screed then notch-trowelled to a finishes
thickness not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation. The area of application shall not exceed
1m2 in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each tile,
taking care to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position
within the specified ‘open time’ and be tapped firmly into position to ensure that each tile is made fully
contact over the whole area.
The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The
normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements :
S/N Characteristics Test Method Performance Criteria

1 Tensile Adhesion Bond 7 days => 0.3 N/mm2
EN 1348 : 2007
Strength 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2
Tensile Adhesion Bond
2 Strength (After Water EN 1348 : 2007 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2
Immersion)
At 28 days => 1.0 N/mm2
Tensile Adhesion Bond
3 EN 1348 : 2007 Circulating oven : 70 + - 2
Strength (After Heat Aging)
degree C for 14 days
=> 0.5 N/mm2 after not
EN 1346 : 2007
less than 30 mins
4 Open Time (using tile as specified
After 28 days storage
in EN 1346)
under standard conditions
5 Deformity EN 12002 : 2002 2.5mm (minimum)
19.7.8 Grouting To Tile Joints
Approved tile grouts shall be used to fill the joints between floor tiles. They shall be used in all floor tiling
Works to residential units and common areas except for water tanks.
The grouts shall have good working characteristics, low shrinkage and good adhesion to the sides of
the joints. They shall be suited for the width of the joints and intended use of the tiling application.
The Contractor shall submit the brand and method of application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the
commencement of the tiling Works. The Contractor shall submit samples of the grouts to the SO Rep
for selection of colours to match the tiling Works.
The contractor shall also ensure that all tile spacers are removed before grouting works commence.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-22
19.7.8 Grouting To Tile Joints (Cont’d)
(a) Material
The proprietary grouts shall be modified by the inclusion of various polymer additives. They shall
be easy to prepare, apply and clean up at the Site.
A sample for each type of grouts shall be taken at the Site and tested at an accredited laboratory
according to the following requirement:
Tile grout for joint width up to 4mm

1 Shrinkage EN 12808-4  2 mm/m
 2g (after 30 min)
2 Water absorption EN 12808-5  5g (after 240 min)
Compressive strength 15 N per mm² minimum

3 EN 12808-3
(After dry storage) 35 N per mm² maximum
 2000 mm3
4 Abrasion resistance EN 12808-2
Flexural strength
5 EN 12808-3  3.5N per mm²
(After dry storage)
Tile grout for joint width above 4mm

1 Shrinkage EN 12808-4  2 mm/m
 2g (after 30 min)
2 Water absorption EN 12808-5  5g (after 240 min)
Compressive strength 15 N per mm² minimum

3 EN 12808-3
(After dry storage) 35 N per mm² maximum
4 Abrasion resistance EN 12808-2  1000 mm3
Flexural strength
5 EN 12808-3  3.5N per mm²
(After dry storage)
The grouts shall be light-fast and colour-fast. Their colours shall not fade or show inconsistent
tones for the whole tiling Works.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(22)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-23
19.7.8 Grouting To Tile Joints (Cont’d)
(b) Application
The proprietary grouts shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
The potential risk of staining shall be verified by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial
area. Coloured grouts shall be cleaned off promptly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions as it may be difficult to remove them from matt glazed tiles, tiles with textured
surfaces and some unglazed tiles.
The grouting shall be provided in accordance with the following:
(i) The grouting shall commence within 7 days upon completion of tile fixing;
(ii) Ensure that all building dust and debris are removed from the open joints;
(iii) Mechanically mix the grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions;
(iv) Spread the grout with a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel, working back and forth over
the area until the joints are completely filled;
(v) Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a rubber squeegee or grouting trowel
and a damp, but not wet, cloth;
(vi) Tool the joints with a piece of wood or other material of suitable size and shape;
(vii) After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a
clean, dry cloth.
All grout joints shall be uniformly finished. Cushion edge tiles shall be finished evenly to the depth
of the cushion.
19.7.9 Other Materials
Any other material not specifically described but required for a complete and proper laying of the
ceramic floor tiles shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense, but subject to the
19.7.10 Cleaning Up
Upon completion of grouting, thoroughly clean all the exposed surfaces of the ceramic tiles.
The tiles shall thoroughly be cleaned before the handing over. The Contractor shall use tile-cleaning
agents to clean all finished surfaces. The tile cleaner shall be an effective blend of penetrants which
could instantly penetrate deep into mortar and scale on tiles surface and remove the mortar completely.
The tile cleaner shall be safe to use and does not harm or burn the skin. The tile cleaner shall be
prepared and used according to the manufacturer's instructions.
19.7.11 Damage And Replacement
In the event of any damage to the ceramic tiles and accessories, the Contractor shall immediately make
all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(23)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-24
19.7.12 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on floor tiles according to the Schedule Of Material
Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles
within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The
test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm².
In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm².
The first test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of floor tiling Works. The
remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
19.8 FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF FINISHES
Unless otherwise specified the finished floor level at junctions between different types of finishes must
be flushed.
19.8.1 Dividing Strips
To provide and fix minimum 10X3mm thick stainless steel or brass strips insert to joints where there is
a change in materials, change in pattern, interfaced joint between living room tiles and kitchen tiles,
and wherever it is indicated on the drawings or as directed by the SO Rep. The stainless steel strips
insert is to be embedded in cement mortar and finished flush with finished floor level.
19.9 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES FOR BATH/WC AND WC
19.9.1 General
(a) Location For Laying Ceramic Tiles
Provide and lay ceramic floor tiles to bath/wc, wc and to any other locations as shown in the
Drawings.
The Contractor shall produce test reports from accredited testing laboratory to show
compliance with the specified requirements. The test reports shall be submitted to SO Rep
before commencement of the sample unit.
(b) Sorting of Floor Tiles
In the event that the ceramic floor tiles delivered to the Site are inconsistent in sizes but fall
within the allowable tolerances as specified in this clause including all sub-clauses under it, the
tiles shall be sorted out into separate groups of compatible sizes to the satisfaction of the SO
Rep. Tiles of one size group shall be laid in one area separate from tiles belonging to other
size groups.
(c) Embossment of Tiles
All ceramics tiles delivered to Site must be embossed with brand name and country of origin at the back of
the tile. The brand name and country of origin should not deviate from the approved tiles under the material
listing, equivalent or alternative tile. In the event that the country of origin deviates from the approved
original, equivalent or alternative tile, the SO Rep shall reserve the right to instruct Contractor to remove
and replace the tiles.
(d) Cut Tiles
All ceramics tiles delivered to site must be individually pressed and mould before rectification.
In the event that the SO Rep discovers any tile has been cut from a single larger tile, the SO
Rep shall reserve the right to instruct for the removal of all cut tiles and replaced.
19.9.2 Approved Ceramic Floor Tiles
The type of ceramic floor tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all
subclauses under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding any approval by
the SO Rep, the Contractor shall ensure that all such ceramic floor tiles for such locations as specified
comply with the requirements as specified in this clause including all subclauses under it. Provide
samples of ceramic floor tiles with the colour range as specified for selection and approval by the SO
Rep.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(24)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-25
19.9 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES FOR BATH/WC AND WC (CONT’D)
test methods shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006 (Annex J) unless otherwise
specified.
mentioned in this clause including all subclauses under it and all other tests specified in the
"Schedule Of Material Tests". The contractor shall provide test certificate during sample unit
inspection regardless whether it is from the original tile supplier, equivalent or alternative. The
test certificate is applicable to one site only and cannot be reused for another site.
The ceramic tiles shall not be made of red clay. Dimensional and surface quality requirements and
physical and chemical properties shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006 (Annex J) unless
otherwise specified:
(a) Dimensions
Bathroom Floor Tile Size (mm)

Nominal Length 200 300
Nominal Width 200 300
Nominal Thickness 7 7.5
Notwithstanding that, the SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the size for the
ceramic tile at bath/WC and WC. The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows:
(i) Length : Average length of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1.0mm from
the average length of 10 test specimens
(ii) Width : Average width of each tile shall not deviate by more than 1.0mm from
the average width of 10 test specimens
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm
from the average thickness of 10 test specimens
Average thickness of 10 test specimens shall not be less than the
(b) Surface Quality
(i) Water Absorption : Shall be a maximum of 6%
(ii) Modulus Of Rupture : Minimum average strength shall not be less than 22 N per
mm2.
(iii) Breaking Strength : Not less than 1000 N
(iv) Colour Tone : The colour tone of the tiles shall be consistent. The SO Rep
reserves the right to reject tiles that show colour tone
variation including such tiles that have already been laid.
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(25)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 19-26
19.9 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES FOR BATH/WC AND WC (CONT’D)
19.9.4 Technical Specifications (Cont'd)
(i) Staining Test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the latest
solutions:
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
(ii) Household stain : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the latest
solutions:

use.
(iii) Slip Resistance : Slip resistant properties shall be required and test carried out for
ceramic floor tiles to bath/WC.
The slip resistance test method shall be in accordance with the

latest SS 485. The test shall be conducted under wet conditions
using a pendulum friction test method by attaining value between
35 BPN to 44 BPN under classification X (Contribution of the floor
surface to the risk of slipping when wet: Moderate).
The test shall also be conducted under dry condition using dry
floor friction test method with a coefficient of friction of minimum
0.4.
(iv) Resistance to : Minimum GB

household
chemicals
Laying of floor tiles shall be in accordance with clause 19.7 “Laying Of Ceramic Floor Tiles” including
Section 20/.....
BLDG17/S19.DOCX(26)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-1
SECTION 20
WALL FINISHES
20.1 APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS
20.1.1 Mortar Mix For Plastering Works
The Contractor shall use premixed mortar system or prepacked mortar listed in HDB’s Materials List for
all plastering works on brick walls, solid block walls and RC surfaces. Plastering of RC surfaces shall
be restricted to internal surfaces only.
The premixed mortar system shall be a fully automated system that stores, conveys and mixes mortar
for instant application. The prepacked mortar shall be in bag form and shall be mixed mechanically
according to the manufacturer's recommendation. The Contractor shall submit a work method
statement to the SO Rep for approval.
The premixed mortar system or prepacked mortar shall be formulated with at least 0.80% of pure
polymer by mass. The premixed mortar system or prepacked mortar shall comply with the following
performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory testing
:
Prepacked Mortar Mix

Average strength
Tensile adhesion strength test according to
> 0.75 N per mm2
Tensile Adhesion HDB method on a sample cured for 14 days
1
Strength under shaded ambient condition. Twelve
Individual strength
spots on the sample slab shall be tested.
> 0.60 N per mm2
Average strength
Shear adhesion test according to HDB method
> 1.00 N/mm2
Shear Adhesion on a sample cured for 14 days under shaded
2
Strength ambient condition. Six spots on the sample
Individual strength
slab shall be tested.
> 0.70 N/mm2
3 Average Shrinkage ASTM C 531 – 2000 < 0.10%
Compressive Strength
4 12 - 20 N/mm2
– 28 days
Consistence BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998

5 > 65%
Retentivity
6 Water Retentivity > 95%
> 240 mins

Initial set
7
Setting
BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998  360 mins
Time
Final set < 500 mins
8 Polymer Content Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA 0.80% min. by mass
The chemical blueprint shall

Product Identification Fourier Transformed Infrared
9 match the record of the
Analysis Spectrophotometric Analysis
approved product
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the prepacked mortar for testing to
determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be conducted by an
accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.64%, i.e. 80% of the
specified content for production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has
taken into consideration that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the
production and the tolerance for test accuracy. Prepacked mortar with pure polymer content less than
0.64% shall be removed from HDB's Materials List. The Contractor shall remove all unused prepacked
mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the
Contractor is required to use only those prepacked mortar listed in HDB’s Materials List and subject to
the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that
used the prepacked mortar with deficiency in pure polymer content.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-2
20.1 APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS (CONT’D)
20.1.2 Skimming Materials
The Contractor shall use prepacked external skim coat listed in HDB’s Materials List for skimming works on external
RC surface. The skimming works on other areas shall use prepacked internal skim coat listed in HDB’s Materials
List. The prepacked skimming materials shall be mechanically mixed with the amount of water as specified by the
manufacturer.
The prepacked internal skimmed coat shall be formulated with at least 1.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall
comply with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified
laboratory testing :
Prepacked Internal Skim Coat

Tensile adhesion strength test according Average strength
to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 > 0.80 N per mm2
1 Tensile Adhesion Strength Test days under shaded ambient condition.
Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be Individual strength
tested. > 0.60 N per mm2
3 Compressive Strength – 28 days BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 7 - 12 N/mm2
4 Water Retentivity BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998 > 95%
> 240 mins
i) Initial set
5
Setting
BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998  360 mins
Time
ii) Final set < 500 mins
The chemical blueprint
Fourier Transformed Infrared
7 Product Identification Analysis shall match the record of
Spectrophotometric Analysis
the approved product
The prepacked external skim coat shall be formulated with at least 2.0% of pure polymer by mass and shall comply
with the following performance requirements and product specification when subjected to the specified laboratory
testing :
Prepacked External Skim Coat

Tensile adhesion strength test according Average strength

to HDB method on a sample cured for 14 > 0.80 N per mm2
1 Tensile Adhesion Strength Test days under shaded ambient condition.
Twelve spots on the sample slab shall be Individual strength
tested. > 0.60 N per mm2
Tensile adhesion strength tests after

accelerated weathering for 100 cycles*
of alternate heating and cooling. Twelve Loss of strength < 15%
Tensile adhesion strength tests
spots on the sample slab shall be tested. (compared to 14-day
after accelerated weathering for
2 strength under normal
100 cycles* of alternate heating
* Each cycle consist of 4 hours of condition)
and cooling.
heating by UVA 340 lamps at 60C and
then 10 minutes of intermittent water
spray to produce a thermal shock.
4 Compressive Strength – 28 days 7 - 12 N/mm2
BS 4551 : Part 1 : 1998
5 Water Retentivity > 95%
> 240 mins
i) Initial set
6
Setting
BS 4551 : Part 1: 1998  360 mins
Time
ii) Final set < 500 mins
The chemical blueprint
Fourier Transformed Infrared
8 Product Identification Analysis shall match the record of
Spectrophotometric Analysis
the approved product
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-3
20.1 APPROVED MATERIALS FOR PLASTERING AND SKIMMING WORKS (CONT’D)
20.1.2 Skimming Materials (Cont’d)
HDB may instruct the contractor to conduct site sampling of the prepacked internal and external skim
coat for testing to determine the pure polymer content by Thermal Gravimetric Analysis & SDTA to be
conducted by an accredited laboratory. The pure polymer content of the site sample shall exceed 0.80%
for prepacked internal skim coat and 1.60% for external skim coat, i.e. 80% of the specified content for
production. The 20% margin allowed for acceptance of individual test result has taken into consideration
that it will be difficult to achieve perfect distribution of the polymer in the production and the tolerance
for test accuracy. Prepacked internal skim coat with pure polymer content less than 0.80% or external
skim coat with pure polymer content less than 1.60% shall be removed from HDB's Materials List. The
Contractor shall remove all unused prepacked internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency
in pure polymer content from the site. To avoid delay to the building works, the Contractor is required
to use only those prepacked internal or external skim coat listed in HDB's Materials List and subject to
the approval of the SO Rep. The Contractor may be required by the SO Rep to remove all works that
used the prepacked internal skim coat or external skim coat with deficiency in pure polymer content.
20.2 CONTROL OF PLASTER THICKNESS ON RC SURFACE
The overall thickness of plastering on RC surface shall not exceed 18mm. If the structural Works are
constructed with good alignment and surface condition, application of a thinner coat of plaster or
skimming is acceptable. The finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and shape.
20.3 PLASTERING TO RC SURFACE
The RC surface shall be cleaned, using high-pressure water jet, such that the surface are free of dust,
residue form oil and organic growth prior to the application of the plaster. The Contractor shall allow
the Resident Technical Officer to check the background preparation before plastering. The prepacked
mortar mix can be applied to the RC surface without spatterdash. The first coat of the plaster to the RC
surface shall be of a thickness between 5 to 8mm and shall be pressed hard onto the surface during
application. For better bonding of the second coat, the first coat shall be lightly scratched and allowed
to cure for at least 12 hours before the application of the second coat.
20.4 ADHESION STRENGTH OF PLASTER ON RC SURFACE
The Contractor shall conduct site pull-out tests on plasters applied on concrete surface according to
Schedule of Materials Tests. The first test at each building block shall be conducted at the early stage
of plastering Works. The remaining tests shall be spread out and be carried out progressively.
Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots to be conducted within 14 to 28 days after plastering.
The test spots shall be cored to a diameter of 50mm for the pull-out test. The average tensile pull-out
strength of the five spots shall achieve a minimum value of 0.50 N per mm2. However, no individual
strength shall fall below 0.40 N per mm2.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-4
20.5 SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS
The surface of all reinforced concrete members forming part of the external facade shall be constructed
to good alignment and verticality such that no plastering is required to provide a good aesthetic
appearance. Where there are minor surface unevenness or blemishes, the RC surface shall be skim-
coated with approved external skimming materials. The skimming can be applied in one or two coats
up to a total thickness not exceeding 6mm. This requirement shall be applicable to external RC
members of all storeys, including the ground floor void deck structures.
20.5.1 Workmanship Of RC Works
The verticality of the peripheral RC members and internal RC members shall comply with the following
tolerance, in accordance to Grade II tolerance of SS CP 23.
Allowable variation From The Plumb

Type Of RC Members/Surfaces
For Any Continuous
Within Each Floor
Height Of 10 Storeys
Exposed continuous column corners or

10mm 20mm
other conspicuous lines (External)
Corner or surface of columns and walls

etc with continuity broken by beams or 10mm 40mm
nibs or other protusions (External)
Column and Wall (Internal) 10mm NA
The maximum allowable variation from the plumb for the entire building height shall be 40mm.
The horizontality, alignment and evenness of the ceiling, slab and beam shall comply with the following
tolerance :
Type Of RC Allowable variation from Allowable variation for evenness of

Members/Surfaces horizontality /alignment surface
Beam 10mm NA
Ceiling Lesser of 3mm per 1.0m or 20mm NA
Slab NA ±10mm from structural floor level
To achieve the required structural workmanship, the Contractor shall be required to :
(a) regularly check and maintain their formwork to be in a good and acceptable condition;
(b) ensure proper and adequate bracing and strutting;
(c) conduct thorough checking of plumb and alignment before casting.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-5
20.5 SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS (CONT’D)
20.5.2 Measurement Of RC Works
At least fourteen(14) days before commencement of Works, the contractor shall submit to the SO Rep
for his approval the measurement plan and survey methods.
The areas of the Works to be measured and incorporated into the measurement plan and survey
methods shall, inter alia, include the following :
(a) Verticality and alignment of corners of every building block

(b) Verticality and alignment of columns
(c) Verticality of walls
(d) Straightness, horizontality, alignment and evenness of beams and slabs
The Contractor shall engage a competent person to carry out measurements of the plumb and
alignment of all external & internal columns, external and internal walls and external corners of the
building blocks. This measurement shall be carried out for every storey, including the first storey.
The Contractor shall be required to use a precision laser plummet capable of shooting a vertical laser
beam for up to 100mm in range and at an accuracy of at least 5 seconds; and a precision multi-
directional laser marker capable of beaming right angle lines for up to 30m in range and has an accuracy
of at least 3mm at 10m horizontal and vertical distances.
Proper records of the RC verticality measurements shall be submitted to the SO Rep within one month
after casting of the RC members or any other period as instructed by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
highlight in their report all deviations that exceed the tolerance. Upon completion of the finishing work,
the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the building block.
Proper records of all measurements made on the various areas of Works shall be kept by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall when directed by the SO Rep submit the records of measurements
made in respect of every building block before seeking his approval to proceed with the next stage of
the Works
20.5.3 Rectification Of Misalignment And Surface Defects
The Contractor shall carry out structural rectification to the external RC members with poor alignment
and plumb, poor construction joint, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The structural rectification of such Defect shall
commence not later than two months after casting.
The Contractor shall rectify minor bulging or depression on the RC surface, which does not affect the
reinforcement cover, with the following method :
(a) trim and roughen the surface,

(b) clean the surface with pressure jetting
(c) apply approve bonding agent to the surface
(d) patch the areas with approved polymer modified mortar.
For serious structural Defect or misalignment, the Contractor shall be required to submit a PE proposal
for the rectification work subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.5.4 Application Of External Skimming
Skimming shall not commence until the surface has been properly prepared and cleaned with water jet.
The Contractor shall allow for the inspection of the surface preparation prior to the skimming application.
Upon completion of the skimming Works, the Contractor shall carry out another measurement of the
building blocks. All measurement data shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-6
20.5 SKIMMING TO THE EXTERNAL SURFACE OF REINFORCED CONCRETE MEMBERS (CONT’D)
20.5.5 Testing Of External Skimming
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on the external skimming at each building block
according to the Schedule Of Material Tests. Each test shall cover five randomly selected spots of
skimming with age between 14 to 28 days. The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 spots, of
50mm cored diameter each, shall exceed 0.50 N per mm2. In addition, the individual tensile pull-out
strength of each spot shall not be less than 0.40 N per mm2.
The first test at each building block shall be conducted in the initial stage of skimming Works. The
20.6 CONTROL OF PLASTERERS
The Contractor shall employ workers that are capable of producing good workmanship for plastering
and skimming Works. They shall possess Skills Evaluation Certificate on plastering works from local
institutions. A list of these workers shall be submitted to the SO Rep for pre-screening and approval
before they are allowed to commence work. These workers are also required to wear identification pass
upon approval by the SO Rep. The pass shall be easily distinguishable from other pass used at the
Site, by their colour, size or pattern.
20.7 ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING AND SKIM COAT (WITHIN FLATS)
All arrises, internal angles, etc. shall be straight plumbed. All internal angles and external angles shall
be formed with proprietary PVC plaster angle beads to the SO Rep. approval. Internal angles and
external angles shall include the interface of ceilings, walls and beams etc.
Square PVC angle beads shall have a face flange minimum 20mm wide that subtends a 90 degrees
angle and shall have a short reveal of 2 mm on the front edge for the finishing skim coat. The face
flange shall be perforated and its surface tooth formed to hold and receive the plaster and skim coat.
The entire length of the PVC angle beads shall be clean and straight, any damaged or used beads shall
not be recycled.
Samples of the PVC angle beads shall be submitted to the SO Rep. for approval prior to ordering and
commencement of skim coat or plastering work on site. An approved sample of the PVC angle beads
shall be displayed in the material sample room.
20.8 MAKING GOOD
All making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges undercut to
form dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. Cut out and make good all
cracks, blisters and other Defect and clean the whole of the work on completion.
20.9 PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER
No partially or wholly set plaster shall be allowed to be used or remixed.
20.10 DRIPS AND GROOVE
Drips and grooves shall be formed to give a clean clear and straight surface free from loose sandy
mortar.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-7
20.11 LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES
20.11.1 Wall Tiling Method
The Contractor shall carry out wall tiling according to the following procedure :
(a) Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect the bonding
of rendering. The background shall be washed using water jet.
(b) Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to achieve a flat
and even surface. The background shall be first dampened to prevent excessive absorption of
water from the rendering before its placing. The rendering shall be increased to a finished
thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of water piping.
(c) Allow the rendering to set for at least 12 hours.
(d) Apply a layer of bedding mortar onto the rendered substrate and spread another layer as thin as
possible on the full back of the tiles before placing tiles in position. The keys, frogs or
depressions at the back of the tile shall be completely filled with mortar before fixing.
(e) Place each tile and tap it firmly into position to ensure that each tile makes contact over its whole
area. Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to the commencement of the tiling
works.
(f) Adjust the position of any tile within 5 minutes of fixing.
The grouting to the tile joints shall commence within 7 days after fixing the wall tiles. Dust or
foreign materials shall be removed from the joints. The grout shall be wet mixed mechanically
before application. It shall be spread with a grout spreader (rubber squeegee or grout trowel),
working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled. Excess grout shall be
removed with the aid of a spreader and a damp (not) wet cloth. After the grout has stiffened
slightly, tool the grout with a piece of wood or other suitable tool to a consistent depth and shape.
After the grout has dried, the tile surface shall be cleaned and given a final polish using a clean,
dry cloth.
20.11.2 Prepacked Mortar For Mortar Bed
The Contractor shall use approved pre-packed mortar mix for rendering to concrete surface and block
walls to receive the wall tiles. Potable water supplied by PUB shall be used for mixing the mortar. The
pre-packed mortar mix shall be mixed mechanically according to the manufacturer's recommendation.
The pre-packed mortar mix shall comply with the following performance requirements, as stated in
clause 20.1.1 when subjected to the specified laboratory testing.
20.11.3 Tile Adhesive
The Contractor shall use pre-approved tile adhesive and shall submit the brand and method of
application to the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the tiling works.
The tile adhesive shall be applied onto the surface of rendered wall and then notch-trowelled to a
finishes thickness not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation. The area of application shall not
exceed 1m2. in each application. The tile adhesive shall also be spread uniformly over the back of each
tile to fill deep keys and all remaining depressions. The tile shall then be placed into the position and
be tapped firmly to ensure its full contact with the adhesive.
The tile adhesive shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The
normal set tile adhesive shall comply with the following requirements specified in Clause 19.7.7 “Tile
Adhesive”.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-8
20.11 LAYING OF CERAMIC WALL TILES (CONT’D)
20.11.4 Testing Of Tensile Pull-Out Strength
The Contractor shall conduct tensile pull-out tests on wall tiles according to the Schedule Of Material
Tests. Each test shall determine the tensile pull-out strengths of five randomly selected pieces of tiles
within a room. The joint around the tile shall be cut to the depth of the joint before the pull-out test. The
test shall be conducted within 21 to 28 days after fixing the tiles.
The average tensile pull-out strength of the 5 tiles tested shall achieve a minimum of 0.20 N per mm².
In addition, the individual tensile pull-out strength of each tile shall not be less than 0.16 N per mm².
The first test for each building block shall be conducted at the early stage of wall tiling Works. The
20.12 WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS
20.12.1 Location For Laying Wall Tiles
Provide and lay wall tiles to kitchen, bath/WC, WC and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
20.12.2 Approved Wall Tiles
The type of wall tiles provided by the Contractor as specified in this clause including all subclauses
under it shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep. Notwithstanding any approval by the SO Rep,
the Contractor shall ensure that all wall tiles comply with the requirements specified in this clause
including all sub-clauses under it.
test methods shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006 (Annex L) unless otherwise
stated.
mentioned in this clause and all other tests specified in the “Schedule of Material Tests”.
20.12.4 Technical Specifications For Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles
The glazed ceramic wall tiles shall not be made of red clay. Dimensional and surface quality
requirements and physical and chemical properties shall be accordance with the latest ISO 13006
(Annex L) unless otherwise stated:
(a) Dimensions
Wall Tile Sizes (mm)

Nominal Length 200 300 400 600
Nominal Width 200 300 200 300
Nominal thickness 7 8 8 9
Notwithstanding that, the SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the dimension
for the wall tiles inside dwelling units. The dimensional tolerances shall be as follows:
(i) Length : Average length of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.3% from the average length of 10 test specimens.
(ii) Width : Average width of each tile (2 or 4 sides) shall not deviate by more than
0.3% from the average width of 10 test specimens.
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm from
the average thickness of 10 test specimens.
(iv) Perimeter frame : The perimeter frame on the tile as a result of the printing of the design
shall be consistent and shall not exceed 1.00mm (width).
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-9
20.12 WALL TILES INSIDE DWELLING UNITS (CONT’D)
20.12.4 Technical Specifications For Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles (Cont’d)
(b) Embossment of tiles
All ceramics tiles delivered to Site must be embossed with brand name and country of origin at
the back of the tile. The brand name and country of origin should not deviate from the approved
tiles under the material listing, equivalent or alternative tile.
alternative tile, the SO’s rep shall reserve the right to instruct Contractor to remove and replace
the tiles.
(c) Cut Tiles
the event that the SO’s rep discovers any tile has been cut from a single larger tile, the SO’s rep
shall reserve the right to instruct for the removal of all cut tiles and replaced.
(d) Surface Quality
(e) Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 18%
(f) Chemical Properties
(i) Staining test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the
staining solutions:
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
staining solutions:

(> 80 0C) deionised water. Let it cool down to about
23 0C before use.

temperature).
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-10
20.12.4 Technical Specifications For Glazed Ceramic Wall Tiles (Cont’d)
(f) Chemical Properties (cont’d)
(iii) Reverse staining test : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows:
(a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to

ensure that there are no defects or damages. The tiles
(c) With the top or glazed surface facing downwards,
“pond” the biscuit (i.e. back of the tile) with potable
water over a circular area of 50mm diameter and with a
water height of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes,
inspect with the naked eye or prescription glasses if
usually worn and under sufficient light intensity (> 300
lux), the top or glazed surface for signs of dark patches
up to a total “ponding” duration of 30 minutes.
(d) Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces
of tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g
of methylene blue per litre.
Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the top
or glazed surfaces.
20.12.5 Technical Specifications For Glazed Porcelain Wall Tiles (Accent Tile)
The glazed porcelain wall tiles shall not be made of red clay. Dimensional and surface quality
(Annex G) unless otherwise stated:
(a) Dimensions

Nominal Thickness 8 9
Notwithstanding that, the SO Rep shall have the absolute prerogative to select the dimension for
the wall tiles inside dwelling units.
0.3% from the average width of 10 test specimens.
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm
(iv) Perimeter frame : The perimeter frame on the tile as a result of the printing of the
design shall be consistent and shall not exceed 1.00mm (width).
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-11
20.12.5 Technical Specifications For Glazed Porcelain Wall Tiles (Accent Tile)
The glazed porcelain wall tiles shall not be made of red clay. Dimensional and surface quality
(Annex G) unless otherwise stated:
(b) Embossment of tiles
All glazed porcelain tiles delivered to Site must be embossed with brand name and country of
approved tiles under the material listing, equivalent or alternative tile.
alternative tile, the SO’s rep shall reserve the right to instruct Contractor to remove and replace
the tiles.
(c) Cut Tiles
the event that the SO’s rep discovers any tile has been cut from a single larger tile, the SO’s rep
shall reserve the right to instruct for the removal of all cut tiles and replaced.
(d) Surface Quality
(e) Physical Properties
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 0.5%.
(f) Chemical Properties
(i) Staining test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the
staining solutions:
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
staining solutions:

use.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-12
20.13 LISTELLO TILE TO BATH/WC OF DWELLING UNITS
Where required under the Contract, provide and lay one course of matching Listello tiles to all bath/wc
of residential units including other areas as shown in the Drawings. The type of Listello tiles provided
by the Contractor shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.14 CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS)
20.14.1 General
Provide and lay wall tiles to locations as specified in the subclause “Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles“
hereunder and at other locations as shown in the Drawings.
test methods shall be in accordance with the latest ISO 13006 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise
stated.
mentioned in this clause and all other tests specified in the “Schedule of Material Tests”.
accordance with ISO 13006 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :-
accordance with the latest ISO 13006 ( Annex J ) unless otherwise stated :-
(a) Dimensions

Nominal 7 8
(iii) Thickness : Average thickness of each tile shall not deviate by more than ±0.5mm

respective nominal thickness
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-13
20.14 CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS) (CONT’D)
(b) Surface Quality
The water absorption shall be a maximum of 6%.
(i) Colour Fastness And : The tiles shall be light-fast and no colour change shall be
Light-Fastness detectable after exposure to ultra-violet radiation for 28 days.
(ii) Reverse staining test : The procedure for carrying out the test is as follows :
(a) Five full pieces of tiles shall be selected and checked to

ensure that there are no Defect or damages. The tiles
(c) With the top or glazed surface facing downwards, “pond”

the biscuit (ie. back of the tile) with potable water over a
circular area of 50mm diameter and with a water height
of 25mm. At interval of every 5 minutes, inspect with the
naked eye or prescription glasses if usually worn and
under sufficient light intensity (> 300 lux), the top or
glazed surface for signs of dark patches up to a total
“ponding” duration of 30 minutes.
(d) Repeat the aforementioned test on another five pieces of

tiles but using methylene blue solution diluted at 2g of
methylene blue per litre.
(e) Performance Criteria
The tiles shall not show any sign of dark patches on the
top or glazed surfaces
(iii) Staining test : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the latest
solutions:
(a) Iodine
(b) Olive oil
(c) Green paste
(iv) Household stain : The staining test method shall be in accordance with the latest
solutions:

use.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-14
20.14 CERAMIC WALL TILES (NON RESIDENTIAL UNITS AND COMMON AREAS) (CONT’D)
20.14.4 Colours, Patterns And Textures
Provide a full range of colours, patterns and textures of wall tiles for the SO Rep to select from.
20.14.5 Accessories
Provide and lay all accessories in matching size and colour to the approval of the SO Rep.
20.14.6 Schedule Of Ceramic Wall Tiles
Provide and lay glazed ceramic wall tiles to locations as specified below including any other areas not
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Walls at upper floor lift lobbies
Walls at centralised Refuse chute hopper
All Housing Blocks Wash areas at void deck
Refuse Chute Chambers
Walls in toilet adjoining Utility Room at ground floor lift lobby
Refreshment Areas
Stalls
Eating House Toilets/Bath/WC
Bin Areas
Wash Areas
Bath/WC
Lock-Up Shop, Shop, Display Areas
Market Produce
Lock-Up Shop Preparation Areas
Bin Areas
Walls and Columns
Mini-Market Toilets
Bin Areas
Restaurant (Family) Toilets
Display Area
Market Produce Shop
WC
20.14.7 Tile Spacers
Tile spacers shall be used for laying of wall tiles and floor tiles to achieve consistent joint width. The tile
spacers to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep before commencement of the tiling works.
20.15 POLISHED HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILES
Provide and lay 300mm x 300mm x 9mm (Nominal Size) polished homogeneous wall tiles to locations
as specified below :
Walls of ground floor lift lobbies.
All Housing Blocks Wall enclosures at letter box including low walls
defining the ground floor lift lobby.
Provide full range of colours and texture of polished homogeneous wall tiles for the SO Rep to make a
selection. The SO Rep shall have absolute prerogative in his selection and no adjustment to the
Contract Sum shall be made for differences in colour and texture.
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 20-15
20.16 WORKSHOP DRAWINGS
Provide complete sets of workshop drawings showing the laying patterns of ceramic floor tiles and wall
tiles in kitchen, kitchen/dining, bath/wc, lift lobby, courtyard and other locations where tiling work are
indicated. The workshop drawings shall include plans, elevations, detailed sections and other relevant
the laying of ceramic floor tiles, ceramic wall tiles and white glazed wall tiles. The ceramic floor tiles
shall be laid with tile joints that coincide with the joints of wall tiles and to the approval of the SO Rep.
Section 21/.....
BLDG17/S20.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 21-1
SECTION 21
ELECTRICAL AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLING INSTALLATIONS
21.1 WORK BY LICENSED ELECTRICIAN
All electrical installation Works shall be carried out by a Licensed Electrician (LE) respectively and shall
comply with all current Codes-of-Practice, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant
Authorities.
21.2 OPENINGS/RECESSES FOR CABLE TRAY
Further to Clause 4.21 "Openings And Recesses" and subclause 1.1.27 "Contractor's Work In
Connection With Subsidiary Contracts", ensure that all these openings are flushed with the ceilings and
align with each other and with the building lines. Ensure that the recesses are continuous and on the
same plane from floor to floor.
21.3 CABLE TRAY FOR BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE SYSTEMS
The number and size of metal cable tray to be used shall be in accordance to the latest Code of Practice
for Info-Communications Development Facilities (COPIF) in Building issued by Info-Communications
Development Authority (IDA) or as shown in the drawing. Any discrepancy in the drawings with COPIF
shall be brought up to the SO Rep for decision.
21.4 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF) ROOM, TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM (TER)
FOR OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE INSTALLATION AND TELECOMMUNICATION RISERS
All UPVC (SS 272) lead-in pipes to MDF room, Telecom Equipment Room and Telecommunication
risers shall be encased in concrete as shown in the Drawings. All bent pipes, straight pipes and cable
tray shall comply with the COPIF requirements.
All bent pipes, straight pipes and cable tray shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.
The number of lead-in pipes to MDF room, TER and Telecommunication riser ducts shall comply with
COPIF requirements and/or as shown in the drawings.
All pipes terminating inside the Telecommunication riser shall flushed against the wall and rise up to a
minimum height of 1.0m.
All underground pipes are sealed at the point of entry into such room/riser with a material that is durable,
can be easily removed and will not cause damage to the underground pipes or any telecommunication
cable s that may be used in the underground pipes, such that no foreign gaseous matter will pass
through the underground pipes into such room. Materials use for sealing shall comply to the requirement
of the Relevant Authorities.
Electrical installation to MDF and TER room shall be provided as shown in the drawings and to COPIF
requirements.
21.5 EARTH BARS IN MDF AND TER ROOMS
The Contractor shall provide an earthing bar in accordance to the latest Code of Practice for Info-
Communication Facilities (COPIF) in Building issued by Info-Communication Development Authority
(IDA) for every MDF room and Telephone Equipment Room (TER) of each building block.
21.6 AUTHORITIES REQUIREMENTS
All provision and installation for telecommunication and broadband coaxial cabling systems shall comply
with all statutory rules, regulations and Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building
(COPIF) issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of Singapore (IDA).
BLDG17/S21.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 21-2
Section 22/.....
BLDG17/S21.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 22-1
SECTION 22
GLAZING
22.1 FIXED AND ADJUSTABLE GLASS LOUVRED VENTS
Unless otherwise specified, glass louvre used externally shall be obscured wired rough cast glass of
thickness 6mm 0.3mm and housed at least 10mm at each end. Glass blades shall not have clearance
at each end exceeding 3mm. All exposed edges of the glass louvre shall be ground mechanically to a
consistent smooth finish.
22.2 CLEANING GLASS
On completion, clean all glass inside and outside, replace all cracked, broken or defective glass and
leave the whole Works in good condition to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
22.3 PVB (POLYVINYL BUTYRAL) LAYERS BETWEEN GLASS FOR CASEMENT WINDOW WITH
INTEGRATED TOP HUNG IN BATHROOM
2 layers of 0.38mm of Polar White PVB (Polyvinyl Butyral) to be provided for laminated glass of
casement window with integrated top hung. The installation of 2 layers of PVB (Polyvinyl Butyral) should
be cast together with the glass window to avoid delamination.
Section 23/.....
BLDG17/S22.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-1
SECTION 23
PAINTING AND DECORATING
23.1 GENERAL
23.1.1 Paint
The paints used shall be manufactured by an approved Specialist and shall be approved by the SO
Rep. All paint shall be delivered to the Site in their original containers and the containers shall not have
been opened before.
Unless otherwise specified, all paint shall comply with the relevant Singapore Standards shown below
and their latest amendments:
Standard Type of Paint

SS7:1998 "Gloss Enamel Finishing"
SS34:1998 "Undercoat for Gloss Enamel"
SS37:1998 "Aluminium Paint"
SS38:1998 "Aluminium Wood Primer (Leafing and Non-Leafing)"
SS150:2015 "Emulsion Paint"
SS345:2015 "Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint for Decorative Purposes"
SS494:2001 "Lead and Chromate-free Primer"
SS 579:2012 “Water-based sealer for interior and exterior uses”
Before the commencement of any painting work, provide and submit colour charts of approved paint to
the SO Rep for the selection of colour scheme.
All water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall comply with SS 345:2015. All enamel paint shall be
synthetic enamel paint unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
23.1.2 Mixing Of Paint
During the progress of work, the SO Rep may at his discretion obtain samples of paint being used on
site for testing. Should paint used in this Contract be found to be adulterated or over-diluted, the SO
Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against
the Contractor. In addition, all such paint shall be removed from the Site and replace the same with
paints that meet the prescribed standards. All work executed with paint which fails to meet the
prescribed standards shall be burnt off or otherwise removed and the work shall be re-executed at
the Contractor's own cost and expense to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
23.1.3 Workmanship
Unless otherwise specified, all paints shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
All paints for priming coats, undercoats and finishing coats used for the work shall be of the same brand
and from the same manufacturer. Where available, undercoats shall be of different shades to
correspond with the shade of the finishing coat. Provide sample panels of paintwork showing the shade
of the respective coats.
All external paintwork shall be executed under dry condition and the surface to be painted shall be dry
before the paint is applied. The whole of the interior and exterior surfaces of the building including the
ceilings and soffits shall be cleaned down thoroughly and all cracks and blemishes made good prior to
the commencement of the painting work.
After the completion of each coat of painting work, the SO Rep shall be notified before the application
of the next coat.
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-2
23.2 EXTERNAL PAINTING
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-
clauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject
always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's
and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
23.2.2 Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint
(a) Type And Location
The water based algae resistant paint shall comply with SS345:2015 and shall be PSB Marked.
Unless otherwise specified, all colours of paint to be used shall be approved by the SO Rep. and
to comply with BS 4800:1972 "Paint Colour for Building Purposes".
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete
surfaces of all exterior surfaces of the external walls which are subject to weathering including
walls, ceilings and other surfaces of the ground floor void decks shall be finished with one coat
of water based sealer and two coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint. Sealer coat
and two coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint shall not be diluted. The whole paint
system shall be obtained from the same paint manufacturer.
Allow for different colour tones for all undercoats to distinguish the different coatings. Should the
finished paintwork be found to be unsatisfactory, ie. brushy work, unevenness in applications,
original stains, etc., repaint the same with additional coat or coats to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
External painting to parapet walls, refuse chutes, columns and beams shall cover up to and
including returned surfaces.
External painting to exterior surfaces of external walls shall cover up to and including returned
surfaces stopping at a convenient point to be directed by the SO Rep.
(b) External Painting To Electrical Sub-Station/Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
For electrical sub-station/utilities centre/dustbin compound, the external painting works shall be
executed with three coats of water based algae resistant emulsion paint.
(c) Touch-Up Coat
Painted surfaces which have to be over-coated by touch-up work should not be confined to the
affected spots only. The whole panel of the wall or area affected by touch-up shall be repainted
to match the colour tone of the finished coat.
(d) Painting Of Sample Units
At the appropriate time prepare the exterior of one or more typical flat unit for each type of flats
to receive the paint and inform the SO Rep to select his colour scheme. Paint the sample units,
changing colours as directed, until the SO Rep is satisfied with the workmanship and/or colour
scheme.
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-3
23.2 EXTERNAL PAINTING (CONT'D)
23.2.2 Water Based Algae Resistant Emulsion Paint (Cont'd)
(e) Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5. In this
respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty to the Employer
or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion decide.
In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted
to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty
as produced in Appendix A5(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be
submitted immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at
such time when the SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in
accordance with the Contract. In the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute
and submit the Deed of Warranty within the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to
withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the Contractor in relation to the execution of
such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per Deed of Warranty. However, such
sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission by him of the duly executed
Deed of Warranty.
23.2.3 Acrylic Emulsion Paints
Unless otherwise specified, all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces, except those
subjected directly to weathering as mentioned earlier, shall be painted with one coat of water based
sealer and two subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. Sealer coat and two coats of
acrylic emulsion paint shall not be diluted. The whole paint system shall be obtained from the same
paint manufacturer.
External surfaces to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint shall include all surfaces except those within
the enclosing walls of the dwelling units, switch rooms, motor rooms, pump rooms, water tank
compartment and other enclosed spaces. However, walls and ceilings of the private balcony and/or
service balcony of dwelling units and common access corridors shall be considered as external surfaces
to be painted with acrylic emulsion paint.
Water-based sealer shall comply with SS 579:2012 and for the water resistance requirement in SS
579:2012, test it to 500 hours.
23.3 PAINTING OF INTERNAL SURFACES
(a) Internal Surfaces Of Dwelling Units
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, all plastered, skim coated and concrete
surfaces of internal walls and ceilings of dwelling units shall be painted with two coats of
approved white emulsion paint. The first coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water
by volume. The second coat shall not be diluted. The method of painting for these two coats,
with the exception of the two coats for the ceilings of the toilets and kitchens, shall be by means
of an appropriate portable airless spraying equipment as approved by the SO Rep. No
compressed air shall be used to assist the spraying. The two coats for the ceilings of the toilets
and kitchens may be painted by using rollers.
(b) Other Internal Surfaces
Unless otherwise specified, all plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces of internal walls
and ceilings of shops, shoplets, eating houses, living quarters, switch rooms, lift motor rooms,
pump rooms, water tank compartments, stores, MDF rooms, electrical substations and areas
other than dwelling units shall be painted with three coats of approved emulsion paint. The first
coat may be with thinning of up to 20% of clean water by volume. The second and third coats
shall not be diluted.
(c) The emulsion paint shall be of those qualities approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-4
23.4 PAINTING OF WOODWORK
23.4.1 Preparation
All joinery and finished woodwork shall be properly cleaned down, knotted, stopped, sand-papered
smooth and primed. Two coats of wood preservative shall be applied to the back of doors frames and
window frames and other woodwork abutting masonry work. The wood preservative shall be
"Solignum", "Creosote" or other approved.
23.4.2 Painting
Unless otherwise specified, surfaces of all woodwork shall be prepared and painted with one priming
coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
23.4.3 Wood Varnish To Main Entrance Doors
Varnish coatings on fire-rated and non fire-rated main entrance doors shall be finished off-site under a
factory environment with a minimum of three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other
approved finish. The varnish finish shall be approved by the SO Rep. The door with completed varnish
shall comply with the requirements as follow :
Performance Requirements
Accelerated Weathering :SS5: Part G9 Max 35% Gloss Loss
(400 hours) No de-lamination, blistering or other defects
23.4.4 Surface Preparation
All pin holes and recesses on the main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be filled and
stopped with putty. The door surfaces shall be properly sanded smooth by mechanical means and
cleaned prior to the application of wood varnish.
23.4.5 Wood Varnish
The main entrance door and bedroom door surfaces shall be finished off-site under a factory
environment with a minimum of three coats of clear varnish, in semi-gloss finish or other approved
finish. The varnish shall be approved by the SO Rep. The varnish shall comply with the requirements
as specified hereunder:
Application
Test Test Method Substrate Method/Film Requirements
Thickness
Varnish Only
a) Condition in SS 5 Part B4 NA NA No coagulation,
container precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles ;
b) Keeping SS 5 Part B6 NA NA No coagulation,
qualities precipitation, or
separation of
components, free
from foreign
particles ;
c) Fineness of SS 5 Part B13 NA NA Maximum 30
grind microns ;
d) Dry film SS 5 Part B1 Burnished 3 coats by Minimum 50
thickness (Method 5) tinplate brush microns ;
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-5
23.4 PAINTING OF WOODWORK (CONT’D)
23.4.5 Wood Varnish (Cont’d)
Application
Test Test Method Substrate Method/Film Requirements
Thickness
Varnish Only
(Cont’d)
e) Surface SS 5 Part D2 Burnished Metered bar/ 2 hrs maximum;
drying time tinplate wft 50 microns
f) Through dry ISO 9117 Burnished Metered bar/ 6 hrs maximum;

time tinplate wft 50 microns
g) Gloss at 60 SS 5 Part E1 Glass plate Metered bar/ 25 - 50 gloss

deg. wft 50 microns units;
h) Flash point SS Part B15 NA NA 23C minimum
i) Washability SS 5 Part F5 Burnished Metered bar/ 3000 cycles with

Glass wft 80 microns no wear-off
j) Scratch SS 5 Part F2 Burnished Metered bar/ Minimum 1000g

Resistance tinplate dft 25 microns
k) Accelerated SS 5 Part G9 Burnished Metered bar/ Maximum gloss

weathering tinplate dft 25 microns loss 30%
(500 hrs dry
cycle)
l) Mildew SS 150 Appendix C NA NA No growth

resistance
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-6
23.5 PAINTING OF FERROUS METAL WORK
23.5.1 Preparation Of Surface
Remove all dust, rust, scale, grease and oil before painting.
23.5.2 Painting
Unless otherwise specified, paint all exposed metal surfaces with one coat of lead and chromate-free
primer, one undercoat and one finishing coat of approved enamel paint. Primer to mild steel door frame
shall be approved cathodic electrodeposition primer.
Unless otherwise specified, paint all metal surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete, masonry
work, etc, except for concrete reinforcement, with one coat of lead and chromate-free primer.
Paint stainless steel, brass and aluminium Works only if specified.
23.6 PAINTING OF PIPES
Allow for the painting of all sanitary, water and gas installation pipes, rainwater downpipes, balcony
waste discharge stacks and all services pipes including water supply pipes (except for stainless steel
pipes and pipes in the water tank compartment). Unless specified otherwise, the colour shall match with
the general background colour tone of the building to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Paint pipes and trunking as specified hereunder and including other types of pipes and trunking not so
specified but as shown in the Drawings.
Type Of Pipe / Trunking Paint Coat Required
UPVC pipes and fittings Two coats of enamel paint unless specified otherwise.
However, those within trunking, stacks/ceiling and service
ducts need not be painted)
UPVC trunking for electrical wiring, Two coats of acrylic emulsion paint to match the general
water and gas pipes outside background colour tone. However, those within service ducts
residential units need not be painted
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings First coat - one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer;
Second coat - one coat of lead and chromate-free primer;
Third coat - one coat of undercoat for enamel paint;
Fourth coat - one finishing coat of enamel paint.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings Two coats of lead and chromate-free primer followed by two
including supports coats of enamel paint.
Ductile iron pipes and fittings for Two coats of approved ceramic insulation coating.
water distribution mains including
supports on roof level
Copper gas pipes including fittings Two coats of white enamel paint or other colour to match the
background as instructed by the SO Rep.
Stainless steel, copper and brass No painting required unless specified otherwise.
pipes
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-7
23.7 PAINTING TO EXTERNAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SLOPING ROOF OF CENTRAL REFUSE

CHUTE CHAMBER
The external reinforced concrete sloping roof of the central refuse chute chamber shall be painted with
water based algae resistant emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including
23.8 PAINTING OF NOSING STRIPS OF CONCRETE STEPS
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by SO Rep, all nosing strips of concrete steps of exit staircases
in residential blocks, multi-storey car parks (including intermediate connecting staircases), shops, eating
establishments and other facilities shall be painted for visual contrast. The paint system is as follows:
23.8.1 General
Paint system consists of one priming coat and two finishing coats suitable for exterior use. Coating
system to include non-skid aggregate.
White epoxy primer shall be used. Allow for complete curing before applying the two finishing coats.
Two finishing coats shall be polyurethane-based floor coating.
Slip resistance property of coating can be achieved by using either sand [white colour] broadcast or
finishing coat containing grit particles.
Coating shall achieve good visual contrast and achieve a minimum of 15 visual contrast points, using
method of test described in BS 8300.
23.8.2 Thickness Guidelines
Paint coating (approximately 100-140microns in dry film thickness for each finishing coat) onto concrete
steps, approximately 100mm wide on flat face of the step and 20mm on vertical face of the step or as
shown on drawings.
23.8.3 Slip Resistance
Paint to achieve slip resistance of minimum wet slip resistance of 35 PTV [Pendulum Test Value] based
on BS 7976-2.
23.8.4 Abrasion Resistance
The weight loss shall not be more than 200mg using CS-17 wheel and under 1 kg load for 1,000 cycles.
23.8.5 Adhesion Test (X-cut)
The paint system shall have good adhesion to concrete and is to achieve a rating of at least 4A when
tested to ASTM D3359.
23.9 DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT
The Contractor shall ensure that all spent paint and waste water from the washing of paint
brushes/instruments are properly disposed off. The disposal of spent paint and waste water/waste
solvent shall be in accordance with MEWR guidelines. The Contractor shall provide the necessary 220-
litre drums and engage a licensed industrial toxic waste collector to collect the drums for proper
disposal. The Contractor shall put up a consignment note to the Pollution Control Department.
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 23-8
23.9 DISPOSAL OF SPENT PAINT (CONT’D)
23.9.1 Solvent Based Enamel Paint
All spent paint and waste solvent (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There
shall be no discharge of spent paint and/or waste solvent/waste water (generated from washing) into
the sewerage system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported
safely for proper disposal by the licensed industrial toxic waste collector. The drums shall be properly
labelled and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage. The drums shall be covered to prevent fire
hazard and smell nuisance.
23.9.2 Water Based Emulsion Paint
All spent paint and waste water (generated from washing) shall be collected in 220-litre drums. There
shall be no discharge of the spent paint and/or waste water (generated from washing) into the sewerage
system. The drums shall be in good and sound conditions so that they can be transported safely for
proper disposal by the licensed toxic industrial waste collector. The drums shall be properly labelled
and stored within a curbed area to prevent spillage.
23.10 SCAFFOLDING
Provide and erect scaffolding over all faces of the building blocks for the application of paint. Scaffolding
shall not be removed until the painted surfaces are inspected by the SO Rep and until the test results
of the paint samples taken out for testing are known.
23.11 CLEARING UP ON COMPLETION
All areas stained by paint including but not limited to floors, staircases, aprons and public areas and
drains shall be thoroughly washed and removed upon completion of the Works before handing over to
the Employer. All debris and superfluous materials shall be cleared away.
Section 24/.....
BLDG17/S23.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-1
SECTION 24
UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION CABLE,
TELECOMMUNICATION AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE
24.1 LOW TENSION RETICULATION PIPE SYSTEM
The Contractor shall provide and install underground pipe system for Low Tension (LT) reticulation
cables as shown in the Drawings.
24.1.1 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes
(a) Materials
All UPVC pipes shall be Class B in accordance with SS 141:1976.
The material from which the pipe is produced shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) to
which shall be added suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes. These additives shall
not constitute a toxic hazard and shall not impair its chemical and physical properties.
The UPVC pipes shall be grey in colour and shall have a socket at one end.
The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be
clean, smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall
be clearly cut and square with the axis of the pipe.
(b) Dimensions
The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and plug shall be as shown in the Drawings for underground
piping system.
24.1.2 Pipe Installation
(a) General
The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. In case a straight run is not possible the
radius of curvature shall be determined on the Site by the SO Rep.
(b) Gradient Of UPVC Pipes Under-Crossing Other Services
Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings or directed by the SO Rep on the Site, the
gradient of UPVC pipes under-crossing other services shall be :
Pipe Size Gradient

155mm 1:12
(c) Preparation Of Bottom Of Trench
A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with granite dust shall be provided to areas
that have muddy, clay or soft soil. The hardcore shall consist essentially of crusher run/stones
blinded with sufficient blinding material to aid consolidation.
(d) Flared-Mouth Pipes
Flared-mouth pipes shall be used for entry into draw pit or for pipes which terminate directly in
the ground. All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of
earth or cement.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-2
24.1.2 Pipe Installation (Cont'd)
(e) Construction Method
The first layer of concrete with A6 welded steel mesh shall be placed to the required thickness
on the prepared trench bottom. The bottom layer of pipes shall be laid using spacers at 1.5m
intervals to maintain the spacing between pipes. Ensure that a minimum gap sufficient for the
specified concrete thickness remains between the outside of pipes and the side of trench or
trench shuttering where used.
The next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second
layer of pipes are laid. The final layer of concrete shall be reinforced with A6 welded steel mesh.
The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is placed, shall be
properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe.
The final layer of the concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled. PVC cover plates shall be anchored
on the final layer of concrete.
Ready mixed concrete shall be used. However, if the concrete required is less than 2 m3, hand
mix concrete is allowed.
Mechanical vibrator shall be used to ensure that the gaps between pipes are filled with concrete.
(f) Rapid Hardening Cement
When pipes are laid in conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out immediately, an
approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be used with the concrete.
(g) Nylon Ropes in Pipes
A nylon/polyethylene rope (minimum diameter 7mm) acceptable by the SO Rep shall be provided
in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing.
(h) Protection of Cables
During the boring of pipe entries into existing structures, or during the demolition and rebuilding
of the joint hole, the Contractor shall take such measures as directed by the SO Rep to protect
the cables. Such measures may include the following :
(i) Any movement of existing cable shall be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep.
(ii) Cables shall be protected against mechanical damage at pipe entries and inside joint hole
by packing them with sandbags to act as a cushion when any movement occurs.
(i) Pipe Testing
On completion of pipe laying (including compaction and backfilling) between any two joint holes
or more, a cylindrical brush and a mandrel as shown in the Drawings shall be passed through
each pipe in both directions to test the pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have
entered. The cylindrical brush and mandrel shall be supplied by the Contractor. The mandrel
shall follow the brush to minimise possible scouring or breaking of the pipes. The testing shall
be carried out under the direction of the SO Rep before the section of pipes are accepted.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-3
24.1.3 PVC Cover Plates
(a) Materials
All cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0 m. Each cover plate shall be nominal
172.4mm in width and 2.0mm in thickness. The length and breadth may have a tolerance of
5 mm.
The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistance polyvinyl chloride without
plasticizer (UPVC). Use of regenerated PVC, or Polyethylene or PP is strictly forbidden. Each
cable cover plate shall be linked to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous
chain.
The colour of the plate shall be black in accordance with BS 381c colour code and shall remain
permanent and non-fading.
The materials and the colour of the cable cover plates shall be resistant to chemical influences
likely to be encountered when buried in the ground.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest
revision of the following standards or their equivalent :
Description Standard
(i) Impact Test Clause 7.3 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
(ii) Tensile Strength Clause 7.4 of E6530 (Austrian Standard)
(iii) Vicat Softening Temperature ASTM D1525
(iv) Accelerated Ageing ASTM D3045
(b) Requirements
The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties :
(i) Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength shall not have more than
3 cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). The drop hammer shall not
penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop
hammer tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on
the specimens from the same lot. Should the specimens tested in the second series of
tests also fail to meet the requirements, the whole test is deemed to have failed.
(ii) The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall
withstand a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.
(iii) The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than
72°C (Rate A at 50°C 5°C per hour).
(iv) The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70°C for 168 hours. Aged specimens
shall also be tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change
in properties shall be less than 25% of the original value.
The cable cover plates shall be type tested by PSB or an SAC accredited laboratory in
accordance with the above requirements.
(c) Installation of UPVC Cable Cover Plates
The cable cover plates shall be laid end to end directly over the pipes as shown in the Drawings.
Ensure that the cable cover plates are properly secured together.
24.1.4 Markers For Draw Pit
On completion (including backfilling, compacting and turfing) of the draw pits which are not located
within the road, approved markers as shown in the Drawings shall be installed to indicate the corners
of the draw pit. For draw pits which are located within the road, such markers need not be provided.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-4
24.1.5 Backfilling For Underground Pipe System
All trenches excavated for the provision of underground pipe system for Low Tension (LT) reticulation
cables shall be backfilled as follows :
(a) For trenches which are located within the road, backfill from the completed pipe level to the
subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry dust.
(b) For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the
Contract with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.
24.1.6 Energisation Of Electrical Sub-Station By PowerGrid
The Contractor shall expedite and complete all underground pipe system work timely to facilitate the
laying of all necessary reticulation cables by PowerGrid or other utilities Services Provider within the
Site boundary. The electrical sub-station is targeted to be energised by the Services Provider at least
12 weeks before the date of Substantial Completion of the first building block in the Works or otherwise
advised by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall incorporate such work arrangement requirements in the
programme for the Works or revised programme for the Works, submitted under the Contract. All costs
and expenses incurred for complying with the provisions of this subclause shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum.
24.2 TELECOMMUNICATION PIPE AND BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE SYSTEM
The Contractor shall provide and install underground pipe system for telecommunication and
Broadband coaxial cables as shown in the tender Drawings. The installation of Telecommunication and
Broadband Coaxial Cable Pipe System shall comply with all statutory rules and regulations, and in
accordance to the latest Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Buildings (COPIF).
24.2.1 Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Pipes
(a) Materials
All UPVC pipes shall comply with all requirements as specified in SS.272; 1983
The material to produce the pipes shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC). When joining
pipes, suitable lubricants, pigments, stabilizers and pastes shall be used. These additives shall
not constitute a toxic hazard to the environment and shall not change in its chemical and physical
properties.
The UPVC pipes shall not be darker than the grey colour and shall have a socket at one end.
Each length of pipe shall be clearly, indelibly and continuously marked at intervals of not more
than 1.0m using a distinctive colour with the description of Manufacturer’s identification/110mm
UPVC pipe/Date/Month/Year/SS272.
The pipe wall shall be homogenous throughout and the internal and external surfaces shall be
clean, smooth and reasonably free from grooves, blisters, dents and heat marks. The ends shall
be clearly cut and square with the axis of the pipe.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-5
24.2.2 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Installation
(a) Dimensions Of 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe
The dimensions of the UPVC pipes and coupling for the underground piping system shall be as
shown hereunder :
Internal Internal
Max Min Max Min
Diameter Diameter
Item Length Wall Wall External External
at the at the
Thickness Thickness Diameter Diameter
Edges Center
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Pipe 6000+50 3.6 3.2 110.4 110 - -

-0
Coupling 180 ±2 3.6 3.2 - - 110.5+0.2 110+0

-0 - 0.2
(i) All pipelines are to over-cross sewer lines.
(ii) The crowns of all pipelines are to be laid at least 600mm below the invert level of Civil
Engineering drains.
(iii) No pipe is to be cast in the base or wall of the drains.
(iv) The pipeline shall be straight and level where possible. Where a straight run is not
possible, the radius of curvature shall be determined by the SO Rep.
(v) All rectification Works instructed by the SO Rep to meet all requirements shall be carried
out at the Contractor’s cost and expense.
(vi) The following items shall be submitted to the SO Rep for verification of tests conducted
on the Manholes and Pipelines :
(a) Completion Certificate

(b) Summary of Manhole and Pipeline Length
(c) Pipe Testing Report/Manhole Survey Record
The Contractor shall assist the SO Rep in all verification work to ensure all tests are
properly conducted. The Contractor shall perform more tests if the SO Rep deemed
necessary all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
(vii) Upon completion of the pipe laying works, the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings
of the project site to the SO Rep, in addition to the items listed in subclause 24.2.2.2(f)
above.
(b) Gradient Of UPVC Pipes Under-Crossing Other Services
Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings or directed by the SO Rep on the Site, the
gradient of UPVC pipes under-crossing other services shall be:
Pipe Size Gradient

110mm 1: 6
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-6
24.2.2 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Installation (Cont’d)
(c) Preparation Of Bottom Trench
The trench shall be excavated to the required width and depth; the bottom of the trench shall be
free from stone, levelled and well punned. The pipe shall be laid at the depth specified to the
details shown in the COPIF unless otherwise specified.
A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with granite dust shall be provided to areas
that have muddy, clay or soft soil. The hardcore shall consist essentially of crusher run/stones
blinded with sufficient blinding material to aid consolidation.
(d) Flare-Mouth Pipes And Coupling
Flare-Mouth UPVC pipes shall be used for entry into manhole wall unless otherwise specified.
The outer surface of the pipe shall be roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of
solvent cement applied for its length in the manhole wall. All the ends of flared-mouth pipes shall
be sealed with end plugs to prevent entry of earth or cement.
(e) Construction Method
(i) Where UPVC of less than 16-Ways are to be laid, they shall be encased in Grade 20
concrete to a minimum thickness of 50mm as shown to the details in the COPIF.
(ii) Where UPVC are to be laid in multiple formation, polypropylene spacers shall be used
at a maximum spacing of 1.5m apart to allow clearance between adjacent pipes.
(iii) The starting end of the pipe shall be blanked off with a board or boards to prevent
foreign objects from entering the pipes. When joining multiple pipes, all pipe ends and
the interior of the collar shall be thoroughly cleaned with a dry rag followed by a liberal
coating of solvent cement. The collar shall then be pushed into the first pipe by hand. A
suitable wooden batten is then placed across the remote end of the collar and tapped
with a hammer until it is engaged midway. The next length of pipe shall then be engaged
to the collar and similarly tapped until fully engaged.
(iv) The first layer of concrete shall be placed to the required thickness on the prepared
trench bottom. The bottom layer of the pipes shall then be laid (using the spacer to
maintain the spacing between pipes where applicable) such that a minimum gap,
sufficient for the specified concrete thickness, remains between the outside pipes and
the side of the trench or trench shuttering where used. The next layer of concrete shall
then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer of pipes are laid.
This process shall be continued until the final layer of concrete is laid to the specified
thickness. The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is
placed, shall be properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against
the pipe.
Where ready mix concrete is used, the placing of concrete up to three layers of pipe in
a single batch is allowed, provided 12mm size diameter vibrators are used to
consolidate the concrete filling the spaces between the pipes.
For pipeline encased with 100mm thick concrete, each batch shall be well compacted
and worked around the pipe and vibrated using a vibrator. The space between the pipes
shall be properly tamped with a 12mm diameter rod to ensure that the concrete is
properly filled. The final layer of concrete shall be thoroughly trowelled.
(v) When pipes are laid under conditions where backfilling is required to be carried out
immediately, approved type of rapid hardening cement additive compound shall be
used with the concrete.
(vi) All spaces alongside the pipe shall be filled with stone free earth and hand punned to a
compacted thickness of not less than 100mm above the top of the pipe barrel.
(vii) Where the pipe is recessed into the wall of the manhole, the outside surface of the pipe
shall be roughened with glass paper or sandpaper and a coat of solvent cement applied
for its length in the manhole wall.
(viii) Pipes shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.2m below the final ground level or as
otherwise directed.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-7
24.2.2 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Installation (Cont'd)
(e) Construction Method (Cont'd)
(ix) Pipes shall be in straight run. When bending is unavoidable, the bend shall be gradual
and smooth. No ‘S’ bend is allowed.
(x) A 90 degree upturn when changing from a horizontal to a vertical plane shall be done
with approved type factory made bend pipe. The pipe shall be clipped and flushed
against the wall and shall rise to a height of 1.0m above ground level unless otherwise
directed.
(xi) A nylon/polyethylene rope shall be provided in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after
pipe testing and this shall be drawn in together with the proposed cable. The rope shall
be of 4-core or multi-strand type with overall diameter of 6.0mm in coil of 200m. In all
lead-in pipes, the rope shall extend to the first manhole to allow pulling of cables in the
manhole.
24.2.3 Standard Manholes
(a) The details of the standard manholes are shown in the COPIF. The presence of unforeseen
obstructions in the ground, or adverse ground conditions, may necessitate the construction of a
type other than that specified, or a modification of one or more of the dimensions stipulated in
the COPIF. The SO Rep shall advise the Contractor of any modifications required. The
Contractor shall not carry out any modification without the approval of the SO Rep.
(b) Before any concrete is placed :
(i) The bottom of the excavation must be properly levelled and consolidated.
(ii) The bottom shall be kept dry by providing a sump hole as shown in the COPIF to
accommodate a water pump, and a layer of 150mm thick hardcore material shall be
provided where necessary.
(c) Pipes shall be cast in situ as construction of manhole proceeds. Pipe ends shall be trimmed and
entries made clear of raw edges which may damage cables, if flared mouth pipe is not used.
(d) Pipes shall enter the manholes in the manner as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the
SO Rep. The pipes shall enter the manholes at such depths as to ensure a minimum clearance
of 350mm from the roof and base and 150mm from the walls at the sides unless otherwise
specified.
350mm
150mm
150mm
350mm
(e) Rawl plugs, channel brackets and anchor irons and earth rods shall be fixed in the manhole as
shown in the COPIF or in such other positions as determined by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-8
24.2.3 Standard Manholes (Cont'd)
(f) Manholes shall be constructed at a depth to allow a 230mm thick grade 30 concrete shaft wall
with the following height (measured from the roof to the top of the cover) as shown :
Manhole Code Height (mm)

JX 2 250 shown in the details in the COPIF
MX 1 and MX 2 400 shown in the details in the COPIF
MX 3 and MX 4 1200mm with single layer of steel fabric reinforcement shown
in the details in the COPIF
Where X = C denotes that heavy-duty manhole frame and cover shall be used.
Where X = F denotes that medium duty manhole frame and cover shall be used.
Concrete for filling the recess of the frame and cover shall be of grade 30 concrete and shall be
flushed with the top of the cover. For heavy duty without frame and cover, the concrete shall be
filled up to the ribs without covering the ribs.
(g) Manhole walls shall be fair faced and not rendered. All projections shall be removed and cavities
filled with cement mortar. The walls shall not be coated with cement or cement sand wash.
(h) The floor shall be given a 20mm rendering of cement mortar with a fall towards the sumphole
from all directions.
(i) Only approved formwork shall be used in manhole construction.
(j) Manholes or other structures shall be located outside the Drainage Reserve and at a minimum
clear distance of 1m from the wall of an existing culvert, or 2.5m from the boundaries of the
Drainage Reserve.
(k) Manholes should be located within the turfed area where feasible. The top level of the manholes
should match the final road level or the surrounding ground level as decided by the SO Rep.
(l) The position of the manholes and pipelines should not conflict with the drains, sewer lines, sewer
manholes, electrical pipelines and draw pits.
(m) Completed manholes shall be pumped clear of water and made ready for the SO Rep to inspect.
24.2.4 Manhole Frame & Cover
(a) Manhole frame and cover shall be obtained from suppliers who have obtained certifications from
the PSB or other accredited product certification bodies that these items comply with SS 30
Grade A1 or Grade B for heavy duty or medium duty respectively. The manhole cover shall not
bear the name of any licensees.
(b) Medium duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within turf or footpath
areas.
(c) Heavy-duty frame and cover shall be fixed onto manhole constructed within carriageway or car
park.
(d) Voids in the frame and cover of heavy-duty type are to be filled with grade 30 concrete, well
tamped, levelled off, and cured before use.
(e) The manhole frame and cover shall be placed on top of manhole shaft, with a minimum width of
150mm and a minimum depth of 150mm and grade 30 concrete haunching all round the frame.
The frame and cover shall be fixed in such a manner as to be level with the surrounding area.
(f) Manhole covers near to building edges or road edges shall be aligned with these edges.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-9
24.2.5 Pipe, Manhole And Trench Testing
Upon completion of pipe laying works, the Contractor shall make arrangements with Public
Telecommunication Licensees (PTL) / Telecommunication System Licensees (TSL) through the
Telecommunication Facility Co-ordination Committee (TFCC) to have the pipe tested in accordance
with the following procedures.
(a) Pipe Testing Of 110mm Nominal Diameter UPVC Pipe Between Manholes
(i) On completion of the pipe laying (including compaction of the backfill) between any two
manholes or sites thereof, a cylindrical brush and standard Mandrel (see details in the
COPIF) or a Quad No.5 cable of minimum 2m length shall be passed through each bore
in both directions to test the pipe and to remove any foreign matter which may have
entered. The Contractor shall provide the test mandrel and brush. The mandrel shall follow
the brush to minimize possible scouring or breaking of the pipe. The testing shall be
carried out under the direction of the SO Rep before the section of pipes is accepted.
(ii) When the building of manhole(s) is/are deferred until after the completion of a section of
pipe included in the Works, the last 2m of each bore shall be tested. The SO Rep shall
first make a visual check with the aid of a torchlight or similar means of illumination. Any
foreign matter shall be removed from the pipe.
(iii) The Contractor shall test and install draw-wires or nylon ropes in all newly laid pipes
including one way pipe. (nylon/polyethylene rope of 4-core or multi-strand type with overall
diameter of 6.0mm in coil of 200m).
(vi) Testing of encasement of the pipe shall be subjected to approval by the SO Rep.
(b) Manhole Testing
(i) Cube Test
When instructed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall furnish the required numbers of
100mm cubes of concrete for manhole construction to be prepared and tested for its
compressive strength in accordance with SS 78:1972. A minimum of one such test shall
be conducted per ten manholes. The minimum works cube strength of concrete shall be
as shown hereunder :
Grade 20 - 14N per mm2 after 7 days

20N per mm2 after 28 days
Grade 30 - 20N per mm2 after 7 days

30N per mm2 after 28 days
(ii) Core Test
After the concrete has hardened, the SO Rep may at his discretion, instruct the Contractor
to drill sample(s) of concrete from manhole walls or floors or roofs and send such
sample(s) for core test in accordance with BS 1881 all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
(c) Water Proofing
The Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that after the completion of pipe laying
and manhole construction, there shall be no leakage such as seeping, dripping or flowing of
water through manhole walls, roof, floor and pipe entries.
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 24-10
24.2.5 Pipe, Manhole And Trench Testing (Cont'd)
(d) Testing of Trench
The Contractor shall arrange all the necessary equipment and manpower to carry out tests on
the constructed trenches on any of the following :
(i) the depth of covering;
(ii) the concrete encasement;
(iii) the trench base construction;
(iv) the compaction test of the backfilling material and the subgrade;
(v) quality test of backfilling and reinstatement materials;
(vi) the fabric reinforcement.
The Contractor shall rectify Works that are not carried out in accordance with the Specifications.
All test results shall be certified by the SO Rep.
(e) Backfilling For Underground Pipe System
All trenches excavated for the provision of underground pipe system for telecommunication and
Broadband coaxial cables shall be backfilled as follows :
(i) For trenches that are located within the road, backfill shall be from the completed pipe
level to the subgrade of the road with granular materials such as sand/granite fines or quarry
dust. The backfilling shall be properly compacted.
(ii) For trenches which are not located within the road, backfill to the level required under the
Contract with good dry earth approved by the SO Rep.
Section 25/.....
BLDG17/S24.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-1
SECTION 25
CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND,
FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT
25.1 GENERAL
Construct badminton court, sepak takraw court, volley ball court, basket ball court, fitness station, and
children's playground, complete with play equipment, play sculpture, sand filling; or concrete base with
line markers, table and concrete benches in numbers and to positions as shown in the Drawings.
Details and finishes shall be as shown and as specified in this Section including all clauses and
25.2 SETTING OUT
Set out outline of playground, courts, fitness station, or position of play equipment and obtain approval
from the SO Rep before proceeding further. Allow for shifting and making adjustment when directed by
the SO Rep.
25.3 LEVELS
Levels of playground and equipment shall be based on finished ground level adjourning and not
necessarily on finished platform level shown on the Drawings. Check on site in all cases to ensure that
rainwater collected on these playground can be discharged into nearby drains. Adjust levels where
necessary.
25.4 GROUND BASE
After removal of the top layer of the soil, the ground shall be well consolidated mechanically before
laying hardcore. Consolidate again, filling more hardcore to make up to level. Should ground be soft,
obtain the decision of the SO Rep on the necessity for piling work.
25.5 CONCRETE STRUCTURE
25.5.1 Construct concrete structure of Grade 25 concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete"
25.5.2 Bases of playgrounds shall be hardcore base of an average net thickness of 100mm, consolidated
hardcore, blended and topped with 50mm thick crusher run (6-40mm) and compacted to a net thickness
of 100mm and to a fall 1:50 or as shown in the Drawings. Provide expansion joints to positions and
details as shown.
25.5.3 Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts
Where hardcourts and multi-purpose courts are included in the Works, these shall be constructed strictly
in accordance with the Drawings. The slab shall be a minimum of 150mm thick reinforced with wire
mesh D8 placed 35mm from the top surface. The Grade 30 concrete shall be cast as specified in
Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Contraction joints shall be introduced into the slab at a spacing of 9500mm or as shown in the Drawings.
It shall be formed by a saw-cut after the concrete has aged for at least one day. The depth of the saw-
cut shall be at least 40mm. For multi-purpose courts, a 25mm expansion joint shall be formed strictly
in accordance with the Drawings at the half-court line.
BLDG17/S25.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-2
25.5.3 Hardcourts And Multi-Purpose Courts (Cont'd)
The slab shall be finished with 3 passes of power trowel done without sprinkling of cement dust, cement
grout or water onto the surface. The trowelling shall be completed before the concrete set. Ensure a
sufficient team of workmen to complete the job. The concrete shall be immediately cured for seven
days with approved curing compound or other approved methods.
The basketball court stand shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. Concrete footing shall
be as shown in the Drawings. All joints shall be fully welded to a neat and smooth finish. 50mm thick
nylon cushion padding shall wrap round the standpost to the height as shown in the Drawings. The
backboard shall be 18mm clear acrylic sheet and shall be fixed to the angle support with 6mm diameter
stainless steel counter sunk screws and at intervals as shown in the Drawings.
All galvanised steel pipes, angles and supports shall be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching
primer and one coat of approved zinc chromate primer and then painted with one coat of undercoat and
one finishing coat of approved enamel paint.
All court lines shall be painted with polyurethane paint in bright red, orange, blue or white as indicated.
Samples of polyurethane paint showing the colour range as specified shall be submitted to the SO Rep
for approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that the steel structure are adequately and effectively protected from
lightning strike. The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
25.6 CONCRETE PIPES
Concrete pipes shall be of the dimensions as shown in the Drawings & conforming to BS 556.
25.7 PRECAST SLABS
Precast slabs around edges of playground shall be 300mm x 300mm x 100mm thick of Grade 30
concrete as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it
and cast in steel moulds.
Lay slabs on 1:3 cement mortar bed with 25mm gaps between slabs. Fill these gaps with 5 to 10mm
graded granite chippings.
25.8 SUB-SOIL PIPES
All sub-soil pipes shall be installed at areas as indicated in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be of perforated UPVC sub-soil pipes conforming to BS 4962 : 1989 or SS 272
UPVC pipes with perforations as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be wrapped with approved non-woven geotextile fabric and encased with washed
sand as shown in the Drawings.
All sub-soil pipes shall be laid in 1:100 gradient (minimum) and with uPVC pipe joint fittings. The
maximum length of sub-soil pipe shall be 25m. For perimeter open drains with depth of 400mm and
above, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 150mm. Where the depth of the perimeter open drain
< 400mm, the diameter of the sub-soil pipes shall be 100mm. Under such case, consult with the SO
Rep before proceeding.
All sub-soil pipes shall be connected to sumps and drains at the outlet.
Upon completion of laying of all subsoil pipes, the Contractor shall prepare and submit 3 copies of as-
built drawings to the SO Rep.
Geotextile fabric shall be non-woven type and approved by SO Rep. The tensile strength of geotextile
shall be minimum 7.0kN/m and flow rate shall be 80 -150 litres/sq.m/sec. Submit test report and sample
for the approval of SO Rep before installation on the Site.
BLDG17/S25.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-3
25.9 PLAY EQUIPMENT AND OUTDOOR FITNESS EQUIPMENT
25.9.1 Play Equipment
Fabricate and install all playground equipment conforming to SS 457. In addition, the playground
equipment must have third party certification by International Play Equipment Manufacturers
Association (IPEMA) in accordance to ASTM F1487 Standard Consumer Safety Performance
Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use or TÜV SÜD in accordance to EN 1176
European Standard for Playground.
The Contractor obtain SO Rep’s approval for the following prior to installation:
(a) Shop drawings;

(b) Manufacturer’s component installation drawings; and
(c) Mounting details with PE endorsement.
The Contractor shall follow strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions and procedures for the installation
of each play structure designed. The play equipment shall be supervised and inspected by the
Contractor and the Consultants QP. The Contractor produce inspection checklist, certificate of
supervision and other related records on play equipment upon request during the site audit.
Before handing over the playground including play equipment, the Contractor shall engage the Certified
Playground Safety Inspector (CPSI) to inspect and certify the installed play equipment complied with
relevant standards. The CPSI engaged by the Contractor must NOT be an employee or have an
ownership interest in the firm that supplies and/or installs the play or exercise equipment under the
Contract. The Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance Certificate in the format as shown in
Appendix A46, together with the approved drawings, to the SO Rep. The CPSI shall indicate the name
and the registration no. on the drawings with the Performance Compliance Certificate.
25.9.2 Outdoor Fitness Equipment
Fabricate all outdoor fitness equipment as shown and complying with SS 534:2007. Install this
equipment in the positions and in accordance with the details as shown in the approved shop drawings.
The Contractor shall produce program for shop drawings, approvals and installation time frame.
Contractor and Consultants to strictly follow specialist’s instructions and installation methods and
ensure shop drawings include details of fixings and footings. Modification by main contractor and/or
specialist to shop drawings shall be re-submitted to Consultants for verification. The installation shall
be in accordance with the approved shop drawings and shall be supervised by the Consultants. The
finished product shall be inspected by the Contractor, Specialist, sub-contractor and the Consultants
EPDM rubber flooring shall be as specified in Clause 25.10 “Cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber Flooring for
Children’s Playground”.
Upon handing over the fitness equipment, the Contractor shall submit a Performance Compliance
Certificate in the format as shown in Appendix A48 to the SO Rep.
25.10 CAST-IN-SITU EPDM RUBBER

FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND
The Contractor and his Specialist executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-
clauses under it have to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and
reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter referred to as "Performance
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the
Contractor and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer, subject
always to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's
and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
25.10.2 Concrete Base
The concrete base shall be finished in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements with the
necessary drainage and falls before laying the cast-in-situ rubber flooring.
BLDG17/S25.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-4

FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND (CONT’D)
25.10.3 Cast-In-Situ Rubber Flooring
The wet-pour rubber flooring for the children’s playground consists of a tw0-layer system, comprising
of a base mat of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (hereinafter referred to as “SBR” for the purposes of this
clause including all subclauses under it) rubber granular and a top surface of Ethylene Propylene
Dienemonomer (hereinafter referred to as “EPDM” for the purposes of this clause including all
subclauses under it). The completed rubber flooring shall be free from Defect, such as blistering, fissure,
peeling, delamination, disintegration, unevenness and discolouration.
The performance of the rubber flooring surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a) Polyurethane Binder
The binding agent shall be a solvent free single component Methylene Diphenyl Isocyanate
(hereinafter referred to as “MDI” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it)
based, moisture curing binder. It shall be Toulene Diphenyl Isocyanate (hereinafter referred to
as “TDI” for the purposes of this clause including all subclauses under it) free. The binder shall
be “Flexilon 1102”; “Stobielast S133/S134”; “Tennek TPB 4811 (2c)”; “Incorez 902/023”; “Poly
811-2C”; or other approved, polyurethane binder.
(b) EPDM Top Layer
The EPDM shall be peroxide cured only. The typical physical properties of the peroxide cured
EPDM shall be as follows:
Hardness (IRHD) 65 ±5
Tensile (Mn/m²) > 4.2
Elongation at break (%) > 650
Specific Gravity 1.58 ± 0.03
EPDM pigment synthetic rubber granules (size 1 –4mm) shall be coloured EPDM and must be
UV stable. Strand, shave, chipped or shredded rubber is not acceptable in the top layer.
A minimum of 10mm thick top layer EPDM rubber surface shall be a seamless surface. The
colours and design shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior to its installation. The
EPDM shall be “BRG”; ”MRI; or other approved.
(c) Base Layer
The base layer shall be a precise combination of black granular rubber SBR (size 4 to 10 mm)
mixed with binder. The thickness of the SBR base rubber shall be minimum 65mm thick.
(d) Thickness
The total thickness of the cast-in-situ EPDM rubber flooring shall not be less than 75 mm thick.
25.10.4 Method Of Installation
The system shall be laid-in-situ on top of the concrete base and trawled to provide an even, seamless.
porous, slip resistance and resilient rubber flooring.
(a) Surface Preparation
All surfaces are to be laid to fall and shall be clean and dry before commencement of the Works.
The new concrete base shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of seven days prior to the
commencement of the rubber flooring.
(b) SBR Base Rubber
SBR base rubber granules shall be thoroughly mixed by mechanical mixer with the polyurethane
binder and laid onto the concrete slab. A minimum ratio of 100:12 by weight, between the rubber
granules and binder shall be mixed on the Site. The SBR rubber layer shall be minimum 65mm
thick . The screed shall be trowelled to form a uniform and seamless layer. A roller is required
to roll the surface to maintain an equal density surface throughout.
BLDG17/S25.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-5

25.10.4 Method Of Installation (Cont'd)
(c) Curing For Base Rubber
The surface shall be cured in ambient temperature for a minimum of 12 hours before proceeding
to the next layer.
(d) EPDM
A minimum thickness of 10mm EPDM layer is laid on a SBR rubber base. A minimum ratio of
100:18 by weight between the EPDM rubber and binder shall be mixed. The screeding shall be
cast-in-situ screeding and hand trowel to maintain a seamless application.
(e) Curing For EPDM
The surface can be walked on only after 18 hours. However, the playground shall only be opened
for public usage after 5 days when full curing is achieved. Proper barricade shall be provided
during the process of curing.
(f) Edges
The surface edges shall be flush with adjacent areas or tapered to provide a safe and barrier-
free transition.
25.10.5 Performance Requirements
Where cast-in-situ EPDM Rubber flooring for children's playground is included in the Works, test
certificates for the performance requirements specified hereunder shall be submitted to the SO Rep for
approval. The performance requirements and test methods for impact absorbing playground surfacing
shall comply with SS 495:2001.
(a) Resistance To Abrasive Wear
The cast-in-situ surfaces shall exhibit the performance specified hereunder :
(i) Wear index shall be less than 1.0;

(ii) Wear ratio (p) shall be not less than 1.0 and not more than 3.0
(b) Slip Resistance
The minimum slip resistance measured in any direction of test, under either wet or dry conditions
shall not be less 40.
(c) Resistance To Indentation
The residual indentation (r), after 24 hour recovery, shall not be more than 5.0mm.
after removal of the load and after allowing for 24 hour recovery, none of the specimens tested
shall exhibit any cracking, splitting or perforation around the point at which the load was applied.
(d) Ease Of Ignition
The greatest radius of effects of ignition shall not exceed 35mm and shall thereby be classified
as having a “LOW radius of effects of ignition”.
(e) Critical Fall Height
Critical fall height of impact absorbing surfacing shall comply with SS 495:2001.
Before handing over the playground including playground equipment, contractor is required to conduct
impact attenuation test at site to comply with SS 495:2001 and shall submit Performance Compliance
Certificate, together with test report attached in the format as shown in Appendix A46, to the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S25.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 25-6

25.10.6 Warranty
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the Works on the terms and conditions as stipulated in
the Deed of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring For Children’s Playground as produced
in Appendix A6. In this respect, the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty
to the Employer or to such other party or such Town Council(s) as the SO Rep may at its sole discretion
decide. In the event the Deed of Warranty for part of the Works or for the whole Works is to be submitted
to such Town Council(s), the Contractor and his Specialist shall submit such Deed of Warranty as
produced in Appendix A6(TC) to such Town Council(s). The duly executed Warranty shall be submitted
immediately upon request by the SO Rep, and if no such request is made, then at such time when the
SO Rep considers the Works have been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract. In
the event the Contractor and his Specialist shall fail to execute and submit the Deed of Warranty within
the time specified, the SO Rep shall be allowed to withhold 15% of the payment of any sums due to the
Contractor in relation to the execution of such Works, subject to the minimum sum of S$5,000/- per
Deed of Warranty. However, such sums withheld shall be released to the Contractor upon submission
by him of the duly executed Deed of Warranty.
25.11 BONDING OF SPRING ROCKERS (PLAYGROUND)
All spring rockers in playground shall be electrically bonded to weldmesh in accordance to SS 555.
The Contractor shall ensure proper bonding is done.
25.12 EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS
Equipotential nettings shall be provided for playground, hardcourt, fitness station with reinforced
concrete base in accordance to SS 555 : Part 3 Clause 8.3.3. The Contractor shall ensure electrical
continuity of the weldmesh/BRC used to form the equipotential surface and that all metallic poles and
elements within the surface are properly bonded to the weldmesh/BRC. The Contractor shall capture
all the necesssary photographs to prove that equipotential nettings are provided and equipment and
metallic fixtures are bonded. These photographs, with dates shown, shall be submitted to the
Consultant for approval and record. In addition, the Consultant's LEW or PE shall submit a certification
form (HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET) as produced in Appendix A47 to HDB to confirm equipotential nettings
have been provided for the playground/hardcourt / fitness station in accordance to SS 555 upon
completion of the work.
Section 26/.....
BLDG17/S25.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-1
SECTION 26
LANDSCAPE WORKS
26.1 SCOPE
The work generally includes:
(a) Preparation of plant bed and tree hole including soil supplements.
(b) The search, selection, supply, delivery and planting of nursery plants.
(c) Protection, maintenance, guarantee and replacement of all plant materials and mulched beds.
26.2 RESPONSIBILITIES AND SUBMISSIONS TO SO REP
26.2.1 General Responsibility
The SO Rep shall reserve the right to reject undersized, unhealthy, unspecified, damaged, injured,
diseased, infested or any other plants and horticultural materials during the Time For Completion and
Defects Liability Period (DLP).
26.2.2 Inspection
All materials shall be subject to inspection and approval by the SO Rep. The plant size shall be
measured on the day of planting at the Site. They shall be in accordance with the HDB Approved
Drawings or as directed by the SO Rep in writing.
Inspection and approval of plants delivered to the site shall be validated for their quality, size and generic
species and shall not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements at
the inspection time for final acceptance or during the planting phase.
26.2.3 Submissions
(a) Samples
Submit samples of each of the following type of materials to be approved, except when
specified otherwise:
(i) Approved Soil Mixes (ASM)

(ii) Materials for planting mixtures; including compost
(iii) Materials for staking, guying and wrapping
(vi) Fertilisers
(b) Request for Substitution
If substitutions for the plants listed in the plant schedule are required, the Request for
Substitution Approval should be in writing within six (6) weeks from the date of the Letter of
Acceptance.
(c) Photographs of Plant Materials
Within six (6) calendar months before the Time of Completion, submit two (2) complete sets of
photographs of all plant material which are subject to inspection by the SO Rep. All
photographs shall be labelled and are representative of the plant materials specified.
(d) Schedule and Reports during Defects Liability Period
Before the start of the Defects Liability Period (DLP), submit the schedule for the work to be
accomplished in the following months and a monthly report describing the work completed in
each month.
(e) Updating Of Landscape Plan for “As-Built”
The Contractor shall update the landscape plan within one month after final planting and to
provide 6 sets of updated landscape plans in hard copy to the SO Rep and soft copy in DWG
format in a CD-ROM. Out of the 6 sets, 2 sets to be submitted to the HDB in accordance with
the HDB ‘As-Planted’ Checklist, through the Consultant.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-2
26.3 CLAIMS AND VARIATION ORDERS
26.3.1 Site Works
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses to comply with the requirements as specified in
the Contract Sum. No claim for compensation or extra cost shall be paid for labour, planting material,
construction equipment, tools, instruments etc. for carrying out all checking and testing of Site Works
or any work carried out by the Contractor in connection with such Works.
26.3.2 Earthworks
The contractor shall allow, include or make provision in the Contract Sum for provision of good quality
earth in substrate, excavation of clayey sub-soil, broken concrete, rubble or other materials when
excavating holes for tree/ shrub planting. No claim for these extra earthworks shall be permitted for
excavation of difficult or hard ground.
26.3.3 Rejected Plants
Plants that are not in compliance with the size, girth, height, form and any specifications shall be
rejected. The contractor shall remove and replace all rejected plants at his own costs and expenses.
26.3.4 Dead / Damaged Plants During Establishment
The contractor shall replace dead/ damaged or dying plants at their own expense if they are not
established after planting until the end of DLP. The decision of the HDB regarding non-established
plants that is due to poor workmanship or natural causes shall be final.
Should the contractor fail to replace the unestablished plants, HDB shall provide replacement plants for
the Contractor and the cost of replacement plants or transplanted plants shall be recovered from the
Contractor.
In both planting and transplanting cases, the replacement plants shall be borne by the Contractor.
26.3.5 Non-compliance
If the Contractor fail to comply with any of the horticultural rectifications, all associated costs and plant
materials cost shall be deducted from any monies payable or due to the contractor.
26.4 SITE CONTROL TESTS
26.4.1 Scope
Provide all necessary labour, planting material, Construction Equipment, tools, instruments etc. for
carrying out all checking and testing of Site Works.
26.4.2 Percolation Test
The number of tests shall be 1 per 500 m² subject to a minimum of 1 for each contiguous planting area
such as courtyards. Before backfilling with ASM, further dig a hole on substrate layer measuring 400mm
x 400mm x 500mm deep, and fill the hole completely with water to check for true ground and ensure
that water percolates completely within 4 hours. The drainage performance of the soil is acceptable if
no water remains in the hole.
26.4.3 Jar Test
The number of tests shall be 1 per 500 m² subject to a minimum of 3 samples. Each sample is 100g
comprising 5 sub-samples at depth of ≥1m (avoid collecting samples when the soil is extremely dry or
wet, or immediately after fertiliser application). The test procedure is as follows:
(a) Fill a 250 ml measuring cylinder with water up to its two-third level;
(b) Shake the contents well;
(c) Pour in the soil sample until the water level rises to the 250 ml mark;
(d) Shake the contents well;
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-3
26.4 SITE CONTROL TESTS (CONT”D)
26.4.3 Jar Test (cont’d)
(e) Place the measuring cylinder on a level bench and gently tap until the surface of the sand is
level;
(f) Take measurement of the sand level;
(g) After 3 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the silt visible above the sand-silt
interface;
(h) After 24 hours of standing, take measurement of the height of the clay visible above the silt-
clay interface; and
(i) Work out the percentage of clay, silt and sand.
26.4.4 Penetrometer Test
The number of tests shall be 1 per 500 m² subject to a minimum of 1 for each contiguous planting area
such as courtyards. Penetrate up to 1m from ground level to check for soil compaction. Soil is deemed
to be too compacted and not acceptable if it exceeds 200psi.
26.5 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
26.5.1 General
(a) All materials shall be approved by the SO Rep prior to use on the Site. Materials shall be
obtained from approved sources or suppliers.
(b) All materials and workmanship shall comply with the existing Industry’s Standard of Best
Practices.
26.5.2 Plant Material and Quality
(a) All plant materials supplied shall be free of pest, disease, discoloration and damage. Plants
shall have well-formed branches with vigorously growing shoots.
(b) The general conditions of plants delivered to the Site shall be healthy, well-established with
good form and to the satisfaction and approval of the SO Rep. before planting on the Site in
accordance with the HDB Approved Drawings or directed by the SO Rep:
(i) possess their natural characteristics that are typical of their generic and species;
(ii) free of pests, diseases and damages to any part of the plant;
(iii) possess a single strong trunk leader, unless otherwise stated;
(vi) possess an evenly spread-out and robust root system.
(c) Shrubs are generally multi-stemmed woody perennials of bushy habit. They shall have a
specified minimum height measured from the ground level to the tip of plants. These shrubs
shall be bushy with well-balanced form and well-spread-out root systems. Plants in container
shall not be root-bound and thus, grown in containers of suitable dimensions for their size.
(d) Non-woody perennials with well-developed main stem or stems of good symmetry and a
healthy root system. Clump of herbaceous plants shall include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots.
They shall be supplied compact and bushy with evidence of growing shoots emerging and soil
undisturbed by lifting.
(e) Groundcovers are low growing or prostrate shrubs or herbaceous plants whose creeping habit
totally cover the soil. Plants shall have fully developed roots and leaves.
(f) Climbers grow upwards by means of twining stems, tendrils or clinging roots shall have at least
two-leader shoots and of the specified height or length with vigorous root system.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-4
26.6 HORTICULTURAL WORKS
26.6.1 Horticultural Supervisor
The Contractor shall deploy the Horticultural Supervisor to be stationed full time to oversee the Site
Works during the preparation, planting and hand over of landscape works. The Horticultural Supervisor
shall receive and act upon instructions given by the SO Rep which shall be deemed to be given, to the
Contractor as well.
He/she shall be either:
(a) a Certified Practising Horticulturist listed in https://www.cuge.com.sg/List-of-Certfied-Practising-

Horticulturists;
(b) possess a Workforce Skills Qualifications (WSQ) Advanced Certificate in Landscape

Supervision or Certificate of Ornamental Horticulture; or
(c) equivalent to be approved by the SO Rep.
26.6.2 Notice of Works
Notice of Works shall be given to the SO rep before setting out the excavation, backfilling, plant delivery
and planting with minimum one week’s notice.
26.6.3 Best Practices in Safety
(a) Warning Signs
The Contractor shall display sufficient warning signboards at strategic locations on the Site
during the progress of tree pruning/spraying of pesticide works, as directed by the SO Rep.
(b) Barricade
The Contractor shall also seal or barricade or condoned off the Site with red and white plastic
tapes as an additional safety precaution during the execution of the Works.
(c) Danger Plate
The signboard shall measure 1000mm long x 600mm wide using aluminium plate with
reflective sheeting and reflective wordings "DANGER - TREE PRUNING IN PROGRESS" or
"DANGER PESTICIDE SPRAYING IN PROGRESS" or “DANGER – GRASS CUTTING IN
PROGRESS”. A sample of the signboard shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before
using them on the Site.
(d) Working Hours of Tree Pruning
The Contractor shall carry out routine tree pruning/trimming/ grass operation within the
following time frame:
Monday to Friday : 7am to 3pm

Saturday : 7am to 12 noon
No routine tree pruning/trimming shall be carried out outside the above hours except otherwise
instructed by the SO Rep.
(e) Chemical/ Flammable Materials
All chemicals, pesticides, fertilizers and flammable material are to be stored and locked away
from the public.
(f) House Keeping
The working site shall be tidied up daily at the end of the work.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-5
26.6 HORTICULTURAL WORKS (CONT’D)
26.6.3 Best Practices in Safety (cont’d)
(g) Safety Measures For Grass-Cutting Machines
(i) Provide all safety precaution to eliminate danger to the workmen, the general public and
the property of others.
(ii) All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed
with suitable approved materials to eliminate splinters and flung-off objects from causing
damage or injury to passer-by.
(iii) All mechanised driven or walk behind grass-cutting machines used shall be installed
with suitable approved materials to eliminate splinters and flung-off objects from causing
damage.
(iv) Hand held nylon rope rotary machine shall not be allowed to be used without an
approved guard, unless directed by SO Rep.
(v) The grass-cutter shall wear safety boots, goggles, helmets and safety vest. When these
safety requirements are not complied with, the Contractor's foreman or the SO Rep shall
instruct the grass-cutter to stop work.
(vi) Before grass-cutting commences, a signboard shall be erected on the machine with the
wordings "DANGER KEEP OFF. GRASS CUTTING WORK IS IN PROGRESS". The
grass-cutting machine operators shall stop the grass-cutting works or work away from a
passer-by who is with 10m from the operator.
(vii) The grass-cutting nylon rope shall be securely fixed to the machine. When the machine
is in continuous use, regular checks shall be made. The nylon rope shall be changed to
be kept in good condition. A worn-out nylon rope shall be replaced immediately.
(viii) The nylon rope shall be securely tied and checked before the machines are operated to
prevent the rope from flying off.
26.6.4 Soil Mixture for General Landscaping Use
(a) Approved Soil Mixture (ASM) for landscape works shall conform to the latest edition of the
Centre for Urban Greenery & Ecology (CUGE)'s Specifications for Soil Mixture for Landscaping
Use.
https://www.cuge.com.sg/research/Specifications-for-Soil-Mixture-for-General-Landscaping-
Use?itemid=178
(b) Use of ASM:
(i) All components of soil mixture shall be mixed with slow-release fertilizers off-site before
delivery to the planting site.
(ii) All roof gardens and close bottom planters shall be backfilled with ASM for roof planting.
(iii) All ground level and through-ground planters shall be back-filled with ASM.
(iv) All instant/ grafted fruit trees shall be planted with the ASM to 1m depth.
(v) All shrubs shall be planted with the ASM to 500mm depth.
(vi) All turf / ground cover shall be planted with the ASM to 200mm depth.
(c) All ASMs shall be of good quality; free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter,
be friable and porous in texture. The textural content shall adhere to the compositional ratio of
sand:clay and organic matter (compost).
(d) All ASMs shall be mixed off-site before they are delivered to the site for back-filling into planting
holes or trenches or planters. And slow released fertilizers shall be incorporated into the ASM
during the mixing.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-6
26.6.4 Soil Mixture for General Landscaping Use (cont’d)
The soil mixes are as followed:
True-ground planting
Composition of ASM Ratio of mix

Loam soil 3
Compost 2
Washed sand 1
Roof garden planting
Composition of ASM Ratio of mix

Loam soil 3
Compost 2
Washed sand 1
Light weight aggregates 1
26.6.5 Organic Compost / Mulch
Pelleted chicken compost, lignite, bagasse, rice hulls, mill mud (sugar cane), peat moss, sphagnum
26.6.6 Heat-Treated Clay
Diatomites, attapulgite, kaolite, absorbalite or sorbastone.
26.6.7 Clay for Sub-Grade Soil
The sub-grade soil is the stratum found just below the top layer of soil. Its clayey content shall not be
greater than 45% of the total site area.
26.6.8 Washed Sand
The washed sand shall be free of any salt, debris, stones or other deleterious material.
26.6.9 Soil Conditioner
Soil conditioner shall comprise of peat, coco-peat, organic compost or other approved odorous, fibrous
and organic matters suitable for mixing into the soil to make a friable growing medium for plants.
Organic: Cocoa husks, coffea grounds, coc-peats, coir fibres dust, mill mud (sugar cane),
Synthetic: Polyacrylamide, hydrogel
26.6.10 Lightweight Aggregate
Lightweight aggregate shall be clean clinker of low-density inert material of natural aggregates or any
porous material whose weight does not exceed 500 kg per cubic metre (kg/ m³).
The following lightweight aggregates may be used:
(a) Natural: pumice, volcanic scoria, expanded clay / shale

(b) Synthetic: vermiculite, expanded polystyrene, perlite, leca, foamed glass
(c) Ultra-light: Scoria, coke breeze, rounded foamed glass, rice hulls, vermiculite, perlite, rockwool
(vegetable), polystyrene: Phenol formaldehyde
26.6.11 Water-Holding Medium
Water-holding medium is an absorbent copolymer water crystal that increases the water-holding
capacity of any soil mixture to at least 15 times its own weight.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-7
26.6.12 Preparation and Setting Out of Landscaping Works
(a) The Contractor shall set out the Works in accordance with the HDB Approved Drawings or as
directed by the SO Rep.
(b) The Contractor shall purchase the trees/palms/shrubs etc. from his own source.
(c) The SO Rep shall be notified of any discrepancies between the Drawings and actual conditions
on the Site before commencement of the Works. If the Contractor failed to notify the SO Rep
of any such discrepancies, all costs and expenses of any adjustment, amendment, resetting
and realignment of the setting out would be borne by the Contractor.
(d) The shape, pattern and layout of flower/ hedge planting beds shall be demarcated and drawn
by the Contractor on the Site for inspection by the SO Rep before the commencement of
further Works.
(e) The location of trees, palms and shrubs shall be laid out and pegged by the Contractor on the
Site for inspection with the SO Rep before the commencement of further planting works. The
pegs shall be painted to indicate the sizes of planting holes/pits:
Hole / Pit Size Colour Indication

0.6m x 0.6m x 0.6m Yellow
1.0m x 1.0m x 1.0m Not Painted
1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m Red
26.6.13 Plant Protection
All plant materials shall be carefully protected and if necessary wrapped in the nursery before lifting
onto trunk, awaiting transportation, unloading and during storage on the Site.
Any evidence of unsatisfactory or inadequate protection to roots, stems, branches and leaves resulting
in damaged/ impaired plants will be rejected. Under-protected plants shall not be transported during
hot weather and all plants shall be adequately watered during their transportation and storage. No plant
shall be left on the Site unplanted for more than two (2) days.
26.6.14 Hole For Planting
(a) Holes for planting shall be verified by the SO Rep. All holes excavated shall be inspected and
approved by the SO Rep before backfilling the soil mixture. All excavated and unwanted
materials shall be removed from the Site.
(b) If there is underground water or the hole is waterlogged, subsoil drainage or other necessary
remedial action/ measure shall be provided to improve the waterlogged condition.
(c) Holes for planting shall be of the following dimensions (width x breadth x depth):
Dimension of planting holes (m) Shrubs / Sizes of trees

Semi-mature trees in 30 litre bag & above /
1 1.5 x 1.5 x 1.0
Instant trees / Fruit trees
2 1.0 x 1.0 x 1.0 Tree saplings / Shrub trees
3 Area x 0.5 depth Flower beds / Hedges
4 0.6 x 0.6 x 0.5 depth All shrubs & foliage plants
26.6.15 Planting Procedure and Techniques
(a) In planting procedure, trees/ palms shall be planted in precedence of or before the planting of
shrubs and the shrubs before the groundcovers. These plants shall all be laid out, approved
before planting them into the soil bed.
(b) For large areas, the outer perimeter rows are to be set out first to ensure that the correct shape
of the bed is established. The remaining plants shall then be evenly distributed to cover the
planting area. The SO Rep shall be notified in advance if there are too many or too few plants
to fill the area required, and an assessment of the laying out adjustments will be directed
accordingly.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-8
26.6.15 Planting Procedure and Techniques (cont’d)
(c) The soil for planting perennial and herbaceous shrubs or groundcovers shall be loosened to
the depth of the polymer bags or pots wherewith the plants grow. Then a trowel of hand spade
shall be used to dig pocket in the loosened soil to place in the root-ball of the plant. The plant
shall be planted upright and backfilled soil at its base shall be firm to level with the surrounding
ground.
(d) Small shrubs, groundcovers and herbaceous plants shall be planted in pockets formed by a
trowel or hand spade. The pocket shall be deep enough and wide enough to accommodate the
root ball of the plant. The plants shall be placed upright in the planting pockets and make firm
into the ground by treading or hand pressure.
(e) The Contractor shall handle the plant in such a manner so that plant should be firmly held by
the ball of soil holding its roots in the pot, poly bags, containers, etc.
(f) Roots that have over-grown into the ground of the container shall be pruned at least one month
in advance to maintain their tolerances in transporting and planting as required.
(g) The Contractor shall ensure that trees, palms and shrubs are properly removed from their pots,
containers, plaster bags, etc and securely planted in the ground. The Contractor shall
straighten the plants whenever directed by the SO Rep.
(h) All plants shall be positioned upright to accommodate the spreading root system of the plant to
the same soil depth as in the nursery. The soils around the roots shall be firm.
(i) All plants shall be covered with soil levelling their stem collars 250mm higher than the adjacent
ground level at the time of filling as directed by the SO Rep.
(j) All plants shall be watered thoroughly on the very day they are planted.
(k) Maintenance of the newly installed sites shall begin immediately after the trees are planted.
Therein, when the shrubs/ groundcovers are installed.
26.6.16 Turfing Works
(a) Site Preparation for Turfing
The Contractor shall allow for turfing Works, forming slopes and platforms with even surfaces
to the levels as shown in the Drawings by clearing away loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and
building debris. Seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing turfing Works.
(b) Soil Used Site Formation
The soil used for backfilling or mounding shall be earth free of contaminants and the topmost
600 mm shall be not contain more than 45%.soil of clay content.
(c) Compacted Site
The top layer of compacted of hard-pan soil shall be scarified or loosened to a depth of 100mm
for the whole Site and graded to fall towards drains or as instructed by the SO Rep at the
Contractor’s cost and expense.
(d) Site Gradient
The Site shall be graded to fall towards drains at a minimum ground gradient of 1 in 70 or as
instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor’s cost and expense.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-9
(e) ASM
The ASM shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps or other extraneous matter,
be friable and porous in texture. The ASM shall be 150mm (excluding 25mm of original soil
attached to the turf) thick shall be spread over the ground for the planting of grass sods.
(f) Turfing Materials
The grass sods shall be 300mm x 300mm in area with approximately 25mm of original soil
adhering to their roots. The grass sod shall be at least 90% free of weeds, pests or diseases
and with vigorous new growth.
(g) Planting of Turf
Sods shall be laid promptly to avoid desiccation within 24 hours upon delivery, in brick-like
patterns without gaps within. Sods shall be firmly pressed into the ground without any sign of
over-stretching or overlapping along their edges. The turf shall be watered immediately after
planting and daily until the turf thrives.
(h) Broadcasting of Friable Soil
When the level of the completed turf is undulating or uneven, a fine thin layer of friable soil or
sand shall be broad-casted evenly over the turf area.
(i) Turf Maintenance After Planting
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing
maintenance services, as specified hereunder, to the turfing Works during the Time for
Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract,
and for a further period of six months commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for
the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer
(hereinafter referred to as the "Defects Liability Period (DLP)" for the purposes of this clause
including all subclauses under it) by providing and/or performing the following :
(i) Water all plantings thoroughly daily for the first two weeks after planting and when
necessary or as directed by the SO Rep. All watering activities shall be at the
Contractor's cost and expense;
(ii) Weed the planting beds weekly or as directed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost
and expense;
(iii) Replace dead turf or re-turf bare areas weekly;
(iv) Broadcast fertilizers before handing over, and on the 3rd and 6th month of the Defects
Liability Period (DLP);
(v) Cut grass fortnightly after its establishment.
26.7 ARBORICULTURAL WORKS
26.7.1 Tree Quality
All trees, palms and shrubs whereof required under the Contract shall comply with the specified
descriptions and requirements:
(a) All saplings/ instant trees shall possess single strong, straight and unbroken leaders, unless
otherwise specified.
(b) The tree shall be healthy, vigorous and well-established with good-form.
(c) The lateral branching system of the tree shall be evenly balanced in accordance to
specification.
(d) The tree shall meet the specified height, girth and with minimum three well-developed
secondary branches.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-10
26.7 ARBORICULTURAL WORKS (CONT’D)
26.7.2 Single-Stemmed Palms
Single stemmed palms shall have a straight trunk of the specified height measured from the root collar
to the highest frond. The head of the palm shall be balanced with at least five fronds and evidence of
one new shoot.
26.7.3 Clustered Palms
A clump of clustered palms shall have natural multi-stemmed culms with a minimum of three suckers
and specified overall height measured from its root collar. They shall have at least five fronds with
evidence of new growth shoot on each stem/ culm.
26.7.4 Fruit Tree Planting
(a) Fruit Tree
Fruit trees shall be of 1.2m minimum height or as specified. They shall be marcotted or grafted
saplings
(b) Mulching
100mm thick of mulch consisting of dry shredded leaves, grass sword, wood chips, cocopeat or
compost shall be spread over the 1.0m diameter weeding circle. The mulched area shall be
weeded monthly.
(c) Tree Shade
Provide horticultural shade netting to all sensitive fruit trees or sensitive herbs as directed by
the SO Rep. Nylon or other netting approved with 60% to 70% shading effect shall be used to
cover the top of the tree guard and upper 500mm of its four sides, including nailing, wire ties,
etc.
(d) Tree Guards
Provide tree guards to planted fruit trees as specified by the SO Rep. The dimension and
pattern of the tree guards shall be decided by the SO Rep.
26.7.5 Tree Supports
(a) Tree Sapling
(i) One Tree Stake
Tree saplings shall be supported with stake on the same day after planting as directed.
The tree support shall be Bintangore stake of 25–40mm diameter or galvanized steel
pole with capping of 25.4mm diameter or other approved material. The stake shall be of
minimum 3.0m long to be driven 1.2m vertically deep into the ground without injuring the
rootball and shall project 250mm above the crown of the sapling.
(ii) Two Tree Stakes
It shall be used for trees with girth measurement between 150–300mm.
Fasten tree saplings to the supporting stakes by rubber or PVC hose and tie wires. Tying
wire shall be No. 20 SWG galvanised multi-strand wire, threaded through 10mm diameter
rubber or plastic hose and be wounded around the tree trunk in a single loop. The tree
trunk shall be secured at two points; one just above its branch and the other at 500mm
above ground level.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-11
26.7.5 Tree Supports (cont’d)
(b) Semi-Mature/Mature/Instant Tree
(i) Tripod Tree Support
The tripod support shall be used for tree with girth greater than 300mm. A tripod tree-
support system comprises of 3 Bintangore poles 70–150mm in diameter shall be evenly
spaced around the tree, driven at least 500mm at an angle into the ground and hold the
tree at about two-third of the tree’s height from ground level or under the main fork.
At the point where the tree supports meet the trunk, 2 layers of gunny sack or high density
polyethylene shall be wound round the tree trunk. The tree supports shall be tightened
with nylon rope sturdily and subjected to monthly inspection. These tree supports shall be
removed immediately upon the establishment of the tree.
(ii) Quadrangled Tree Support
The quadrangle support shall be used for tree with girth greater than 700mm. The
quadrangle system shall comprise of 4 Bintangore or stainless steel poles with diameter
of 150mm. The 4 poles shall anchor the ground at an angle and hold the tree at about
two-third of the tree’s height. The quadrangle tree support shall be tested for its stability.
(iii) Tree Guying Support
A minimum of 4 guys shall be installed using steel cable or nylon or multi-strand wire
which are pulled tautly and driven into the ground at an angle. The guys shall be threaded
through protective rubber hoses to loop round the tree trunk and it shall be securely tied
to stainless steel anchors in the ground.
(iv) Root Ball Guying Support
The base of the planter shall be installed with a minimum of four dead weights of concrete
with marine-grade stainless steel SSM 316 hooks attached. The loop encircling the tree’s
collar shall be at least 150mm away from the trunk and the four guys that are attached to
the loop are to be pulled tautly and tied securely to the base of the planter. The guys used
shall be marine-grade stainless steel SSM 316 and threaded through with protective
rubber hose.
The joints of the supports shall be nylon or scaffolding joints used in construction.
(c) Tree Ties
Tree tie shall be made of No. 20 SWG multi-strand galvanized wire. It shall be threaded
through a rubber or plastic hose of 10mm diameter and be wounded round the tree trunk in a
single loop. Two tree ties shall be used to secure the tree at two points; one at 500mm below
the tip of the trunk and 500mm above the ground level.
(d) Tree Collar Protection
A PVC of 3mm thick pipe tree of 100–150mm length and 100mm diameter shall be installed
at the tree collar. The pipe shall be cut through its length to go round the tree collar.
26.7.6 Transplanting Existing Trees (Instant Tree)
Where required under the Contract, transplanting of existing trees shall be carried out as follow:
(a) Branch Pruning
Prune branches or selectively removed dead, diseased, broken or weakly attached branches of
the tree as directed by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-12
26.7.6 Transplanting Existing Trees (Instant Tree) (cont’d)
(b) Rootballs
All trees/palms, shrubs to be transplanted shall have an earthen rootball of a minimum

diameter ranging from 3.5 to 7.5 times the diameter of the tree trunk measured at 1.0m above
ground level or to the size to be decided by the SO Rep. This shall be done by excavating a
trench about 0.8m deep around the tree trunk about 3.5 times of the trunk’s diameter.
Excavated trees shall be transplanted within the same working day unless otherwise directed
by the SO Rep.
(c) Tree Pits
To avoid delay, the new pit for the tree transplant shall be ready before the tree is brought to
the new location. The pit shall be at least 0.5m wider and 0.25m deeper than the root-ball of
the transplanted tree to allow for incorporation of topsoil beneath the root. The minimum tree pit
dimension shall be 1.5m x 1.5m x 1.0m deep.
All planting holes for instant tree shall be backfilled with good quality approved topsoil to a level
adjacent to the ground level at the time of filling.
(d) Lifting and Transporting
The tree shall be lifted by motor crane or other lifting machinery of appropriate capacity of
unladen weight. Every precaution shall be taken to ensure the tree’s root-ball is securely
wrapped by moisten canvass and angle bar frame or other approved materials to prevent
damage to the rootball during preparation, loading and transporting of the tree to the new
location.
26.7.7 Transplanting Work Processes
Before unloading a tree into position, the height of the root-ball shall be measured and the pit’s depth
adjusted to its depth. The tree shall be orientated, set in the hole and planted to the trunk collar level
which is in alignment with the ground without further delay. Voids in the ground are to be filled with
earth/ loamy soil and firm to eliminate excessive air pockets under and around the roots. The bare
ground shall be closely turfed to 0.3m away from the trunk’s radius. Tripod shall be provided to keep
the tree firmly in position as and when required.
26.7.8 Tree Pruning
Trees with dead, rotten or crossed branches shall be pruned to maintain a clear stem up to the specified
height using the methods described below. The pruning operation shall be carried out by an
experienced worker with appropriate tools and equipment under the supervision of the Horticultural
Supervisor:
(a) Pruning shall be done at the Branch Bark Ridge (BBR).
(b) Removal of branches shall be with sharpened tool giving a clear and clean cut such that no
part of the stem is damaged or its bark torn.
(c) Ragged edges of barks shall be trimmed with a sharp knife;
(d) All pruned off parts of plants and debris shall be cleared and removed from the Site after
pruning works.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-13
26.8 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD & MAINTENANCE OF PLANTINGS
26.8.1 Watering Method
Watering shall be carried out by using rubber hose fitted with an adjustable spraying head/gun to wet
the soil thoroughly or by automatic irrigation, where applicable.
26.8.2 Soil-Loosening
(a) Ornamental Tree Saplings / Instant Trees
For ornamental tree saplings, soil loosening shall be carried out to a depth of 75mm with a
gardening fork and the weeding area shall be free of weeds at100mm away from the tree’s
trunk.
(b) Shrub / Foliage / Landscaped Site
For shrub/foliage/landscaped site, the weeding area shall be spiked using gardening forks to a
depth of 100mm
26.8.3 Weeding
(a) Ornamental / Native Trees
For ornamental trees, weed to 1.0m diameter around the sapling tree base using hand trowel
or weeding hoe.
An annular band of 30mm shall be maintained around the mature or semi-mature tree base
free of turf, weed and mulch.
(b) Fruit Trees
The mulched area shall be weeded monthly. All rotten fruits on trees or on the ground shall be
removed and cleared from the site. And 100 mm thick of mulch shall be added as and when
necessary.
An annular band of 30mm shall be maintained around the tree base free of turf, weed and
mulch.
(c) Hedge/ Shrub/ Foliage (Individually Planted)/ General Landscape Area
A weeding circle of 0.5m diameter around individually planted shrub/foliage shall be manually
weeded or using a hand trowel or weeding hoe. The hand trowel or hoe shall not damage the
roots of the shrub at 0.32 m from the stem.
26.8.4 Fertilization
(a) Ornamental Trees
(i) Sapling
Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and Magnesium at 15%, 15%, 6% and 4% by weight

respectively shall be broadcasted at a rate of 375g per ornamental tree sapling within
the weeding circle 120mm away from the stem.
(ii) Semi-Mature/Mature Trees
For semi-mature/mature ornamental trees, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and

Manganese at 12%, 12%, 17% and 2% by weight respectively shall be inserted at a rate
of 0.5kg per 250mm girth into holes 300mm deep and at 500mm apart along the dripline.
(b) Fruit Tree
(i) Saplings that are more than 6 months, Less Than 1 Year Old
For fruit tree saplings less than 1 year old, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and Trace
Elements at 15%, 15%, 6% and 4% by weight respectively shall be applied under the
mulch at a rate of 0.3g per tree, 120mm away from the stem.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-14
26.8 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD & MAINTENANCE OF PLANTINGS (CONT’D)
26.8.4 Fertilization (cont’d)
(b) Fruit Tree
(ii) Saplings/Semi-Mature Trees retained at the site
For fruit tree saplings/semi mature fruit trees, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and
Magnesium at 15%, 15%, 6% and 4% by weight respectively shall be broadcasted at a
rate of 0.5kg per tree within the drip zone away from the stem.
(iii) Matured Trees (Flowering/Fruiting) retained at the site
For mature (flowering/ fruiting) fruit trees, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and Trace
Elements at 12%, 12%, 17% and 2% by weight respectively shall be broadcasted (on
level ground) or shall be pocketed (on slope) at 1.0 kg per tree as directed by the SO
Rep within the drip zone away from the stem.
(c) Shrub/ Foliage/ Hedge
For shrub/foliage, fertilizer Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and Trace Elements at 12%,
12%, 17% and 2% by weight respectively shall be broadcasted at 50g per m2, with the
weeding circle 100mm away from the stem.
(d) Climber/Creeper
For climber/creeper, approved foliar Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and Trace Elements at
8%, 8%, 8% and 2% by weight respectively shall be sprayed or as directed by the SO Rep.
26.8.5 Trimming
Trees shall be trimmed as directed by the SO Rep including performing and / or providing the following:
(a) Trim and remove all extra leader/s.
(b) Trim and remove all side branches from the main trunk measured 1.8 m from the ground for
trees along footpaths, car parks and roadside.
(c) Trim and remove all dead, broken, diseased and unwanted branches/shoots.
(d) Trim and remove all overlapping branches rubbing each other.
(e) Remove and clear from the Site all trimmed vegetation and debris on the same day after
works.
26.8.6 Pest Control
(a) Pest-infested trees / shrubs / foliage shall be sprayed immediately with approved pesticides
when the infestation is spotted. The spraying shall continue until the infestation is controlled.
(b) In spraying, the top to the lowest tree leaves, including the trunk shall be thoroughly sprayed.
Re-spraying shall be done if it rains within 6 hours after spraying.
(c) Composition, quantity and exact location for use of pesticides are to be submitted to SP Rep
for approval before application.
26.8.7 Maintenance
(a) Planted trees, shrubs and ground covers, etc shall be maintained by adjusting tree tie,
making good damaged tree guards, adjusting tripod support including providing and/or
performing other reasonable work.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-15
26.8 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD & MAINTENANCE OF PLANTINGS (CONT’D)
26.8.7 Maintenance (cont’d)
(b) Replace any plants which fail to survive as a result of inadequate maintenance operations,
poor workmanship or poor quality of plant material during the Defects Liability Period.
(c) A copy of maintenance schedule is to be submitted to the SO Rep every month to ensure
running record of proposed operations can be checked at the maintenance inspections
each month. If, in the opinion of the SO Rep, the maintenance works have not been
satisfactorily carried out according to the site conditions and/ or the specifications, part of the
monthly payment will be withheld until the works have been satisfactorily executed.
(d) All landscape areas shall be kept clean and tidy at all times. Dispose all waste materials
arising from cleaning.
Operation Frequency
Soil Loosening Monthly
Weeding Weekly
Watering Daily )
Grass cutting Fortnightly ) and/or to be carried
Pest Control Monthly ) out as directed by
Fertilising Monthly ) the SO Rep.
Pruning Monthly )
Adjusting tree ties As and when required
Damaged/Missing Tree Guards, Supporters, To be replaced/repaired as directed
Trees, Shrubs, Ground covers, etc. by the SO Rep.
Visual Tree Inspection (VTA) by Certified As and when required

Arborist
26.9 IMPLEMENTATION
26.9.1 Preparation Stage
(a) Contractor shall engage the landscape subcontractor and irrigation specialist within six months
from the start of construction. The landscape subcontractor must be registered under the
Landscape Company Register managed by the National Parks Board (NParks):
https://www.cuge.com.sg/landscapeservices/Listing-of-NParks-Registered-Landscape-Companies
(b) Trees of good quality and sufficient choices must be made available at the nursery 1½ - 2
years before completion for selection by the Landscape Consultant to allow the selected trees
to be pre-grown to the correct girth and size by the hand over stage.
(c) The Contractor is to cater for the irrigation system during substructure stage. The location and
loading for the breaker tank(s) if any, pump(s) details, electricity supply and underground piping
is to be submitted for SO Rep’s approval before the project reaches superstructure stage.
(d) Specific composition of ASM for each zone shall be approved by the Landscape Consultant.
The endorsed ASM samples, one for each zone, shall be locked in the sample room.
(e) Contractor shall ensure true ground at planting area by providing substrate to 1m depth from
ground level with good quality earth, loosened and free of debris before handing over to
landscape subcontractor and after percolation and penetrometer test to be witnessed by SO
Rep.
(f) Check for true ground i.e. water to seep completely into the ground after 4 hours (percolation
and penetrometer test on substrate; 1 test per contiguous planting area).
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-16
26.9 IMPLEMENTATION (CONT’D)
26.9.1 Preparation Stage (cont’d)
(g) Clay content shall not exceed 35% for substrate below ASM up to 1m below the ground level,
to be verified using jar test to be witnessed by SO Rep.
(h) Ponding test for minimum 48 hours to be witnessed by SO Rep is to be carried out for planter
boxes before handover to landscape subcontractor.
(i) Drainage mat with drainage outlet are to be provided for planter boxes as directed by
Landscape Consultant.
(j) Concealed pipes for irrigation system at footpath crossings are to be without joints in stainless
steel of AISI Grade 304 and in stainless steel of AISI Grade 316 for the upturn elbow at the
planter area. The final material used is subject to approval by SO Rep.
(k) Pressure test is to be carried out for concealed pipes for irrigation system as per prevailing
Codes of Practice or Singapore Standards.
(l) Maintenance access of minimum 300mm wide concrete slabs is to be provided to allow
maintenance personnel to reach the services rooms and planter boxes without stepping on the
plants or turfed area.
26.9.2 Planting Stage
(a) Horticultural Supervisor provide immediate supervision during soil preparation, tree planting
and shrub planting.
(b) Clay content shall not exceed 25% for ASM, to be verified using jar test to be witnessed by SO
Rep.
(c) Planting area backfilled with ASM from approved source to depth of:
(i) 1m for trees;
(ii) 500mm for shrubs;
(iii) 200mm for ground cover / turf.
(d) Manual bypass is to be provided for auto irrigation system. Concealed pipes for the irrigation
system at footpath crossings are to be without joints in stainless steel of AISI Grade 304 and in
stainless steel of AISI Grade 316 for the upturn elbow at the planter area. A private meter,
approved by SO Rep, is to be provided for the irrigation system. Contractor shall provide Irrigation
Layout Drawings and sample of proposed materials for the SO Rep’s approval.
(e) Root-ball shall be planted below ground level with root flare just above ground level.
(f) All plants shall have good form, free of defects and upright before handover.
(g) All trees are to be planted more than 2m from lamp-post, building and underground services
and more than 3m from gas pipes.
(h) Plants next to parking lots must have clear distance of minimum 600mm from kerb. Poly bags
shall be removed before planting.
(i) Tree staking as per clause 26.7.5 shall be provided during the minimum establishment period
and subsequent 6-month Defects Liability Period (DLP).
(j) Pegs are to be provided to plants on steep slope.
(k) Climbers are to be properly fastened using cable tie or other methods to secure the plant from
bottom to top.
(l) There shall be no gaps or brown patches on ground cover.
(m) Turfed area is to be flat after rolling and top dressing using ASM with not more than 10cm
difference in level over every 300mm.
(n) Sump for sub-soil drainage shall be constructed to allow for ease of maintenance.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-17
26.9 IMPLEMENTATION (CONT’D)
26.9.3 Handover Stage
(a) All plants must have completed a minimum of 3-month establishment period or as directed by
SO Rep before hand over. The landscape plans for ‘As-built’ to be updated and submitted.
(b) All softscape is to be temporarily barricaded using stick and rope during the establishment
period or as directed by Landscape Consultant. The temporary barricade shall comprise 50mm
x 50mm x 1.65m long Balau timber posts spaced at 2.4m centre-to-centre with one end driven
450mm into the ground. Corner and end posts shall be strutted by 2 no. of 50mm x 50mm x
1.65m Balau timber post. Run 10mm diameter nylon ropes diagonally and horizontally across
the top and bottom of the barricade.
(c) Tests on ASM (1 sample per 500 m²; minimum 3 samples) and tests on organic mulch (1 per
batch for every 100 trees) is to be submitted to Landscape Consultant for acceptance.
(d) Testing & commissioning is to be carried out for irrigation system to be witnessed by SO Rep.
(e) There shall be no pests, diseases, deformed leaves, damage on branches and trunk area.
(f) The Contractor is deemed to have priced in for all necessary measures that are non-
detrimental to the environment and accepted by SO Rep to control the population of millipedes
and any other pests.
(g) The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to ensure prevent stagnant water within
landscape areas, no soil erosion or overgrowth onto footpath (including provision of silt
control), no tripping hazard within landscape areas, no sharp corners or edges of planter boxes
or other fixtures within landscape areas.
(h) The Contractor shall remove all construction debris from landscape areas during the
establishment period.
26.9.4 Mulching and Maintenance
(a) Mix compost into soil if possible and avoid excessive mulching. Mulch shall not exceed a depth
of 10cm and is to be avoided during the wet season as wet compost and mulches would
encourage breeding of millipedes.
(b) Organic mulch or compost is to be treated with heat at waste recyclers listed in NEA’s website.
(c) Swales and/or sub-soil drainage using perforated PVC pipes wrapped with geotextile
membrane and graded stones shall be provided by Contractor to resolve any ponding on
landscaped areas.
(d) Maintenance schedule and operating manual for equipment is to be submitted to SO rep before
hand over.
(e) Daily watering and monthly soil loosening, weeding, pest control, fertilizing, pruning,
adjustment of tree stakes are to be carried out during the 6-month Defects Liability Period
(DLP).
(f) Damaged plants are to be replaced promptly during the Defects Liability Period.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-18
26.10 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
26.10.1 Scope of Works
The works comprise the design, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the
landscape irrigation system during the Defects Liability Period. This scope of works applies to all the
independent irrigation systems comprising the irrigation pump systems, automatic programmable
irrigation controllers, solenoid valves, pipe work, irrigation emitters and accessories for each of the
intended irrigated areas listed below.
The works shall be undertaken by a specialist with minimum five (5) years’ experience in such works.
This includes competent knowledge of sprinkler and drip irrigation systems, skilled installation
personnel and track record in the Design, Supply, Installation and Maintenance of Automatic Irrigation
Systems for roof gardens in Singapore (including projects with multiple levels of skyrise greenery).
The Contractor shall submit the proposed irrigation system design and relevant technical information to
the SO Rep for review and confirmation prior to the completion of the sub-structure of the project.
26.10.2 System Description
(a) An automatic drip irrigation system shall be provided to irrigate the planting provided at the
following areas:
(i) Roof garden/s on Multi-Storey Car Park, residential blocks or above commercial block, if
applicable; and
(ii) Planters on Multi-Storey Car Park (i.e. vertical greenery – planters with climbing or trailing
plants)
The Contractor shall provide irrigation layout drawings and a sample of the proposed materials
for the SO Rep’s approval.
A manual bypass mode is to be provided for the auto irrigation system to serve as a backup in
the event where any solenoid valve breaks down. A ball valve shall be provided to bypass the
solenoid valve for each zone to allow for manual operation where necessary.
(b) The water source for the irrigation system shall be from a PUB water source. In line with PUB’s
requirement (Code of Practice 48), a water break tank is to be provided to ensure there is no
backflow of water to the potable water source. Space required for the break tank shall be
considered at the start of construction (during piling stage).
(c) The drip irrigation system shall be designed to provide efficient and adequate watering according
to the needs of the plants and soil capacity. The irrigation system is intended to support the long
term performance of the skyrise greenery provided.
26.10.3 Standards and Compliances
(a) The irrigation system shall comply with the relevant statutory requirements and Singapore
Standards. This includes:
(i) PUB’s Code of Practice
(ii) NEA’s Guidelines on Mosquito Prevention (for rainwater collection systems, where
applicable)
(iii) Latest Electrical Rules and Regulations
(iv) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials (ASTM D3350)
(v) The manufacture of Ductile Iron Fittings & Joint Restraints for pressure application (ASTM
A-536) applicable for pipe crossings below roads
(vi) All other relevant authorities’ requirements
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-19
26.10 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM (CONT’D)
26.10.4 Defects Liability Period
The Contractor is to run and maintain the irrigation system once the roof garden / landscape deck is
handed over, in tandem with the phased completion of landscape works. For avoidance of doubt, the
Defects Liability Period (DLP) for the irrigation system shall commence only upon substantial
completion of the last phase. The maintenance period shall be 24 months (12 months DLP + another
12 months). During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall be held responsible for carrying out
repairs, replacing defective equipment, materials, parts, etc. that may arise from wear and tear of the
irrigation system.
The Contractor is to provide the operating manuals for the equipment to Town Council and train their
staff on the operation and care of the automatic irrigation system upon completion.
The Contractor shall provide as-built drawings to HDB and Town Council upon completion. The
drawings should describe the system layout and components including all changes from the original
design.
26.10.5 Handover
At least three (3) months prior to the end of DLP, a demonstration of all sections and individual elements
pertaining to the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system shall be conducted. A schedule of
maintenance of the various components of the irrigation system shall be handed over to the operational
staff, including photos of the completed system.
26.10.6 Irrigation System Components
(a) Water Break Tank

As a rule of thumb, the water break tank should be sized to contain sufficient water for 1
uninterrupted cycle of daily irrigation needs. Watering cycle for one (1) day’s needs shall be done
between12am and 6am (for auto-mode). Automatic top up function with PUB water should be
provided. Where pumps are required, this should be located outside the tank for ease of
maintenance and inspection. The walls of the tank shall be made of ultra-violet resistant material
or housed in a sheltered space.
(b) Irrigation Pump System

The pumps shall be selected to suit the design requirements for the irrigated area. Two (2) pumps
shall be provided – one duty pump and another as backup. The Contractor is responsible for the
required calculations for optimal performance and efficiency of the irrigation system. The pump
shall have an Auto / Off / Manual mode selection. The irrigation pump panel shall be located at
the water tank location.
(c) Irrigation Controller

The irrigation controller shall be a computerised, programmable irrigation controller using rain
and moisture sensors placed at strategic locations to control irrigation accurately and efficiently
where applicable.
The controller shall be capable of automatic, semi-automatic (i.e. manual turn on with automatic
shut off) and manual modes of operation.
The irrigated area shall be divided into various watering zones. Each watering zone is to be
controlled by a station with a customizable and independent program for each watering zone.
Start timing, duration of irrigation and watering days can be programmed with input from the
moisture sensors.
The number of stations the controller contains shall be at least the number required for the
design. The controller shall be housed in a weather-resistant, waterproof, lockable cabinet. A
private water meter shall be installed to monitor water consumption.
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 26-20
26.10 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM (CONT’D)
26.10.6 Irrigation System Components (Cont’d)
(d) Pipes and Driplines

Driplines are to be used for all planting beds except turf areas. Concealed pipes at footpath
crossings are to be stainless steel of AISI Grade 304 of minimum 1mm nominal thickness placed
above the top mesh with press-fit elbow joints of stainless steel of AISI Grade 316 for the first
upturn at the planter area. Distribution pipes that are not embedded will remain as High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE).
On-surface driplines are to be provided. The dripline shall be pressure compensating to provide
a consistent flow over the length of the line, with a self-flushing capability, resistant to clogging,
root intrusion and UV damage.
The spacing of each dripline shall be 300mm apart. The spacing between drip emitters along the
dripline shall also be 300mm apart. The driplines shall be made of Low Density Polyethylene
(LDPE).
(e) Solenoid Valves

The solenoid valves shall allow the system to be flushed of dirt and debris during installation and
system start-up. The valve shall allow for automatic open / close operation with flow control
capability.
The valves shall be contained in a lockable, waterproof and weather-resistant valve box
preferably located away from footpaths and activity spaces.
(f) Flush Points

Flush Points shall be provided at appropriate locations to allow for the system to be flushed of
dirt and debris.
26.10.7 Maintenance Service
(a) The works covered shall include the supply of labour, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary to inspect, test and service the entire irrigation system. The Contractor shall make
provisions to maintain the system in a fully operational condition.
The Contractor shall advise the HDB, Town Council or SO Rep of defects in any part of the
equipment observed during the routine inspection / servicing and shall repair such defects if
required by the HDB, Town Council or SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services during normal working hours and
also during the overtime hours if required to do so by the HDB, Town Council or SO Rep.
(b) The Contractor’s Supervisor shall be qualified, competent and possess the relevant skills,
knowledge and the ability to supervise the maintenance and repair works to the Landscape
Irrigation System.
(c) The Contractor shall submit, during handover, the Operation & Maintenance Manual (including
a schedule of maintenance for the various components of the irrigation system) so that a regular
maintenance programme can be adhered to. The Contractor/ specialist shall also conduct a
maintenance demonstration to the Town Council’s appointed personnel/contractor at least three
(3) months prior to handing over.
Section 27/.....
BLDG17/S26.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-1
SECTION 27
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
27.1 GENERAL
Construct multi-storey carpark to details as shown in the Drawings. In addition to complying with the
requirements in the Specifications, the Contractor shall also be required to comply with the requirement
specified in this section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
27.2 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB/CONCRETE

TOPPING AT CARPARK ROOF DECK OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS
Water reducing admixture shall be used for the reinforced concrete slab/concrete topping at the roof
deck level. The application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions. Check and ensure that the admixture shall not affect the strength or other properties of the
reinforced concrete. The admixture shall comply with SS EN 934 or relevant British Standards and
shall be approved by the SO Rep.

DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
(a) Over-Riding Clause
The Contractor executing the Works as required in this clause including all sub-clauses under it
has to ensure that the Works, goods or materials used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for
the purpose of complying with the required fire-rating (hereinafter referred as "Performance
including all sub-clauses under it are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement,
the Contractor shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Employer subject always
to the approval of the SO Rep, but such approval shall not in any way affect the Contractor's
duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
(b) General
Provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors complete with
door frames and ironmongery to staircase of multi-storey carpark. The half-hour fire-rated timber
surface finished composite doors, door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete
system complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates,
PSB labels and shall be certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B.
Details of the half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors shown in the Drawings
shall serve as a guide.
(c) Shop Drawings And Sample
Prior to the installation, submit workshop drawings and PSB test certificates for the approval of
the SO Rep. Further, install a complete sample on the Site for the approval of the SO Rep before
full implementation.
(d) Ironmongery
Provide and fix all ironmongery required to complete the whole Works in accordance with the
following schedule subject to the approval of the FSSD. All ironmongery shall comply with SS
332 : 2007 and shall be at least half-hour fire-rated. The brand names specified in the schedule
BLDG17/S27.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-2

DOORS TO STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)
(d) Ironmongery (Cont'd)
Unless otherwise specified, the grade of stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304 .
Schedule Of Ironmongery
(a) 4 no. Stainless steel hinges.
(b) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved
slim line door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver
colour.
(c) 1 no Stainless steel pull handles. The diameter shall be 18mm minimum and the
length shall be approximately 225mm.
(d) 1 no. Stainless steel push plate of size 300mm x 150mm. The thickness shall be
1.2mm minimum. The word "PUSH" shall be engraved and painted on the
push plate
(e) 1 no. "Alsecure" ASI/BC002/SS Ball Catch; or “Tiki” ACCORD RC/002 SS Roller
Catch; or “YTL” BC002 SS Ball Catch or other approved stainless steel Ball
Catch or Roller Catch.
(e) Certificates
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep certificates as documentary proof that the complete
system of the fire-rated timber finish composite door including door frames and ironmongery
installed are of at least half-hour fire-rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
(f) Surfaces
(g) Moisture Content
The moisture content of timber for all timber components shall be in accordance with Clause
15.9 "Timber Doors".
27.4 HALF-HOUR FIRE-RATED TIMBER SURFACE FINISHED COMPOSITE DOORS TO LIFT MACHINE
ROOM FOR MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
Contract.
27.4.2 General
Where half-hour fire-rated timber doors to lift machine room are shown in the Drawings, the Contractor
shall provide and install half-hour fire-rated timber surface finished composite doors to the lift machine
room complete with timber door frames and ironmongery. The half-hour fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors, timber door frames and ironmongery shall be provided as a complete system
complying with SS 332 : 2007. The complete system shall have PSB test certificates, PSB labels, FSSD
approval and certified under PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A or 1B.

The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Prior to the installation, provide shop
drawings, PSB Product Listing Scheme certificates, PSB test reports, PSB and FSSD approval for the
approval of the SO Rep. Further, a complete sample shall be installed on the Site for the approval of
the SO Rep before full implementation.
BLDG17/S27.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-3

COMPOSITE DOORS TO LIFT MACHINE ROOM FOR
MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)
27.4.4 Ironmongery
shall be at least half-hour fire-rated and approved by FSSD. The brand names specified in the schedule
Provide and fix ironmongery in accordance with the following schedule:
(i) 4 no. 102mm x 76mm x 2mm stainless steel butt hinges for each door leaf.
(ii) 1 no. "Accord" 0706C/1404/1591B or “BLIY” N-27-FIR US 32D or other approved half cylinder
mortice lockset with stainless steel lever handles on rose or on back plate on both sides
(shall comply with CP 2:2000, the door shall be opened from the outside only by the use
of key and shall not require a key to open it from within the machine room).
(iii) 1 no. Brass rebated part.
(iv) 1 no. 200mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).
(v) 1 no. 300mm x 20mm wide stainless steel lever action flush bolt in satin finish (box type).
(vi) 1 no. Door closer shall be listed in PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1A. Approved slim line
door closer with cushioned back checking action shall be of silver colour.
(vii) 1 no. Approved stainless steel selector.
27.4.5 Grade Of Stainless Steel
27.4.6 Certificates
Submit certificates to the SO Rep to certify that the complete system of the fire-rated timber surface
finished composite doors including door frames and ironmongery installed are of at least half-hour fire-
rated in all aspects approved by the FSSD.
27.4.7 Surfaces
"Timber Doors".
27.5 HANDRAILS, PIPE SUPPORTS AND EXPANDED METAL

TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
Provide and fix hot dipped galvanized steel handrails and pipe supports as shown in the Drawings. The
hot dipped galvanised steel handrails and pipe supports shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 17 "Structural Steelwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
Provide and install "Bestal" BMM 3060 or "Emco" SM 3060; or other approved hot dipped galvanised
steel expanded metal to parapet. The expanded metal shall be of the following nominal size :
SWM = 42 mm
LWM = 115 mm
Thickness = 3 mm
Strand Width = 6 mm
BLDG17/S27.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-4
27.5 HANDRAILS, PIPE SUPPORTS AND EXPANDED METAL

TO PARAPET OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK (CONT'D)
All metal strips and screws used for fixing shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel. The details of the
expanded metal shall be as shown in the Drawings. The handrails, pipe supports and expanded metal
shall be fabricated and assembled in the factory unless otherwise specified. All exposed surfaces shall
be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding shall be used in the Works.
All welds shall be finished smooth and secured.
27.6 RAILING, PIPE SUPPORTS AND BALUSTERS TO

STAIRCASE OF MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
Provide and fix hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters as shown in the
Drawings. The hot dipped galvanised steel railings, pipe supports and balusters shall be in accordance
with the requirements specified in section 17 "Structural Steelwork" including all clauses and subclauses
under it.
All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no spot welding
shall be used for the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured.
27.7 GALVANISED STEEL L-ANGLE TO ALL CORNERS OF COLUMNS AND WALLS
Provide and fix galvanised steel L-angle and mild steel flat to all internal corners of columns and walls
(next to driveways and ramps including 500mm walls) to the dimensions and details as shown in the
Drawings. The L-Angle shall be flushed against the finished surfaces of walls or columns. Paint
galvanised steel angles with two coats of luminous paint approved by the Land Transport Authority.
The colour shall be approved by the SO Rep.
27.8 SIGNBOARDS
All signboards and letterings shall be as shown in the Drawings. These shall be installed at positions
as decided by the SO Rep or as stated in the Drawings.
27.9 TRAFFIC SIGNS
Traffic signs shall be of retro-reflective material and of brightness as approved by the Land Transport
Authority. Letterings, plates and details shall be as shown in the Drawings. Galvanised steel pipes
specified in the Drawings shall comply with SS17. Samples of the traffic signs shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
27.10 PAINTING
(a) External Painting And Warranty
Paint all external plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with water based algae resistant
emulsion paint in accordance with Clause 23.2 "External Painting" including all subclauses under
it.
The Contractor and his Specialist shall warrant the work on the same terms and conditions as
stipulated in the Deed of Warranty For External Painting as produced in Appendix A5 and/or
A5(TC) as decided by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S27.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-5
27.10 PAINTING (CONT'D)
(b) Internal Painting
Paint all internal plastered, skim coated and concrete surfaces with one priming coat and two
subsequent coats of approved acrylic emulsion paint. The priming coat may be with thinning of
up to 20% of clean water by volume. Subsequent coats shall not be diluted.
(c) Painting Of Sample
Prior to the commencement of the painting work, submit the colour chart of approved paint to the
SO Rep for selection of colour scheme. The Contractor shall then paint one or more panels of
the multi-storey carpark parapets for the approval of the SO Rep.
27.11 TRAFFIC LINES, ARROWS AND DIRECTIONAL ARROWS ON CAR PARKING DECKS AND
DRIVEWAYS
Paint all traffic lines, arrow and directional arrows as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO
Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the paint shall be water-based acrylic road marking paint and comply with
requirements shown below. Apply paint on surfaces to achieve a wet film thickness of up to 300 ±25
microns. Generally no dilution is allowed. The paint shall be available in white, yellow, red and black
colour. The colour of yellow, red and black paints, tested to SS 5 Part E3, shall visually match with
colour 356, 537, 642, 166 and 175 of BS 381C respectively. Colour 166 to be used on concrete slab
and interlocking concrete paving block and Colour 175 on bituminous surface.
(a) Resistant to Bleeding
When tested to SS5: Part G 8, the degree of bleeding should be “Slight bleeding” or “No
bleeding” as indicated in “Degrees of bleeding” chart. This test is only necessary if paint is applied
on bituminous surface.
(b) Accelerated Weathering
Test shall be conducted for yellow, red and blue colour. When tested to SS 5 Part G9 Method 1
for 500 hours, there shall be no blistering, cracking, appreciable chalking of the paint coating &
colour change no less than grade 4 of the grey scale to ISO 105-A02.
(c) Resistance to Water
Apply a coat of paint of 300 ± 30 µm wet film thickness to a glass panel and age for 72 hours at
ambient conditions. Immerse in distilled water at ambient temperature for 48 hours. Paint shall
show no wrinkling, blistering or loss of adhesion and not more than slight softening immediately
after removal from water. After 2 hours recovery, the film shall have regained its hardness and
show no appreciable whitening (no less than grade 4/5 on grey scale to ISO 105-A02).
(d) No Pick-Up Drying Time
When tested to SS 5 Part D4 the paint shall have a “no pick-up time” of less than or equal to 20
minutes when tested at 27±2°C and 65 ± 15% Relative Humidity.
(e) Resistance to Skidding
When tested to ASTM E303, the paint coating shall have a wet skid resistance of at least 40
units.
(f) Opacity (Contrast Ratio)
Opacity for white, blue, yellow and red colour, tested to SS 5 Part E2, shall be minimum 70%
(white and blue), 60% and 50% respectively.
(g) Abrasion Resistance
When the paint film is prepared to Wet Film Thickness of 750 microns and tested to SS 5 Part
F3, the loss in mass shall not exceed 100 g/sq. m.
BLDG17/S27.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 27-6
27.12 CAR PARKING BAYS AND MOTOR CYCLE LOTS
Paint white lines, red lines, numbers and letterings of the parking bays and motor cycle lots as shown
in the Drawings or as instructed by the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the paint shall be water-based acrylic road marking paint complying with
requirements
27.13 FORMWORK TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARK
In addition to complying with the requirements specified in Clause 4.19 "Formwork" including all
subclauses under it, the Contractor shall also comply with the following requirements for formwork to
Multi-Storey Carpark/Garage :
(a) Propping to the slabs and beams at the lower floor deck shall not be removed until the slabs and
beams of the upper floor deck have been cast for 3 days.
(b) The Contractor shall check and ensure that propping to the slabs and beams is adequate at all
times.
27.14 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AT PLANTER BOXES AT TYPICAL DECK OF MULTI-STOREY

CARPARK
27.14.1 Scope of Work
The Contractor shall provide and lay liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based)
Waterproof Membrane, as listed in HDB’s Materials List or other approved Flexible Water-Based
Waterproof Membrane to all the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes.
All the surfaces shall be examined for defects, and the waterproofing treatment shall be applied on
sound concrete.
27.14.2 Preparation Work
Concrete surfaces shall be clean from all scale, laitance, loose material, mould oil, curing agents, cracks
and honeycombs. The structure shall be ponded prior to the waterproofing treatment to allow
identification and rectification of cracks and honeycombs by grouting.
27.14.3 Application
The liquid applied Flexible Non-Cementitious (Water-Based) Waterproof Membrane shall be applied in
three coats to obtain a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5mm. The subsequent coats shall only be
applied after the first coat has dried.
27.14.4 Testing and Checking
After completion of the waterproofing work but prior to the laying of screed or other infill material, the
planter boxes shall be tested for water-tightness by ponding by plugging all outlets; and flooding it, with
clean water, to the full height of the planter box. There shall be no leakage after a flooding period of at
least 48 hours.
In areas where leaks are observed during test periods, such areas shall be recoated with the application
of additional membrane material. Recoated areas shall be re-tested and further re-coated until such
recoated areas pass the water test.
27.14.5 Protection
Immediately after the approval by the SO Rep of water test, the Contractor shall apply a skim coat to
all the sides (internal surfaces) of the planter boxes to prevent damages to the waterproofing membrane.
Section 28/.....
BLDG17/S27.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-1
SECTION 28
ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION/UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND
28.1 ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION
28.1.1 General
Electrical Substation shall be deemed to include Electrical Substation, Ring Main Substation,
Transformer Room, Generator Room, Tank Storage Room and all other utility rooms for electricity
transmission, whether located separately or within a building block.
Where metal roofing is used, it shall be as specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet"
28.1.2 Construction Time
Commence work immediately when site is handed over and shall complete the electrical substation
including fencing as shown, not later than the Expiry of the Time for Completion as specified in the
Contract. Where no such date is stipulated, the substation including fencing shall be completed not
later than six calendar months before the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest phase of the
contract or the Expiry of the Time for Completion of the earliest dwelling block if the Works is to be
completed as a single phase.
28.1.3 Cable Room of Electrical Substation
The lead in pipes into the substation cable room be shall laid underneath any LTA road side drain/PUB
drain. The pipes should be at least 300mm after the drain and to a depth of not more than 3 metres
below the road surface or ground in compliance with SP PowerGrid requirements.
Where shown in the Drawings, the cable room shall be cast in waterproof concrete with precaution
taken to render it watertight. In the case where the water table is high, provide drainage for the cable
room after consulting with the SO Rep.
28.1.4 High Tension (HT) Cable Ducts To Electrical Substation
Provide and lay 155mm UPVC pipes in numbers, positions and lengths as shown and encased all round
with mass concrete to serve as cable ducts.
All UPVC pipes shall be of at least Class B type complying with the requirement of SS 141 or other
approved by PowerGrid. Both ends of the UPVC pipes shall be sealed with removable water-tight
plugs.
Prior to the laying of ducts, check the ground conditions and should the ground be soft, inform the SO
Rep who shall decide whether piling is required or not.
28.1.5 Cable Trenches, Drains And Switch Gear Floor Openings
Cable trenches, drains and switch gear floor openings shall be provided with removable heavy duty A1
chequer plates or heavy duty GS gratings as shown in the Drawings capable of supporting a minimum
load of 100 kg.
Depth of trenches shall be as shown in the Drawings. After the completion of cable installation by
PowerGrid, all entries shall be sealed and water tight to the requirements of PowerGrid. Sand or granite
chips shall be provided to fill cable trenches.
28.1.6 Concrete Paved Areas
Surrounding concrete paved area within fence shall be 75mm thick 1:2:4 concrete reinforced with 1
layer No. A6 welded steel fabric on 100mm consolidated hardcore.
BLDG17/S28.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-2
28.1.7 Reinforced Concrete Drain And Crossing
Construct length of surface drain in reinforced concrete to details as shown. Precast concrete drain
covers shall be 75mm thick reinforced with 2 layers No. A6 welded steel fabric or approved
reinforcement with main reinforcement spanning across drain.
28.1.8 Hollow Glass Blocks
Build hollow glass block panels shown in the Drawings and in accordance with the Manufacturer's
printed instructions. The size of the glass block shall be 150mm x 150mm x 100mm and approved by
the SO Rep. Fix 'EXMET' 60mm No. 20 or other approved reinforcing strip at every second course.
Carry reinforcements into brickwork or leave dowel bars of 4mm galvanised wire in reinforced concrete
structure to lap with reinforcement.
Mortar shall be in accordance with Clause 12.1 "Mortar Mix For Block And Brickworks" and pointed with
white Portland Cement. Paint openings around panel with bitumen before laying glass blocks.
28.1.9 Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Electrical Substation
Provide and install bronze anodised extruded aluminium vent together with all necessary components
to all electrical substations as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall
be extruded with the minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic
coating
28.1.10 Finishing To Internal Floors, Landings And Steps
All internal floors except basement landing, steps and transformer plinth shall be provided with 50mm
thick cement rendering including a smooth 20mm thick granolithic finish of 1 part cement, 1 part fine
granite chippings and 1 part sand with the addition of approved hardener all mixed in accordance with
the Manufacturer's printed instructions.
All walls and columns shall be provided with minimum 18mm cement plastering.
28.1.11 Time For Rendering
Allow for carrying out rendering after PowerGrid has installed their floor frames, switch gears and
equipment which may be some time after the sub-station is handed over to PowerGrid after the Date of
Substantial Completion for the sub-station.
The PowerGrid Engineer-in-charge shall be notified prior to final rendering of the switch room floor.
28.1.12 Finish To Flat Roof
Lay screed to flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 60 of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved
waterproofing compound to the Manufacturer's printed instructions. Screed shall be minimum 18mm
thick.
28.1.13 Painting External And Internal Walls And Ceiling
Paint all vents, fascias, columns and beams, skimmed and plastered surfaces as specified in Section 23
"Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
28.1.14 Final Coat Painting And Touching Up
Allow for waiting until PowerGrid has installed sub-station equipment before applying final coat of
painting and touching up. This work may not be carried out within the Time for Completion of this part
of the Works.
BLDG17/S28.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-3
28.1.15 Electrical Installation
(a) General
Provide and install electrical installation and fittings shown including earthing systems for the
electrical installation. Installation shall be carried out by a licensed electrician to the
satisfaction of the SO Rep and complying with the requirements of PowerGrid. All wiring
shall run in galvanised steel exposed conduits (not smaller than 20mm diameter) with spacer
bar saddles and bases to BS EN ISO 1461.
(b) Application For Testing
The installation shall be tested/verified by and to the requirements of HDB's Plan Approval
(M&E/Testing ) Unit and approved by the SO Rep before handing over to PowerGrid. For all
tests, at least seven (7) working days advance notice shall be given to the SO Rep.
(c) Retesting
Any omissions or Defect or faults detected during the day of testing shall be rectified and the
Contractor shall arrange for re-testing within three working days from the date of the last test.
28.1.16 Ironmongery
All ironmongery shall be as shown in the Drawings.
28.1.17 Fence And Gate
Where shown in the Drawings, fencing shall be carried out in accordance with Section 12 "Brickwork
And Blockwork" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The gates shall be hung on clay brick piers and run on rollers over rails all as shown in the Drawings.
Chainlink perimeter fencing shall be of the PVC. covered type (green or grey) wire mesh. The base
support of the fencing shall be embedded in 150mm concrete kerb.
Ironmongery to gate shall be as shown in the Drawings.
28.1.18 Painting Fence And Gate
Paint all metal work and gate as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses
and subclauses under it.
28.1.19 Catch For Trap Door In Switch Room Floor
Provide and fix brass hook and eye for trap door.
28.1.20 Cat Ladder And Handle
Provide and fix mild steel cat ladder and handrail as shown.
28.1.21 Hot Dipped Galvanised Steel Handrail (Electrical Sub-station)
Provide and fix hot dipped galvanised steel pipe handrail to locations as shown in the Drawings.
Dimensions of hot dipped galvanised steel handrail, pipe supports and balusters shall be as shown in
the Drawings. All exposed surfaces shall be straight and smooth. All joints shall be fully welded and no
spot welding shall be used for the Works. All welds shall be finished smooth and secured.
BLDG17/S28.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-4
28.1.22 Doors To Electrical Substation
(a) Extruded Anodised Aluminium Doors
Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors with anodic coating not less than 25
micron (including all components, shoot bolt etc) as shown and in accordance with the detailed
Drawings.
(b) Acoustic Doors To Generator Rooms
Provide and fix extruded natural anodised aluminium doors infilled with 38mm thick rockwool
insulation material of density 150 kg per m³ (±10% tolerance). The noise reduction coefficient
shall be NRC 0.76 within the sound range of 180-2800 Hz. Moisture resistance shall not be more
than 0.2% by volume. The rockwool shall be non-combustible with fire hazard indices at Class O.
Where rockwool is shown in the Drawings, the rockwool shall be of "Bradford Rockwool, Fibertex-
R60"; or other approved. Doors (including all components, shoot bolt etc) shall be of natural
anodised aluminium of anodic coating not less than 25 micron and constructed to resist any
water penetration into the cavity of the door. Provide and fix heavy duty door hinges capable of
bearing 80 kg of load per leaf.
The Drawings shown shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings showing all the detailed
sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the SO Rep for approval prior to
installation.
28.2 UTILITIES CENTRE/DUSTBIN COMPOUND
28.2.1 General
Construct Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound to details as shown in the Drawings unless specified
otherwise. Timber benches, shelves, notice board, lockers, etc., shall be provided and fixed to locations
all as shown in the Drawings.
28.2.2 Floor Slab
The floor slab shall be cast in Grade 40 structural concrete. Compliance criteria and specifications shall
follow Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The slab shall be finished with a minimum 3 passes of a power trowel strictly without sprinkling of
cement dust, cement grout or water. Provide a sufficient team of workmen to finish the work before
final set. The slab shall be immediately cured for seven days with approved curing compound or other
approved methods. The surface shall be hardened with approved liquid hardeners strictly in
accordance with the Manufacturer's instruction. The liquid hardeners shall have zinc and/or magnesium
fluorosilicates as its active ingredients.
The scupper drain shall be finished with rendering of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The
rendering shall be laid to fall towards water outlets. The rendered surface shall then be finished with
two coats of liquid hardeners (with zinc and/or magnesium fluorosilicates as its active ingredients).
28.2.3 Finish To Reinforced Concrete Flat Roof
Provide and lay screed of 1:3 cement:sand mix gauged with approved water-proofing compound to the
Manufacturer's instructions to reinforced concrete flat roof with minimum fall of 1 in 180. Screed shall
be of a minimum of 18mm thick.
BLDG17/S28.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-5
28.2.4 Roller Shutter To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
(a) Motorised Roller Shutter For Door Height Four (4) Metres And Above
Provide and install motorised roller shutter complete with channel guide, shutter motor, angle
bolts, bottom rail and other necessary components in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door opening height 4 metres and above
unless otherwise specified :
(i) Material
The motorised roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm
thick natural anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally
or 0.5mm thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a
continuous curtain.
Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain top and
wrap it around the drum assembly. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain
to house the entire drum assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel
chain or other approved for manual operation.
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the
top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge-treatment
to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
(ii) Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel

and galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond
silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected
by the SO Rep.
(iii) Power Supply And Operation System
Tap the power supply for the motor from a 10 Amperes TPN isolator in the utilities
centre/dustbin compound. Connect with electrical wiring from the isolator to the motor.
Provide a built-in auto-stop safety device to the system so that the roller shutter shall
automatically stop when it is obstructed during the closing operation.
Provide push-button switches enclosed in a weatherproof control box and mount it outside
at 1.6m measured from the floor to the base of the control box and on the right hand side
of the utilities centre/dustbin compound viewing from the front. Provide the control box
with Camlock model "L & F" A/CR 11 or 16 with key no. 01/3S/N65; or other approved.
The control box shall contain "Up", "Down", and "Stop" buttons. Indicating arrows pointing
upwards and downwards shall be marked indelibly beside the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
The motorised roller shutter shall stop immediately after the end of "Up" or "Down"
operation.
(iv) Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings
showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the
SO Rep for approval prior to the ordering of the system.
(b) Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres
Provide and install zincalume steel or galvanised steel or natural anodised aluminium roller
shutter complete with channel guides, angle bolts, bottom rails and other necessary components
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to utilities centre/dustbin compound of door
opening height below four (4) metres unless otherwise specified.
(i) Material
The roller shutter shall be of 0.8mm thick minimum galvanised steel or 1.6mm thick natural
anodised aluminium interlocking slats with end clips to secure slats laterally or 0.5mm
thick minimum Zincalume steel curtain permanently lock-seamed to form a continuous
curtain. Provide a seamless PVC weatherseal at the base of the rail. Secure the curtain
top and wrap it around the drum assembly. The drum assembly shall consist of suitably
graded oil-tempered torsion springs secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering
plastics. Provide box housing of similar material with the curtain to house the entire drum
assembly and integral chainwheel complete with galvanised steel chain or other approved
for manual operation.
BLDG17/S28.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 28-6
28.2.4 Roller Shutter To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound

(Cont'd)
(b) Manually Operated Roller Shutter For Door Height Below Four (4) Metres
(Cont’d)
(i) Material (Cont’d)
Provide perforation slots of 100mm x 25mm spaced at 400mm apart to approximately the
top one-third of the curtain height to the approval of the SO Rep. Provide edge treatment
to prevent metal to metal contact between the curtain and the guides during operation.
Locking device with master key shall be provided at waist level.
(ii) Coating
Aluminium shutter shall be natural anodised to 25 microns (minimum). Zincalume steel

and galvanised steel shutter shall be finished with 25 microns (minimum) colorbond
silicone modified polyester coating. The finishing colour of the coating shall be selected
by the SO Rep.
(iii) Operation System
The shutter shall be hand chain operated. The raising and closing of the shutter shall be
250mm minimum per metre chain-pull.
(iv) Workshop Drawings
The details shown in the Drawings shall serve as a guide. Submit workshop drawings
showing all the detailed sections, plans and relevant details and accessories to the
SO Rep for approval prior to the ordering of the system.
28.2.5 Bronze Anodised Extruded Aluminium Vents To Utilities Centre/Dustbin Compound
Provide and install bronzed anodised extruded aluminium vents together with all necessary components
as indicated in the Drawings. The aluminium frames and louvre blades shall be extruded with the
minimum thickness of 2.3mm and finished with 25 microns (minimum) anodic coating.
28.2.6 Ceramic Floor Tiles
Provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm thick glazed ceramic floor tile to wash area and toilet all as
shown in the Drawings. The qualities shall be as specified in Clause 19.4 “Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common
Areas and Non-Residential Units)”
28.2.7 Key Boards
Provide and install one 1200mm x 1200mm keyboard consisting of Kapor frame, plywood backing,
plywood door panel all as shown in the Drawings for every block of Utilities Centre. Provide angle
hooks for keys fixed 75mm centres both ways and 2 no. brass hangers to each board. Paint woodwork
according to Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it).
Section 29/.....
BLDG17/S28.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 29-1
SECTION 29
EATING HOUSE
29.1 FLOOR FINISHES
Except for the "Store" and "room" the whole floor of Eating houses shall be finished in ceramic tiles as
specified in sub-clause 19.4.5 "Schedule Of Ceramic Floor Tiles".
Tiles shall continue up doorways to abut external floor rendering. The colour and pattern of the tiles
shall be approved by the SO Rep. The quality and laying of the tiles shall be as specified in Clause 19.4
"Ceramic Floor Tiles (Common Areas and Non-Residential Units) " and Clause 19.7 “Laying Of Ceramic
Floor Tiles” including all subclauses under them.
29.2 CERAMIC TILE WALL (EATING HOUSES)
Except for the "store" and "room", all internal surfaces of walls and columns in the refreshment area
and stalls of eating houses shall be finished with 200mm x 200mm x 8mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to
a height of 2100mm above reinforced concrete floor level.
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm glazed ceramic wall tiles to a
height of 600mm above the stainless steel sink and draining board or to the window cill height if the sink
and draining board is located along the window. Provide and lay 200mm x 200mm x 8mm glazed
ceramic wall tiles to kitchen, toilets/bath/wc, bin area and wash area. The height of glazed ceramic wall
tiles shall be as shown in the Drawings.
All glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be of the quality as specified in Clause 20.13 "Ceramic Wall Tiles
(Non-Residential Units and Common Areas)" including all subclauses under it.
29.3 BRICK/BLOCKWORK AND PLASTERING
Construct walls as shown in the Drawings and as specified in Section 12 "Brickwork And Blockwork"
including all clauses and subclauses under it. Plastering where shown shall be as specified in
Section 20 "Wall Finishes" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
29.4 PAINTING
Painting shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and
29.5 DOORS AND IRONMONGERY
Doors to eating houses shall be as shown in the Drawings, complete with ironmongery as specified in
Section 16 "Ironmongery" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
29.5.1 Timber Doors
All timber doors where shown in the Drawings shall be constructed as specified in Section 15 "Carpentry
And Joinery" including all clauses and subclauses under it. Sizes are nominal.
Plywood panels shall be of grade 2 moisture resistant quality.
29.5.2 PVC Doors
Extruded PVC doors to common water closets and bathroom shall be as specified in Clause 15.15 "Full
Panel Extruded PVC Swing Doors".
Except for bath/w.c. in room and main entrance door to toilets, each common w.c. door shall be fixed
with a pair of aluminium alloy eyes for hanging on to mild steel hooks and rides built into masonry.
Provide and fix plastic male and female toilet signs with thickness and sizes all as shown in the
Drawings.
BLDG17/S29.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 29-2
29.6 PREPARATION TABLES
Construct preparation tables in Grade 25 and 100mm thick in-situ concrete slabs reinforced with one
layer of No. A6 welded steel fabric supported on 90mm thick solid concrete block wall finished with
200mm x 200mm x 8mm (nominal size) thick ceramic tiles with mosaic cove tiles for returned edges all
29.7 COOKING SLABS
Where shown, cooking slabs shall be constructed and finished as specified in Clause 29.6 "Preparation
Tables".
29.8 FAN HOOKS
Cast fan hooks into positions as shown, bent out of 13mm diameter mild steel rod to ceiling of eating
houses.
29.9 EXHAUST FAN OPENING
Provide opening for exhaust fans in positions shown and trim with Kapor frame rebate and bead. Fill
with 12mm thick calcium silicate boards.
Paint frame and panel as specified in Section 23 "Painting And Decorating" including all clauses and
29.10 EXTRACTOR FANS AND DUCTS
Extractor fans and ducts are not included in this Contract unless as specified otherwise.
29.11 ALUMINIUM ROLLER SHUTTER
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install aluminium roller shutters to eating houses as
specified in Clause 18.8 "Aluminium Roller Shutter".
29.12 ALUMINIUM CASING TO DISCHARGE STACKS/PIPES

AND ALUMINIUM SHEET COVERING
Where shown in the Drawings, the aluminium casing to discharge stacks/pipes enclosure and
aluminium sheet covering shall be constructed with 50mm x 25mm x 1.2mm thick aluminium frame and
lined with 1.2mm thick (18 SWG) natural anodised aluminium sheet. The anodic coating shall be 15
microns minimum. Access panels shall be provided as shown in the Drawings and at the positions of
the cleaning eyes.
29.13 ADJUSTABLE AND FIXED GLASS LOUVRES
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and install bronze anodised aluminium frame adjustable and
fixed glass louvres. The anodic coating shall be 25 microns minimum. Glazing shall be in accordance
with Section 22 "Glazing" including all clauses under it.
29.14 PLYWOOD SHELVES
Where shown, the 19mm thick plywood shelves to store shall be supported by 31mm x 31mm x 1.2mm
thick mild steel hollow sections.
BLDG17/S29.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 29-3
29.15 METAL ROOFING AND INSULATION
Where shown in the Drawings, the metal roofing and the insulation shall be provided and laid as
specified in Clause 13.3 "Metal Roofing And Insulation Sheet" including all subclauses under it.
29.16 SUSPENDED CEILING
Provide and fix 1200mm x 600mm x 16mm thick non-combustible mineral fibre board to stalls with
aluminium T section and be supported by 14 SWG galvanised steel hanger wire all as shown in the
Drawings. Each panel shall be reinforced with 2 no. of spline glued to the back of the board.
Section 30/.....
BLDG17/S29.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 30-1
SECTION 30
MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING)
30.1 GROUND FLOOR FACILITIES
Provide and fix the facilities (eg. table tennis table, kiosks, tables, benches etc.) at 1st storey all as
shown in the Drawings. Painting to timber and metal work shall be as specified in Section 23 "Painting
And Decorating" including all clauses and subclauses under it.
30.2 DUAL BICYCLE RACK SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Where shown in the Drawings, the contractor shall fabricate and install the dual bicycle rack system as
specified. The Dual Bicycle Rack System is a double deck stand that can accommodate various sizes
of bicycles available in the market. The Dual Bicycle Racks shall be placed at 600 mm to 700 mm apart
depending on the site conditions. The system should be made of mild steel with minimum yield strength
of 235 N/mm2 (BS 5950) and galvanized.
All galvanized members shall be zinc coated by the hot-dip galvanizing process in accordance with the
SS 117.
(a) The upper sliding member must be easy to manoeuvre and should not pose any safety issues.
(b) Treatment must be made to the bottom side at the back end of the upper sliding member to
ensure that there will not be damages to the pavement when the system is being used.
(c) Where applicable, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts, washer,
all other necessary components and welds shall be in accordance with relevant Standards. All
defective, sub-standard or undersized members and connections shall be rejected.
(d) All welding shall be carried out in accordance with SS EN 1993-1-7:2011.
(e) The Contractor shall ensure that the finished Dual Bicycle Rack is aesthetically pleasant, free of
rust and will not trap water by maintaining the supporting frame at an incline.
30.2.1 Material For Structural Frame
Grade 43A Steel (Mild Steel) to BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113 and BS EN 10210 (Part 1) shall be used
for all structural members unless otherwise stated. The dimensions, form, thickness, weight and
tolerance of all rolled shape, the quality and strength of all members, joint connections, bolts, nuts,
washers, studs, welds and electrodes used and their design, installation and applications shall conform
to the requirements of the latest or other relevant Singapore Standards. Unless indicated otherwise in
the Drawings, hot finished structural steel sections shall be used.
All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and shall be approved by the S.O Rep.
30.2.2 Welding (For Structural Steelwork)
Welding shall be done by an electric arc process complying with BS EN 1011-1 and by qualified welders
to the satisfaction of the S.O Rep. Welding shall be done in the shop unless otherwise shown or
specified.
30.2.3 Protection of Structural Steelwork Members
Galvanised structural steel members and components as shown in the Drawings shall be hot-dip
galvanised to SS 117. The metal surface has to be grounded and blasted to smooth finish before hot
dipped galvanising to produce visually high quality finish. The Contractor shall obtain galvanizing
treatment service for structural steel members and components only from those Approved Galvanisers
Listed in HDB’s Materials List.
BLDG17/S30.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 30-2
30.2 DUAL BICYCLE RACK SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
30.2.4 Structural Design
In addition to comply with the required building code and standard, the design for all structural works
shall meet the following minimum requirements:
(a) Hold down bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanised, electroplated
or of stainless steel grade 316 satisfying acceptable standard and code of practice.
(b) Should steel hollow section be used, there shall be no drilling through it. Necessary steel
connecting plates or cleat angles shall be used and welded up to steel hollow sections for
securing the cladding, roofing sheet and other metal panels.
30.2.5 Stainless Steel Railings
The Contractor shall provide stainless steel railings Grade 304 on both sides of the Dual Bicycle Rack
to serve as safety barrier. This applies to locations where the Dual Bicycle Rack are not confined within
Reinforced Concrete Walls/Columns.
30.2.6 Instructional Signages
The Contractor is required to show the S.O Rep a sample of the acrylic panel and anti-theft stainless
screws before mass production. This sample will be vetted and fine-tuned by the S.O Rep before mass
production of acrylic panels with reverse inkjet printout.
The bottom edge of the instructional signage shall be placed at least 1.6m above the finished level. The
colour of the Instructional Signage Green is PMS 375 or equivalent.
30.2.7 Design Requirements Of Acrylic Instructional Signages
Attractive and creative display of the poster contents as provided in the Instructional Signage for Dual
Bicycle Rack System.
The minimum size of each panel is 600 mm length and 400 mm height and at least 5 mm thick.
The material is to be made of acrylic (or equivalent) and the paper is to be printed using reverse inkjet
printout (or equivalent). The finishes for sticker material shall be of matt finish and the printout must of
good quality such that it will not show visible fading according to the assessment of S.O Rep within a
period of 1 year.
The Instructional Signages must be installed using anti-theft stainless steel screws which are not easily
removed by the general public. The vendor is to propose ways to install the signage using anti-theft
stainless screws.
30.2.8 Testing
Functional checks to be carried out to ensure the anti-theft bicycle locking bar can be pushed through
the elongated slot easily and is able to secure the front wheel to the main body and rear wheel of the
bicycle.
Section 31/.....
BLDG17/S30.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-1
SECTION 31
FABRICATION AND PROVISION OF REFUSE BINS, LITTER BINS,
BULK CONTAINERS AND TROLLEYS
31.1 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of work in this Contract comprises:
(a) Fabrication and delivery of 250-litre refuse bins;
(b) Fabrication and delivery of post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bins (including installation);
(c) Fabrication and delivery of six-bin trolleys, 0.7 cubic metre rectangular bulk refuse containers
model "E" and bulk containers frame model "EF"; and
The required no. of bins and frames shall be as specified in the table below:
Quantity Required
Facility Items
Per Facility
0.7 cubic metre Bulk Container 1
Utility Centre Frame for Bulk Container 1
Refuse Room 250-litre Refuse Bin 2
Bulky Refuse Room where there are 250-litre Refuse Bin 2
ground floor units
Every 3 blocks Six-Bin Trolley 1
Every deck for MSCP Wall Mounted Litter Bin 2
Every 80 parking lots for Surface Car Park Post Mounted Litter Bin 1
31.2 GOODS
(a) In the specifications, the expression "the Goods" shall unless the context otherwise requires,
means the six-bin trolley and the 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E", bulk container
frame model "EF", the 250-litre refuse bins and the post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bins.
(b) Every six-bin trolley, 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E" and bulk container frame
model "EF" accepted by the Superintending Officer's Representative shall be assigned a serial
number. The Contractor will be notified on the beginning serial number of the respective type of
goods within a reasonable period and the subsequent serial number shall then be assigned by
the Contractor on the same format and set at one unit increment. Each serial number shall be
engraved at the spot directed by the Superintending Officer's Representative and of a size
approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(c) All components for incorporation into the Works shall be in metric units. However, if any
components are not available in metric units its equivalent in imperial units may be used subject
to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative and such a substitution will not
constitute a variation to the Contract.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-2
31.3 POST / WALL MOUNTED POLYETHYLENE LITTER BIN
31.3.1 Dimensional Details
Each post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bin shall be provided complete with separate hood, ash-tray,
aluminium inner liner, bin body and mounting brackets.
(a) Bin body and hood
The bin body and hood shall be designed and manufactured to withstand strong sunlight and
extremes in temperature without fading or cracking.
(i) Material
Linear medium density or high density polyethylene. No rework material shall be used.
The density of the material shall be within the range of 0.935 to 0.965 g/cm3. The
melt index of the material shall be within the range of 1.0 to 8.0 g/10 min. The bin shall be
opaque and have the feature of being impact - resistant and ultra-violet stabilised such that
it can withstand continuous use under long hours of strong direct sunlight without any
adverse change to its physical and mechanical properties and performance.
(ii) Capacity
25 - 40 litres (without hood)
(iii) Height
450 - 550 mm (without hood)
(iv) Width
360 - 450 mm (bin body)
(v) Depth
240 - 350 mm (bin body)
(vi) Thickness
2.8 mm (minimum) and meeting all other Specifications
(vii) Ash-Tray
120 mm diameter x 60 mm height x 0.8 mm thick reflective finished stainless steel of AISI
Grade 304 with 3 Nos of 5 mm diameter equally spaced holes at base and 175 mm x 95mm
stubbing plate (Optional). The ash-tray shall be securely fixed to the top of the hood
and shall not affect the aesthetics of the bin adversely.
The hood should be firmly fitted to the bin body but also allows for easy emptying of the contents
from the bin as and when necessary. The hood should only have one side opening with a
minimum breadth of 110mm and minimum length of 200mm, and shall be fastened to the bin
body by a 400mm long stainless steel chain or other method of fastening which is to be approved
by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(b) Aluminium liner
(i) The liner shall not be less than 0.8mm thick
(ii) The liner should fit the inner part of the bin with room for easy fitting
(iii) The liner shall have a fitted handle for lifting
(iv) The liner shall be detachable
(v) All corners of liners shall be rounded
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-3
31.3 POST / WALL MOUNTED POLYETHYLENE LITTER BIN (CONT’D)
31.3.1 Dimensional Details (Cont’d)
(c) Bracket
(i) Material : 26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised bracket bent to shape and size as
shown in Appendix A49 Drawing No. CMU-LB-01, and secured with
galvanised bolts and nuts.
(ii) Strength : The bracket should be able to support the bin body with a full load of up to
15 kg.
(iii) Paint : The bracket shall come with a coat of approved red lead primer to surfaces
of bracket, nuts and bolts etc and two coats of good quality aluminium paint.
31.3.2 Design
(a) The internal form and surface of the bin shall be such that it will not trap the contents.
(b) There shall be no sharp edges anywhere on the bin.
(c) The internal and external surfaces shall be smooth and non porous, free from cracks, splits,
dents, distortion, blisters, voids, air bubbles and other surface blemishes or defects.
(d) It shall be substantially uniform in colour. The Contractor shall make available 2 choices of
colour, the hues of which shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(e) The litter bin shall be sufficiently stiff such that its shape and form is maintained when subject to
continuous use over a long period of time.
(f) Six (6) numbers of 10 mm diameter holes are to be provided at the base of the post mounted
litter bin to drain off rainwater.
31.3.3 Installation
The Contractor shall install the post/wall mounted polyethylene litter bin in the manner specified in the
Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49) at locations designated/ instructed by the SO Rep.
The polyethylene litter bin shall be installed in the following manner: -
(a) Wall Mounting
26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised brackets bent to shape and size as shown in the
Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49), are clamped to the bin with bolts and nuts. Wall plug or
ramset bolt shall be used for mounting the bin to wall.
(b) Post Mounting
26 mm (wide) x 5 mm (thick) galvanised brackets bent to shape and size as shown in the
Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49), are clamped to the bin with bolts and nuts. Hose clips
shall be used for mounting the bin to post.
(c) The Contractor shall ensure that the mounting of the brackets for post mounted bin shall not
obstruct the lamp posts terminal box cover to facilitate maintenance when required.
(d) The Contractor shall ensure the mounting would keep the bin upright and minimise any strain on
the bin body.
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for the cost to remove and cart away the existing
brackets and bins during the replacement with new bins. For new installation of bins, there shall be no
cost adjustment to the contract price.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-4
31.4 LOGO
The Litterman logo shall be hot foiled stamped on the outer face of the litter bin body.
31.5 250-LITRE LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REFUSE BIN
31.5.1 Materials
The refuse bins shall be manufactured from formulated and compounded linear low-density
polyethylene for use with normal household refuse except hot ashes. No rework material shall be used.
The density of the material shall be within the range of 0.926 to 0.940 g/cm3.
The melt index of the material shall be within the range of not less than 1.0 to 8.0 g/10 min.
The carbon black content shall not be less than 0.5% and shall provide optimum protection against
ultra-violet light degradation. The finely divided carbon black shall have mean particle sizes of less than
25nm and shall be well dispersed. The carbon black shall be melt-compounded. No dry blending of
carbon black is permitted.
31.5.2 Dimensional Details Of 250-Litre Refuse Bin
Dimensional Specification Unit Bin Sizes
Overall Height (mm) (mm) 740
Overall Width (mm) (mm) 700
Overall Length (mm) (mm) 700
Tolerance (mm) (mm)  10
Minimum Capacity (litres) (Litres) 250
Minimum Weight (Excluding (kg) 9.0

Handles) (kg)
Minimum Wall Thickness (mm) (mm) 4.0
Minimum Base Thickness (mm) (mm) 6.0
31.5.3 Design
(a) Body
The refuse bin shall be designed such that its internal form and surface will not trap refuse when
it is being emptied as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49). The internal and
external surfaces of the refuse bin shall be smooth and reasonably free from surface blemishes
and contamination, air bubbles, blisters and voids, and shall be substantially uniform in colour.
The refuse bin shall have no sharp edges and shall be moderately stiff such that its shape and
form is maintained when subject to continuous use over a long period of time.
(b) Base
The base of the refuse bin shall be designed to withstand regular dragging during refuse
collection time. It shall also be designed to withstand impact from falling refuse. When tested in
accordance with the method described in Clause 31.5.4, there shall be no visible weakening and
no permanent distortion or splitting to the base or main body of the refuse bin.
Eight holes of 10mm diameter shall be provided at the base to allow sullage water to drain out.
The holes shall be located such that they will not affect the physical properties or performance
of the bin in any way.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-5
31.5 250-LITRE LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REFUSE BIN (CONT’D)
31.5.3 Design (Cont’d)
(c) Handles for Refuse Bins
Each refuse bin shall be fitted diametrically opposite with two solid cylindrical drop handles,
situated above the centre of gravity of the empty bin.
Each handle shall be shaped so as to give a hand hold. The handle shall be 95 mm long and
have a diameter of at least 9 mm. It shall be made of metal and protected against corrosion.
Each handle shall be fitted to the wall of the refuse bin with four bolts such that the wall of the
bin is sandwiched between the front and back plates. The back plate shall be of 3 mm minimum
thickness in one piece and shall measure not less than 60 mm x 120 mm. The front plate shall
be of 2 mm minimum thickness in one piece and shall measure not less than 60 mm x 120 mm
incorporating an approved design for housing the drop handles of the refuse bin. The front, back
plates and bolts and nuts shall be galvanised and protected against corrosion.
When tested in accordance with the method described in Clause 31.5.4, there shall be no visible
weakening of the attachments and no permanent distortion or splitting to the main body of the
refuse bin.
The refuse bin shall also be designed with two recessed finger grip positioned vertically below
the drop handles. The recessed finger grip is approximately 130 mm from the base of the bin.
It shall be shaped so that there are no sharp corners or edges.
31.5.4 Tests
The following two tests shall be carried out on samples randomly selected from a batch delivered to the
Site. The Contractor shall have the test rig(s) and test loads available for the tests. He shall perform
the tests in the presence of the as and when directed by the SO Rep.
If a sample fails any of the tests, all the refuse bins in that batch delivered to the Site shall be rejected.
The rejected bins shall be removed from the Site immediately. The Contractor shall ensure that no
rejected bin is delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall also ensure that the batch number of the
rejected bins is not used again. Te required tests shall be as specified below:
(a) Test for Strength of Handles
The refuse bin shall be filled with the appropriate test load of 65 kg. Put the loop (refer to the
Drawings as shown in Appendix A49) through the handle that is to be tested and on to the cross
bar of the test rig. The filled bin is raised using an inelastic rope and a quick-release hook
attached to the handle that is being tested such that there is 300 mm slack on the loop as shown
in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix A49).
After the filled bin has come to rest, the quick-release hook is disengaged allowing the filled bin
to fall freely. At all times, the filled bin must not come into contact with the ground.
The procedure is repeated for the other handle.
Test Load
A test load of 65 kg shall be used for the handle test.
Pass Criteria
There shall be no visible weakening of the attachments and no permanent distortion or splitting
to the main body of the refuse bin.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-6
31.5 250-LITRE LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REFUSE BIN (CONT’D)
31.5.4 Tests (Cont’d)
(b) Test for Impact Strength of the Base
The base of the bin shall be placed on a flat concrete surface. A test load of 65 kg shall be raised
to a height of 2 m above the centre of the bin and allowed to fall freely on the base of the bin.
Repeat the test two more times. The test load shall consist of free flowing solid material contained
in a test bag of diameter 25cm with a hemispherical bottom as shown in the Drawings (as shown
in Appendix A49).
Pass Criteria
There shall be no visible weakening and no permanent distortion or splitting to the base or main
body of the refuse bin.
31.6 EMBOSSING ON BINS
The date of production (month and year) and batch number (in running order) shall be embossed on
one face of the refuse bin as shown in Appendix A49 Drawing No. CMU-RB-01. Each letter or number
shall be 25 mm by 20 mm.
31.7 SIX-BIN TROLLEY
31.7.1 Design and Detailing
The Drawings show the design and detailing of the six-bin trolley and the Contractor shall conform to
the dimension, capacity and design of the six-bin trolley as shown in the Drawings (as shown in
Appendix A49).
31.7.2 Welding
All weldings must be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. No spot
welding shall be used for completion of the Works. The welding edges shall be smoothly and securely
finished. If in the opinion of the SO Rep that certain portion of the weld should be reinforced, the
Contractor shall execute and complete the work as instructed by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's
costs and expenses.
31.7.3 Wheel
(a) The six-bin trolley shall be supported by two (2) numbers of 280mm diameter solid-tyre wheels
at the sides and one (1) number of 180mm diameter swivel castor wheel at the front as indicated
in the Drawing (as shown in Appendix A49). Each wheel shall have a minimum load carrying
capacity of 200kg.
(b) The types and models of wheel to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending
Officer's Representative.
(c) All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used to secure the wheels in position must be galvanised
steel. Should any of these be found rusty within the warranty period, the Contractor should
replace it at his own cost.
(d) The types and models of wheel shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's
Representative. The tenderer shall attach all relevant technical details and catalogues of the
types of wheel to be used in his tender.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-7
31.8 0.7 CUBIC METRE BULK REFUSE CONTAINER MODEL "E"

AND BULK CONTAINER FRAME MODEL "EF"
31.8.1 Design and Detailing
The Drawings show the design and details of the container and frame and the Contractor shall conform
to the dimension, capacity and design of the container and frame as shown in the Drawings (as shown
in Appendix A49) or any drawings from time to time issued or approved in writing by the SO Rep.
31.8.2 Welding
All weldings must be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the Superintending Officer's
Representative. No spot welding shall be used for completion of the Works. The welding edges shall
be smoothly & securely finished. If in the opinion of the Superintending Officer's Representative that
certain portion of the weld should be reinforced, the Contractor shall execute and complete the work as
instructed by the Superintending Officer's Representative at his own costs and expenses.
31.8.3 Wheel
(a) The 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container model "E" shall be fitted with four (4) Numbers of
180mm diameter swivel castor wheels, two of which shall have foot lever brakes. Every castor
wheel shall be welded to a thick packing plate as shown in the Drawings (as shown in Appendix
A49) or be fitted to the 0.7 cubic metre bulk refuse container using galvanised steel nuts, bolts
and washers approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative. The minimum load
capacity of each wheel shall not be less than 170 kg.
(b) The bulk container frame model "EF" shall be fitted with five (5) Numbers of 100mm diameter
swivel castor wheels, three with a minimum load capacity of 180 kg and two of 70 kg. Every
castor wheel shall be bolted securely to the frame.
(c) The types and models of wheel to be used shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending
Officer's Representative.
(d) All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used to secure the wheels in position must be of galvanised
steel. Should any of these be found rusty within the warranty period, the Contractor should
replace it at his own cost.
(e) The types and models of wheel shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's
Representative. The offeror shall attach all relevant technical details and catalogues of the types
of wheel to be used in his offer.
31.9 PAINTING OF GOODS
31.9.1 General
(a) All painting shall be done in accordance with the relevant Singapore Standard, British Standard
and Codes of Practice and shall be suitable for tropical climate. No painting shall be carried out
during damp or inclement weather.
(b) The minimum drying or curing time in between coats and the method of application of primer and
paint shall be in accordance to the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the particular paint
being applied. In the case of two-part paint, the mixing ratio shall likewise be according to the
manufacturer's recommendation.
(c) Each coat of paint shall be of a different colour from the preceding coat. The Contractor shall
submit a sample of the paint system for the Superintending Officer Representative's approval
within 10 days from the date stated in the Letter of Acceptance of Tender. The colour of the
finishing coat shall be approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
(d) In the event that paint used is found or suspected to be adulterated or unsatisfactory, the
Contractor shall bear the costs of tests carried out to validate such findings.
(e) The Contractor shall submit the paint manufacturer's technical specifications, product data sheet
and application instructions together with the tender otherwise the tender may be rejected.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-8
31.9 PAINTING OF GOODS (CONT’D)
31.9.2 Six-bin Trolley
Before carrying out the painting, the six-bin trolley shall be pre-treated by degreasing and
followed by blast-cleaning to a quality agreed by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
Application of coating shall be carried out immediately after the said trolley has been thoroughly
cleaned.
(b) Paint System
Painting of the six-bin trolley shall consist of one coat of self-cured inorganic zinc-rich primer of
at least 50 microns and top coated with two coats of bituminous paint of film thickness 30
microns, measured when the paint is completely dry.
31.9.3 Bulk Container Frame Model "EF"
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and grease
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and
other contamination and foreign matters.
All welded areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and
weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be ground.
All loose rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed by power tool cleaning.
The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned,
free from all dirt, rust scales and loose millscales before applying the following paint system.
(b) Paint System
The bulk container frame model `EF' shall be painted with 1 full coat surface tolerant high build
epoxy primer of 120 microns dry film thickness within four hours of cleaning and in any case
before any visible rusting or contamination of the surface occurs, provided that all other
conditions for painting to proceed are met. One full coat polyamide-cured high build epoxy mastic
of 100 microns dry film thickness shall then be painted over the priming coat.
31.9.4 0.7 Cubic Metre Bulk Refuse Container Model "E"
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust, zinc
salts, and other contaminants and foreign matters.
All welded areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and
weld splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be ground.
All damaged and defective steel surfaces shall be cleaned with power tool.
The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned
before applying the following paint system.
(b) Paint System
The bulk refuse container Model "E" shall be painted with one touch up coat surface tolerant high
build epoxy primer of 100 microns dry film thickness to all damaged and defective steel areas
and one full coat phosphoric acid based wash coat on steel surfaces within four (4) hours of
cleaning and in any case before any visible rusting or contamination of the surface occurs,
provided that all other conditions for painting to proceed are met. One full coat polyamide-cured
epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide of 100 microns dry film thickness and one full coat
polyamide-cured high build epoxy mastic coat of 100 microns dry film thickness shall then be
painted over the priming coat.
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 31-9
31.9 PAINTING OF GOODS (CONT’D)
31.9.5 Coating to 0.7 Cubic Metre Bulk Refuse Container Model "E"
and Bulk Container Frame Model "EF"
(a) Surface Tolerant High Build Epoxy Primer
It shall be a two-component epoxy aromatic amine-cured coating containing at least 80% volume
solids and aluminium paste pigmentation. It shall have good chemical and solvent resistance
and a long overcoating time of up to six (6) months. The high film thickness shall be achievable
by brush application.
(b) High Build Epoxy Mastic
It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing at least 60% volume

solids and chemical and weather resistant pigments. It shall have excellent chemical and solvent
resistance.
(c) Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide Primer
It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing at least 65% volume

solids and micaceous iron oxide. It shall have excellent durability, toughness and abrasion
resistance. Its maximum overcoating time shall not be less than six (6) months.
(d) Etch Solution For Galvanised Surfaces
It shall be a phosphoric acid based wash coat of pale blue colour designed for use over new or
untreated galvanised surfaces so as to provide good adhesion for subsequently applied paint.
During application, the surface shall blacken with an even appearance. The maximum
overcoating time shall not be less than two (2) days.
31.10 SUBMISSION OF SAMPLES
The Contractor shall deliver the following samples for the quotation evaluation:-
(a) One number of 250-litre low density polyethylene refuse bins

(b) One number of post/wall mounted litter bin completed with mounting brackets
(c) One number of six-bin trolley
(d) One number of 0.7 cubic metre refuse bulk container model "E"; and
(e) One number of metal bulk container frame Model "EF"
Section 32/.....
BLDG17/S31.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-1
SECTION 32
SELF-COMPACTING CONCRETE
32.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor may propose the use of Self-Compacting Concrete (SCC) as an alternative concrete to
the conventional structural concrete. The use of SCC shall be subject to the approval of SO Rep and
no adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be effected under such case. Polycarboxylate based admixture
and shall be used in the designed mix of SCC. Viscosity Modifying Agent (VMA) may be used for the
SCC.
Self compaction concrete shall be designed to produce a dense homogeneous mass. The concrete
shall be thoroughly worked into all parts of the formwork and between and around the steel
reinforcement without the use of vibrators. It shall be free from voids of any kind. Steel reinforcement
shall be prevented from being displaced or deformed during concreting.
32.2 CEMENT
Unless otherwise specified or instructed by the SO Rep, cement shall be of an approved brand and
manufacture and comply with the following standards :
Type Relevant Standard

Ordinary Portland Cement SS EN 197
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement SS EN 197
High alumina cement shall not be used for any concrete work.
When requested by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall produce a certificate showing the date and place
of manufacture of the cement. As and when directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall, in the
presence of SO Rep, be required to take samples for testing. The samples shall be sent for testing at
the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory. Any cement failing to comply with the requirements of the
relevant standard shall be rejected.
The cement shall be fresh and delivered in unbroken bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed
bulk containers. All cement delivered in bags shall be stored in a weatherproof dry shed with raised
boarded floor of at least 300mm above natural ground level. Cement delivered in bulk tankers shall be
stored in properly designed bulk storage tanks.
Cement of different manufacture and types shall be kept separate at all times and shall not be used in
the same mix.
Concrete of different brand of cement shall not be mixed during casting. The SO Rep shall be informed
in writing of any change in the source of supply.
Consignments of cement shall be used in the order of delivery and any caked or lumpy cement shall
not be used. All cement unfit for use shall be removed from site immediately.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-2
32.2 CEMENT (CONT’D)
and Approved Standard. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter
together with the following documents:
(i) Test Reports showing that the Contractor’s supply is tested according to and in
compliance with SS EN 197.
(ii) If the Contractor’s supply is obtained from a local mill, a copy of the ISO 9000 certification
on the mill.
(iii) If the Contractor’s supply is imported, a letter of supply declaration from the overseas
manufacturer.
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required to
seek the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with
the documents laid down hereinabove.
:
The Cement shall be tested in accordance with the Approved Standard for Physical and
Chemical Test. The test for Elemental Analysis is not required. The number of tests to be
conducted during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract shall be as follows:
Supply Source Number of Test
Local mill with ISO 9000 Minimum one test six-monthly
Local mill without ISO 9000/Imported cement Minimum one test quarterly
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources i.e. a local mill and imported cement
will have both sources subjected to the test requirements.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-3
32.3 AGGREGATES
Fine aggregates shall be uncrushed sand or crushed granite fines complying with SS EN 12620. Where
crushed granite fines are used, its percentage of the total amount of fine aggregates shall not exceed
30%. The upper sieve size (D) for fine aggregates shall be 4 mm.
Coarse aggregates shall be crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed stone complying with
SS EN 12620.
Coarse aggregates shall not exceed 40mm in size for lean and mass concrete and 20mm for reinforced
concrete, unless otherwise specified.
All-in aggregates as specified in SS EN 12620 and aggregates derived from limestone or other materials
inferior to granite shall not be used. The upper sieve size (D) for coarse aggregates shall be 20 mm and
the lower sieve size (d) shall be 4 mm.
Aggregates shall be stored on clean surfaces in separate stockpiles or bunkers to prevent intermingling
of different materials and contamination. Aggregates used for concrete batching plant on site shall be
covered with a light roof cover. Fine aggregates shall be tested for moisture content constantly to
facilitate moisture compensation during concrete production. The testing shall be carried out based on
the Speedy method or other approved equivalent method approved by the SO Rep.
The SO Rep reserves the right to draw samples of aggregates from any stockpile at any time and have
them tested for compliance with Approved Standards of SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097, ASTM
C295 and ASTM C289. The samples shall be sent for testing at the HDB’s Engineering Materials
Laboratory. Aggregates failing to comply with the Approved Standards shall be rejected.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-4
and Approved Standards. The Contractor shall within one (1) month from the date of the Letter
together with test reports from SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories for each source of his
supply on the following properties:
(i) 20mm Aggregate
(a) shape;
(b) surface texture;
(c) particle size distribution - sieving method;
(d) flakiness index;
(e) shape index;
(f) aggregate impact value;
(g) aggregate resistance to abrasion;
(h) bulk density;
(i) particle density and water absorption;
(j) clay, silt and dust content;
(k) shell content;
(l) acid soluble sulphate content;
(m) sulphate content;
(n) organic impurities;
(o) chloride ion content;
(p) potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method);
(q) petrographic examination and
(r) other properties as specified by the SO Rep.

(b) clay, silt and dust content by decantation method (not more than 3.00%);
(c) organic impurities (lighter than Organic Plate No 3);
(d) chloride content (not more than 0.01%);
(e) bulk density;
(f) particle density and water absorption;
(g) assessment of fines;
(h) potential alkali-silica reactivity (chemical method);
(i) magnesium sulphate soundness;
(j) elemental analysis (in percentage):
- Silica as SiO2
- Aluminium Oxide as AI2O3
- Iron Oxide as Fe2O3
- Titanium Oxide as TiO2
- Calcium Oxide as CaO
- Magnesium Oxide as MgO
- Chromium Oxide as Cr2O3
- Sodium Oxide as Na2O
- Potassium Oxide as K2O
- Sulphate as SO4
- loss on Ignition at 900 0C
(k) any other element(s) which may exist in the concreting sand; and
(l) other properties as specified by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-5
(a) Certificate Of Compliance (Cont’d)
allowed to change the source of supply at his discretion. The Contractor shall be required seek
the SO Rep’s prior approval in writing for any change in his supply sources, together with the
documents laid down hereinabove.
The quality of the aggregates to be supplied shall comply in every respect with the Specifications
and Approved Standards, and the conditions, analysis and test requirements laid down in the SS
EN, BS EN, ASTM (especially SS EN 12620, BS EN 933, BS EN 1097) classification for
concreting purposes. The number of tests to be conducted during the Time for Completion and
any time period where liquidated damages are imposed under the Contract shall be as follows:
(i) 20mm Aggregate
Properties Frequency of Test

Particle size distribution - sieving method Minimum one test quarterly
Flakiness index
Shape index
Aggregate impact value
Aggregate resistance to abrasion
Bulk density
Clay, silt and dust content
Shell content
Acid soluble sulphate content
Sulphate content
Organic impurities
Chloride Ion Content
Potential alkali-silica reactivity
(chemical method)
Petrographic examination Minimum one test
The Contractor shall be required to send their 20 mm aggregate supply for the Mortar-Bar
test under ASTM Standard C227 if the need arises.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-6
(b) Test Requirements (Cont’d)
Properties Number of Test

Particle size distribution - sieving method
Clay, silt and dust content by decantation
method (not more than 3%)
Organic Impurities
(lighter than Organic Plate No 3)
Chloride content (not more than 0.01%)

Bulk Density Minimum one test monthly
Assessment of fines
Elemental analysis (in percentage):

(i) Silica as SiO2
(ii) Aluminium Oxide as Al2O3
Full list of properties as specified in the

subclause “Certificate of Compliance”.
The Contractor offering from two different supply sources will have both sources subjected to the
test requirements.
32.4 WATER
Potable water supplied by the Public Utilities Board shall be used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout.
For cleaning of formwork, reinforcement and curing of concrete, water other than potable water may be
used if approved by the SO Rep. The use of seawater shall be prohibited.
32.5 ADMIXTURES
When admixture is proposed to be used in concrete mix, furnish information concerning the admixture,
admixture acceptance tests and additional information as stipulated in SS EN 934 for approval by the
SO Rep prior to the use of the admixture.
Admixture used shall comply with SS EN 934 or the relevant British European Standards. Requests
for permission to use other types of admixtures not covered by these standards may only be considered
when accompanied by full supporting information. Admixture to be used shall be approved by the
SO Rep.
The Contractor shall provide the SO Rep every facility for inspection and sampling of the admixture(s).
The sample(s) shall be kept for reference and shall be sent, if requested by the SO Rep, for admixture
uniformity tests in accordance with SS EN 934 or the relevant British Standards.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-7
32.6 CONCRETE MIXES
32.6.1 Designed Mix
For designed mixes, the Contractor shall submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the
SO Rep for approval. The designed mix shall comply with the following requirements :
Concrete Grade 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Cement Content (kg per m3) 275 300 325 350 400
Maximum Cement Content (kg per m3) 550 550 550 550 550
Maximum % of Fine Aggregate to Total Aggregate 50 50 50 50 50
Maximum Water to Cement Ratio 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40
For concrete with maximum aggregate size of 14mm and 10mm, the minimum cement content shall be
increased by 20 kg per m3 and 40 kg per m3 respectively.
In the designing of mixes, a current margin shall be 10 N per mm2. If a current margin other than that
recommended is to be used, sufficient valid data shall be made available to the SO Rep for his
consideration and approval. Mix adjustment shall be allowed only when sufficient results are available;
however, such mix shall comply with the Specifications.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall be durable,
workable and comply with the strength grade requirement as specified or as shown.
32.6.2 Trial Mixes
The designed mix with a designed maximum consistency as measured by slump flow, V-funnel, L-box,
segregation, and loss of slump shall be verified by preparation of trial mixes witnessed by the SO Rep.
The mix shall be judged for suitable workability which shall include filling ability, viscosity, passing ability,
stability as well as strength. A minimum of 18 cubes from three batches shall be taken. The mix may
be considered suitable if :
(a) the average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall exceed the specified
characteristic strength by at least 10 N per mm2 or if the nine cubes at an earlier age indicate
that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount; and
(b) compliance of the following tests in accordance to “The European Guideline for Self-
compacting Concrete” for consistency
(i) Slump flow test & T500 slump flow test;
(ii) V-funnel test;
(iii) L-Box test;
(iv) Segregation resistance test; and
(v) loss of slump flow spread should not be more than 70mm up to 2 hours.
The contractor is required to submit the upper and lower bound (sieve analysis) of aggregate envelope
for each designed mixes of SCC to SO Rep for approval. The submission shall include preventive
measures if the results of the aggregate grading fall outside the range of the aggregate envelope.
32.6.3 Mix Adjustment
Once the designed mix is approved by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall not be allowed to change the
mix without prior approval of the SO Rep.
An increase or reduction of cement content by 20 kg per m3 and above, or the percentage of fine
aggregate by 5% and above, or any change in the type or dosage of admixture or consistency is
considered a change in mix design. This does not constitute a tolerance allowance on the mix design
used in relation to the specified requirements.
If the Contractor is found to be using a mix design inferior to the approved mix, the SO Rep shall
exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Contractor.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-8
32.7 BATCHING
Cement shall be measured by weight or batched in whole bags if so packed and delivered. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight separately. Water shall be measured by volume and
due allowance shall be made for the amount of water present in the mass of fine aggregate by deducting
this amount from the volume of water to be added during the mixing of concrete. Solid admixtures shall
be measured by weight, while liquid or paste admixtures may be measured by weight or volume.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within ±3% of the quantity of cement, water or total
aggregate being measured, and with ±5% of the quantity of admixture added before commencement of
work and subsequently whenever so directed by the SO Rep, the measuring equipment shall be
calibrated with known weights and volume measures.
32.8 MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mechanical mixer. The quantity of constituent material in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The constituent material shall be thoroughly and
continually mixed at the mixing speed specified by the mixer manufacturer until the resulting concrete
is uniform in colour and consistency.
The mixing time shall be as follows :
(a) Pan mixer - minimum 30 seconds

(b) Truck mixer or drum mixer - minimum 1.5 minutes for 1 m3 of concrete
plus 0.25 minute for each additional 1 m3.
The mixing time shall be reckoned from the time when all the solid materials are in the mixer. No portion
of the time required for discharging shall be considered as part of the mixing time.
The first batch of concrete fed into the mixer shall have an increase of an appropriate amount of dry
mortar similar in proportion to that of the concrete to be mixed and of mixing water for coating the mixer.
The mixer shall be emptied completely before being refilled. Mixers which have been out of use for
more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. The mixer shall
be free from hardened concrete. Worn-off blades or paddles shall be replaced.
32.9 READY-MIX CONCRETE
All concrete used in site casting for the Works shall be obtained from pre-approved Ready-Mixed
Concrete suppliers.
Ready-mix concrete shall comply with SS EN 206. The cement content shall comply with Clause 4.7
"Concrete Mixes" including all subclauses under it.
No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the
concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being
discharged, the concrete shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final
position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement is added to the mix.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-9
32.10 WORKABILITY AND CONSISTENCY
The workability shall be such that the SCC shall have the characteristics of filling ability, viscosity,
passing ability and stability. The concrete shall worked into the corners of the shuttering and around the
reinforcements, gives the specified surface finish and attain the specified strength. The mix design shall
ensure that this workability is obtainable.
On each concreting day, workability shall be assessed on the Site at the discharge point of the mixer
by means of the following tests for every truck of concrete in accordance to “ The European Guideline
for Self-compacting Concrete”. If the measured values deviates from the agreed value as specified in
the sub-clause, the concrete shall be rejected.
No water shall be added to the concrete subsequent to the completion of the mixing.
Compliance of the following tests in accordance to “The European Guideline for Self-compacting
Concrete” for consistency are required on each concreting day:
(a) Slump flow test & T500 slump flow test;

(b) J-ring or L-box test;
(c) Concrete compressive strength at 7-days and 28-days for every 40 m3 of concrete cast;
(d) Segregation resistance test;
(e) loss of slump flow spread should not be more than 70mm up to 2 hours.
Site personnel are to be trained to assess the slump flow test. No compaction is allowed during casting
with SCC.
32.11 PLACING OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of final deposit as speedily as possible
before it has commenced to set, and in no case shall this exceed 20 minutes after mixing. Where
retarders are used such interval may be extended subject to the approval of the SO Rep. The method
of transit shall be such that it will prevent the segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients.
In the use of concrete pumps, the Contractor shall ensure that the following is complied with :
(a) Pipes shall not be secured to formwork or reinforcement which may be displaced by the pulsating
movement of the pipe.
(b) Pumping shall commence first with blowing of water through the pipeline, followed by cement
mortar, both of sufficient quantities and all these shall be discharged away from the area to be
concreted.
(c) When extra sections of pipe are to be added, each length of pipe shall be thoroughly wetted
inside but no free water shall remain in the pipe.
(d) Where the pipeline is exposed to the sun, the line shall be protected against absorption of heat
by covering with damp sacking or other approved material during pumping.
Before proceeding to place the concrete, the formwork shall be re-aligned if necessary and water and
rubbish therein shall be removed. Immediately prior to placing the concrete, the formwork shall be well
wetted and inspection openings shall be closed.
Raised gangways for workmen placing and vibrating concrete shall be provided wherever possible and
shall be so constructed as to avoid damaging and displacing the reinforcement.
Concrete shall be placed in the formwork by shovels or other approved equipment and shall not be
dropped from a height nor handled in a manner which will cause segregation. Accumulations of set
concrete on the reinforcement shall be avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent
position and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position.
For beams and similar members, concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full depth. In
walls, columns and similar members, the concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers each not
exceeding 1m deep. Placing of concrete shall be continuous and temporary interruption shall not
normally exceed 30 minutes. At the completion of a specified part, a construction joint shall be made
subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-10
32.11 PLACING OF CONCRETE (CONT’D)
No concrete shall be placed during wet weather, unless the entire area of pour is covered, or other
measures are taken to protect the wet concrete, to the satisfaction and subject to the approval of the
SO Rep.
All concrete shall be placed in daylight, unless an adequate system of lighting is provided and approval
for night work is given by the SO Rep and all relevant authorities prior to commencement of the
concreting.
For placing of SCC, the vertical free fall shall not be more than 5 m and the horizontal flow distance
shall not be more than 10 m.
32.12 CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE
After being placed in position, all fresh concrete shall be protected from rain, sun and drying wind, and
shall not be subjected to any vibrational disturbance other than that arising from compacting. The
exposed surfaces of concrete shall be cured with an appropriate curing compound as approved by the
SO Rep. The curing compound shall be applied by mechanical sprayer and comply strictly with the
manufacturer's instruction. If the curing compound is exposed to rain or water within 4 hours from the
time the application is completed, the Contractor shall re-apply the area affected with appropriate curing
compound again. However, the application of the curing compound may be exempted subject to the
approval of the SO Rep, if continuous wetting for at least 72 hours by rain on the concrete surface
occurs immediately after the concrete sets. This waiver shall not constitute a variation to the Contract.
Concrete placed below ground level shall be protected from falling earth and vegetation, and the
excavated ground shall be kept free of any water by pumping or other means of drainage. Approved
means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading,
moving vehicles, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influences that would impair
the strength and durability of the concrete. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious substances
shall be free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a
further period of 3 days from the time of concrete placing or as otherwise instructed thereafter.
Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing and protection shall be made good by the
Contractor.
32.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Where joints are necessary during concreting, their positions shall be approved by the SO Rep and
shall be constructed using expanded mesh as indicated in the Drawings. Before concreting resumes,
such joints shall be properly chipped, cleaned and scum and loose aggregates removed therefrom.
Immediately before placing new concrete, the joints shall be thoroughly wetted and coated with rich
cement grout.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-11
32.14 QUALITY OF CONCRETE WORKS
(a) Testing of Structural Concrete
Concrete shall be tested for compliance in strength and durability requirements, except for the
following non-structural Works :
(i) Foot paths and paved areas;

(ii) Ramps and steps;
(iii) Hardcourts;
(iv) Inspection chambers and drain lines;and
(v) Floor screed
The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by crushing tests on 100mm cubes.
The quality and consistency of the concrete shall be tested as directed by the SO Rep in
accordance with BS EN 12390. The Contractor shall provide for slump test or flow test,
compressive strength test, core test and any other concrete test as and when required by the SO
Rep.
(b) Sampling
On each concreting day and for each grade of concrete per concrete mixer, samples shall be
taken according to the following rates :
(i) Samples Taken At Sites
Where samples are taken at sites, samples shall be taken for every 40 m³ of concrete or
part thereof, of each grade of concrete. At least 1 sample shall be taken from each batch
chosen by the SO Rep.
(ii) Samples Taken At Precast Plants And Ready-Mixed Concrete Plant
Where samples are taken at ready-mixed concrete plants, for every 40 m3 of concrete or
part thereof, at least 1 sample shall be taken from a batch. Each sample cannot be used
to represent the Works for more than one Contract or project.
The sampling of concrete cubes in the precast plants shall be carried out by the precasters
under the Approved Precast Concrete Supplier listed in the HDB Materials List.
Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor is still liable for ensuring that the precast
components quality satisfies the Drawings and Specifications requirements. In the event
that the precast components quality fails to meet the requirements in the Drawings and
Specifications, the Contractor shall be liable for the defective precast components. All
defective precast components which failed the strength requirement shall be removed or
otherwise rectified accordingly to the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own
costs and expenses. No extension of time for completion shall be allowed for the
rectification of such works.
A sample shall be a quantity of concrete, consisting of standard scoopfuls, taken from a batch of
concrete whose properties are to be determined. The sample shall be taken at the point of
discharge from the mixer, agitating truck or mixer truck. These concrete cubes shall be cast to
achieve full compaction by using an approved vibrating table. The minimum period required
before demoulding these concrete cubes shall be 16 hours.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-12
32.14.1 General Requirements (Cont'd)
(b) Sampling (Cont'd)
At least 4 cubes shall be cast from each sample. 2 cubes shall be tested at an early age. The
remaining 2 cubes shall be tested at 28 days for compliance purpose. All concrete cubes shall
be tested at the HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory or other approved accredited testing
laboratory with equivalent or better testing facilities, auto-capturing and computerized monitoring
system with analysis capabilities. The Contractor shall submit the information pertaining to the
proposed laboratory to SO Rep for approval. All contract information and test results shall be
uploaded to EPTC e-cube website. The Employer shall recover all testing fees charged by the
HDB’s Engineering Materials Laboratory for testing of cubes including those sampled from ready-
mixed concrete plants and precast plant from the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide lockable humid boxes of adequate sizes to store all test cubes for
the specified period. The humid boxes shall be placed in a covered area and maintained at a
relative humidity of above 95%. The keys to such curing facility shall be exclusively held in
custody by a person designated by the SO Rep. The test cubes to be tested at HDB’s
Engineering Materials Laboratory shall be collected by the SO Rep from the designated site at
regular interval. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the designated collection site and the
Contractor shall deliver cubes to the designated collection site on the day of collection. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to hand over the cubes to the HDB’s appointed
contractor for the collection of cubes.
(c) Cube Identification
The Contractor shall provide facilities to enable the identification of test cubes by radio frequency
or similar means. The Contractor shall provide at least one web-based radio frequency
identification (RFID) reader capable of reading the RFID tags on the concrete cubes from a
minimum distance of at least 40 mm. The reader must be able to read all 125kHz RFID tags,
including tags starting with hex codes of '2800' and ‘2868’. The Contractor shall include the
appropriate interfacing software to a web-based controller.
The Contractor shall logon to a website of the Employer to register the concrete cube data and
tag IDs using the RFID reader. The registration of the cube data and tag IDs shall be done within
the same casting day. The appropriate RFID tags shall be placed at the corner of the cubes while
the cubes are still fresh. The top surface of the RFID tag shall be level with the concrete cube
surface. The Contractor shall protect the RFID tags on the concrete cube while demoulding. For
damage or loss of RFID tag, the Contractor shall be charged the replacement cost based on the
Employer's purchase price
The Employer shall deduct the charges payable by the Contractor from any monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor or recover the same from the Contractor as a debt due by the
Contractor to the Employer.
(d) Cover Measurement
The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for the measurement of concrete cover to
reinforcement and the in-situ strength of concrete. The Contractor shall carry out measurements
for all major structural elements as determined by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall analyse
statistically all measurements for each of the major type of structural element. The concrete cover
shall comply with the requirements of CP 65. The in-situ strength of the concrete shall be
assessed in accordance with BS 6089 where applicable. The strength shall comply with the
specified grade, taking into account the variability with in-situ strength.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-13
32.14.2 Compliance Of Strength Requirement
The 28 day strength shall be required for compliance with the strength specified hereunder. The early
strength tests shall be required for quality control purposes.
For precast concrete, the 3 day strength shall be obtained solely for quality control purpose. Early
strength requirements to meet design strength for demoulding, handling and delivery shall be specified
by the approved manufacturer of the precast components and approved by the SO Rep. Such strength
shall be determined from the additional cubes. The SO Rep shall have the absolute right to reject any
precast component should its early strength fails to meet the design strength requirements.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at the
age of 28 days. Compliance may be assumed if the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) The average strength of the sample and the preceding three samples or the average of the first
four samples of the production is greater than or equal to the specified characteristic strength
plus half a fixed current margin of 6 N per mm². Thus, the minimum average strength shall be :
Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Average
Strength at 28 days (N 23.0 28.0 33.0 38.0 43.0 48.0 53.0
per mm²)
(b) The sample strength is at least the level specified below :
Grade 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Minimum Individual
Sample
17.0 22.0 27.0 32.0 37.0 42.0 47.0
Strength at 28 days (N
per mm²)
(c) The characteristics strength shall meet the requirement of the specified concrete grade.
If a current margin lower than the fixed current margin can be consistently achieved, approval may be
sought to lower the strength level as specified in subclause (a) above.
For samples taken on the Site, if the sample strength results do not comply with either or both of the
requirements specified above, the SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and
Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
All test cubes taken shall be properly stored and the Contractor shall ensure that all test cubes are
tested at their respective age. Test cube that are lost shall be deemed to have failed and the SO Rep
Contractor.
Payment of charges to the Employer shall not in any way affect, vary or relieve the Contractor's
In addition to the payment of charges, the affected concrete Works may be stopped and not be
continued until so directed by the SO Rep. No extension to the Time for Completion shall be allowed
for such stoppage of the concrete Works.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-14
32.14.3 Test Methods and Performance Requirements
On each concreting day, the test methods in accordance to “The European Guideline for Self-
compacting Concrete” for SCC and the performance requirements are as follows:
S/N Test Passing Criteria

1 Slump Flow 660 mm to 800 mm
2 T500 Slump Flow 2 to 5 s

V-funnel 6 to 12 s
L-Box: ≥ 0.8
3 J-ring or L-box
J-ring: 0 to 10 mm
4 Sieve Segregation 5 to 15 %
The Contractor shall conduct at least one Non Destructive Test (NDT) per block for locations cast with
SCC.
32.15 TESTING OF HARDENED CONCRETE
In the event of non-compliance, the quality of concrete in question shall be interpreted in accordance
with BS 5328.
For the 28 day strength non-compliance, the quality of the sub-standard concrete shall be estimated by
carrying out tests on hardened concrete in the structure. In the event that such tests are not practical,
the SO Rep may decide not to carry out any test.
The tests may include non-destructive methods, the taking of core samples, load tests or a combination
of several methods as follows :
Compressive Strength of Individual Sample Test on Structure

Grade
(N per mm2) after 28 days
20 14.5 to below 17.0 )
25 18.5 to below 22.0 )
30 23.0 to below 27.0 )
35 27.0 to below 32.0 ) Non-destructive method and/or core test
40 31.5 to below 37.0 )
45 35.5 to below 42.0 )
50 40.0 to below 47.0 )
20 below 14.5 )
25 below 18.5 )
30 below 23.0 )
35 below 27.0 ) Non-destructive method and core test
40 below 31.5 ) and/or load test
45 below 35.5 )
50 below 40.0 )
The tests shall be carried out by an accredited laboratory in accordance with CP 65 and assessed in
accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify the establishment of non-
compliance provided that the latter are based on valid cube test results.
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 32-15
32.16 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which fails to meet either of the requirements in
Clause 32.14 "Quality Of Concrete Works" including all subclauses under it and the assessment
specified in Clause 32.15 "Testing Of Hardened Concrete" shall be determined by the SO Rep. They
may range from :
(a) qualified acceptance in less severe cases with action taken against the Contractor under Clause
1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities". The Contractor shall provide protective coating against
carbonation and other aggressive environment if the affected concrete can be certified to be
structurally sound by a PE engaged by the Contractor; or
If the average of three core tests falls below the strength level specified in sub-clause 32.14.2(b),
or in the event of failure of a load test.
(b) the Contractor shall carry out at his own costs and expenses any necessary approved remedial
measures to the satisfaction of the SO Rep. Remedial measures shall be designed, supervised
and certified by a PE engaged by the Contractor at his own costs and expenses; or
(c) the Contractor shall remove the affected concrete, and the costs and expenses in removing all
poor quality concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All defective concrete Works such as badly constructed concrete members with poor alignment and
plumb, honeycombed and badly formed surfaces shall be removed or otherwise rectified according to
the instructions of the SO Rep at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Section 33/.....
BLDG17/S32.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 33-1
SECTION 33
OPTIMISATION OF PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM
33.1 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Contractor shall design, engineer, test, fabricate, deliver, install and guarantee all construction
system necessary for execution of the works. The building shall be complete in every respect, including
all measures that may be required to that end, notwithstanding any omissions or inadequacies of
Drawings and/or Specifications. The Performance Criteria of the work of this Section shall include, but
is not limited to the following:
(a) Structural System:
The structural system of all vertical and horizontal elements comprises of a semi-precast
construction system, where in-situ elements shall be cast using system formwork.
Contractor shall refer to Architectural and Structural drawings/specification for more
information and co-ordination.
(b) Construction Method:
The construction under the precast optimisation system is required to be executed using the
most efficient construction method to achieve shorter construction cycle time proposed by main
contractor and submit this proposal for consultants’ evaluation.
(c) System Formwork
The following system formwork, for use in cast-in-situ reinforced walls and columns, shall be
considered in the implementation of shorter construction cycle for the Precast Optimisation
Structural System. Proprietary System may be used and shall be customize to suit project
requirements. The Contractor may propose subject to achieving shorter construction cycle,
equivalent system for consideration and approval by the SO / SO Representative. All system
formwork shall be subject to six-monthly quality checks for dimensional tests and reduced tensile
tests or other type of tests as appropriately required by the SO / SO Representative.
(i) Climbing Formwork or Jump Form System
A.1 Generally used for but not limited to, the construction of the cast-in-situ lift core
walls, staircase walls and external face of all walls / columns.
A.2 Formwork, constructed of structural steel, may be crane-climbing or self-climbing

using hydraulic jacks, of which the latter system is preferred.
A.3 Working platform / scaffold with guard rails and ladders shall be provided and
integrated with the formwork. The working platform shall be enclosed.
A.4 Working platform shall be designed to carry large load, eg. for storage of steel
reinforcement for the next climb section, and to withstand high wind load.
A.5 No leading edges are to be created during climbing to eliminate fall hazard.
A.6 Control function of the climbing mechanism shall be maintained and tested
regularly by qualified personnel. Records of maintenance and tests shall be kept
on site.
A.7 Full verticality shall be maintained and assured throughout the climbing and
forming operations.
BLDG17/S33.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 33-2
33.1 SCOPE OF WORKS (CONT”D)
(c) System Formwork (Cont’d)
(ii) Aluminium-Based Formwork or Equivalent
B.1 Assessed by BCA to be within Band 1 to 3 under BCA’s prevailing guidelines on

Constructability Points for System Formwork
B.2 Basic element of Formwork shall comprise of panel with a framework of high
strength extruded aluminium alloy section welded to aluminium sheets.
B.3 The panels must be lightweight with excellent stiffness to weight ratio, robust for
handling and yielding minimal deflections under concrete loading. Being lightweight
panels, the erection of these panels can be manual and shall minimize the need
for heavy lifting equipments.
B.4 Optimum panel sizes shall be used to reduce fitting out time on site, for ease
of striking the formwork and for easy manual transportation to the next level.
B.5 The panels are required to be manufactured to very high quality and tolerances to
eliminate any dimensional or on-site problems, to achieve a high quality concrete
surface finish with accurate tolerances and verticality and with no further plastering
required, though a skim coat of 4-5mm may be applied prior to any finishing works.
B.6 Adequate and strong wall ties are to be provided to ensure that wall / column
thicknesses are maintained with accuracy and to prevent concrete bulging.
B.7 Right angle joints between walls, walls and slab and any openings are to be
maintained.
B.8 The construction lines in the formwork should be true and the surface plane.
B.9 Panels shall be easily identifiable on site and can be smoothly fitted together using
the formwork modulation drawings to be provided by the manufacturer.
B.10 The panels shall be use repetitively but shall ensure high quality concrete surface
finish with every each use.
B.11 Two levels of integrated safety / working platform attached to the formwork on the
external surface shall be provided during erection and striking of the formwork
system. Separate scaffolding during shuttering operations and construction of
concrete structures will not be allowed.
(d) Quality & Workmanship
The Contractor shall ensure the finishing/structural quality and workmanship of all cast-in- situ
work using the required proprietary system formwork shall comply with the prevailing CONQUAS
standard requirements. For the required system formwork, no external plastering are allowed on
the external facing cast in-situ reinforced concrete wall/column, any unevenness on the concrete
surface finish shall either be grind down or skim coat with not more than 5mm thickness to
achieve consistency in evenness and straightness of the wall finishing.
BLDG17/S33.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 33-3
33.2 REGULATION & STANDARDS
(a) All work of this Section shall comply with the latest edition of the Republic of Singapore Building
Control Regulations, Singapore Standards, and all requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau of
Singapore.
(b) The standards, codes, and specifications reference below and elsewhere in these
specifications shall apply; however, similar codes or standards used in the home country of
the manufacturer / fabricator may be used if applicable, subject to the acceptance of the local
authorities. In such case, the manufacturer / fabricator shall submit documentation satisfactory
to the Architects that such code is essentially equal to the one specified.
(c) All standard and codes referred to in the specification and Contract Documents shall be those
editions (including amendments) current at the date of this specification.
(i) All relevant Singapore Standards published by the Spring Singapore.
(ii) All relevant Building, Fire Safety, Environmental, Health & Safety Code published by the
relevant Singapore Authorities.
(iii) All relevant British Standards published by the British Standard Institution (BS).
(iv) All relevant American and European Standard published by ASTM and EU.
(v) All relevant ISO Standards published by International Standard Organisation.
(d) In the case of any conflict between reference codes and standards and/or the Drawings and
Specifications, the more stringent code or standard shall govern.
(e) The Works will be evaluated under the Construction Quality assessment or CONQUAS 21, a
yardstick developed by the Building and Construction Authority (BCA) for measuring construction
quality. Refer to the written documentation on CONQUAS 21 published by BCA for detailed
implementation and procedural requirements of the system.
(f) The Contract Documents have specified that the Contractor is required to work towards
achieving a minimum overall CONQUAS 21 score of the project.
Section 34/.....
BLDG17/S33.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 34-1
SECTION 34
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE WALL PANELS AND BLOCKS
34.1 GENERAL
The Contractor is required to use the Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels in place of the conventional
brick/block wall at all areas as shown in the drawings including the multi-storey car park and all
standalone structures for non-load bearing wall unless it is approved by the SO Rep not to use.
Where Lightweight Precast Concrete Panel is impractical to use at narrow spaces (less than 150mm)
or suspended walls such as door lintels, Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks shall be used. The
Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks shall not be used at wet areas that would be in direct contact
with water i.e. in the bathroom and kitchen wall.
In gist, no brick/block wall is allowed to be used at all areas in the development.
The type of panel/block to be used is subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The contractor is required
to ensure that the use of Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels / Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks
complies with the requirements of all other Authorities, such as the Fire Requirements.
For the purpose of this clause, Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels shall be:
(a) Lightweight Hollow Core Panel

(b) Lightweight Concrete Sandwich Panel or
(c) Any other approved equivalent.
And Lightweight Concrete Precision Block shall be:
(a) Autoclaved Lightweight Concrete (ALC)

(b) Autoclaved Aerated Concrete (AAC)
(c) Lightweight Hollow Core Concrete
(d) Any other approved equivalent.
The dimensions as shown in the drawings shall take precedence over all other documents. All
dimensions shall be checked during setting out and any discrepancies shall be highlighted and resolved
before the commencement of the work.
The Contractor shall check and verify all dimensions on site before manufacture of the panels/blocks.
Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval showing the following information where appropriate to
the item:
(a) Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of complete assembly

(b) Scale plan view and section of panels
(c) Method of installation, including fixings
(d) Junctions and trim to adjoining structures
(e) Jointing and joint crack control mechanism
(f) Window and parapet details
(g) Interfacing between column, beam, floor, panel, etc.
Shop drawings shall be supplied in sufficient time for examination, and revision if necessary, to occur
before such documents are required for production of the panels. The Contractor shall prepare setting
out drawings of all fixings required to be fixed to the structure. Calculations to be submitted where
required.
For Lightweight Concrete Precision blocks, they shall be wire-cut with a tolerance of ± 1mm. This
precision ensures a smooth and even wall surface, thus requires only skim coat finish.
BLDG17/S34.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 34-2
34.2 STANDARD
SS 271 Concrete masonry units

SS 492 Performance requirements for strength and robustness
BSEN771–3 Specification for masonry units. Aggregate concrete masonry units (dense
and lightweight aggregates)
BSEN771–4 Specification for masonry units. Autoclaved aerated concrete masonry unit.
BS476-4 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Non-combustibility test for
materials
BS476-22 Methods for determination of the fire resistance of non-loadbearing elements
of construction
ASTM E90 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission of Building
Partitions and Elements
34.3 APPROVALS
The complete installation shall comply with all applicable requirements of the relevant building
regulation/building code and endorsed by his Professional Engineer. All units shall be subject to
inspection and approval by SO Rep.
34.4 METHOD OF INSTALLATION
The installation details and method of statements shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval prior
to the commencement of the installation works. The installation of the panels/blocks shall be done
according to the manufacturer’s instruction.
The Contractor shall submit references and full details of their installer's experience in the erection and
installation of Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels/ Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks to SO Rep
for approval.
The Contractor shall ensure that all joints (panels to panels/blocks, panels/blocks to structure i.e. beam,
column etc.) are treated with wire mesh, fibre mesh or any other engineering method or material to
prevent any cracks at the joints.
The contractor is to engage their Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels/ Lightweight Concrete Precision
Blocks supplier for training of their workers. The installation of the entire panels/blocks system shall be
done according to manufacturer's instruction. Only trained workers shall be allowed to carry out the
installation of the Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels / Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks on site.
34.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor has to ensure that the manufacturers or the appointed agent inspect the on-site
construction of the sample wall and of the first batch of each type of panel/block and erection condition.
The Contractor shall not vary the methods of preparation and installation from that recommended by
the manufacturer or the appointed agent.
The fixings, fastenings, anchors, lugs and the like shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer or
the appointed agent for use with their products or approved equivalent and shall transmit the loads and
stresses imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly.
Gaps between panels and between wall/ceiling/floor/door frame shall be filled up with joint compound
or appropriate sealant, as recommended by the manufacturer. The contractors are required to use
either one of the following painting methods to prevent hairline cracks from forming at the gaps between
panels and wall/ceiling/floor/door frame:
(a) Joint adhesive + 3-in-1 Paint

(b) Joint adhesive + Normal Paint
(c) 3-in-1 Paint
Notwithstanding the above mentioned methods of repair, it is still the contractor’s responsibility to
ensure good and proper method of repair without recurrence of cracks.
BLDG17/S34.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 34-3
34.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The panels/blocks shall be installed to areas as indicated on the architectural drawings. For the
Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels, they and shall have the following performance criteria.
(a) The lightweight concrete wall panels system shall have an overall impact resistance performance
of Severe Duty Rating for Strength and Robustness.
(b) Characteristic Compressive Strength shall be at least 4.5 N per mm2 at 28 days.
(c) Drying shrinkage of the panel shall not exceed 0.09%.
(d) Total water absorption of the panel shall not exceed 23.5%.
For the Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks, they shall have the following performance criteria.
4.5N per mm2 at 28 days when tested to

Characteristic compressive strength
BS EN 772
Strength and robustness (Impact
Severe Duty when tested to BS5234/SS492
Resistance)
Dry shrinkage Not exceeding 0.09% when tested to SS271
Minimum STC 40 when tested to ASTM
Sound insulation
E90:2004
Non-combustibility BS 476: Part 4
Fire rating Minimum 2 hours, BS 476: PT 22
All Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks shall be wire-cut with a tolerance of ± 1mm.
34.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
All Lightweight Precast Concrete Panels / Lightweight Concrete Precision Blocks shall be delivered to
site on wooden pallets. Lifting of pallets by crane during unloading and hoisting shall be carried out
using nylon straps to minimise product damage. Pallets should be stacked at site to a maximum height
of two pallets on dry, firm, level ground. Panels/ blocks should be kept dry before use and wrappings
should only be removed just prior to use.
34.8 SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION AND TEST REPORTS
Submit the following details to the SO Rep for approval:
(a) Test reports by SAC accredited laboratories on compliance with the technical specifications. The
test reports shall be dated within the validity period of 6 months prior to the date of submission
of such reports to the SO Rep.
(b) Mix proportions of cement mortar and adhesive used.
Section 35/.....
BLDG17/S34.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 35-1
SECTION 35
DRY INTERNAL PARTITION WALL
35.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall review methods and procedures related to drywall installation with the
manufacturers and provide all necessary material, labour, equipment and services required to deliver
and install the dry internal partition wall.
All test reports shall be the original or certified true copies from a SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory.
The Contractor shall comply with the latest versions of the relevant Codes and Regulations mentioned
in this Section, and bring to the attention of the SO Rep for review and confirmation in the event of
discrepancy. The SO Rep reserves the right to request for the stricter of the regulations or requirements
for the implementation of the Works.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate for all interfacing work between drywall installation and other trades,
in particular M&E services, floor finishes and door frame.
Dry internal partition wall shall only be installed in dry area within units, partitioning between bedrooms
to bedrooms and bedrooms to living room. Dry internal partition wall shall not be used as partition wall
between units.
The drywall supplier should have a minimum of 5 project references from completed local high-rise
residential project.
35.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
Before commencement of the work, the Contractor shall provide workshop drawings and test certificates
and other relevant documents to the SO Rep for approval. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with
all the technical and quality control requirements. PE calculation/endorsement for the structural integrity
of the drywall partition system shall be submitted for SO rep approval.
Complete sample mock-up of a room, inclusive of door frames, shall be installed on the Site for the
approval of the SO Rep before full implementation.
The Contractor is to engage the drywall supplier for training of their workers. Installation of entire drywall
system, inclusive of track, stud, drywall panel, insulation material & joint application, shall be done
according to drywall manufacturer’s instruction. Only trained workers shall be allowed to carry out the
installation of drywall on site.
Heat insulation and sound insulation material (eg.Rockwool or Glasswool) shall be installed
progressively between drywall board panel as boarding proceeds. The insulation shall be placed tight
within the spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or
behind partition, and tight to items passing through partitions.
All joints on exposed boards are to be flush finished. All drywall screws head shall be coated with joint
compound to conceal it. At least two-coat system shall be used for jointing using paper tape or
equivalent. The sealing of the vertical joints and screw heads shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's procedures and instructions. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary approval from
the SO Rep for the above item and its method of application.
Selection and installation of corner beads for external corners shall be carried out according to
manufacturer’s recommendation and submitted to SO rep for approval.
For optimal acoustic performance, acoustic sealant or resilient tape shall be applied as a continuous
bead to the perimeter of the steel frame on both sides before the plaster boards are installed. Joint
compound shall be applied over the acoustic sealant as recommended by manufacturer.
Skim coat shall be used according to manufacturer’s recommendation. Incompatible skim coat may
cause adhesion issues between the skim coat and board surface, resulting in delamination & cracks on
the skim coats.
BLDG17/S35.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 35-2
35.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT (CONT’D)
A gap of 10mm to 15mm is to be left between the floor and the bottom of drywall panel and a gap of
approximately 10mm is left between the top of drywall panel and concrete soffits. This will allow for
deflection in both top and bottom slabs, ensuring no load is transmitted to the drywall panel. Lifting of
the drywall panel above the floor also prevents water on the floor from coming into direct contact with
the board. Gaps between the drywall panel and wall/soffit/floor shall be filled up with joint compound or
appropriate sealant, as recommended by manufacturer.
35.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
At all times the drywall panel shall be properly stored and protected to prevent warping, bowing,
cracking, chipping, staining and other defects. Drywall panel should be delivered to site immediately
prior to the installation to reduce the incidence of damage. All materials should be kept dry, stored in
neat, flat stacks to avoid damage to the board ends, edges or sagging of the board.
35.4 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF DRY INTERNAL PARTITION WALL
The technical requirements of the dry internal partition wall shall also include, but not be limited to, the
requirements as stipulated in this clause:
(a) The drywall system shall be tested to SS 492:2001, with an overall impact resistance
performance of Severe Duty rating for strength and robustness test. The drywall panel should
have a minimum thickness of 15mm and density of 940 kg/m3, or 19mm and density of 880
kg/m3. The overall maximum thickness of the drywall system should be about 105mm. Density
and wall thickness should be accompanied by test certificate.
(b) Acoustic performance of drywall system shall be tested to ASTM E90, with an airborne sound
transmission loss rating of at least STC 45.
(c) Steel partition frame for track and stud shall be made of hot-dipped galvanized steel.
Galvanized steel should have a coating grade of at least 150g/m2 zinc. Coating grade should
be accompanied by test certificate.
(d) Surface water absorption and total water absorption of drywall panel shall be tested according
to BS EN 520, with an absorption amount of less than 5% weight.
(e) Moisture movement of the drywall panel shall be tested according to ASTM C1185, with moisture
resistant core. Dimensional change should be less than 0.1%.
35.5 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
The contractor shall provide a copy of drywall renovation guide to every unit. The renovation guide shall
be from the drywall manufacturer.
Samples of anchoring screws capable of withstanding point load of 3kg, 12kg & 25kg respectively shall
be provided to every unit. 6 numbers of anchoring screws and cavity anchors shall be provided for each
of the point load mentioned. 50 numbers of nylon wall plug, of suitable length for the drywall panel
installed, shall be provided.
Samples of the renovation guide, anchoring screws and cavity anchors shall be packaged together and
labelled. The packaging and labelling shall be approved by the SO Rep and placed beside the spare
tiles provided.
BLDG17/S35.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 35-3
Section 36/.....
BLDG17/S35.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-1
SECTION 36
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY,
WATER, GAS AND OTHER PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
36.1 WORKS BY REGISTERED PLUMBER AND LICENSED WATER SERVICE PLUMBER
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and completing the same in place all at the Contractor's own cost and expense.
Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes, regulations or standards,
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
All sanitary, water and gas installation Works shall be carried out by a Registered Plumber(LP)
registered under the Singapore Plumbing Society(SPS), and Licensed Water Service Plumber (LWSP)
and Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) respectively and shall comply with all current Code-of-
Practices, Bye-Laws, Requirements and Regulations of the relevant Authorities.
36.2 SANITARY AND WATER SUPPLY
Sanitary and water installation, drain lines, inspection chambers, waste sumps and water supply
services shall be provided by the Contractor unless specified otherwise. Allow for leaving holes for pipes
and traps as shown in the Structural Drawings.
36.2.1 TIMBER MOCK-UPS
Within three months after the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall erect timber mock-
up for toilet, kitchen, air-con ledge and service yard on site for inspection and approval of the SO rep.
These timber mock ups shall have the provision of all sanitary pipes and fixtures position, marking of
water supply pipes layout, power points and switches locations, electrical water heater socket locations
and provision of UPVC entry pipe for water supply using gas water heater. Actual UPVC sanitary pipes,
wash basin and pedestal pan; and mock-up of ceiling duct, doors, vanity top (if any) and clothes drying
racks shall be installed with respect to the architectural and structural. Markings of beams, columns,
wall tiles, floor tiles, window layout shall also be shown.
One timber mock up is required for each flat type. All costs and expenses incurred for the erection of
the timber mock up and subsequent removal of these mock up shall be deemed to be included in the
Contract by the Contractor.
The timber mock-ups must be built accurately to facilitate resolution of the following common issues:
(a) floor waste/trap not obstructed by structural beam;

(b) lighting points not obstructed by ceiling-mounted clothes drying rack;
(c) use of external clothes drying rack not hindered by air-con ledge;
(d) sufficient clearance for access to the air-con ledge for installation and maintenance of the air-
con compressors;
(e) toilet vent and other fittings do not obstruct future installation of shower screen; and
(f) any other practical considerations.
36.3 WATER CONNECTION UNDER APRON
Allow for the Public Utilities Board's water connection under the concrete apron or the first storey slab
within the building to be completed before concreting the apron and the floor slab.
36.4 GAS PIPE THROUGH RC BEAM
Provide and install UPVC pipe sleeves through RC beam as shown in the Drawings for the provision of
gas pipes. In the event that the gas pipe is not to be installed, the UPVC sleeves shall be capped with
UPVC capping all as shown in the Drawings.
BLDG17/S36.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-2
36.5 CERTIFICATE FROM WATER RECLAMATION (NETWORK) DEPARTMENT, PUB
Apply in writing to Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for final inspection of the sanitary
installation and obtain the final approval before the Expiry of the Time for Completion.
On completion of the whole of the installation Works, obtain a Certificate from Water Reclamation
(Network) Department, PUB certifying that the work has been carried out complying fully with their
Regulations and Requirements before the Final Payment can be released.
Failure by the Contractor to apply for such inspection on time, shall render him liable for damages or
loss suffered by the Employer due to the delay in approving the sanitary installation by PUB, arising out
of or in connection with the Contractor's failure to apply for such inspection on time. Notwithstanding
the above, the SO Rep shall exercise its rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose
a charge against the Contractor.
36.6 INSPECT DRAWINGS AND MAKE ALLOWANCE
Examine carefully all Drawings, including the Civil and Structural Drawings and ascertain all probable
obstructions such as pile caps, foundations, beams footings, etc. which may necessitate diversions of
drain lines, inspection chamber positions and other fittings, from the lines and positions shown in the
Drawings. Allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses arising from necessary additional
lengths of drain pipes, bends, etc which are required to cater for such adjustments in alignment and
running of drain lines, inspection chambers, other fittings, etc. No claims for extras shall be entertained
by the SO Rep for non-compliance or misinterpretation of this Clause by the Contractor.
36.7 DIAMETER OF PIPES
Unless otherwise stated, the sizes of copper, stainless steel, ductile iron and UPVC pipes shall mean
their nominal sizes.
36.8 CONTRACTOR TO GIVE NOTICES AND SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL
Submit all necessary application forms, drawings and give all notices required in connection with the
Works.
Submit sanitary drawings, water service drawings and gas installation drawings with application forms
to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB; and City
Gas respectively for approval not later than 14 days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
A copy of the application shall be sent to the SO Rep for information.
36.9 EXCAVATE TRENCHES AND REMOVE EXCESS EARTH
Excavate all trenches and pits for drain-lines and inspection chambers as shown. The soil condition
shall be inspected by the SO Rep. After drain-lines have been tested and approved by the SO Rep,
backfill the soil, properly consolidated to original levels and cart away surplus earth promptly and in any
case not later than 7 days from the date of instruction by the SO Rep. Where the ground is soft, provide
hardcore, bakau piling etc to drain-lines, inspection chambers/waste sumps and unless specified in the
Contract, such works shall be treated as a variation under the Contract.
BLDG17/S36.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-3
36.10 WORK THROUGH CONCRETE STRUCTURE
Every care shall be taken in drilling, coring holes through concrete structure so as not to disrupt the
concrete and steel. Care shall also be taken in enlarging holes to the diameters and positions as
required without damaging the surrounding area. Seek approval from the SO Rep before carrying out
such Works.
Where, in the opinion of the SO Rep, concrete structure has been affected or unnecessarily disrupted
or damaged, reinstate at the contractor's own and expense the affected parts of structure to the
36.11 DRILLING OR CORING ON FINISHED AREAS
Where drilling or coring of holes are to be carried out on areas where tiles, or other types of finishing
had been completed, take all precaution and care to ensure that damage is minimised. In the event of
any damage, make good the damage to the satisfaction of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and
expense.
36.12 RESERVED
36.13 PATCHING UP
Patch up hacked portions and drilled holes of structure with non-shrink cementitious grout of a similar
or higher grade than the surrounding concrete, after installation of the services by the contractor or
other contractors and with workmanship at least equal to that of the surrounding parts. Where pipes
penetrate floor or roof slab, brush away loose particles on concrete and pipe. Brush on one coat neat,
thick cement grout immediately before patching. Any leakages through such patching shall be made
good by the Contractor.
All patching up work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
36.14 TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION
Test the whole sanitary and water installation as specified hereunder.
36.14.1 Water Test
As soon as PUB water supply is available, carry out water test to the following items, in accordance
with the procedure described below and complete the water test, including making good all Defect,
within 10 days from the date PUB water supply is available :
(a) Water supply pipe;

(b) Direct supply pipe;
(c) Joints between floor slab and floor trap in bathrooms and kitchens and joints
between branching-off for WCs and floor slab;
(d) Water pumping Plant.
BLDG17/S36.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-4
36.14 TESTING OF WATER AND SANITARY INSTALLATION (CONT’D)
36.14.2 Procedure Of Water Test
(a) Water Supply Pipe
Test all water supply pipes for leaks.
(b) Direct Supply Pipe
Where required, apply to PUB and pay all fees for installing meters to the lower floors with direct
water supply for the purpose of testing for leaks in the pipe.
(c) Floor Traps
The gratings to the floor traps in bathrooms and kitchens shall be blocked temporarily with
polythene sheets or by other suitable means and the floor flooded with about 10mm depth of
water above the gratings. The amount of water shall be maintained for about 2 hours,
replenished when necessary, during which the underside of the floor slab shall be checked for
signs of leaks. Towards the end of this test, the water shall be allowed to drain off. During this
process there shall be no sign of chokage and leakage in the system. The water test shall be
carried out 3 days after the laying of floor finishes.
(d) Water Pumping Plant
Arrange with the SO Rep for test on the whole pumping Plant including transfer pump and
booster pump for signs of leak and proper performance of the pumps. Rectify all the Defect
found during the inspection immediately so that a re-inspection can be carried out. Arrange for
the test to be carried out not later than four weeks before the buildings are handed over to the
Employer. Provide electricity for operating the pumps, provide temporary piping, connections,
fittings and accessories necessary for the test to be carried out.
36.14.3 Hydrostatic Test Of Underground Mains
Arrange for hydrostatic test of all underground ductile iron pipes after PUB bulk meter according to CP
48.
After laying, jointing and anchoring of the main and before any backfilling or concreting, charge the
piping system slowly and carefully with potable water so that all air is expelled. Test the mains under
pressure.
Before testing the main, fit all open ends of the main with blank flange and secure them with struts or
otherwise to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main. Apply a test pressure of 125m head
or the maximum working pressure plus 50% whichever is the greater, by means of manually operated
test pump or by power-driven test pump.
Maintain the test pressure by the pump for 1 hour and check the main for any leakage. General leakage
shall not exceed 2 litres per cm of pipe diameter per km of pipe per 100m head per 24 hours.
Notwithstanding the above, rectify all visual leaks detected.
36.14.4 Sterilisation Of Underground Water Distribution Mains
Sterilisation of underground distribution water mains shall be carried out in accordance with CP 48
"Code of Practice for Water Services" and to the requirements of PUB.
The water samples shall be taken for bacteriological and chemical testing by a PSB or SAC accredited
laboratory.
Two days after taking such samples, flush the underground distribution mains and further water samples
shall be taken for testing as described in the foregoing requirements. Provide the water examination
and analysis report to the SO Rep and the result of water analysis shall be within the acceptance limits
for human consumption. The underground distribution mains shall only be commissioned after two
consecutive tests are satisfactory, otherwise the sterilisation procedure shall be repeated until such
requirements are met.
BLDG17/S36.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-5
36.15 WATER FITTINGS
All water fittings shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service
installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS:CP 48.
36.15.2 Marking Of Information
All water fittings shall be legibly marked with the following :
(a) Manufacturer's identification mark, either on the body or plate;

(b) Marking of appropriate national standards, eg. BS EN 545:1995;
(c) Nominal size and direction of flow;
(d) Colour codes for hot and cold water supply.
36.15.3 Non-Metallic Material
All non-metallic material in contact with water shall comply with SS 375:2001 and valves with non-
metallic seat washers shall also comply with BS 3457:1973.
36.15.4 Metallic Material
All metallic material in contact with water shall comply with the test on "Extraction of Metals - App H" of
AS/NZS 4020:1999.
36.15.5 Copper Alloy Water Fittings
All copper alloy water fittings shall be of gunmetal, or bronze or DZR brass materials only. Gunmetal or
bronze water fittings shall comply with BS EN1982:1999. Water fittings of the Dezincification Resistant
(DZR) type shall comply with the tests on "Composition" and "Resistance to dezincification" of
BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional
marking of "DZR" or "CR".
36.15.6 Water Fittings With Elastomeric Seals
All water fittings with elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipeline shall comply with SS
270:1996.
36.16 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
All structural concrete shall be as specified in Section 4 "Structural Concrete" including all clauses and
BLDG17/S36.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 36-6
36.17 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR CONCEALED WATER PIPES,

EXPOSED GAS PIPE INSIDE UNIT AND ALL OTHER MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all water and gas pipe routes,
legends and all other related mechanical works (Sanitary/Water/Gas Installations) based on actual site
installations for the production of as-built drawings.
36.18 SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES)
AT BUILDING ROOFTOP
The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M
& E service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of
the service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat
arrangement to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical and
statutory requirements.
The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval before
installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly manner, and
the access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop is not
obstructed by service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top shall be
supervised and coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction, the
contractor is to provide chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the
Drawings. The platform shall be installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such
a way as not to pose danger to the maintenance workmen.
36.19 AIR-CON PIPE SLEEVE
Provide and install UPVC pipe sleeves in RC wall next to air-con ledge. The pipe sleeve shall be
complete with end cap on both sides and labelled with “OPENING FOR AIRCON PIPES” with a
removable sticker. The drawing on pipe sleeve shall serve as a guide. The actual profile and fastenings
of pipe sleeve shall be to manufacturer’s details. Contractor shall submit drawings and sample of pipe
sleeve to SO Rep for approval.
36.20 PIPE SLEEVE FOR WATER RECYCLING FROM WASHING MACHINE
Provide and install a 50mm diameter UPVC pipe sleeve in the wall between the service yard and
common bathroom. The pipe sleeve shall be complete with threaded end cap on both sides. The
drawing on pipe sleeve shall serve as a guide. Contractor shall submit drawings and sample of pipe
sleeve to SO Rep for approval.
Section 37/.....
BLDG17/S36.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-1
SECTION 37
SANITARY INSTALLATION
37.1 SCHEDULE OF UPVC PIPES FOR FITTINGS FOR SANITARY INSTALLATION
Unless specified otherwise, all UPVC pipes and fittings provided for sanitary installations shall be in
accordance with the following schedule:
Types Of Pipe/Fitting
Sanitary Installation ( SS : Singapore Standard )
(Including Waste/Rain Water Remarks
Down-Pipe System) SS 141
SS 213 SS 272
Class D
Underground Sanitary Drainage *

System-Main/Branch Drain Lines
Above Ground Sanitary Plumbing

System (Soil/Waste to I/C) :
(a) All except Void Decks * Anti-Mosquitoes
Devices, Socket
Sleeves and Pipe
Skirtings to be used.
(b) Void decks SS 213/SS 141
- Discharge stacks * Adaptor to be used.
- Discharge pipes & fittings *
Waste/Rain Water Down-Pipe

System (RWDP) :
(a) 200 diameter pipes for RWDP *
Roof Outlet to be used.
system (White)
(b) Underground pipes/fittings Rectangular Section
for 200 diameter pipes (RWDP) Fittings to be used.
(c) Above ground pipes/fittings *

connected to 200 diameter
RWDP system
(d) 50, 80, 100 & 150 diameter
waste discharge (balcony, lift
lobby, etc) pipes/fittings :
i. Above ground except void *

decks and MSCPs
ii. Void decks and MSCPs SS 213/SS141 Adaptor
- Down pipes * to be used.
- Discharge pipes/fittings *
- Underground pipes/fittings *
*Denotes the specified pipes/fittings.
37.2 MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES
Unless otherwise stated, all pipes for main and branch lines shall be UPVC conforming to SS 272 and
free from breakage, distortions or cracks and of sizes specified in Clause 37.6 "Drain Sizes".
All drain-lines shall be laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm
thick grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown
in the Drawings unless otherwise stated.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-2
37.2 MAIN AND BRANCH DRAIN LINES (CONT'D)
All drain-lines under roads and carparks shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron pipes complying with
BS EN 598 and laid on grade 30 concrete bed at least 150mm thick, fully haunched with 150mm thick
grade 30 concrete all round and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved as shown in the
Drawings unless otherwise stated. Jointing of pipes of different materials in branch drain- lines or in
the continuous length of main drain-lines in between two inspection chambers shall not be allowed
unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. The section of main drain lines under roads and carparks
shall be constructed under the supervision of the SO Rep and the Contractor shall arrange for the
inspection by and approval of the SO Rep before covering up.
All drain lines in basement carparks shall be of ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 598 and
approved by the SO Rep. Where individual connections of discharge stacks to the inspection chamber
are impracticable, a common pipe of adequate size to serve the main discharge stack and a common
pipe to serve the secondary discharge stack may be provided to suit the connection to the inspection
chamber subject to approval of the relevant authorities.
All drain-lines for eating establishments such as eating houses, restaurants, food stalls, etc shall be
constructed with cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598 . The floor traps for the eating
establishments shall be of stoneware type or cast iron.
The trenches for main and branch drain-lines shall be backfilled with quarry dust and finished as shown
in the Drawings.
37.3 GRADIENT FOR DRAIN-LINES
Unless otherwise stated or approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, the
gradient of drain-lines shall be as follows :
(a) Branch Drain-Lines
Diameter of Branch Drain-Lines Maximum Gradient

Allowable Gradient
Upstream at
UPVC Ductile Iron in other cases
Back Drop Tumbling Bay
110mm 110mm - 1 in 20 to 1 in 60
160mm 150mm 1 in 70 1 in 30 to 1 in 90
(b) Main Drain-Lines
Diameter of Main Drain-Lines Maximum Gradient

Allowable Gradient
Upstream of
UPVC Ductile Iron in other cases
Back Drop/Tumbling Bay
160mm 150mm 1 in 70 1 in 30 to 1 in 90
250mm 250mm 1 in 90 1 in 49 to 1 in 150
37.4 JOINTS FOR DRAIN-LINE PIPES
Only flexible jointed pipes shall be used for drain line pipes.
37.5 JUNCTIONS IN DRAINS
All junctions between drains shall be of curved junctions or obtuse angled junctions made at sides of
pipes.
37.6 DRAIN SIZES
All drain branches from building to inspection chamber shall be 160mm diameter pipes or as shown in
Drawings. Main drain-lines shall be 160mm diameter UPVC pipes to SS 272:1983 unless specified
otherwise.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-3
37.7 WATER TEST FOR DRAIN-LINES
Water test all drainlines before they are surrounded and covered. Drainlines shall be perfectly watertight
and it is essential that every length of pipes be tested when completed with water before haunchings
and backfilling. For water test, the drainline shall be subjected to a pressure of 1.2 metre head of water
and such pressure shall be maintained for half an hour without leakage in excess of 1.0 litre for each
length of drainline between the inspection chambers. The fact that the pipes have been tested shall
not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to locate any leak and make good the section, including
re-excavation, timbering, backfilling and making good.
37.8 BEDDING AND HAUNCHING TO BRANCH AND MAIN DRAIN-LINE
The pipes which have been tested and found satisfactory shall be bedded and haunched with grade 30
concrete to details as shown in Drawings. Provide break joints at pipe joints not greater than 6m
intervals and at the first pipe joint next to inspection chamber, all to the requirements of the Water
Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
Carry out all Works in accordance with the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB.
37.9 BREAKING UP ROADS AND CARPARKS FOR LAYING OF DRAIN-LINES
The Contractor shall provide for breaking up roads and carparks for laying of drain-lines etc. and
reinstatement of damages all to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
37.10 INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND DRAIN LINES
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum for all Sanitary Works required under the Contract
comprising either one or both of the following systems :
(a) suspended from building and / or ;

(b) supported on piling
37.10.2 Suspended From The Buildings
Where the Inspection Chambers and main drain lines are required to be suspended from the building,
it shall be constructed according to the details as shown in the Drawings.
37.10.3 Supported On Piling
Where piles are required to support the Inspection Chambers and drain-lines as shown in the Drawings,
the Contractor shall ascertain the pile penetration lengths required and allow in the Contract Sum for
all costs and expenses incurred on the piling work. The contractor shall plan and incorporate the
duration required for the piling work into the Programme for the Works or revised Programme, if any,
for the submission to the SO Rep for approval, as required under the contract.
In ascertaining the pile penetration lengths, the Contractor may, if he wishes, refer to the Soil
Investigation Report available from the Employer. However, the Contractor shall note that the Soil
Investigation Report does not form part of the Contract or be taken into consideration in the
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall also take note that all the
information in the Soil Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil conditions to be
encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable for the accuracy, adequacy or
completeness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report. The Contractor shall at his own cost,
ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall conduct his own site investigations and allow in the
Contract Sum for all costs and expenses whatsoever arising from and/or out of an inaccuracy,
inadequacy or incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-4
37.10 INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND DRAIN LINES (CONT’D)
37.10.3 Supported On Piling (Cont'd)
Notwithstanding the pile penetration lengths ascertained by the Contractor, there shall be no adjustment
to the Contract Sum for any difference in pile penetration lengths between those actually provided at
the Site and those ascertained by the Contractor. However, if for whatever causes any pile cannot be
driven into the ground or is not provided at all, omission by way of variation to the Contract shall be
effected. For the purpose of computing the value of such omission, the penetration length of each pile
shall be deemed to be 8.0m.
37.10.4 Requirements For Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles To Inspection Chambers And Drain Lines
Where precast reinforced concrete piles to inspection chambers and drainlines are included in the
Works, the piles provided shall be in accordance with Clause 2.2 "Precast Reinforced Concrete Piling
Works".
37.10.5 Inspection Chamber
Construct inspection chambers to details and positions as shown in the Drawings. All inspection
chambers/manhole covers and frames shall comply with the general requirement of SS 30. Heavy duty
cast iron frames and covers (Grade A) shall be used in driveways and carparks and other areas as
Form open branch/main channels in inspection chambers with half-round vitrified clay purposed made
or cut channels with benching haunched up to the walls of inspection chambers in granolithic concrete
1:1:1 mix and trowel to smooth finish to fall towards the channel. The first inspection chamber of the
drainage system shall have a minimum depth of 1070mm from surface level to invert level unless
otherwise specified. Construct all walls and slabs of inspection chambers with grade 30 reinforced
concrete as shown in the Drawings and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB. Plaster the internal walls with approximately 13mm thick 1:2 cement mortar and
trowel to a smooth finish.
Connect the invert of the branch drain-line entering the inspection chamber above the horizontal
diameter of the main channels. Grade C Light Duty covers shall be complete with stainless steel handles
as shown in the Drawings and approved by the SO Rep.
37.11 CONCEALMENT OF SANITARY STACKS, DISCHARGE PIPES AND FITTINGS
All sanitary stacks shall be fully housed within masonry ducts/pre-cast concrete (stack ducts). Leakage
tests to all sanitary stacks, discharge pipes and fittings shall be completed before they are fully
concealed in the stack ducts and ceiling ducts.
All sanitary pipes and fittings at the ceiling shall be fully concealed by ceiling duct of 9mm thick calcium
silicate boards, fixed on galvanised steel angle frames as shown in the Drawings. All screws including
anchor bolts shall be of AISI grade 304 stainless steel. Board joints shall be taped with paper tape and
gypsum compound used to fill screw holes and board joints on the calcium silicate, and this shall be
sanded smooth and not visible after painting. The completed boards shall be finished with base coating
and 2 layers of emulsion paint. Lighting diffusers shall be 15mm x 15mm x 10mm thick egg crate white
plastic type in powder coated aluminium frames. Detailed workshop drawings showing the type of
boards and fixing methods, including access panels and lighting diffusers, shall be submitted to the SO
Rep for approval prior to their installations
The calcium silicate boards shall comply with the following physical properties :
Physical Properties Requirements

Dry density 910 kg per m3, ±10%
Weight 9.5 kg per m2, ±15%
Flexural strength across grain 10 MN per m2
Flexural strength along grain 6 MN per m2
Moisture movement from normal to saturated 0.15%
Nominal moisture content-in situ 3 to 5%
Thermal conductivity 0.161 W/mk
Alkalinity 7 to 10 pH value
The Contractor shall submit a test report showing compliance with the requirements of the physical
properties specified to the SO Rep for evaluation.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-5
37.12 UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR SOIL, WASTE AND VENT APPLICATIONS
(ABOVE GROUND)
37.12.1 General
All unplasticized PVC pipes, fittings and accessories for soil, waste and vent application above ground
shall comply with the requirements of SS 213 and its latest amendments. However, UPVC soil and
waste stack in the void deck/play area shall be UPVC pipes to the requirements of SS 141 and as
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth, and reasonably
free from grooving and other Defect that would impair their performance in service.
Provide pipe in standard lengths of 6m + 50mm - 0mm. The pipe shall be provided with ends within
±2 degrees of being normal to the main axis of the pipe, free from chips, rough edges and with sharp
edges removed.
37.12.2 Dimensions Of Soil, Waste And Vent Pipes To SS 213
Outside Diameter
Nominal Wall Thickness
Mean Diameter De Incl Ovality D
Size
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
32 36.2 36.5 36.1 36.6 2.1 2.4

40 42.8 43.1 42.7 43.2 2.3 2.6
50 55.7 56.0 55.5 56.2 2.4 2.7
65 68.7 69.1 68.5 69.3 2.7 3.1
80 82.3 82.7 82.1 83.0 3.0 3.5
100 110.0 110.4 109.6 110.8 3.2 3.6
125 140.0 140.4 139.5 140.4 3.7 4.2
150 160.0 160.5 159.5 161.1 4.0 4.5
Note : (i) De = mean outside diameter

(ii) D = any measured diameter
37.12.3 Minimum Socket Dimension To SS 213
The minimum socket dimension for 3m length UPVC pipe shall be as follows :
Nominal pipe size in mm Minimum socket dimension in mm
32 19
40 21
50 23
65 25
80 29
100 34
125 42
150 45
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-6
(ABOVE GROUND) (CONT’D)
37.12.4 Dimension And Colour Of The Waste And Soil Stack To SS 141 Class D
Wall Thickness
Nominal Average Outside Diameter
Average Value Individual Value
Size
Minimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
80 88.7 89.1 5.3 4.6 5.3

100 114.1 114.5 6.8 6.0 6.9
155 168.0 168.5 9.9 8.8 10.2
All pipes shall be indelibly marked and imprinted longitudinally at interval of not greater than 3m. The
markings shall show the following :
(a) Manufacturer's name and/or trade mark.

(b) the nominal size.
(c) SS 141:1976 Class `D'
The marking of the pipe shall be in accordance with SS 141.
37.12.5 Adaptor To Couple The Fitting (To SS 213) And UPVC Pipes (To SS 141)
An adaptor shall be used to couple the fitting to SS 213 and its latest amendment (Single
junction/single junction with inspection eye) and UPVC pipe to SS 141 to be installed at the void deck.
The shape of the adaptor shall comply with the design as shown in the Drawings. The strength,
dimensional tolerance and thickness of the adaptor shall comply with the standards and specifications
laid down in SS 213 (except that the dimensional tolerance for the socket of the adaptor shall comply
with SS 174). Obtain prior approval from the SO Rep before use. Random samples may be chosen
for testing at a SAC accredited laboratory.
37.12.6 Swept Junction Fitting
Use only swept junction fittings (single or double cross junction) with 50mm minimum root radius in
all sanitary installation unless otherwise stated.
(a) General
All soil, waste and vent pipes used shall be unplasticized PVC pipes complying with SS 213
or SS 141 and all tests as required by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. All
jointing and fixing requirements shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Provide main discharge stack of 150mm diameter and secondary discharge stack of 100mm
diameter as shown in the Drawings. Install double 45 degree bends to SS 272 at the base of
the discharge stacks in accordance with the Drawings.
Install cross ventilating pipes to the required size between the main and the secondary
discharge stack at the specified locations as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Drawings or required by PUB, anti-syphonage pipes connecting the appliances
to the discharge stack are not necessary.
(b) Inspection Openings, Connectors And Fittings
All inspection openings shall be screw and washer type with proper adaptors where necessary.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-7
37.12.7 Installation (Cont'd)
(c) Floor Traps
Unless as required otherwise, fit all floor traps with 150mm square body, circular hinged UPVC
gratings with frames having a 30mm deep collar protruding below to fit into the opening of the
floor traps. The gratings shall comply with SS 213 and complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device
approved by NEA.
The gratings for floor traps shall be fixed at 5mm below the graded floor level and as shown in
the Drawings.
(d) Method Of Fixing
The method of fixing UPVC pipes shall be as follows:
(i) All pipes shall be cut square with the edge chamfered 15 degrees using approved pipe
cutting tools prior to its installation. The pipe cutting tool shall be able to produce square
cut and 15 degree chamfer in one continuous operation. The pipe cutting tools shall be
portable and able to cut pipes of all sizes.
(ii) Clean the pipe ends and sockets in pipes or fittings with cleaning fluid or methylated
spirit and allow them to dry.
(iii) Mark the pipes and fittings with a marker at a distance to the depth of the socket in the
fittings or to the depth of the socket formed in pipes.
(iv) Coat all pipe ends and the internal faces of sockets fully with solvent cement and insert
the pipe into the socket immediately. The socket edge of the fittings must touch the
marking at the pipes. Remove surplus solvent cement from the socket using a dry cloth.
(v) After jointing, hold the joint firmly for a period of 30 seconds and do not disturb it for at
least 5 minutes.
(vi) All joints shall be jointed with sockets recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In
situations where a pipe and socket joint is not possible, a coupling or an adaptor shall
be used.
(vii) No socket belling shall be allowed when jointing UPVC pipes.
(viii) The type of solvent used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
For the jointing of UPVC pipes to other materials, the bonding agent used shall be those
recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the SO Rep.
Carry out all fixing work in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
(e) Solvent Cement For Jointing UPVC Pipes And Fittings
Solvent cement used for jointing UPVC pipes and fittings shall be approved by the SO Rep
and comply with BS 4346:Part 3. The solvent cement shall be in light approved colour to
enable visual inspection. The Contractor shall submit a test report of the solvent cement to be
used on the Site for approval by the SO Rep before the commencement of the sanitary and
water installation Works.
The tests shall be carried out by an SAC accredited testing laboratory and shall include:
(i) Shear Strength;

(ii) Film Properties;
(iii) Long-term Hydrostatic Pressure.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-8
(f) W.C. Joint
Place rubber seal over the spigot of the W.C. outlet with the open and facing towards the pan.
Lubricate the outer surface of the seal and insert pan spigot complete with seal into connector
socket. Snap plastic cover over rim of connector socket.
Use pan collar connectors in cases where P-traps are utilised. Apply silicone sealant to groove
and recess at pan collar and cover to prevent stagnation of water at groove and recess.
(g) Fixing Of Bosses
Use bosses for jointing waste and vent pipe into the soil stack. Use bosses for jointing of
waste pipe from basin or kitchen sink to the hopper of floor waste or floor trap. Cut the
appropriate sized hole in the position required using special hole cutters such as mechanised
drill which is attached to a circular hole-saw by a mandrill.
Apply solvent weld cement and clean mating surfaces of the boss and pipe.
Insert the inner portion of the boss from inside the pipe with the outer portion located. Apply
and tighten the toggle clamp and leave it in position for fifteen minutes.
When fixing into the stack, ensure that the 92½ degree marks on both parts are upper-most.
Ensure that the angles marked on the inner and outer portions of the boss coincide and that
the boss is assembled in the correct sequence to give an angle of fall to the stack pipe.
(h) Access Doors
Access doors may be fitted to pipe or straight portion of branches. Mark positions of holes
with template and cut the holes with a fine tooth keyhole saw.
Clean the edges of the hole before inserting the access door. The inner portion of the access
door shall be set in the hole to locate the unit before it is tightened into position.
(i) Weathering
Where pipes penetrate through either flat or sloping roofs, the normal type of approved
weathering material shall be used. Where necessary, fix an approved weathering apron in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as shown in the Drawings.
(j) UPVC Vent Cowl
Clean the mating surfaces of the pipe fitting before assembling the unit in accordance with
normal solvent weld cement procedure.
(k) Provision For Thermal Movement
In cases where the piping is likely to be subjected to any large variations in temperature and
to prevent the slightest movement, use a seal/sleeve ring joint between fixed joints.
(l) Support Distances Of UPVC Pipe Lines
Horizontal pipes which exceed 1400mm in length shall be supported with PVC coated mild
steel hangers. Vertical pipes passing from floor to floor shall be supported with PP collars
attached to the pipes as shown in the Drawings. The spacing of the hangers and collars shall
not exceed 1400mm for horizontal pipes and 1800mm for vertical pipes.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-9
(m) Bonding Keys To Concrete Slab
Provide bonding keys to concrete floor slab where UPVC pipes go through. Roughen the
whole surface of the UPVC pipe which is in contact with the floor slab to form keys. Apply thin
coat of solvent cement and sprinkle fine sand to the whole area of the roughened surface
before the solvent cement sets.
Use solvent welded cement method for all jointing assemblies. Carry out all fixing work in strict
accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions.
Use UPVC pipes to SS 213 where the stacks continue above roof level. Use UPVC pipes to
SS 141 where the stacks continue below the ceiling of the open 1st storey.
37.12.8 UPVC Pipes And Fittings For UPVC Sanitary System - Connection and Inspection System
The Contractor shall incorporate the easy check double locking system or other connection system
to the UPVC sanitary system to ensure that the UPVC pipes and fittings are fully overlapped to
minimise leakage at the joints. The Contractor shall arrange for the inspection of all the joints between
the UPVC pipes and the fittings after the installation of the completed system to prove that all the
joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings are fully overlapped. The pipe joint system shall
include:
(a) The connection of the pipes and fittings in such a way that the soil and waste will flow smoothly
from the outlet to the fittings, through the horizontal branches and vertical stacks to the main
line. The system shall not allow any possibility of back flow, and stagnation of fluid at the joints
due to insufficient overlapping of UPVC pipes and fittings.
(b) The overlapped portion at the joints between the UPVC pipes and the fittings shall be exposed
and can be inspected visually after the installation of the system. The Contractor shall ensure
that full overlap between UPVC pipes and fittings is achieved. In the event that the UPVC pipes
and fittings are not overlapped sufficiently, the Contractor shall dismantle the affected portion
of the system and re-installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(c) Big access openings shall be provided (at least 75 mm diameter) to the fittings (including tees,
cross tees and elbows) to facilitate the easy clearance of the chokage. The access opening
shall be capped with UPVC screw cap with proper rubber seal and PP insert to ensure water
and air tightness at all time.
The Contractor shall submit a full set of shop drawings, samples and mini-mock up, including
sectional view to demonstrate the above requirements to the satisfaction of the SO Rep prior to the
installation of the UPVC sanitary system on the Site.
The Contractor shall also ensure that their UPVC fitting manufacturer is licensed to use the patented
design. The contractor may propose alternative connection system in lieu of the patented design.
37.13 UPVC DOUBLE 45° BEND
Provide and fix 150mm diameter UPVC double 45 degree bends to SS 272 encased in 150mm thick
grade 30 concrete and reinforced with a layer of BRC A10 or other approved at the base of each
discharge stack below ground level.
If the discharge stack is of 100mm diameter, use a 150mm x 100mm UPVC taper piece to SS 213 at
above the ground level to connect the 100mm diameter stack to the 150mm single junction fitting with
inspection eye to SS 213.
Provide single junction fitting with inspection eye to discharge stack at 150mm above the finished
ground floor level.
Secure screw down cap of the inspection eye of the single junction fitting with 2 no. of brass screws.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-10
37.14 UPVC GULLIES AND UPVC FLOOR WASTES/TRAPS WITH UPVC GRATING TO ALL GROUND
FLOOR FACILITIES INCLUDING LINK BUILDING AND MSCP
Where the ground floor wastes discharge into floor trap or apron gully at the ground floor as shown in
the Drawings, the gullies shall be 100mm diameter UPVC fitting with 150mm square UPVC grating and
set on and encased in concrete of minimum 150mm thick and connected to drains discharging into
inspection chambers. The gratings for floor wastes/traps and gully traps shall be of approved UPVC
150mm square top body with screw-in round grating cover and to the requirements of the Water
Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB; HDB; and complying with SS 213.
The grating over floor trap and gully trap shall be complete with an Anti-Mosquito Device approved by
the NEA.
37.15 GULLY AND DEEP SEAL TRAP
All floor traps to upper floors shall be deep seal traps minimum 100mm diameter with 75mm deep seal
all to SS 213 and to the requirements of the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB.
No gully or floor traps shall be deeper than 600mm from the top of grating.
37.16 RESERVED
37.17 RESERVED
37.18 RESERVED
37.19 WATER SUPPLY PIPE AND WASTE OUTLETS FOR SINK
The Contractor shall fix and terminate the water supply pipe to sink and provide the waste outlets for
sink at positions and to details all as shown in the Drawings.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-11
37.20 LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN
37.20.1 Schedule Of Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin
Provide and install the following :
Low Capacity Rectangular Shaped Vitreous

WC Suite China Wash Basin (+)
Accommodation
Location
Type White or other colour White or other colour
as chosen by the basin as chosen by the
Architect # Architect #
*
Common
* (Nominal size: Approximately
Bathroom/WC
500 x 400 mm)
5 Room
*
Attached
Bathroom/WC
600 x 450 mm)
*
Common
Bathroom/WC
3-Room and/or 4- 500 x 400 mm)
Room *
Attached
Bathroom/WC
600 x 450 mm)
*Denotes the specified type.
# The colour shall be decided by the Architect .

The Contractor shall provide the colour range specified for selection and approval by the Architect .
(+) Alternative choice of rectangular shaped vitreous china wash basin shall be decided by the
Architect and SO Rep.
The WC suite and wash basin shall be of the same brand and approved as a set by the HDB.
37.20.2 Rectangular Shaped Vitreous China Wash Basin
Unless specified otherwise, the Vitreous China Wash Basins provided shall be approved models listed
in the HDB Material List.
Provide and install rectangular shaped wash basin as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule Of Low
Capacity WC Suite And Wash Basin". The wash basins with non-corrosive wall bracket fixings shall
comply with SS 42, complete with 15mm chrome plated brass mixer tap and handle conforming to
requirements in Clause 37.20.4 “Single Lever Basin Mixer and Accessories”, brackets, 1.2mm thick
(min.) chrome plated brass pop-up waste assembly and 32mm approved UPVC bottle trap with all
necessary washers, seals and nuts. The colour of the wash basin shall be decided by the SO Rep as
specified in the foregoing subclause.
The mixer tap shall be completed with the necessary nut and two rubber washers. Fix and secure the
mixer tap firmly on the wash basin. Unless specified otherwise, the waste pipe shall be 40mm diameter
UPVC pipe.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-12
37.20 LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN (CONT’D)
37.20.3 Low Capacity Eco Pedestal WC Suite
(a) Scope
Unless specified otherwise, the Low Capacity Eco Pedestal WC Suites provided shall be
approved models listed in the HDB Material List. Provide and install 2-tick (PUB’s Water
Efficiency Labelling Scheme) close-coupled low capacity eco pedestal WC suite to all the
common and attached bathrooms of all flat types as specified in subclause 37.20.1 "Schedule of
Low Capacity WC Suite and Wash Basin" and other locations as shown.
The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern,
internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the
necessary accessories needed for the proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to
the approval of HDB and also to conform with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary
Appliances", SS574 “Dual flush low capacity water closet (WC) up to 4.5/3.0 litres capacity”.
2-tick (PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme) close-coupled low capacity WC suite shall be
operated with full flush capacity set close to 4 litres with S-trap or P-trap outlet as shown in the
Drawings. The soft-closing rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall
conform to SS 16:1985 "WC Seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The coloured plastic seat
and cover shall match the profile of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The seat and cover
shall have a soft-closing mechanism that lowers the toilet seat gently and quietly.
The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts and fittings forming the complete
flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be assembled in the factory as a
complete system before delivery to the Site. The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower
pan body and fully concealed outlet with no visible WC trap profile. A copy of the user
manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be affixed onto the WC
using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
(b) Installation
Fix the close coupled low capacity WC suite including the soft-closing rigid plastic seat and cover
with buffers, hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the
system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the
gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not
be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not
in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.
37.20.4 Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories
Unless specified otherwise, all single lever basin mixers provided shall be approved models listed in
the HDB Material List. All basins shall be complete with 15mm dia (nominal); chrome plated: ceramic
disc cartridge operated; a single lever mixer tap, with pop-up waste, aerator and bottle trap. It shall be
complete with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the basin.
The dimension of the tap spout measured from the centre of the outlet orifice to the centre of the inlet
shall be 90mm minimum and measured vertically from the lowest part of the outlet orifice to the basin
top shall be 25mm minimum.
The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with
character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side.
The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass. The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN
12540, Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For any part of mixer that made of zinc alloy,
the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr.
The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap
or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-13
37.20 LOW CAPACITY WC SUITE AND WASH BASIN (CONT’D)
37.20.4 Single Lever Basin Mixer And Accessories (Cont'd)
The mixer tap shall comply with BS EN 817 and approved by the SO Rep. The mixer shall pass the
PUB stipulated tests in BS EN 817. Bottle trap shall be approved by the SO Rep and connected to a
40mm diameter UPVC waste pipe discharging into a floor trap as shown.
The tap fittings shall be properly cleaned and wrapped immediately after the installation. The protective
materials shall be durable and the method of protection shall remain intact till the units are handover.
37.20.5 Sealant
Silicone sealant shall be used to seal up all gaps between sanitary wares (including cultured marble
basin/top) and tiled surface. The approved sealant shall be of one-component system, non-sag, class
25 in accordance with ASTM C920-01, and able to be applied without a primer. In addition it shall also
meet the following technical requirements:
Characteristics/
S/N Test Method Requirements
Properties
1 Fungal Resistance Test ISO 846:1997 (Method B) No growth
Chemical Resistance )
Test: )
)Surface shall be
a) Household bleach a) Concentrated sodium hypochlorite )unaffected after 16
2 solution - ANSI Z124.3 : 1986 (spot )hours of spot
covered) )covered test
)
b) Urea b) Urea, 6.0% (Urine) - ANSI Z124.3 : )
1986 (spot covered) )
3 Tack Free Time (hrs) ASTM C679-87 (1997)  4hrs
The Contractor shall submit the brand/range of silicone sealant and proposed method of application to
the SO Rep for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. The Contractor shall also submit
samples of the sealant to the SO Rep for selection of colour to match the sanitary Works
37.20.6 Dual-Flush Low Capacity Eco Pedestal WC Suite
(a) Technical Requirements
Unless specified otherwise, all Dual-flush Low Capacity Eco Pedestal WC Suites provided shall
be approved models listed in the HDB Material List.
All WC suite shall be 2-tick (PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme) dual flush low
capacity eco pedestal type. The complete system of the close-coupled dual-flush low capacity
eco pedestal WC suite including the WC bowl, cistern, internal parts and fittings forming the
complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the necessary accessories needed for the
proper installation and functioning of the WC shall be to the approval of HDB and also to conform
with SS 42 "Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances", Singapore Standards SS574 “Dual
flush low capacity water closet (WC) up to 4.5/3.0 litres capacity”. It shall be certified to be rated
in the PUB’s “Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme” (WELS).
The dual-flush low capacity WC shall enable a full flushing actuation and a reduced flushing
actuation.
The full flushing performance of the dual-flush low capacity WC shall comply fully with the SS
574.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-14
37.20.6 DUAL-FLUSH LOW CAPACITY ECO PEDESTAL WC SUITE (CONT’D)
(a) Technical Requirements (Cont’d)
The reduced flushing actuation shall comply with the following performance requirements:
Performance Test Criteria
Volume of water SS 574: Part 1: 2012 The cistern shall discharge a

Discharged per Annex H volume of water not more than 3
reduced flush litres.
Endurance of flushing SS 574: Part 1: 2012 The cistern shall not leak or show
fitting Annex I signs of defect, damage after
100,000 flushing cycles.
Discharge of colored Dilution test with aniline No visible traces of colored water
water blue solution remaining in water seal
Loading on operating SS 574: Part 1: 2012 Shall not distort, and parts shall
mechanism Annex F not become detached or
inoperative.
Paper discharge 4 no of twin-ply toilet The toilet papers shall be fully

papers of 15,000mm² and discharged in at least 2 out of 3
of 40 g/m² tests.
The buttons for the actuation of the full and reduced flushing shall be clearly marked to be easily
distinguishable by users.
The soft-closing rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging device shall conform to
SS 16:1985 "WC Seats (Plastic)", or its latest amendment. The colored plastic seat and cover
shall match the profile of the WC bowl and approved by the HDB. The seat and cover shall have
a soft-closing mechanism that lowers the toilet seat gently and quietly.
The whole pedestal WC suite including the internal parts and fittings forming the complete
flushing mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be assembled in the factory as a
complete system before delivery to the Site.
The WC suite model shall have streamlined lower pan body and fully concealed outlet with no
visible WC trap profile.
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the WC and shall be
affixed onto the WC using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive tape.
(b) Technical Requirements for Eco Pedestal
Unless otherwise stated, all eco pedestal shall be 2-tick (PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling
Scheme) dual flush low capacity type. The complete system of the close-coupled low capacity
eco pedestal including the WC bowl, cistern, internal parts, spout, wash basin and fittings forming
the complete flushing mechanism, seat and cover, and all the necessary accessories needed for
the proper installation and functioning of the eco pedestal shall be to the approval of HDB. The
eco pedestal shall also conform with SS 270:1996 – Specification for elastomeric seals for joints
in pipework and pipelines. The rubber seal of the eco pedestal shall comply with the following
performance requirements:
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-15
(b) Technical Requirements for Eco Pedestal (Cont’d)
Description Test Criteria

Accelerated ageing tests in soapy
water:
- Hardness test
- Tensile strength test
- Elongation at break test
- Compression set accelerated
The physical properties for the
ageing at 70⁰C for 22 hours
rubber seal shall be within the
- Swell accelerated ageing in
recommended range as
water at 70⁰C for 7 days
SS 270:1996 indicated in Table 5 ‘Physical
- Swell accelerated ageing in
Properties For Seals of Type W
soapy water at 70⁰C for 7
(Potable Water)’.
days
- Tensile strength test after
accelerated ageing in soap
- Elongation at break test after
accelerated ageing in soap
Static endurance ageing tests
- Tensile strength test after 3

months static endurance
ageing test in soap water at The physical properties for the
ambient temperature rubber seal shall be within the
- Elongation at break test recommended range as
after 3 months static indicated in Table 5 ‘Physical
endurance ageing test in Properties For Seals of Type W
SS 270:1996
soap water at ambient (Potable Water)’.
temperature
- Leakage test- The Eco For leakage test, the cistern
pedestal with rubber seal shall not show any sign of
components subjected to 3 leakage after the test.
months static endurance
ageing in soap water at
ambient temperature
The eco pedestal including the internal parts and fittings forming the complete flushing
mechanism and all the necessary accessories shall be assembled in the factory as a complete
system before delivery to the Site.
The design of the spout shall be approved by SO Rep. The lever and the body of the spout shall
be of chrome plated brass. The metallic coating of the spout shall comply with BS EN 12540,
Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For any part of spout that is made of zinc
alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr.
The spout shall be completed with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured on the
wash basin. The water flow from spout shall be directed towards the basin waste trap to minimize
water splashing.
During full flush, the duration of water flowing from spout shall be more than 25 seconds and the
flow rate of water flowing from spout shall be between 3.0L/min to 4L.0/min. Basin waste trap
shall be provided with the wash basin. Designated area for toiletries shall be provided on the
wash basin
A copy of the user manual/maintenance instruction shall be supplied with the eco pedestal
system and shall be affixed onto the eco pedestal using plastic bag and heavy duty adhesive
tape.
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-16
(c) Installation
Fix the close coupled WC suite including the soft-closing rigid plastic seat and cover with buffers,
hinging devices and with all necessary accessories and associated works in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions to enable the proper functioning of the system.
Fix the WC onto the floor using the original screws provided together with the WC and seal the
gap between the base of the WC and the floor with approved silicone sealant. The WC shall not
be fixed using cement grout or using other type of screws. Any WC installed using a method not
in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer shall be dismantled and re-installed in
accordance with the correct method.
37.20.7 BATH / SHOWER MIXER AND SHOWER-SET ASSEMBLY
Unless specified otherwise, all bath/shower mixers and shower set assemblies provided shall be
approved models listed in the HDB Material List.
The bath / shower mixer shall be 15mm dia (nominal) chrome plated; ceramic disc cartridge operated;
single lever mixer tap. It shall be complete with all necessary seals and nuts, firmly fixed and secured.
1-tick (PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme) bath / shower mixer shall be used for HDB projects
unless otherwise stated.
The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and/or with
character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side.
The lever and the body shall be of chrome plated brass. The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN
12540, Service Condition 2 with designation Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For any part of mixer that made of zinc alloy,
the electrodeposited coating shall be Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr.
The operation of the lever shall be smooth and effortless. The lifting of the lever shall not leave any gap
or opening which is likely to trap the finger and/or cause injury.
The mixer tap shall comply with BS EN 817 and approved by the SO Rep. The mixer shall pass the
PUB stipulated tests in BS EN 817.
Shower-set shall be complete with adjustable jet handset type of shower head, flexible hose, and sliding
bar, all in chrome finish. Flexible hose shall be of length 1.5m and of chromed stainless steel or chromed
brass. An adjustable shower head holder shall be provided on the sliding bar. Shower-sets provided
shall also comply with the following requirements:
Characteristic / Properties Requirements: BS 6340 Part 4-Specification for

shower heads and related equipment
Clause 9.2-Service condition 2A,

Nickel and Chromium plating on
handset type of shower head and Classification PL/Ni 8b Cr r
sliding bar (8 micron min Full-bright Nickel and 0.3 micron min
Regular Chromium)
Spray Trajectories Clause 13.1
Tensile Load test for Flexible Hose Clause 14.1
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-17
37.21 COLOURED UPVC GRATING OVER FLOOR TRAP/WASTE

OUTLET FOR BATH/WC, KITCHEN AND SERVICE YARD
All UPVC gratings over 100mm or 50mm diameter floor traps/waste outlets in the Bath/WC, Kitchen
and service yard with floor tiles shall be coloured gratings. The colour shall be one of the four basic
colours, ie. Blue, Pink, Beige or Grey and shall be approved by the SO Rep. However, the anti-mosquito
device need not be in colour.
37.22 BIB TAP AND DRAINAGE OUTLET FOR WASHING MACHINE
Unless specified otherwise, all bib taps provided shall be approved models listed in the HDB Material
List or approved equivalent.
Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass hose union bib tap with cross-head handle at the
kitchen. The bib tap shall comply with BS 5412 and approved by the SO Rep.
50mm diameter outlet for washing machine shall be finished with UPVC adaptor and screw-down cap
37.23 LAY SEWER TO CONNECT TO MINOR SEWER

AND SEWER CONNECTION
Lay the last length of main drain-line to join the inspection chamber to the minor manhole connection
pipe provided by the Employer's civil engineering contractor or Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB unless otherwise specified. Allow for the connection to be carried out at a later stage.
The connection shall be done under the supervision of the SO Rep or Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB. Where in the case pipe joints are not provided, the Contractor shall provide the
necessary connections by other methods approved by the Water Reclamation (Network) Department,
PUB at the Contractor's own costs and expenses. The last length of the main drain-line from the
inspection chamber to such minor manhole shall be of vitrified clay pipe all as shown in the Drawings
and to the approval of Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB. Backfill with quarry dust and
finished as shown.
Apply to the Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB for the connection and bear all costs and
expenses including the necessary fees.
37.24 RAINWATER DOWNPIPE (RWDP) SYSTEM
The rainwater downpipe system shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings, all as shown in the Drawings and
approved by the SO Rep. Unless specified otherwise, all rainwater downpipes above ground slab level
shall be 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipes. The rainwater downpipe system shall be
complete with downpipes, branch pipes, roof and balcony outlets with gratings, couplings, pipe
brackets, swept tee junctions, access pipes, adaptors, rectangular section bends, underground pipes
and Y-branch fittings.
The 200mm nominal diameter white UPVC pipe shall comply with the requirements of SS 272:83 as
shown below :
Measurements/Tests SS 272:83 Requirements

a) Dimensions Outside Diameter
Mean-minimum 200.0, maximum 200.6;
Ovality-minimum 196.3, maximum 204.3;
Wall Thickness
minimum 4.9, maximum 6.0.
b) Opacity Not exceeding 0.2 per cent of visible light.

c) Hydrostatic Pressure No sign of leakage or any Defect at 70 kPa.
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.7 (d) "Method of
Fixing".
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 37-18
37.25 WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE FROM BALCONIES, SERVICE YARDS, LANDINGS, LIFT
LOBBIES AND MSCP DECKS
As shown in the Drawings, waste and rainwater discharge from the access balconies, private balconies,
service yards, landings, lift lobbies at the second storey and above, and all multi-storey carpark/garage
decks shall be connected to the rainwater downpipe system or to waste downpipes discharging into
surface drains. All branch pipes and fittings used in the connections shall be of UPVC and comply with
SS 213. The discharge outlets shall be square base, screw-in domical grating type as shown in the
Drawings. All 80mm, 100mm and 150mm nominal diameter outlets for the private balconies/service
yards shall have an adjustable square base of minimum 40mm adjustment. All 50mm nominal diameter
outlets for private balconies shall have flat screw-in gratings.
The method of jointing pipes and fittings shall be as specified in subclause 37.12.7 (d) "Method of
Fixing".
37.26 WASTE AND RAINWATER DISCHARGE AT GROUND FLOOR
Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, all ground floor surfaces of void decks, play areas, multi-
storey carparks/garages, link buildings, linkways, etc, shall be graded to drain waste water and
rainwater into surface drains.
37.27 PAINTING
Except for sanitary pipes and water supply pipes, all other ferrous metal surfaces of work installed by
the Contractor (eg. mild steel brackets and others) shall be painted with 1 coat of approved primer and
2 coats of gloss enamel paint. All paint used shall be of those quality controlled by PSB and approved
by the SO Rep.
Allow for numbering to be painted to all sanitary pipes and water supply pipes at void deck.
37.28 MODULAR BRICKS
Where clay bricks are shown in the Drawings, the bricks shall be of modular bricks. The common and
facing clay bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm and 290mm x 90mm x 90mm.
37.29 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE RAIL (FOR HANDICAP)
Provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets as shown in the Drawings.
The stainless steel shall be of AISI Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown in the
Drawings. The end of the pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with
stainless steel capping of the same grade all to the details as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe
rail shall be rigid and secured tightly into the walls.
37.30 CONNECTING TUBE TO PILLAR TAPS AND CISTERNS
The connecting tube shall be flexible stainless steel tube 15mm diameter and complete with UPVC
adaptor coupling where necessary.
37.31 50MM DIAMETER WASTE OUTLET AT ATTACHED BATHROOM
Waste discharge outlet for the 50mm diameter pipe at attached bathroom shall be UPVC screw-in flat
grating with square base as shown in the Drawings.
Section 38/.....
BLDG17/S37.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-1
SECTION 38
WATER INSTALLATION
38.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB unless
otherwise specified. The SO Rep reserves the right to carry out test on materials on the Site as and
when required. The test shall be conducted at an SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
38.2 WATER SUPPLY PIPES
38.2.1 Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings For Water Supply
All ductile iron pipes and fittings for water installation shall comply with BS EN 545 and ductile iron
flanges type PN16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
The pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in
BS EN 545.
38.2.2 Stainless Steel Water Pipes
Provide and fix stainless steel water supply pipes to areas as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel
water pipes, fittings and accessories shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and to the
requirements of BS EN 10312:02.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect.
Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel
pipes shall not be bent. Support pipes with stainless steel supporting clips or as shown in the Drawings.
Use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply unless otherwise specified.
The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of compression fittings of copper alloy or stainless steel press
fitting joints. Compression fittings of copper alloy shall conform with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998 . Stainless
steel press fitting joints shall conform with Japanese Waterworks Association (JWWA) G116 "Stainless
Steel Pipe Fittings For Water Works". All fittings shall conform with all PUB latest requirements. Fittings
of 15mm size and longer shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark.
Support pipes with supporting stainless steel clips and hangers. The maximum spacing for horizontal
and vertical support shall be as follows :
Maximum Horizontal Maximum Vertical

Nominal Size
Support Spacing Support Spacing
(mm) (mm) (mm)
15 1000 1200
20 to 28 1000 1200
35 to 42 1200 1800
54 and above 1200 1800
Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly. If
necessary, the compression joint shall be adequately supported with brackets on both sides to avoid
any dislocation.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-2
38.3 CONTRACTOR'S WORK COMMENCES FROM

PUBLIC UTILITIES BOARD MAIN
PUB will provide and lay water main up to the bulk meter for direct and indirect supply or individual
meter points for direct supply as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor's Works shall commence from
these points.
38.4 BULK METER POSITIONS
The exact position of bulk meter, where not fixed by existing mains shall be approved by the SO Rep
and Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB before fixing. Otherwise the Contractor shall make good
to the proper position determined by the SO Rep.
38.5 WATER METER POSITIONS
Provide and install live meter connections to all flats and remove the connections at the time when PUB
install the water meters to all flats. The Contractor shall also provide label/tag of unit numbers where
one service duct serves more than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent
feature, with the dwelling unit number clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping.
38.6 BRASS STOPCOCKS, STOP VALVES, GATE VALVES

AND COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY GATE VALVE
Provide and fix to every branch service pipe or main supply pipe, one stop valve to SS 75:Pt 2 or gate
valve to BS 5163. Provide valve with a detachable crutch head.
Where ball stop valves and stopcocks are along public corridors or public access balconies, the upper
end of projecting shank of valves shall be tilted to an angle of 15 degrees towards the wall where such
pipes are tee off from direct up-riser pipes or indirect down supply pipes. The installation shall comply
with PUB regulations. Install copper and copper alloy gate valve to BS 5154 at the down supply pipe
on the roof top. When directed by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remove the detachable levers and
deliver them to the Branch Office or Town Council.
38.7 DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS
Run 100mm diameter underground ductile iron distribution main and 80mm ductile iron sub-main
complying with BS EN 545 as shown in the Drawings. From this main, run direct riser of size shown in
the following schedule, each serving only 2 units on each floor unless otherwise shown.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-3
38.7 DIRECT SUPPLY TO FLATS (CONT'D)
Schedule of Common Direct Riser and Tee Off Pipes

For 3, 4 and 5-Room Flats
(To be of stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02)
(a) Block without Void Deck
Storey No.
Served by 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Common Riser
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 1st 1st 1st to 2nd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd 1st to 3rd
*Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 2nd 3rd 4th 4th 4th 4th 4th
*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 5th 5th 5th to 6th 5th to 7th
*Tee off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 6th 7th 8th
*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm
(b) Block with Void Deck
Storey No.
Served by 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Common Riser
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 2nd 2nd 2nd to 3rd 2nd to 4th 2nd to 4th 2nd to 4th 2nd to 4th 2nd to 4th
*Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 3rd 4rd 5th 5th 5th 5th 5th
*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
Size of Riser 54mm 54mm 54mm 54mm
No. of Storey 6th 6th 6th to 7th 6th to 8th
*Tee off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
No. of Storey 7th 8th 9th
*Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied through up to the junction of the last fitting within the
flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm diameter at fitting all
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-4
38.8 HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS
Hot and cold water supply pipes and fittings shall be provided within the residential units. The Contractor
shall submit the proposed work methods for the installation of concealed water pipes including
information/details of the suppliers and type of materials used for the approval of SO Rep.
All water pipes within the residential units shall be of copper pipes to BS EN 1057-R250, approved by
the SO Rep. All pipes shall be chased (embedded) in walls, columns and beams. No pipe shall be
exposed within the residential units. Copper brackets shall be used for securing the water pipes. The
spacing between copper brackets on the horizontal and vertical pipe run shall not be more than 1m
centre-to-centre. In addition, copper brackets shall also be installed immediately before and after each
bend. Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall ensure that all the pipes shall be secured firmly.
The nominal size of the water pipes shall be of nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal wall
thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall thickness of 1.2mm
shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to 15mm nominal outside
diameter with 1.0mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings.
For forming of vertical and horizontal recesses in residential units, no hacking is allowed. The contractor
shall use modular shaped solid block to form all horizontal and vertical recesses for the water supply
pipes.
All fittings required for joints (tees, elbows, etc) on the pipes shall be of an approved press-fit coupling
system fittings complying with BS EN 1254 Part 2. Bending of copper pipes is not allowed. Joining of
fittings to pipes shall be by press-fit coupling system. Before joining, clean the external surface of the
copper pipes and the internal surface of the fittings.
The press-fit coupling system shall be carried out by means of an approved propriety mechanical
clamping jaw to crimp an approved proprietary copper fitting to a standard EN 1057-R250 copper pipe.
The press-fit fitting shall consist of an ethylene-propylenediene(EPDM) “O” ring seal. The press-fit
fittings/system shall comply with the standards stipulated by PUB and its use in water service
installations shall conform to the Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SS : CP 48. The system
shall not require proprietary tap fittings/valves and other related accessories. The Contractor shall
submit all taps, mixers, and accessories for the approval of the SO Rep.
The press-fit system shall be able to withstand a working pressure of 16 bar and a working temperature
range of above freezing point to 110 °C. The system shall provide a fail-safe indicator to identify
improper assembly. The system shall be suitable for embedment in walls, columns and beams.
All pipe works shall be installed and tested to BS EN 1254 Part 2. Taps, mixers and other accessories
are not installed during the test. The entire pipe works shall show no sign of defect or leakage for the
duration of the test. The test requirements for leak-tightness under hydrostatic pressure test shall be 24
bars at ambient temperature. The pressure shall be applied gradually and maintained for a minimum
period of 15 minutes at ambient temperature. This test shall be carried out to every dwelling unit and
witnessed by the SO Rep.
The pressure gauge used for the testing shall be calibrated by an SAC accredited laboratory. All water
pipes including all pipe fittings (tees, elbows, etc) shall be left exposed for inspection for leakage during
testing before concealment of the pipes and fittings shall be carried out.
A cold water pipe shall be tee-off from the distribution pipe to the designated heater position. Hot water
pipes shall be provided from the heater position to all basin and both bath mixers position. A pressure
relief drain-off pipe shall also be provided for discharging to the floor trap.
The cold water inlets and hot water outlets shall all be terminated with U pipes projected at 80mm away
from the wall. The drain-off pipe shall be terminated with compression fitting with capping at 50mm
away from the wall. All the 3 termination points shall be fixed with 30mm x 20mm aluminium tags, with
engraved markings of "cold water inlet", "hot water outlet" and drain-off" respectively.
Light duty coloured masking tapes of 10mm width, shall be fixed on the wall surfaces of all the pipe
routing lines concealed behind walls, columns and beams. Red for hot water pipes, blue for cold water
pipes and black for drain-off pipe. No wall finish shall be damaged by the removal of the tapes.
For each basin, 15mm diameter isolating ball stopvalves shall be fixed below the tap mixer, connecting
to the hot and cold water inlet. A 15 mm diameter isolating ball stopvalves shall also be fixed at the
provision of cold water inlet for kitchen sink connection where specified (eg. Studio Apartment type of
flat).
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-5
38.8 HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS (CONT'D)
A bath mixer complete with adjustable jet shower head, sliding bar, 1.5m flexible hose (all in chrome
finish), and a basin mixer, approved by the PUB and the SO Rep, shall be provided within each
Bath/WC.
38.8.1 WATER SUPPLY PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR RENTAL FLATS
All surfaced mounted cold water pipes within residential rental units shall be PP-R pipes, Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PE-X) or PEX-Aluminium-PEX multi-layer pipes.
The contractor is to take special note on the following requirements if PE-X or PEX-Aluminium-PEX
multi-layer pipes are proposed:-
(a) The base design shown in the tender drawings for the potable water distribution pipeworks,
including pipe and pump sizes, are based on PP-R pipes within residential units.
(b) The flowrate to the residential units shall not be affected.
(c) The capacities of the rooftop booster pumps shall not be changed.
(d) Any claim arising from the need to upsize associated pipeworks shall not be entertained.
The entire plumbing system shall be integrated, installed and commissioned as a complete operational
package conforming to the requirements indicated in the tender drawings and specifications.
All water pipes including all pipe fittings (tees, bends, etc,) are to be tested for leakages after installation
are carried out. The test requirements for leak-tightness under hydrostatic pressure test shall be 24
bars at ambient temperature. The pressure shall be applied gradually and maintained for a minimum
period of 15 minutes at ambient temperature.
38.8.2 Polypropylene (PP-R) Pipes and Fittings for Cold Water Systems
All polypropylene pipes shall comply with BS 4991 DIN 8077, BS 6920 Part 2 & 3 DIN 8078. The
polypropylene pipe shall be tested and approved by accredited laboratory and relevant authority.
Cold water pipes shall be of SDR 11 (PN10) with one permanent line marked across the whole
length of pipe and interval marking “COLD WATER PIPE”.
Hot water pipes, if any, shall be of SDR 6 (PN20) or SDR 7.4 (PN16) with one permanent red
line marked across the whole length of pipe and interval marking “HOT & COLD WATER PIPE”.
(b) Raw Material Requirements
Raw material for thermoplastic pipes and fittings must be of Polypropylene Random Copolymer
or Polypropylene (PP) type 3 materials or PPR 80.
Raw Material Properties

• Raw Material : PPR 80
• Color : White, Green and other colour (Subject to SO Rep approval)
The raw material supplier shall be certified ISO 9001.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-6
38.8.2 Polypropylene (PP-R) Pipes and Fittings for Cold Water Systems (Cont’d)
(c) Manufacturer Requirements
Manufacturer should be certified ISO 9001 and have its own quality laboratory to conduct in-
house tests for monitoring of product quality.
These shall include:

• Raw material properties verification
• Dimensional checks
• Thermal properties
• Thermal cycling tests
• Tensile tests
• Long term hydrostatic tests
• Impact tests
• Homogeneity
(d) Installation Requirements
Machines used for PPR fabrication on site must be controlled by a Precision Timer. Contractor
is to engage PPR materials suppliers for training of their installers and only certified installers by
the manufacturer shall carry out the PPR installation on site.
The nominal size of the water pipes shall be of nominal outside diameter of 22mm with nominal
wall thickness of 1.2mm. However, nominal outside diameter of 28mm with nominal wall
thickness of 1.2mm shall be used for the topmost 2 storeys. The water pipe shall be reduced to
15mm nominal outside diameter with 1.0mm nominal wall thickness at the tap fittings.
All fittings required for joints (tees, elbows, etc) on the pipes shall be of PP-R with BS 4991 DIN
8077, BS 6920 Part 2 & 3 DIN 8078. The polypropylene fittings shall be tested and approved by
accredited laboratory and relevant authority.
38.8.3 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipes for Cold Water System
PEX pipes for potable water installation shall comply with PUB’s latest requirements, ISO 15875-5, BS
7291-3, DIN 16892/93 and AS/NZS 2492. PEX pipes shall be joined by methods as recommended by
the supplier or manufacturer. All brass components of fittings in contact with water shall be
Dezincification resistant brass (DZR) in compliance with BS EN 12163, BS EN 12165, or BS EN 12420
and PUB requirements.
PEX pipes and fittings shall be PSB listed and legibly marked with the manufacturer’s name or
trademark. All pipes and fittings shall have with a minimum operating pressure rating of PN20.
38.8.4 PEX-Aluminium-PEX Multi-Layer Pipes for Cold Water System
All PEX-Aluminium-PEX multi-layer pipes for potable water installation shall comply with PUB’s latest
requirements, BS 7291, ISO 21003 and SS 375. PEX-Aluminium-PEX pipes shall be joined by
methods as recommended by the supplier or manufacturer. Pipes and fittings shall be PSB listed and
legibly marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark.
All pipes and fittings shall have with a minimum operating pressure rating of PN20.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-7
38.9 REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM
38.9.1 Flushing Pipes From Ground Level
Where refuse chute flushing pipes are supplied directly from PUB mains, every refuse chute shall have
its own supply teed off from the distribution mains located at apron. Supply pipe of 35mm diameter
stainless steel pipe to refuse chute shall have a brass stopcock with detachable brass crutch head
located outside at 1.8m above apron. The brass components shall be dezincification resistant
complying to BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN 12420:1999. Such fittings shall have
the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR".
The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round
four sides of the chute and perforated with 5mm ±1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such
that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The
flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.9.2 Flushing Pipes To Refuse Chutes From Distribution Mains

At Roof-Top (For Block With Centralised Refuse Chute)
38.9.2.1 Pipe & Fittings
For flushing pipes to centralised refuse chutes from distribution mains at roof-top, the 42mm diameter
stainless steel supply pipes shall be teed off from the distribution main at the roof top as specified in
Clause 38.10 "Indirect Supply From Roof Tanks". One such pipe shall supply only one chute. Provide
each supply pipe with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve and a 40mm solenoid valve. The layout and
arrangement shall be as shown in the Drawings for flushing chutes.
The flushing pipe shall be 25mm diameter UPVC pipe complying with SS 141 Class E ringing round
four sides of the chute and perforated with 5mm ±1mm diameter holes at maximum 50mm centres such
that the water flowing out of the holes are directed at 45 degrees towards the refuse chute wall. The
flushing pipe shall be supported by non-corrosive clips or hangers to each side of the refuse chute wall.
38.9.2.2 Solenoid Valve
The approved 40mm solenoid valve shall be electrically operated, two-way, normally closed and
capable of operating at zero differential pressure. The supply voltage shall be 230 V ±10% at 50 Hz.
The coil shall be epoxy or plastic encapsulated, of at least class F insulation, and capable of 100%
continuous duty. The enclosure protection shall be at least IP65 (according to BS 5490) and suitable
for conduit connection. The enclosure shall incorporate earthing terminal and terminal block for easy
maintenance. The pipe threads shall comply with BS 21. The operating pressure range shall be 0 to 4
bars.
The valve body shall be of brass, bronze or other approved metal. Parts in contact with water shall be
of stainless steel, brass, bronze or other approved material. All brass components shall be
dezincification-resistant complying with BS EN 12163:1998 or BS EN 12165:1998 or BS EN
12420:1999. Such fittings shall have the additional marking of "DZR" or "CR"
The Contractor's proposed solenoid valve shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep for the refuse
chute flushing systems. Submit technical information of the solenoid valve and other information, as
provided in APPENDIX A14, to the SO Rep for approval.
Where the pressure of water leading to the solenoid valves exceeds 4 bars, such as in some staggered
blocks, provide and install appropriate pressure reducing valves subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-8
38.9 REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM (CONT’D)
38.9.2 Flushing Pipes To Refuse Chutes From Distribution Mains

At Roof-Top (For Block With Centralised Refuse Chute) (Cont’d)
38.9.2.3 Control Board
The design of control board shall follow the Drawings approved by the SO Rep. The control board shall
contain the following :
1 No. Relay to control the solenoid valve for refuse chute flushing
1 No. MCB unit for control circuit and solenoid valve
1 No. 30 minute timer
1 No. Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel
The front panel shall have :
1 No. Red indicator light to show the flushing is on

1 No. Green indicator light to show the power supply is on
1 No. Red emergency stop push button
1 No. Green push button to start the flushing
1 No. Key lock to be approved by the SO Rep.
The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 54 (according to BS 5490). The box shall be made
of 1.5mm thick mild steel sheet, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-baked
paint.
The control board shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber next to the consumer unit. The
chosen location shall be approved by the SO Rep.
38.9.2.4 Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the consumer unit inside the refuse chamber.
Cables and electrical wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 and they shall be carried in their own
conduits. The cables connecting the solenoid valve to the control switch shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal
cross-sectional area.
All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge, screwed galvanised steel conduit complying with IEC 61386.
The conduits shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing. Fixing to walls and other flat
surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and
1.5m centres for vertical runs. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high to encase
the conduits at every floor level. The conduits to the solenoid valves shall run along the piping and be
properly supported.
All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. Earth
the conduits with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation shall be completed
before the cables are drawn. The number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed
those set out in Code of Practice CP 5. Earth all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical
equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified
in CP 5.
38.9.3 Inspection During Progress Of Work
Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the refuse chute flushing
system for inspection by the SO Rep.
38.9.4 Testing Of Installation
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing of the
performance and installation of the refuse chute flushing system. All Defect notified during inspection
shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent any collection of water inside the Refuse Handling Plant
during any testing which involves the flushing of refuse chute.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-9
38.9 REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM (CONT’D)
38.9.5 Testing For Leakages
Carry out leakage test to the following items :
(a) joints between floor slab;

(b) joints between branch off pipes; and
(c) all the water pipes installed.
Complete the tests, including making good of all Defect within 14 days from the date of Substantial
Completion for each building block.
38.10 INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS
Where supply is from roof storage tanks, run 100mm diameter ductile iron distribution mains complying
with BS EN 545 with cement lining internally on roof to beyond the last down supply pipes.
From these mains, run down supply pipes of sizes shown in the schedule, "Schedule Of Down Supply
Pipes And Tee Off Pipes For 3, 4, 5-Room Flats", each serving only 2 units on each floor unless
otherwise shown.
Pipe joints, fittings and special tee for ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level shall
be of the flanged type. The use of special tee shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-10
38.10 INDIRECT SUPPLY FROM ROOF TANKS (CONT'D)
Schedule of Down Supply Pipes and Tee Off Pipes for 3, 4, 5-Room Flats
Where Tank Supply

1-Storey 2-Storey 3-Storey 4-Storey 5-Storey 6-Storey 7-Storey 8-Storey 9-Storey
No. of Storey Below Roof
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
No. of Storey Below Roof 1st 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
* Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
No. of Storey Below Roof 3rd
* Tee Off Size 22mm
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
No. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 4th 3rd to 5th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 7th 3rd to 8th 3rd to 5th
* Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm

No. of Storey Below Roof 6th to 9th
* Tee Off Size 22mm
Size of Down Feed Pipe

* Tee Off Size

* Tee Off Size
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat units as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
diameter at fitting all as shown in the Drawings.
Provide and install 25mm diameter stopcocks before individual sub-meters for top-most 2 storey dwelling units.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-11
Where Tank Supply

10-Storey 11-Storey 12-Storey 13-Storey 14-Storey 15-Storey 16-Storey 17-Storey
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
No. of Storey Below Roof 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
* Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm
No. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th
No. of Storey Below Roof 7th to 10th 7th to 11th 7th to 12th 7th to 13th 7th to 10th 7th to 10th 7th to 10th 7th to 11th
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm

No. of Storey Below Roof 11th to 14th 11th to 15th 11th to 16th 12th to 17th
* Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm

* Tee Off Size
* The diameter of tee off pipe sizes shall be applied throughout up to the junction of last fitting within the flat unit as shown in the above schedule. The pipe shall be reduced to 15mm
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-12
Where Tank Supply

18-Storey 19-Storey 20-Storey 21-Storey 22-Storey 23-Storey 24-Storey 25-Storey
No. of Storey Below Roof 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
No. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm
No. of Storey Below Roof 16th to 20th 16th to 21st 17th to 22nd 18th to 23rd 19th to 24th 19th to 25th
* Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-13
Where Tank Supply

26-Storey 27-Storey 28-Storey 29-Storey 30-Storey
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm 42mm

No. of Storey Below Roof 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd 1st to 2nd
* Tee Off Size 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm 28mm

No. of Storey Below Roof 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th 3rd to 6th

No. of Storey Below Roof 7th to 11th 7th to 11th 7th to 11th 7th to 11th 7th to 12th


No. of Storey Below Roof 17th to 21st 17th to 21st 17th to 22nd 18th to 23rd 19th to 24th

No. of Storey Below Roof 22nd to 26th 22nd to 27th 23rd to 28th 24th to 29th 25th to 30th
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-13-1
Where Tank Supply






No. of Storey Below Roof 19th to 24th 19th to 25th 20th to 26th 18th to 23rd 18th to 23rd

No. of Storey Below Roof 25th to 31st 26th to 32th 27th to 33th 24th to 29th 24th to 29th
Size of Down Feed Pipe 42mm 42mm

No. of Storey Below Roof 30th to 34th 30th to 35th
* Tee Off Size 22mm 22mm
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-13-2
Where Tank Supply






No. of Storey Below Roof 18th to 23rd 18th to 23rd 18th to 24th 19th to 25th 20th to 26th

No. of Storey Below Roof 24th to 29th 24th to 30th 25th to 31st 26th to 32th 27th to 33th

No. of Storey Below Roof 30th to 36th 31st to 37th 32th to 38th 33th to 39th 34th to 40th
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-14
38.11 RESERVED
38.12 SILT TRAP AT FOOT OF DOWN SUPPLY PIPES
Every down supply pipe shall extend at least 250mm below the last tee-off to form a silt trap fitted with
a plug to facilitate cleaning. Provide gate valve with detachable crutch head just before the silt trap.
38.13 PIPEWORKS TO THE STAINLESS STEEL FLANGES

AT THE CONCRETE WATER TANKS
The fixing of pipes, valves and fittings, including bolts, nuts and gaskets, to the stainless steel flanges
of the connecting pipes shall be fixed by the Contractor. Use only stainless steel bolts and nuts. All
stainless steel material shall conform to AISI Grade 316 and flanges shall be in accordance with
BS 4504. Allow for all pipeworks cost and water for sanitary and water installation leakage test.
38.14 PIPING TO HIGH LEVEL TANKS
Provide and install piping to high level water tanks as follows :
38.14.1 Rising Mains
Install 100mm ductile iron pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally from bulk meters or low level
suction tanks at ground level to high level water tank whichever is applicable. The rising mains shall be
connected to a 100mm ball float valve with a 100mm gate valve at inlet. Floats shall be of copper and
approved type.
38.14.2 Distribution Outlet Mains
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement lining internally as shown in the
Drawings. Support the pipes on precast concrete block 450mm high and 150mm thick of 1:3:6 mix
concrete, embedded onto 150mm high concrete base by mortar at intervals of not exceeding 2700mm
all as shown in the Drawings. Provide supports at every fitting or bend. Mains shall extend past the
last branching-off of down supply pipe and shall be encased by reinforced concrete end-thrust supports
as shown in the Drawings. Provide and fix ductile iron short pipe 450mm in length with 180mm diameter
ductile iron collar 20mm thick, welded at middle section of the short pipe. Provide approved flange
adaptors along the distribution pipe before each thrust support.
All ductile iron pipe joints, flange adaptor, fittings and special tees shall be of the flanged type in
compliance with BS EN 545 type PN 16.
38.14.3 Interconnecting Pipe
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545 with cement linings installed between tanks as
shown in the Drawings with 100mm gate valve. The invert level of the connecting pipe shall be 400mm
above the internal base of the water tank unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. Pipe joints, fittings
and special tees shall be of the flanged type ductile iron. Flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN
545.
38.14.4 Overflow Pipes
100mm diameter ductile iron overflow pipes to BS EN 545 with cement lining or one size bigger than
the diameter of the inlet rising main pipe as shown in the Drawings to each tank compartment shall be
connected to washout pipe.
Provide an additional 28mm diameter stainless steel overflow warning pipe for each roof storage tank
and discharging off roof edge at its nearest point preferably at the kitchen side. The pipe shall project
300mm from eaves of roof as shown in the Drawings.
Cover open end of pipes with mosquito screen.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-15
38.14.5 Tank Washout Pipes
Install 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipes complying to BS EN 545 with cement lining before
the gate valve from tanks to roof level as shown in the Drawings. The pipes shall discharge direct into
roof rain water gutter and properly drained off through rain water downpipes.
38.14.6 Stop Valves, Sluice/Gate Valves, Copper And Copper Alloy Gate Valves
Provide and install all necessary stop valves to SS 75:Pt 2, gate valves to BS 5163, Copper and Copper
Alloy Gate Valves to BS 5154 and other fittings required to comply with the requirements and
regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB, regardless of whether such items have
been specifically mentioned or not.
The wedge of the gate valves (BS 5163) used shall be of rubber bonded gate. Coat the internal surface
of valve body with approved material. The spindles of the gate valves shall be of stainless steel or high
tensile bronze or other approved type.
38.14.7 Raised Pipes
Install raised pipes to raise and support all horizontal pipes above concrete roof as stated in
subclause 38.14.2 "Distribution Outlet Mains" to a level of not less than 330mm to clear precast
secondary roofing slabs.
38.15 BIB TAP AND STOPCOCK/STOPVALVE
Where shown in the Drawings, provide and fix 15mm diameter brass bib taps conforming with BS 5412
and BS 3457; and 15mm and 25mm diameter stopcocks/stopvalves conforming with SS 75:Part 2 and
BS 3457. Such bib taps, stopcocks and stopvalves shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply
(Network) Department, PUB. Bib taps shall be chrome plated brass body with chrome plated brass
operating handles. UPVC tee and cap for fixing bib tap as shown in the Drawings shall conform with
SS 174. Fix the cap to the wall by "Ramset ED 655" or other approved.
38.16 TAPS IN PUBLIC AREAS
Taps located at the staircase landings, access balconies, refuse hopper areas and wash areas shall be
of 15mm diameter chrome plated hose union bib tap with removable handle, as shown in the Drawings.
The tap shall be approved by the SO Rep and Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. The handles
shall be handed over to the Employer or the relevant Town Councils as directed by the SO Rep upon
handing over of the building blocks.
38.17 WATER SERVICES TO UTILITIES CENTRE
Run 25mm diameter UPVC pipe from water meter point to the utilities centre. Water pipes inside the
buildings shall be 20mm diameter up to bib taps.
Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self-closing delay-action bib tap over lavatory basin
and 15mm isolating ball stop valve to W.C. cisterns. Bib tap and ball stop valve shall be of brass high
pressure screw down type. Provide similar 15mm bib tap with screw on connecting nozzle for the
utilities centre.
38.18 WATER SERVICES TO CENTRALISED REFUSE CHUTE CHAMBER
Provide and install stainless steel water pipe and stainless steel down supply pipes to the sizes and
locations as shown in the Drawings. The stainless steel pipes shall be approved by the Water Supply
(Network) Department, PUB.
Provide and fix brass caps to stainless steel water pipes. Provide and fix approved 15mm bib tap with
screw on connecting nozzle and approved isolating ball stop valve at positions all as shown in the
Drawings.
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 38-16
38.19 FIXING FITTINGS BEFORE HANDING OVER
When required, provide and fix taps, stop valves and other removable fittings immediately before all the
building blocks are handed over to the Employer.
38.20 BRASS WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
Provide and fix PUB approved bronze or brass water pressure reducing valves (NF E29-170) to down
feed pipes where the pressures are more than 35m hydrostatic head, all to be in accordance with the
requirements of Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
The Contractor shall remove the pressure gauge of the pressure reducing valve and install a plug after
testing.
38.21 RESERVED
38.22 RESERVED
38.23 TAP FITTINGS REQUIREMENT
All taps shall conform to the following standards and technical requirements:
Cold Water Tap
(a) Mechanical; water tightness, pressure resistance; hydraulic; and backflow prevention
characteristics to- BS 5412;
(b) Corrosion resistance performance to- BS EN 248;
(c) All non-metallic material component in contact with water- to SS 375;
(d) All metallic material in contact with water to- AS/NZS 4020 “Extraction of Metals - Appendix H";
(e) The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation
Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For part that is of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be
Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr; and
(f) Certified under PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS)
Mixer (Hot And Cold Water Tap)
(a) Mechanical; leak-tightness; hydraulic; torsion resistance and backflow prevention characteristics
to- BS EN 817 ;
(b) Corrosion resistance performance to- BS EN 248;
(c) All non-metallic material component in contact with water- to SS 375;
(d) All metallic material in contact with water to- AS/NZS 4020 “Extraction of Metals - Appendix H";
(e) The metallic coating shall comply with BS EN 12540, Service Condition 2 with designation
Cu/Ni10b/Crr. For part that is of zinc alloy, the electrodeposited coating shall be
Zn/Cu20/Ni10b/Crr; and
(f) Certified under PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS)
The Hot / Cold indicator shall be clearly visible. The indicator may either be by colour coding and / or
with character identification. Hot indicator shall be on the left and cold indicator on the right side.
Section 39/.....
BLDG17/S38.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-1
SECTION 39
GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
39.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The gas pipe installation Works shall refer to the gas pipes after the CityGas Ltd Service Valve (SV)
and which includes buried service pipes, horizontal service pipes, risers and internal gas pipes.
The gas pipe installation work shall be suitable for City Gas Ltd manufactured gas as specified in CP51
Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation and shall be carried out by a Consultant’s
Licensed Gas Service Worker (hereinafter referred to as the "LGSW" for the purposes of this Section
including all clauses and sub-clauses under it) and shall comply with City Gas Ltd requirements.
39.2 CODE OF PRACTICE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall ensure that the Works are carried out in accordance with the following
requirements:
(a) Public Utilities Act (Chapter 261)
(b) Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations
(c) Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, ie. CP51
including any amendments,
(d) City Gas Ltd Procedures and Requirements for gas supply; and
(e) Any other relevant rules, regulations and requirements by the relevant authority
from time to time.
39.3 NOTIFICATION FOR COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
Before commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Gas Ltd project
coordinator and the Consultant for a site meeting. After the site meeting, the Contractor shall notify City
Gas Ltd before the Works can be carried out.
39.4 SAMPLE UNITS
The Contractor shall put up sample unit for each typical installation for inspection and approval by both
the City Gas Ltd Engineer and the Consultant. The Consultant shall submit two sets of drawings of the
sample unit to City Gas Ltd before inspection.
The Contractor shall only proceed with the whole installation only after the sample unit has been
inspected and approved by the City Gas Ltd Engineer.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-2
39.5 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF

GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall ensure that the gas pipe installation complies with the approved plan before
submitting an application for final pressure test.
The Contractor shall carry out preliminary testing of the completed installation and rectify all Defect
before arranging with the City Gas Ltd project co-ordinator for the final pressure test. All preparation for
the final pressure test shall be made by the Contractor. The final pressure test shall be conducted by
the City Gas Ltd Engineer or his authorised representative.
The application for final pressure test (City Gas Ltd Form PH-G2 as produced in Appendix A15) must
be accompanied by the following :
(a) Four sets of as-built drawings duly endorsed by Consultant.
(b) City Gas Ltd Form PH-G1B as produced in Appendix A16 if necessary.
The same endorsed as-built drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for endorsement.
Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd in writing on the approval of the application
for the final pressure test of the gas pipe installation through Form PH-GR2 as produced in
Appendix A17.
A certificate of Final Pressure Test (Form PH-G2A as produced in Appendix A18) shall be prepared by
the Contractor and endorsed by City Gas Ltd once the final pressure test is passed.
A copy of this certificate shall be submitted to City Gas Ltd by the Contractor.
In the event that the installation has failed the final pressure test, the Contractor must resubmit a fresh
application for final pressure test.
After the gas pipe installation has been tested and passed, the Consultant’s LGSW shall affix all plugs,
caps and end-points of the installation with warning labels which read 'Gas Pipe Tested. Do Not
Tamper'.
39.6 UNAUTHORISED WORK ON GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
After the gas pipe installation has passed its final pressure test, the Contractor shall ensure that no
person is allowed to carry out any further work without prior written approval from the City Gas Ltd
approving authority. Any further work on the installation, shall render the final pressure test null and
void. If any further work has to be carried out, a new application for the work shall be made together
with the plans.
No person other than an authorised City Gas Ltd employee or authorised City Gas Ltd contractor is
permitted to connect any gas pipe installation onto City Gas Ltd gas main.
39.7 APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY
After the gas pipe installation has passed the final pressure test and approved by the City Gas Ltd
Engineer, the Contractor shall apply for charge-in/turn-on of gas supply by submitting City Gas Ltd Form
PH-G3 as produced in Appendix A19.
The Contractor shall attach a copy of the line drawing of the gas pipe installation indicating the location
of the service valves, valves, risers, meters and all installation pipes downstream of the meter. The line
drawing shall be subjected to the approval of the Consultant.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-3
39.7 APPLICATION FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY (CONT'D)
The line drawing(s) of the gas pipe installation shall be displayed inside the 1st storey gas riser service
duct(s). The line drawing(s) shall be placed and sealed inside an A4 size clear perspex cover and
securely mounted with four stainless steel screws onto the inside of the door(s) of the riser service
duct(s).
Thereafter the Contractor shall be informed by City Gas Ltd on the approval and charge-in/turn-on of
gas supply through Form PH-GR3 & PH-GR4 as produced in Appendix A20 and A21 respectively.
39.8 CHARGE-IN OF GAS
The Contractor and/or Consultant must be present during the charge-in of gas. The Contractor shall
arrange for a proof test and set up all necessary equipment, fittings and vent points for purging and
ensure that all necessary safety precautions are taken. After the installation has been confirmed to be
sound with the proof test, the installation is then purged and charged-in with manufactured gas.
After the charge-in of the gas supply, the Consultant’s LGSW must affix the labels 'Live Gas. Do Not
Tamper' to all plugs, caps and other end points of the gas pipe installation.
39.9 USE OF GAS DETECTOR
The Contractor shall use a gas detector which measures the volume of gas in air, when necessary. The
Consultant’s LGSW is responsible for the accuracy and the use of this instrument in all the Works that
is carried out by him.
39.10 PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES
All pipes, fittings and valves used in the gas pipe installation shall comply with CP51 and City Gas Ltd
requirements.
The diameter of all pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their nominal diameter.
The diameter of all Polyethylene pipes as specified in the Specifications and Drawings shall be their
outer diameter (OD) and based on a Standard Diameter Ratio (SDR) of 11.
Unless otherwise specified, copper pipes to BS EN 1057 "Copper and copper alloys - seamless round
copper tubes for Water and Gas in sanitary and heating applications" shall be used within the unit for
overhead internal gas supply pipe from the meter to the kitchen of individual unit. Fittings shall be of
compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2: 1998 "Capillary and
Compression Tube Fittings for Copper Tubes".
The Contractor shall provide a label/tag showing the unit numbers where one service duct serves more
than two dwelling units per floor. The label or tag shall be a permanent feature, with the dwelling unit
numbers clearly indicated and firmly attached to the piping.
Galvanised steel pipes (heavy) complying with SS17 "Steel Tubes suitable for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe
Threads" or BS 1387 "Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plain End Steel Tubes
Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads" shall be used outside the unit for incoming
gas supply pipe, gas riser and horizontal supply pipe.
The galvanised malleable cast iron pipe fittings shall comply with BS 143 and BS 1256 "Specification
For Malleable Cast Iron & Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings".
Ductile iron pipes shall be of the flexible bolted gland joint type complying with BS EN 545-Class K9.
The gland ring shall be lead tipped nitrile rubber or epichlorhydrin.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-4
39.10 PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES (CONT'D)
All galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching
primer and one coat of lead and chromate free primer. All the exposed galvanised steel pipes and
fittings shall be painted with one undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint of a colour to match
the background as instructed by the SO Rep. All galvanised steel and copper pipes including fittings
inside service ducts, inside false ceiling and other enclosures shall be painted with one undercoat and
one finishing coat in Canary Yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309.
For buried service pipe at the building footway, Polythene pipe sleeve in Unplasticised Polyvinyl
Chloride (uPVC) pipe shall be used. The uPVC pipe shall conform to JIS 6741 Class AW or SS 141
Class E.
All Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be of PE80 Polymer and shall be manufactured in accordance
with ISO 4437. The Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings shall be of the City Gas Ltd approved types.
39.11 CATEGORIES OF PIPE
The pipes to be installed is categorised and located in the areas as detailed below :
(a) Buried Service Pipe - Pipe connecting to the vertical service pipe and is laid in concrete
channels. The pipe shall extend 600mm beyond the footway drain to
receive City Gas Ltd connection.
The pipe shall be Polyethylene pipe complying to the standards as

specified and shall be sized to OD 63mm. The Polyethylene pipes
shall be sleeved in Diameter 80 mm uPVC pipes, and both ends of
the sleeve shall be stopped with rubber wall grommet.
The pipe-end to receive City Gas Ltd Connection shall be fitted with
a temporary 50mm SS141 Class E uPVC end cap with the Internal
Diameter pre-enlarged (Hot Water treatment) to 63.5mm for close-fit
to the Outer Diameter of the Polyethylene Pipe.
The pipe-end to join to the riser shall be fitted with a 50mm GI BSP
Adaptor X PE 63mm Electrofusion Transition Elbow complying to
Gas Business Engineering specifications GBE/PL3 or equivalent.
Alternatively, the above-mentioned Service Pipe configuration can be

installed by a factory-fitted Above Ground Entry Elbow. It shall be
provided with an assembled 4m Polyethylene tail and a 3.6m uPVC
sleeve; the elbow is zinc plated and a grey fusion bonded epoxy
coated; and the steel nipple is protected by a Polyethylene sleeve
and terminates in a male thread.
All buried/concealed pipes shall be left exposed for City Gas Ltd
inspection, testing and approval before concealment.
(b) Horizontal Service Pipe - Horizontal pipe runs normally at the ground floor ceiling level and
connecting to all vertical risers. The pipe shall be galvanised steel
pipe to SS 17 or BS 1387.
(c) Riser - Rising pipe from ground/first floor to the top shall be provided with a
branch for a meter connection at each floor (a riser supplies gas to
either one or two flats per floor depending on the piping layout). The
pipe shall be galvanised steel to SS 17 or BS 1387.
(d) Internal Pipe - Pipe installed after the City Gas Ltd meter.
The pipes shall be copper pipes which complies to BS EN 1057.

Brass compression fittings for copper pipes shall comply to BS 864
Part 2.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-5
39.12 PIPE CHANNEL
Where service pipes have to cross the floor footway before entering the building, such pipes shall be
accommodated in channels in the footway. The channel shall be cleared of all debris and shall be dry
before the gas pipe is laid. The void space between the pipe and the channel shall be filled with cement
mortar. Under no circumstances shall the service pipe be located underneath a ground beam.
39.13 PIPE SUPPORTS/BRACKETS
The Contractor shall provide galvanised steel pipe brackets on horizontal run and at the ground floor
areas at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) or as directed by the SO Rep. The pipe brackets shall be
installed before and after every change of direction of the pipe. The pipe brackets shall also be provided
at an interval of 3000mm (maximum) for vertical riser pipes.
Every riser pipe shall be supported at its base by a duckfoot or similar flange device capable of
supporting the total weight of the riser in accordance to CP51. Where the riser passes through a floor,
the floor shall be haunched up around the riser or its pipe sleeve. The pipe sleeve shall be at least
50mm above the floor level.
39.14 PIPE SLEEVE ON FLOOR
Where the gas riser pipes are not enclosed in service ducts, a PVC sleeve with a minimum of 300mm
protruding above the floor level shall be provided to accommodate the gas pipe run through the floor
slab. The section of the gas pipe within the sleeve shall be wrapped with petrolatum tape and the gap
between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed with water-proofed sealant.
39.15 PIPE JOINTING MATERIALS
All jointing compounds, jointing pastes, thread sealants and other jointing materials for galvanised steel
pipe shall be of the approved type complying with BS 5292.
All Polyethylene pipes shall be jointed only by City Gas Ltd approved types of electrofusion fittings. The
approved types of Electrofusion Control Units shall operate an output voltage of 39.5 volts. All
electrofusion joints shall be carried out by trained workers, certified by the City Gas Ltd Approved
Vendors or the Singapore Power Training Institute.
39.16 THREADED JOINTS
Galvanised iron pipes of 80mm and below and corresponding fittings shall have taper threads except
for connector backnuts to BS 21. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape complying with BS
4375 shall be used on all threaded joints. Prior to jointing, the threads shall be cleaned of all grease
and particles. There shall be a 50% overlap when wrapping threads.
39.17 IDENTIFICATION OF GAS PIPES FOR COMMERCIAL

AND INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
All gas pipes shall be painted Canary Yellow to BS 381C Colour No. 309. In addition, a line diagram
shall be provided at a suitable location indicating the position of meters, pipework, and isolation valves.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-6
39.18 ENTRY OF GAS PIPE BELOW GROUND LEVEL
Direct underground pipe entry into basement shall not be allowed. Gas service pipe shall come up
above ground before entering into the building.
If entry of underground gas pipes through retaining walls below ground level is necessary, a steel sleeve
shall be cast in situ into the retaining wall. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed at
both ends with cement mortar or any other suitable sealing material. The gas pipe shall also be of
heavy gauge galvanised iron to BS 1387 or SS17-Class C wrapped up with petrolatum tape with a 50%
overlap for buried service pipes 80mm and below. Unsintered PTFE (Polytetra fluoro ethylene) tape
complying with BS 4375 shall be used on all threaded joints.
39.19 SOLID SHAFT FOR METER INSTALLATION
A solid metal shaft shall be installed at each tee-off of the riser where the gas meter is to be installed
as specified in CP51.
39.20 INSTALLATION OF SOLID SPOOL
A solid spool shall be installed at the vertical service pipe from the ground in the building during the
installation stage. The solid spool of 150mm in length shall be installed 600mm above the ground level.
The spool(s) shall be replaced with standard double flanged distant piece(s)/short pipe(s) with Johnson
coupling connectors complying to CP 51 or other approved after the gas pipe installation have passed
the pressure test and the installation is ready for charge-in.
39.21 BRASS BALL AND PLUG VALVES FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION
Brass ball stop valves shall be provided to every riser pipe just before the first "Tee-off" pipe and at the
riser tee-off point to every dwelling unit. The ball stop valves shall be suitable for use on City Gas Ltd
town gas. The ball stop valves shall have the following :
(a) Two female end connections having BSP threads, tapered in accordance with BS 21
"Specification For Pipe Threads For Tubes and Fittings Where Pressure-Tight Joints Are Made
on the Threads (Metric Dimensions)".
(b) Ball and plug valves shall be of the full bore type complying with BS 1552.
39.22 GAS PIPE WITHIN THE FALSE CEILING SPACE, BASEMENT

AND CONCEALED AREAS
Where gas pipe is installed within the false ceiling space, basement and concealed areas (these cases
to be specially approved by City Gas Ltd), only steel pipe of heavy gauge complying with BS 3601 or
complying with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 5L Grade B shall be used and shall
comply with the requirements of CP 51.
The pipe shall be welded and full circumferential radiography test shall be carried out on all the welds
by an accredited laboratory engaged by the Contractor to verify that all these welded joints are sound.
The result of radiography tests shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
Stainless steel pipe sleeve, one size larger than that of the gas pipe, shall be provided and exposed by
50mm on both ends of the false ceiling.
All threaded joints, gas valves, fittings and controls shall be installed outside the false ceiling space of
the building.
Where gas pipes pass through air-conditioned areas, it shall be adequately lagged with insulating
material to prevent excessive condensation.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-7
39.23 MECHANICALLY VENTILATED KITCHEN
In a mechanically ventilated kitchen where City Gas Ltd gas is to be used, a solenoid valve shall be
installed before the gas meter. This solenoid valve shall automatically shut off the gas supply whenever
the ventilation fan is switched off or failed to operate.
In the event that the mechanically ventilated kitchen is air-conditioned or linked to an air-conditioned
space adjoining the kitchen, a gas detection system, electrically interlock to the solenoid valve and the
mechanically ventilated system shall be installed. This is to ensure that if there is a gas leak, the gas
supply would be shut off automatically.
39.24 AIR-CONDITIONED AREAS WHERE GAS APPLIANCES ARE INSTALLED
In air-conditioned areas where gas appliances are installed, a leak detection system shall be installed
to monitor the presence of gas. Leak detector used shall comply with BS EN 50054 and BS EN 50057
or equivalent.
The leak detection system shall be connected to a solenoid valve controlling gas supply to the area.
The leak detection system may be linked to a monitored alarm system if necessary. All detectors and
solenoid valves shall also be explosion proof and shall be certified for use in a hazardous area zone 2
environment as described under SS 254:Part1 or any equivalent standard having a similar classification.
The setting for the system to cut-out shall not be more than 20% of the Lower Explosive Limit of
manufactured gas (hydrogen).
39.25 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
Gas pipes shall be tested in accordance with the following procedures as specified in CP 51 :
(a) Cap or plug off all outlets of the system leaving only one opening which shall be fitted with a T-
piece having a gas cock on one end and a manometer (U-gauge)/or a pressure gauge, in the
other;
(b) Pump air in the system through the gas cock on the T-piece until a pressure of 300mm w.g. is
registered on the U-gauge and shut the cock;
(c) If there is no pressure drop after 10 minutes, the installation may be deemed sound;
(d) For the Polyethylene service or installation pipe after the service valve, the required test pressure
is 70 kPa using a 0-200 kPa pressure gauge, and a test duration of 30 minutes;
(e) If there is no pressure drop after 30 minutes, repeat Point (b) to (c) to complete the testing;
(f) If there is a fall in pressure at the end of the test, the leak shall be traced with soap solution,
rectified and re-tested.
For chokage test, drop a 15mm diameter ball bearing through each riser from the highest point of the
riser and ensure that the ball bearing is able to fall vertically all the way through without any obstructions
from inside the riser.
After the gas pipe installation had been tested and approved by City Gas Ltd, no further work shall be
allowed unless written approval is obtained from City Gas Ltd. The Contractor shall arrange with City
Gas Ltd for the charging in of gas before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer.
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 39-8
39.26 PURGING OF PIPES
(a) Purging of gas must be organised by the Designated Representative and conducted in the
presence of the City Gas Ltd Project Coordinator.
(b) A proof test shall be carried out immediately preceding to charging in of all pipes.
(c) Steps must be taken to ensure that there is no naked flame or any other source of ignition in the
vicinity of the purging areas and the areas are well barricaded with relevant warning signs.
(d) Vent point consisting of standpipes more than 2m long with flame traps and control valves shall
be erected at suitable locations and connected to the appropriate points of the pipework via
rubber hoses or other suitable hoses.
(e) Every vent point shall be supervised by the Licensed Gas Service Worker and vent points are to
be located such that vent gas cannot drift into buildings.
(f) A gas detector shall be used to check the mixture content at the end of the standpipe.
(g) During the purging process, the valve cover shall be left opened.
(h) Purging is only completed when 100% discharge of gas at the standpipe is achieved.
(i) On successful completion of the purging process, the standpipe shall be disconnected from the
pipe and the pipe properly plugged off and all valve covers replaced.
(j) The disturbed joints shall be tested for leakage.
Section 40/.....
BLDG17/S39.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-1
SECTION 40
EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES,
RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES
40.1 EATING ESTABLISHMENT
Eating establishment shall include restaurants, eating houses, fast food and family restaurants.
40.1.1 Food Stalls, Kitchen And Wash Area (In Eating House)
40.1.1.1 Sanitary Installation
All drain lines connecting floor traps to waste sumps and grease interceptor shall be cement mortar
lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 598:1995 and approved by the Water Reclamation (Network)
Department, PUB.
Diameter and Type of Drain Line From To

100mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe Floor Trap Waste Sump
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe Waste Sump Waste Sump
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe Waste Sump Grease Interceptor
150mm cement mortar lined ductile iron pipe Grease Interceptor Inspection Chamber
All soil, waste and vent pipes serving food stalls and kitchen shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron
pipes or as shown in the Drawings. The grease interceptor shall be constructed in accordance with
MEWR drawings and requirements. The floor traps shall be of stoneware or vitrified clay type.
40.1.1.2 Water Installation
All internal service/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying with BS EN 10312:02
and fittings complying with BS 864:Part 2 or BS EN 1254 all in accordance with Section 38 "Water
Installation" including all clauses and subclauses under it. All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes
complying with BS EN 1057.
40.1.1.3 Sinks
Provide and install sinks to location as shown in the Drawings. All stainless steel sink shall be of
approved type complying with SS:40:1971.
Provide and install to each bowl approved 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 and
brass constant flow regulator rated not more than 8 litres per minute all or latest requirements by Water
Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
(a) Single bowl stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 432mm x 350mm x 150mm deep.
(b) Single bowl single drainer (left or right) stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1500mm x
500mm x 170mm deep.
(c) Double bowl double drainer stainless steel sink shall be of overall size 1800mm x 500mm x
170mm deep.
40.1.1.4 Stainless Steel Bowl Trough To Wash Area In Eating House
Provide and install stainless steel double bowl trough to locations as shown in the Drawings.
The stainless steel double bowl trough shall be of 1.626mm thick and the dimensions shall be 1800mm
in length and 600mm in width. The bowl shall be 500mm x 450mm x 300mm deep. The whole trough
shall be supported by 42mm diameter tubing with adjustable feet and 25mm diameter cross-rail all as
BLDG17/S40.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-2
40.1.2 Staff/Non Public Toilets
The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all
(a) Pedestal WC Pans
Use approved white vitreous china close-coupled washdown pedestal w.c. pan with vitreous
china flushing cistern conforming to the standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The
plastic seat and cover with buffers hinging devices shall comply with SS 16:1985, except that
plastic material shall not be used for hinging devices. The minimum thickness shall be 4.7mm
for the seat and 6mm for the cover respectively.
(b) Squatting WC Pans
All squatting WC pans shall comply with SS378 and SS379 and other relevant standards set by
NEA or PUB. In addition, provide a self closing delayed action tap (the flow rate and timing shall
not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively) in the innermost wall of one of
the squatting water closet compartment.
(c) Urinal Bowls
Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with stainless steel pipes, necessary fittings and
accessories.
High level flushing cisterns shall be vitreous china and shall comply with the standards and
regulations stipulated by the PUB.
Provide urinal trap to serve a maximum four bowl urinals and fix at least one flushing cistern for
four bowl urinals in series.
All water installation shall be as specified in Section 38 "Water Installation" including all clauses and
subclauses under it. All internal services/distribution pipes and fittings shall be stainless steel complying
with BS EN 10312:02 and fitting complying with BS 864:Part 2:1983. or BS EN 1254.
40.1.3 Public Toilets
The requirement shall be the same as those specified in Section 37 "Sanitary Installation" including all
clauses and subclauses under it, and shall comply with the "Code of Practice on Sanitary Facilities and
Fittings for Public Toilets", standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The Contractor shall submit
samples for approval before commencement of work.
(a) Pedestal WC Pans
Provide and install approved white vitreous china washdown pedestal wc pan with sensor
operated flush valve. The rigid (heavy duty) plastic seat and cover with buffers and hinging
devices shall comply with SS 16:1985. Plastic material shall not be used for the hinging devices.
BLDG17/S40.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-3
40.1.3 Public Toilets (Cont'd)
40.1.3.1 Sanitary Installation (Cont'd)
(b) Squatting WC Pans
The squatting wc pans shall be of vitreous china complying with SS 379 with sensor operated
flush valves. Provide squatting water closet, pans with raised foot rests.
When it is technically not feasible to use flush valves, use white vitreous china flushing cistern
with stainless steel pull chain. The flush pipe shall be made of stainless steel. A self closing
delayed action tap shall be provided in the inner most wall of at least one of the squatting wc
pans compartment.
(c) Urinal Bowls
Urinal bowls shall be approved vitreous china with sensor operated flush valve, stainless steel
pipes and fittings and accessories.
(d) Washhand Basins
The single supported approved basin shall be 620mm in length and 445mm in width. The
approved vanity basin shall be 548mm in length and 396mm in width. Taps to all public washhand
basins shall be of 15mm diameter chrome plated brass self closing delay action water saving
spring tap complying with BS 5412 and standards and regulations stipulated by the PUB. The
flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.
(e) Soap Dispenser
Provide and install stainless steel AISI Grade 304 soap dispenser to every two washhand basin
subject to a minimum of one soap dispenser. The sample shall be approved by the SO Rep
before the installation. The capacity of soap dispenser shall be one litre minimum.
(f) Litter Bin
Supply one litter bin to each toilet. The bin shall be 230mm diameter (minimum) and 600mm high
approved AISI Grade 304 stainless steel bin.
(g) Toilet Paper Holder
Provide and install semi-recessed 150mm x 150mm approved vitreous china toilet paper holder
to each wc. The position shall be determined by the SO Rep.
(h) Automatic Hand-Dryer Blower
Provide and install an approved automatic hand dryer complete with electrical installation to each
toilet.
(a) Service/Distribution Pipes And Fittings
All internal service/distribution pipes shall be stainless steel pipes approved by Water Supply
(Network) Department, PUB and to the requirements of BS EN 10312:02. The fittings shall be of
capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 2:1998
and PUB requirements.
All concealed pipes shall be copper pipes complying with BS EN 1057:1996.
BLDG17/S40.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-4
40.1.3 Public Toilets (Cont'd)
40.1.3.2 Water Installation (Cont'd)
(b) Flush Valves to Public Toilets
Unless otherwise stated, provide and install approved sensor operated flush valves (battery
operated) to all water closets and urinals as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the
"Guidelines on Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code
of Practice on Sanitary Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilets" and "Code of Practice for Water
Services". Submit application and obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to the
installation of the flush valves.
The flush valve shall be able to operate without sticking, whistling or causing water hammer.
For sensor operated flush valves (battery operated), if required by PUB, engage a licensed
electrical worker to ensure that the installation of sensor/electronic sensor unit complies with SS
CP5 "Wiring of Electrical Equipments of Building" and other relevant regulations or code of
practice.
Each sensor unit shall only operate one flushing unit for a sanitary appliance. The sensor unit
when installed shall not be affected by the operation of adjacent sensor units.
The sensor unit's stable sensing area shall be adjusted for an activating distance that is as
follows:
(a) 600mm for a urinal; and

(b) 900mm for a water closet
Flush valves for water closets shall incorporate approved check valves that comply with BS 5154
and approved vacuum breakers that comply with American Society of Sanitary Engineering
Standard No. 1001.
Every flush valve shall be controlled by an approved stopvalve to SS 75 unless it is provided with
an integral shut-off device.
All flush valves shall be so adjusted as to give a flush of not less than 2.5 litres and not more
than 4.5 litres of water per stall of bowl urinal or not less than 8 litres and not more than 9 litres
of water for water closets.
Vacuum breaker of the flush valve shall be installed at least 1m above the floor level for squatting
wc pan and at least 300mm above the rim of other types of water closet.
The water supply pipes shall be sized to give a minimum dynamic pressure of 1.0 bar (or higher
depending on the make of flush valve and type of sanitary appliance) at the inlet end of the flush
valve.
Flush valves shall not be directly connected to the service pipes at a height exceeding 112m
reduced level (R.L.). The Licensed Plumber shall check and ensure there is sufficient head and
low rate for effective operation of the flush valves.
The minimum internal diameter of the flush pipe for water closet shall be 25mm.
The concealed (battery operated) sensor-operated flush valves shall be recessed into the wall if
the water service pipes are concealed.
40.1.3.3 Stainless Steel Pipe Rail (For Handicap)
Provide and install stainless steel pipe rail for handicap in public toilets in accordance with the "Code
on Barrier-free Accessibility in Buildings, 1990" and as shown in the Drawings.
The grade of the stainless steel shall be AISI Grade 304, and the internal diameter shall be as shown
in the Drawings. The end of pipe shall be split to form fishtail and fixed into the wall and complete with
the same grade of stainless steel capping all as shown in the Drawings. The fixing of pipe rail shall be
rigid and secure tightly into the walls.
BLDG17/S40.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 40-5
40.2 MARKET FACILITIES
Market facilities shall include supermarkets, mini-supermarkets, market produce lock-up shops etc. The
requirements for Staff Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1
"Eating Establishment" including all subclauses under it.
40.3 RETAIL AND SERVICES FACILITIES
Retail and services facilities shall include shoplets, precinct shops, shops, departmental stores,
institutions/schools, Branch Office, Town Council Office and commercial complex. The requirements
for Staff/Non-Public Toilets and Public Toilets shall be the same as those specified in Clause 40.1
"Eating Establishment" including all subclauses under it.
40.4 MIRRORS
Provide and fix 600mm x 600mm (minimum) x 6mm thick approved coppered back mirror in front of
each wash hand basin or as shown. Mirrors shall be fixed on timber ground with chrome plated round
head screw with capping.
40.5 WASHING TAPS FOR WASH AREAS/BIN CENTRES
15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib taps and handles to BS 5412 with tread to fit rubber hose for
washing shall be provided to locations as shown. Locking device shall be provided as shown in the
Drawings.
40.6 BIB TAP TO BATH/WC IN SHOP'S LIVING QUARTERS
Provide and fix 15mm diameter chrome plated brass bib tap to BS 5412 with UPVC tee and cap
complying with SS 174 all as shown in the Drawings.
40.7 TAP FOR PUBLIC SHOWER
Taps to all the public showers shall be self-closing delayed action shower tap. The flow rate and timing
shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 15 seconds respectively.
Section 41/.....
BLDG17/S40.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 41-1
SECTION 41
MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION)
41.1 WATER SAVING TAPS FOR PUBLIC WASH HAND BASINS AND SHOWERS
41.1.1 Water Saving Taps For Public Wash Hand Basins
Taps to all wash hand basins in staff and public toilets, in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor
stadium, training stadium, training hall, bus interchange etc shall be 15mm diameter chrome plated
brass self-closing delay-action taps complying with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations, SSCP
48: Code of Practice for Water Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply
(Network) Department, PUB and other relevant Statutory requirements. The flow rate and the timing
shall not be more than 8 litres per minute and 3 seconds respectively.
41.1.2 Water Saving Tap For Public Showers
Taps to all the public showers and showers in swimming complex, sports complex, indoor stadium,
training hall etc shall be of self-closing delayed action shower taps complying with the standards and
regulations stipulated by the PUB. The flow rate and the timing shall not be more than 8 litres per
minutes and 15 seconds respectively.
41.2 FLUSH VALVES
Unless otherwise stated, provide and install sensor operated flush valves (battery operated) to all public
toilets (water closets and urinals only) as shown in the Drawings, all in accordance with the "Guidelines
on Flush Valves" issued by Water Reclamation (Network) Department, PUB, "Code of Practice on
Sanitary, Facilities and Fittings for Public Toilet" and "Code of Practice for Water Services". Submit
application and obtain approval from the relevant authorities prior to installation of the flush valves.
41.3 SOAP TRAYS
Soap trays shall be recessed white vitreous china 150mm x 150mm "Twyfords 3008" or other approved
type, one to each shower compartment. Position of soap trays shall be determined by SO Rep.
Section 42/.....
BLDG17/S41.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-1
SECTION 42
TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND
TELEMONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
42.1 SCOPE OF WORK
42.1.1 Water Transfer Pumping Plants
The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of transfer pumping system, based on the
data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, switch gears, electrical wiring, control panel and
connections and all necessary accessories.
Details of proposed transfer pumping system shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All Works
shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations, SSCP48: Code of Practice for Water
Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and other
relevant Authorities and Standards.
42.1.2 Telemonitoring System
The Works shall include the installation of telemonitoring system as specified in Clause 42.27
"Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System" including all subclauses under it.
42.2 PUMPROOM - GENERAL
(a) Water supply mains shall be brought into the building at the positions shown.
(b) A suction (low level) tank shall receive water from the water supply main through an approved
100mm full bore pilot operated float valve. Suction pipes shall then be of individual feed to each
pump-set. The pumps shall deliver water through a vertical rising main direct to the storage (high
level) tank at the roof of the building.
(c) The pipework shall incorporate appropriate valves and fittings as specified.
(d) Floatless level control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks shall be
arranged to start and stop the pumps on predetermined water levels in the tanks as specified.
(e) Pumps (duty and standby) shall be operated by electric motors direct-coupled to them and
started by suitable starters in the control panel.
(f) The whole assembly within the pump room shall be laid out to permit ready access to all
components: tanks, pipework, valves, pumps, motors, control panel, floatless level control
electrodes and wiring for purposes of maintenance and repair. The control panel and pump sets
shall be installed near to the entrance of pump room for this purpose.
42.3 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Submit one set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Letter
of Acceptance :
(a) Detailed proposal shall be submitted in the format as produced in Appendix A22 duly filled and
signed by the Contractor.
(b) Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the points of performance.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-2
42.3 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM (CONT'D)
(c) Three sets of fully dimensioned scaled drawings of every pump room to indicate :
(i) Piping and pumpset layout in pump room

(ii) Position of control panel and floatless level control electrodes
(iii) PUB water incoming pipe
(iv) Rising main
(v) Sizes of all fittings
(vi) Points and details of support for pipes, valves and fittings
(vii) Mounting of pumpsets
Submit to the SO Rep, fully dimensioned final drawings of the above within two weeks after the
installation is commissioned by the SO Rep.
42.4 DEVIATIONS FROM APPROVED DRAWINGS AND DETAILS

OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. Seek fresh approval for
any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation shall not be accepted by
the SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way vary or relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate with regard to
strength, performance or efficiency.
42.5 BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the
pumping system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel
member supports and attend to the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error or damages
found subsequently.
42.6 PUMPS
All pumps shall be of horizontal spindle, single-stage, end suction centrifugal pumps or vertical multi-
stage centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals and high performance efficiency of not less than 55%,
driven by electric motors through suitably guarded flexible couplings. The whole unit shall be mounted
on a common steel base and secured with galvanised steel plain washers, spring washers and double
lock nuts. The pumpset foundation shall be properly grouted on complete installation. Galvanised steel
bolts and nuts shall be used for mounting the pumpset.
The casing of the end suction centrifugal pump shall be of hard, close-grained cast iron or other
approved metal. The casing of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal pump shall be of stainless steel,
bronze or other approved metal. All internal surfaces of the pump (cast iron type) that come into contact
with water shall be coated (fusion bonded) with an approved layer of non-toxic epoxy complying with
SS 375:2001.The impeller shall be of bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of stainless steel
and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts. The entire length of
the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy duty bearings in
robust housing well clear of the rotating parts.
Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated.
The pump shall be of the approved type and able to deliver the required capacity of water based on the
data given in Appendix A22.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-3
42.7 DUCTILE IRON PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIAL CASTINGS
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
All pipes, fittings and special castings in the pump room and to the roof tanks shall be ductile iron
complying with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
All pipes and fittings shall be internally cement mortar lined in accordance with the relevant clauses in
BS EN 545. The mixture shall be tested according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545.
Pipe joints and fittings along any section shall be of the flanged type, the thickness and drilling of which
shall comply with BS EN 545 type PN 16. Thickness of sealing compound between the flanged ends
shall be at least 2mm. Galvanised steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be used for the installation.
Ductile iron pipes, socket and spigot type complying with BS EN 545 is permissible only for vertical riser
except that the joint immediately above roof shall be of flanged joint. All vertical risers shall run inside
the buildings along the staircase landing where possible.
All pipes which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by cork and sealed on the outer 12mm
with approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running along the
wall shall be supported with built in clips spaced at maximum 2.7m centres.
All pipes which pass through walls shall be insulated by neoprene material. All pipes which do not pass
through the wall or floor but running along the wall shall be supported with built in clips spaced at
maximum 2.7m centres.
For blocks with pumps requiring power more than 20kW, the delivery pipe from the transfer pumps
which pass through walls or floors shall be insulated by neoprene material of at least 20mm thickness.
The pipe in the pump room shall be supported from the floor. Any pipe running outside the pump shall
be supported with hangers equipped with neoprene padding.
Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows :
Size of Delivery Piping Size of Suction Piping

100mm 80mm
42.8 VALVES
An approved 100mm full bore pilot operated float valve shall be fitted directly to the incoming connecting
pipe at the suction tank. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure in the incoming water supply
pipe of not less than 14 bar and shall comply with BS 1212. The dimensions and the flange thickness
shall comply with BS 4504. The pilot mechanism of the float operated valve shall be fully covered with
acrylic material to prevent mosquito breeding.
An approved 100mm globe valve shall be installed before the 100mm full bore float operated valve and
at the vertical run of the incoming pipe inside the pump room. Globe valve shall be of the type complying
with BS 1010. The valve seat shall be of rubber bonded. The internal surface of the valve body shall
be coated with approved material.
Gate valves and check valves shall be of the approved type used in high quality water works practice
and shall comply with BS 5163 and BS 5153 respectively.
The wedge of the gate valves used shall be of rubber bonded gate. The internal surface of valve body
shall be coated with approved material. The spindle of the gate valves shall be stainless steel or high
tensile brass or aluminium bronze or other approved.
Gate valves shall have the directional arrow and the words "open" and "shut" cast on and shall be
installed near the inlets and outlets of each suction low level tank and storage high level tank.
The suction pipe of each pump shall be fitted with an 80mm gate valve followed by an 80mm rubber
expansion joint. The delivery pipe shall be fitted with an 80mm rubber expansion joint, a 80mm spring
loaded check valve and an 80mm gate valve. The check valve and gate valve shall be separated by a
short pipe of 200mm in length. An 80mm to 100mm enlarger shall be provided between the 80mm pipe
and 100mm rising main. An approved 100mm non-slam type check valve shall be fitted along the rising
main in the pumproom followed by a 100mm gate valve. This check valve shall also be separated from
the gate valve by a short pipe of 300mm in length.
All 80mm and 100mm check valves shall be of approved non-slam silent spring loaded type (with
stainless steel spring).
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-4
42.9 HIGH PRESSURE AND EXPANSION CONNECTION
80mm rubber expansion joint of approved type shall be used to connect the outlet of the pump and the
delivery pipe and shall be flanged at both ends and be able to sustain a working pressure of not less
than 16 bar. The rubber expansion joint shall be limited from expanding excessively in axial direction.
The delivery pipe shall be supported by at least 2 no. of 50mm galvanised mild steel pipe and be
properly secured to the floor or wall for this purpose.
An 80mm rubber expansion joint shall be used to connect the suction pipe and the discharge pipe of
each pump.
42.10 BENDS
All bends used in the pipework shall be of 90 degree long bend flanged at both ends and shall be
cement mortar lined internally in accordance with BS EN 545.
42.11 RESERVED
42.12 FLOAT OPERATED VALVE
Position a 100mm float operated valve as indicated in the Drawings to allow full flow of water from PUB
main.
42.13 POWER SUPPLY
Power supply available for electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current.
42.14 MOTORS
High efficiency electric motors of approved type shall be squirrel-cage, totally enclosed fan cooled type
with minimum Class F insulation except where specified otherwise and be designed for continuous
maximum rating.
Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed, of water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
42.15 MOTOR STARTERS
The starters shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before its installation. The starters shall
provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-buttons or be automatically activated by the
control electrodes in the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks.
The starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty pumpset shall be activated by normal level
floatless control relay unit and the standby pumpset shall be activated by alarm and emergency level
floatless control relay unit. The selection of duty or standby pumpsets shall be determined by a manual
selector switch. Automatic duty change over relay shall also be provided to alternate standby and duty
pumpsets automatically and shall be interconnected to a time setting device to cut off the operation of
the pumpset during night time.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-5
42.15 MOTOR STARTERS (CONT'D)
(a) Star-Delta Starter (For building blocks below 25-storey)
For building blocks below 25-storey, the starters for motors shall be star-delta starters, capable
of limiting current to 2½ times the full load current at (a) standstill (starting up the Plant) and at
(b) changeover (when the starter automatically changes the connections from Star to Delta
winding).
Each starter shall have time relay, overload release, no volt release pilot lamp. The operating
voltage of the control coil shall be 230V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the
above conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. It
shall be so designed such that under 16 operation hours per day, the Mechanical and Electrical
Endurance is not less than 50,000 operations. A manufacture's certificate to this effect shall be
produced when required.
(b) Soft Starters (For building blocks with 25-storey & above)
For building blocks 25-storey and above, the soft starters shall be designed to operate at 3-
phase 400V 50 Hz and shall be suitable for starting/stopping 3-phase induction motor used for
water pumping system. The soft starters shall provide soft acceleration during the starting of
motor and soft deceleration during the stopping of motor. It shall be able to reset by itself
automatically when power supply is resumed after power failure. Built-in fault indication lights
shall also be incorporated in the soft starters to indicate the fault conditions
The approved soft starters shall consist of three pairs of thyristors with full wave control and shall
be designed for continuous operation above 40°C. The soft starters shall also be sized according
to the full load current of the motor and shall comply to IEC 947-4-2 or equivalent as approved.
42.16 TIME SWITCH
Connect digital time switch of approved type within the electric circuit, wired to control the pumping
hours within the preset time. The time switch shall be able to operate on a 24 hour basis with a minimum
of 150 hours reserve to cater for temporary power failure.
42.17 FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS
Floatless level control electrodes mounted on the suction (low level) and storage (high level) tanks in
each building shall be connected directly to the relay units mounted on the wall beside the tanks. These
floatless level control electrodes shall be positioned near to the manhole of the tank and be easily
accessible for maintenance.
The floatless level control electrodes shall be installed on the storage tanks operating at Normal
Demand Settings. The floatless level control electrodes shall be arranged to start and stop the pumpset
at predetermined high and low levels. A floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside
the suction tank shall be used to provide over-riding control of the storage tank floatless level control
relay units such that at a preset low water level in the suction tank, the storage tank floatless level
control relay units will not start the pump.
The floatless level control relay units shall be interconnected to the motor starters through the pumps'
automatic change over relay. Separate floatless level control relay unit shall be installed for the alarm
system and shall be set to activate the alarm device and standby pumpset when the water falls below
a predetermined level. The floatless level control relay unit shall also activate the alarm device and
deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a predetermined overflow level.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of the plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The
unit shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge
from the electrodes.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-6
42.17 FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS (CONT'D)
Electrodes shall be stainless steel and be provided with adequate electrode separators. The ceiling
roses and flexible cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "NL" and "EA" respectively.
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable for easy maintenance.
Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and keep them
as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit as the power
supply wiring.
Provide wiring and conduits from the switchboard inside the pump-room to each of these floatless
control relay units.
All floatless control relay units shall be of the approved type.
42.18 NUMBER OF FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNITS
Provide a total of three number of floatless level control relay units. Where storage tanks are divided
into two or more separate tanks, at least two separate tanks shall be installed with floatless level control
electrodes.
42.18.1 Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 1 (At Storage Tank Room)
Two sets of electrodes for the normal level setting shall be connected so as to activate the starters
independently and to activate the alarm and deactivate the duty pumpset when the water rises to a
predetermined overflow level. The operating points of both sets of floatless level control electrodes
shall be of the same setting.
42.18.2 Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 2 (At Storage Tank Room)
Provide two sets of alarm and emergency electrodes to activate the alarm and standby pumpsets in
case the water level falls below a predetermined level.
42.18.3 Floatless Level Control Relay Unit No. 3 (At Pumproom)
Provide one set of electrodes for the suction tank to actuate a warning indicating light and override the
operation of pumpsets when the water level in the suction tank (low level tank) falls below a
predetermined level. Provide one set of electrodes to activate a warning indicating light and alarm when
the level in the suction tank rises to a predetermined overflow level.
42.19 CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install an approved control panel required to serve the pumproom as shown in the
Drawings. Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control
panel and it shall be near to the entrance of the pumproom.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from
electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing
for rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation and
maintenance purposes.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-7
42.19 CONTROL PANEL (CONT'D)
Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold
such items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a) 1 No. ON/OFF control switch.
(b) 1 No. Automatic/off/Manual Selector rotary switch for Auto and Manual operation as described
in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".
(c) 2 No. Starters as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".
(d) 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phase MCB unit for each starter.
(e) 2 Sets Manual "START"/"STOP" button switch for the starter with pilot lamps indicating "run" and
"trip" as described in Clause 42.15 "Motor Starters".
(f) 1 No. Pump selector switch as described in Clause 42.17 "Floatless Level Control Relay Units".
(g) 1 No. Digital Time switch as described in Clause 42.16 "Time Switch".
(h) 1 No. Relay for reset of 'alarm bell' and 'light'.
(i) 1 No. Relay to cut off the warning device and pumpsets during night time.
(j) 1 No. Relay to activate overflow warning device.
(k) 2 No. Relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.
(l) 3 No. Relay to control the pumpsets.
(m) 3 No. Relays for testing of alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
(n) 1 No. Automatic change over relay.
(o) 1 No. Suction tank low level warning indicating panel light.
(p) 3 No. Alarm indicating panel light.
(q) 6 No. MCB (4A) units for control circuits.
(r) 3 No. Phase indicating panel light with MCB (2A) unit.
(s) 1 No. MCB (4A) unit for alarm circuit.
(t) 2 No. Hour-run counters for pumpsets.
(u) 1 No. Ammeter with appropriate scale and current transformer (C/T) if required.
(v) 1 No. Phase Selector Switch for Ammeter.
(w) 1 No. Test push button for alarm bell and indicating panel lights.
The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO
Rep.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-8
42.20 ELECTRICAL WIRING
Install the cables from the electrical mains isolator in the pumproom.
Internal cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V
3 Phase 50 cycles 4 wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres
for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact with any structural steel work an
efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the steelwork. All
conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be
efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper tape (in
150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m
or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness
of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x
20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted
down.
The entire trunking and conduit installation shall be completed before the cables are drawn. The
number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in
the Code of Practice CP 5.
Run conduits for the floatless level control relay unit wiring inside the building and along the staircase
landing. Provide an inspection joint for every 10 metres run of conduit. Where exposed to rain, the
inspection boxes, elbows and tees shall be sealed. Provide concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and
100mm high to encase the conduits at every floor level.
All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation
testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the
conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables
between motors and junction boxes.
All non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity
conductors shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
42.21 ALARM AND EMERGENCY DEVICE
Alarm device shall be turned on by the alarm and emergency level control relay units at the storage
(high level) tank and the level control relay unit at the suction (low level) tank. This alarm device shall
be in the form of an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed
outside the pumproom and near the entrance. The bell shall be weather-proof and of heavy duty type.
The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep.
The alarm bell shall be cut off during night time by the time switch so that only the emergency start
warning light on the switchboard panel shall function at night when the water level falls below the
'emergency level'. Provide a re-set button for the alarm and the warning device.
The location of the warning device shall be approved by the SO Rep. Provide a shield if the SO Rep
deemed necessary all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The design of the shield shall be approved
by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-9
42.22 INSTALLATION OF PUMP SETS
The water pumpsets shall be properly installed onto the concrete foundation. The 16 mm high tensile
steel foundation bolts shall be cast into the concrete to a minimum depth of :
(a) 100 mm for motor up to 7.5 KW

(b) 150 mm for motor above 7.5 KW
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the pumpsets are installed according to standard
procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to approval by
the SO Rep. The pumpset nearest to the pump room door shall be legibly marked with permanent
lettering and numbering of "P1" and the other "P2", or as directed by the SO Rep.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the foundation by anti-vibration mounting between the base plate
and the foundation. Provide mechanical insulators to isolate the pumpset from the floor if the vibration
is still substantial. All pumpsets shall be properly aligned and levelled.
The pumpsets shall be isolated from the suction and delivery pipes by rubber expansion joints as
specified in Clause 42.9 "High Pressure And Expansion Connection". The outlet of the suction pipe
shall be set in line with the inlet of the pump and the inlet of the delivery pipes in line with the outlet of
the pump. The delivery pipes shall be properly supported and secured by rigid steel supports.
Check the location of the switch board. Should this location be not at an optimum position, inform the
SO Rep immediately.
All bolts, nuts and washers used for mounting the pumpsets shall be of galvanised steel.
42.23 VIBRATION AND NOISE
The vibration and noise generated by pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers in the adjacent
flats.
Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce vibration
and sound.
42.24 INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections
by the SO Rep during progress of the Works.
42.25 STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION
Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose
of 50 parts of chlorine to one million part of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the
operation of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.
42.26 TESTING OF TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the testing of
performance and installation of the transfer pumping system.
Furnish the data on transfer pumping system as produced in Appendix A23 and submit 2 copies to the
SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer pumping system.
All Defect notified during the inspection shall be rectified before the building blocks are handed over to
the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-10
42.27 TELEMONITORING SYSTEM FOR TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
The installation of the telemonitoring system shall involve the production and installation of the
telemonitoring control panel in the transfer-pump room at the ground level and the laying of electrical
cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring system in the lift room A at the roof-top. Should there be a
second transfer-pump room in the apartment block, provide and install a separate telemonitoring control
panel in the second pump room and lay separate electrical cables and conduits to the lift telemonitoring
system in the lift room B at the roof-top.
The Works shall also include the modifications to the control panel(s) of the transfer pumps and the
necessary connections between relevant control panels.
42.27.2 Circuit
The circuitry shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(A) Inputs
The fault signals to be monitored shall be input from the control panel of the transfer pumps.
The following inputs are based on negative logic, directly controlling the corresponding source
light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the purposes of this Clause including
all sub-clauses under it).
Terminal Function
Nil System Power on Battery

13 Control Supply Power Failure
14 L1 Phase Power Failure
17 Spare
18 Emergency and Alarm Start
19 Pump No. 1 Trip
20 Pump No. 2 Trip
21 Roof Tank Overflow
22 Repair Technician's Key Switch On
23 Spare
The following inputs have their related source LED controlled by the processor.
Terminal Function
24 Suction Tank Overflow

26 Suction Tank Low Level
27 Duty Pump Failure
28 Time Switch Control
29 Starter 1
30 Starter 2
31 Spare
32 Spare
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-11
42.27.2 Circuit (Cont'd)
(B) Outputs
The various fault conditions are to be grouped into 7 levels as follows :
Source Condition Level

1 System Power on Battery 5
2 Control Supply Power Failure 5
3 L1 Phase Power Failure 5
6 Spare 0
7 Emergency and Alarm Start 6
8 Pump No. 1 Trip 4
9 Pump No. 2 Trip 4
10 Roof Tank Overflow 3
11 Repair Technician's Key Switch On 0
12 Spare 0
13 Suction Tank Overflow 1
14 Suction Tank Low Level 2
15 Duty Pump Failure 4
16 Spare 0
- Total Failure 7
The circuit shall generate three signals indicating the fault level from 0 to 7 in the form of a 3-bit
binary code; fault level 7 has the highest priority and fault level 0 is the no-fault condition. Fault
level indication is based on the source (not memory) fault condition being on. If more than one
fault condition is present, the highest fault level shall be indicated. Whenever the fault level
changes, fault level 0 (no fault) shall be indicated for 30 secs before the new fault level is
indicated.
These three signals shall drive three relays, R1, R2, and R3 in the lift motor room as well as
three LED in the control panel.
When the repair technician's key switch is on, the corresponding LED, which is directly controlled
by the processor, should be on. This signal shall drive a separate relay R4 in the lift motor room.
The circuit shall function such that when there is no fault all the relays R1, R2, R3 and R4 are
energized. Therefore, a by-pass or override switch shall be provided to keep the four relays
energized when the telemonitoring system is to be isolated for maintenance.
42.27.3 The Control Panel
Based on the circuit described above, the telemonitoring system control panel shall consist of the
following:
(a) Battery Compartment and Battery

(b) Logic Board
(c) Indicator Board
(d) Power Supply Section
and are to be laid out in a cabinet as shown in the Drawings.
All items shall be properly secured to the cabinet with means that allow ease of detachment if necessary.
The cabinet is to be manufactured from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness,
using folded section or angle form bracing for rigidity of construction. It is to provide IP33 protection,
according to BS EN 60529:1992, whilst allowing for sufficient ventilation. The design and construction
must give easy access to all parts of the control panel so as to minimize any hindrance to maintenance
work. The indicator board shall be mounted such that there is a clear view of the LED and the labels
when the cabinet is closed.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-12
42.27.3 The Control Panel (Cont'd)
The entire door arrangement is to be neat and have the following features :
(a) a perspex window for viewing the status of the monitored faults;
(b) a key lock to secure the control panel;
(c) a key switch to register the arrival time of the repair technician;
(d) an indicating light for the supply power on, and
(e) an indicating LED for the override switch on.
Sufficient wall space shall be selected within the pumproom for the wall mounted control panel and it
shall be near to the transfer pump control panel.
42.27.4 Battery
The back-up battery shall be of the sealed lead-acid types and shall provide back-up power supply for
at least 12 hours.
42.27.5 Printed Circuit Board
The layout for the printed circuit boards (hereinafter referred to as "PCB" for the purpose of this clause
including sub-clauses under it) shall be as shown in the Drawings. All items used shall be PCB
mounted. All connections made between the boards and power supply shall be of the plugged-in type.
(a) The Logic Board
The logic board shall contain the plug-in connections for all incoming lines from the control panel
of the transfer pump system and outgoing lines to the lift room. There shall be as much
separation as possible between the high and low voltage lines in the PCB. The board shall
contain a Motorola MC68705P3 microprocessor or other approved.
The pin usage of the microprocessor is as follows :
Port A : Port A is used as the input/output data bus. All 8 lines are connected to the
3 input buffers (74LS244) and the 3 output latches (74LS373).
Port B : Port B is used as the outputs and chip select lines.
Pin Function
0 Memory Error (0 = on)

1 Flash Output (square wave of 2 Hz)
2 Chip select for Memory LED 9 to 16
3 Chip select for Memory LED 1 to 8
4 Chip select for Fault Level LED, Presence of
Repair Technician and Source LED 13 to 16
5 Chip select for Inputs 1 to 8
6 Chip select for Inputs 9 to 12 and Timer DIP Switches
7 Chip select for Inputs 13 to 20
*Chip Select for Inputs = 0 (1 = Hi-Z)

*Chip Select for Outputs = 1 (0 = latched)
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-13
42.27.5 Printed Circuit Board (Cont'd)
(a) The Logic Board (Cont'd)
Port C : Port C is used for miscellaneous function.
Pin Function
0 INPUT : Lamp Test (0 = on)

1 INPUT : Clear Memory (0 = on)
2 OUTPUT : Unused
3 OUTPUT : A square wave of 4 Hz is generated to hold a watchdog
timer in a triggered but not time-out state. The timer is used to reset
the processor should it ever hang. This square-wave output shall be
generated only if the processor is executing the program correctly.
Once the processor hangs, this output shall stop, causing the
watchdog to reset the processor upon time-out. The resetting
process shall not cause any alteration of memory data already
present.
In order to prevent corrupted memory data from being taken as correct, a suitable means shall
be employed to constantly verify the data in memory and to turn on the "MEMORY ERROR" LED
once the data is found to be invalid. A suitable means shall also be employed to ensure that the
input data read is valid, thus preventing any spuring data from being used.
On the logic board, two push buttons, "CLEAR" and "LAMP TEST", shall be provided. The
"LAMP TEST" pushbutton shall cause all processor-controlled LED to turn on when pressed.
Normal indication shall resume when the button is released. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is
pressed momentarily, all timers above 5-sec duration are caused to time-out. This is to assist in
testing and trouble-shooting. When the "CLEAR" pushbutton is held down for 2 secs, all the
"Memory" fault conditions are cleared, including the "MEMORY ERROR" condition.
(b) The Indicator Board
There shall be a green LED, indicating "SYSTEM POWER ON" which is to be directly controlled
by the 5-V DC power supply, three yellow LED, indicating the binary "FAULT LEVEL CODE", a
green LED, indicating the "PRESENCE OF REPAIR TECHNICIAN", and a red LED, indicating
"MEMORY ERROR".
There shall also be two red LED for each fault. One of them shall be controlled directly or
indirectly by the source and the other solely by the processor. Both LED shall be energized on
the occurrence of their corresponding fault. However, once the fault has been rectified, the
source LED shall be de-energized whilst the processor-controlled LED shall remain energized
until the memory is cleared manually.
"SUCTION TANK OVERFLOW" indication must be delayed for 2 seconds. This is to prevent
false and/or intermittent indication.
"SUCTION TANK LOW LEVEL" indication shall be delayed for the number of minutes set by the
"TIMER" DIP switches. The range of this 4-bit timer shall be 0 to 15 minutes.
"DUTY PUMP FAILURE" indication shall be on only when the logic condition (Duty Pump Failure
Input AND Time Switch Control AND NOT Suction Tank Low Level AND NOT Starter 1 AND
NOT Starter 2) is positive. The Suction Tank Low Level condition shall be taken after the preset
delay.
If no other fault condition is present, the "EMERGENCY AND ALARM START" condition shall be
reset when the repair technician is present and for 1 hour after his departure regardless of its
input status. Should another fault come on the indication shall revert to normal. This forced
reset shall be cancelled 1 hour after the technician's departure.
Clear labelling of the faults for each LED shall also be provided on the board.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-14
42.27.6 Power Supply Section
This shall include all items necessary to provide a safe, uninterrupted power supply to the telemonitoring
system and for charging the back-up battery.
42.27.7 Electrical Wiring
The power supply to the system shall be from the blue phase of the transfer pump system after the
isolator.
Cables and electrical wiring carrying 230V shall be of 1.5 mm2 nominal cross-sectional area and PVC
insulated to SS 358.
There shall be seven cables, with 23 strands of 0.2mm diameter and PVC insulated, connecting the
control panel to the four relays (to be provided by the Contractor) in Lift Room A at the roof-top. Should
there be two transfer-pump rooms, the Contractor shall run two sets of cables and conduits. The second
set of cables and conduits shall run to Lift Room B at the roof-top. The colour for these seven cables
shall be red, orange, pink, black, light blue, purple and green. The locations of the termination of the
cables and conduits shall be subjected to the location of the lift telemonitoring system and shall be
All cables and electrical wiring shall be carried in their own conduits.
The conduits which run from the control panel to the lift room shall be 20mm in diameter. The conduits
shall run inside the building and along the staircase landing. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall
be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for
vertical runs. Concrete stumps of 50mm diameter and 100mm high shall be provided to encase the
conduits at every floor level.
All electrical cables and conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. The
conduits shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire of appropriate size. The conduit installation
shall be completed before the cables are drawn. Where applicable, the number of cables to be drawn
into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the Code of Practice CP 5. All non-current carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have
a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
42.27.8 Design Work
All design Works necessary in producing the control panel shall be based on the requirements
aforementioned and is subject to the approval of the SO Rep. All designs, including the PCB artworks,
resulting thereof shall be the sole property of the Employer. Two sets of the relevant drawings shall be
submitted if requested by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
42.27.9 Testing Of Installation
The Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep one month before the completion of the installation for
the testing of the performance and installation of the telemonitoring system.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A24 and submit two copies
to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
All Defects notified shall be rectified within such time as instructed by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-15
42.28 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

(TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM)
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance to the Transfer Pumping System and for providing an efficient call-back service as
specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for
the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter
referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses under
it.
42.28.1 Making Good Defects And Leakages
During the Defects Liability Period, make good all Defect and leakages found in the system and
installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement
or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defect in the Plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out under this Clause including all sub-clauses under it. The supervisor shall be thoroughly
competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system and the
workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and repair of transfer pumping system.
42.28.2 Fortnightly And Monthly Inspection
All parts and equipment comprising the complete transfer pumping system shall be maintained and
inspected strictly in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A25.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the fortnightly and monthly
inspections. Any Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for
a Representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for fortnightly and monthly inspections upon
Substantial Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in
the pump room after completion of each inspection.
Items in the check-list for fortnightly inspection shall include :
(a) General condition of the pumprooms

(b) Correct setting of time switch
(c) Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
(d) Power supply selector switch in "On" position
(e) Control panel indicating lights
(f) Alarm bell and bulb
(g) Suction tank electrode and control module
(h) Motor running current
(i) 80mm check valve
(j) 80mm gate valve
(k) Alignment of couplings
(l) 100mm check valve
(m) 100mm gate valve
(n) Ball float valve
Items required to be inspected monthly shall include all items required for the fortnightly inspection
specified in the foregoing requirements in addition to the following :
(o) Motor insulation

(p) Pump mechanical seal
(q) Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
(r) Contactors and relays
(s) Storage tank electrode and control module
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 42-16
42.28.3 Efficient Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints such as no
water supply or triggering of the alarm bell of the Transfer Pumping System shall be attended to
immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or
Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his maintenance supervisor and the mobile phone
number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any urgent call-
back service can be met.
Provide a set of standby pump to keep the transfer pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps
are taken back to the workshop for repairs.
In the event that the Contractor fails to :
(a) respond within 30 minutes after being called; or

(b) attend to an urgent call or complaint immediately upon notification; or
(c) carry out the fortnightly and monthly inspection of the transfer pumping system;
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer or deducted by the Employer from monies due or
becoming due to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the SO Rep may in addition exercise his
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the transfer pumping system or to
carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the transfer pumping system due to or arising out of
the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect,
vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
42.29 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS PRIOR TO ISSUANCE

OF MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATE
One month before the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with HDB
Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after this joint inspection shall
be rectified by the end of the succeeding one month commencing from the expiry date of the Defects
Liability Period.
Rectify the outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on the Works before arranging for
inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying completion of
rectification of Defect.
After the second final inspection by the Representative from HDB Branch Office, a list of outstanding
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect on the list within
fourteen days.
If the Contractor fails to rectify and make good the Defect on the second final inspection, the SO Rep
Contractor. Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall in addition have the right to engage his own
workmen or other contractors to rectify and make good all Defect and the cost of rectification and
Section 43/.....
BLDG17/S42.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-1
SECTION 43
BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
43.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The Works shall include the provision, installation and testing of booster pumping system, based on the
data given, complete with motors, pipework, valves, flow sensors, switch gears, electrical wiring, control
panels and all necessary accessories.
Details of the proposed booster pump installation shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval. All
Works shall comply with Public Utilities (Water Supply) Regulations and SSCP 48: Code of Practice for
Water Services, the requirements and regulations of the Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB and
other relevant Statutory requirements
43.2 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND DETAILS OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM
Submit one set of the following to the SO Rep for approval within two months from the date of the Letter
of Acceptance :
(a) Detailed proposal complete with information as produced in Appendix A26 duly filled and signed
by the Contractor.
(b) Characteristic curves of every pump to indicate the point(s) of performance.
The Works shall commence only after the approval of the proposal by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall
seek fresh approval for any deviation from the approved proposal, failing which the whole installation
shall not be accepted by the SO Rep. The written approval of the Drawings shall in no way affect vary
or relieve the Contractor of his responsibility or obligations should the Plant or any of its parts proved
inadequate with regard to strength, performance, efficiency or other aspect.
43.3 BUILDING-IN
The Employer reserves the right to build in any steel supporting members or frameworks for the
pumping system. Supply all relevant dimensions and information on these pumping system and steel
member supports and attend to the work all at the Contractor's cost and expense. The Contractor shall
be responsible for any error or damages found subsequently.
43.4 BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS
All booster pumps of approved type shall be of vertical in-line centrifugal pumps with mechanical seals
and high performance efficiency, driven by totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) electric motors except
otherwise specified in the Specifications. The casing of the pump shall be of stainless steel, bronze or
other approved metal. The impeller shall be bronze or stainless steel and the shaft shall be of the
stainless steel type and able to transmit the required power and to ensure the rigidity of rotating parts.
The entire length of the shaft shall be suitably protected against corrosion and be supported by heavy
duty bearings in robust housing well clear of the rotating parts. The shaft seal shall be of the mechanical
seal type. Bearings shall be protected against corrosion and be efficiently lubricated. The make of the
pumps shall be tested and approved by the SO Rep. The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage, totally
enclosed fan cooled type and with at least Class B insulation except where specified otherwise and be
designed for continuous maximum rating.
The power supply for the electric motors shall be 400 volts, 3 phase 50 cycles alternating current. 230
volts single phase motor shall be used as and when directed and approved by the SO Rep. The power
of the motor shall not be more than 1 kW.
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-2
43.4 BOOSTER PUMPS AND MOTORS (CONT'D)
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the booster pumps shall be as follows :
No. of Dwelling Unit served Specified Flow Rate Pressure Head Shut-off Head
by Booster Pump (l/s) (m) (m)
20 or below 3 9 Not less than 12
Above 20 5 9 Not less than 12
The pumpsets shall be marked with permanent letterings "P1" & "P2" respectively.
43.5 PIPE AND FITTINGS
All pipes and pipe fittings shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB. All stainless
steel pipes, fittings and accessories shall conform to BS 4127:Part 2. All ductile iron pipes and fittings
shall comply with BS EN 545. Ductile iron flange type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be internally cement lined in accordance with the relevant clauses
in BS EN 545. Test the mixture according to the relevant clauses in BS EN 545. Apply two coats of
PUB approved epoxy to the portion where cement lining is not possible.
Pipe joints, fittings and special tees, for all ductile iron distribution mains and drawout pipes at roof level
shall be ductile iron flanged type. Flanges type PN 16 shall comply with BS EN 545.
The internal and external surfaces of the stainless steel pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and
free from Defect. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Pipes shall be factory marked with manufacturer's name or identification mark and classification of
pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Unless otherwise specified, use light gauge stainless steel pipes for water supply. The stainless steel
pipe fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall comply with BS
864:Part 2 and all PUB latest requirements.
All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated
by neoprene material. All pipes shall avoid running directly above any bedroom of a dwelling unit.
Otherwise, noise/vibration abatement device shall be provided. Support pipes with stainless steel
supports and clips or concrete supports. All pipes which pass through walls or floor shall be insulated
and sealed with approved compound. All pipes which do not pass through the wall or floor but running
along the wall shall be supported with built in stainless steel/supports and clips spaced at 1m centres.
Unless otherwise specified, sizes of pipework shall be as follows :
Size of Suction Piping - 42mm

Size of Discharge Piping - 42mm
Size of By-Pass Piping - 15mm
Connect suction pipe of each pump from the 100mm interconnecting pipe of roof storage tanks and
connect the discharge pipe of each pump to the 100mm distribution main which serves the topmost 3
storeys only. No mechanical tee shall be used for connections between suction pipe and
interconnecting pipe and between discharge pipe and distribution main.
Provide end thrust supports at both ends and bends of 100mm distribution main according to the
Drawings. All bolts, nuts and washers used for the ductile iron pipes for installation shall be galvanised
steel whilst those for the stainless steel pipes and supports shall be stainless steel of similar grade.
43.6 VALVES
Provide suction pipe of each pump with a 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Fit the delivery pipe of each
pump with a 40mm full bore spring loaded check valve and 40mm full bore ball stop valve. Provide the
by-pass pipe with a 15mm stop cock. All valves used shall comply with PUB Water Supply Regulations.
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-3
43.7 LABELLING STICKERS
Stick aluminium foil stickers of length 75mm and width 40mm bearing the words "DO NOT OPEN" onto
the 100mm gate valves at the draw-out pipes from storage tanks to the 100mm distribution main serving
the top-most 3 storeys.
The base colour of the aluminium foil stickers shall be in white and the wordings shall be in red. The
dimensions of the wordings shall be of height 10mm and width 6mm and the line thickness 1mm. Submit
a sample of the stickers to the SO Rep for approval.
43.8 POWER SUPPLY
Power supply to the booster pumps and control system at the roof storage (high level) tank room shall
be connected from the electrical mains isolator in the roof storage tank room.
43.9 MOTOR SOFT-STARTERS
Soft-starters for motors shall be of the type as approved by the SO Rep. The soft-starters shall provide
means for the soft-start and soft-stop of the motors automatically. The operating voltage of the soft-
starter shall be 230V. Both soft-start time and soft-stop time of the soft-starter shall be set at 3 seconds.
Each soft-starter shall be designed to operate intermittently during the 24 hours of operation per day.
The soft-starters shall be wired in such a way that the duty and standby booster pumps shall be actuated
by flow sensors and floatless level switch. Selection of duty or standby booster pumps shall be
determined by a selector switch. Provide automatic duty change over relay to alternate standby and
duty booster pumps and it shall be interconnected to a flow sensor to start and stop the operation of the
booster pumps according to actual water demand.
43.10 FLOW-SENSORS
The flow sensor shall be of the type approved by the SO Rep. A flow sensor shall be installed at the
central discharge pipe of the booster pumps. Monitoring head of the sensor shall be of stainless steel.
The enclosure protection shall be at least IP 67.
The voltage of the flow sensor shall be 24V DC. The flow rate range shall be set to 115mm per seconds
(adjustable range : 10mm per second to 2m per second).
43.11 FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT
Floatless level control electrodes mounted on each storage (high level) tank shall be connected directly
to the relay unit mounted inside the control panel. Position the floatless level control electrodes near to
the manhole of the tank for easy maintenance.
Arrange the floatless level control electrodes to start and stop the pumpset at pre-determined levels.
Interconnect the floatless level switch to the motor soft-starters through the pumps' automatic change
over relay.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of the plug-in relay unit type for easy maintenance. The
unit shall have built-in arrester circuit to protect against surge from power source and lightning surge
from the electrodes.
Provide stainless steel electrodes with adequate electrodes separators. The ceiling roses and flexible
cables from the electrode holders shall be legibly marked "BP".
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable for maintenance.
Run the wiring and conduits from the electrodes to the switch board panel and keep them as short as
possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same conduit which contains the power
supply wiring.
All floatless control relay units shall be of the approved type.
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-4
43.12 CONTROL PANEL
Provide and install approved control panel required to serve the booster pumpsets. Sufficient wall
space shall be selected within the roof storage tank room for the wall mounted control panel and shall
be near to the booster pumpsets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Unless otherwise specified, the panel shall be of the front connected type and manufactured from
electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness, using folded section or angle form bracing
for rigidity of construction. The panel shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof. The
construction shall be such that it allows for ready and easy access to the interior of the cubicles for
operation and maintenance purposes.
Provide control panel with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all incoming and outgoing
cables.
Mount instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, etc directly on front panel with locknuts to hold such
items firmly in position under all conditions of operation.
The control panel shall contain the following :
(a) 1 No. Rotary selector switch for Auto selection

(b) 1 No. Rotary key selector switch with 3 points selection
(c) 2 No. Soft-Starters as specified in the Clause 43.9 "Motor Soft-Starters"
(d) 2 Sets ON/OFF isolators with 3 phases MCB unit for starters
(e) 1 No. Delay Timer with 0 to 6 seconds setting
(f) 1 No. Timer with 0 to 30 minutes setting
(g) 6 No. Relays to control the pumpsets
(h) 1 No. Automatic change over relay
(i) 5 No. MCB unit for control circuits
(j) 3 No. Phase indicating panel light
(k) 2 No. Pump "run" indicating panel light
(l) 2 No. Pump "trip" indicating panel light
(m) 1 No. Low level warning indicating panel light
The whole of the electrical Works shall comply with SS CP5 and be subject to the approval of the SO
Rep.
Install cables from the electrical mains isolator in roof storage tank room or at other locations.
Internal cables and wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS 358 suitable for a 400V 3 phase 50 cycles 4
wire system and they shall be carried in conduit or cable trunking.
Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles at maximum 1m centres
for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush butt to
adaptors boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist of a flanged coupling,
lead washer and smooth bore bush. In the event that the conduit comes in contact with any structural
steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic connection shall be made between the conduit and the
steelwork. All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and
shall be efficiently earthed with copper earthwire (in conduits and 100mm x 50mm trunking) and copper
tape (in 150mm x 75mm trunking). Copper earth wire or tape shall be of the appropriate sizes.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel sheets, in 1.83m or
2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on one end of each length. The
trunking shall be treated with approved anticorrosion paint and finishing paint to a minimum thickness
of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be effected by means of round headed bolts and nuts. 4mm x
20mm copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall be tinned where it is bolted
down.
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-5
43.13 ELECTRICAL WIRING (CONT'D)
number of cables to be drawn shall comply with SS CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with insulation testing
equipment of the `Megger' type at 500V and an infinity reading shall be obtained before the conductors
are connected to any apparatus.
Where wiring is to be in conduit or duct buried in the floor, it shall terminate in approved junction boxes
adjacent to the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible conduit enclosing the cables
between the motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity conductors shall
have a cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in CP 5.
43.14 INSTALLATION OF BOOSTER PUMPS
Install booster pumpsets on the floor/wall and support and secure them with stainless steel or concrete
supports along the pipes closed to suction and discharge side of the booster pumpsets.
Install pressure gauge of appropriate scales at the discharge pipe of each booster pump. The pressure
gauge shall comply with BS1780 for measuring gauge pressure. The pressure gauge shall be marked
with the manufacturer's trademark or brand name.
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the booster pumps are installed according to
standard procedure of installation or according to the pump supplier's recommendation subject to the
Check the location for the switch board. Inform the SO Rep immediately should this location be not at
an optimum position.
43.15 VIBRATION AND NOISE
Vibration and noise generated by the pumpsets shall not be unduly disturbing to dwellers immediately
below.
Provide and fix all necessary noise and vibration abatement devices and equipments to reduce the
vibration and sound.
43.16 STERILISATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND PUMPS BEFORE OPERATION
Clean and flush all pipes, fittings and pumps internally with sufficient chemical to give the water a dose
of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water (ie. 50 ppm) before the commencement of the
operation of the system, in accordance with PUB requirement.
43.17 INSPECTION DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
Provide all necessary facilities such as torch lights etc and access leading to the tanks for inspections
by the SO Rep during of progress of the Works.
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-6
43.18 TESTING OF BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for testing the
performance and installation of the booster pumping system.
Furnish data on booster pumping system as set out in Appendix A27 and submit 2 copies to the SO Rep
one week before the testing of the booster pumping system.
the Employer, failing which action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
43.19 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

(BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM)
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance to the booster pumping system and for providing an efficient call-back service as
specified hereunder for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for
the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter
referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of this Clause including all sub-clauses under
it.
43.19.1 Making Good Defects And Leakages
installation, replace and/or repair all defective parts or items whenever required if such replacement or
repair has been necessitated by reasons of Defect in the Plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall have a Supervisor-in-Charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out under this clause including all sub clauses under it. The Supervisor shall be thoroughly
competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of the booster pumping system and the
workmen shall also be skillful in the service, maintenance and repair of booster pumping system.
43.19.2 Monthly Inspection
Maintain and inspect all parts and equipment comprising the complete booster pumping system strictly
in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A28.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. The Contractor shall always arrange
for a representative from HDB Branch Office to be present during these visits.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a maintenance schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works.
Items in the Check-list shall include :
(a) Flow sensors

(b) Soft-starters, relays and control module
(c) Power supply selector switch in "On" position
(d) Control panel indicating lights
(e) Electrodes in storage tanks
(f) Motor running current
(g) Motor insulation
(h) Pump mechanical seal
(i) Pressure gauges
(j) 40mm check valve and ball stop valves
(k) Thrust supports at distribution main
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 43-7
43.19.3 Efficient Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. Attend to all complaints immediately upon
notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.
The Contractor shall provide a mobile phone for his Maintenance Supervisor and the mobile phone
number shall be given to the respective Branch Office so that immediate notification of any call-back
service can be met.
Provide a set of standby pump to keep the booster pumping system functioning when the faulty pumps
are taken back to the workshop for repairs.

(b) attend to complaint immediately upon notification; or
(c) carry out the monthly inspection of the booster pumping system;
the Employer may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the booster pumping system or
carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the booster pumping system arising out of the
Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary

Branch Office and the SO Rep for a final joint inspection. All Defect listed after the joint inspection shall
Liability Period.
Rectify all outstanding Defect and conduct detailed checks on work before arranging for inspection by
Representative from HDB Branch Office for the purpose of certifying complete rectification of Defect.
Defect shall be issued to the Contractor and the Contractor shall rectify all Defect in the list within
fourteen days.
shall exercise his right under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to impose charges against the
Section 44/.....
BLDG17/S43.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-1
SECTION 44
DRY / WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION
44.1 GENERAL
It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system. The
omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction, installation materials, or
specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
For buildings under construction, dry/wet rising mains shall be provided according to the requirements
of the FSSD. The Contractor shall work closely with the SO Rep to ensure that all requirements for the
provision of rising mains are complied with during the construction stage. All rising mains (dry and wet)
shall be installed progressively as the building gains height and made operational for all storeys (except
the uppermost three storeys) as soon as the uppermost completed storey reaches habitable height of
24m. Dry rising mains if used in lieu of wet rising mains in the initial stage shall be converted to wet
rising mains when the uppermost completed storey reaches habitable height of 60m. All breeching
inlets, landing valves, water tanks and pumps where required shall be provided and made readily
operational. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to enable the officers from FSSD,
SO Rep, and/or officers from HDB (Technical Department) to carry out any inspection and testing during
the construction and completion stages. Charges shall be imposed on the Contractor under the
“Nuisance and Irregularities” clause for any non-compliance with the FSSD’s requirements detected
during site inspection by FSSD, SO Rep and/or HDB (Technical Department). The Contractor is also
subject to action taken by FSSD under the relevant Act/Regulations.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered under BCA registration head of ME06
(Fire Prevention & Protection System) for the Works. The Contractor shall test and commission the
works to the satisfaction of the SO Rep, FSSD and/or the appointed RI. Upon the final completion of
the works, the Contractor shall prepare all necessary test reports & certificates to be endorsed by the
SO Rep and submitted to HDB (Technical Department). HDB (Technical Department) reserves the
right to audit the completed works and the Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for the
inspection when requested.
(a) Dry rising main shall be installed in building where any floor is at a height beyond 10m and not
exceeding 60m above the ground level. The dry rising main shall be complete with landing valve
at every storey, breeching inlet and breeching inlet cabinet (where applicable).
The minimum nominal bore of a dry rising main shall be :
(i) 100mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main does not exceed 45m in height.
The rising main shall be complete with 2 way breeching inlet.
(ii) 150mm galvanised steel Class 'C' where the rising main exceed 45m in height. The rising
main shall be complete with 4 way breeching inlet.
(b) For building which is more than 60m, wet rising main shall be provided according to SS CP 29
and the requirements as shown in the Drawings.
Fire intercom system shall be provided between the pump rooms of the transfer pumps and the
fire pumps.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as shown in Appendix A29.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-2
44.2.2 Rules And Regulations
Ensure that the installation of dry/wet rising main system is in accordance with the latest requirements
of the following :
(a) Building Control Act and the Regulations made thereunder;

(b) Public Utilities Act, and the Regulations made thereunder;
(c) Professional Engineers Act;
(d) Fire Safety Act;
(e) SS CP 29;
(f) Any other relevant rules, regulations and by-laws.
In cases of discrepancies between the various standards, the local standards shall prevail.
44.2.3 Material
Material, appliances and components shall comply with the requirements of the relevant Singapore
Standards, British Standards or their equivalent.
Particular items shall comply with the following requirements or their equivalent :
(a) Ball Valves BS 1212 : Part 1, 2 or 3

(b) Boxes for landing valves BS 5041 : Part 4, 5
(c) Breeching inlets BS 5041 : Part 3
(d) Landing valves BS 5041 : Part 1, 2
(e) Pipes BS 1387, ASTM A120
(f) Pipe fittings BS 1740
(g) Pipe and valve flanges BS 10 or BS 4504
(h) Pressure gauges BS 1780
(i) Gate valves BS 5163
(j) Starting switches (automatic) BS 587
(k) Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols BS 5499 : Part 1
44.2.4 Quality Of Goods And Materials
The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and
the relevant Authorities and shall also comply with the relevant Code of Practice as stipulated. All
materials used shall be of the approved type unless otherwise specified.
Where products are manufactured under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not
be necessary unless otherwise specified. The SO Rep shall be consulted when in doubt.
Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.
44.2.5 Approval/Submission Of Drawings And Details
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all wet and dry riser routes,
legends and all other related mechanical works based on actual site installations for the production of
as-built drawings.
44.2.6 Installation
(a) Seek approval from the SO Rep before any hacking work is to be done.
(b) For rising main pipe and down-comer (fire fighting) through the floor slabs, provide concrete curb
around the rising main pipe. The concrete curb shall be 100mm high and surrounding the pipe.
Casting of the concrete curb shall be done together with re-casting of concrete slab as one single
operation. The concrete curb and slab shall be water tight.
(c) The Works shall include hacking, coring, drilling etc, as well as re-casting the concrete slab. The
Contractor shall provide and cast water-proof concrete slab of not lesser strength than the
original slab.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-3
44.2.7 Damage To Existing Roof Structures And Roofing System
For Works to existing building blocks, the Contractor shall liaise with the relevant Branch Office or Town
Council for a joint inspection together with the SO Rep to determine the existing roof condition before
the commencement of the Works. All defects noted shall be recorded in writing and verified by the
parties concerned before the commencement of the Works.
Upon the Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall engage the same roofing specialist
contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing roofing system, to replace any broken or
cracked secondary roof slab and carry out all the repairs and reinstatement Works to the damaged
waterproofing membrane and roof structure.
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall, upon verbal or written notification by the SO
Rep, engage the same roofing specialist contractor, who had provided the warranty for the existing
roofing system, to repair immediately any leakage in the roof caused by the Contractor.
44.3.1 Pipeworks & Fittings
(a) General
Pipework for dry/wet rising mains shall be galvanised steel conforming to BS 1387 or ASTM
A120 and BS 1740. Tubes/pipes and fittings used shall be suitable for pressures up to 21 bars.
Mill certificates shall be produced on request to countercheck with the heat numbers of
tubes/pipes at the Site.
All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the pipes connected. Elbows shall be
used, where practicable, in preference to bends; square elbows shall not be permitted. Valves
used shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29.
Valves used shall be UL and FM listed according to the pressure rating of SS CP29. All
fittings/valves used shall be rated at least 1.5 times the system working pressure. All valves shall
be kept securely strapped with padlock.
All underground pipework shall be of ductile iron cement lined or other approved material.
Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to ensure venting and draining.
The clearance between pipework and wall and any other fixtures shall be as shown in the
construction detail of service duct for dry/wet rising main.
Joints shall not be embedded in any wall, floor or ceiling and pipework shall not be embedded in
the structure of floors. Where pipework passes through walls, sleeves shall be provided.
Sleeves shall be of the same metal as the pipe. The space between pipework and sleeve shall
be plugged with an approved sealant.
All entry and exit holes to or from a building for pipework shall be sealed and plugged. The
sealant shall be mastic compound or silicone rubber. Where the pipework enters the building
through a large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking plate not lesser than 6mm thick shall be built
into the wall of the hole or duct; the service pipes shall pass through clearance sockets welded
to the plate and the space between pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged.
(b) Pipe Joints
All piping shall be installed by means of flanged fittings, mechanical pipe couplings or other
approved means.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. Flanged joints shall be made with flat ring
gaskets suitable for the pressure and temperature and extending to the inside of the bolt circles.
Mechanical pipe couplings shall be self-centring and engage and lock in place the grooved or
shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive watertight couple. Coupling housing clamps
shall consist of two or more metal castings holding in place a composition water sealing gasket
so designed that the internal water pressure increases the watertightness of the seal. The
coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two or more heat treated carbon steel bolts
and nuts. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the pipe coupling manufacturer's latest
specifications. The entire coupling installation shall be in accordance with the latest
manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed
combination of fittings, gaskets and grooves.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-4
44.3.1 Pipeworks & Fittings (Cont’d)
(b) Pipe Joints (Cont’d)
Couplings and fittings used shall be FM and UL listed according to the pressure rating of SS
CP29.
(c) Pipe Supports
Typical pipework hangers for the dry/wet rising main and down-comer (fire fighting) system shall
be as shown in the Drawings. Support the pipework on main load bearing members of the
structure. The method of support shall be done according to the practice in the industry subject
to the approval of the SO Rep.
Rising main support shall be located at every storey. Horizontal pipe runs shall be provided with
hangers spaced at a maximum distance of 4m.
(d) Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall be painted in accordance with the provisions of
Section 23.
All pipework shall be stencilled with directional arrows of minimum 200 x 30mm in size.
A sample showing the pipework painting and welded flange shall be provided to the SO Rep for
approval.
44.3.2 Breeching Inlet
Provide inlets with instantaneous male couplings for connection to the Singapore Civil Defence Force's
63.5mm diameter standard hose to each rising main with a two-way breeching inlet for a 100mm, or 4
way breeching inlet for a 150mm diameter rising main, at a level of about 760mm above ground level.
Each breeching inlet shall conform with the requirements of BS 5041:Part 3.
Enclose all inlets in a rust-proof steel inlet box with glass front. Position the inlet box with its lower edge
between 400mm and 600mm above ground level. The position of inlets shall be indicated on inlet box
using appropriate signs in accordance with BS 5499: Part 1 and using a letter height of at least 50mm.
Inlets shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains. The inlet box shall be installed with key lock. Where
more than 1 stack are provided for the rising main, the labelling of the rising main shall be subject to
the approval of the SO Rep.
Provide all pipework of rising main that falls below inlet box level with an additional 25mm drain valve
at the lowest point of the pipework, together with either fixed piping or an adequate length of flexible
tubing (fitted with a suitable coupling for connection to the valve) to conduct water from the valve to a
suitable drain.
Where such a low level drain is fitted, provide a permanent notice in 25mm (minimum) block letters of
a suitable colour on a contrasting background and place it in a position adjacent to the valve reading
'DRY RISING MAIN - DRAIN VALVE' or 'WET RISING MAIN -DRAIN VALVE'. Provide another
permanent notice in the inlet box, similar in size to the indicator plates mentioned in BS 5041: Part 5,
reading 'LOW LEVEL DRAIN VALVE IN .........' (state location of the valve). The low level drain valve
shall be kept securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
44.3.3 Landing Valve
Provide landing valve with an instantaneous female coupling for connection to the Singapore Civil
Defence Force's 63.5mm diameter standard hose for each rising main as shown in the Drawings.
The SO Rep reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to remove items vulnerable to be stolen such
as handwheel, blank caps, chain, etc from the landing valves which have already been installed. The
Contractor shall deliver these items for storage at a place to be decided by the SO Rep. No claim for
such Works shall be allowed as all costs and expenses for such work are deemed to be included in the
Contract Sum. The Superintending Officer's decision on which items are considered vulnerable to be
stolen shall be final binding on and conclusive against the Contractor. The landing valve shall be kept
securely strapped and padlock closed except when in use.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-5
44.3.3 Landing Valve (Cont’d)
(a) Location
Provide landing valves at a height with its lowest point between 760mm and 1m above the floor
level.
(b) Recesses And Enclosures For Landing Valves
Enclose landing valves for rising mains within a duct as shown in the Drawings.
Where a landing valve is in an open recess, duct or alcove, and where a landing valve of a rising
main is enclosed in a box, the opening giving access to the landing valve shall not be lesser than
150mm clearance on both sides and not lesser than 230mm below the centre line of the outlet
of the landing valve and not lesser than 250mm clearance above the handwheel. The depth of
the opening shall not be greater than is necessary, and the front edge of the female coupling of
the landing valve shall not be more than 75mm behind the face of the door. Allow adequate
space around the valve to permit easy maintenance and testing.
Signplate in block letters of height not less than 50mm with the words 'DRY RISING MAIN
OUTLET', 'WET RISING MAIN OUTLET' or `DOWN-COMER (FIRE FIGHTING) OUTLET' for
the respective rising mains shall be mounted on the door.
Landing valves shall be painted yellow for dry rising mains and red for wet rising mains and
down-comers (fire fighting).
(c) Anti-Theft Device
Landing valves are to be equipped with means to prevent easy removal of the ear knobs and the
plastic covers. Such measures shall be in the form of a 3mm thick brass cap duct cover & a
3mm x 220mm carbon steel chain. The brass cap shall be tightly fit into the ear knob to prevent
easy access to the bolt & nut securing the ear knob. The cover shall be secured to the
landing valve by the carbon steel chain. The SO Representative reserves the right to request a
sample for approval purpose.
44.3.4 Automatic Air Release Valve For Rising Mains
A suitable automatic air release valve shall be provided at the highest point in each rising main to permit
air in the pipe to discharge to atmosphere when water is pumped in at ground level.
The automatic air release valve shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel
floats and guides, and non-corrodible valves and seats.
44.3.5 Electrical Earthing Of Rising Mains
Rising mains shall be electrically earthed as shown in the Drawings. Joints which do not provide
electrical continuity shall be bonded.
All the rising mains that are situated in the vicinity of any lightning conductor, shall be bonded to the
lightning conductor in accordance with the requirements of the code on lightning protection.
44.3.6 Drain Valves
Provide each breeching inlet with a drain valve in the form of a 25mm gate valve complying with the
requirements of BS 5154, rating PN 16.
For ease of attaching a drain hose, the drain valve outlet shall be positioned so that it faces in the same
direction as, and is at a lower level than, the inlet connections to the breeching inlet.
The outlet of the drain valve shall have 25mm male threads complying with the requirements of BS 21,
and shall be fitted with a female blank cap and chain.
44.3.7 Blank Caps
Provide each inlet with a female instantaneous blank cap acceptable to FSSD. Attach every blank cap
to the breeching inlet and landing valve by a suitable lug, s-hook and chain.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-6
44.3.8 Signboard
The breeching inlets shall be identified by an appropriate sign reading `DRY' or 'WET RISING MAIN'.
Where the inlets are not readily visible from the outside, a sign shall be posted in a conspicuous place
directing the Singapore Civil Defence Force to the inlets subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
44.4.1 Wet Rising Main System
Generally, a water supply capable of providing a minimum of 27 litres per second for a residential
building or 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building at all times shall be
required.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum common water
supply shall be as stated below :
(a) For a residential building 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second
for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.
(b) For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main
and 19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate
of 190 litres per second.
The supply from the breeching inlets shall discharge openly into the tank and at a level of not less than
150mm above the maximum water level in the tank.
To reduce the risk of hose bursting, provisions shall be made in accordance with BS 5401 : Part 1 so
that when the water is shut off at the nozzle the static pressure in any line of hose connected to a landing
valve does not exceed 8 bar.
To dispose of excess flows and pressures over and above those required (ie. when only one jet is in
use) a pressure control valve shall be incorporated in the body of the landing valve which is then
permanently connected into a relief pipe, where applicable. This relief pipe shall run throughout the
length of the wet rising main installation and shall terminate either back into the suction tank or to drain.
The relief pipe shall be 100mm diameter galvanised steel. All pump control panels shall be of IP 54
enclosures.
44.4.2 Wet Rising Main Water Tank
Unless agreeable by the FSSD, tanks supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as
suction or storage tanks for wet rising mains.
The tank shall be compartmented into two separate water-tight sections connected by a valve, normally
kept open, to permit tank maintenance without interruption to the water supply. Nevertheless, when
more than one water tank is provided in parallel to store the required amount of water, tank
compartmentation is not necessary provided the tanks are interconnected with isolating valves which
are secured open.
Each tank or tank compartment shall be provided with a ductile iron cement lined overflow pipe of at
least 100mm in diameter, adequately supported, and extended to discharge into a suitable drain.
Ductile iron cement lined drain pipe of at least 100mm diameter and controlled by a gate valve shall be
provided for each tank or compartment.
Voltex inhibitors shall be installed where applicable to maintain the required water tank storage capacity
according to SS CP29.
An approved visual level indicator shall be fitted to show the depth of water in each tank or compartment.
A permanent aluminium gooseneck ladder with safety guard extending a sufficient distance above the
top of the tank shall be provided for each tank. UPVC ladder shall also be provided inside each tank.
Reinforced concrete tank shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 9 "Reinforced
Concrete Water Tank" including all clauses & subclauses under it. However, notwithstanding the
requirements specified therein, sterilisation of water is not required.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-7
44.4.3 Wet Rising Main Pumps
The horizontal split case fire pumps for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps shall be listed by
PSB and UL or FM. The fire pumps / motors for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps / motors
shall be tested by approved accredited laboratory and UL (Underwriter Laboratories Inc.), FM (Factory
Mutual Approvals). The pumps / motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow
requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150mm height plinths. Spring
type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration transmission to the
building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be the spring mounted
type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water leakage / splash.
The pumps shall have an independent source of power supply and each shall be capable of providing
independently the necessary flow and pressure requirements.
The duty pump (or standby pump, in the event of failure of the duty pump) shall start automatically when
there is a flow of water or when a fall in pressure occurs in the rising main exceeding 5% of the fire
pump churning pressure. The pump shall be fully operational within 30 seconds after starting. Means
shall be provided for manual starting by reproducing the pressure reduction. Once started, the pump
shall run continuously until stopped manually. Means shall be provided for the 'lagging' pump to operate
should the 'leading' pump fail to function upon closing of the starting circuit.
(a) Pressure-sensor switches shall be supplied and fitted on the main supply pipes to initiate
automatic starting of the pumps. Pressure-sensor switches shall be of approved type with
provisions for independent adjustment of high and low pressure settings. The automatic starting
of any pump shall also initiate a visible and audible indication in the main fire alarm panel, if any.
(b) Floatless level control relay unit complete with electrodes shall be provided for each suction and
storage tank to override the control of all the pressure switches in such a way that at a pre-set
low water level, the pressure switches shall not cause starting of the jockey and wet rising main
pumps. In addition, any pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit at that low water
level.
The relay unit shall also actuate a visible and audible alarm indication when the water level
reaches a pre-determined high or low limit.
(c) The associated jockey pump shall be controlled by pressure-sensor switches so as to maintain
a static pressure in the wet rising main about 1 bar (10m) higher than the pressure when the wet
rising main pump is churning. The jockey pump shall be automatically de-energised when any
of the wet rising main pump operates.
All pumps shall be capable of being started and stopped manually.
All pumps shall be primed automatically at all times. This will be effected if the pumps are sited so that
at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of the centre of pump
suction. Where this is not possible, separate priming tanks maintained automatically and foot valves
shall be provided for each pump.
Pumps which are automatically controlled shall be provided with a reliable float-operated air release or
equivalent valve not less than 12mm in size, to automatically release air from the pump.
Means must be provided to allow a continuous flow of water through each pump at a sufficient rate to
prevent overheating of the pump when churning.
The pump motor capacity shall be such that the maximum motor current in any phase under any
condition of pump load and voltage unbalance shall not exceed the motor-rated full-load current
multiplied by the service factor. The maximum service factor at which a motor can be used is 1.15.
These service factors shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard MG-1.
A test valve and direct reading flow meter shall be provided on a pipe connection coupled to the pump
delivery branch downstream of the check valve to test the pump. The test piping shall be sized not less
than the meter size appropriate to the pump rated capacity. The test piping shall discharge to a suitable
drain.
A discharge pressure gauge shall be connected to the discharge of each pump. The gauge shall have
a valve with arrangement for draining. Its indication dial shall have a range of at least twice the rated
working pressure of the pump.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-8
44.4.3 Wet Rising Main Pumps (Cont’d)
All electrical wiring, including that for the control and monitoring circuits shall be in accordance with PUB
requirements and shall be :
(a) of the fire-resistive type complying with SS 299 or
(b) enclosed in a 2-hour fire-rated duct throughout the run to the pump room.
A fire-rated duct may house electrical wiring for other emergency services if the running of the wiring
does not affect the fire-integrity of the duct.
The sharing of a common electrical rising main for the wet rising main and other emergency services is
acceptable provided that there is proper protection by fuses or circuit breakers for each and every
emergency service.
Any switches on the power feed to the motor shall be locked "ON" and clearly labelled "WET RISING
MAIN PUMP - NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE".
Acoustic treatment shall be provided to reduce the noise generated from the pump to be within the
MEWR guideline. The proposal for noise reduction shall be approved by the SO Rep before the actual
commencement of the pump room pipework installation.
44.4.4 Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels
The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior
to the manufacture of control panels.
Provision at the Wet rising main pump Control Panel shall include but not limited to the following :
(a) For each and every pump, indicating lamps shall be provided to show that power supply is
available on every phase of each motor. Power failure on any phase of the supply to the wet
rising main pumps shall be automatically indicated on the control panel.
(b) MANUAL/OFF/AUTO rotary selector switches shall be provided for each pump.
(c) "Start" and "Stop" push-button switches shall be provided for each pump.
(d) Lead/Lag rotary functions shall be provided for the selection of the duty pumps.
(e) "Running" and "stop" indicating lamps shall be provided to each pump. Green colour lamps shall
be provided to show the pump "Running" status and red colour lamps shall be provided to show
the "Stop" status.
(f) Start push button shall be provided for each pump to close the main contactor for the pump motor
mechanically independent of any control circuit.
(g) Indicator lamps giving indication of the failure of each wet rising main pump to start as monitored
by the flow switch at each pump discharge.
(h) Indicating lamps giving indication of 'Pump on Demand' as controlled by the pump actuation
pressure switches. The starting of the pump shall not cancel the indication.
(i) Remote visible and audible indication panel besides the main control panel, if any for the
following conditions :
(i) Pump on demand

(ii) Operation of each wet rising main pump
(iii) Power failure on any phase of the supply to each wet rising main pump
(iv) Pump fails to start as monitored by the flow switch at each pump discharge
(v) Manual and auto mode selection
(j) Indicating lamps shall be provided to show the high and low water level of the wet rising main
storage tanks.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-9
44.4.4 Wet Rising Main Pumps Control Panels (Cont’d)
(k) Indicator lamp and buzzer/bell test push button.
(l) Fault alarm facilities in addition to the indicator lamps shall be provided for the following
conditions :
(i) Power failure on any phase of the supply to each pump

(ii) Pump fail to start
(iii) High and low level at suction and storage tanks
(iv) Other faults not mentioned above
The fault alarm facilities shall incorporate a fault alarm buzzer audible from 10m away and a
buzzer muting switch. The visual fault alarm indication shall persist unless the fault is rectified.
The occurrence of a further different fault while the buzzer is silenced shall cause the buzzer to
resume the sound again. The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst a
fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning. In addition, a weatherproof
red light bulb with wire guard shall be installed outside the pump room near the entrance to
indicate the above fault conditions.
(m) Auxiliary contacts to generator panel to be provided. Volt-free contacts and wiring to relay signals
to Fire Indicator Board where applicable.
44.4.5 Jockey Pump Control Panel
The jockey pump controllers shall be used for pressure maintenance in the installation to prevent
unnecessary cycling of the wet rising main pumps.
The jockey pump controller shall either be housed in a separate compartment within the wet rising main
pump controller or in a totally separate sheet steel cubicle.
The jockey pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal overload
relay, contactors, control relays and the following facilities :
(a) Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
(b) Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch
(c) 'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps
(d) 'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton
(e) Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp
(f) Connections to pressure switch
(g) Minimum running period timer to prevent frequent automatic starting of the pump. The timer
shall be set to keep the motor in operation for at least one minute and interlock with the pressure
switch.
(h) Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase and pump fail to start.
44.4.6 Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control
The Contractor shall prepare fully detailed control wiring diagram for the approval of the SO Rep prior
to the manufacture of control panels.
The transfer pump controllers shall incorporate incoming MCCB protection, starter with thermal
overload relay, contactors and control relays. Provision of transfer pump Control Panel shall include
but not limited to the following :
(a) Indicator lamps to show that power supply is available on every phase of the motor
(b) Auto/OFF/Manual rotary selector switch
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-10
44.4.6 Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control (Cont’d)
(c) 'Run' and 'stop' indicator lamps
(d) 'Start' and 'stop' pushbutton
(e) Pump 'Overload' indicator lamp
(f) Connections to pressure switch
(g) Fault alarm facilities shall be provided to indicate fault conditions of pump overload, pump power
supply failure on any phase, pump fail to start and high and low water level.
44.5 TEST
44.5.1 Tests On Rising Main System
The Contractor shall submit an application to the SO Rep to witness the inspection and commissioning
test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment
date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be
at least 2 months before the date of Substantial Completion of the building block.
For wet rising main system, the Contractor shall provide the complete information as produced in
Appendix A30 and submit two copies to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
44.5.2 Static Pressure Test
The Contractor shall ensure that the system is in order so that water is allowed to flow through it
discharging via the topmost and/or lowest outlet to flush out any debris that may be present.
The system shall then be completely charged with water to a hydrostatic pressure according to CP 29
(Clause 8.1) for 2 hours. During this period, an inspection of the system shall be made to check that
no leakage of water is taking place at any of the joints or landing valves.
The system shall also be charged to the working pressure and at selected landing valve to be tested
for operational requirements with matching water hose. Landing valves shall be tested randomly on
the proper engagement with matching water hose and hose coupling.
Provide diesel driven pump for the tests. Alternatively, electric driven pump may be used but the
Contractor shall arrange for its own power supply.
The Contractor shall arrange for all the necessary parties such as the FSSD to witness the test as and
when required.
Provide water and all the necessary instruments such as water hose, hose coupling, pressure gauges
for the testing.
Water from the domestic water tank shall not be used. The Contractor shall find other means of
providing the water subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
Instrument for the testing shall be properly calibrated by PSB or PSB accredited laboratory.
The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes are securely anchored before carrying out any pressure test.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-11
44.5.3 Flow Test (Wet Rising Mains Only)
The following minimum water supply flow-rate shall be maintained in the wet rising system when 3
landing valves within the system are in the fully-open position :
(a) 27 litres per second for a residential building.

(b) 38 litres per second for a non-residential or mixed occupancy building.
A minimum running pressure of 3.5 bar and a maximum of 5.5 bar shall be maintained at each landing
valve when any number, up to three, are fully opened.
When water is shut off at the nozzle of the hose connected to a landing valve, the static pressure in that
hose line shall not exceed 8 bar.
When more than one wet rising main is required in any zone in a building, the minimum water supply
flow rate shall be as stated below :
(a) For a residential building, 27 litres per second for the first rising main and 13.5 litres per second
for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate of 135 litres per second.
(b) For a non-residential or mixed occupancy building 38 litres per second for the first rising main
and 19 litres per second for each additional rising main, subject to a total maximum supply rate
of 190 litres per second.
44.5.4 Performance Test
The Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the test results using approved HDB Testing
Form. Additional FSSD requirements shall also be included. Provide a minimum of seven days notice
to the SO Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation
fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate the Works concerned
as necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
The test shall be witnessed by the Contractor together with the SO Rep. The testing form shall be
endorsed by the QP.
44.5.5 Remedial Action And Re-Testing
Remedy all Defect within such time as instructed by the SO Rep and arrange for a re-test of the system.
44.6 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

FOR DRY RISING MAIN
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing maintenance
service and call-back service to the dry rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one
year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the
Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period")
for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
Whenever, the rising main system or any portion thereof is out of service for any reason, notice shall
be given immediately to the Singapore Civil Defence Force and a suitable sign shall be displayed at a
prominent position. When the installation is reinstated, the Singapore Civil Defence Force shall again
be informed.
All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as
specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A31.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any
Defect detected shall be rectified by the Contractor immediately. Always arrange for a Representative
from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-12
44.6 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

FOR DRY RISING MAIN (CONT’D)
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each
inspection.
For inspections at every 6 months, rectify any Defect found after the following inspections :
(i) Check and verify operation of breeching inlets.

(ii) Check that breeching inlets and landing valves are not obstructed.
(iii) Check and verify that landing valves are fully closed and the handwheel are strapped locked.
(iv) Check that valve caps are secured in position.
(v) Check rubber washers of the outlets and replace them if missing.
(vi) Check handwheel to ensure that they are not jammed, missing or broken.
(vii) Inspect the earthing connection and tighten it if necessary.
(viii) Check for damaged and any leakage of pipes, landing valves
(ix) Check the valve cabinets for damage.
(x) Any other inspection as instructed by the SO Rep.
In addition, wet tests shall be carried out annually when the main can be checked for leaks.
44.7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM
service and call-back service to the wet rising main system as specified hereafter for a period of one
Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period")
for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it.
All parts and equipment comprising the complete system shall be maintained and inspected strictly as
specified hereafter and in accordance with the check-list as set out in Appendix A32.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspections. Any
from HDB Branch Office to be present during these inspections.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the inspections upon Substantial
The Contractor's Supervisor shall also sign on the log book in the pump room after completion of each
inspection.
Maintenance of wet rising mains shall include the requirements as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing
And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main" including all subclauses under it.
In addition, the following checks are also required :
(a) Monthly Tests
Inspect and service all machinery and equipment comprising the complete Plant and ancillary
equipment under this Contract once a month set out in the code of practice, except where
otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such monthly inspection and service of the complete Plant and ancillary equipment, the
minimum items of Works detailed below and in the relevant code of practice shall be performed
by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements to Plant and equipment not covered
by the following list but recommended by the manufacturers shall deemed to be included.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-13

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
(a) Monthly Tests (Cont’d)
(i) Inspect all water pumps, and
(1) Check all seals, glands and pipe lines for leaks, and rectify as necessary.
(2) Check all pump bearings and lubricate with oil or grease as necessary.
(3) Check the alignment and condition of all rubber couplings between pumps and
drive motors, and rectify as necessary.
(4) Check all bolts and nuts for tightness, and tighten as necessary.
(5) Check and verify the automatic starting of each pump by actuating the drain and
test valve in a manner to reduce the applied water pressure and the starting device
and simulate a fire condition. Record that the pressure is correct. Keep each pump
running for a period of at least five minutes and verify the operation of the relief
valve.
(6) Check and verify pump running alarm and phase failure alarm.
(7) Check pump starting equipment including fuses, circuit breakers and starters.
(8) Conduct a running pressure test of each pump at full alarm condition by opening
the test valve of the pump testing pipe and recirculate water back to the water
tanks. Run each pump for a period of not less than 1 minute.
(9) Simulate failure on one of the pump and verify the operation of the duty-standby
changeover mechanism.
(10) Check and verify no excessive noise and vibration of each pump and motor whilst
the unit is running.
(ii) Inspect and lubricate with grease as necessary all electric motors.
(iii) Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears
and ancillary electrical apparatus, and
(iv) Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays, and
(v) Inspect all water suction and storage tank and drains, clean and flush out the tank as
necessary. Check that stop valve and tank inlets interconnecting pipes and pump suction
pipes are secured fully open. Verify the operation of the automatic tank filling mechanism.
Visually check that tank contains requisite amount of water and verify operation of
floatless level control units.
(vi) Check and inspect breeching inlets.
(vii) Check and verify operation of water level indicators.
(viii) At the monthly inspection of control valves, a gauge showing water pressure in the system
shall be read to make sure that normal pressure are being maintained - check the gauges
with an inspection gauge once a year.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-14

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM (CONT’D)
(b) Quarterly Test
For quarterly testing, servicing and maintenance, repeat all the testing, servicing and
maintenance requirement as specified in Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures
For Dry Rising Main" including all subclauses under it and subclause 44.7(a) "Monthly Tests"
above. In addition, provide the servicing and maintenance as detailed below :
(i) Check any relays for correct adjustment and quick effective operation.
(ii) Thoroughly check the whole system for loose connections, terminals, frayed wires, etc.
(iii) Replace any broken or faulty equipment as may be required.
(iv) Enter test results and details of any faulty components, repairs and replacements in the
log book.
(v) Every pump tank shall be completely flushed out and thoroughly cleaned annually. Other
maintenance as recommended by the tank supplier shall be carried out. The stays, cleats,
bolts and nuts, surface of the plates and other accessories of the tank shall be examined
for rust, corrosion, crack, etc.
(vi) The water in the whole pipework system shall be completely drained out and filled with
fresh water again.
(vii) Meggar test the motor winding cables and wiring to check the insulation resistance
between phase to phase and phase to earth.
44.8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
For routine tests and inspection during the Defects Liability Period, all parts, Plant and equipment
comprising the complete rising main system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance
with the specifications and check-list as set out in Appendix A31 and A32.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the routine inspection. Any
from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for the routine inspection upon Substantial
44.9 CALL-BACK SERVICE
During the Defects Liability Period, provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent
calls or complaints shall be attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the
Essential Maintenance Service Unit or Branch Office.

(c) carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;
the SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the rising main system or to carry
out the routine servicing and maintenance of the rising main system due to or arising out of the
Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect, vary
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-15
44.10 MAKING GOOD DEFECTS AND LEAKAGES
installation. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as produced in Appendix A29 whenever
required if such replacement or repair has been necessitated by the reasons of Defect of the system
and equipment.
The Contractor shall have a supervisor-in-charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be
carried out. The supervisor shall be thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and
repair of rising main systems and the workmen shall also be skilled in the service, maintenance and
repair of rising main systems.

Liability Period.
fourteen days.
44.12 LOG BOOK
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the
record format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
44.13 CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :
(a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.
(b) All carbon brushes required to replace worn brushes in electric motors.
(c) All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
electric control gears and electric relays.
(d) All indicating lamps required to replace blown lamps.
(e) All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 44-16
44.14 FIRE PUMPS/MOTORS FOR USE IN WET RISING MAINS AND TRANSFER PUMPS/MOTORS
The fire pumps/motors for use in wet rising mains and transfer pumps/motors shall be tested by
approved accredited laboratory and UL(Underwriter Laboratories Inc.), FM (Factory Mutual
Approvals). The pumps/motors shall be selected to meet design as well as maximum flow
requirements. All pumps and control panels shall be mounted on at least 150mm height plinths.
Spring type vibration isolators shall be provided for each pump to ensure minimal vibration
transmission to the building structure. The first three pipe supports from the pump discharge shall be
the spring mounted type. Pump control panels near/below pipework shall be protected from water
leakage/splash.
Section 45/.....
BLDG17/S44.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-1
SECTION 45
FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION
45.1 DEFINITIONS
"Electrical Worker" shall mean a qualified competent person to perform electrical work under the
Electricity Act (Cap. 89A).
45.2 SCOPE OF WORK
45.2.1 General
The fire protection installation Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of the Fire Fighting and Protection Installation.
Unless otherwise specified, the Works shall include :
(a) Fire hose reel system (complete with hose reel, suction tanks, pressure tanks and pumpset)
(b) Portable fire extinguishers (where applicable)
(c) Fire hydrants
Pipes shall be made of steel in accordance with BS 1387. However, the pipework for hose reels with
direct water supply from PUB mains shall be copper or stainless steel, notwithstanding other provisions
specified in this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it. For hose reels with direct water
supply from the PUB mains, pumpset and its associated Works including suction tanks and pressure
tanks shall not be part of the scope of fire protection installation Works for the purposes of this Section
The Drawings shall in part be diagrammatic and when read in conjunction with the Specifications shall
be intended to convey the scope of the Works, indicate the general arrangement of Plant, piping, and
the like, and show approximate sizes of Plant and outlets. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as
closely as practicable in laying out the Works and in so doing shall co-ordinate all systems to secure
the best possible installation in the available space.
Where Works is specified but the exact location of Plant or control is not specifically shown, obtain the
approval of the SO Rep prior to the installation.
It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete operating system, unless
specified otherwise. The omission from the Specifications or Drawings of any details in construction,
installation, materials, or specialities necessary for a complete operating and safe system shall not
relieve the Contractor from the provision of a complete operating and safe system.
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as produced in Appendix A33.
45.2.2 Regulations And Codes Of Practice
Provide and install the fire hose reel system in accordance with BS 5306 : Part I, EN 671-1, SS 575 and
the requirements of local governing authorities such as BCA, FSSB and PUB.
The Contractor shall engage a company/firm which is registered with the BCA under the registration
head of ME06 (Fire Prevention & Protection System) and shall be responsible for all applications to and
arrangements with the local authorities such as PUB and FSSD representatives for the necessary
completion, testing and commissioning of the installation for each building under the Works and all costs
in connection therewith shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
of the relevant authorities, the most stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-2
45.2.3 Weatherproof And Flameproof Designs
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition,
such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design.
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is sited in an area where flammable vapour of
explosive gas is liable to occur, such apparatus shall be of flameproof construction.
45.2.4 Provision Of Openings For Electrical Wirings
Provide structural openings through walls, floor and roof for the installation of pipework and electrical
wiring. Make good such openings with non-combustible and waterproof material to the satisfaction of
the SO Rep.
45.2.5 Painting
Galvanised steel pipes and fittings shall first be treated with one coat of polyvinyl butyral etching primer
and one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with two coats of approved enamel
paint.
45.2.6 As-built Drawings And Details Of Pumping Plant
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all Fire Protection System
Installation, pipe routes, plants, legends and all other related works based on actual site installations
for the production of as-built drawings.
The Works shall only commence upon approval by the Consultant but additional approval shall be
sought before any deviations from the approved proposal can be carried out, failing which the whole
installation may not be accepted by the Consultant. The approval of the proposal shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of his responsibility should the Plant or any of its parts proved inadequate in any aspect.
45.2.7 Quality Of Goods And Materials
The quality of goods and materials shall comply with the requirement and regulations of the HDB and
the relevant Authorities and shall also comply with the relevant Codes of Practices as stipulated. All
materials used shall be of the approved type unless otherwise specified.
Where products are manufactured under the PSB Batch Inspection Scheme, additional testing shall not
be necessary unless otherwise specified. The Consultant shall be consulted when in doubt. Prior to
the installation of hose reels at the Site, where corrosion test is not conducted under the PSB Batch
Inspection Scheme, the Contractor shall arrange to submit a sample under the same batch to PSB for
the test. The test report shall be submitted to the Consultant.
Any other relevant requirements issued by the FSSD shall be complied with.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-3
45.3 FIRE HOSE REEL SYSTEM
45.3.1 General
(a) Installation
Fix the hose reels so that the centre is between 0.75 metre and 1.4 metre above floor level.
Mount the hose reels on a swivel bracket suitable for mounting in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel hose
reel cabinet or recesses clearly marked with "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm
high. Hose reel cabinet or recesses shall be painted red.
Any doors provided for hose reel cabinet or recess shall be so hinged that they open
approximately 180 degrees and they shall not obstruct the running out of the hose in either
direction. The door shall have a 4mm glass front with spring locked to open from within. The
Contractor shall provide five sets of master keys to the Employer. Where the hose reel is within
a service duct, a signplate with the words "FIRE HOSE REEL" in white letters of at least 50mm
height shall be displayed on the door.
(b) Rubber Hose
The rubber hose shall be of 25mm internal diameter and shall have a minimum working pressure
of 7 bars and shall be of the non-kinking type.
The rubber hose shall be manufactured with an inner tube or lining, a reinforcement braided with
textile material and an abrasion resistant rubber cover. The reinforcement shall consist of a
single rayon braid or double braid of cotton.
The length of rubber hose on the reel shall be 30 metres. There shall be no joints in the length
of the hose.
Samples and certification shall be provided to verify that the hose supplied is manufactured
according to the requirements of BS 3169/EN 694.
(c) Stop-Valve
Provide and fix 25mm stop-valve for the connection of the hose reel to water supply. An
indication of the open and shut position shall be fixed or permanently marked on the wheel of
the valve, and the body of the valve except for gate valves which shall be marked with a
directional arrow indicating the direction of flow through the valve.
(d) Shut-Off Nozzle
Provide a shut-off nozzle assembly in accordance with the following requirements :
(i) The assembly shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant metallic material or other
materials approved under EN 671-1.
(ii) In the absence of a hose reel cabinet, means shall be provided for the secure attachment
of the assembly in a locked enclosure in such a manner that it cannot be disengaged until
the enclosure has been opened.
(iii) The assembly shall be permanently marked to indicate the open and shut position of the
valve.
(iv) The internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface.
(v) The internal diameter of the nozzle shall be 6.35mm.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-4
45.3.2 Hose Reel
45.3.2.1 General
The hose reel shall extend not more than 350mm from the mounting surface and shall have an overall
diameter not greater than 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a continuous outer rim
and shall be rigid in construction. The side of the reel shall be painted red.
The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 200mm. When the
full length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension, the rim of the side
plates of the hose reel shall project at least 10mm beyond the external diameter of the coiled hose at
any point.
The fittings to which the hose are attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a manner that
the hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers.
The water connection through the rubber hose shall permit the full flow of water to the hose without
external leakage during any rotation of the hose reel. The hose reel waterways connecting the water
supply to the hose, including the inlet pipe after the stop valve, shall be constructed of non-ferrous
material and/or stainless steel and/or galvanised steel. Where hose reels are within service ducts, they
shall be mounted such that their operations are not hindered. The mounting position shall be approved
by the SO Rep.
The clips used to attach the hose to the nozzle and the drum shall be galvanised ear clips.
45.3.2.2 Markings
Mark every hose reel with the following information :
(a) The manufacturer's name, trade name or mark.
(b) Instructions for operation and use which shall include the following :
(i) Turn on stop valve
(ii) Run out hose
(iii) Turn on water at nozzle
(iv) The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto the reel
(v) The year of manufacture
(vi) The test pressure in Bar
All notices and instructions shall be weather and corrosion resistant and shall be set out in letters easily
readable. In addition, the operating instructions "For Emergency Only : Break glass to open the door
from inside" and "TO TURN ON THE INLET VALVE BEFORE RUNNING OUT THE HOSE" shall be of
12mm height and printed in white on the hose reel cabinet. Where there is no cabinet, the same notice
shall be provided on a 2mm thick aluminium plate affixed to the wall adjacent to the reel.
45.3.2.3 Tests
The hose reel shall be factory tested against water leakage after assembly at a test pressure of 13.8
bars (200 psi). The Contractor shall furnish documentary evidence of such factory test to the SO Rep
before delivery of the hose reels to the Site on request by the SO Rep.
45.3.3 Pumpset
(a) Hose Reel Pumpset
The hose reel pumpset shall consist of two sets of fire pumpsets, one duty and one standby to
the approval of the SO Rep. Pumpsets shall be of centrifugal multistage vertical pumps.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, single stage centrifugal end suction pumps shall be
used where applicable. The pumps shall have stainless steel shafts and mechanical seals and
shall be driven through flexible couplings by electric motors with speed of not more than 3000
rpm. Each pump shall be capable of providing a flow of water of at least 0.8 litres per second in
the rising main.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-5
45.3.3 Pumpset (Cont'd)
(a) Hose Reel Pumpset (Cont'd)
Multistage vertical pumps shall have stainless steel outer sleeve and the suction/discharge
casing shall be of cast iron. The pump impeller shall be of either stainless steel or bronze.
Each pump shall also be capable of being started or stopped manually. The standby pump shall
be so arranged that it will operate automatically on failure of the duty pump. The pumpsets shall
be able to withstand 20 times start/stop per hour.
Provide each pump with a ball valve and flexible connection at both the suction and discharge
ends, a spring loaded check valve at the discharge end and a strainer at the suction end. The
suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Screwed suction and discharge connections
shall have flange adaptors.
Provide pressure gauges at the main discharge pipe. The gauge shall have a range of at least
twice the rated working pressure of the pump.
All pumps shall be automatically primed at all times. This shall be activated if the pumps are
sited so that at least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank is above the level of
the centre of pump suction. Where this is not possible, provide separate priming tanks with foot
valves for each pump.
Submit to the SO Rep for approval the characteristic performance curves of the pumps offered.
The efficiency of the pumpset shall not be less than 50% at the operating conditions.
Mark each pump conspicuously and permanently with letter "P1" or "P2" to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
Provide and install all the pipework and accessories connecting the pumpsets to the suction
tank and hose reel riser.
Provide spring type vibration isolation mounting for each pump to ensure minimal vibration
transmission to the building structure.
(b) Hose Reel Pumps Controls
Provide, install, connect and test all necessary starting and control equipment.
Enclose all such equipment in a front connected wall mounted and manufactured from electro-
galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5mm thickness IP54 cubicle with full locking hinged door.
The cubicle shall be painted in accordance with sub-clause 45.3.6(h)(iv) "Painting".
The sequence of operation of the hose reel pumps shall be as follows :
(i) The duty pumpset shall automatically come into operation when a pressure switch located
in the branch out pipe feeding the two pressure tanks detects a fall of normal static
pressure in the pipe below a predetermined value.
(ii) If the duty pump fails to start or the demand for water exceeds the nominal output of the
duty pump (ie. when three or more hose reels operate simultaneously), this drop in
pressure shall be sensed by another pressure switch located adjacent to the first pressure
switch, which shall then start the standby pump. The exact cut-in pressure of the standby
pump shall be varied according to the normal system pressure and the performance curve
of the pump.
(iii) As the requirements for water reduces, the pressure in the system increases. When there
is no demand to the system and the normal static pressure has been established, this
preset pressure shall be sensed by both pressure switches and the duty and standby
pump shall be switched off respectively.
After each start/stop pumping cycle, the duty pump shall be alternated automatically by
the use of an auto changeover relay to avoid one pump remaining stationary for long
period. Provide a manual selector switch to select the duty or standby pump.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-6
45.3.3 Pumpset (Cont'd)
(b) Hose Reel Pumps Controls (Cont'd)
Provide a 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial time switch to start the pumps running for a pre-set duration
of time weekly. At a pre-set time of each week, the time switch shall energise the coil of a
solenoid valve for a pre-set period of time. The solenoid valve shall be located in a by-pass pipe
connecting the main discharge line with both the suction tanks. As the solenoid valve is opened,
water shall be forced to flow back to the water tanks by the system pressure which will then
reduce progressively. This drop in system pressure shall be sensed by the pressure switch
which shall then start the duty pump and the standby pump.
Each pump shall be activated after the other when the solenoid valve is opened at two different
pre-set times on the time switch. Provide a globe valve to throttle excessive pressure upstream
of the solenoid valve.
Install a ball stop valve to enable manual test run of the pumpsets and a pressure relief valve to
avoid excessive build-up of system pressure in parallel with the solenoid valve.
Use the third pressure switch installed next to the above two pressure switches to initiate an
audible and visual alarm in the event that the normal pressure in the pipe falls to 1 bar.
The controller shall be fully wired and mounted within the cubicle requiring only incoming supply,
necessary control and alarm connections. The following starting and control equipment shall be
incorporated in the cubicle :
(i) 1 no. ON/OFF isolating switch for incoming.

(ii) 1 no. MCB unit for incoming.
(iii) 2 sets ON/OFF isolators, each completed with MCB unit for starters.
(iv) 2 no. direct on line starters.
(v) 2 no. thermal overload relays with ambient temperature compensation.
(vi) 1 no. rotary selector switch for AUTO/MANUAL selection.
(vii) 1 no. pump selector switch.
(viii) 2 sets START/STOP button switch for the starters.
(ix) 8 no. MCB units for control circuits.
(x) 1 no. automatic change over relay (100% continuous rating).
(xi) 2 no. relays to activate alarm bell for motor overload trip.
(xii) 1 set of cancel alarm pushbutton and cancel alarm relay.
(xiii) Relays to control the pumpsets.
(xiv) 1 no. water tank low level warning light.
(xv) 1 no. power supply on light.
(xvi) 2 no. pump "RUN" indicating lights.
(xvii) 2 no. pump "TRIP" indicating lights.
(xviii) 1 no. low pressure warning light.
(xix) 1 no. 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch to control the weekly running
of the pumpsets.
(xx) Voltage-free contacts to relay signal to remote fire indicator board and
initiate a fire alarm when flow switch is actuated.
(xxi) 2 no. relay for lamp and bell test.
(xxii) 1 no. pushbutton for lamp and bell test.
(xxiii) 1 no. 230V/24V AC transformer.
(xxiv) Terminal block for connection to remote equipment.
Submit the control circuit diagram for approval before the installation. Provide the pressure
switch settings on a 240mm x 150mm perspex sheet mounted by self-adhesive tape. The details
and locations shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-7
45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings
(a) Scope
This subclause sets out the requirements, standards of workmanship and materials in general
for the piping system for the hose reel system.
(b) General
Before delivery to the Site, clean all pipes thoroughly so that they are free from scale and rust.
Reject old and damaged pipes and use only new pipes. On the Site, all pipes shall be checked
again and thoroughly wire brushed and prime coated prior to the installation.
Install all pipework so that clearance of approximately 80mm is left between the outside of the
pipe and the nearest wall, ceiling or equipment surface, whenever possible. Pipe joints or fittings
shall not be permitted within the thickness of walls, floors, any partitions or below a beam.
(c) Materials
Provide and install all pipework as indicated in the Drawings.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from
Defect that would impair their performance. Cutting, bending and fixing shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Pipes shall be factory marked with the manufacturer's name or identification mark and
classification of pipes. Any unmarked pipes shall not be accepted.
Lay pipes outside buildings underground, and the depth of cover measured from the top of the
pipe to the finished surface of the ground level shall not be less than 750mm.
Stainless steel pipes shall comply with BS 4127:Part 2. Stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of
capillary fittings and compression fittings in accordance with BS 864:Part 2. Fittings of 15mm
and longer shall be legibly marked with the maker's name or trade mark. All stainless steel water
pipes, fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
Ductile iron cement lined pipes shall comply with BS EN 545 and medium galvanised steel pipes
shall comply with SS17.
Joints and connections to galvanised steel pipework of up to and including 65mm diameter shall
be made by means of screwed connections. Join pipes of 80mm diameter and above by means
of flanged connections. Unless otherwise specified, use galvanised steel bolts and nuts for all
supports and flanged connections.
Flanges shall be raised face conforming to BS 4504. All flanges shall be flushed and aligned,
and shall be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended
jointing compound. Use ductile iron cement lined pipes where pipes are concealed such as
those within concrete slabs or below ground.
(d) Valves
All valves shall either be of bronze, brass or cast steel construction and conforming to the
relevant British Standard and be suitable for the working pressure encountered.
Where valves are located above 2m from the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall
be operated by chain mechanism.
Valves used for working pressure above 19 bar shall be of the flanged type. All valves shall be
located in accessible positions.
Isolation valves of 50mm diameter and below installed along pipework inside the pump room
shall be of ball stop valves approved by Water Supply (Network) Department, PUB.
Valves up to and including 65mm diameter where connected to steel pipe shall be of
brass/bronze with female screwed connections.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-8
45.3.4 Pipes & Fittings (Cont'd)
(d) Valves (Cont'd)
Valves of 80mm diameter and above where fitted to steel pipes shall be of the flanged cast iron
or ductile iron type.
Check valves shall be of the spring loaded non-slamming type. The Contractor shall select these
valves in relation to the velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve shall operate
silently on reversal of water flow.
Solenoid valve shall be of the normally closed, magnetically operated pilot type. Valve body shall
be of brass or bronze and the solenoid coil shall be replaceable on Site without removing the
valve body from pipe fitting. Install "Y-type" strainer upstream of the solenoid valve to trap any
dirt and debris. The power supply of the solenoid valve shall be 24V AC 50Hz.
(e) Strainers
Install "Y-type" strainers upstream of all pumpsets. Provide all strainers with isolating valves so
that the strainers can be cleaned without draining away the water of the system. Where a system
cannot be shut-down for strainer cleaning, install by-pass in parallel to the strainer.
(f) Pressure Gauges, Pressure Switches And Flow Switches
Pressure gauges shall be of the 100mm diameter brass cased type. They shall be designed for
pipe mounting and be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers to prevent vibration of
the needles. Pressure gauges shall conform to BS 1780 Part 2.
Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon tube type and be calibrated in m-bar. Select suitable
gauges for mid-range indications at normal working pressure and the maximum measurable
pressure shall be twice the maximum working pressure.
Pressure gauges shall have scales with divisions not exceeding 0.2 bar for a maximum scale
value of 10 bars, not exceeding 0.5 bar for a maximum scale value of 16 bars, and not exceeding
1.0 bar for a maximum scale values in excess of 16 bars.
Pressure switches shall comply with BS 6134 and shall be of automatic reset type. Install
pressure gauge and pressure switches near to the pressure tanks. The enclosures of the
pressure switches shall be of water tight IP 65 construction.
Pressure switches shall be suitable for conduit construction and with terminal block for wire
connection. Power supply for the pressure switches shall be 24V AC 50 Hz.
Failure of pressurized components of the pressure switches shall not result in a build up of
pressure within the enclosure.
The parts in contact with water for the pressure switches and pressure gauges shall be of brass,
stainless steel or other approved corrosion resistant materials.
The pressure switch shall have adjustable and independent high and low pressure settings.
(g) Pressure Tanks
Two rechargeable pressure tanks of replaceable membrane type and pre-charged according to
operating conditions shall be installed at the discharge of the pumps to keep the hose reel riser
pressurized at any time.
The pressure tank shall be of carbon steel, designed and fabricated to British Standard or
Standard of American Society of Mechanical Engineers for Pressure Vessels. The Contractor
shall furnish the design and detailed calculations for the proposed pressure tanks. The design
and construction of the pressure tanks shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep.
The pressure tanks shall be of the vertical type and the impermeable diaphragm shall be of heavy
duty vinyl or butyl material.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-9
(g) Pressure Tanks (Cont'd)
The system shall consist of two numbers of interconnected pressure tanks. The capacity of each
tank shall not be less than 50 litres.
The pump shall be started automatically by a pressure switch to recharge the pressure tanks in
response to a drop of storage pressure below a pre-set value according to operating conditions.
The pump shall be stopped automatically when the required storage pressure has been reached
in the pressure tanks.
Provide each pressure tank with safety relief valve.
Technical details including the manufacturer, specification and pressure setting shall be labelled
on metal or plastic plate attached to each of the tank.
(h) Vibration Isolation Connectors
All pipe connections to pumpsets and any equipment subjected to vibration shall be carried out
by means of flexible neoprene connectors.
Unless specifically permitted by the SO Rep, rigid connections between pipelines and equipment
shall be rejected.
Use neoprene or spring hangers from approved manufacturer for supporting pump delivery and
return mains.
(i) Pipe Supports And Fittings
Support all pipework by pipe hangers and supports. Unless otherwise stated, all pipe hangers
and supports shall be of mild steel adjustable for height.
Vertical pipe risers penetrating through floor slab shall be supported to each floor by clamp or
collars. All vertical pipe risers shall have foot elbows or concrete block supports at their lowest
point.
The spacing of fixings of pipe supports shall not exceed the following :
Maximum Spacing
Diameter of Pipe
Material of Pipe Horizontal Vertical
(mm)
(m) (m)
Galvanized Steel Pipe 10 to 15 1.75 2.5

20 to 25 2.5 3.0
32 2.75 3.0
40 to 50 3.0 3.5
65 to 80 3.5 4.5
Ductile Iron Pipe 75 to 100 2.75 2.75
Stainless Steel Pipe 10 to 15 1.75 2.5

20 to 25 2.5 3.0
32 2.75 3.0
40 to 50 3.0 3.5
65 to 80 3.5 4.5
Fixing shall wherever possible be built into the building structure. Alternatively, they shall be
secured to the building structure by means of expansion or power driven bolts.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-10
(j) Pipework, Testing And Cleaning
All pipework shall be flushed with clean water before final topping up and putting into service.
All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bars or two times the working pressure
whichever is the greater before lagging or putting into service. The test pressure shall be
maintained for a minimum duration of 24 hours.
45.3.5 Suction Tanks
(a) General
Tank supplying water for domestic purposes shall not be used as suction for hose reel
installation.
Lay a separate line from the PUB bulk meter position to supply water to the suction tanks or the
fire hose reels directly in case boosting of the PUB water pressure is not required. The line shall
serve the fire hose reel system only. To prevent contamination, provide approved double check
valves assembly complete with drain cocks in accordance with the Drawings.
The effective water capacity of two suction tanks with automatic inflow shall not be less than
1100 litres. Effective water capacity shall be labelled on the tanks as directed by the SO Rep.
The tanks shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and flanged stainless steel
(AISI Grade 316) pipe connections. The interconnecting pipes for the tanks shall be
correspondingly aligned.
Nominal pipe thickness for stainless steel pipe shall be 4mm complying with JIS G3459 Schedule
20S.
Provide and install piping to each suction tank of nominal diameter as follows :
(i) 1 no. 54mm diameter stainless steel incoming pipe from PUB bulk meter;
(ii) 1 no. 50mm diameter galvanised steel outlet pipe to fire hose reel booster pump;
(iii) 1 no. 32mm diameter galvanised steel by-pass pipe;
(iv) 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron washout pipe;
(v) 1 no. 100mm diameter ductile iron over-flow pipe. The over-flow pipe shall be connected
to the washout pipe if suction tanks are situated at the 2nd storey and above.
(vi) 1 no. 28mm diameter stainless steel over-flow warning pipe if suction tanks are located at
2nd storey and above; and
(vii) 1 no. 100mm diameter cement mortar lined cast iron or ductile iron interconnecting pipe.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC air vent to each tank. All air vents shall be fitted with elbow
end and covered by mosquito netting.
Provide a 100mm diameter UPVC pipe to each tank for the mounting of level control electrodes.
(b) Level Control
(i) Ball Float Valve
Approved 50mm equilibrium ball float valve shall be fitted in the suction tank and bolted
directly to the incoming water supply pipe. It shall be able to operate on a water pressure
in the incoming water supply pipe of not less than 700 KN per m2 and shall be approved
by the PUB. The fulcrum and lever shall be of bronze with copper ball float. The internal
valve shall be of bronze with leather trim and the packing plate shall be of gun metal with
winged guide and links. The body shall be of cast iron with bronze lines and gun metal
seal ring and the flange shall be at right angle and drilled to BS 4504 or BS 10 with
approved rating.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-11
45.3.5 Suction Tanks (Cont'd)
(b) Level Control (Cont'd)
(ii) Floatless Level Control Relay Units
Connect floatless level control electrodes mounted on each suction tank directly to the
relay units mounted on the wall beside the tank.
Arrange floatless level control electrodes to stop the pumpset at pre-determined low level.
Use a floatless level control relay unit mounted on the wall beside the suction tank to
provide over-riding control of pressure switches such that at a pre-set low water level in
the suction tank, the pressure switches shall not start the pump. At that low water level,
even a pump in operation shall be stopped by the relay unit.
The floatless level control electrodes shall also actuate a warning indicating light and an
alarm bell when the water level in the suction tank falls to a predetermined level.
The floatless level control relay unit shall be of plug-in relay unit type.
Electrodes shall be stainless steel and provided with electrode separators.
Electrode holders mounted on tanks shall be easily accessible and removable to facilitate
maintenance and shall be installed to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Run the wiring in conduits from the electrodes to the floatless level control relay units and
keep it as short as possible. The wiring to the electrodes shall not run through the same
conduit as the power supply wiring.
(c) Alarm And Emergency Device
Install alarm device to be turned-on by the floatless level control relay unit which shall be
activated when low water level in the suction tanks and/or low pressure relay and/or thermal
overload relays for the pump motors are encountered. This alarm device shall be in the form of
an alarm bell placed beside the control panel in the pumproom and a red bulb placed outside the
pumproom and near the entrance or other location as directed by the SO Rep. The bell shall be
weatherproof and of heavy duty type.
The alarm bell shall give a distinctive sound different from that of any fire alarm sounder and the
audible fault alarm at the fire indicator board. Provide a pushbutton to cancel the alarm bell.
The make and model shall be approved by the SO Rep.
45.3.6 Power Supply
(a) General
The power supply available for electric motors is 415 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating
current.
(b) Motors
The electric motors shall be squirrel-cage totally enclosed fan cooled type with minimum Class F
insulation unless specified otherwise and shall be designed for continuous maximum rating.
Motor type and model shall be approved by the SO Rep before the installation.
The motor efficiency and power factors of the motors shall be more than 90% and 0.85
respectively at full load and shall comply with the current PUB Regulations.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-12
45.3.6 Power Supply (Cont'd)
(c) Motor Starters
The starters for the motors shall be direct on-line type.
The starter shall provide means of starting or stopping the motors by push-button or be
automatically actuated by the pressure switches in the main riser pipe.
Each starter shall have time relay, undervoltage release, no volt release, adjustable and ambient
compensated (-5ºC to 50ºC) thermal overload protection with manual reset and pilot lamp. The
starter shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before the installation. The operating
voltage of the control coil shall be 230V.
The starting apparatus shall be of "frequent duty" rating and be capable of starting under the
above conditions intermittently up to 40 times per hour at not less than 20 seconds intervals. The
mechanical and electrical endurance of the starter shall be not less than 50,000 operations.
Provide the manufacturer's certificate to this effect when requested by the SO Rep. The starters
shall be wired in such a way that the floatless level control relay unit shall be able to override
other pump controls and actuate the pumps according to different pre-set conditions.
(d) 7-Day Dial, 2-Hour Dial Time Switch
Use an approved type of time switch. Connect the time switch to control the coil of the solenoid
valve. Time switch shall be able to operate on a 7-day basis with a minimum 24 hours reserve
to cater for temporary power failure. The time switch shall be capable of providing at least two
on-off operations per week.
Time switches shall incorporate a 7-day dial and a 2-hour dial with a shortest switch period of
not more than 3 minutes for the 2-hour dial. Provide ON/OF lever transfer switch for each time
switch to facilitate manual ON/OFF to override control without disturbing the preset schedule.
The power supply for the timer shall be 230V AC 50 Hz.
Provide time switch with a clear plastic front cover.
(e) Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent
self cleaning action.
Auxiliary relays shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal volts and hold in satisfactorily at 65%
nominal volts.
Auxiliary relays with functions common to a number of circuits and which are fitted to a common
panel as referred to previously shall be of the plug-in type.
Auxiliary relays fitted to demountable units shall be of the plug-in type where possible. Fixed
relays are acceptable if they are a design feature of the units.
Auxiliary relays shall have a minimum of 6 contacts rated at 5 Amps minimum for an inductive
load. Contacts shall be capable of carrying and breaking without damage, the inrush and
operating currents of contactor or starter coils they are switching. The contact arrangement shall
be easily alterable.
(f) Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Pushbuttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly
coupled to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application.
Pushbutton bezels shall be black.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green - "START" or "ON"

Red - "STOP" or "OFF"
Black - Reset
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-13
(g) Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the
designation of service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type rated at 6 watts. The indication
shall be clearly visible from the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall have black bezels. The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to
ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals;
soldered terminations shall be rejected.
Employ the following colour codes :
Green - "ON" status

Amber - "OFF" status
Red - "FAULT", "FAILURE", "ALARM" status
(h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel
(i) Construction
Provide and install approved switchboard required to serve the booster pumpsets. The
wall mounted switchboard cabinet shall be installed in the pumproom and it shall be near
to the entrance of the pumproom. The location shall be subject to the approval of the SO
Rep.
The cabinet shall be of front connected type and unless otherwise specified, manufactured
from minimum 2mm gauge sheet steel using folded section or angle form bracing for rigid
construction. The cabinet shall have adequate ventilation and shall be drip proof.
The construction shall be such that it permits ready access to the interior of the cubicles
for operation and maintenance purposes. The opening of a panel door shall allow access
to that compartment only. Provide continuous mild steel to complete separate adjacent
cubicle.
Provide switchboard cabinet with rubber bushes at knockout holes for the entry of all
incoming and outgoing cables. Schematic wiring and field connection diagrams shall be
permanently secured to the inside of the enclosure door.
Instrument indicating lights, rotary switches, selector switches, push buttons, isolating
switches, etc shall be mounted directly on the front panel with locknuts to hold such items
firmly in position under all conditions of operation. Indicating lights shall be of the
transformer type.
Isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be
opened with the handle in the `ON' position.
Carry out the whole of the electrical Works in compliance with the SS CP5 and subject to
the approval of the SO Rep.
(ii) Internal Wiring
The control panel shall all be internally wired, including all wirings between individual units
and between units and terminal strips located near the room entrance.
Number all terminals on the strips and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers
on the wiring and field connection diagrams permanently secured to the inside of the
enclosure door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of not less than 1.5 mm2 copper conductors, PVC insulated,
colour coded and numbered for identification.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-14
(h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd)
(ii) Internal Wiring (Cont'd)
Identification shall be by means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables.
The ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating materials with white glossy finish and black
lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. The numbering shall
be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables.
Each wire shall be separately terminated with tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of
approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel
type terminals are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, connect only
one wire to each terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified
using an approved marking and numbering system.
Run all control circuit wirings separately from power circuit wiring and protect them by
using MCB units or fuses.
(iii) Labelling
Provide each supervisory control panel with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed
steel screws or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be black lettering engraved on white traffolyte.
The size of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep.
Submit schedule to the SO Rep for approval prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and equipment function.
Label terminal strips to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number
and function - eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Label clearly all control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located on
common panels to identify circuit number, function and rating.
(iv) Painting
After degreasing, apply one coat of etch primer, follow by one undercoat and two top coats
of synthetic enamel. All coats shall be stoved baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The finished colour of internal and external surfaces shall be red.
Make good all damages occurred during transit or installation to a standard equal to that
manufactured originally.
(v) Wiring
The wiring shall comply with SS CP 5.
Label clearly isolation switches and circuit breakers on the power feed to the pumps :
"Fire Hose Reel Pump Supply - Do Not Switch Off In Case Of Fire".
Install the cables from the pumproom electrical mains isolator to the pump's starting and
control switchboard.
Trunking cables and wiring within the pumproom shall be PVC insulated to SS 358
suitable for a 230V single phase 50 cycles system and they shall be carried in conduit or
cable trunking.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-15
(h) Hose Reel Pump Control Panel (Cont'd)
(v) Wiring (Cont'd)
All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge, screwed galvanised steel conduit complying with
IEC 61386. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bar saddles
at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of screwed socket and smooth bore
butt to adaptor boxes, fuse boards and cable trunking, etc. The termination shall consist
of a flanged coupling, lead washer and smooth bore bush. Where the conduit is in contact
with any structural steel work, make permanent metallic connection between the conduit
and steel work.
All conduits and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and
shall be earthed with matching standing copper link.
Cable trunking shall comply with SS 249 and shall be fabricated from 1.0mm mild steel
sheet, in 1.83m or 2.44m lengths and provided with a 50mm fixing sleeve, spot welded on
one end at each length. Treat the trunking with anti-corrosion paint and finishing paint to
a minimum thickness of 45 microns. Jointing of trunking shall be by means of round
headed bolts and nuts. Lay 4mm x 20mm copper earth tape in the trunking run. The
copper shall be tinned where it is bolted down.
Complete the entire trunking and conduit installation before the cables are drawn. The
number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall comply with SS CP 5.
Test all seals not less than 24 hours after completion. This test shall be made with
insulation testing equipment of the "Megger" type at 500V or other approved and obtain
an infinity reading before the conductors are connected to any apparatus.
Terminate wiring in conduit and duct in the floor in approved junction boxes adjacent to
the machine or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing enclosing the
cables between motors and junction boxes.
Earth all non current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. Earth continuity
conductor shall have cross-sectional area of not less than that specified in Table D1 of CP
5.
45.4 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Provide and install portable fire extinguishers in locations as shown in the Drawings. Extinguishers for
use in all Pump Rooms, Ejector Pump rooms, Generator Rooms shall be appropriate for dealing with
class B and C fires for eg. CO2 Fire Extinguishers. Those for use in Utilities Centre, Centralised Refuse
Chambers, Consumer Switch Rooms, Lift Machine Rooms and similar nature services rooms shall be
appropriate for dealing with class A, B & C fires for eg. Type ABC Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers in
accordance to SS 578. Provide and install each fire extinguisher complete with horn, wall bracket and
visual indicator (indicating whether the extinguisher has been used). Extinguishers equipped with non-
metallic horns, such as plastic or PVC horns, shall be used in location with energised electrical
equipment such as switch rooms. Metal horns shall not be used in location with energised electrical
equipment. All fire extinguishers’ location, quantity, rating, type and weight shall comply with SS 232,
SS 578 and other current codes and regulations and shall be approved for use by all relevant local
authorities.
Good practice as recommended in BS 5306:Pt 3 shall be observed and implemented where applicable.
Install fire extinguisher at a height of 1m above the floor level on the hangers/brackets supplied together
with the fire extinguisher. They shall be placed in a manner such that their operating instructions face
outward. The operating instructions shall be simple and shown clearly in pictorial form. Fire
extinguisher shall be embossed with 2 number of HDB logo not smaller than 30mm x 30mm on the
external face of every extinguisher. The logo shall be red and white. No stick-on logo shall be
acceptable as a substitute.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-16
45.4 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER (CONT’D)
House each fire extinguisher in a 1.6mm thick sheet steel case complete with front hinged door, 3mm
thick glass panel and handle master lock. The case shall be coated with 2 coats of red paint. Lettering
such as "FIRE" or "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" shall be eminently and permanently marked on the case
and shall be of approved sizes and colour. Provide 5 sets of master keys for the door lock. Provide
each case with a master key placed inside a recess covered by a front break glass and the recess shall
be mounted on the front hinged door.
45.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
45.5.1 General
test of the completed installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment
date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor. The appointed date shall be
at least 2 months before the Substantial Completion of the building block.
The Contractor shall provide complete information as produced in Appendix A34 and submit two copies
to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the system.
Provide a complete set of testing equipment. The minimum requirements of which shall be set out
below :
(a) Tachometer with accessories for measurement of pumps and motor shaft speeds.
(b) Meter-Recorder for measuring flow rate through orifice plate.
(c) All necessary electrical testing equipment such as insulation resistance tester.
The whole of the instruments and equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and
demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract
Sum. The test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor.
45.5.2 Test Records
The records shall include :
(a) date and time for inspection or test

(b) person carrying out the test
(c) test results noted
(d) any external factors significantly affecting the results
(e) follow-up actions required
(f) work carried out as a result of (e) above with date and result of re-test
45.5.3 Pipework
All water pipework and other fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to 10 bar or 2 times the working
pressure whichever shall be the greater, and this test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours.
Allowable pressure drop during the 24 hour testing shall be decided by the SO Rep but generally shall
not exceed 3% of test pressure. During tests, all welded joints shall be hammered.
45.5.4 Control Equipment
Set and calibrate all limit switches, pressure switches, time switches, etc. as required to ensure that
operating directions are correct. Test and verify the time and control sequence.
45.5.5 Pumps
Check all pumps for alignment, flow rates, pressure and speed and their balance to comply with the
required flow and head.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-17
45.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING (CONT’D)
On Substantial Completion of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep two copies of the
test results using approved HDB Testing Form. Provide a minimum of seven days notice to the SO
Rep to verify the test results on the Site and demonstrate to the SO Rep that the installation if adjusted
and regulated correctly fulfils the function for which it has been designed. Adjust, balance and regulate
the Works concerned as necessary until the required conditions are attained.
Should the SO Rep find discrepancies between the recorded test results and the measurements
demonstrated to him on the Site, the test shall be repeated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
SO Rep.
45.5.7 Electrical Commissioning Tests
Test the complete installation, both before and after the connection, to the requirements of the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests at the Site in the presence of the SO Rep
during the whole of the period required for the tests.
All materials and equipment provided or installed which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at
once by the Contractor and the tests shall be repeated.
Conduct all tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Provide all necessary instruments, apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour required for the
tests to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
Make accurate records of all tests and furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an
approved form. Two copies of such schedules and of each test certificate shall be required.
Make good any circuit or section of the installation which fails to comply with the required standard for
acceptance.
The site tests to be carried out on each completed section of the electrical installation where applicable,
shall be as follows :
(a) Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors of cables and wires
(b) Continuity tests.
(c) Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc.
(d) Test operation of alarm devices.
(e) Rotational tests on all motors.
(f) Insulation resistance test on any electrical apparatus supplied and/or installed before and
after connecting such apparatus to the supply.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-18
45.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING (CONT’D)
45.5.8 Hose Reel Tests
(a) Flushing Out
Before any water is introduced into the hose reel, it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that
no harmful matter is passed into the reel. After flushing out, the tubing shall be run out and the
water turned on to establish that the assembly is fully operational.
(b) Procedure For Direct PUB Mains Supplies
The most hydraulically remote reel shall provided a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of
at least 0.4 litres per second.
(c) Procedure For Boosted Supplies
The most hydraulically remote reel shall provided a jet of at least 10m in length at a flow rate of
at least 0.4 litres per second. Check and verify pump running alarm.
Repeat the test with simulated mechanical or electrical failure of the duty pump. Check and test
the ability of the standby pump to come into service automatically and to maintain the required
outputs. Check and verify pump failure warning indicated on local control panel and remote fire
indicator board.
Test the various control features of the hose reel booster pump to verify that they function
correctly.
(d) Putting Into Operational Readiness
When the tests have been satisfactorily completed, restore the system to its normal operating
state. Reels shall never be left under pressure and, where practicable, drain the hose prior to
returning it to the drum.
Restore the hose on the drum, pay particular attention to automatic hose reels to ensure that the
automatic valve is fully closed when the hose has been restored. Where an isolation valve has
been incorporated, close the isolation valve on completion of storage, and complete the nozzle
interlock, where fitted.
45.5.9 Final Drawings and Operating Manuals
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all Fire Protection System
Installation, pipe routes, legends and all other related works based on actual site installations for the
production of as-built drawings.
On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the
testing record/results of each installation.
.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-19
45.6 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM)
service and call-back service to the Fire Protection System as specified hereunder, for a period of one
Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period"
for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
45.6.1 General
During the Maintenance Period, provide all consumables/materials and make good all Defect and
leakages found in the system/Plant/equipment. Replace and/or repair all defective parts or items as
produced in Appendix A33 whenever required if such repair or replacement has been necessitated by
reasons of Defect in the system/Plant/equipment.
45.6.2 Workmanship And Materials
The service and maintenance Works shall be performed by workmen skilled in the service, maintenance
and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection systems of all types.
All materials to be provided in connection with such service and maintenance Works shall be new and
unused, and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and performance.
45.6.3 Supervision
Provide a foreman to take charge of the service, maintenance and repair Works. This foreman shall be
thoroughly competent in supervising the service, maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire
protection system, and shall be in the direct employment of the Contractor, and acceptable to the
SO Rep.
The Contractor shall have in his direct employment, workmen who shall be skilled in the service,
maintenance and repair of pumping Plant and fire protection system.
45.6.4 Servicing And Maintenance Schedule
For monthly tests and inspection, all parts, Plant and equipment comprising the complete hose reel
pumping system shall be maintained and inspected strictly in accordance with the Specifications and
check-list as set out in Appendix A35.
The check-list shall be duly completed by the Contractor when performing the monthly inspection. Any
from the HDB Branch Office to be present during the inspection.
Furnish to the HDB Branch Office a Maintenance Schedule for monthly inspection upon Substantial
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-20
45.6 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM) (CONT’D)
45.6.4 Servicing And Maintenance Schedule (Cont’d)
The Contractor's foreman shall also sign on the attendance book/card provided by the Employer in the
pump room after completion of each inspection.
Items in the check-list for the monthly inspection shall include :

(a) General condition of the pumprooms
(b) Correct setting of the time switch
(c) Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
(d) Power supply selector switch in "On" position
(e) Control panel indicating lights
(f) Alarm bell and bulb
(g) Suction tank electrode and control module
(h) Motor running current
(i) Check valves
(j) Gate valves
(k) Alignment couplings
(l) Ball float valves
(m) Motor insulation
(n) Pump mechanical seal
(o) Pump lubrication oil level (if applicable)
(p) Contactors and relays
(q) Hose reel
(r) Pressure and flow switches
45.6.5 Call-Back Service
Provide an efficient 24 hour (whole day) call-back service. All urgent calls or complaints shall be
attended to immediately upon notification by the Representative from the Essential Maintenance
Service Unit or Branch Office.

(c) carry out the routine inspection of the rising main system;
The SO Rep may engage another contractor to carry out the Works and all costs and charges shall be
rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the Contractor.
In the event that other contractors are instructed to rectify Defect in the Fire Protection System or to
carry out the routine servicing and maintenance of the Fire Protection System due to or arising out of
the Contractor's failure to do so when directed by the SO Rep, such actions shall not in any way affect,
vary or relieve the Contractor's obligations under the Contract.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-21
45.6.6 Rectification Of Defects Prior To Issuance

Of Final Completion Certificate
Liability Period.
fourteen days.
shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance And Irregularities" to impose charges against the
45.6.7 Log Book
Keep a log book at the pump room in which details of all alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults,
tests, routine maintenance and repairs carried out shall be recorded. The type of log book and the
record format shall be subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
45.6.8 Consumable Materials
Provide the following consumable materials as and when required during the Maintenance Period :
(a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of pump bearings, motor bearings, pivots and other
moving parts.
(c) All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gears, motor starter gears,
(e) All cotton waster, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
45.7 FIRE HYDRANTS
Private Fire Hydrants where so required by The Fire Authority shall be provided within the perimeter of
the building lot all to the requirements of the Fire Authority.
The fire hydrant shall be positioned to be within 50 m from an entry to the building and not more than
50 m apart. In the case of a building where rising mains are installed, the 50 m distance shall be
measured up to the breeching inlets of the rising mains. The siting and type of fire hydrants shall comply
fully with the requirements stated in SS 575 : Code of Practice for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose
Reels.
Fire hydrants shall be of suitably corrosion protected and sufficiently robust material. Their works parts
shall be of gunmetal to BS 1400 or other suitable material. The fire hydrant shall be installed on concrete
plinths with size of 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm thickness. A control valve shall be installed to each
hydrant. The control valve shall be able to open and closed from the surface of the ground.
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 45-22
45.7 FIRE HYDRANTS (CONT’D)
Fire hydrant mains shall be of heavy duty ductile iron with cement lining type conforming to BS EN 545.
The hydrant mains routes and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and intended to
indicate the general runs and locations only. The exact routes and locations of the mains shall be
determined at the Site all at the Contractor’s cost and expense. Any mains that are routed in basement
of building shall be in protective enclosure. The protective enclosure to the mains shall have the same
fire resistance as the elements of structure of the building where the mains are located. The protective
enclosure to the hydrant mains shall be labelled with the word " HYDRANT MAIN " of minimum 50 mm
height at suitable intervals. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all
costs and expenses for such protective enclosures.
The fire hydrants shall be painted on the stem with a 100 mm yellow band, the lower edge of which is
300 mm from the ground.
The outlets shall be provided with protective standard caps of cast iron or other suitable material and
attached to the standpipe by stainless steel chains. The topmost part of the valve shall not exceed a
depth of 1000 mm from the ground level.
The water supply for the fire hydrant shall comply with the requirements stated in latest Code of Practice
for Fire Precautions in Buildings.
Valve pits shall be of adequate size, and readily accessible for inspection, operation, testing and
maintenance and removal of equipment contained therein. They shall be so constructed and arranged
as to properly protect the installed equipment from ground movement and accumulation of water as
specified in SS CP 29. For fire hydrants sited in roadways, care shall be taken that the pits and covers
are capable of bearing the heaviest vehicle that may use the road.
Section 46/.....
BLDG17/S45.DOCX(22)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 46-1
SECTION 46
CENTRALISED CHUTE FOR RECYCLABLE (CCR) SYSTEM
46.1 GENERAL
The Works comprise design, supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete
Centralised Chute for Recyclable (CCR) system.
The whole of the Works embraced in this Contract shall be phased and programmed strictly in
accordance with the proposed construction program and the requirements of the S.O. Any and all
eventualities arising out of the limitations in this Contract and the extent of the Works must be allowed
for in the Tender. No claim to the contrary will be entertained by the S.O.
The Contractor is advised that it shall be deemed to be his sole responsibility to ascertain for himself
the nature and extent of the Works that is required of him for due and faithful completion of each and
every aspect of the Works contained in this Contract. No claim for extras in consequences of any alleged
ignorance in any respect will be entertained by the S.O. It must be clearly and definitely understood by
the Contractor that he will be held solely responsible for making all necessary arrangements and
coordinating with all relevant Authorities, Specialists, Sub-Contractors etc to ensure satisfactory
completion of this Contract.
46.2 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The work shall include design, delivery, supply, install, testing and commissioning, service and
maintenance of the complete Centralised Chute for Recyclable (CCR) system. The Contractor shall
include the necessary submission of system and equipment layout to the relevant Local Authorities for
approval. The complete Centralised Chute for Recyclable (CCR) system shall consist of:
(a) Reinforced Concrete (RC) Chute for Recyclable

(b) Recyclable Handling Equipment
46.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE (RC) CHUTE FOR RECYCLABLE
Reinforced Concrete (RC) chute for recyclable shall be provided at every typical floor with dwelling
units. It shall be located at the common areas above the Centralised Refuse Chamber (CRC) at a
sufficient distance from the refuse chute. The internal dimension of the RC chute shall be at least 800
mm x 800mm and it shall flush with the soffit of the 2nd storey beam. It shall be equipped with a flushing
system for washing of the chute and recyclable handling equipment. Access panel and cross ventilation
features shall be provided at the top of the chute
46.3 HAND-OPERATED STAINLESS STEEL HOPPER
Hand-operated stainless steel hopper shall be provided to the opening of the RC recyclable chute wall
as shown in the drawing. The hopper for recyclable chute shall be constructed of stainless steel of
Grade 304. The surface shall be of hairline finishes. All joints shall be welded in full and no spot welding
shall be used for the works. All welds shall be smoothly and securely finished. The contractor shall
provide shop drawings for SO reps approval before installation.
The contractor shall provide educational signage at locations above the hopper at every storey of the
residential block. The size of the signage shall a minimum of A3 (landscape) of acrylic materials with
full colour printing. The contractor shall provide shop drawings and the content of the signage for SO
Reps approval before installation.
The contractor shall provide sufficient protection to the hand-operated stainless steel hopper and means
to seal the hopper after installation to prevent damages and chokages to the Centralised Chute for
Recyclable (CCR) system.
BLDG17/S46.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 46-2
46.4 RECYCLABLE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
The Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be located within the Centralised Refuse Chamber (CRC).
The contractor shall size the collection capacity based on the number of dwelling units per block and
the relevant authority’s requirement. At least one movable recycling bin, with a capacity of at least 1.0
cubic metre which complies with relevant authority’s requirement, shall be provided per CCR system.
The Centralised Refuse Chamber (CRC) shall have sufficient space to house both the Recyclable
Handling Equipment, the Refuse Handling Plant and to facilitate the movement of the recycling bin
within and out the Centralised Refuse Chamber (CRC). Pathway shall be wide enough for the mobile
recyclable bins to move through the Centralized Refuse Chamber (CRC). Ramps shall be provided to
facilitate recyclables collection by the public waste collector. Additional door to the centralized refuse
chamber (CRC), if required, shall be wide enough for the movable recycling bins to move through.
The Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be designed to be robust and constructed with materials with
sufficient abrasive strength, surface hardness and corrosive resistance to withstand the impact of
recyclables waste thrown from the topmost floor. Breakfall mechanism shall be incorporated where
necessary. Vibration and noise suppression shall be given due consideration such that residents living
near the refuse chamber are not inconvenienced or distressed. An effective and efficient drainage
system shall be provided such that sullage water and washwater can be discharged to the gully directly
after every flush to the recyclable chute. All electrical works shall be carried out by a Licensed Electrical
Worker and shall comply with the requirements and regulations of the relevant authorities.
The Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance to the Specialist
recommendation and the Contractor shall submit shop drawing for SO Rep’s approval before
installation.
The Contractor shall submit a service and maintenance checklist and its schedule for the approval of
the SO Rep. The SO Rep shall have the authority to request for amendment to the checklist and
schedule as and when necessary.
System and operation training shall be provided by the specialist contractor to Service and Maintenance
staff. 4 sets of Operation and Maintenance manuals of the system shall be submitted prior to handling
over of the system for operation.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the defects of the Centralised Chute System for Recyclable
for a period of 12 months from the date of certified completion. The Contractor shall make good at his
own expenses resulting from inferior material or workmanship which may arise during the 12 months
maintenance period.
46.5 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Unless otherwise stated, all structural members of the Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be Grade
43A Steel (Mild Steel) to BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113 and BS EN 10210 (Part 1). The thickness shall
not be less than 4mm unless otherwise specified or approved by SO Rep.
All bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners shall be made of stainless steel.
All materials used in the manufacture of the Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be new and of the
best quality of their respective kinds available. They shall be of correct dimensions, sizes and gauges
approved by the SO Rep and free from any Defect or damage upon completion of fabrication, assembly
and delivery of the unit.
All internal welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. All welds
shall be smooth and securely finished. For all welds performed, if in the opinion of the SO Rep that
certain portion of the weld shall be reinforced or redone, the Contractor shall complete the Works as
instructed at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
No approval or any acceptance by the SO Rep shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under
Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the Works.
All materials used or to be used in the manufacture of the Recyclable Handling Equipment and the
workmanship shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the SO Rep may direct, whether at
the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other place or places as the SO Rep
may require. The cost of any test (including destructive tests) shall be borne by the Contractor and such
cost and expense shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
BLDG17/S46.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 46-3
46.6 PAINTING
(a) General
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and
grease remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified
residues, dust and other contamination and foreign matters.
(b) Surface Preparation
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly degreased with water-based oil and
grease remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified
residues, dust and other contamination and foreign matters.
All weld areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, heat oxides and weld
splatter. All shape edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be grounded off.
All loose rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed.
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be grit-blasted to near white metal. Before applying
the paint system, it shall be ensured that all the steel surfaces to be painted are thoroughly
dry and well cleaned, free from all rust, rustscales and millscales.
(c) External Surface of Recyclable Handling Equipment
The external surfaces of the recyclable handling equipment shall be painted with the
following paint system:
(i) One full coat of fast drying polyamide-cured epoxy zinc phosphate primer of 50
microns dry film thickness.
(ii) One full coat of polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide
primer of 100 microns dry film thickness.
(iii) One full coat of polyamide-cured high built epoxy mastic of 100 microns dry film
thickness.
(d) Coating Specifiation
(i) Epoxy Zinc Phosphate Primer
It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured primer with excellent adhesion

to steel. It shall be suitable for epoxy systems used on structural steel. It shall
contain zinc phosphate with iron oxide pigments. Its volume solid content shall not
be less than 53% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not be less
than 16 hours.
(ii) Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide Primer
It shall be high build, two pack epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing

micaceous iron oxide. It shall give excellent durability, toughness and abrasion
resistance. The volume solid content shall not be less than 65% volume solids. Its
minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.
(iii) High Build Epoxy Mastic
It shall be high build, two packs epoxy polyamide-cured coating which offers long
term protection to expose steelwork against fumes and spillage of mild acids,
alikalis, salts and solvents. The coating shall also offer excellent toughness and
durability. The volume solid content shall not be less than 60% volume solids. Its
minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.
BLDG17/S46.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 46-4
46.6 PAINTING (CONT’D)
(e) Internal Surfaces of Centralised Chute System for Recyclable
To prevent corrosion, the internal surface of the Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be
painted or coated with manufacturer’s recommendation of paint system, complete with
written recommendations with regard to mixing, painting, application procedures and
equipment, drying time, curing time and overcoating time of each coat.
46.7 AUTOMATIC HEAT DETECTOR AND WATER FLUSHING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall include the design and installation of a heat detector and water flushing system for
each Centralised Chute System for Recyclables. The system shall be linked to an electrical control
panel and flushing pipe at roof and automatically activated if fire is detected in the recyclable bin where
the Centralised Chute System for Recyclables is located. An audio and visual warning devices linked
to the activation of the flushing system shall be provided.
46.8 MAINTENANCE, REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
The Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be designed for good accessibility to all its major parts for
maintenance, repair and replacement purposes
In the case of blockage in the recyclable handling equipment, the maintenance personnel shall be able
to clear the blockage without having to take apart the recyclable handling equipment or involving any
other major works that requires specialist expertise
The Recyclable Handling Equipment shall be designed such that it can be isolated or removed from the
recyclable chute for maintenance and repair purposes. All greasing points shall be readily accessible
for the ease of maintenance
One month before the completion, the contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep for the performance
test of the Recyclable Handling Equipment. All Defects notified during the inspection shall be rectified
before the building blocks are handed over to the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be
taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
Section 47/.....
BLDG17/S46.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 47-1
SECTION 47
RESERVED
SECTION 48
RESERVED
Section 49/.....
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-1
SECTION 49
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
49.1 REGULATIONS
The electrical works include electrical installation, lighting installation, lightning protection works,
telephone/data cabling, fire alarm system and other miscellaneous electrical works.
The electrical installation works shall comply with all statutory rules, regulations and requirements of
the EMA, SP Services Ltd and PowerGrid, current at the date of submission of the Tender and to the
complete satisfaction of the SO Rep.
In particular, the electrical installation works shall comply with the following:
(a) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations made under The Electricity Act (CAP. 89A)
including any subsequent updates and amendments of the Regulations;
(b) Singapore Standard CP 5;
(c) Any additional regulations issued by EMA, SPSL and PowerGrid; and
(d) All other electrical works shall comply with their respective Codes of Practice.
49.2 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
It is the intention of the Drawings and/or Specifications to provide a complete and safe operating system.
The omission from the Drawings and Specifications of any details in construction, installation, materials
or specialities necessary for a complete, operating and safe system shall not relieve the Contractor from
Before submitting the Tender, and also prior to the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall study
the Drawings and inspect the Site to satisfy themselves that the Works could be carried out as specified.
Should it be deemed necessary to make modifications to the Drawings, method of installation or site
adjustments to suit the structural and site constraints and to ensure compliance with the Statutory Rules
and Regulations, the Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of his recommendations within two weeks
from the commencement of the Contract and to obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before
proceeding with the modifications.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for
complying with the requirements of this clause. The Drawings and/or Specifications indicate the
minimum requirements of the Employer only. Should the requirements of the Drawings and/or
Specifications conflict with the requirements of the Statutory Rules and/or Regulations, the most
stringent of the requirements shall govern the Works.
49.3 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
All Plant and equipment or materials specified in the Specifications and any other Plant and equipment
or materials provided under the Contract shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for use in Singapore.
The local climate is tropical with a mean shade temperature of 27.8°C. The normal maximum shade
temperature is 31°C and the minimum shade temperature is 23.9°C.
The mean relative humidity is 80%, the maximum and minimum being 100% and 65.1% respectively.
49.4 ITEMS OF ANY ONE CLASSIFICATION
Any items, fittings or accessories which are used in quantity, shall in each case be the product of one
manufacturer and shall be used only for the service recommended by the manufacturer.
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-2
49.5 INCOMING SERVICE CABLES
The incoming service cables will be provided by PowerGrid up to and terminated at the incoming service
panel provided by the Contractor.
For service entries where there are no switch rooms, the Contractor shall provide weatherproof
enclosures to house the incoming service terminations. The enclosures shall have hinged doors and
facilities for locking. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide concrete pedestal bases to the
requirements of SPSL/PowerGrid for mounting the weatherproof enclosures. The Contractor shall
provide jumper or consumer terminal service (CTS) cables connecting the Employer's installation to the
weatherproof enclosure.
For service entries terminated directly at the main switch board, inside a switch room, the Contractor
shall provide suitable cable end boxes for the termination.
For Bulk Intake Consumer Switchroom, the Contractor shall supply, deliver, install/lay, terminate, test
and commission the incoming service cable, on cable tray/cable ladder/trunking, from the Bulk Intake
Consumer Switch Room to all Sub-Switchboards in Consumer Switch Room of the residential block,
basement carpark and commercial block as indicated in the drawing. The termination shall be with
suitable terminated accessories in accordance to PowerGrid's requirement. The Contractor is to
maintain the service cable for a period of one year.
49.6 FIXING SCREWS
All screws used for fixing meter boards, moulded or steel boxes, switches, socket outlets, consumer
control units etc shall be in brass.
49.7 SWITCH ROOMS
Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, all switch rooms shall be provided with at least a lighting
point controlled by a switch, a 13 Amp switch socket-outlet, a consumer control unit, a fluorescent batten
luminaire complete with tube and emergency battery/inverter pack (2 hours), a glass framed single line
diagram of the electrical installation in at least A3 size (the wordings of the diagram shall be legible),
first aid chart and a 900mm wide rubber mat complying with the latest edition of IEC 61111. The rubber
mat shall be placed all around the floor standing switch board and indoor service electrical distribution
box if any. All switches, socket-outlets and consumer control units shall be metal clad.
All final sub-circuit wirings to lighting and power points in the switch rooms/meter rooms shall be run in
metal conduit.
Wirings for public lighting circuits shall be grouped and taped together according to their circuits. The
circuits shall be bunched and secured on the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties.
All other cables shall run on metal cable trays. The cables shall be neatly secured on the trays by plastic
fixing ties or PVC coated metal saddles at regular intervals not exceeding 300mm. No over lapping of
cables shall be allowed except for crossing of different circuits which shall be kept to a minimum.
49.8 POWER SUPPLY POINTS OUTSIDE SWITCH ROOMS

AND AT STAIRCASE LANDINGS
A 15 Amp metal-clad switch socket-outlet housed in a metal enclosure shall be installed outside each
switchroom and at staircase landings or as indicated in the Drawings. These power supply points shall
be connected to a separate way of the consumer control unit in the switchroom. The wiring to the power
supply point shall be installed concealed unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
The metal enclosure shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of 1.2mm thickness. It shall
be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving an overall paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. A
sample of the metal enclosure shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation. The
enclosure shall be semi-recessed such that use by external electrical plug is convenient and easy. The
Contractor can propose alternative solution to the metal enclosure so long as there is locking
provision/facility for these public power supply points. The alternative solution shall be subjected to
approval by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-3
49.9 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
49.9.1 General
The following work of the electrical installation shall be inspected and tested on Site after completion :
(a) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables
(b) Earthing System
(c) Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring
(d) Lightning Protection System
(e) Telephone System
(f) CATV System
All electrical tests including continuity, insulation resistance, polarity, earth fault loop impedances,
phasing and earth electrode resistance shall be made in a manner prescribed in Singapore
Standard CP 5 or other relevant standard specifications and Codes of Practice. Where no
Standard/Code/Regulation is applicable, the tests shall be conducted in a manner approved by the
SO Rep.
For new wiring installations, the value of insulation resistance shall be as follows :
(a) Main Switchboard and Mains Cables shall be more than 10 Megaohms
(b) New underground cables shall be more than 5 Megaohms
(c) Unit's Wiring & Final Circuit Wiring shall be more than 1 Megaohms
The Contractor shall check and test the installation to ensure that it is complete and complies with the
requirements of the Specifications, the EMA and SPSL. All tests shall be witnessed, endorsed and
verified by the Consultant’s LEW. Employer reserve the right to conduct any audit testing if required.
lnspection or approval of tests by the SO Rep of any Plant and equipment, work or installation shall not
relieve the Contractor from his obligation to supply the complete Plant and equipment, and complete
the Works and installation in accordance with the Specifications.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, consumable stores, connections,
skilled and unskilled labour and services with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests
and any audit testing. If site electricity supply is not available for testing or setting protection relays, the
Contractor shall provide a portable diesel generator set for the purpose. Any costs which may be
involved in the tests shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum by the Contractor.
49.9.2 Application For HDB Testing
HDB reserve the right to conduct audit testings if necessary on main switchboards, risers, distribution
boards, telephone and CATV system etc including the earthing system. The Contractor shall test the
installation works and submit all the tests reports to SO Rep/or Consultant for verification/endorsement
before submission to HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit for audit testings. If any of the test reports
and relevant documents are not submitted to HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit for audit testings,
HDB reserve the right not to take over the block upon completion until the outstanding test reports and
documents are submitted to HDB and HDB is satisfied with the testings. The onus will be on the
Contractor to submit all test reports and relevant documents to HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit
at least 14 days prior to any scheduled handing over date of the block.
The electrical installation to individual residential unit shall be tested by HDB Technical Management
(M&E) Unit. The Contractor shall apply to the HDB Technical Management (M&E) Unit at least 7 working
days in advance together with the respective test reports and supporting documents duly endorsed and
verified by the Consultant’s LEW. The following shall be submitted at the time of application for testing:
(a) One Certificate Of Fitness For Turn-On For Residential Units in each building block. A schedule
of electrical installation for each residential building block (Form E)
(b) A block layout plan showing the types of residential units on each floor and unit layout plans with
relevant single line diagrams.
(c) A photocopy of Certificate of Compliance (COC) of the electrical installation for each block
(d) A photocopy of licence to use or operate electrical installation for each block
(e) A soft copy (in CD Rom) of the as-built Single Line Drawings (in dwg format) of the electrical
installations of the main switchboard and sub-switch board for each block.
(f) Quality Acceptance Report for the telephone wiring installation
(g) Telecom installer testing report for each block
(h) One copy of as-built MATV schematic installation drawing and other supporting drawings in A3
size paper.
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-4
49.9.3 Re-Testing And Charges
Any omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test requirements detected during the testing shall
be rectified by the Contractor within three (3) working days and verified by the Consultant . For re-testing
of residential unit, the Contractor shall arrange for re-testing with HDB Technical Management (M&E)
Unit within three (3) working days.
If the Contractor fails the first testing/re-tests due to omissions or Defect or faults or failure to meet test
requirements the Employer shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 "Nuisance and Irregularities" to
impose charges against the Contractor.
49.10 SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY TARGET DATES
For building blocks with lifts, Main Distribution Frame (MDF) room, Telecommunication Equipment
Room (TER) and Consumer Switch Room (CSR), the main switchboards including the lift electricity
cables and the supply cables for the MDF room, TER and CSR shall be energised at least 9 weeks
before the date of Substantial Completion of building blocks not more than 30 storeys and 10 weeks
before the date of Substantial Completion of building blocks more than 30 storeys. This is to allow time
for the testing and commissioning of the lifts and telephone systems by others to meet the date of
Substantial Completion of the building blocks. All electrical tests shall be completed and electricity
supply to all other parts of the electrical installation shall be energised at least 2 weeks before the date
of Substantial Completion of the building blocks.
49.11 WIRING/TRUNKING ROUTES AND POSITION OF ELECTRICAL

PLANT AND EQUIPMENT/ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS
The wiring/trunking routes where indicated in the Drawings and the positions of electrical Plant and
equipment/accessories and fittings where indicated in the Drawings are meant to serve as a guide only.
The actual routes or positions shall be determined on the Site subject to the approval of the SO Rep.
There shall be no variations to the Contract or adjustments to the Contract Sum arising from the
selection of a more suitable route or position which might differ from those indicated in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all costs and expenses for complying with these
provisions specified herein.
The Contractor shall ensure a minimum clearance distance of 100mm between the electrical
trunking/fitting and the ventilation opening at the Gas and Water (G&W) duct so as not to block such
ventilation opening.
49.12 MAINS CABLE INSTALLATION AT GROUND FLOOR AND RISER DUCT
Mains cable installation at the ground floor and riser ducts shall be encased in metal trunking of standard
widths of 375mm, 300mm, 200mm, 150mm and 75mm and standard height of 75mm.
CATV cables shall be installed in separate 75mm x 75mm metal trunking throughout. Along the ground
floor ceiling where the CATV trunkings and electrical trunkings are installed adjacent to each other, the
CATV trunking shall be installed on the side nearer the service duct. For CATV cables to cross inside
the metal trunking of electrical mains, 20mm diameter metal conduits for the crossing shall be installed
as close to the trunking base as possible. The ends of the metal conduits shall be secured to the
trunking sides using locknuts and female brass bushes. Only one metal conduit is allowed for each
CATV cable.
49.13 SEGREGATION OF METERED SUPPLY CABLES
Metered supply cables after the electricity kWH meters shall be installed in their own separate
trunkings/conduits or if installed in a common trunking with other unmetered supply cables, then they
shall be installed in the manner hereinafter specified. The metered supply cables shall be grouped and
secured together by plastic fixing ties. These shall be tagged and identified as metered supply cables
within each removable sections of the trunkings.
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-5
49.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all wiring routes, circuiting,
circuitry, electrical points, legends, lightning protection system and all other electrical works based on
actual site installations for the production of as-built drawings.
The Contractor shall provide two batches of as-built drawings.
The first batch of the as-built drawings is for the electrical installation of each individual dwelling unit.
These shall be provided inside each dwelling unit before completion of the works for each building block.
The size of the as-built drawings shall be A3 size.
The as-built drawings for the dwelling unit shall show :
(a) block number and house number of the unit;

(b) the single-line drawing ( SLD ) of the electrical installation inside the unit;
(c) the concealed conduit routes in the ceiling slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television
services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );
(d) the concealed conduit routes in the floor slab for the electrical, telephone/data and television
services ( scale between 1:50 and 1:100 );
(e) legend used.
Each as-built drawing shall be duly checked, certified and endorsed by the Contractor.
The as-built drawings shall be kept inside a specially - designed and durable envelope and fix adjacent
to the unit's consumer unit. For detail arrangement, the Contractor shall liaise with the SO Rep.
The second batch of as-built drawings is for the complete electrical works and shall be submitted in the
following:
i. Two CDROMs containing the as-built drawings in "pdf" format. Every "pdf" drawing must show the
"As-Built" stamp.
ii. One set of as-built tracings. Every tracing must be stamped "As-Built".
iii. Three sets of as-built prints. Every print must be stamped "As-Built".
These as-built drawings shall be submitted to the SO Rep. on a block-to-block basis not later than two
weeks upon the handing over of each building block. The Contractor shall submit a listing of the as-built
drawings submitted and a letter certifying that the submitted drawings is a true record of the works as-
built. Without this certification letter, these as-built drawings will not be accepted.
The thickness of these as-built tracings shall be such that its weight is approximately 110 gram per m2.
The ink in the as-built tracings shall be permanent and not of the powered-type. The details in the
tracings shall be legible and shall not have double or faded images. These as-built tracings will be
rejected if found to be of poor quality.
49.15 SAMPLE WORK
The Contractor shall put up sample work for the approval of the SO Rep and SPSL before proceeding
with the entire installation.
The actual positions of all electrical fittings and accessories shall be determined at site by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep when installing lighting and
accessories.
The Contractor shall notify the SO Rep at least two days in advance between putting up the following
sample work so that specific instructions may be given :
(a) Sample unit wiring to all different types of flats

(b) Mains trunking
(c) Rising mains and horizontal mains
(d) Wiring for public lighting
(e) Lightning protection system
(f) Driving of earth electrodes
(g) Other wiring or installation as instructed by the SO Rep
Failure to inform and obtain approval from the SO Rep may result in the rejection of the installation work
and no claim for compensation shall be entertained by the Employer.
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-6
49.16 TEMPORARY STORES
The Contractor shall provide suitable temporary store/s at the Site for the safe-keeping of fittings and
materials and for their protection against damage or loss by weather or other causes. The location and
type of store/s shall be approved by the SO Rep who will have the discretion to exclude in his payment
certificates, payment for any fitting or material which is not stored to his satisfaction.
49.17 SUBMISSION OF DETAILS
The Contractor's Tender where applicable shall be accompanied by details of the proposed system
including details on the technical and performance aspects of the Plant and equipment (antenna, pre-
amplifier, mixer, amplifier, splitter, etc). Single line diagrams of the distribution system with the signal
strengths in dbV, for all the distribution points and the proposed underground cable route (if
underground system is involved) shall be submitted together with the Tender or when requested by the
SO Rep.
The approval, with or without amendments, by the SO Rep of the Contractor's System shall not in any
way affect vary or relieve the Contractor's liabilities or obligations to ensure compliance of the System
with the specified technical performance standards.
49.18 NEW MATERIALS, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
If the Contractor intends to use Plant and equipment and materials which have not been approved
previously by the HDB, he shall arrange with the manufacturer or supplier to submit the items for
approval prior to the acceptance of the tender.
Each article which is submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a full description and technical
specification with supporting performance and test data from the manufacturer.
In addition, a report of type tests conducted on the article in accordance with the relevant standards
shall be submitted.
Each article shall be suitably marked for identification and will be retained by the SO Rep for record
purposes. When the article is required to be returned, the Contractor shall submit a photograph or
illustration suitable for identification and record.
49.19 PLANT, EQUIPMENT/PARTS
(a) The Contractor shall confirm the brands and models of the Plant and equipment and accessories
to be used for the Contract within one week from the date of the Letter of Acceptance. At the
same time, the Contractor is also required to place order for the Plant and equipment early.
(b) At the time of tendering, the Contractor shall only offer in his main offer items which have already
been approved by the HDB. If the Contractor offers items in his main offer which have not been
approved, the tender may be treated as non-compliance with the Specifications and the
Employer reserves the right to reject the tender.
(c) If the Contractor proposed to use a product other than those specified in the Specifications and/or
indicated in the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed product to the
SO Rep for approval not later than one week after the date of the Letter of Acceptance. The
provision of subclause 1.2.5 shall be applied accordingly.
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 49-7
49.20 TYPE TEST
Type test reports issued by the following third-party certified laboratories are acceptable :
 Laboratories with SAC-SINGLAS accreditation;

 Laboratories with SAC-MRA partners accreditation;
 Laboratories participating in IECEE CB scheme.
[SAC also signs bilateral Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA) with other national accreditation
bodies. It is also a signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC)
Arrangement and regional cooperation bodies such as Asia Pacific Laboratory Accreditation
Cooperation (APLAC). IECEE stands for IEC System for Conformity Testing and Certification of
Electrical Equipment. The IECEE operates the CB (Certification Body) Scheme which is a multilateral
certification system based on standards prepared by the International Electrotechnical Commission.]
49.21 SYSTEMATIC LAYOUT OF ALL SERVICE PIPES AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS (M&E SERVICES)
AT BUILDING ROOFTOP
The Contractor shall prepare a coordinated services layout plan showing the overall layout of all the M
& E service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top in consultation with the SO Rep. The layout of
the service pipes and electrical conduits at the roof top shall ensure good accessibility and neat
arrangement to facilitate the movement of the maintenance workmen, besides meeting all technical
and statutory requirements.
The Contractor shall submit the coordinated roof top services layout to the SO Rep for approval
before installation. Ensure that all the pipes/conduits are arranged in a systematic and orderly
manner, and the access to the water tanks, lift motor rooms, pumps, and other services at the rooftop
is not obstructed by service pipes and electrical conduits. Work by the various trades at the roof top
shall be supervised and coordinated by the Contractor. In areas where pipes are causing obstruction,
the contractor is to provide chequered-plate platform and steps over the pipes in accordance with the
Drawings. The platform shall be installed at locations furthest away from the building edge and in such
a way as not to pose danger to the maintenance workmen.
49.22 INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM
The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when
it is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR).
The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor. It shall then run on
the underside/soffit of the LMR’s floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking.
Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location.
Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the
LMR’s floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain.
Provide a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb around the base of the trunking to prevent water
from seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit
the site conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather.
The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it.
Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.
Section 50/.....
BLDG17/S49.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-1
SECTION 50
SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS
50.1 SWITCHBOARDS
50.1.1 General
The switchboards shall be suitable for use on a 400/230V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz supply system and
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61439.
The switchboards shall incorporate all the items as set out in the Drawings. All costs relating to testing,
testing fees and miscellaneous charges necessary for the completion and commissioning of the
switchboards ready for continuous operation at its designated Site positions shall be included in the
Contract Sum.
50.1.2 Drawings
Detailed construction drawings and circuit and wiring diagrams of all switchboards shall be submitted
to the SO Rep for approval before construction. These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly
the following (where applicable) :
(a) Plant and equipment

(b) Current ratings including short circuit capacities
(c) Colour of indicating lamps
(d) Position of switches
(e) Internal connections of all apparatus with all terminal markings
(f) All Plant and equipment to be shown in the open or de-energised position
(g) All secondary or primary plugged contacts
(h) Wire ferrule numbers
(i) Size, type and colour of wire
(j) Current transformer terminal markings and outputs
(k) Ammeter and voltmeter scaling
(l) Relay settings
(m) The main physical dimensions showing all necessary clearances required for removing covers,
opening doors and withdrawing compartments.
(n) Position of all Plant and equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting
(o) Identification of all Plant and equipment with the appropriate label engraving describing
function and coding
The quantities, sizes and ratings of Plant and equipment incorporated within the switchboards shall be
as indicated in the Drawings.
50.1.3 Construction
The switchboards shall be of enclosed assembly design, suitable for indoor use in the form of free
standing or wall mounting, self-contained, flush fronted cubicles sectionalised as necessary to facilitate
easy transportation and erection. The assembly shall be Type Tested in accordance with IEC 61439.
The main incoming unit, functional units of metered and unmetered supply, the metered and unmetered
busbar sections shall be separately housed in their own cubicles.
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-2
50.1.3 Construction (Cont'd)
Wall mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front access only and the maximum height shall be
2.0m.
Floor mounting switchboards shall be suitable for front and back access.
The cubicle sections shall be constructed of electro-galvanised sheet steel frames of minimum
thickness of 2.0mm and the panels shall be constructed from electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum
thickness of 1.6mm. It shall be able to withstand a fault level of 36 KA for 1 second unless specified
otherwise in the single-line-diagrams. The enclosures for the switchboards shall provide a degree of
protection IP 4X.
Each cubicle unit shall be incorporated with a removable cover with hidden hinges. The front cover
shall have apertures for the protrusion of operating handles of circuit breakers. The covers shall be
constructed of folded electro-galvanised sheet steel of minimum thickness of 1.6mm.
The various units comprising a complete switchboard shall be grouped in a multi-tier arrangement
including cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions to accommodate terminal boards, cable
boxes and gland plates.
All external panels of the switchboard shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint giving a total paint
thickness of not less than 50 microns. All coats of paint shall be oven baked and dried.
50.1.4 Busbars
Four pole air insulated busbars of uniform cross-sectional area throughout their length with a continuous
rating or dimensions not less than that indicated in the Drawings shall be arranged neatly.
The busbars and busbar connections between the busbars and various items of the switchgear shall
be manufactured from copper.
All busbars shall be tinned, and continuous lengths without connections shall be insulated with heat
shrinking sleeves.
Busbars shall be mounted on non-hygroscopic, anti-tracking insulators strong enough to endure,

without damage, forces set up by any thermal expansion within the bars under normal operating
conditions and forces created by prospective fault currents.
Busbars shall be housed in separate compartments and these compartments shall not contain any
wiring or apparatus other than that required for coupling to the busbars.
Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be gained only by the removal of a cover secured by
bolts. Behind the covers, an insulating sheet with warning labels bearing the word "DANGER" in bold
letters and the lightning symbol shall be provided so that final access can be gained only through
removing this sheet secured by round head screws.
In addition, for the chambers housing the main busbars, the insulating sheet shall be of transparent
material with the word "Danger" in bold letters and the lightning symbol. The material for the transparent
sheet shall be of minimum 3mm thick clear polycarbonate with the following properties :
(a) greater than 86% light transmittance
(b) special treatment for high abrasive resistance
(c) high self ignition temperature.
The busbars shall, where necessary, have built-in facilities near the load side of the incomer to enable
PowerGrid to fit their metering transformers and sealing of this compartment.
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-3
50.1.5 Circuits And Connections
All connections between busbars and the switchgears shall be copper busbars or PVC insulated copper
cables of minimum cross-sectional area of not less than the rating of outgoing cables connected to the
switchgear. All cable connections shall be terminated with proper cable lugs and shrouded with heat
shrunk PVC sleeves of the appropriate phase identifying colour.
Small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, or shall be enclosed in plastic purpose
made small wiring trunking or trough.
Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the related item of the
switchgear. A HRC fuse and fuse carriers with blown fuse indicator shall be fixed within the respective
compartment to protect the control circuit. Where control circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the
fuse shall also be used to isolate the terminals of these contacts.
Where auxiliary contacts are used for interlocking purposes and supplies are derived from other
sources, isolating facilities shall be provided to render the auxiliary switches safe.
This isolation shall be in the form of auxiliary switches mounted on the respective compartment isolating
device or a separate isolator mounted within the respective compartment.
All small wiring shall be of multi-stranded copper not less than 1.5mm2 (7/0.50mm) with PVC insulation.
All control wiring shall be identified with numbered ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the
schematic wiring diagram.
All fuses shall be of the HRC type and fuse carriers with blown fuse indicator complete with bridges,
terminal shrouds and carriers.
Small wiring associated with external control circuits shall be connected to terminal strips which shall
be conveniently arranged to facilitate the termination of incoming multi-core cables.
Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than two wires shall
be connected to any outgoing.
Each terminal block for external wiring shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity.
All wiring diagrams shall show the terminal blocks in terminal sequence.
50.1.6 Earth Bar
A solid, tinned copper earth bar shall be provided at the base of the switchboard. The minimum cross-
sectional dimensions of the earth bar shall be 25mm x 3mm. It shall run the length of the switchboard
and shall be easily accessible by removing the bottom front panels of the switchboard.
All earth continuity conductors of the mains cables shall be terminated by means of appropriate cable
lugs at the earth bar. The earth terminal of any cubicle of the switchboard shall also be connected to
the earth bar by an adequately-sized earth continuity conductor.
The earth bar shall be connected by a PVC insulated 70mm copper earth cable to the main earth bar
in the switch room.
50.1.7 Metering, Instruments And Accessories
Facilities shall be provided on the switchboards for PowerGrid to carry out their metering. The cubicle
for housing PowerGrid meters, fuses, cut-outs and neutral links shall comply with the requirements of
PowerGrid/SPSL. Where required, the Contractor shall collect and install the meters for PowerGrid all
at the Contractor's cost and expense.
Where indicated, voltmeters and ammeters shall be provided. Indicating instruments shall comply with
IEC 60051, accuracy class 1.5. Instruments shall be of the moving iron type, with external zero
adjustment. They shall be flush-mounted and housed in a pressed steel or plastic case with shield plate.
Instrument terminals shall be shrouded.
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-4
50.1.7 Metering, Instruments And Accessories (Cont'd)
Voltmeters shall be incorporated with selector switches for phase to phase and phase to neutral
indication.
Ammeters shall be of the current transformer operated type and shall be incorporated with selector
switches for indication of all phase currents.
Switches shall be of the rotary wafer type.
Where maximum demand ammeters are specified, they shall be of the bimetallic type with thermal delay
to suppress the short-term current and indicate the average effective value. The response time of the
maximum demand ammeter shall be 8 minutes. The maximum pointer shifted by the bimetallic
mechanism shall be reset manually by means of an external knob. Maximum demand ammeter shall
be provided for each phase.
Phase indicator lamps shall be of the light emitting diodes (LED) types, operating on direct 230 volts or
on step-down voltage provided by a step-down transformer.
50.1.8 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be of the straight through type with suitable ratio, output and class of
accuracy for their function and shall comply with IEC 60044. Measuring current transformers shall have
accuracy of Class 1 and protective transformers shall have an accuracy of 5P10.
Groups of current transformers used on three phase systems shall have their secondary connections
starred and earthed. When measuring line current values using a common meter with a selector switch,
they shall be connected so that the current transformers shall be shorted out when not being used for
indication. This shall be carried out in the selector switch by "make before break" contacts.
50.1.9 Earth Fault
Digital Protection Relay
The digital protection relays offered shall be in compliance with the following :
Parameters Relevant Requirements

Standard
Operating temperature IEC 60068 -10C to +55C
Humidity IEC 60068 56 days at 40C and 95% RH
Vibration IEC 60255 class I
Shock and Bump IEC 60255 class I
Seismic IEC 60255 class I
Insulation IEC 60255 2kVrms for 1 min between all terminals and earth
2kVrms for 1 min between independent circuits
1kVrms for 1 min across NO contacts
Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255 class III,
5kV 1.2/50s between all terminals and earth
without damage or flashover.
High frequency Disturbance IEC 60255 2.5kV common mode <3% deviation
1.0kV series mode <3% deviation
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255 8kV direct without mal-operation or damage
Radio Frequency IEC 60255 20MHz to 1 GHz at 10V/m and <5% deviation
Disturbance
Fast Transient IEC 60255 class IV ,4kV 5/50ns <3% deviation
Enclosure Protection SS IEC 529 IP52 minimum
EMC Compliance EN50081-1,2
EN50082-1,2
89/336/EEC
Dielectric withstand IEC60255 2KV common mode
1KV differential mode
Impulse voltage IEC60255 5KV common mode
1KV differential mode
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-5
50.1.9 Earth Fault (Cont’d)
Digital Protection Relay (Cont’d)
All protective relays shall be mounted in dust-proof cases, which shall be earthed. The relay front shall
be protected by a transparent cover and shall be designed for flush mounting at the door of the low
voltage compartment of switchgear panel. In the event of a failure, the faulty module can be replaced
without the need of soldering.
The relays shall have an integrated keypad with LCD or LED display. The LCD display shall be
backlighted during reading of relay parameter. There must be at least one LED with one indicating trip
(red). Resetting of LEDs’ indications shall be possible with front cover closed. When the relay front
cover is closed, only the reading of relay settings is possible. Changing of relay settings shall require
the removal of relay’s front cover.
The LCD or LED display shall give a clear message of the fault type by indicating the affected phase
and the type of operation such as instantaneous, DTL earth fault or IDMTL overcurrrent. Fault code is
not preferred and where this is inevitable, a non-fading, waterproof self-adhesive label is to be provided
next to the relay. The relay shall be able to store the last fault record.
The digital protection relays shall display load current and maximum demand current in primary values.
Panel meter shall be used to display primary current. The relay shall be suitable for operation in a 50
Hz system.
The relay shall have at least two contacts for direct tripping of the circuit breakers. Relay contacts shall
make firmly without bounce. The relay parameter and setting relay parameter shall be intact in the event
of power failure.
All relays shall be suitably marked, visible from the front of the relay without removing the cover with
the following information :
(a) Function of relay (e.g. IDMTL overcurrent/ DTL earth fault relay)
(b) Maximum demand current
(c) Rated frequency
All digital relays provided shall have at least 2 binary outputs for external telemonitoring connections.
The contractor may in lieu of digital protection relay provide electromechanical protection relays
complying with the below requirements :
Electromechanical Earth Fault Relay
Earth fault protection shall be afforded by instantaneous attracted armature earth fault relay with a flag
indicator that can be reset by hand.
The earth fault relay shall operate at primary fault current not exceeding 140 Amps. Adjustment of
operating time lag shall be provided by a solid-state delay timer with a setting range of 0.1 to 1 second.
The time lag setting shall not exceed 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated.
The relay shall be flush-mounted and located in a cubicle adjacent to the incoming circuit breaker.
Electromechanical Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent relays shall be Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) relay or Definite Time Lag
(DTL) relay as indicated in the Drawings.
IDMTL relay shall be heavily damped induction disc units with time/current characteristics in accordance
with IEC 60255-6. Its accuracy shall be calibrated at 50 Hz to fall into accuracy class 1 as given in IEC
60255-6. The relay shall be suitable for flush or project mounting and shall be tropicalised and protected
against dust, shock and vibration. It shall remain operative up to an ambient temperature of 50oC without
deterioration of its performance characteristics.
DTL relay shall have adjustable current setting of 2 Amp to 7 Amp and adjustable delay time setting of
0 second to 1 second. Setting accuracy for current shall be less than 5% at full scale and setting
accuracy for time shall be less than 10% at full scale. The relay shall be incorporated with a test button,
rest button and indicating lamp.
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-6
50.1.10 Identification Of Equipment And Circuits
Each item of switchgear, including each switch forming part of a switchboard or panel shall be clearly
labelled externally, to identify its relation to Drawings details.
Labels shall be of "Formica" engraving laminate or other approved or similar material having black
characters on white background, with 5mm minimum height characters. They shall be secured to the
front of the panel by instrument headed screws or adhesive or epoxy glue.
All circuits shall be phase identified at their terminations by means of colour coded heat shrunk sleeves.
50.1.11 Tests
(a) Type Tests
(i) Switchboards shall be subjected to type tests to verify compliance with the requirements
laid down in the Specifications. The type tests shall include the following :
(a) Verification of temperature rise unit

(b) Verification of dielectric properties
(c) Verification of short circuit strength
(d) Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit
(e) Verification of clearances and creepage distances
(f) Verification of mechanical operation
(g) Verification of degree of protections.
(ii) The type tests shall be conducted by independent testing authority which shall be a
member of the Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA) or by laboratories
with either SAC-SINGLAS accreditation or SAC-MRA partners accreditation. The type test
certificate shall be accompanied by a complete type test report which shall include
amongst other information, arrangement and details of switchboard construction,
calibration oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise measurements.
(b) Factory and Delivery Tests
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators and MCCB closed and power fuses
fitted, the switchboard panels shall be subjected to a pressure test of 2.5kV for one minute,
across the following points :
(i) Phase to phase

(ii) Phase to neutral
(iii) Phase to earth
(iv) Neutral to earth
The above tests shall be conducted at the place of manufacture and witnessed by the SO Rep. A test
certificate by the switchboard manufacturer shall be issued on completion of the tests.
The site tests of main switchboards and setting of the protective relays shall be also witnessed by the
SO Rep.
Approval of the tests and test certificates received by the SO Rep shall not in any way affect, vary or
relieve the Contractor's obligations to supply the complete Plant and equipment assembly in accordance
with the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.
50.2 Reserved
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-7
50.3 TAP-OFF BOXES
50.3.1 General
The tap-off boxes shall be purpose made according to the details given in the Drawings and shall comply
with the following subclauses. The tap-off box shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories. A sample of the tap-off box shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval.
50.3.2 Design And Dimension
The overall dimensions and essential details of the tap-off boxes shall be according to the Drawings.
The tap-off boxes shall comply with IEC 60439.
The internal layout may be re-arranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in the box.
Tap-off boxes shall have hinged access door facilities for locking with a master key system. Four master
keys shall be handed over to the relevant Branch Office by the Contractor on Substantial Completion
of the Contract.
All line-branch connectors shall be adequately sized for the cables used. It shall allow the main and
branch cables to be separately secured to the connecting block with the main cable continuous and
uncut.
50.3.3 Metal Box
The metal box shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel. The body
of the box shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the mounting plate for electrical Plant and equipment shall
be of 1.5mm thickness. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint of thickness not less than
45 microns and shall be oven baked and dried.
The metal box shall comply with the latest edition of SS 5.
50.3.4 Phase Marking
All line-branch connectors shall be identified with their respective phase colours after completion of
installation.
50.4 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, of appropriate size, and they shall house the number
of ways and miniature circuit breakers or HRC fuses as indicated in the Drawings. In cases where HRC
fuses are used, fuse carriers with blown fuse indicator shall be specified.
Distribution boards shall have hinged access doors with suitable dustproof seals. Each board shall
have insulated protective shields to prevent accidental contact with live parts.
Neutral and earth busbars shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or earth conductor connected
to them.
Each distribution board shall have an approved circuit list fixed on the inside of the door. Labels shall
also be supplied for each distribution board screwed to the front giving board reference.
The construction of distribution boards shall comply with the requirements for the construction of
switchboards.
Miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60439.
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-8
50.5 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)
All MCCB shall comply with latest requirements of IEC 60947-2. Triple pole MCCB shall be rated at
400V ac and double pole MCCB shall be rated at 230V ac. The rated service short circuit breaking
capacity (lcs) shall be at least 50% of the rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (lcu) for all MCCB.
The fault level of the incoming breaker at the main switchboard shall be assumed to be 36 kA at rated
voltage of 400V unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings. All other MCCB within the main
switchboard shall be rated to comply with the calculations based on the above starting fault level or the
level as indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
The main incoming MCCB shall be fitted with a round type external handle. The handle shall incorporate
provisions for locking the handle in either the "OFF" or "ON" position and for interlocking with the hinged
door of the compartment. There shall be a marking plate to indicate the "ON", "OFF", "RESET" and
"TRIP" modes. It shall be possible to adjust the instantaneous tripping of the main incoming MCCB
from 2 to 8 times of its rated current. It shall also be incorporated with shunt trip facility where external
earth fault protection is required.
Each triple pole MCCB shall be provided with a neutral link housed in the same compartment. The
neutral link shall be constructed of tinned copper bar of suitable cross-section to match the circuit
conductors with a bridged piece to facilitate disconnection without removal of the connection cables
during testing. Connection of cables to the neutral link shall be by cable lugs, bolts and nuts.
All MCCB shall be mounted and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
50.6 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
All MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle-type tripping switch and shall comply with
the latest requirements of IEC 60898.
The MCB shall be rated for phase voltage of 230V, 50 Hz operation and shall have an interrupting
capacity of at least 6 KA (M6) unless stated otherwise.
50.7 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)
The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a
tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second. It shall comply with the latest requirements of SS 97. The RCCB
shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
RCCBs installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme by
SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories
Test Mark.
50.8 SWITCH FUSES, ISOLATORS AND ISOLATING SWITCHES
Switch fuses, isolators and isolating switches shall be of the quick-made and break type, suitable for
the rating of the Plant and equipment served.
Switch fuses shall comply with IEC 60947-3 and shall be fitted with fuses to BS 88, bolted type,
Class Q1, certified for 400V and category of Duty AC23.
Isolators and isolating switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. For isolating switches, solid copper
links shall be fitted in place of fuses.
50.9 CONTACTORS
Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase four-wire 400/230V 50 Hz supplies and fitted with
220 - 250V ac coils, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424:Part 1.
Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization category
shall be AC-3.
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 50-9
50.10 BLOCK CONNECTORS
All block connectors used for branching of circuits or neutral links shall be tinned brass blocks contained
within phenolic moulded cases. They shall be rated for the load current of the circuits.
The cable entries and terminals of the connector shall be of the correct size for the termination of the
conductors. Not more than one cable shall be terminated into each terminal of the connector. All
exposed parts of the connection shall be covered and sealed.
Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductor between the metal surfaces with sufficient contact
pressure but without causing damage to the conductors.
The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are properly terminated and all terminations are tightened
at each conductor. He shall make good all damages resulting from loose or faulty connections.
Section 51/.....
BLDG17/S50.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-1
SECTION 51
MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES
51.1 CABLES
51.1.1 General
Fire rated cables shall be listed under TUV SUD PSB PLS Class 1A or other approved equivalent
recognized by FSSD.
The cable conductors shall be annealed copper. Identification trade marks, voltage rating and cross-
sectional area of the conductor shall be embossed or printed on the surface of the sheathing of the
cable. Every coil or drum of cable shall have a tag as label attached giving the following information :
(a) Name and type of cable
(b) Cross-sectional area and number of core
(c) Length
(d) Manufacturer's name, mark or other trademark
(e) Rated operating voltage
All cables shall be new and unused and shall be delivered to the Site with the manufacturer's seals,
labels or other proof of origin intact.
All cables shall be of the size and type specified in the Drawings or Specifications.
51.1.2 PVC-Insulated Cables
All PVC-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise in the
Drawings :
(a) Single core PVC-insulated non-sheathed cables shall comply with SS 358 with all the latest
amendments. The cable shall be rated at 450/750 Volts.
(b) Single and multi-core PVC-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 502 with all the
latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
51.1.3 Fire Rated Cables
All fire rated cables use in fire safety measures to maintain integrity of main supplies shall comply with
SS 299 and approved by FSSD.
Fire rated signal cables shall be rated at least to 300/500V. The rating of other fire rated cables used in
230V and 400V systems can be 450/750V or 600/1000V. They shall be single or multicore cables as
shown in the Drawings, each comprising stranded circular annealed copper conductors and a fire
resisting barrier. Cable sizes of 1.5mm2 to 4mm2 can be single insulated and cable sizes of 6mm2 and
above shall have both insulation and sheath. The thickness of the insulation and sheath shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's technical specification where the relevant BS or IEC standards are
not applicable. Further, the construction of the cables shall be in accordance with its relevant SS, BS
or IEC standards and a type test report shall be submitted.
BLDG17/S51.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-2
51.1 CABLES (CONT’D)
51.1.4 XLPE-Insulated Cables
All XLPE-insulated cables shall comply with the following standards unless specified otherwise or
indicated in the Drawings:
(a) Single and multi-core XLPE-insulated, PVC sheathed cable shall comply with IEC 60502 with all
the latest amendments. The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
(b) Underground cable shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC copper cables and shall comply with IEC 60502.
The cable shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts.
51.2 CABLE INSTALLATION
51.2.1 Cable Installation - General
All cables shall be installed generally along the routes and in the manner indicated in the Drawings and
in accordance with the notes and instructions therein.
Notwithstanding the above requirement, all cable routes shall be approved by the SO Rep before any
work commences.
All cables shall run directly from point to point without joints unless the length required is in excess of
the length obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer. In such cases, the position of each
and every joint shall be approved by the SO Rep. No other joints, whether straight through or tee, will
be permitted.
All cables shall be run neatly and truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building.
The cables shall be laid in flat formation and touching each other.
Where a cable has no change direction, whether in a horizontal or a vertical plane, the radius of the
bend in the cable shall not be less than the minimum laid down in CP 5 or the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials, supports, fixings, attachments and other items associated with
the installation of cables, together with all of the work involved, shall be provided by the Contractor
whether or not it is or they are specifically mentioned in the Specifications.
51.2.2 Mains Cables Installation
Mains cables shall be encased in metal trunking supported on walls, ceilings or structural steelwork
where surface mounted unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications.
Cables shall be laid flat or trefoil in the trunking and clipped together in sets with nylon cable ties, PVC
covered metallic cable ties or stainless steel cable ties. However, only PVC covered metallic cable ties
and stainless steel cable ties shall be used to secure fire-resistant cables. No overlapping of set of
cables will be permitted. Cables shall be fixed to the perforated steel bridges provided at the base of
the trunking.
Before placing an order for the trunking, the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval his
proposals relating to the arrangement of the cables in the trunking and the sizes of the trunkings. The
SO Rep shall have the right to reject any such proposals if, in his opinion, the metal trunking is of
inadequate size to facilitate ease of installation of cables in the trunking.
All mains cables shall be run continuously without any joint or break. Branching of horizontal sub-mains
or load cables shall be made by the removal of the PVC insulation and sheath of the main cables to
facilitate connection at line-taps in tap-off units.
BLDG17/S51.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-3
51.2 CABLE INSTALLATION (CONT’D)
51.2.3 Installation Of Underground Cables
51.2.3.1 Installation Of Underground Cables - General
Underground cables shall be laid direct in the ground or drawn into pipe ducts as indicated in the
Drawings.
The Contractor shall excavate trenches for the laying of cables and/or the installation of cable ducts,
and subsequently backfilling them.
He shall also dispose of surplus debris arising from the excavations and reinstate the ground surfaces
to match adjacent surface finishes.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when excavating in the vicinity
of existing buried services, and shall bear the cost and expense of any damages incurred.
All cables buried direct in the ground shall be laid at a depth such that the vertical distance from the top
of the cable to the ground surface is not less than 750mm.
Before cable laying commences, all cable trenches shall be drained, the bed graded and tamped, and
all loose stones and similar debris removed.
After laying, the cable shall be covered with earth which is free of debris to provide a 50mm cover after
tamping. All cables shall be further protected by a continuous layer of PVC cover plates.
51.2.3.2 PVC Cover Plates
The cable cover plates shall be of standard lengths of 1.0m and 2.0m. Each cover plate shall be nominal
150mm in width and nominal 2.0mm in thickness.
The cable cover plates shall be made of high impact resistant hard PVC. The colour of the plate shall
preferably be yellow and shall remain permanent and non-fading. Each cable cover plate shall be linked
to the adjacent cover plates at both ends to form a continuous chain.
The cable cover plates shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest
revision of the following standards or their equivalent.
Description Standard
(a) Impact Test Clause 7.3 of ONORM E6530
(b) Tensile Strength Clause 7.4 of ONORM E6530
(c) Vicat Softening Temperature ASTM D1525
(d) Accelerated Ageing ASTM D3045
The PVC cover plates shall have the following properties:
(a) Three fully processed specimens tested for their impact strength should not have more than 3
cracks respectively (5 drop hammer tests per specimen). And the drop hammer should not
penetrate the specimens more than 100mm for more than 3 times in a series of 15 drop hammer
tests. If these requirements are not met, the same test series are repeated on the specimens.
Should the specimens tested on the second series of test also fail to meet the requirements, the
whole test is to be considered as failed.
(b) The longitudinal connections (linking mechanism) of the fully processed specimens shall
withstand a tensile strength of minimum 100 newtons.
(c) The Vicat softening temperature of the fully processed samples shall not be less than 72°C (Rate
A at 50°C ±5°C per hour).
(d) The fully processed specimens shall be aged at 70°C for 168 hours. Aged specimens shall also
be tested for their tensile strength in the longitudinal connections. The change in properties shall
be less than 25% of the original value.
BLDG17/S51.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-4
51.2 CABLE INSTALLATION (CONT’D)
51.2.3 Installation Of Underground Cables (Cont'd)
51.2.3.2 PVC Cover Plates (Cont'd)
All cables shall run at least 300mm clear of all other services, regardless of whether these other services
are laid parallel with or transversely to the cable trench.
Cables shall, in general, pass below all intersecting piped services which cross the cable route, unless
this would mean the cables descending to a depth of more than 2.0m. In such cases the cables shall
be run according to the directions of the SO Rep.
Where cables cross roads or carparks, or enter buildings, or elsewhere as indicated in the Drawings,
they shall be drawn into underground UPVC pipes of minimum 100mm diameter. Where such pipes are
not provided by others, they shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor all at the Contractor's cost
and expense. All UPVC pipes shall be Class "B" type in accordance to SS 141.
The installation of underground cables shall be carried out in the "loop-in" principle. All cable joints shall
be carried out at the terminal boxes and fuse cut-outs. No underground joints shall be permitted without
the prior approval of the SO Rep.
The cables shall be terminated in brass compression glands with clamping device for the armour. The
glands shall be of approved design and of the correct size.
At all cable terminations, the armouring of the cables shall be solidly bonded to earth by means of
properly designed clamps and a copper conductor of cross-sectional area not less than the
requirements of CP5.
For excavation work involving existing roads, carparks, paved areas or other services such as gas and
water, the Contractor shall seek prior approval from the relevant authorities before commencing any
work.
51.2.3.3 Cable Glands
All armoured PVC insulated cables shall be properly terminated with brass compression glands of
suitable size for clamping the steel wire armour. The glands shall comply with the requirements of BS
EN 62444.
All cable glands shall be provided complete with shrouds, brass locknuts and earth tags.
The earth tags shall be solidly connected together and to the earth terminal by a PVC insulated copper
conductor of cross-section not less than the requirements of CP5.
51.2.3.4 Underground Cable Joints for Armoured PVC Insulated Cables
Underground cable joints shall only be permitted where the length of the cable required is in excess of
the length of cable obtainable in one piece from the cable manufacturer, or, in special circumstances
where approved in writing by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall inform the SO Rep of any proposed underground cable joints and the position of
all joints shall be approved by the SO Rep before any work commences.
The underground cable joint shall be made with a resin type joint kit complete with thermoplastic mould
and accessories and the Contractor shall submit to the SO Rep for approval, full details of the joint kit
which he proposes to supply, together with a full jointing specification.
All jointing work, once commenced, shall be completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without
interruption. No jointing work, shall commence without the prior approval and visual observation of the
SO Rep.
All joints shall be made exactly in accordance with the cable joint kit manufacturer's instructions, using
only the materials approved in the manufacturer's specifications and kit.
To ensure continuity and full conductivity of the steel wire armour, a copper lead of minimum cross-
sectional area as the cable conductors shall be used in conjunction with the armour bond kit available
from the cable joint manufacturer.
BLDG17/S51.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 51-5
Section 52/.....
BLDG17/S51.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-1
SECTION 52
CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS
52.1 METAL TRUNKING
52.1.1 Metal Trunking - General
All metal trunking and associated fittings shall comply with SS 249.
They shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at
intervals not exceeding 1m by means of brass or steel screws which are protected against corrosion by
a finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating. Electro-brass plated screws shall not be used.
Trunkings encased by cement when passing through floor slabs shall be of separate sections such that
the exposed lids not encased shall be removable.
Perforated steel bridges shall be spot welded at the base of the trunking for the fixing of cables. Two
rows of perforations of different sizes shall be provided. The bridges shall be spaced at intervals of
400mm and at not more than 200mm from ends.
All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and
treated with epoxy powder paint giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of trunking and fittings shall not be less than
those specified in the following table :
Nominal Thickness of Sheet Steel

Nominal Width of Trunking
(mm)
Thickness of Body Thickness of Cover
(mm) (mm)
50mm and below 1.0 1.0

75mm to 100mm 1.2 1.2
125mm to 175mm 1.4 1.2
Above 175mm 1.6 1.4
The standard depths of the trunking used shall be 50mm and 75mm. The standard length shall not be
less than 2m.
At the ground floor of the buildings, the size of the metal trunking installed from the consumer switch
room to all service ducts shall be at least 375 mm by 75 mm throughout. Inside the service ducts, the
size of the metal trunkings for the lift risers and flat risers shall be at least 150 mm by 75 mm throughout
from the ground floor level to the roof level. Lift risers shall be installed in the Lift and Mechanical (L&M)
service duct, located near the lift lobby, where such ducts are provided. Otherwise, a separate metal
trunking shall be provided inside the Electrical & Telecoms Services (E&T) duct next to the flat riser.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, the figure in percentage of the sum of the overall cross-
sectional areas of cables (including insulation and sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the
trunking in which they are installed shall not exceed 35%.
Cables shall be installed in trefoil, neatly tied together in each set and secured to the bridges at the
base of the metal trunkings. The sets shall be clearly labelled for easy identification of its usage and
shall be arranged so that the spare space is reserved on one side. The Contractor shall submit to the
SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables in the metal trunking.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-2
52.1.2 Metal Trunking - Installation
Metal trunking shall be run vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the building.
In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very
high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high.
The manufacturers' standard fittings shall be used for bends, angles, offsets, cross-overs and other
non-standard runs. The practice of cutting and bending trunking to form flanges and attachments shall
not be permitted.
Trunking shall be properly aligned and securely fixed by gun tool method or rawl plug fitted at regular
intervals not exceeding 600mm and at not more than 300mm from the ends.
Where the trunking is suspended from the ceiling, wall or structure, it shall be supported by mild steel
angle or channel iron brackets at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m. The brackets shall be finished
to the same standard as the trunking. Each individual piece of trunking on straight runs shall be
independently supported.
Where bends, angles or offsets occur, additional fixings shall be supplied at a distance of not exceeding
150mm on either side of the accessory.
Any bonding links and their fastening supplied to satisfy electrical continuity conditions shall not cause
any electrolytic corrosion.
Trunking connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be so designed
that the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
Where the trunking passes through a floor slab or beam, the portion of the trunking which is to be
embedded in the floor or beam opening shall have a permanently fixed lid to form a steel sleeve at least
250mm long.
Where the trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking joint shall be made. The connector at this point
shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10mm in both the horizontal and vertical
planes.
Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and
rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred, it shall be removed and the area
treated with a rust proofing agent. After this, it shall be treated by the application of a zinc epoxy and
followed by a coat of colour matching paint.
Holes cut in the trunking for the passage of PVC covered cables shall be treated as above and provided
with grommets, or alternatively bushed or lined to prevent damage to the PVC covering.
52.2 CABLE TRAY
52.2.1 Cable Tray - General
Cable trays and accessories shall be perforated and manufactured from hot rolled mild steel conforming
to BS 1449:Part 1 or JIS G3131 SOHC with hot dip galvanised finish to BS EN ISO 1461.
Electrolytic zinc coated steel sheet conforming to JIS G3313 SECC and coated with epoxy powder paint
giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 micron can be used in indoor environment.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-3
52.2.1 Cable Tray - General (Cont'd)
The thickness of the sheet steel used in the fabrication of the cable tray and accessories shall not be
less than those specified in the following table :
Nominal Width of Tray Nominal Thickness Sheet Steel

(mm) (mm)
100 1.0
150 1.0
210 1.2
300 1.6
360 1.6
450 1.6
600 2.0
The standard length of cable tray shall not be less than 2.4m.
52.2.2 Cable Tray - Installation
All accessories including bends (vertical and horizontal), intersections, tees, risers and reducing
sections shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer.
Where site conditions necessitate site fabrication, obtain the specific approval of the proposals from the
SO Rep before commencement of the fabrication and the standards of fabrications and finish shall not
be less than that of the manufacturers' standard items.
Sections of cable tray and accessories shall be jointed using mushroom-head roofing bolts, nuts and
washers. The joint screws, nuts and washers shall all be galvanised or sherardized steel. Brass shall
not be used.
The cable tray shall be of adequate size to meet the installation requirements. Cables shall be installed
on trays in a single layer leaving 25% of the tray width spare for future use. The Contractor shall submit
to the SO Rep for approval his proposal relating to the installation of cables on the tray and the width of
the trays.
Cable trays shall preferably be installed such that they offer direct support to cables.
Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1200mm and 150mm from all
bends, tees, intersections and risers. They shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar or angle iron or
channel iron, and treated with one coat of lead and chromate free primer and then painted with one
undercoat and one finishing coat of enamel paint to give a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns.
Where horizontal runs of cable tray cross building or structure expansion joints, then the tray shall be
cut between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint. The tray sections shall then be
jointed with bolts, nuts and washers installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of
±10mm from the initial fastening position.
Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal and not through perforations. Burrs or sharp edges
shall be removed prior to the installation of the tray sections or accessories. The cut or damaged metal
shall be made good by the Contractor by first treating the surfaces with a suitable rust proofing agent
and then applying finishes comparable to the remainder of the surface.
Cables shall be secured to the cable tray by means of plastic fixing ties or saddles at intervals of 400mm
and at not more than 200mm from the ends.
Cable tray and accessories shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout its length.
Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and secured with a minimum of
two screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be effectively bonded to the earthing
system.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-4
52.3 PVC TRUNKING
52.3.1 General
All PVC trunking shall be of a non-flame propagating type complying with the dimensions and
performance requirements of SS 275. The PVC trunking shall be made in white base and white clip-on
cover from high impact PVC and shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2.0m or more.
All PVC trunking shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
52.3.1.1 Single Compartment Trunking
The nominal external dimensions of the PVC trunking shall be 40mm, 32mm and 25mm width and the
height shall be in accordance with SS 275. The downdrop for the domestic socket outlets and lighting
switches shall be of 32mm by 16mm size except where two-compartment trunking is used. The ceiling
tees to lighting points shall be of 25mm by 12.5mm size.
52.3.1.2 80mm x 32mm Two-Compartment Trunking
The overall dimensions and essential detailing of the trunking shall be according to the Drawings. The
trunking shall have two compartments, one for electrical power cables and the other for telephone and
CATV/SCV cables. The space between the cover and the two compartments is reserved for the
crossing of these services within the trunking. This space should used for the crossing of these cables
only if allowed by CP 5 and IDA COPIF.
52.3.1.3 60mm x 20mm Two-Compartment Trunking
This trunking shall have two compartments, 40mm wide and 20mm wide. The larger compartment is
for electrical power cables while the smaller is for telephone and CATV cables.
52.3.2 PVC Trunking - Installation
52.3.2.1 General
The PVC trunking shall run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
In general, the trunking shall be installed on the ceiling or along the wall just below the ceiling. For very
high ceiling, the trunking may be installed lower but in any case, it shall be at least 2.2m high.
For the two-compartment trunkings, the Contractor shall liaise closely with the PTL and other parties
involved such that all wiring works could proceed smoothly and the cover is installed after all the wiring
works by all other parties (where applicable) are installed. The Contractor shall not in any
circumstances be absolved from his responsibility for replacing any trunking or cover found damaged
or defective.
The PVC trunking shall be installed continuously through beam openings so as to ensure segregation
of the low voltage and extra low voltage. Where this is not possible, individual PVC sleeves shall be
provided for the protection of the different voltage categories of cables. The trunking cover passing
through the beam shall be a short piece so as to facilitate removal of the cover for easy maintenance
and replacement or addition of cables.
52.3.2.2 Single Compartment Trunking - Installation
The PVC trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular intervals not
exceeding 400mm and at not more than 100mm from the ends. The fixings shall be staggered across
the width of the trunking base.
Cables shall be secured with purpose-made PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than
125mm from the ends except for the two trunking sizes of 32mm by 16mm and 25mm by 12.5mm which
do not require PVC clips.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-5
52.3.2 PVC Trunking - Installation (Cont'd)
52.3.2.3 80mm x 32mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation
The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails, staggered across the two
compartments at regular spacing of 200mm and at not more than 100mm from the ends.
The electrical compartment shall be separately enclosed with PVC cover while the other compartment
shall be provided with PVC clips at interval of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the ends.
The trunking shall be provided from the electrical tap-off unit, telephone and CATV distribution boxes
to all dwelling units at each floor as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall liaise with the PTL to
determine the exact locations of their distribution boxes. In addition, the Contractor shall install a short
length of trunking above the electrical meter board or outside the units to house the telephone rosette
and CATV connectors where applicable.
52.3.2.4 60mm x 20mm Two-Compartment Trunking - Installation
The trunking shall be surface mounted and fixed with masonry nails at regular spacing of 200mm and
at not more than 50mm from the ends.
Cables shall be secured with PVC clips at intervals of 250mm and at not more than 125mm from the
ends.
52.4 METAL CONDUIT
All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge screwed steel conduits complying with IEC 61386 and shall
have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion.
All flexible steel conduit and adapters shall comply with IEC 61386 including all its latest amendments.
All conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61386 and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of the
item. Bushes and plugs shall be of brass. All other fittings and components shall be galvanised and
having Class 4 protection against corrosion.
The metal boxes for the enclosure of the electrical accessories shall comply with BS 4662 with heavy
protection both inside and outside.
All conduit shall be free of rust patches or other Defect on delivery and protected from mechanical
damage and weather when stored on the Site.
No conduit smaller than 20mm diameter shall be used.
Spacer bar saddles shall be hot dip galvanised steel with a minimum thickness of 0.8mm.
Retaining screws for saddle tops shall be of brass or steel zinc plated. Electro-brass plated screw shall
not be used.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the
conduit. Where the conduit has to be bent, it shall be bent using an approved bending machine such
that the conduit section shall not be altered. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall
be installed in any run of conduit without a conduit box.
All metal conduits and its fittings shall pass type test.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-6
52.5 RIGID PVC CONDUIT
All rigid PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-21: Particular requirements –
Rigid conduit systems. All conduit shall be of the high impact heavy mechanical strength type. PVC
conduit used in surface wiring shall be white where required to match the adjacent PVC trunking.
Otherwise, PVC conduit can be of any colour and as specified.
All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-21: Particular requirements – Rigid
conduit systems and indelibly marked with the name of the manufacturer or trademark of the item.
Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be from the same manufacturer.
All conduit joints shall be made using standard couplers and PVC solvent supplied by the manufacturer
of the conduit and to the method laid down by the manufacturer. All such joints shall be watertight. The
same conditions apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings
into solvent adhesives is forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all
burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust
and oil from all faces of conduit and accessories prior to the jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully
into box spouts and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for or when the PVC conduit is to be
connected to metal Plant and equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries
are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used.
Expansion couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m. Within such couplers, a
space of not less than 10mm shall be allowed between the ends of the conduit. The solvent adhesive
used in such joints shall allow for movement caused by expansion without affecting the watertightness
of the joint. A similar system shall be employed when conduits cross building expansion joints in any
situation and the couplers shall span the joints.
All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25mm and below may be set
cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation.
The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit. Naked
flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending purposes and the manufacturer's
recommendations shall be followed.
Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be
taken into accessories without sets or bends.
52.6 INSTALLATION OF RIGID CONDUIT
52.6.1 Installation Of Rigid Conduit - General
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating his work with other trades and for working to any
conduit layout in the Drawings that may be issued. Where such Drawings are not issued, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit drawings showing all conduit routes to the SO Rep for approval prior to
commencing the erection.
The maximum number of cables drawn into any one conduit shall not exceed those allowed by reference
to the relevant regulations and tables in the current CP 5. The size of the conduits shall be decided on
this basis unless otherwise stated.
The whole of the conduit system in any particular section shall be completed and swabbed through to
remove any dirt or loose matter before cables are drawn in.
All sub-circuit cables drawn into one conduit shall be connected to the same phase. In the case of three
phase circuits, all three phases and the neutral shall be contained in the same conduit.
Conduits shall be supported at intervals not greater than 600mm for vertical run exposed to touch and
not greater than 1m for others. Where conduit connects to surface-mounted Plant and equipment or
accessories, it shall be additionally supported within 150mm of either side of the item.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-7
52.6.1 Installation Of Rigid Conduit - General (Cont'd)
Where bends and sets occur, the conduit shall be fixed at a distance of 150mm, either side of such
diversion.
The inner radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the external diameter of the
conduit. Where the conduit has to be bent it shall be bent without altering its section, using an approved
bending machine. No more than 2 numbers of 90 degree angle bends shall be installed in any run of
conduit without a conduit box.
Where conduits connect to distribution boards, trunking, switch fuse units, consumer control units,
switch boxes, etc they shall be secured to the apparatus by means of flanged couplings.
Where conduits cross the expansion joints they shall be installed so as not to resist relative movement
between the sections. A suitable arrangement is to use a flexible conduit and adaptors in these
positions. The adaptors shall be earth bonded by a PVC insulated copper conductor of not less than
2.5mm2.
Final connections from the conduit installation to all motors, other apparatus subject to vibration and as
specified elsewhere, shall be made using watertight, PVC sheathed, rustproof flexible conduit.
52.6.2 Surface-Mounted
Surface-mounted conduit shall be run truly horizontal, vertical or parallel to the building lines.
Conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles.
Conduits boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently of the conduit.
Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall be installed so that they can remain accessible for purposes
such as the withdrawal of existing cables or the installing of new or additional cables.
Where metal conduit has been cut or otherwise damaged, including exposed threads and connections,
it shall be repaired by application of a zinc rich epoxy to generously overlap the existing sound metal
coating.
Open ends of metal conduit shall be free from burrs and so bushed such that the cables are not
damaged.
52.6.3 Concealed
Conduit buried in concrete shall have a minimum of 25mm depth of cover. Conduit buried in plaster
shall have a 5mm minimum depth of cover. Dimensions other than the above shall be subject to prior
approval by the SO Rep. For conduits to be concealed in walls, reference shall also be made from
CP 5 on locations in a wall where conduits are permitted. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed
in an electrical installation at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with
clause 52.4 shall be used.
For conduit concealed in suspended type ceilings, the weight of the conduit shall, under no
circumstances be carried by the suspended ceiling. Suitable fixings and hangers shall be installed
direct to the structure by the Contractor only after they have been approved by the SO Rep.
Concealed conduit work in concrete or composition slabs, walls, cast in-situ and in plaster shall be
offered to the SO Rep for inspection prior to concealment. The Contractor shall give the SO Rep two
days notice that a reasonable section of concealed conduit work will be ready for inspection.
Where conduits are laid in concrete or composition slabs, cast in in-situ slabs, walls, beams, etc, the
Contractor shall arrange for a competent person to be in attendance whilst the pouring operation is
being carried out, in order to avoid any damage which may be caused to the conduits.
Where it is necessary to hack chases for conduit runs, the Contractor shall mark out the proposed runs
at site and shall seek the approval of the SO Rep before commencing any work.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-8
52.6.3 Concealed (Cont'd)
Immediately on completion of erection of each conduit run, all exposed terminations shall be plugged
effectively against the ingress of water and dirt.
All concealed conduit work shall be installed on the "loop-in" system. Inspection elbows or bends and
tees shall not be allowed. Where it is impracticable to set conduit, normal factory made bends may be
used but only with the approval of the SO Rep.
Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable;
these shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another
without undue cramping. No joints shall be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances.
Ceiling point boxes or draw-in boxes on a concealed installation shall finish flush with the underside of
the ceilings.
All conduit boxes not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be installed with a suitable cover fixed with
brass or stainless steel roundhead screws.
Where any surface mounting control gear or other Plant and equipment is to be installed in conjunction
with concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted adaptable box. The
back of the Plant and equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and the Plant and equipment
mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box.
52.6.4 Pliable PVC Conduit
Pliable PVC conduit for use in concealed wiring system shall comply with the requirements of this
subclause.
The pliable PVC conduit shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-22: Particular requirements
– Pliable conduit systems.
All conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61386-22: Particular requirements – Pliable
conduit systems and indelibly marked with the name or trademark of the item. The conduit, fittings and
accessories shall be from the same manufacturer.
All conduit joints shall be made in accordance to the recommended methods laid down by the
manufacturer of the conduit. All such joints shall be watertight. The same requirements shall also apply
to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. Dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives
is forbidden. Before joints are made, the conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges
shall be removed. Care shall be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces
of the conduit and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and
butted into couplers for jointing purposes.
Couplers shall be used where straight runs of conduit exceed 8m.
The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 3 times the outside diameter of the conduit.
For concealed wiring system, a short length (maximum 200 mm length) of PVC pliable conduit may be
used to connect the misaligned moulded boxes to the PVC rigid conduits
Spacer bar saddles shall be of PVC with bases. The fixings shall be such that the conduits may be
taken into accessories without sets or bends.
All pliable PVC conduit and its fittings shall pass type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited
laboratories.
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 52-9
52.7 INSTALLATION OF TRUNKING FROM THE MAIN ROOF TO THE LIFT MACHINE ROOM
The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical riser trunking is not exposed to any ingress of water when
it is run from the main roof to the lift machine room (LMR).
The trunking shall run vertically from the main roof to the soffit of the LMR’s floor. It shall then run on
the underside/soffit of the LMR’s floor such that the beams prevent the rain from entering the trunking.
Puncture the floor and enter the LMR at the most appropriate location.
Provide a 500mm wide x 100mm thick brickwall for the vertical run from the main roof to the soffit of the
LMR’s floor so as to mount the trunking and to protect the trunking from any ingress of water/rain.
Provide a 100mm high x 50mm thick concrete kerb all round the base of the trunking to prevent water
from seeping into the base of the trunking. Additional protection shall be provided, if required, to suit
the site conditions and where the trunking is still very exposed to weather.
The opening through the main roof must be properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through it.
Obtain the concurrence of the SO Rep before installing the brickwall.
Section 53/.....
BLDG17/S52.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 53-1
SECTION 53
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES
53.1 SWITCHES
Switches shall be of 6-amp rating designed specifically for use on ac inductive circuits and complying
with IEC 60669.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, switches shall be single-pole, one-way, rocker operated
and of white square plate pattern. Where two or more switches are to be fixed adjacent to each other,
multi-gang switches on a single cover plate shall be used.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be decorative model listed in the HDB
Materials List and the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
Switches installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality assurance scheme
by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories
Test Mark.
53.2 SWITCH SOCKET-OUTLETS
Each power point shall be a switched socket-outlet of similar construction by the same manufacturer
and product range to match the switches.
The switched socket-outlet shall comprise a combined switch and 3-pin shuttered type outlet. The
13 amp and 15 amp switched socket-outlet shall comply with the requirements of SS 145 and SS 472
respectively.
In addition to SS 145, 13 amp switched socket-outlets shall pass the positive break test according to
Clauses 13.11.2, 13.11.3 and 13.11.4 of BS 1363-2 or approved equivalent.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch socket outlet shall be decorative model and
the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All 13 amp and 15 amp switched socket outlets shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the
Safety Mark.
Switched socket outlets installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality
assurance scheme by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories. They shall have the SAC-SINGLAS
accredited laboratories Test Mark.
53.3 WATER HEATER POINT
For water heater point, a double pole switch and a connection unit shall be provided. Both the switch
and connection shall be rated at 20 amperes. The switch shall comply with IEC 60669 and complete
with a neon light indicator and a durable mark "Water Heater". The water heater switch shall be of
similar construction by the same manufacturer and product range to match other accessories. The
connection unit shall have a three terminal connection block with white moulded cover plate and cable
clamp included. The connection unit shall be typed tested to SS 241.
For flush mounting installation, the front plate of the switch shall be decorative model listed in the HDB
Materials List and the fixing screws shall be concealed.
All water heater switches shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
Water heater switches installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality
BLDG17/S53.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 53-2
53.4 BELL PUSH POINT
Bell push shall be of a similar construction to match the lighting switch, with push to make mechanism.
The bell push shall be rated at 5 amp and complying with IEC 60669. The bell point shall be terminated
on a connection block and marked "Bell Point" with approved sticker or tag.
53.5 MOULDED BOX
Moulded boxes used for casting in concrete for flush mounting of switches, switched socket outlets and
other accessories shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60670 and the dimensions as specified in
BS 4662. The maximum temperature during the building process is assumed to be less than 90°C.
Surface and flush mounting moulded boxes not used for casting in concrete shall comply with BS 4662.
Such boxes shall be suitable for the mounting surface.
The colour appearances and the profile of the moulded boxes shall match the switches, switched socket
outlets and other accessories.
53.6 BATTEN LAMPHOLDERS
Batten lampholders can be white moulded insulated bayonet-type complete with a skirt, two terminals
and a loop-in earth terminal. It shall be rated at 2 ampere and shall have a temperature rating of at
least T1 complying with IEC 61184. They can also be Edison screw lampholders complying with IEC
60238 : 2008-08 (Edition 8.1).
53.7 CONSUMER CONTROL UNIT
A consumer control unit as indicated in the Drawings shall be provided for each unit. The enclosure
box shall be surface-mounted and complete with mounting, rail, multi-terminal earth bar, busbar,
busbar’s insulating shield, neutral terminal block, circuit identification label, miniature circuit breakers
and RCCB.
The consumer control unit shall comply with BS EN 60439-3. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings,
a main switch shall be provided and placed before the RCCB in the consumer unit.
The main switch shall be a double-pole M6 Type B miniature circuit breaker with contact position
indicator to indicate the positions of the moving contacts.
The main switch shall have in the opening position a minimum isolating distance of 3mm between the
contacts.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic type with a toggle type tripping switch,
and shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60898. The MCB shall be rated for 230V, 50 Hz
operation. They shall possess a Type B tripping characteristic and shall have an interrupting capacity
of at least 6 KA (M6).
The RCCB shall be double-pole and of the high sensitivity direct-acting current-operated type with a
tripping time not exceeding 0.1 second.
All RCCB shall comply with SS 97 and shall be registered with Spring Singapore and bear the Safety
Mark.
In addition, there must be a space provision (2 spare slots) in the main consumer control unit of the
dwelling unit for the installation of surge arrestor.
Consumer control units installed in the dwelling units shall be certified under a safety and quality
BLDG17/S53.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 53-3
53.8 APPROVAL OF ITEMS
Switches, switched socket-outlets, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall be
of the same manufacturer and product range.
Surface mounting moulded boxes, flush mounting moulded boxes, polarised plugs, socket connectors,
batten lamp holders, water heater switches and connection units and bell push shall pass type tests
conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
53.9 POLARISED PLUG AND SOCKET CONNECTOR
Only one cable shall be terminated at each screw terminal of the polarized plug & socket connector.
Where looping is done at the socket, each pole of the socket shall have two screw terminals so that
only one cable is terminated at each screw terminal.
The polarised plug & socket connector shall comply with the relevant clauses of IEC 60998-1 and IEC
60998-2-1.
Section 54/.....
BLDG17/S53.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-1
SECTION 54
LUMINAIRES
54.1 GENERAL
The quantity and types of fitting shall be ascertained from the Drawings. All control gears shall be
provided together with the fittings by the lighting supplier or using approved control gears specified by
the supplier where such control gears are not provided together with the fitting.
54.2 INSTALLATION
All lighting fittings shall be securely hung or mounted as follows:
(a) Surface and wall mounted fittings shall be secured with metal threaded studs complete with two
lock nuts and washers using approved metal studs cartridge hammer. The threaded metal stud
shall penetrate into the ceiling surface to a depth of at least 32mm. Alternatively, the light fittings
may be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the lighting fitting
manufacturer and using the mounting accessories supplied by the manufacturer.
(b) For pendant fittings, the downrods shall be securely fixed to the ceiling with conduit terminating
boxes.
(c) Recessed fitting shall be supported independently. The false ceiling grid system shall not be
used to support light fittings. There shall be no noticeable ceiling deflection when the fittings are
installed in place. Steel wires tied to metal studs that are penetrated into the concrete surface at
a depth of at least 32mm shall be used to support the fittings.
The above represents the minimum requirements and the Contractor shall take further precautions if the
fittings to be mounted are exceptionally heavy such as high bay fittings. The Contractor shall ensure
that all fittings are securely mounted.
All light fittings shall be wired from a light point unless otherwise specified. A 3-core cable of 1.5 mm2
in flexible PVC conduit shall be used for the interconnection from the lighting point to the fitting. This
connecting cable shall be suitably rated for operation at the surrounding steady state temperature in the
light fitting.
The Contractor shall ensure all metal parts of components of the fittings be effectively earthed.
54.3 LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
All luminaires shall be pre-wired and complete with lamps, control gears, lampholders, capacitors and
diffusers. The exact type and rating of the luminaires shall be as specified in the Drawings. All luminaires
shall be power factor corrected up to 0.85 lagging or higher.
All indoor fluorescent luminaires shall complete with high frequency electronic ballast and comply with
IEC 60598-2.
Where lighting luminaires are specified with two or more lamps, each of the lamps shall be provided with
its own control gears unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
All ballasts shall pass type tests. All ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall be registered with
SPRING Singapore and bear the Safety Mark.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-2
54.4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
54.4.1 T5 Fluorescent Lamps
(a) All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081: Double-capped fluorescent lamps –
Performance specifications.
(b) The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G5 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
(i) Trademark or mark of origin;

(ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
(iii) Colour Definition; and
(iv) Colour Rendering Index.
(c) The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 16000 hours at a mortality
rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 10000 hours.
(d) The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics:
Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) Index
14 Approx. 550 16 1200 (@ 25 ْ◌ C) 80 or better
28 Approx. 1150 16 2600 (@ 25 ْ◌ C) 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The lumen
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000°K unless indicated
otherwise in the Drawings.
(f) The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or suitably protected against
corrosion.
(g) The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
(h) The current and voltage rating of the lampholder shall be 2A/500V as specified in IEC 60400.
54.4.2 T8 Fluorescent Lamps
(a) All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60081: Double-capped fluorescent lamps –
Performance specifications.
(b) The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:

rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours. For T8 extra-long
life fluorescent lamps, the operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum
50,000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-3
54.4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS (CONT’D)
54.4.2 T8 Fluorescent Lamps (cont’d)
Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) Index
18 Approx. 600 26 1300 or better 80 or better
36 Approx. 1200 26 3200 or better 80 or better
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at any
time in its life.
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000°K unless indicated
corrosion.
(g) The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be either T130 or T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
54.5 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
(a) All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60901: Single-capped fluorescent lamps -
Performance Specifications.
(b) The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall have a 2 pin base
complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency interference suppression capacitor.
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:

(c) The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000 hours at a
mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 5000 hours.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-4
54.5 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS (CONT’D)
(d) The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics:
Wattage/Type Overall Length Base Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (Lumen) Index
9W PL-S 167 G23 600 80 or better
11W PL-S 237 G23 900 80 or better
13W PL-C 140 G24d-1 900 80 or better
18W PL-C 154 G24d-2 1200 80 or better
26W PL-C 173 G24d-3 1800 80 or better
The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after 2000
burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100 burning hours.
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be 3000°K unless
indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
54.6 STARTERS FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
All starters shall be of the glow-switch type and shall comply with the safety and performance
requirements of IEC 60155. The starters shall be suitable for use with fluorescent lamp of wattage from
4 to 65W at 220-240V.
The starter shall have the following distinctly and durably marked on the canister :
(a) Trademark or mark of origin; and

(b) Nominal Wattage/Voltage.
54.7 ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
54.7.1 Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp
(a) The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start and operate
standard commercially available T5 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions
and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
(b) The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, low profile and hum-free.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast housing) filters are not
allowed.
(c) The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency and at nominal
voltages indicated on the label, 230 volt single phase a.c.  6%.
(d) The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components consisting low pass filter
to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference, rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25khz
to 60khz and an output lamp stabilization section.
(e) The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements:
(i) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3

(ii) Performance requirement : IEC 60929, EN 60929
(iii) Harmonics requirement : IEC 61000-3-2
(iv) Radio freq. interference : CISPRI 15, EN 55015
(f) All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection.
(g) The ballast is a Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme or CPS in short, it must be registered with SPRING
Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-5
54.7 ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (CONT’D)
54.7.1 Electronic Ballast For T5 Fluorescent Lamp (Cont’d)
(h) The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon lamp failure,
component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must completely shutdown the ballast
within 5 seconds. Power oscillation or constant output voltages detected under these conditions
are not acceptable.
(i) Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with single electronic ballast suitable for two lamps operation.
It shall automatically switch on after lamp replacement with supply connected.
(j) Regulated light output. The electronic ballast shall have constant output power such that light
output shall not vary by more than 5% over the nominal supply voltage per clause 3.
(k) Total Harmonic Distortion must not exceed 15%. Control gear must comply with and be
substantially better than IEC 61000-3-2 requirements.
(l) Power factor to be regulated to achieve greater than 0.95.
(m) Ballast lumen factor (BLF) must be 0.95 and above.
(n) The electronic control gear shall comply fully with IEC 61347-2-3 and IEC 60929 for line voltage
transient protection.
(o) The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps
during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without negative effect.
(p) The electronic ballast shall have preheated starting feature to start the lamp within two seconds.
(q) The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point temperature (Tc)
of 70C on the ballast with failure rate of not more than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
(r) The ballast must comply to CELMA’s Guide of Class A2 and better as per Energy Efficiency
Index.
(s) The electronic ballast loss shall have the following characteristics: -
Electronic Ballast Total Circuit Power

Fluorescent Lamp (wattage)
Loss (max) (max)
A single electronic ballast with 1
3.5 W 14 + 3.5 = 17.5 W
number of 14 W lamp

7W 2x14 + 7 = 35 W
numbers of 14 W lamps

6W 28 + 6= 34W
number of 28 W lamp
12 W 2x28 + 12 = 68 W
54.7.2 Electronic Ballast For T8 Fluorescent Lamp
standard commercially available T8 krypton tubular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions
and within the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
allowed.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-6
(e) The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements:
(i) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3, SS 490

Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark.
are not acceptable.
(o) The electronic control gear shall incorporate an overvoltage detection circuit to operate lamps
Index.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-7
Electronic Ballast Total Circuit Power

Fluorescent Lamp (wattage)
Loss (max) (max)
3W 16 + 3 = 19 W
number of 18 W lamp

6W 2x16 + 6 = 38 W

4W 32 + 4= 36W
number of 36 W lamp
8W 2x32 + 8 = 72 W
54.8 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING
54.8.1 General
All emergency lighting, emergency exit lighting and emergency lighting conversion kits shall comply with
SS 563 and approved by FSSD.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation complies with the requirements of SS 563 and the Code
of Practice for Fire Precautions in Building.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-8
54.8 EMERGENCY EVACUATION LIGHTING (CONT’D)
54.8.2 Exit Sign And Exit Lighting
All exit lighting and exit signs shall be of white LED type unless shown otherwise in the Drawings,
complete with 2 hour nickel cadmium batteries, IP 30 or other approved and shall comply with the
requirements of SS 563. All luminaires for the exit lighting and exit sign shall be approved by the FSSD
under the TUV SUD PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1 or other approved equivalent. The duration
of the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2 hours.
54.8.3 Emergency Lighting And Conversion Kit
All emergency lighting including lighting conversion kits shall comply with the requirements of SS 563.
They shall be approved by the FSSD under the TUV SUD PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1 or other
approved equivalent. The duration of the battery operation shall be for the continuous rated period of 2
hours.
Emergency lighting conversion kits shall be provided for some of the lighting luminaires as shown in the
Drawings. The luminaire shall be pre-wired in such a manner that, under healthy supply condition, the
luminaire shall operate normally, but under supply interruption, the fluorescent/PL or PLC tubes are
connected to the emergency lighting conversion kit. Wiring of the conversion kit shall be arranged so as
to allow easy removal of the kit, where required, without affecting the normal operation of the luminaire.
Terminal blocks shall be provided for this purpose.
The emergency lighting conversion kit shall incorporate a charging and changeover device and shall be
powered by sealed nickel cadmium batteries. The charging device shall be designed to charge the
batteries and keep it in a charged state from a 230 volts 50 Hz supply. The conversion kit shall be located
away from the ballasts.
A separate unswitched "live" wire which shall be of the same phase as the normal supply, shall be run
to provide the line condition monitoring. Such separate unswitched "live" wire shall be clearly marked as
"live" and "unswitched" and with a "danger" sign. It shall be terminated at the terminal block before the
connection to the conversion kit.
54.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL)
General
The AOL system shall comply with the requirement of "Visual Aids For Denoting Obstacles" specified in
the standard of International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and its amendments, and the regulations
issued by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore (CAAS) and Ministry Of Defence.
The works shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the AOL system as shown
in the Drawings. Should the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications conflict with codes,
regulations or standards, the more stringent of the requirements shall govern the works.
Where any apparatus/equipment forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp
condition, such apparatus/equipment shall be of weatherproof design.
AOL System
The AOL system consists of a main AOL, a standby AOL, control circuit panel and remote monitoring
panel. The AOL system shall be either of the following 2 types:
(a) low intensity AOL -- where both the main and standby AOL shall be LED low intensity type
operate on a DC power supply; and
(b) medium/high intensity AOL -- where the main AOL (medium/high intensity) operates on a AC
power supply of 230 volts with standby AOL of LED low intensity type operates on a DC power
supply.
The DC power supply shall be provided by sealed type maintenance free lead acid batteries, maintained
in an adequately charged condition by a AC/DC rectifier/charger.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-9
54.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D)
Control Circuit Panel
The control circuit panel shall be located at roof level. It shall be weatherproof type and mounted on a
wall sheltered from the rain where possible.
The control circuit panel shall have the following functions:
(a) Time Of Operation
The AOL system shall be switched on by means of photocell connected to the Light Sensitive
Switch. It shall be switched on during hours of low visibility (eg. haze, rain and night). In the event
the photocell is faulty the system shall automatically by pass the photocell.
(b) Change Over Relay
When the AOL system is switched on the main AOL shall be triggered. In the event the main
AOL is faulty the change over relay mechanism shall automatically switched on the standby AOL.
(c) Daily Test Relay
After the event the main AOL is switched off, the daily test relay mechanism shall automatically
switched on the standby AOL for a few seconds to test the functionality of the standby AOL.
(d) Fault Relay
The fault relay mechanism shall send signals to activate the indicating lamps on the remote
monitoring panel in the event the following occurs:
(i) main AOL faulty;

(ii) standby AOL faulty; and
(iii) AC/DC rectifier/charger faulty.
The reset button shall be fixed at the control circuit panel. The reset button shall be unable to
reset the fault relay mechanism until the AC/DC rectifier/charger is rectified or replaced.
(e) Mains Power Failure
In the event there is a mains power failure the following shall occur:
(i) for a low intensity AOL, the system shall switch over to DC supply to operate the main
AOL.; and
(ii) for medium/high intensity AOL, the system shall automatically switch over to the DC
supply and operate the standby LED AOL.
The system shall automatically switch back to the mains power supply once the mains power
supply is restored. The standby batteries should be designed to be able to last for at least 6
hours.
Remote Monitoring Panel
The remote monitoring panel shall be located in the switchroom. The remote monitoring panel shall
contain the following:
(a) 1 No. of push button for lamp test (Main and Standby AOL);
(b) 3 No. of indicating lamps for main AOL, standby AOL & fault occurence; and
(c) 1 set of contacts for remote warning lamp.
Indicating Lamp
Indicating lamp installed on the panels shall be of light emitting diode (LED) type.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-10
54.9 AIRCRAFT OBSTRUCTION LIGHT (AOL) (CONT'D)
Remote Warning Lamp & Warning Notice
An amber warning lamp to indicate occurrence of fault shall be extended from the remote monitoring
panel to outside of the switchroom. The warning lamp shall be mounted on a wall near the ceiling and
clearly visible from the void deck. A warning notice shall be mounted directly under the warning lamp.
Labels
All panels, push buttons and lamp indicators shall be labelled clearly with an identification tag made of
durable material.
54.10 CERAMIC METAL HALIDE LAMPS
(a) All ceramic metal halide lamps shall comply with the safety requirement defined in IEC 62035.
(b) The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:

(ii) Nominal Lamp Wattage;
(c) The ceramic metal halide lamps shall be clear and UV-reduced. The burning position for these
lamps shall be universal.
(d) For luminaries without diffuser, the ceramic metal halide lamps shall have maximum protection
against shattering due to an integrated protective glass tube.
(e) The average lamp life of the ceramic metal halide lamps shall be of 12,000 hours at a mortality
rate of 50% or better.
(f) The ballast for 35W and 70W ceramic metal halide lamps shall be low loss type with a maximum
9 watts and 14 Watts loss at rated voltage and wattage respectively.
(g) The lamp voltages shall be 90V for both the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamps respectively.
(h) The maximum and minimum ignition voltage shall be 5kVs and 3.6kVs respectively.
(i) The lamp current for the 35W & 70W ceramic metal halide lamp shall be 0.5A & 0.98A
respectively.
(j) The ceramic metal halide lamp shall have the following characteristics:-
Lamp Wattage Output Colour Rendering Index

(W) (Lumen)
35 3000 or better 80 or better
70 5800 or better 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The output after
2000 burning hours shall not fall below 20% of the value indicated above.
(k) The correlated colour temperature of the ceramic metal halide lamp shall be between 3000°K
and 4500°K unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
(l) The maximum permissible base edge temperature is 190°C.
(m) The permitted mains voltage deviation should be +/- 3%.
(n) The ceramic metal halide shall be operated with control gear with thermal protection.
(o) The right igniter for the particular lamp type must be used to ensure reliable and safe ignition.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-11
54.11 T8 CIRCULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
(a) All T8 circular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60901: Single -capped fluorescent lamps
– Performance specifications.
(b) The circular fluorescent lamp shall come with 2GX10 cap base and the following information
shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:

rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be at least 7500 hours.
Lamp (W) Width (mm) Diameter Output Colour Rendering

Wattage (Outer) (mm) (Lumen) (Index)
22 Approx. 216 Approx. 29 1350 80 or better

40 Approx. 406 Approx. 29 3200 80 or better
maintenance of the lamp shall be not less than 92% of the rated lumen maintenance value at
any time in its life.
(e) The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000K unless indicated
corrosion.
(g) The temperature rating of the lampholder shall be T140 as specified in IEC 60400.
54.12 ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR T8 CIRCULAR FLUORESCENT LAMP
standard commercially available T8 circular fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within
the limit specified by the lamp manufacturer.
allowed.
(e) The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following standards and requirements
:
(i) Safety requirement : IEC 61347-2-3
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-12
54.12 ELECTRONIC BALLAST FOR T8 CIRCULAR FLUORESCENT LAMP (CONT’D)
Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark. It shall also bear the PSB Test Mark or be under similar
product quality assurance scheme by other SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories
are not acceptable.
(o) The electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage detection circuit to operate lamps
Index.
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballast Loss Total Circuit Power

(wattage) (max) (max)

3W 22 + 3 = 25 W
number of 22 W lamp

4W 40 + 4.0 = 44.0 W
number of 40 W lamp

8W 70 W
numbers of lamps (22W and 40W)
54.13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH POWERED COMPACT FLUORESCENT (HPCF) LAMP
54.13.1 General
The High Powered Compact Fluorescent (HPCF) lamp shall comply with the requirements of this
Specifications and Drawings.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-13
54.13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH POWERED COMPACT FLUORESCENT (HPCF) LAMP
(CONT’D)
54.13.2 Self Ballast HPCF Lamp
(a) The self ballasted HPCF lamp shall be able to operate on the supply voltage of 220V-240V 50Hz
and shall have the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp.
(i) Mark of origin or trademark

(ii) Nominal wattage/voltages/frequency
(iii) Colour designation – the preferred colour temperature is 4000oK – cool white or 6000oK as
specified.
(iv) Operating current
(b) The operational life span of the HPCF lamp shall be of minimum 10,000 hours.
(c) The lamp shall have low mercury content of less than 5mg and bears the Singapore Green Label.
(d) The rating of the lamp can be either 60 or 65 watt. The maximum total system wattage shall not
exceed be 60 or 65 watt. The minimum luminous flux after 100 burning hours shall comply with
the following requirements :-
Wattage Luminous Diameter Maximum Base Efficacy Colour Power

(w) Lux (MM) Length Lumen/Watt Rendering Factor
(Lumen) (MM) Index
(CRI)
60 or 65 Better Less than Less than E 27 Better than Better Better
than 4000 75 220 (Metal) 64 than 80 than
0.9
Note : Maximum length is between lamp top and E27 lamp base
(reference plane to IEC requirement)
(e) The self-ballast HPCF lamp shall be designed and type tested to comply with the minimum but not
limited to the following standards and requirement
(i) Safety requirement : IEC 60968
(ii) Performance requirement :
Selected clause of IEC 60969

Clause 3 – Dimension
Clause 5 – Starting and run up
Clause 6 – Lamp wattage
Clause 7 – Luminous flux
Clause 8 – Colour
(iii) Other measurement :
(i) IEC 60901 clause 1.57 - Colour rendering Index (CRI)

(ii) Lamp efficacy
(iii) Correlated colour temperature (K)
(iv) Current harmonic reference to Clause 12.1 of IEC60929 and measurement
method in accordance with IEC 61000 – 3-2
(v) EN 61000-6-1 and the basic standard Surge test IEC61000-4-5
(line-earth: +/- 2KV; Line-line:+/-1KV)
(vi) Clause 9 of IEC 60929 – power factor
The type testing shall be conducted by TUV SUD PSB or recognised international testing body.
Third party test reports can be used for the following required tests :
(i) Radio Interference : EN55015

(ii) Immunity : EN61547
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-14
54.14 LED LUMINAIRE
54.14.1 General Requirement
(a) The Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaire shall comprise of LED module, electronic control gear
and accessories. The LED luminaire and electronic control gear shall be able to fully withstand
the current and voltage surges from lighting strikes and the frequent switching operation of the
power supplies. The LED luminaire and electronic control gear shall be selected and designed
to ensure that the functional characteristics, failure rate, operating life span and other
requirements as mentioned in this specifications are fully met.
(b) Each LED luminaire shall also be provided with its own electronic control gear. The electronic
control gear shall either be built into the luminaire (2ft, 4ft, down light) or remote adjacent (down
light) to the luminaire. The overall length of the 2ft and 4 ft LED luminaire should allows for a 2 ft
or 4 ft LED tube to be housed in the LED module.
54.14.2 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Module and Luminaire
(a) The LEDs used shall be of illuminated grade LEDs supported with IES LM-80 accredited test
report for measuring lumen maintenance of LED sources, manufactured by either Cree, Osram,
Nichia, Philips or other approved equivalent without infringing the Intellectual Property Patent of
LED manufacturers. The Contractor and LED luminaire manufactures shall indemnify HDB from
any legal responsibilities from any infringement of the patent right.
(b) The LED module shall have nominal white light output that corresponds to the correlated colour
temperature (CCT) in the range of between 3000K and 6500K. The colour rendering index, the
target CCT and the tolerance shall base on latest ANSI_ANSLG C78.377-2011 as listed below:
Target CCT and

Nominal CCT (K) Colour Rendering Index
tolerance (K)
3000K 3045 +/- 175 > 75
3500K 3465 +/- 245 > 75
4000K 3985 +/- 275 ≥ 75
6500K 6530 +/- 510 ≥ 65
(c) LED module shall comply with IEC 62031 “LED modules for general lighting – Safety
specifications”.
(d) For general 2 and 4 feet luminaire, the LED module shall be provided with minimum IP rating of
54.
(e) For recessed down light, the LED module shall be provided with minimum IP rating of 20.
(f) The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with illumination-grade LEDs, heat sinks,
electronic control gear and housing. The LED luminaire shall be resistant to shock and vibration.
The Light fixture shall consist of anti-glare frosted front cover for uniformity light distribution and
for recessed LED down light it shall be spring clips for easy installation. The correlated colour
temperature of the LED shall be 4000K (for 2ft/4ft luminaire) unless otherwise specified.
(g) The LED luminaire housing shall have the following features:
(i) Metal housing shall be corrosion resistant/Rust proof (down light);

(ii) Provision to prevent unauthorized removal;
(iii) Heat sinks with high thermal dissipation properties;
(iv) Diffuser shall be UV resistant;
(v) Operate in relative humidity of greater than 90%; and
(vi) Light shall be free of lines / spots / flicker.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-15
54.14 LED LUMINAIRE (CONT’D)
54.14.2 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Module and Luminaire (CONT’D)
(h) The LED luminaire shall comply with test standards and performance requirements as follows:
(i) Type of LED Luminiare:
System
Type of Luminous Lux Flux Colour Rendering
Power Applications
Luminaire (Lumen) Index
(W)
Recessed > 600 For area with
≤ 12W > 75
downlight (for CCT@3000K/3500K) false ceiling
For common
≥ 75@4000K corridor areas,
≥ 700 < 1100
≤ 12W staircase, void
(for CCT@4000K/6500K)
≥ 65@6500K decks, and lift
2 Feet lobbies
≥ 1100
≤ 12W For
(for CCT@4000K)
≥ 75@4000K Carpark
≥ 1500
≤ 13W Driveway
(for CCT@4000K)
For common
≥ 75@4000K corridor areas,
≥ 1400< 2000
≤ 24W staircase, void
(for CCT@4000K/6500K)
≥ 65@6500K decks, and lift
lobbies
4 Feet ≥ 2000
≤ 20W
(for CCT@4000K) For
≥ 2200 Carpark Ramps/
≤ 22W ≥ 75@4000K
(for CCT@4000K) Exits/
≥ 3000 Entrances
≤ 26W
(for CCT@4000K)
Measurement method in accordance to IES LM-79
(ii) The beam angle of the 2ft/4fft LED shall be at least +/- 45 degree (half angle/half
maximum). For down light, beam angle of the LED shall be at least +/- 40 degree (half
angle/half maximum).
(iii) IEC 62471 “Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems” and IEC 62471-2
“Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems - Part 2: Guidance on manufacturing
requirements relating to non-laser optical radiation safety”. Classified under exempt
group for safety use.
(iii) Based on IES TM-21 method, the calculated lumen maintenance at L70 shall be at least
50,000hrs. Calculation shall be done using IES LM-80 test data, as well as measured LED
case temperature under luminaire's operating temperature of 35oC in accordance to
thermal test condition with IEC 60598-1.
(iv) IEC 60598-2-1 used together IEC 60598-1.
(v) IEC 60598-2-2 used together with IEC 60598-1.
(vi) IEC 61547 “EMC Immunity Requirements”.—Test severity level for fast transient / burst /
voltage surge immunity test for line to neutral at ± 2.0kV and line/neutral to earth at ±
4.0kV.
(vii) IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits
for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Less Than 16 A per Phase)”.
(viii) IEC 61000-3-3 “Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public
low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with rated current ≤16 A per phase and not
subject to conditional connection”.
(ix) CISPR 15 “Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of
electrical lighting and similar equipment”.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-16
54.14.2 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Module and Luminaire (Cont’d)
(x) LED luminaires shall withstand 500VDC insulation resistance test.
(xi) LED shall be housed in LED module and shall consist of a low profile high flux LED strip
with the following information distinctly and durably marked on the lamp:
(a) Trademark or mark of origin,
(b) Nominal wattage,
(c) Correlated colour temperature,

(d) Colour rendering Index,
(e) Marking requirements in accordance to relevant test standards.
(xii) The material and body of the luminaire shall comply with test standards and performance
as follows:
(a) Electro-galvanised coating of min. 1 micro on steel metal of thickness gauge 22 or

0.8mm +/- 0.05mm.
(b) PR 12 or equivalent outdoor durable polyester powder in white colour. Coating

thickness shall be at least 60 microns on average, and not less than 48 microns at
any point.
Material – Powder Coating

1 ISO 6272-2 Impact Resistance
2 ISO 2409 Cross-cut adhesion
3 ISO 1519 Bend Test
4 ASTM D3363 Pencil Hardness Test
5 ISO 9227 Salt Spray Test duration 500 hrs
6 ISO 6270 Humidity test, 1000 hrs
7 ISO 11341 Simulated light exposure test duration 1000 hrs
8 ISO 2808 Dry firm thickness of powder coating
(c) The end cap of the LED luminaire for Carpark driveway, ramps, exits and entrances
shall be in shade of grey colour.
(xiii) The failure rate of complete assembled luminaires (inclusive of the LEDs, heat sink,
diffuser, electronic control gear and housing) shall not be more than 5% per 10,000 hours
of operation. A failure is deemed to have occurred if the luminaire malfunctions or does
not meet any of the requirements in the specifications.
The luminaire is customized in design for use in HDB projects and shall be non-
proprietary.
54.14.3 Electronic Control Gear for LED Lighting Luminaire
(a) The electronic control gear shall be suitable for use on AC supply of 220 - 240V, 50Hz. It shall
provide SELV voltage and constant current for LEDs operation. The electronic control gear shall
be protected against short circuits, overload, over voltage, thermal overload and transient
overvoltage. It shall be of CE and ROHS compliance.
(b) The electronic control gear shall comply with test standards and performance requirements as
follow:
(i) The electronic control gears shall power the LED such that the LED is flicker-free; and
(ii) IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules – Performance
requirements - Control gear to withstand over-voltage up to 280Vac without negative
effect during endurance test.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-17
54.14.3 Electronic Control Gear for LED Lighting Luminaire (CONT’D)
(iii) IEC 61347 Part 2-13: Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied electronic control
gear for LED modules
(iv) Life Span shall be 5years against defects.

(v) Operating temperature range of 20 ºC to 45 ºC.
(vi) Storage temperature range of 20 ºC to 85 ºC.

(vii) Power factor ≥ 0.9.
(viii) For general 2ft luminaire, 350mA (± 10%) rated constant output current.
(ix) For general 4ft luminaire, 350mA (± 10%) or 700mA (± 10%) rated constant output current.
(x) Total harmonics current distortion (ATHD) ≤ 15%.

(xi) Supply voltage of 220 - 240V~ (+/-10%), 50 Hz.
(xii) Efficiency ≥ 75%
54.14.4 Luminaire with Motion Sensor
(a) For LED luminaire used with motion sensor, it shall have dual level lighting. It shall be provided
with driver with a motion detector to dim the light level to 30% (+/- 5%) of its rated lumen output.
The motion sensor shall be integrated into the luminaire or remote adjacent to the luminaire. If
remote, the sensor shall be placed in its own housing and the supply cable to the sensor shall be
connected via socket connector. The LED luminaire shall remain lighted in the event of failure
of the motion sensor.
(b) The Motion Detector shall have the following characteristic/specifications:
(i) Operate in SELV DC or AC. For AC operated, it shall be tested with IEC 61347-2-11;
(ii) Current Consumption shall be below 50 mA;
(iii) Operation temperature ranges up to 500C;
(iv) Operate in humidity greater than 90%;
(v) Have a detection zone of 3600;
(vi) Have a detection range of 8m from ceiling mount height of 2.5m to 3m;
(vii) Have built-in features to reduce false alarms due to rapid temperatures changes,
vibration, noises, RFI, static or lightning, insects, etc.;
(viii) Output is normally disable and upon detection output is enable for a specific time;
(ix) Be easily disabled;
(x) Be normally closed cover tamper or house within luminaire housing;
(xi) The reset shall be automatic after specific time and adjustable from 10 to 99 seconds;
(xii) Be rated IP21; and
(xiii) For microwave detector, it shall comply with ICNIRP Guidelines to GENERAL Public
exposure.
54.14.5 Type Test Submission
The LED luminaires shall be type tested by TUV-SUD PSB or other approved SINGLAS Accredited
Test Labs or other recognized international testing body to ensure compliance with the safety, reliability
and performance standards specified above. All necessary test reports of the LED luminaire and
manufacturer’s in house test procedures, warranty and relevant data shall be submitted to SO Rep for
approval.
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 54-18
54.14.6 Batch Test
The samples of each batch of LED luminaires delivered shall be required to be Batch Tested by TÜV
SÜD PSB or local SINGLAS Accredited Test Labs to ensure conformance in design and compliance
with the standards.
Section 55/.....
BLDG17/S54.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 55-1
SECTION 55
EARTHING SYSTEM
55.1 MAIN EARTH BAR
The Contractor shall provide and fix to the wall of the switch room a tinned copper earth bar of cross-
sectional dimensions 31.5mm by 6.3mm mounted on porcelain insulators. The main earth bar shall be
at least 240mm long with six holes complete with M6 bolts and nuts. Alternatively, the main earth bar
can be an extension of the earth bar of the switchboard such that it is exposed and located on the
external of the switchboard.
From the main earth bar, two lengths of 25mm by 3mm copper tape shall be run to two separate earth
electrodes outside the switchrooms. The earth electrodes shall be interconnected by copper tape to
form a loop. A PVC insulated 70mm2 green earth cable shall connect the main earth bar to the earth
bar within the main switchboard.
55.2 EARTH ELECTRODE
55.2.1 General
The Contractor shall install a minimum of 2 earth electrodes for the earthing system. Each earth
electrode shall comprise two sections of nominal 16mm diameter copper-weld, steel earth rods suitably
coupled to form a continuous 3.6m length.
Earth rods shall be driven into the ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. During the driving
process, the Contractor shall fit an appropriate driving accessory in order to ensure that there is no
damage to the top of the electrode. The two electrodes shall be connected to the main earth bar and
interconnected by 25mm by 3mm copper tape, forming a loop. Copper tape shall be connected to the
electrode with purpose made clamp complying with SS 322.
Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance not less than the buried
length.
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed 1 ohm. If the resistance exceeds this
value, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, drive in extra electrodes complete with
interconnecting conductors, clamps, inspection pits, to reduce and achieve the value of earthing
resistance.
55.2.2 Earth Rod
Each sectional rod shall have a copper-weld, steel earth rod with a nominal size of 16mm x 1800mm.
The copper shall be molecularly bonded into the steel core and shall have a thickness of not less than
0.25mm at any point. The proportion of copper maintained on those parts of a sectional rod intended
for permanent connecting linkage with other sectional rods shall be such that no bare steel shall be
visible with a 4x magnifying aid.
The rod shall pass a type test conducted by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories in accordance with
the requirements of the American UL 467 Standard.
55.2.3 Coupling
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze counterbored to completely enclose threads, protecting them
from damage and corrosion and exhibiting mechanical strength and electrical continuity between
sections.
BLDG17/S55.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 55-2
55.2.4 Earth Inspection Pit
The top of each earth electrode shall be housed in a purpose made hot dipped galvanised lid inspection
pit to facilitate inspection. The dimensions of the cover shall be 250mm by 250mm and the steel used
shall be minimum 2 mm thick. It shall have an 8mm diameter opening for lifting up. The pit shall
withstand a force of 50 kN and the permanent deflection shall not be more than 0.5 mm.
For each pit, an identification tag made of durable plastic or metal shall be fixed onto the inside top. The
tag shall include information of the block number, street name, types of earthing (whether main electrical
or lightning and etc), value of earth, number of earthing points (e.g. 1 of 4) and the date of testing. All
wordings shall be engraved and shall be durable.
Where pits are located on the building apron, it shall be sunk flushed with the finish level. Further, all its
positions are to be chosen such that they are aligned and co-ordinated with other services' inspection
pits, apron line, apron joints, apron drains, building lines or any other immediate features. Earth
electrode inspection pits shall not be located within footpath, linkways, shelters and pavilions.
The Contractor shall submit a sample of the galvanised pit assembly to the SO Rep for approval before
commencing installation.
The pit shall be installed such that the bottom is not concreted so that any accumulated water can seep
through. After installation and testing, all earth inspection pits shall be filled up with sand or other
approved aggregates to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
55.3 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
For each electrical circuit, circuit protective conductors shall be provided. It shall be installed along the
route of its respective circuit conductors. Throughout the electrical installation, protective bonding
conductors are also required in accordance with CP 5. The cross sectional area of all such protective
conductors shall be calculated in accordance with CP 5.
All protective conductors shall be copper. Joints in protective conductors are not permitted other than
at terminal points.
Connectors between earth bars, Plant and equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be
made with the appropriate lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut.
The earth terminal of all switched socket outlets shall be connected to the protective conductor of the
final sub-circuits.
For ring circuit, then the circuit protective conductors shall also be run in a ring.
An earthing point shall be provided at each lighting point and connected to the circuit protective
conductor.
55.4 BONDING (ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION)
All non-conducting metal work forming part of the electrical installation shall be effectively bonded to
the earth system. Similarly, other metal work which under fault conditions, could become live or
constitutes an alternative earth fault return path shall be bonded to the earth system. The main water
pipes and main gas pipes entering the building block shall be bonded to the main earth bar immediately
after their stop valves.
In addition, all direct water supply pipes entering the building block shall be bonded at the ground floor
and all indirect water supply pipes shall be bonded at the topmost floors.
BLDG17/S55.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 55-3
55.4 BONDING (ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION) (CONT’D)
The water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be bonded to the earth terminal of the meter
box/meter board/consumer unit whichever is practical. The bonding connections shall be made as near
as practical to the point of entry of the service and, where possible, keeping a minimum distance of
150mm away from any pipe joints to prevent the pipes from being deformed and thus giving rise to gas
or water leakage at the joints For service ducts serving more than one unit, all bonding connections
within the service duct shall be tagged to indicate the units they are bonding.
All bonding connections to the water and gas pipes shall be made with purpose made clamps complying
with SS 322.
55.5 SEGREGATION FROM EXPOSED METALWORK OF OTHER SERVICES
Metal trunking, tray and conduit shall be kept as far away as possible from exposed metalwork of other
services. Where metal trunking, tray and conduit have to run in close proximity of these other services,
they shall be electrically bonded to the fixed metalwork of these services.
Section 56/.....
BLDG17/S55.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 56-1
SECTION 56
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
56.1 GENERAL
The lightning protection system shall comply with the latest requirements of SS 555:and its
amendments, the Specifications and the regulations issued by the Building Control Authority (BCA).
The Contractor shall ensure that the lightning protection system installed is in accordance with SS 555.
56.2 CONDUCTORS
The air termination network and down conductors shall be high conductivity aluminium tape of cross-
sectional area 25mm x 3mm.
Aluminium strip conductors shall be fixed with purpose-made aluminium clips with base strips at
intervals recommended by SS 555. The aluminium base strip shall be fastened to the masonry surface
by a single set screw and the aluminium clip shall be secured on the base strip by two screws. The
thickness of the base strip and clip shall be 3mm and 1.5mm respectively.
Screws and nails for securing clips and base strips shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel. Coated
or plated steel screws or nails are not acceptable.
56.3 AIR TERMINALS
Air terminals shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings or where specifically approved
by the SO Rep.
Each air terminal shall consist of a taper pointed aluminium rod, 16mm in diameter and 300mm in
length. The rod shall be tapered to a sharp point and concentric on a centre line of the air terminal point.
The distance of the taper shall be a minimum of 4 times the diameter of the rod.
Air terminal bases shall adequately support the point and provide a strong secure continuous
connection to the connecting conductor. The base shall be of aluminium of cast or stamped
construction. Points shall be attached to the base by male threads to a female hub on the base. Fixing
bolts and screws for the air terminal bases shall be of aluminium alloy or stainless steel.
56.4 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK
Conductors shall be located along ridges, around the perimeter, behind or on top of parapets and across
large open areas of the roof, as indicated in the Drawings. They shall be run parallel to the building
lines in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest including those on projections above the
roof, and form a closed network. For tile roofing, aluminium tape shall be secured by purpose made
fasteners and not cement mortar. For metal roofing, aluminium tapes shall be secured by purpose-
made fasteners and care must be taken not to puncture the metal roofing sheets.
56.5 JOINTS
Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be permitted without the permission of
the SO Rep. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound.
Joints between aluminium strips shall be made by overlapping clean tinned joint faces and securing
with a purpose-made bolted clamp. The length of the overlap shall not be less than 25mm. Alternatively,
joints shall be made using welding process such as "Furseweld" exothermic powder ignition method or
other approved. The welding process shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
BLDG17/S56.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 56-2
56.5 JOINTS (CONT’D)
For cross-over or T-joints, the aluminium strip conductors shall be secured using a purpose-made
square tape clamp similar to Furse Cat No. CT005 or other approved.
Joints between dissimilar metals shall be effected by bi-metallic joints as recommended in BS PD 6484
(commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation).
56.6 BONDING
The Contractor shall bond all exposed metal work on the roof of the building to the lightning protection
network. The metal work includes lamp poles, railings, metal roofing, gutters, flashings, etc. Bonding
leads shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the lightning protection conductors. Where dissimilar
metals are in contact, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Bonding
shall be effected by means of purpose made bonding clamp complying to SS322 where applicable. In
places accessible to the public (e.g MSCP roofdeck), the bonding conductors shall be embedded or
concealed to prevent it from being removed. The bonding conductors shall be ram-setted for cases or
situation where embedding or concealing of the bonding conductors is not possible.
For external facade which are metal clad, the Contractor shall bond the metallic structure to the lightning
protection system.
56.7 DOWN CONDUCTORS
Down conductors shall be distributed round the outside walls of the building in the positions indicated
in the Drawings or where specifically approved by the SO Rep. A down conductor shall follow the most
direct path possible between the air termination and the earth termination.
Each down conductor shall be connected by an earthing lead of copper tape of cross-sectional
dimensions 25mm x 3mm to an earth electrode. The copper earthing lead of the down conductor shall
be embedded within a chase subject to approval of Consultant Structural Engineer and the SO Rep.
Where it is not possible for the copper tape to be embedded/concealed, the Contractor is required to
seek the concurrence of SO Rep for alternative method of installation of the copper tape. In particular,
all conductors below ground shall be copper tape.
56.8 EARTH ELECTRODE
Earth rods and earth inspection pits shall comply with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in
Section 55 "Earthing System".
56.9 COUPLING
Rod section couplings shall be of bronze alloy. The coupling shall be of sufficient length to completely
enclose the threads of two rods coupled together to protect them from damage and corrosion.
Couplings shall be suitable for use on the earth electrodes, as recommended by the earth electrode
manufacturer or otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S56.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 56-3
56.10 RESISTANCE TO EARTH
The overall resistance to earth of the lightning protection system, before bonding to any metal services
in or on the structure shall be less than 10 ohms.
In addition, each earth termination which is not interconnected at or below ground level shall have a
resistance to earth not exceeding 20 ohms.
If it is not possible to achieve the 10 ohm overall resistance to earth or the 20 ohm resistance to earth
requirement for each individual electrode, then the Contractor shall provide up to two additional earth
electrodes per down conductor, all at the Contractor's cost and expense, to reduce the value of earth
resistance. The additional earth electrode(s) shall then be connected to the first electrode with
25mm x 3mm copper strip buried at 450mm below ground level, and shall be complete with the
necessary earthing clamp and earth inspection pit.
Where more than one earth electrode per down conductor are needed to be installed, then, where
applicable, they shall be equally spaced at a horizontal distance of not less than the buried length, in a
line parallel to the base of the structure.
56.11 COPPER CONDUCTOR
The clauses in this Section are also applicable if copper conductors are used. The conductor shall be
copper tape of dimensions 25mm x 3mm or stranded copper conductors of cross sectional area as
indicated in the Drawings. All materials used including joints and fasteners shall be copper based and
complying with SS 555.
56.12 APPROVAL OF ITEMS
The approval for earth rod and earth inspection pit shall comply with the relevant clauses and
subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".
Section 57/.....
BLDG17/S56.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 57-1
SECTION 57
PUBLIC LIGHTING
57.1 GENERAL
This section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation of public lighting for
the corridors, staircases, ground floor play areas and other public areas in the building blocks. Unless
shown otherwise in the Drawings, surface wiring in PVC conduit/PVC trunking shall be used.
57.2 WIRING
All wiring for public lighting shall be in 1.5 mm2 PVC insulated cables unless otherwise indicated in the
Drawings.
The conductor shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded.
All wiring shall be carried out on the 'loop-in' principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in
accordance to CP 5.
(a) Surface Wiring
For surface wiring of public lighting, the cables shall be installed in PVC trunking in all exposed
public areas except that it shall be enclosed in a PVC conduit when passing vertically through
floors and when installed behind false ceilings. A square knock-out box or purpose made
transformation piece shall be provided at such PVC conduit and PVC trunking interface.
(b) Concealed Wiring
Concealed wiring for public lighting shall be installed as shown in the Drawings and in
accordance with the Specifications.
(c) Automatic Switching-Off the Roof Top Public Lighting
The wiring for roof top public lighting shall be design with automatic switching-off feature.
The roof top public lighting circuit with automatic switching-off feature shall be controlled through
a contactor energised by time switch. The activation of the lighting shall be done by any switches
located at the roof top and all the switches shall be push button type with LED or neon light
indicator. Once activated, the lightings will be switched on for 30 minutes (Time setting can be
adjusted at the timer if necessary). After 30 minutes, the public lighting will automatically be
switched off. The public lighting can be switched off by pressing any switches if the work is less
than 30 minutes.
A label with simple instructions shall be provided on the wall next to the lighting switches :
“The roof deck lighting circuit is using automatic control system.
To switch “on” the lights, press any switch once. The lights will be “on” for 30 minutes.
To switch “off” the lights, press any switch.”
57.3 TIME SWITCH
All public lighting circuit shall be controlled through a contactor energised by time switch. The time
switch shall be powered using AC supply and have programmable input and output conditions per line
and have minimum three inputs and three outputs. The output shall have a relay switching capacity of
5A at 240V AC with independent common. The time switch’s central processing unit shall be provided
with built-in real-time clock and calendar functions. The real time clock shall have an accuracy of +/- 12
minutes maximum per year.
The data of real time clock, calendar and counter present value shall be held for a minimum of 48 hours
for prolonged power interruptions. The time switch must also be able to store its program and system
setting data to prevent loss during power failure. A LCD display with backlight that will be automatically
cut-off through adjustable settings shall be provided. Password protection function should also be
included to prevent unauthorized modification of time switch programs and settings.
BLDG17/S57.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 57-2
57.3 TIME SWITCH (CONT’D)
The time switch shall support communication via RS232C communication port to devices like computer
and personal digital assistant (PDA). It shall allow downloading of program and setting through the
RS232C port or infrared port. Windows based (windows CE for PDA) software programming tools and
drivers for the set-up of the communication between the time switch and the host devices shall be
provided.
The time switch shall have self-diagnostic functions and shall be able to display the message on its
LCD and communicate all error message back to host devices via RS232C communication port.
57.4 LUMINAIRES
Public lighting luminaires shall be provided as shown in the Drawings.
Section 58/.....
BLDG17/S57.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-1
SECTION 58
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES
58.1 INDIVIDUAL ELECTRICITY METERING
For all dwelling units provided with the electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter
board inside the service duct for each unit unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. All meter boards
shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The meter boards shall comply
with the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in this Section.
For all dwelling units not provided with electrical service ducts, the Contractor shall provide a meter box
just outside the unit or at other locations as shown in the Drawings. The meter boxes shall be clearly
labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it. The meter boxes shall comply with the relevant
clauses and subclauses specified in this Section.
For other premises, the Contractor shall supply an incoming service MCB for electricity Kwh meter
protection, rated as shown in the Drawings. All such MCB shall also comply with SPSL/Grid
requirements. The service MCB shall be provided with a suitable protective cover for wall mounting.
The protective cover shall have an opening for the toggle switch and provision of knock-outs for the
supply and load cables. Sealing of the toggle switch in the OFF position shall be possible. Protective
cover, if fabricated from sheet steel, shall have a minimum thickness of 0.8mm. Instructions for the re-
setting of the MCB in case of overload or other abnormal conditions shall be provided and fixed adjacent
to the MCB switch. Mounting bracket shall be provided for the MCB. The bracket shall have a terminal
for earthing. The service MCB shall be clearly labelled to indicate the house numbers served by it.
The labels of the house numbers shall be of "Formica engraving laminate" or other approved material
having black characters on white background with minimum 5mm height characters. They shall be
secured to the front of the panel by riveting and shall be tamper-proofed.
58.2 ELECTRICAL METER BOARDS INSIDE SERVICE DUCTS
58.2.1 General
Provide and fix electrical meter board to each individual unit of flat and other premises as indicated.
Such meter boards are located inside the service ducts. The construction of the meter board shall
comply with SPSL/Grid requirements and shall be approved by them for use.
The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boards shall be in accordance with
the Drawings.
The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on
DIN-rail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.
58.2.2 Construction
Electrical meter boards shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped sheet steel.
The body of the meter board shall be of 1.2mm thickness and the front panel shall be of 1.5mm
thickness. It shall be finished with epoxy powder paint giving a total thickness of not less than 45 micron.
All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass the salt spray
and scratch test as specified in latest SS5. The removable front meter panel shall be mounted on
hinges either on the left or right as required according to the site conditions. Mounting holes for the
fixing of electricity Kwh meter shall be provided as indicated.
The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and
compartmentalise with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be
individually lockable. Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in case of overload
or other abnormal conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in the
Drawings. The electrical meter boards shall comply with IEC 61439.
BLDG17/S58.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-2
The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35°C when carrying the rated current. The live
parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible in accordance with the
standard test finger specified in IEC 61032.
The earth terminals shall be of sufficient size and ways for termination of all protective conductors.
Marking and suitable colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate
terminals.
58.2.3 Type Testing
All electrical meter boards shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories..
A sample of the electrical meter board shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before
they are delivered to the Site for installation.
58.3 ELECTRICAL METER BOXES
58.3.1 General
Provide and fix electrical meter box to each individual unit of flat and other premise as indicated.
The overall dimensions and essential details of the electrical meter boxes shall be in accordance with
the Drawings. The internal layout may be rearranged to suit the type of electrical accessories used in
the box. The electrical meter boxes shall comply with IEC 61439.
The service MCB shall be of the thermal magnetic type, with toggle-type tripping switch mounted on
DIN-rail and approved by SPSL/Grid for meter protection use.
58.3.2 Construction
The electrical meter box may be of metallic or non-metallic material or a composite of both.
Boxes of steel material shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than
1.2mm. They shall then be finished with epoxy powder paint, giving a total paint thickness of not less
than 45 micron. All coats of paint shall be individually oven baked and dried. The metal box shall pass
the salt spray and scratch tests as specified in latest SS 5. Non-metallic boxes shall be of glass
reinforced polyester or other materials of adequate mechanical strength and resistant to ultra violet or
chemical deterioration.
The front edges of the box shall have rounded profile with the 4 corners rounded. A clear transparent
polycarbonate inspection window of minimum dimension 120mm x 160mm shall be provided to allow
reading of the Kwh meter. The transparent polycarbonate shall be stabilized against ultra-violet rays.
A solid teak board of at least 20mm thick shall be provided for the mounting of PUB Kwh meter. Other
alternative mounting methods shall be subject to SPSL/Grid approval. The box shall be provided with
hinged door and locking facilities. The locking device shall be opened by a special tool or by a master
key. The Contractor shall hand over to the Branch Office four numbers of such tool or master key for
each contract. All sharp edges either inside or outside the box shall be filed smooth such that it will not
cause injury to users or to workers.
The isolator and the service MCB for the meter protection shall be totally enclosed and
compartmentalised with separate covers for the isolator and MCB. The isolator and the MCB shall be
individually lockable. Instructions for the resetting of the operating handle of the MCB in the case of
overload or other abnormal conditions shall be displayed adjacent to the operating handle as shown in
the Drawings.
The temperature rise of the terminals shall not exceed 35°C when carrying the rated current. The live
parts or exposed terminals in the installed position shall not be accessible to the standard test finger as
specified in IEC 61032.
BLDG17/S58.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-3
58.3.3 Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be of the insulated, DIN-rail mounted, feed-through type of terminal blocks with
screw clamp connections in which conductors can be connected without any special preparation. They
shall comply with the relevant requirements of SS 241, IEC 60998-1 and 2, IEC 60947 and IEC 60999.
All current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of copper or other materials at least equivalent
with regard to its conductivity and resistance to corrosion. All other metallic parts shall be electroplated
or otherwise specially treated to prevent corrosion.
The terminal blocks for each of the incoming live and neutral mains shall contain integral cross-
connection facility to form a minimum of 3 way connections : 2 ways suitable for 25mm² copper cables
and one way for 10mm² copper cable. The terminal blocks for the earth terminal shall contain similar
integral cross-connections to cater for outgoing circuit protective conductors. Marking and suitable
colour code for live, neutral and earth shall be provided at the appropriate terminals.
58.3.4 Type Testing
All electrical meter boxes shall be type tested and passed by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratories.
A sample of the electrical meter box shall also be submitted to SPSL/Grid for prior approval before they
are delivered to the Site for installation.
58.4 CONCEALED WIRING FOR FLATS
Except for services rooms, all wiring within the blocks shall be run in concealed conduit system unless
otherwise specified. Where concealed electrical wiring is installed in an electrical installation at a depth
of less than 50 mm from the surface, metal conduit complying with Clause 52.4 shall be used. For
concealed electrical wiring installed at a depth of 50 mm or more from the surface, PVC conduits
complying to Clause 52.5 shall be used. PVC conduits shall also be used for telephone data and CATV
wiring. In the living room, data point shall be installed next to the TV point and the wirings shall share
the same conduit. In the bedroom, TV and telephone wirings shall share the same conduit whenever
feasible. The telephone wirings shall be laid via the TV points. Unless otherwise approved by
Superintending Officer, metal conduits shall be used at locations where the minimum 50 mm coverage
over the conduits cannot be ascertained and there shall be no cost adjustment to the Contract Sum.
The concealed conduit system shall allow for easy rewiring. The concealed wiring shall include the
following services:
(a) Electrical
(b) CATV (Central Antenna Television System)
(c) Telephone
(d) Bell
(f) Data
All flush boxes for the mounting of switches, switch-socket outlets, TV outlets, data and telephone
outlets shall be of the galvanised steel type. The galvanised steel flush boxes in the household shelters
shall be anchored to the reinforced concrete with galvanised steel 'fishtail' as shown in the Drawings,
or other approved method to tie back within the reinforced concrete. In addition, all conduits leading to
the outside of the household shelters shall be sealed at both ends for a minimum of 100mm with sealant
approved for shelter use to ensure air tightness.
58.5 FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING
All final sub-circuit wiring for dwelling units and premises shall be in PVC insulated cables unless
otherwise indicated in the Drawings. The conductors shall be annealed copper, preferably stranded.
The insulation of the conductors shall be colour identified throughout in accordance with CP 5 and the
requirements of SPSL/Grid.
Wiring shall be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with terminating points at consumer control units,
socket outlets, switches and connection units and at the fixed lighting points in accordance to CP 5. No
joint between the terminal points shall be permitted.
BLDG17/S58.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 58-4
58.6 BONDING
The bonding of the water service pipe and gas pipe to each unit shall be done in accordance with all
the relevant clauses and subclauses specified in Section 55 "Earthing System".
58.7 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT ON SOLID BLOCK WALL
For forming of vertical and horizontal recesses on solid block walls in residential units, no hacking is
allowed. The contractor shall use modular shaped solid block to form all horizontal and vertical recesses
for the electrical conduits
Section 59/.....
BLDG17/S58.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 59-1
SECTION 59
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP),
GARAGES AND PLANT ROOMS
59.1 GENERAL
The plant rooms shall include consumer switch rooms, lift motor rooms, pump rooms, dustbin centres,
refuse centres, water tank rooms, generator rooms, telephone MDF rooms, telephone equipment
rooms, Singapore Police Force (SPF) equipment room, etc. The Contractor shall liaise with the
appropriate contractors/PTL/occupiers of the plant rooms to determine the desired positions of the
isolator and consumer control unit in each plant room.
59.2 MAINS CABLES
The mains cables shall be installed in metal trunking or metal conduit from the switch room to the plant
rooms in accordance with the Drawings.
59.3 ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The mains cables for the electrical Plant and equipment shall be terminated in metal-clad isolators.
59.4 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER
The mains cables for lighting and small power for multi-storey carparks/garages and plant rooms shall
be terminated in a metal-clad consumer unit or distribution board.
The wiring for lighting and small power in the plant rooms shall be installed in metal trunking/metal
conduits, and in multi-storey/basement car parks/garages shall be installed in PVC conduits. All
switches and switch socket-outlets shall be of the metal-clad type for plant rooms. Lighting points shall
be carried out on the "loop-in" principle with the fixed lighting points terminated in accordance to CP 5.
All electrical accessories in the plant room and MSCP shall be installed in accordance with the drawings.
59.5 SPF EQUIPMENT ROOM IN EACH BLOCK AND MSCP
The room shall be provided with T5 fluorescent batten luminaire(s) which is/are controlled by a switch,
a 13A switch socket outlet, a 4-way consumer control unit and the supply shall be taken from a spare
20A MCB of the CATV consumer control unit in the switch room. The wiring inside the room shall be
surface mounted.
BLDG17/S59.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 59-2
Section 60/.....
BLDG17/S59.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-1
SECTION 60
OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING
60.1 SCOPE
This Section including all clauses and subclauses under it covers the installation, diversion and removal
of outdoor amenities lighting.
60.2 STEEL LIGHTING COLUMN
60.2.1 General
The general dimensions, arrangements and details of the columns shall be as shown in the Drawings.
Unless approved or indicated otherwise, all columns supplied shall be of the straight planted type.
The design of the lighting columns provided in the Drawings shows the minimum requirements only.
The Contractor and his QP shall be responsible for determining and ensuring that the lighting column
is structurally adequate to cater to the overall weight, brackets and the luminaire, bending moment as
well as the environment and soil conditions. Where these factors necessitate improvements or
modifications to the design of the lighting columns, the Contractor and his QP shall provide the
necessary modifications or improvements. It is deemed that the Contractor has included the cost and
expense for the improvements and modifications in the Contract Sum. The Contractor and his QP shall
certify that the lighting columns and bracket arms are designed, constructed and installed in compliance
with BS EN 40.
The thickness of the steel shall be as specified in the Drawings. The tolerance on the thickness of the
material shall be ±10% of the thickness.
The steel tubes shall be formed either by continuous welding or one of the seamless processes. The
tubes so formed shall be free from all injurious Defect.
The circular column shall be made of steel tubes of suitable lengths swaged together when hot, or by
any other acceptable processes.
The exposed edge of each joint shall be welded and shall be chambered off at an angle of 45 degrees.
The cross-section of the column shall be nearly as circular as possible and except at joints and door
openings, the tolerance on the external diameter of the column shall be +3.0%.
The nominal height of the column as shown in the Drawings shall be the distance between the centre
line of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level. The columns shall be planted in
the ground to the specified depth.
The complete column shall not deviate from straightness by more than 2mm per metre length.
A weatherproof door shall be provided with a locking device, over the door opening at the base of the
column as shown.
A baseboard made of sheet steel shall be provided and fitted in each column for the mounting of the
control gear and cut-out as shown in the Drawings.
A corrosion resistant earthing terminal as a bolt of not less than 8mm in diameter and 20mm long shall
be provided inside the column as shown in the Drawings. Two suitably sized washers and two nuts
shall also be provided.
Each planted column shall have a baseplate securely fixed to its base to prevent the column sinking
into the ground and to help prevent the column overturning. The details of the baseplate, planting
depths and buried concrete block shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-2
60.2 STEEL LIGHTING COLUMN (CONT’D)
60.2.1 General (Cont'd)
Surface mounted columns secured on top of concrete or other structures shall comply with BS EN 40
unless shown otherwise in the Drawings.
A cable entry slot of dimensions 150mm x 50mm shall be provided in the column, the lower end of the
slot being about 500mm below the intended ground level.
Other non-standard columns can be used. Such columns shall comply with the requirements of BS EN
40 and approved by the SO Rep.
60.2.2 Columns With Bracket Arms
The completed column shall include the bracket arm connected to the column. The bracket arm (single
or double) shall be manufactured as separate units suitable for mounting or fixing on to the column.
The tolerance on the total length of the columns with bracket arms and planted sections shall be ±1%.
The single or double bracket arms shall be formed from one continuous steel tube section or two
separate steel tube sections, which will permit electrical wiring to reach the lanterns mounted at the end
of the bracket arms.
The bracket projection (horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a vertical line passing
through the centre of the cross-section of the column) shall be 2m and the tolerance on bracket
projection shall be ±2% (without spigot).
The bottom end of the curved arm shall slip onto the top of the lighting column and shall be fixed by
means of bolts to prevent rotational movement. The top end of the curved arm shall finish with a spigot
of outside diameter of dimension to suit the specified lantern.
The fixing angle of the lantern fixing axis, from the horizontal shall be within ±2 degrees of the angle
specified. The lantern fixing angle shall be 5 or 15 degrees as indicated in the Drawings.
60.2.3 Post Top Columns
For post top columns, the tolerance on the total length of the columns with planted sections shall be the
greater value of ±0.5% or ±50mm.
The top end of the column shall finish with a spigot of outside diameter to suit the specified lantern or
mounting bracket for the lantern.
60.3 TAPERED OCTAGONAL COLUMNS
The Contractor shall be required to supply tapered octagonal hot-dip galvanised lighting column as
shown. The mounting height and all other requirements shall be similar to those earlier prescribed.
In addition, each column section shall be machine-formed and longitudinally welded by continuous
automatic gas shielded electric arc process.
The bracket arm shall be octagonal in shape and finish with round pipe at the smaller end. The bottom
end of the curved arm shall slip into the top section of the main column. The smaller end of the curved
arm shall finish with a spigot for the safe mounting of the required lantern.
The Contractor shall submit the column and arm design including the design calculations (if necessary),
test reports, certificates and furnish a test certificate from the manufacturer to show all base metal, zinc
coating weight or other test conform to the Specification requirements. Columns which fail to comply
with the Specifications shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor.
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-3
60.4 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL COLUMNS
60.4.1 Hot Dip Galvanizing
All steel columns and brackets shall be protected against corrosion by hot dip galvanizing internally and
externally in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Unless otherwise indicated, all welding work for
columns and brackets shall be done before galvanising.
The treatments prior to galvanizing shall include degreasing, rinsing, pickling, then rising and fluxing.
The minimum average zinc coating weight shall be 450 g per m2 and minimum thickness of zinc coating
shall be 65 microns. The coating shall be adherent, smooth, continuous and free from flux stains.
All bolts shall be galvanized after screwcutting.
The Contractor shall furnish a test certificate from the galvanizer, ensuring that all base metal, zinc
coating weight or other tests conform to the specification requirements of BS EN ISO 1461. If the
lighting column is not in conformity with the specified requirements, the columns will be rejected and be
replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
Where the length of the column exceeds 10m and the length of the galvanizing bath, the column shall
be galvanized in two sections. The joining of the two sections by welding after galvanizing will only be
permitted with the approval of the SO Rep.
The welded metal and adjacent damaged areas of the zinc coating shall be applied with zinc rich paints
conforming to BS 4652. The surface shall be prepared by removing any welding slag with a chipping
hammer followed by vigorous wire brushing. The paint is applied by brush in two coats to give a total
paint film thickness of about 100 microns.
Any damage to the coating of the galvanised columns and brackets during transportation and erection
shall be made good by applying two coats of zinc rich paint at the cost and expense of the contractor.
60.4.2 Bitumen Coating
One coat of bitumen paint shall be applied externally on top of the galvanised coating/epoxy powder
coating/synthetic enamel paint. It shall be applied over the length of the buried ground section if any
and for a distance of 200mm above the ground level. For lighting columns not exceeding 4m heights
where aesthetic appearance is of concern, then, the latter distance above the ground can be reduced
to about 100mm.
The contractor shall refer to the Standard Drawings for the various lengths of the lighting column's
heights so as to determine the level of the bitumen coatings.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all contamination before application of bitumen coatings.
The bitumen painting shall comply with BS3416 or approved equivalent. The first coat shall be dried
before applying the second coat, which shall be applied at right angle to the first. The application for the
coating shall be the rate of approximately 6 square metres per litre. The overall dry film thickness of the
bitumen coats shall be at least 300 microns.
The sections of the lighting columns with bitumen shall be wrapped with durable plastic covering so as
to prevent the bitumen from smudging the clean sections of other columns during transportation and
storage. The plastic coverings need not be removed during the installation of the columns.
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-4
60.4 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL COLUMNS (CONT’D0
60.4.3 Grouting Of Lighting Columns
Before grouting, three numbers of 30mm diameter pliable PVC conduits shall be inserted into the
lighting column (as shown in the Drawings). Cables shall be pulled in only after (not before) grouting
and casting of the concrete footing.
The PVC sleeves shall be extended out from the slot hole (as shown in the Drawings) by at least 300mm
to ensure that the sleeves’ openings are not covered by the cement grout and concrete footing. If, due
to the layout or other constraints/considerations, the PVC sleeves need to be trimmed to flush with the
top of the grout, Contractor shall carry out such works at no additional costs and without delay to the
schedule.
The Contractor shall ensure that three (3) numbers of T10 reinforcement bars are inserted into the
lighting column. Each T10 bar shall be inserted till it reaches the base plate of the lighting column and
the top of the bar shall stop 25mm short of the top of the grout so as to provide sufficient cover for the
bar (as shown in the Drawings).
The columns shall be grouted to the specified depth as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall use pre-packed non-shrink grout and pump through the door opening of the column
until it reaches 100mm below the bottom of the access door (as shown in the Drawings).
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that due care is taken when grouting is carried out.
The Contactor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables can be pulled in and out of the columns
at any time and can be connected back to the distribution board after the grouting and casting are
completed.
Alternatively, the Contractor can grout the lighting column together with the PVC sleeves and T10 bars
off-site, before it is delivered to the Site.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the galvanised coating of the lighting
column during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer.
60.4.4 Glass Fibre/Reinforced Polyester Lighting Column
Glass fibre/reinforced polyester column shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 40 and shall
include the following features :
(a) High mechanical strength and high impact strength.

(b) Corrosion resistance, impervious to ground decay and insect attack etc.
(c) Uniformity in colour
(d) Maintenance free
The Contractor shall provide complete details of the proposed column, base plate assembly and details
of assembly procedure etc including all dimensional and weight measurements of the column. The
expected life span of the column shall also be included in the particulars.
The Contractor shall also submit a test certificate from the manufacturer to prove conformity to the
Specification.
60.5 POSITION OF LIGHTING COLUMNS
Before erection, the Contractor shall peg up the positions of the lighting columns as indicated in the
Drawings.
The Contractor shall then confirm with the SO Rep that the positions of the lighting columns are well
clear from the way of tree, pavements, walkways, roads, etc, failing which any necessary repositioning
of the columns shall be carried out at the cost and expense of the Contractor.
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-5
60.6 ERECTION
The columns shall be planted in the ground to the specified depth and grouted as shown in the
Drawings.
Excavation of trial holes to locate the buried UPVC pipes of the road crossing, cable entries to the switch
rooms including backfilling and making good shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Erection of the columns shall include excavation of pit to the required depth, concrete footing, backfilling,
concrete skirting around the base of the columns where required, reinstatement of ground surfaces, the
transportation and disposal of surplus earth from the site and the painting of identification numbers on
the external surface of the column.
For the erection of columns or laying of underground cables which affect the building apron, the
Contractor shall ensure that provisions are made before the apron is concreted. For existing apron and
other concrete surfaces, the Contractor shall include the cost and expense of reinstatement of these
surfaces in the Contract Sum. Any hacking and reinstatement shall be carried out in neat, rectangular
panels to minimise the mismatch of surface texture.
of existing buried services, and shall bear all the cost and expense arising thereof.
The door opening of the column shall be positioned parallel to the bracket arm on the side away from
the direction of traffic.
60.7 POWDER COATING AND PAINTING
Before the galvanised lighting column is delivered to the Site, the Contractor shall confirm with the SO
Rep regarding the colour of the column, if not already specified.
All columns of 6m and below shall be powder coated. Polyester powder coating suitable for outdoor
application, with resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra-violet light, shall be used. The thickness of
the polyester powder coating shall be between 50 to 80 microns. The mentioned work shall be done
off- site in a factory with the appropriate facilities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions
to protect the finishing during transportation, installation and before handing over to the Employer. No
painting shall be allowed on the Site, with the exception of painting of the identification number.
For column of length above 6m, only approved lead and chromate free primer conforming to SS 494
and synthetic enamel paint shall be used. Before painting, the surfaces shall be thoroughly clean, dry
and free from grease and oil.
Non-oily soils and dirt shall be removed by brushing or scrubbing followed by thorough rinsing by clean
water. Grease and oil shall be removed by swabbing generously with a suitable hydrocarbon solvent
such as white spirit or mineral turpentine, using several clear swabs on each area.
The Contractor shall then apply one coat of lead and chromate free primer, one synthetic enamel
undercoat and one synthetic finishing coat to the galvanised steel surfaces.
The Contractor shall ensure that the correct types of finishing or paint work are provided and the
preparation of galvanised steel surfaces for painting is properly carried out, failing which the column
shall be rejected and the Contractor shall make good the Defect.
Identification number shall be painted on all lighting columns.
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-6
60.8 WIRING AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
All lighting columns shall be provided with the following wiring and electrical accessories :
(a) a 25 Amp 440V cut-out with provision for looping in of two numbers of phase, neutral and earth
conductors and looping out of one number of phase, neutral and earth conductors of up to
25 mm2 and a 5 Amp 'HRC' fuse as shown in the Drawings.
(b) internal wiring of minimum size of 2 x 1.5 mm2 PVC/PVC complete with 1.5 mm2 PVC (green)
earth connecting the cut-out to the luminaires.
(c) brass compression glands for armoured PVC insulated cables, complete with brass locknuts and
earth tags and support bracket as shown in the Drawings.
60.9 CONCRETE FOOTING
Concrete footing shall follow the dimensions as indicated in the Drawings for lighting column. All mass
concrete used shall compose of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the ratio of 1:3:6.
The cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement of an approved brand and manufacture and shall comply
in every respect with SS EN 197.
Fine aggregates shall be well washed by fresh water or pit sand, free from clay, organic matters and
other impurities. It shall comply with SS EN 12620.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed granite, angular in shape, free from quarry refuse and other
impurities and comply with SS EN 12620. It shall not exceed 40mm in size.
The ratio of water to cement in all mixes shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.6.
Concrete shall be mixed in batch-type mixers until the concrete is uniform in colour. The mixing time
shall not be less than that specified by the manufacturer. When ready mixed concrete is used, it shall
conform to SS EN 206 and SS 544 and approval shall be sought from the SO Rep.
60.10 BONDING OF METALLIC LIGHTING COLUMNS
All lighting columns including all the metallic poles and metallic structures planted inside the concrete
surfaces or located within normal outstretched arm-length reach outside the perimeter of the
playground, hardcourt and fittness court shall be electrically bonded to its weldmesh or BRC. The
Contractor shall ensure proper bonding complying with SS 555.
Where indicated in the drawing, the lighting columns including all the metallic poles and metallic
structures shall be linked together and earthed for lightning protection. The overall earth resistance
value shall not be exceed 10 ohms.
60.11 REMOVAL OF LIGHTING COLUMNS
Removal of lighting columns shall include excavation, uprooting the columns, baseplates and concrete
footings, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surfaces, and the transportation and disposal of surplus
earth and columns from the Site.
Electricity supplies shall be cut-off and the cables made dead, isolated or abandoned before work
commences. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such traffic signs, lamps, barriers,
flashing lights, guards etc and other measures as may be necessary in the removal work, for the safety
and convenience of the public and others.
of existing buried services, and all cost and expense arising thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.
The columns shall be lifted and removed using suitable mechanical handling Construction Equipment
or cranes.
After the columns have been removed, the holes in the ground shall be filled in with suitable earth and
compacted with mechanical rammers and the ground surfaces shall be reinstated to match existing
adjacent surface finishes.
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-7
60.12 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Lighting distribution boards shall be of the 400/230V type, and of adequate size to house the number
of HRC fuses, miniature circuit breakers, contactors, time switch, isolator, by-pass switch, and
associated Plant and equipment, as indicated in the Drawings.
The miniature circuit breakers shall be rated for 240V, 50HZ operation and shall have an interrupting
capacity of at least 6kA (M6).
The distribution board shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet steel of thickness not less than
1.6mm. It shall be treated with a coat of finishing paint and oven dried to finish with a paint thickness
of not less than 45 microns.
The distribution board shall have a hinged front access door with suitable dustproof seals and facilities
for locking. Insulated protective shields shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with live parts
when the door is in the open position.
Neutral and earth busbars and connecting blocks shall have an outgoing terminal for each neutral or
earth conductor.
A removable copper plate of thickness not less than 1.6mm shall be provided at the base of the
distribution board. Suitable sized holes shall be punched for the termination of armoured PVC insulated
cables, where necessary.
The Contractor shall submit layout drawings in three elevations, circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams
to the SO Rep for approval prior to the fabrication of the lighting distribution boards.
The distribution board shall have an approved circuit diagram fixed on the inside of the door. Formica
engraving laminated labels shall also be supplied and screwed to the front of the distribution board to
provide board references.
For outdoor lighting distribution control board, the board shall be weatherproof and mounted on concrete
pedestal. Suitable cable box terminations shall be arranged to receive the incoming underground
cables. A separate earth system shall be provided for each outdoor distribution control board.
Identification number shall be printed on the outdoor distribution board.
The Contractor shall carry out all wiring and connections between the lighting distribution board and the
main switch board. All wiring shall be protected throughout their lengths by a continuous enclosure of
metal conduit or metal trunking except where the cables are installed within the enclosure of electrical
Plant and equipment.
60.13 TURFING
The Contractor shall reinstate the turfing affected by the excavation to match existing adjacent turfing
when directed by SO Rep.
All topsoil shall be of good quality, free from rubbish, roots, stumps, or other extraneous matter, be
friable and porous in texture.
The clay content of the approved sub-soil which is the soil strata found just below the top soil, shall not
be greater than 45%.
The unwashed sand to be used shall be free from any debris, stones or other foreign materials.
Soil mixture shall be three parts of topsoil with one part of soil conditioner and 1 kg per m³ of granular
fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4) or 4:2:1 subsoil, unwashed sand and soil conditioner with 1 kg per m³ of
granular fertilizer NPK (15:15:6.4).
The minimum thickness of soil mixture shall be 150mm (including 25mm of original soil attached to the
turf) at the time of construction. A 125mm layer of soil mixture shall be spread over the prepared surface,
followed by the planting of fresh turf.
Provide turfing materials of size 300mm x 300mm and with about 25mm of original soil adhering to the
roots, be of good quality, free from pests or diseases and of vigorous growth. The type of turf shall be
Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus).
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 60-8
60.13 TURFING (Cont’d)
The turf shall be planted promptly to avoid desiccation.
Close turfing shall apply to all of the turfing area to be reinstated. Turfs shall be firmly sunk into the
ground attached together without any gaps. Water turf immediately after planting until the turf is thriving.
When the level of the completed turfing work is undulating or uneven, the turfed areas except those on
steep slopes shall be properly rolled out with garden roller or other approved means. The turfing shall
give a uniform even surface on completion. Rolling shall be carried out when the turf is established
after the second grass cutting.
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for maintaining all reinstated
turfing Works as specified hereunder, provided under the Contract. All reinstated turfing Works shall
be maintained during the Time for Completion and any time period where liquidated damages are
imposed under the Contract and shall be maintained for a further period of six months commencing
from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified
by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purposes of
this clause). The maintenance service provided by the Contractor shall be the watering, weeding and
mowing whenever required. The Contractor shall replace dying, old or missing turves from the original
source during the Maintenance Period.
60.14 MAKING GOOD
The Contractor shall make good, patch up and paint all building damages and any openings or recess
in the building walls and other part of the structures affected by the Works to the complete satisfaction
of the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
Section 61/.....
BLDG17/S60.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-1
SECTION 61
TELEVISION (TV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION
61.1 GENERAL
The Section covers the installation of the TV wiring system for cable-ready Television System
connection.
The TV wiring installation shall be installed by licensed telecommunication wiring contractor to comply
with the requirements of the Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building (COPIF)
issued by Info-Communication Development Authority of Singapore (IDA), Singapore Code of Practice
(CP5) for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings and with all the statutory rules and regulations of
the Media Development Authority (MDA), Government Authorities, Statutory Authorities, current at the
date of submission of the Tender.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Cable TV system Licensee and follow up with the installation and
submission requirements for connecting to its system. The Contractor upon completion of the TV wiring
installation shall arrange for necessary inspection, testing and certification from Cable TV System
Licensee to issue certificate of cable readiness and arrange for connection to the cable TV system.
There is a cost chargeable by Cable TV system licensee for certification of cable readiness per block
and all cost for submissions, testing and obtaining certification for cable readiness from the Cable
System Licensee shall be deemed to be included in the contract sum.
61.2 THE SYSTEM
(a) The TV wiring installation shall be cable-ready for connection to Cable Ready TV system to
provide television reception on Band I, III, IV and Band V, as well as Frequency Modulated Sound
on Band II.
(b) The performance of Cable Ready TV system shall comply in accordance to the requirements
stipulated in the COPIF.
(c) All components installed shall be adequately protected from theft. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the safety of the equipment before any official handover.
61.3 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
The requirement and specifications of each component part to be installed (e.g.; amplifiers, tap/tees,
splitters, connectors, splice, cables and etc) in the Cable TV system shall comply with the requirements
stipulated in the COPIF and Service Provider requirements.
61.4 THE INSTALLATION
(a) The subscriber's outlet shall normally be mounted next to the 13-Amp socket outlets in the flat
unit.
(b) Subscriber's outlets shall be provided as shown in the Drawings. A plastic holder with the TV
system single line diagram shall be provided inside the metal enclosure housing the tee unit at
the lowest floor of each Telecom Riser duct.
(c) Under normal circumstances, joints are not allowed for cables laid above the ground. Where
joints are inevitable, the approval of the SO Rep shall be obtained. Such joints may only be
made by using the correct type of RF couplers, cable splice or connectors and heat shrunk or
cold shrunk sleeves. The RLR of the couplers or connectors shall be better than 20 dB for both
the VHF and UHF frequencies.
(d) The positions of the outlets, distribution conduits and trunking shown on the Drawing are only
approximate. The Contractor shall provide and install these at the exact positions as determined
at the Site by the SO Rep all at the Contractor's cost and expense.
(e) A label shall be provided on the front cover of every TV subscriber outlet, strictly adhering to the
format and lettering as follows:
Cable TV Ready System

Do not alter or tamper
For SCV assistance, please call Tel: 68732828
BLDG17/S61.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-2
61.4 THE INSTALLATION (CONT'D)
(f) The TV outlets in the household/storey shelters shall come with both TV and FM ports. All other
TV outlets shall come with TV ports only.
(g) Metal base boxes shall be provided for TV isolators installed in household / Storey shelters. The
boxes shall be sufficiently strong to resist mechanical damages and the service conditions
specified. The boxes shall be constructed in such a way that they cannot be readily deformed.
The Contractor shall submit samples to the SO Rep for approval:
- All sheet metal threaded to receive a screw shall have sufficient thickness to allow not less
than two full threads.
- All metal boxes shall be appropriately protected against rust and corrosion. Such protection
shall apply to both the inside and outside of the boxes.
- Provision shall be made for holes in the base of the boxes for securing it to a mounting surface.
(h) The tee units and metal boxes shall be bonded to earth complying with wiring regulation (CP5).
(i) To prevent unnecessary disruption of power supply to the TV equipment, a label with the words
"DO NOT SWITCH OFF POWER SUPPLY FOR TV SYSTEM" shall be indicated at the main
electrical distribution board as well as at the consumer unit that provides power supply to the TV
equipment.
(j) Metal conduits and casings shall be earthed in accordance to wiring regulation (CP5).
(k) All the conduits and PVC trunkings shall be painted with the approved paint. The colour of the
paint shall be similar to the surroundings.
(l) All cables in the junction or tee boxes shall be labelled according to the markings given on the
circuit diagram at the amplifier box. The floor and the last 2 digits of the unit number shall be
used for marking the cables to the apartments.
(m) The TV/FM front plate of the isolators and the single cable TV ‘F’ type connector socket shall be
made of white polycarbonate, urea or other material approved by the SO Rep and match the
colour of the electrical/telecoms outlets and having the same brand/finishes. The polycarbonate,
urea or other approved material shall be UV stabilised and shall not discolour within the Defects
Liability Period even if the outlet is exposed to sunlight.
61.5 CABLE TRAY AND TEE BOX
Cable trays and accessories complying to IEC 61537:2007 shall be perforated and manufactured from
hot roll mild steel complying with BS 1449-1.1 1991 and hot dip galvanised after manufacture to BS EN
ISO 1461:2009.
Electro-galvanised steel complying to BS EN10152:2003 and coated with epoxy power paint giving a
paint thickness of not less than 45 micron can be used in indoor environment.
Cable tray shall be use inside the riser for the Broadband coaxial cable system. The cable tray shall be
labelled accordingly.
The number and size of cable trays to be provided for the main distribution frame room, the
telecommunication equipment room and each telecommunication riser shall comply with COPIF 2013.
In the case where crossing of TV cable through the electrical trunking is inevitable, the method of
crossing shall be subject to approval by the SO Rep.
One tee box shall be provided at every storey for each Telecommunication riser. The tee box shall be
shared with Broadband coaxial cable tray system. The tee box shall be of sufficient size to house the
tee unit and the associated cables without excessive bending. The size of the tee box shall be
approximately (200(W) x 350(H) x 180(D)) mm. All metallic tee boxes shall be bonded to earth.
Screws and washers used to mount the tee, splitter tray and outlet boxes shall be of brass type or
equivalent type which shall not corrode easily.
BLDG17/S61.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-3
61.6 TV SPLITTER BOX
The splitter unit(s) and the associated cables shall be housed in the TV splitter box. The Cable entry
shall be knock-out type provided at the top and bottom of the enclosure. The enclosure shall be made
of plastic material having screwed lid. The approximate dimension of the enclosure shall be 215 mm (W)
x 150 mm (H) x 85 mm (D). The dimensions are indicative. Samples of the splitter box shall be submitted
for approval by the SO Rep.
61.7 TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDOVER OF TV SYSTEM
The Contractor shall test and commission the TV wiring installation in accordance to requirements
stipulated in the COPIF upon completion and issue test reports and certificate of compliance acceptable
to Cable TV system Licensee and SO Rep. The Contractor shall arrange for necessary testing and
verification by Cable TV system Licensee at least 2 months before flat completion to obtain the certificate
of the cable readiness to arrange for connection to its Cable TV system. The Contractor shall arrange
with the SO Rep to handover over the system to the Cable TV system Licensee/Operator after their
certification and acceptance of the system before flat completion.
The Contractor shall supply the necessary test equipments (signal generators, A/V modulators,
amplifiers and etc) including temporary 60V AC power supply to test signals at the TV outlets and
verification testing by Cable TV system Licensee and SO Rep. Copies of test reports, material list
approved by the service provider and certificates shall be submitted to employer through SO Rep for
record.
61.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
61.8.1 The maintenance period shall commence from the certified completion of the block or the Employer will
assign the rights to the Cable TV Licensee/Operator who takes over the system and the Contractor shall
respond to any maintenance service calls from the latter as if from the Employer.
The maintenance service shall include all the items specified hereunder during the Maintenance Period.
(a) The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service on a 24-hour basis everyday without
charge. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for the cost and expense of all such
call-back services in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall respond to the SO Rep, EMSU (ie.
ESMACO Pte Ltd and/or EM Services Pte Ltd), HDB Branch Office or other HDB appointed
agent(s) or Cable TV Licensee/Operator within 1hour of any call or messaging, failing which the
SO Rep shall exercise his rights under Clause 1.6 “Nuisance and Irregularities” to impose
charges against the Contractor.
(b) The Contractor shall be responsible for informing the above informant/s within one hour after a
case has been referred to him, to report on:
(i) extent and nature of repair;

(ii) when work can commence;
(iii) when repair is expected to be completed.
(c) The Contractor shall attend to and rectify all the faults promptly. For failure of the whole system,
the Contractor shall rectify the failures within 3 hours. If the fault is due to poor injection of Cable-
TV signals, the Contractor shall inform the Cable TV Licensee/Operator to rectify the fault.
61.8.2 The Contractor shall liaise with Cable TV Licensee/Operator for carrying out any modification work to
the TV system and emergency repairs.
BLDG17/S61.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 61-4
61.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE (CONTD)
61.8.3 If the contractor fails to attend an urgent call within the same day or fails to attend other faults within 24
hours or fails to rectify the faults successfully after three (3) attempts, the Employer or Cable or TV
Licensee/Operator reserves the right to engage another contractor to carry out the works. The costs of
the repairs and replacement plus the administration charges shall be borne by the Contractor and will
be deducted from any payment due to the Contractor.
61.8.4 The Contractor shall provide standby equipment to keep the system functioning when the faulty
equipment are taken back to the workshop for repairs.
61.8.5 The Contractor shall inform the Cable TV Licensee/Operator one month before the expiry of the
maintenance period for a final defects list for rectification. After the end of the maintenance period and
confirmation of no defects, the Contractor shall obtain a discharge letter from the Cable TV
Licensee/Operator to be sent to the Employer for the closing of account.
Section 62/.....
BLDG17/S61.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-1
SECTION 62
TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING
62.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The telecommunication cabling works using fibre optic shall be undertaken by a licensed
telecommunication wiring contractor. The Works shall comply with latest Code of Practice for Info-
communications Facilities in Buildings (COPIF).
The telecommunication works shall include cabling, testing and commissioning of the following:
(a) Residential Units
(i) Fibre optic cabling from the fibre interface point located in the telecommunication riser to
the fibre termination point of the residential unit. The fibre interface point shall be located
in the telecommunication riser. 1 number of 2-Core Optical fibre cable shall be installed
from the telecommunication riser to each residential unit. The 2-core optical fibre cable
shall be terminated to a fibre termination point which is located in the residential unit
service closet.
(ii) Cabling works including the unshielded twisted pair cables (Category 6) from the RJ45
Patch Panel to RJ45 outlet. The RJ45 Patch Panel within the service closet shall be able
to accept and terminate with the number of unshielded twisted pair cable(s) (Category 6)
and Patch Cord which is equal to the number of RJ45 outlets in the unit.
(b) Non-Residential Units
(i) Commercial premises such as shops, eating houses, minimarts/supermarkets etc are to
be provided with only copper infrastructure. Telephone cabling and 5 pairs block terminal
are provided to each unit from the telecommunication riser.
(ii) Social Communal Facilities (SCF) premises are to be provided with only optical fibre
infrastructure. Fibre cabling and fibre termination point are provided to each unit from
the telecommunication riser.
62.2 GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour, tools and materials required for the
telecommunication cabling works. All materials for the telecommunication cabling works shall be as
approved by IDA. It shall match the electrical wiring accessories and of the same construction.
62.3 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE FROM TELECOMMUNICATION RISER TO EACH

RESIDENTIAL UNIT
Optical fibre cable from telecommunication riser to each residential shall be installed. 1 number of 2-
Core optical fibre cable shall be installed in the conduit for non-coaxial cable system for each residential
unit.
The 2-Core optical fibre cable shall be terminated, with an additional 2m length as “slack”, at each end
into:
(a) A Fibre Interface Point which is located in the Telecommunication Riser; and
(b) A Fibre Termination Point which is located in the residential unit service Closet.
The Fibre Interface Point and Fibre Termination Point shall each be a set of 2 SC/APC connectors.
The Fibre Interface Point in the Telecommunication Riser shall be located on the same floor as the
residential unit or commercial units. The Fibre Interface Point should be clearly labelled, indicating the
corresponding residential unit where the 2-Core optical fibre cable is installed.
The type of optical fibre cables, fibre termination point, fibre interface point and accessories provided in
the residential units such as RJ45 patch panel and RJ45 outlets shall comply with the requirements of
COPIF:2013 and approved relevant standards.
BLDG17/S62.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-2
62.4 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSTALLATION IN CONDUITS
The optical fibre cable used shall:
(a) Comply with the G.657 Category A specifications in the ITU-T Recommendations;
(b) Comprise an outer sheath of fire retardant polyethylene or Low Smoke Free of Halogen (LSFH)
material;
(c) Have a central strength member that is made of Aramid Yarn (Kevlar Yarn) or its equivalent;
and
(d) Be able to withstand a maximum tensile load of at least 500N.
62.5 FIBRE INTERFACE POINT
The fibre interface box to house the Fibre Interface Points shall be provided. For each
Telecommunication Riser, one fibre interface box shall be provided at each storey with residential or
commercial units. The construction and mounting of the fibre interface box in the Telecommunication
Riser shall be approved by relevant authority/licensee. The number of interface points shall correspond
to number of flat units per floor with 2 spares.
An additional interface point shall be provided at the fibre interface box in the Telecommunication Riser
for the installation of fibre termination point in the lift motor room/TMS closet of each residential block
and multi-storey car park and the location shall be determined by the SO Rep. For multi storey car park
without Telecommunication Riser, the fibre termination point in the lift motor room/ TMS closet shall be
connected to an additional interface point of a Telecommunication Riser in the nearest residential block.
Each fibre interface point shall have 2 SC/APC connectors.
62.6 FIBRE TERMINATION POINT
The fibre termination point shall have 2 SC/APC connectors.
The fibre termination point shall:

(a) be securely mounted adjacent to the RJ45 patch panel (located in the service closet and
(b) have a clear space of 50mm from the SC/APC connectors to allow the connection of patch
cords.
For storey shelter, the Fibre Termination Point shall be of recessed mounted type.
62.7 RJ45 PATCH PANEL
The Patch Panel within the service closet shall be able to accept and terminate with the number of
unshielded twisted pair cable(s) (Category 6) and Patch Cord which is equal to the number of RJ45
outlets in the unit.
The contractor shall submit shop drawing showing proposed location and mounting of patch panel, fibre
termination point, 13Amp socket outlet, consumer control unit, TV splitter box and PVC trunking routing
inside the service closet for SO Rep approval before construction.
62.8 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
The optical fibre cable from the Telecommunication Riser to each residential unit and lift motor
room/TMS closet shall be designed, constructed and installed to present no hazard or danger, be it for
normal usage or under fault conditions, to subscribers, personnel working on or inspecting the system,
or to any other person. The contractor shall ensure all wiring installers are properly trained and certified
in the handling and disposal of optical fibre cabling and take necessary precautions to avoid mishandling
and hazards.
BLDG17/S62.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-3
62.9 TESTING CRITERIA FOR THE OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE
To ensure that the optical fibre cable to the unit is in good working condition upon completion of
installation works, both of the following methods of testing must be carried out:
(a) Continuity Testing – This involves checking that the optical fibre cable is not physically
broken at any point, and that the optical fibre cable does indeed go from one location to the
correct destination using a powerful visible red laser; and
(b) Scanning at the fibre interface/ termination point with an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR) – An OTDR is capable of measuring the fibre lengths, losses, connector losses, splice
losses and fibre defects, and works by sending a pulse of light into the fibre and measuring
how much light is reflected back and detected at the OTDR. It will produce a line or graph on a
screen and by measuring how much light is reflected, the OTDR can determine the loss
associated with each of these anomalies. The optical fibre cable will be treated as being in
good working condition if the losses measured between the fibre interface point at the
telecommunication riser ad the fibre termination point at the residential unit and lift motor
room/TMS closet using the OTDR are less than 0.6dB.
(c) Test report by licensed telecom wiring installer/ tester and accepted by licensed telecom
services operator shall be submitted to SO Rep for record.
62.10 FIBRE READINESS CERTIFICATION
Prior to obtaining temporary occupation permit from the relevant authority, the Contractor shall obtain
the fibre readiness certification from an operator licensed to provide passive optical fibre connectivity
service.
There should not be any significant wiring change after the optical fibre cable and its associated fibre
interface and termination points have been certified “fibre-ready”.
Copy of fibre readiness certification and acceptance by licensed operator shall be submitted to SO Rep
for record.
62.11 CAT 6 CABLES, RJ45 PATCH PANEL AND RJ45 OUTLETS
CAT 6 cables, RJ45 Patch panel and RJ45 outlets shall comply with the latest edition of the following
standards:
STANDARDS DEFINITION
ISO/IEC Information Technology - Generic cabling for customer premises
11801
TIA/EIA 568- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
C
Generic Telecommunications Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding for
EIA/TIA 607
Customer Premises
EIA/TIA 569- Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces
C
Modular Connector Physical Dimensions Mechanical and Electrical
IEC 603-7
Characteristics
Samples and test reports of Cat 6 cable, patch panel and RJ45 outlets shall be submitted to SO Rep
for approval before use in the project.
BLDG17/S62.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-4
62.12 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE AND FIBRE TERMINATION POINT IN LIFT MOTOR
ROOM/TMS CLOSET & MSCP
The Contractor shall install, test and commission optical fibre cable from Telecommunication Riser to
the lift motor room/TMS closet of residential blocks and multi-storey car parks. One number of 2-Core
optical fibre cable shall be installed in the conduit for non-coaxial cable system.
The 2-Core optical fibre cable shall be terminated, with an additional 2 m length as “slack”, at each end
into:
(a) A Fibre Interface Point which is located in the Telecommunication Riser; and
(b) A Fibre Termination Point which is located in the lift motor room/TMS closet.
The Fibre Interface Point and Fibre Termination Point shall each be a set of 2 SC/APC connectors. The
Fibre Termination Point shall be securely mounted and has a clear space of 50mm from the SC/APC
connectors to allow the connection of patch cords.
The Fibre Interface Point should be clearly labelled, indicating the corresponding lift motor room/TMS
closet where the 2-Core optical fibre cable is installed.
For lifts with Machine Room, the Fibre Interface Point shall be located at Telecommunication Riser at
top storey. For lifts with Machine room-less, it shall be located at the same storey with the TMS closet.
An additional 13 ampere switch-socket outlet shall also be installed in the lift motor room/TMS closet.
If there are more than one lift motor room/TMS closet in a residential block or multi-storey car park, only
one number of fibre termination point and an additional 13 ampere switch-socket outlet are required to
be provided in one of the lift motor rooms/TMS closet.
The locations of the Fibre Termination Point and 13 ampere switch-socket outlet shall be determined
by the SO Rep.
The type of optical fibre cables, fibre termination point, and accessories provided in the lift motor
room/TMS closet shall comply with the requirements of COPIF:2013 and approved relevant standards.
62.13 LINKING OF CAT 6 CABLE FROM ONE LIFT MOTOR ROOM/TMS CLOSET TO OTHER LIFT
MOTOR-ROOM/TMS CLOSET
Telephone Block Terminal (BT) shall be provided in the lift motor rooms/TMS closet of residential blocks,
multi-storey car parks and as shown in the drawing. The telephone BT shall be located next to the lift
isolator for single or multiple motor-room/TMS closet of each block.
The telephone BT for the lift motor room/TMS closet shall be identified with sleeves marked as “lift
motor room/TMS”. The telephone BT shall be linked via conduit two numbers of minimum Category 6
four-pair unshielded twisted pair cable from one lift motor room/TMS closet to other lift motor-room/TMS
closet and to any other telephone extension points in the lift motor room/TMS closet of each block. Each
cable shall be tested, commissioned, labelled and terminated at the telephone (BT).
62.14 PROVISION OF INTERNAL TELECOMMUNICATION WIRING FOR COMMERCIAL UNITS
For commercial premises (e.g. shops, eating house, minimarts/supermarkets), copper multi-pair cabling
from the distribution point (DP) in Telecom Duct shall be provided and terminated to the 5 pair block
terminal (BT) inside each shop.
For social communal facility (SCF) (e.g child care centre, education centre), fibre infrastructure shall be
provided. A 13A switch socket outlet incoming supply taken from consumer unit shall be provided beside
the fibre termination point (FTP). Location of the FTP is preferably near the consumer unit. Patch panel
shall also be provided beside for configuring RJ45 outlets for office room. Detailed provision such as
the number of RJ45 outlets shall follow the drawing.
The contractor shall supply and install cable tray from Telecom Duct to the commercial premises and
SCF. Adequate space shall be provided for both copper and fibre cables on the cable tray for each shop
and SCF.
All telecommunication cables and other wiring equipment to be used for telecommunication wiring work
shall comply with the Code of Practice for Internal Telecommunication wiring.
BLDG17/S62.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 62-5
62.15 INSTALLATION AND TESTING
All wiring work shall be carried out by the contractor’s licensed telecom installers.
All fibre optic work shall be done by fibre optic installer who has attended and passed both written and
practical test on fibre optic certification programme and receive training on fibre optic cabling
infrastructure and hands-on experience for outdoor and indoor fibre termination, fusion splicing and
splice cabling management.
The Contractor shall maintain conductor polarity identification for all the CAT 6 cabling and RJ45 outlets
in accordance to all relevant codes of practices.
All cables, RJ45 patch panel and RJ45 outlets installed by the Contractor shall be fully tested for
continuity prior to installation and after installation and system performance test prior to handover. The
Contractor shall assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found defective during
testing and handover at no additional cost.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation equipment or tools
necessary for the proper functioning and testing of the system. This may include, but not limited to tools
for terminating cables, testing and splicing equipment for fibre cables.
Summary Cable Test Report lists the Pass/Fail results of the CAT 6 Cables and RJ45 outlets signed by
licensed/approved tester must be submitted to the SO Rep prior to obtaining temporary occupation
permit from the relevant authority. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all of the required test
equipment used to conduct the test report.
The test report shall include the following information for each cabling element tested and be in a format
approved by the relevant authority and SO Rep.
(a) Wiremap results that indicate the cabling has no shorts, opens, miswires, split, reversed, or
crossed pairs, and end to end connectivity is achieved.
(b) Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ACRF, and PSACRF data that indicate the
worst case result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the margin. These
tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant
frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements.
Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both directions when
required by the appropriate standards. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance
specification shall be marked as FAIL.
(c) Length (in meters), propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit.
Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as FAIL.
(d) Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type.
(e) Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version, and software version.
(f) Circuit ID number and project name.
(g) Auto-test specification used.
(h) Overall pass/fail indication.
(i) Date of test.
Upon completion of the telephone cabling Works, the Contractor shall submit an endorsed testing report
by their licensed telecommunication wiring contractor and tester to the SO Rep; and inform the SO Rep
and relevant authority for a joint site inspection. Relevant authority may conduct an acceptance test on
the cabling to check for insulation, continuity and correct termination during the inspection. The
Contractor shall rectify all defects reported during the inspection within one week.
Section 63/.....
BLDG17/S62.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-1
SECTION 63
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
63.1 SCOPE OF WORK
63.1.1 General
The work include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical fire alarm system
installation as shown in the Drawings.
The fire alarm system shall comply with SS CP 10, BS EN54 : Part 2 & 4 and the requirements of the
local authorities.
All fire alarm panels shall be approved by FSSD.
All fire alarm accessories shall be type tested.
Where any apparatus forming part of the installation is situated outdoor or subjected to damp condition,
such apparatus shall be of weatherproof design.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary completion, supervision, testing and
commissioning of the fire alarm installation under the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the requisite
certificates and reports including the testing and commissioning certificates to the SO Rep, URA and
BCA.
63.1.2 Approval Of Drawings And Details
The Contractor shall submit two sets of the following documents within one month from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance to the SO Rep for approval :
(a) Layout and construction of main alarm panel and sub-alarm panel including the battery
compartment.
(b) Technical specifications and samples (if required) of all Plant and equipment employed in the
installation.
(c) Other information of the system as specified in the Specifications or required by the SO Rep.
Work shall only commence upon approval of the Contractor's proposal by the SO Rep. Notwithstanding
the approval given by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall remain liable for providing the panel and other
Plant and equipment fitting on the Site that meet the operating requirements under the said Code of
Practice and the relevant Authorities.
63.2 SYSTEM OF OPERATIONS
63.2.1 General
The fire alarm system shall be a closed circuit continuously monitored installation, comprising
essentially of a main alarm panel, triggering devices and alarm bells, fed from a continuously charged
DC power supply source.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-2
63.2.2 Alarm Operation
The operation of one or more trigger devices shall result in an immediate fire alarm given by :
(a) an audible/visual alarm from all the alarm bells/strobe lights situated in the entire building;
(b) a visible indication for each zone in which a trigger device operates.
Where a number of alarm signals are received in quick succession, or simultaneously, the Plant and
equipment shall be designed so that a general audible alarm continues or resounds as each visible
indication commences.
The alarm state shall be maintained by the main alarm panel without a continued signal from the trigger
device so that even destruction of a connection after the trigger device operates shall not discontinue
the sounding of the alarm.
63.2.3 Alarm Silencing Switch
The audible and visual alarms shall continue until silenced by the manual operation of a silencing switch;
they shall not be automatically silenced. The design of the silencing switch shall be such that the audible
alarm can only be silenced after 3 minutes of sounding. The principle of design shall be such that no
other control is able to override the silencing switch during the 3 minutes of sounding.
The operation of a silencing switch while an alarm condition exists shall not cancel the visual indication
of the fire alarm nor shall the operation of the silencing switch prevent the proper receipt of alarms from
any zone(s) not yet providing an alarm signal. Further, its operation shall not prevent the transmission
of the alarm signal to the monitoring station.
There shall be only one switch for the silencing of the audible and visual fire alarm. In addition, the
operation of the audible and visual fire alarm re-sounding system shall not require the activation of any
other manual switches and devices.
The restoration of the silencing switch to its normal position whilst an alarm condition exists shall transfer
the alarm to the fire alarm bells.
63.2.4 Fault Warning
The fire alarm system shall be capable of detecting fault automatically whenever it develops in any of
the circuits and a fault warning shall be given by both an audible warning from a buzzer and a visible
indication in the main alarm panel. This buzzer in the main alarm panel shall be distinctive and of a
different character from fire alarm bells.
The buzzer warning shall be cancelled by a single silencing switch solely designed for this purpose and
unless the fault is rectified, the visual indication shall persist. The removal of a fault shall automatically
reset the audible fault warning circuit. The occurrence of another further fault while the buzzer is
silenced shall cause the buzzer to sound again. Similarly, the restoration of the silencing switch to its
normal position whilst a fault exists shall transfer the fault back to the audible fault warning of the system.
Any fault warning shall not prevent a fire alarm being given at the same time. At any time, an alarm of
fire shall take priority over any other indication such as fault warning.
A distinct visible and audible fault signal shall be given on the main alarm panel in the event of any of
the following situations :
(a) failure or disconnection of the normal power supply to the main alarm panels;
(b) failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the standby battery;
(c) failure such as low/high voltage or disconnection of the battery charger;
(d) triggering circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the
wiring between trigger devices and the main alarm panel including the removal of any trigger
devices;
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-3
63.2.4 Fault Warning (Cont’d)
(e) bell circuit faults such as open circuit, short circuit, earth fault of the +ve or -ve line in the wiring
between alarm bells and the main alarm panel including the removal of any bells;
(f) open circuit in any of the looping circuits that control the networking of general alarm, silencing
and reset function;
(g) rupture or disconnection of any fuse or the operation of any protective devices that would prevent
a fire alarm being given.
Should any of the above situations from (i) to (vii) (inclusive) occur in the respective sub-alarm panels
a distinct visible signal shall also be given on the main alarm panel.
63.3 MAIN ALARM PANEL
63.3.1 General
The main alarm panel (MAP) shall be of the solid state electronic type. Other equivalent types may be
proposed, subject always to the approval of the SO Rep. It shall be approved by the FSSD under the
PSB Product Listing Scheme Class 1.The MAP shall contain the following Plant and equipment :
(a) Switches and indicating facilities for zones

(b) "System On" indicator
(c) "Mains Fault", "Earth Fault", "Charger Fault", "Battery Fault" and "Sounder Fault" indicators
(d) A voltmeter to indicate battery voltage
(e) Fire alarm buzzer
(f) Silencing switch for fire alarm complete with indicator
(g) Audible fault warning buzzer
(h) Silencing switch for fault warning buzzer complete with indicator
(i) Indicator for bell circuit fault
(j) Evacuation switch to energise all alarm bells complete with indicator
(k) Light indicator test facility
(l) System reset switch
(m) Auxiliary contacts complete with isolation switch and indicator
(n) A separate indicator for each sub-alarm panel to indicate that its isolation switch is activated.
The main alarm panel shall be accommodated in a well-finished self-sustained sheet cabinet
constructed from at least 1.5mm thick hot dipped galvanised sheet steel. The cabinet housing shall be
coloured bright red and shall be fitted with a hinged, glazed door which shall be locked. All alarm zone
indicators and associated switches shall be visible behind the locked door. The manufacturer's name
shall be clearly and permanently marked on the front of the cabinet.
Two spare zones or 10% of the total zone, whichever is the higher, shall be provided for the alarm
panels. Facilities shall be provided in the main alarm panel so that easy connection to extension unit
can be made when future expansion of the main alarm panel becomes necessary.
A manual call point and an alarm bell/strobe light shall be provided adjacent to the main alarm panel.
All main alarm panel shall incorporate the automatic facilities to receive, interpret and operate the
signals from their fire fighting systems installed in the building blocks.
Letterings using reversed silk screen designating the alarm zone, the functions of the various indicators,
apparatus and switches shall be provided for every main alarm panel. All manual controls shall be
clearly labelled to indicate their functions. An information chart listing the system operating instruction
shall be fixed inside each board. Other type of labelling may also be used subject to the approval of
the SO Rep.
Approved silk screen white perspex sheet with reduced scale coloured drawings of approved sizes
showing the boundaries and locations of the alarm zone shall be provided by the Contractor and located
next to each main alarm panel, sub-alarm and repeater board.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-4
63.3.1 General (Cont’d)
Locations of fire protection Plant and equipment such as main alarm panel, sub-alarm panel, portable
fire extinguishers, fire hose reels, dry riser, etc shall also be indicated on the white perspex coloured
drawings in the form of clear and distinctive symbols. Escape routes including corridor, staircase, etc
shall be clearly indicated.
The main alarm panels and sub-alarm panels of the automatic alarm system shall be provided with an
alarm verification feature complying with CP10 and approved by the relevant Authority.
63.3.2 Alarm Zone - Zone Switches And Indicating Facilities
The following switches and indicating facilities shall be provided for each alarm zone or group :
(i) Fire alarm indicator
(ii) Fault indicator
(iii) Isolation indicator
(iv) Isolation position switch
63.3.3 Fire, Fault And Isolation Indicators
The fire alarm indicator shall be twin light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LED" for the
purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it). The fault indicator and isolation indicator
can each be a separate single LED or a single LED incorporating both the fault indicator and isolation
indicator. The LED shall light up upon actuation and remain lit until manually reset.
The fire alarm indicator shall be coloured red and clearly labelled with the word "FIRE". The fault
warning indicator and the isolation indicator shall be coloured yellow and clearly labelled with the words
"FAULT" and "ISOLATED" respectively.
63.3.4 Isolation Switch
A switch shall be provided for the deliberate isolation of each individual alarm group from the main alarm
panel common circuitry. Operation of the isolation switch shall prevent the alarm group from initiating
either alarm or fault signals and shall not impair the normal functioning of any other alarm groups.
Unless normal conditions have been restored, operation of the isolation switches shall not cause the
associated alarm groups to be isolated if the switches are operated after on alarm activation of the
respective zones.
63.3.5 Indicators
Lamp indicators shall be the light emitting diode (LED) type.
The arrangement of indicator circuits and the design of the apparatus shall be such that the operation
of one indicator does not prevent the proper and separate operation of other indicators.
The operation of any alarm bell or the transmission of fire alarm signal to approved monitoring station
shall not be prevented by any faulty indicator and shall not depend on the operation of any indicator.
63.3.6 Connection Of Ancillary Services
Ancillary services shall not affect the functioning of the Plant and equipment.
A 24V DC supply may be provided from the fire alarm control panel to operate a relay or similar
operating device controlling the ancillary Plant and equipment. The mechanism shall be such that it
does not impose a continuous load on the battery under non-alarm conditions.
Provision for the interface between the main alarm panel and auxiliary Plant, control Plant and
equipment or external devices which require to be operated or disconnected in the event of an alarm
shall also be made by the use of at least two separate and uncommitted relays. Each relay shall provide
2 sets of voltage free changeover contacts having minimum rating of 5A 30V dc.
Outputs to any ancillary services shall be fused or similarly protected to ensure the safety of the control
Plant and equipment.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-5
63.3.7 Sub-Alarm Panel
The construction and requirements of the sub-alarm panel shall be similar to the main alarm panel. Sub-
alarm panel shall contain indicators together with associated switches and indicating facilities for zones.
The sub-alarm panel shall have additional facilities for transmitting a sector signal to the main alarm
panel.
Where sub-alarm panel is provided in a sector of a premise, the sector in which an alarm originates
shall be shown on the main alarm panel, and the zone of origin of the alarm shall be shown on the sub-
alarm panel. Where both sector and zone indication are provided on one main alarm panel, clear
differentiation shall be made between the two functions.
63.3.8 Power Supply
The fire alarm system shall be operated on a DC power supply of 24 volts provided by sealed type
maintenance-free lead-acid batteries which are maintained in an adequately charged condition by a
230 volts AC/24 volts DC rectifier/charger.
A double-pole 230 volts rated switch with neon indicator shall be provided for the direct termination of
the incoming mains supply. This supply shall be exclusive to the fire alarm system and connected to a
separate circuit from the main switchboard and the controlling circuit breaker shall be clearly labelled
"FIRE ALARM : DO NOT SWITCH OFF".
The batteries shall be suitable for standing on open circuit or floating across a constant voltage supply
and discharging at infrequent intervals.
The capacity of the battery used to energise the alarm system shall be such that in the event of mains
failure, the battery is capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at least 24 hours.
Thereafter it shall be capable of supplying an additional load resulting from an alarm originating in two
separate alarm zones or groups for a period of half an hour and, if utilised to supply emergency
evacuation alarms, it shall in addition, be capable of supplying the full emergency evacuation alarm
load for a period of at least 10 minutes.
Calculations for ascertaining the capacity of the batteries and the design of the battery charging the
Plant and equipment to meet the above requirements shall be submitted to the SO Rep.
The battery terminal pillars and intercell connectors, bolts, nuts and washers used for fastening of
intercell and terminal connectors shall be made of highly conductive and corrosion-free materials.
The cell container of the battery shall be enclosed and made of rugged and self-extinguishing type
plastic.
The battery shall be arranged in the compartment in such a way as to allow easy maintenance so that
the inspection of batteries shall not require removal of the cells and connections from the battery
assembly.
A label containing the following information shall be securely fixed within the battery enclosure :
(a) Type of cell

(b) Number of cells
(c) Ampere hour capacity
(d) Nominal voltage
(e) Final voltage
(f) Float voltage of battery charger
(g) Output current and limit of battery charger
(h) Date supplied and recommended date of replacement
63.3.9 Battery Charger
The battery charger shall be of constant voltage current limiting type with automatic boost charge by
voltage level sensing and capable of functioning under the following environmental conditions :
(a) Temperature : 10°C to 40°C

(b) Relative humidity : 20% to 95%
(c) Abnormal foreign potential : Power line surge
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-6
63.3.9 Battery Charger (Cont’d)
The charger circuit shall be designed to suit the local climate.
The charger shall be capable of supplying any possible load of the system while maintaining the battery
in a fully charged condition and recharging the battery as prescribed below. The charging system shall
be the current limiting constant voltage type.
The rating of the battery charger shall be such that :
(a) after the battery has been discharged from the fully charged state by supplying the load as
specified in the aforementioned requirements, and
(b) after recharging for a period of not more than 24 hours, the battery shall have recovered to the
extent that it shall be capable of sustaining a further discharge of supplying the same load as
specified in the aforementioned requirements.
The output voltage provided by the battery charger shall be maintained within 0.1% of the preset value
whilst operating within any combination of the conditions described below and whilst delivering a current
within the range of values required for float charging :
(a) Voltage : 230 rms +10%

(b) Frequency : 50 Hz +5% single phase
The battery charger shall keep the battery under constant voltage charge. It shall incorporate automatic
control features with output designed to charge and maintain the cells of the battery within the limits
specified by the battery manufacturer, taking into account any quiescent load imposed by the associated
system.
The voltage output of the charger shall be adjustable to ±20% of the nominal voltage. The battery
maximum allowable charging current shall be designed to suit the selected battery size at fixed current
limitation. The trimmers shall be arranged so that adjustment can be done without removing any circuit
boards or obstacles.
All electronic parts including rectifiers, power transistors and resistor shall be designed to function at
the case temperature below 75°C unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep.
Printed circuit boards, fuses, relays and other electrical parts employed in the battery charger shall be
mounted and connected in such a way that facilitate inspection of them without any need to dismantle
them from their operating positions.
An approved self-resetting low voltage cut-off device with adjustable low voltage setting shall be
installed in the circuit between the battery and the system if the system is not self-resetting.
This under-voltage protection device shall disconnect the battery from supplying the system if the pre-
set low voltage limit as recommended by the battery manufacturer is reached.
63.4 MANUAL CALL POINTS
Manual call points shall be of the "break-glass" type complying with the requirements of BS 5839:Part 2
and notwithstanding this, be of a type approved by the relevant statutory authorities.
The casing of the call point shall be of shatterproof corrosion resistant plastic, finished in red. The front
glass fitted shall be replaceable and shall be such that the possibility of accidental breaking is reduced
to a minimum.
Manual call point installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof to at least IP65 and watertight
steel box construction complete with screwed conduit entry hole. The word "FIRE" shall be embossed
on the front surface.
For fire alarm systems which are not connected to monitoring stations (DECAM), provide a "IN CASE
OF FIRE, CALL 995" signage at every manual call point.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-7
63.5 FIRE ALARM DETECTORS
Fire alarm detectors shall be of the types approved by the relevant statutory authorities. The detectors
shall preferably be flushed mounted where possible and installed in a manner that each can be readily
removed for servicing without affecting the effectiveness of the remaining detectors and the system
operation.
In addition, all heat detectors shall comply with the CP 10:2005, Code of Practice for the Installation
and Servicing of Electrical Fire Alarm Systems and the technical specification EN 54:Part 5:2001 "Fire
Detection and Fire Alarm Systems-Part 5: Heat Detectors-Point Detectors" or AS 1603-1:1997
"Automatic Fire Detection And Alarm Systems:Heat Detectors" & relevant parts of AS 2362 "Fire
Detection, Warning, Control & Intercom Systems" or UL Standard 521 "Heat Detectors For Fire
Protective Signaling Systems" or other approved equivalent.
63.6 ALARM BELLS AND STROBE LIGHT
Alarm bells shall be of the cast or pressed steel underdome type, finished in red. It shall be complete
with a strobe light on top of the bell cover. The bell shall be the trembling type with a gong diameter of
150mm, and shall be capable of giving a minimum sound level of 90 dBA within a range of 1m
continuously.
The strobe light shall be attached with the alarm bell or mounted directly above it.
The strobe light shall be of a high intensity flashing strobe light with flash rate of 50 to 80 flashes per
minute. The lens cover of the light shall be red or amber in colour.
The bells and light shall be suitable for operation on 24 volts DC.
Alarm bells shall be mounted on conduit boxes above the manual call points.
Alarm bells installed outdoors shall be of approved weatherproof and watertight construction to at least
IP65.
63.7 INSTALLATION OF WIRING
Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate provisions of SS
CP5 except as modified by the relevant clauses in SS CP10.
The wiring of the fire alarm system including the incoming supply mains shall be exclusive to the fire
alarm installation and shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuit. Fire alarm wiring shall be
spaced at least 50mm away from any other service. The mains feed to the power supply Plant and
equipment of the fire alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of all other services and also
from all other circuits of the fire alarm system.
Each alarm zone or group shall be separately wired and indicated on the main or sub-alarm panel.
Manual call points shall be connected in an "open" circuit and an "end-of-line" resistor shall be provided
to enable line monitoring.
All wiring shall be run in steel metal conduits or metal trunking exclusive to the fire alarm system. The
Contractor shall ensure that the furthest point of the system shall have sufficient supply to facilitate the
proper functioning of the system.
No joint between terminal points shall be permitted, except in long runs, in which case the joints shall
only be made in a suitable enclosed terminal box employing screwed terminations. The box shall be
labelled "Fire Alarm Link Box".
The wiring diagram shall be submitted to the SO Rep for approval before installation commences.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-8
63.8 SENSING CIRCUIT
A pair of voltage-free normally closed fire-resistant signal cables for sensing the activation of the fire
alarm system shall be provided from the main alarm panel to the lift machine room.
63.9 MONITORING FOR AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Where the automatic fire alarm system is required to be connected to monitoring stations as shown in
the Drawings, the connection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of SS CP 10 and as
The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for the one-time rental charge
and installation of the fire alarm transmitter, installation of the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-up
telephone line from the transmitter to the nearest telephone distribution point and interconnection
between the transmitter and the main alarm panel leading to the commissioning of the complete system.
The transmitter shall be complete with the leased-line transmitter, digital communicator and all
associated power supply units.
The Contractor shall also include in the Contract Sum the first three month rental charges for the leased-
line and the back-up telephone line from a PBTS and the first year 24 hour monitoring charge by the
monitoring station, all commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or
sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer.
If other means of DECAM transmission, approved by the Singapore Civil Defence Force, are proposed
by the Contractor, the Contractor shall still be required to install the fixed leased-line and back-up dialed-
up telephone line from the telephone terminal block to the transmitter. In addition, the first three-month
rental charges for such other means of transmission shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
Sum. Such alternative shall be approved by the SO Rep.
63.10 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
On completion of the installation and before the final inspection and testing, the Contractor shall supply
to the SO Rep three sets of suitably scaled "As-Installed" drawings of the complete fire alarm
installation. The drawings shall comprise the following :
(a) positions and boundaries of various alarm zones;

(b) position of main alarm panel, sub-alarm panels, battery charger, transmitter, manual call points,
detectors and bells;
(c) circuitry diagram of the alarm panels and battery charger;
(d) legend showing clearly all the symbols and abbreviations used;
(e) technical specifications of all Plant and equipment used in the system including the
manufacturer's recommended testing requirements for detectors in-situ.
63.11 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
test of the complete installation. The application shall include information on the testing appointment
date and statement of completion of the whole Works by the Contractor.
The commissioning test shall be carried out by the Contractor and to be witnessed by the SO Rep. The
format of the test report shall be in accordance with the Specifications. The entire system shall be tested
to ensure that it operates satisfactorily and that :
(a) all manual call points, detectors and bells function correctly;
(b) all fault monitoring circuits function correctly;
(c) the battery and battery charger comply with the requirements of the Specifications;
(d) all ancillary Plant and equipment function correctly;
(e) all control features and indicators in the alarm panels function correctly;
(f) cable insulation resistance of all circuits are satisfactory in accordance with SS CP5.
The Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the test report, duly completed and signed, to the SO Rep not
later than 7 days after the test.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-9
63.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
of the Fire Alarm System and an efficient call-back service as specified hereunder for a period of one
year commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of
the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance
Period" for the purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
The maintenance during the one year Maintenance Period shall include all items listed in the
Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System specified hereunder.
63.12.1 Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System
63.12.1.1 Type Of Maintenance Service
This service shall include the following items :
(a) The Contractor shall provide an efficient call-back service between 9.00 am and 9.00 pm every
day without charge.
On Substantial Completion of the Works as certified by the SO Rep, the Contractor shall install
and maintain one one-way exchange line or apply for the radio paging service from a PTL to
receive calls from the Branch Offices. The telephone numbers allotted to the radio paging
service shall be kept strictly confidential for use by the Employer. All fees and expenses
incurred for the application, installation and maintenance of the one-way exchange line or the
radio paging service shall be borne by the Contractor.
(b) Emergency call-back service shall be provided by the Contractor at any time and all such
urgent calls shall be attended to within the same day if the Contractor is notified before
9.00 pm. All other calls shall be attended to within 24 hours on notification by telephone or
through the radio paging service as specified in the aforementioned requirement, otherwise
the SO Rep reserves the right to engage any other person to rectify the fault and all expenses
incurred plus the Employer's charges shall be recovered from the Contractor.
(c) The Contractor shall provide the following servicing and maintenance :
(i) Monthly Test And Annual Test
The Contractor shall inspect, test and service the complete fire alarm system under this
Contract at least once a month except where otherwise directed by the Employer.
At each such monthly test and the annual test, the minimum items or work detailed
below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special maintenance requirements on
Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but recommended by the
manufacturers shall also be included. The result of each test shall be recorded in the
test report format as produced in Appendix A38 "Monthly/Annual Test Report -
Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System" and filed in the log book.
(ii) Monthly Test
For monthly tests, the following inspection and testing procedures shall be carried out
each month :
(a) Simulate fire conditions on all alarm zones and reset the system to normal.
Confirm with the monitoring station when the test has been completed.
(b) Check battery voltage and charging current in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Check batteries and their terminals as specified by the manufacturer to ensure
that they are in good serviceable condition. Where applicable, examine to
ensure that the specific gravity and the level of the electrolyte in each cell is
correct.
(d) Check condition of battery cabinet for corrosion and to ensure that batteries are
stored in a secure condition.
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 63-10
63.12.1 Schedule For Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System (Cont'd)
63.12.1.1 Type Of Maintenance Service (Cont'd)
(c) (ii) Monthly Test (Cont'd)
(e) Check to ensure that all indicating lights are operating correctly and replace if
faulty.
(f) Check operation of all alarm sounders.
(g) Disconnect the battery supply and ensure that the visual and audible fault signals
are activated at the main alarm panel.
(h) Simulate main power supply failure and ensure that the system will operate
correctly with the standby battery power supply (as specified in the
Specifications).
(i) Simulate fire alarm conditions and check the output signals available to initiate
the remote auxiliary functions that is required to be in operation in the event of
fire as in accordance with the appropriate codes.
(j) Simulate fault conditions on all alarm zones to ensure that the main alarm panel
is operating correctly.
(k) Check that the main alarm panel is in a clean and operative condition.
(l) Visually inspect the condition of components, terminations and cables.
(m) Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out
satisfactorily. Record in the log book any circuit fault that require repair.
(n) Check that all switches are returned to their operating position after the test.
(o) The person carrying out the test shall record in the log, any fault(s) identified and
that the above test has been carried out.
(iii) Annual Test
For annual tests, carry out all the inspection and testing procedures specified in the
monthly test in the aforementioned requirement and, in addition, the following shall also
be provided :
(a) The maintenance personnel shall arrange to check the operation of at least 20
percent of the detectors in the installation each year. The selection of detectors
to be tested shall be spread over as many zones as possible and shall be made
in such a way that all the detectors in the installation shall have been checked at
least once in 5 years.
The checking of detectors shall take the form of either :
- the testing of a detector in-situ; or
- the removal of a detector and its replacement by a detector which has been
checked and calibrated by the supplier/manufacturer.
(iv) Annual Test
(a) Circuits requiring automatic voltage regulated supplies shall be checked to

ensure correct operation and voltage output.
(b) Where the heat-sensitive element of thermal detectors or the enclosure of other
detectors are found to be coated with paint or any other material likely to affect
the operation of the detectors, such material shall be cleaned off or if necessary,
have the detector replaced.
Section 64/.....
BLDG17/S63.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-1
SECTION 64
VENTILATION SYSTEM
64.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The Works to be executed shall include the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
mechanical ventilation system to food stalls, eating houses and complexes as shown in the Drawings.
The Drawings shall serve as references only. Where any part of the design contravenes with Codes
and Building Authority requirements, the onus is on the Contractor to make amendments to the design
but additional approval from the Consultant shall be sought before any deviations from the approved
design can be carried out, failing which the whole installation may not be accepted. The Contractor shall
be deemed to allow all costs and expenses in the Contract Sum for complying with the foregoing
requirements.
The mechanical ventilation system shall be complete with fan, ductworks, silencers, dampers, flexible
duct connections, sound attenuation box, vibration isolators, drain traps and other accessories. The
Works shall be carried out in accordance with the following requirements and Drawings and in
compliance with the current regulations of the Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources, the
Statutory Authorities of Singapore, and the Singapore Standard CP 13:1980 on mechanical ventilation
and air-conditioning in buildings. Bifurcated fan shall be used for eating houses and food stall. All
standards used in the Specifications shall be of the latest version.
64.1.1 Related Documents
This Section shall be read in conjunction with Section 65 including all clauses and subclauses under it.
64.1.2 Submission Of Drawings And Details
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall record and update all Ventilation System
Installation, routes, legends and all other related works based on actual site installations for the
production of as-built drawings.
On completion of the installation, provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals and the
testing record/results of each installation.
64.2 OTHER WORKS TO BE INCLUDED
The following works shall be included as part of the installation :
(a) Provision of openings in wall, floor and roof slabs for the installation of duct as shown in
Drawings.
(b) Where the duct runs through the floor or roof slabs, a raised kerb shall be constructed around
the duct and the duct at the opening should be constructed in such a way as to prevent seepage
of water.
(c) Patching up and making good all openings to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
(d) All necessary electrical wiring including accessories to the fan motor.
(e) Fan motor control panel complete with internal wiring, control Plant and equipment, indication
and motor starters.
(f) Low level exhaust louvres/grilles are to be protected by metal guards.
64.3 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL
All material used shall comply with the relevant British Standard Specification. Certificates of origin for
any material shall be produced by Contractor on demand by the SO Rep. All electrical Plant and
equipment shall be fully tropicalised, suitable for use in a hot humid atmosphere having an ambient
temperature of 32°C. Certificates of tests by competent Authorities for all electrical and mechanical
components shall be produced by the Contractor on demand for inspection by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-2
64.4 DUCTWORK
64.4.1 General
The material, construction and installation of the ductwork shall be in accordance with this Section
64.4.2 Materials
All ductwork shall be constructed of best quality galvanised steel sheets with thickness not less than
1.37mm unless otherwise specified.
64.4.3 Construction
All ductwork shall be constructed conforming to the dimensions and methods specified.
Horizontal dimensions of the rectangular ductwork are shown first and all dimensions shown are CLEAR
internal sizes.
Ducts which are internally insulated, shall be constructed such that the nominal dimensions which are
shown in the Drawings are clear internal sizes inside the insulation.
Ductwork shall be free of any waves or buckles. Full size standard galvanised steel sheets shall be
used and any patched, made up, or second-hand sheets shall be rejected.
Unless otherwise specified, all changes in duct size shall be made in a gradual manner with a total
angle of divergence not exceeding 15 degrees whenever possible. Bends shall be made with an inside
radius not less than the duct width in the plane of the bend. Where this is not possible due to limitation
of space, square bends may be used. All bends whether round or square shall be provided with
approved turning vanes.
All duct shall be installed without forming dips or traps which may collect residues.
A residual trap shall be provided at the base of each vertical riser with provisions for cleanout.
Ducts shall be installed with a fall in the direction of flow of not less than 1 in 200. A drain shall be
provided at the lowest point of each run of duct and as indicated in the Drawings.
Each duct system shall constitute an individual system serving only exhaust hoods on one floor.
All duct joints for the eating houses and food stall unless otherwise specified shall be of continuous
external welded constructions and all horizontal welded joints shall be at the upper edge and not the
lower edge except where any two sections of ducts are joined together.
Ducts having width of more than 450mm shall be cross broken or stiffened by approved means.
64.4.3.1 Joints And Seams
Sheet metal ducts shall be properly braced and reinforced. The internal ends of all slip joints shall be
installed in the direction of the flow. All ducts shall be constructed with minimum number of seams.
Ductwork longitudinal joints shall be of an approved air-tight self-locking type. Flat double longitudinal
seams shall be used for ductwork connections.
Rivets shall be spaced at not more than 65mm centres. All duct joints shall be air-tight.
All joints and seams shall be constructed in accordance with approved standard.
64.4.3.2 Flanges
Flanges shall be of rolled structural angles welded at the corners and shall be rivetted to the duct. Spot
welding is not acceptable. The downstream end of the duct shall be bent around the face of the flange.
The upstream end of the duct shall be inserted 50mm into the downstream duct. Flanges shall be jig-
drilled or drilled to suit the minimum clearance for bolt. A 5mm rubber gasket shall be installed between
flange joints to prevent air leak.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-3
64.4.3.3 Construction Method
The construction method shall be in accordance with the following :
Metal Sheet Type of Transverse Joint

Maximum Size of Duct Type of Bracing
Gauge Connection
Up to 300mm 26 (0.46mm) S drive, pocket or bar None
slips at 2.2m centres
301mm to 460mm 24 (0.56mm) S drive, pocket or bar None
slips at 2.2m centres
461mm to 760mm 24 (0.56mm) S Drive, 25mm pocket or 25mm x 25mm x 4mm
25mm bar slips at 2.2m angles 1.7m from
centres joints
761mm to 1070mm 22 (0.71mm) 25mm x 25mm x 4mm
Ditto
angle iron joints
1071mm to 1400mm 22 (0.71mm) 38mm angle connections 25mm x 25mm x 4mm
or 38mm Bar Slips with angles 1.7m from
25mm x 4mm joints
reinforcement bar at 2.2m
centres
1401mm to 1530mm 20 (0.91mm) 33mm angle connections 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
or 38mm in pockets or diagonal angles or
38mm in bar slips at 1m 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
maximum centres with angles 0.7m from
35mm x 4mm joints
reinforcement bar
1531mm to 2150mm 20 (0.91mm) Ditto Ditto
Above 2151mm 28 (1.22mm) Ditto Ditto
64.5 DAMPERS AND ACCESSORIES
64.5.1 Splitter Dampers
Splitter dampers shall be installed at branch connections to main ducts. The dampers shall be of
sufficient size to completely close off their respective branch ducts and shall be constructed of
galvanised metal sheet of 1.5mm thick streamlined around a steel shaft of not less than 12mm diameter.
The shaft shall run in brass or nylon bearings fixed to each side of the duct. Each damper shall be fitted
with a quadrant and shall have a locking device to hold the damper in position.
The dampers shaft shall be clearly marked to show the relationship between damper blade and
quadrant. Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die cast aluminium with the words "OPEN" and
"CLOSE" cast on the quadrant.
The whole of the damper assembly shall be rigidly installed to prevent vibration and rattling.
64.5.2 Multi-Blade Dampers
Multi-blade dampers shall be of the opposed blade counter-rotating type. The dampers shall be rigidly
constructed of galvanised metal sheet of not less than 1.5mm thick. The blades shall be mounted in a
separate channel frame and shall be fitted with 12mm steel spindle at each end, carried by sealed
bearing. Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication purposes. Each blade shall be linked
by a rigid linkage for operation and control and shall ensure complete closing of all blades in union.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-4
64.6 TURNING VANES
All 90 degree elbow ducts shall be fitted with approved turning vanes. The turning vanes and runners
shall be fabricated of the same sheet metal thickness as those used for the ducts. All turning vanes
shall be spot-welded to the ducts. Rivetting or other methods which require making of holes through
the sheet metal ducts shall not be allowed.
64.7 DUCTWORK TEST HOLES
Test holes shall be provided in the ductwork on the discharge side of each fan, at each floor branch
take-off and each major branch duct handling more than ten percent of the volume of air handled by
the fan. This is to enable pivot tube or velometer readings to be taken.
Screwed and plugged 25mm I.S.O. Metric Thread half-sockets shall be welded to a 50mm x 6mm
double plated fixed to side of the ducts.
This arrangement shall not protect into the air stream and internally insulated ductwork and shall allow
passage for probes.
64.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS
All flexible connections shall be formed from non-combustible, best quality, approved silicone coated
glass fabric suitable for extreme temperature of -50°C to 250°C type and special care shall be taken to
ensure an air tight seal.
Flexible connections shall be provided on inlet and outlet of duct connections of all fans.
The flexible connections shall have 100mm to 150mm length free of stress and arranged so as to permit
renewal of the fabric without disturbing the ductwork.
Flexible connections shall be of high temperature rated fire retardant type with a minimum thickness of
2mm. Manufacturer's test certificate on the high temperature rating shall be provided.
All ductwork shall be adequately supported adjacent to all flexible connections. Each flexible connector
shall be fastened tautly to matching flanges by adjustable clips/clamp bands.
64.9 DUCT SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
The supports shall be spaced at not more than 2500mm centres. The hangers and supports shall be
fixed to the building structure with "HILTI" HKD flush anchors or other approved fasteners.
Power tool fixing shall only be allowed with the specific approval in writing from the SO Rep. Should the
Contractor fail to comply with this requirement and damage results, all making good shall be at his cost
and expense.
Vertical ducts shall be rigidly supported with structural angles or channels fixed securely to the duct and
building structure in an approved manner.
Horizontal ducts shall be supported with angle iron trapezes, hung with round mild steel rods of not less
than 12mm diameter. The rods shall be threaded at both ends and lock nuts shall be provided to secure
the hangers firmly. The angle iron trapezes shall be of not less than 32mm x 32mm x 3mm for ducts of
up to 700mm width and 38mm x 38mm x 5mm for ducts for 1100mm width upwards. Where non-
insulated ducts sit directly on top of the angle iron trapezes, rubber gaskets of 3mm minimum thickness
shall be provided to prevent direct contact of the metal surfaces.
Where ducts run at floor level, they shall be supported on 50mm x 50mm x 5mm angle iron saddles
securely bolted to the floor. The ducts shall be held in the saddle by 38mm x 3mm steel strips bolted
to the angle supports.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-5
64.10 ACCESS PANELS
The opening shall be large enough to permit cleaning. There shall be one access panel at each change
in direction of the duct or as indicated in the Drawings.
The opening shall be at the sides of the duct. In horizontal sections the lower edge of the opening shall
be not less than 400mm from the bottom of the duct.
Access panels shall be constructed of the same material and thickness as the duct and shall not permit
the passage of grease under any conditions. Access panels shall be hinged with latches for locking.
The opening shall be at least 450mm x 450mm. When the duct is of smaller dimensions than the
opening, the panel shall be the biggest possible.
The contact planes between duct and frame of panel shall be suitably sealed with compressible and
non-combustible gasket of minimum 3mm thick to give an air-tight joint.
64.11 CLEANING AND BLOWING OUT OF DUCTWORK
All ducts shall be internally cleaned before starting of fans.
During installation, care shall be taken to prevent ingress of foreign material.
As soon as practicable, the fans shall start to blow out dust which may collect inside the ductwork during
installation.
64.12 DRAIN TAPS
Drain taps shall be provided as indicated in the Drawings and the ducts shall be pitched towards these
drain taps.
The position of drain taps shall be such that it causes minimum inconvenience to people when a duct
cleaning job is in progress.
The drain taps shall be air-tight when the exhaust system is in normal operation.
64.13 BIFURCATED AXIAL-FLOW FAN
Refer to subclause 65.3.4 "Bifurcated Type".
64.14 SILENCER
The Contractor shall provide where indicated in the Drawings cylindrical silencer to attenuate the noise
emanated from the fan.
The casing shall be cylindrical galvanised steel constructed with non-inflammable glass fibre infill with
a non-corroding facing material welded securely in place behind perforated galvanised steel. End rings
incorporating tapped inserts shall be provided for mounting.
The sound absorbent material shall be protected against wet conditions with an impervious covering
faced with perforated stainless steel. This covering shall ensure that the silencer can be steam cleaned.
The silencer shall operate to temperature of at least 80°C. The internal diameter of the silencer shall
match that of the fan. Where indicated in the Drawings a centrally mounted absorbent pod in the airway
shall be incorporated for added attenuation. The Contractor shall submit the attenuation data which is
obtained by the test specified in BS 848 Part 2:1980.
Galvanised steel mounting feet and matching flanges corresponding to those supplied for the fan shall
be provided where necessary.
Silencer shall be of the same make as the axial flow fans.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-6
64.15 SPRING HANGERS
Spring hangers shall contain a steel spring and 7mm deflection neoprene element in series. The
neoprene element shall be moulded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box.
Spring diameters and hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree cone before contacting the hole and
short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the
rated deflection.
64.16 FAN CONTROL PANEL
The fan control panel shall be located as indicated in the Drawings and be mounted at an appropriate
height.
64.16.1 Construction
The panels shall be fabricated of minimum 2mm steel pressed and rolled to shape having all joints
neatly welded and finished flush. Doors shall be screw lock hinges type with concealed hinges and
secured by approved lock. Doors shall be fitted all around with compression gaskets. The cabinets
shall have adequate ventilation louvre which is vermin proof.
64.16.2 Control Apparatus
The fan control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls and indicating devices for
manual start of all Plant and equipment :
(a) Circuit breakers for all motors
(b) Starters for all motors
(c) Push button stations for manual starting in local mode
(d) All necessary timers, controls relays and interlocks for starters
(e) Indicating lights with the following colours :
(i) Indicating lights for the 3 phase incoming supply shall be RED, YELLOW, BLUE colour
respectively;
(ii) Indicating lights for all motors when they are running shall be GREEN colour, stop shall
be RED and trip shall be AMBER/YELLOW.
(f) All internal interconnecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the control
panel.
(g) Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches instruments,
indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel system.
64.16.3 Layout Of Motor Control Centres
The Contractor shall submit drawings (IN TRIPLICATE) which displays the layout of the instrument,
push buttons indicating lights on the panel, together with the schematic electrical circuit drawings to the
SO Rep for approval.
64.16.4 Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC fuses of Cartridge type.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-7
64.16.5 Motor Starters
The Contractor shall install the type of starter which is specified in the Drawings. Unless otherwise
approved by the SO Rep, all motors which have rating of 2.2kW or more shall be installed with
reduced voltage starters. However, the Contractor shall verify the suitable starter type based on the
mechanical and electrical characteristics of the load and motor with the consent of the SO Rep should
there be any deviation from the Specifications.
64.16.5.1 Direct-On-Line Starters
Direct-on-line starter shall be equipped with adjustable and ambient compensated (-5°C to 50°C)
triple pole thermal overload protections with manual reset, local start/stop push buttons, contactors,
etc.
64.16.5.2 Star-Delta Starter
Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with star and delta contactors mechanically and
electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one adjustable and ambient compensated
(-5°C to 50°C) triple pole thermal overload relay and one adjustable and calibrated solid state timer
with at least 0 to 30 seconds period to control the star-delta operation. The resistor banks shall be
wire welded porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating. Resistance values shall be chosen to suit the
mechanical and electrical characteristic of the driven loads. It shall allow 3 consecutive starts followed
by 15 minutes rest.
64.16.6 Contactors
Contactors used in the starters shall be of the heavy duty type with silver or silver alloy contacts. The
contacts shall be non-sticky when de-energised and be free from undue noisy operation.
Contactors shall comply with BS 5424 and IEC 158-1, of duty AC3 double break and chatter free
type. Contactors shall be manufactured and tested to on-load factor 60% with mechanical life of over
ten million operations at 3600 operations per hour.
Contactors shall satisfactorily close at a minimum of 80% nominal voltage and thereafter remain
closed satisfactorily with a minimum of 65% nominal voltage.
64.16.7 Protective Relays
All relays shall be of approved manufacture and type tested at factory and generally conform to
BS 145/66 "Electrical Protective Relays".
64.16.8 Thermal Overload Relays
Thermal overload relay for three phase motors shall be three pole manual reset type with inherent
temperature compensation (-5°C to 50°C) and be easily adjustable within the range of ±10% of
nominal setting.
Thermal overload relay for single phase motor shall consist of a bi-metallic trip mechanism.
64.16.9 Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary relays shall be suitable for AC operation and shall have silver contacts with an inherent self-
cleaning action. It shall close satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65%
nominal voltage. They shall be of the plug-in type. Fixed relays are acceptable if they are a design
feature approved by the SO Rep. They shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive load for its
contacts. There shall be at least one spare contact for each auxiliary relay.
64.16.10 Time Delay Relays
Time delay relays shall be of the electronic plug-in type. It shall have selectable time ranges of 0 to
10 seconds; 0 to 60 seconds and whatever other ranges that are required for the satisfactory
operation of the control system. The contacts shall have a minimum rating of 5 Amps inductive and
be energized satisfactorily at 80% nominal voltage and hold satisfactorily at 65% nominal voltage.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-8
64.16.11 Transformer
Transformer necessary for stepping down the voltage to 24V for controls and indicating lights, shall
be provided by the Contractor. It shall be protected by a suitable current breaker. The Plant and
equipment shall be of sufficient capacity and shall be suitable for continuous operation.
64.16.12 Earthing Of Switchboard
The switchboard metal casing shall be effectively bonded to the earth bar. Contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned before fitting the earth connection. Cable terminations shall be made with tinned
copper or approved rustless cable lugs.
64.16.13 Push Buttons
Push buttons shall be of the oil tight pattern heavy duty unless otherwise specified and rated at a
minimum of 5 Amps inductive. Push buttons shall consist of an actuating button assembly coupled
to an interchangeable contact assembly of sufficient poles to suit the application.
Colour codes shall be :
"Start" or "On" : Green

"Stop" or "Off" : Red
"Reset" : Black
Push button bezels shall preferably be black.
64.16.14 Indicator Lamps
Indicator lamps shall be 24V rating. Each lamp shall be clearly labelled to indicate the designation of
service, circuit and locations.
Indicating lamps shall be of the domed glass or plastic lens type with lamps rated at 6 watts. The
indication shall be clearly visible from either the sides or front.
Indicating lamps shall preferably have black bezels.
The bodies of indicator lamps shall be ventilated to ensure efficient heat dissipation. Connection to
lamps shall be by screws or clamp terminals; soldered terminations are unacceptable.
64.16.15 Internal Wiring
The control panel shall be completely internally wired, including all wirings between individual units
and between units and terminal strips located in a convenient and easily accessible positions.
All terminals on the strips shall be numbered and these numbers shall correspond with the numbers
on the wiring and field connections diagrams permanently secured on the inside of the enclosure
door.
Wiring shall be multi-strand of adequate section but in no case less than 1.0 sq. mm copper
conductors, PVC insulated, colour coded and numbered for identification. Identification shall be by
means of moulded ferrules or sleeves at both ends of the cables. The ferrules or sleeves shall be of
insulating materials with white glossy finish and black lettering. The ferrules or sleeves shall be
unaffected by oil or dampness. The numbering scheme shall be approved by the SO Rep. No PVC
tapes shall be used for colour coding of cables.
Each wire shall be separately terminated with suitable tinned (but not soldered) crimped lugs of
approved type. Conductor terminations need not be provided where insertion or tunnel type terminals
are employed. Unless otherwise approved by the SO Rep, only one wire shall be connected to each
terminal of insertion or tunnel type block. Terminals shall be identified using an approved marking
and numbering system.
All control circuit wirings shall be run separately from power circuit wiring and adequately protected
by MCB units or fuses.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-9
64.16.16 Labelling
Each control panels shall be fitted with a main label mounted in a prominent position.
Labels shall be easily replaceable and shall be secured with brass screws or rust proofed steel screws
or in other approved manners.
Unless otherwise specified, all labels shall be white lettering engraved on black traffolyte. The size
of lettering and the wording of the labels shall be approved by the SO Rep. Schedules shall be
submitted to the SO Rep prior to manufacture.
Labels shall designate circuit number and Plant and equipment function.
Terminal strips shall be labelled to identify the circuit number, phase connection, terminal number
and function, eg. control, indication, protection, etc.
Control relays, timers, fuses and other items of switchgear located inside and on the door of panels
shall be clearly labelled to identify circuit number, function and rating.
64.17 PAINTING (GENERAL)
Unless otherwise specified or indicated in the Drawings, all exposed metal surfaces of ductwork,
Plant and equipment, grilles, etc shall be cleaned, prime coated and painted regardless of their
locations.
All painting shall be carried out in a neat, thorough and workmanlike manner by experienced
tradesmen.
64.17.1 Preparation Of Surface
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose rust, scale and dirt and shall be
free from grease and oil stains, etc. An approved solvent shall be used to remove grease, oil stains,
etc if found necessary. The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that original galvanised or rust-
proof coat shall not be damaged during surface cleaning. All steel structure after fabrication, shall be
thoroughly wire brushed at the welds and other exposed surfaces shall be immediately treated with
a coat of primer.
64.17.2 Application Of Paint
The first coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning and the interval between subsequent
coats shall not be less than the paint manufacturer's recommendation.
Before despatch from the manufacturer's factory, the whole of the metal work of the fan control panels
shall receive painting and finishing with materials of approved make, composition and colour. All
coats shall be stove baked to paint manufacturer's requirements.
The application for various types of steel surfaces shall be as specified in the table below :
No. of Coats of
Type of Surface to be painted Lead And Gloss

Etching
Chromate Free Enamel
Primer
Primer Paint
Exposed Galvanised Sheet Metal Ductwork 1 1 2
Exposed Non-Galvanised Steel Surfaces of
- 2 2
Ductwork Construction
Plant and Equipment Surfaces Factory Spray
- 2 2
Painted but with Damaged Paintwork
Fan Support - 2 2
64.17.3 Colour Scheme
All Plant and equipment, ductwork, accessories and components shall be painted to colour approved
by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-10
64.18 TESTING AND BALANCE
64.18.1 General
The Contractor shall perform all tests and balancing necessary to ensure that the system installed
conform to the Specifications and that such tests are adequate to demonstrate that Plant and equipment
will comply with the requirements of the Specifications.
All necessary testing and measuring Plant and equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
All testing and balancing shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
64.18.2 Air Quantity Balancing
All exhaust and supply air outlets shall be correctly adjusted to give the final design air volumes unless
otherwise directed.
All fixed dampers shall be set and the final position shown with a painted arrow, and saw cut.
64.18.3 Test Log Sheets
The Contractor shall submit full detailed test log sheets for inspection and approval by the SO Rep.
The test log sheet shall present a clear and precise record of all tests carried out during the
commissioning of the Works.
It shall include, but not be limited to where applicable, the following data :
Fan type, speed, static pressure reading, running current, sound levels and fan curve shall be included
to indicate the running condition.
All other items of Plant and equipment shall be recorded and tested so that a true indication is given for
the Plant and equipment performance.
A performance test shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the SO Rep, to show that
the system installed fulfills all requirements of the Specifications.
64.19 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
64.19.1 Attendance To Complaints
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to any complaint calls promptly at no
cost and expense to the Employer.
After the attendance of complaint calls and completion of repair Works, two copies of the fault reports
or service chit duly signed by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the SO Rep for information and
record.
64.19.2 Replacement Of Defective Parts
The Contractor shall replace all defective or damaged parts of the Plant and equipment and system
with NEW ones during the Defects Liability Period at no additional cost and expense to the Employer.
This subclause shall override any standard warranty condition of the Contractor or his supplier of Plant
and equipment. Any additional cost and expense incurred in complying with this requirement shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-11
64.19.3 Stock Of Spares
The Contractor shall keep adequate stock of spare parts for the installation and system to ensure that
the system down-time in the event of breakdown will be minimized.
64.19.4 Contractor's Obligation
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the installation or the Employer's property
during servicings or attendance to complaints through the act of negligence of his workmen except
where it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs. All damages shall be made good at Contractor's own
expense.
64.19.5 Final Inspection
One month prior to the expiry of Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall arrange with the SO Rep
for a joint inspection on the Plant and equipment and system to note all the outstanding Defect. These
Defect shall be rectified within one month after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
64.20 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE (MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM)
and emergency repair to the Ventilation System as specified hereunder for a period of one year
commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion for the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works
as certified by the Superintending Officer (hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the
purposes of this clause including all sub-clauses under it).
64.20.1 General
The works covered by this Clause and sub-clauses are for the supply of all Plant, Construction
Equipment, materials, appliances, labour and necessary incidentals for the service and maintenance of
the mechanical ventilation system during the Maintenance Period.
64.20.2 Workmanship And Supervision
The Contractor shall have a foreman in charge of the service, maintenance and repair work to be carried
out under this Clause including all sub-clauses under it. This foreman shall be thoroughly competent
in supervising the service, maintenance and repair and shall be in the direct employment of the
Contractor.
All machinery, Plant and equipment comprising the complete systems and ancillary equipment provided
under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses and subclauses under it shall be serviced
and maintained strictly in accordance with the Servicing and Maintenance Schedule as specified
hereunder.
The Contractor shall advise the SO Rep on any Defect in any part of the complete Plant and Ancillary
Equipment observed during the routine inspection and service, and shall repair such Defect if required
to do so by the SO Rep.
The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services during normal working hours and also
during overtime hours.
A log book shall be kept at each separate building block included in the Works, in which details of all
alarms (genuine, practice test or false), faults, service tests and routine attention given shall be carefully
recorded. The exact location within each building block where the log book is to be kept shall be subject
to the approval of the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-12
64.20.4 Servicing And Maintenance Schedule
64.20.4.1 Quarterly Tests
For quarterly tests, inspection and service, the Contractor shall inspect and service the complete
Plant and ancillary equipment provided under Section 64 "Ventilation System" including all clauses
and subclauses under it once every three months after the certified Substantial Completion of the
Works except where otherwise directed by the SO Rep.
At each such quarterly inspection and service of the complete Plant and Ancillary Equipment, the
minimum items of work detailed below shall be performed by the Contractor. Any special
maintenance requirements on Plant and equipment not covered by the following list but
recommended by the manufacturers or directed by the SO Rep shall also be included :
(a) Inspect all electric motors, and
(i) Check all motor bearings, and lubricate with grease as necessary.
(ii) Check carbon brushes and clip rings, if any, of all motors and clean as necessary,
Renew carbon brushes as necessary.
(iii) Check safety devices fitted to all motors, and clean, adjust and lubricate as
necessary.
(iv) Check and record motor speed running current and operating voltage.
(v) Check motor load characteristics to ensure normal operation.
(b) Inspect and check the routine operation of all electrical starters, electrical control gears and
ancillary electrical apparatus, and
(i) Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary.
(ii) Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary.
(iii) Renew electric fuses as necessary.
(iv) Clean and adjust overload elements and oil dashpot controls.
(c) Inspect and check the routine operation of all automatic controls, gears and relays and :
(i) Clean, adjust and lubricate all bearings, pivots and other moving parts as necessary.
(ii) Clean or renew electric contactors as necessary.
(iii) Renew electric fuses as necessary.
(d) Check and adjust all limit switches, time switches, sequence controllers.
(e) Inspect and clean damper linkages and adjust when necessary.
(f) Inspect keyways, keys and belts on all pulley drives and check alignment.
(g) Ensure that faulty parts are replaced and the replacement has been carried out satisfactorily.
Note in the log book any circuits that are subject to repair, alteration or extension.
(h) Check that all switches are returned to their normal operating position.
(i) Inspect and clean fan housing and fan motor. The fan shall be examined to ensure that there
is no build-up of dirt or other matter that would cause overheating of the motor or obstruct the
impeller track.
(j) Inspect ductwork system. Investigate and rectify any leakage and abnormal vibrations.
Tighten any loose hangers, supports and brackets.
(k) Check vibration isolators for correct action and setting.
(l) Check for correct volume flow rate through any outlets/inlets.
(m) Check for presence of any excessive abnormal noise and vibration. Investigate and report on
causes and initiate remedial measures.
(n) Inspect and check correct setting and function of volume control dampers, fire dampers, splitter
dampers, etc.
(o) Clean all grease filters and replace if necessary. The cost of the new grease filters shall be
borne by the owner.
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 64-13
64.20.4 Servicing And Maintenance Schedule (Cont'd)
64.20.4.1 Quarterly Tests (Cont'd)
(p) Clean all oil traps after removing all the trapped oil.
(q) Clean all ducts, exhaust hoods, silencers and exhaust air fans.
(r) Submit service and maintenance report to the Employer. The report shall be written in a format
approved by the Owner and shall include but not limited to the following information.
(i) Performance data of all Plant and equipment such as fans, etc. The scope and extent
of performance data shall be approved by the owner but generally shall include physical
measurements such as air pressures, flow rate, speed, running current and voltage etc.
(ii) All gauge and meter readings.
(iii) Any Defect observed, their causes and remedial action taken.
(iv) Any adjustments, regulations and repairs carried out.
(v) All work carried out in accordance with the Schedule.
64.20.4.2 Annual Service And Maintenance
For annual servicing and maintenance, in addition to carrying out the regular monthly/quarterly
inspection, and service as specified in the foregoing requirements, the Contractor shall also perform
the annual servicing and maintenance as specified hereunder:
(a) All the monthly/quarterly inspection and testing procedures specified above.
(b) Tests shall be carried out to ensure that the insulation resistance to earth and between
conductors of cables and wires is satisfactory and that the resistance of associate earth-
continuity circuits is not excessive.
(c) Meggar test the motor winding to check the insulation resistance between phase to phase and
phase to earth.
64.20.5 Consumable Materials
The Contractor shall provide the following consumable materials as and when required :
(a) All oils and grease required for lubrication of motor bearings, pivots and other moving parts.
(c) All electric contact points required to replace those points in switch gear, motor starter gears,
(e) All cotton washer, soap detergent and other cleaning materials required for cleaning purposes.
The costs of these consumable materials shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.
Section 65/.....
BLDG17/S64.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-1
SECTION 65
FANS FOR GENERAL VENTILATION
65.1 GENERAL
Values of the resistance to air flow of items of Plant and equipment, ductwork and/or the total distribution
system indicated in the contract documents are approximate. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to verify these values based on the Plant and equipment offered and provide fans capable
of delivering the required air volume when operating against the actual total system resistance. Any
required modification to the system (fan, motor, switch gear, cables etc) necessary to meet the required
duties and space conditions shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense, except where modification is
brought about by written instruction by the SO Rep. The Contractor shall submit fan static pressure
calculation for approval.
All fans shall be type tested to the latest British or International Standard. Fan manufacturer shall furnish
published curves showing performance that will be achieved when tested to ISO 5801:Part 1, BS
848:Part 1 and equivalent to AMCA standard 210, and sound power level data that will be achieved
when tested to BS 848:Part 2 and equivalent to AMCA standard 300-858 Part1.
Fans shall be selected at maximum efficiency from the available range of fans. Motor shall be at least
20% higher than the fan brake power absorbed at design conditions.
The high temperature fans must have successfully completed an extensive program of high temperature
tests in accordance with BS7346 Part2 and independently witnessed by authorities such as LPCB(UK),
CITCM(France) or TU(Germany).
Fans installed in the Civil Defence stations shall also comply with the CD requirements specified in the
"Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification. Equipments which are required to
be operated during CD operation shall remain fully functional after being subjected to the shock loads
specified in the "Civil Defence Requirements" section of the Technical Specification.
Motors used for basement carpark exhaust fans, smoke stop lobbies, smoke control and any other high
temperature application from FSSD requirement shall be of Class 'H' insulation with minimum 250°C.
temperature rating for at least 2 hours.
Motors used for ventilation fans of battery charging room town and LPG gas and areas with corrosive
gas shall be explosion proof and corrosion resistance.
65.1.1 Construction
All fans should be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of withstanding the
pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. The fan shall be
provided with protective casing/guard to belts, pulleys, chains, gears couplings, projecting set screws,
keys and other rotary parts for safety of personnel. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of
running continuously at ten per cent in excess of the selected duty speed.
Each fan shall be provided with factory fabricated hot-dip galvanised support baseframe or mounting
feet to facilitate site installation. Name plates shall be of metal sheet and securely attached on each fan
and show manufacturer's name, serial and model number, date of manufacture and country of
manufacture.
Unless otherwise stated, motor requirements are stipulated in clause 65.8 "Motors" including all
65.1.2 Installation
Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast" bearing surfaces for bolt heads
and washers counterfaced. Holding-down bolts for fans and motors shall be provided with means to
prevent the bolts turning when the nuts are tightened. Anti-vibration mountings shall be in accordance
with Clause 64.5 "Dampers And Accessories" including all subclauses under it. Fans heavier than 20
kg shall be provided with eyebolts or other purpose made lifting facilities.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-2
65.1.3 Inlet Guide Vane
Where indicated, fans shall be fitted with variable inlet vanes which shall be matched to the fan
performance to give stable control. Vanes shall be closely interlocked to ensure movement in unison
and operation shall be manual or automatic as indicated. Where manual control is indicated the
operating device shall facilitate positive locking in at least five different positions. Vane blades shall not
vibrate or flutter throughout their movement and the construction of the linkage system shall minimise
friction and lost motion.
65.1.4 Impellers
The shaft and impeller assembly of all centrifugal, axial flow and mixed flow fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. All propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced where the impeller
diameter is 750mm or greater. Where indicated, limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with
BS 4675 Part 1.
65.1.5 Bearings
Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be grease/oil ball
and/or roller type or alternatively oil lubricated sleeve type. All bearing housings shall be precision
located in position and arranged so that bearings may be replaced without the need for realignment.
Bearing housings shall be protected against the ingress of dust and, where fitted with greasing points,
they shall be designed to prevent damage from over-greasing. For grease lubricated systems the
bearings shall be provided with grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing
manufacturer. For oil lubricated systems, the housings shall be provided with an adequate reservoir of
oil and shall include an accessible drain plug. All bearings lubricators shall be located to facilitate
maintenance.
65.1.6 Flexible Connectors
Flexible connectors used for duct connections to fan unit shall have temperature rating same as that of
the associated fan unit and ductwork system. Approved oil and high temperature resistance and flame
retardant flexible connectors shall be employed for kitchen exhaust fan.
65.1.7 Quality Assurance
Furnish fans that are the product of a manufacturer who has proven experience of manufacturing fans
of similar types and duties for a period of at least ten years. The manufacturer must be a company
committed to Quality Assurance and are registered to BS EN ISO 9001.94.
Reference Codes and Standard :
- ISO 5801 Method for Testing air performance.

- BS 848 Part 1 Method for Testing air performance.
- AMCA standard 210 Method for testing air performance.
- BS 848 Part2 Method of noise testing.
- AMCA standard 300 Method of noise testing.
- Fans must comply with EMC regulations.
Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all stress and loads
under starting, operating and, where applicable, reversing conditions, for the installations as shown on
the Specification and/or Drawings. These capabilities shall be verified by submission of design
calculations and basis of design for all components and the complete fan assembly to the SO Rep for
clearance. Whirl tests shall be performed for all axial fans with design air delivery of l0 cubic metre per
second or above for a minimum of 15 minutes duration at 125% of maximum rated fan speed.
Manufacturer shall certify and submit the test record to the SO Rep.
Type tests shall be carried out in the manufacturer's factory for each fan type and size. Tests shall
verify fan performance such as RPM, volume flow rate, total air pressure, noise level, motor current and
shall be conducted at the design conditions stated on the Schedules except that air temperature
entering fan shall be corrected to 20°C or the specified operating temperature. Manufacturer shall
certified and submit the test record.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-3
65.1.8 Submittals
Submit certified technical data and performance ratings including but not limited to the following :
(a) Complete catalogue and material specification.
(b) Certified performance curves for each fan Shall be plotted over the entire range from shut-off to
free delivery as static pressure, in Pa. total efficiency in percentages, and operating kW against
air flow in m3/h. Curves shall rise continuously with decreasing air flow between free delivery
and 15 percent above maximum specified pressure in accordance with fan schedules.
(c) Plotted curves or tables of the Octave band sound power level at static pressure corresponding
to specified capacity with decibels (dB re 10-12 watt) as ordinate versus octave-band center
frequency from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz as abscissa.
(d) Certificates confirming that the fans are rated and tested in accordance with relevant standards
from BSI, AMCA or approved internationally recognised institution.
(e) Certificates confirming that all smoke extraction fans, carpark exhaust air fans, smoke free lobby
exhaust fans, and fume extraction fans meet the high temperature requirement. Such as
certificates from LPCB(prEN12101-3 Part 3:1997 - Testing specification for powered smoke and
heat exhaust ventilation) must be submitted.
(f) Factory type test reports for all fans. Reports shall be less than 5 years.
(g) Submit manufacturer's quality assurance/quality control program for the entire manufacturing
process, site installation, and testing/commissioning
(h) Manufacturing shop drawings including wiring diagram and support details.
(i) Submit 1-50 scale shop drawing of fan installation within fan room complete with ductwork,
vibration isolators, electrical work etc indicating clearance for maintenance purpose.
(j) Comprehensive method statement for installation of the fan units.
(k) Submit copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals.
(l) Submit Radiography inspection record of the fan blades.
65.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
65.2.1 Fan Type
Centrifugal fans for high-velocity high-pressure systems shall be backward bladed type.
65.2.2 Efficiency
Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5kW at the fan shaft shall be of the
backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency not less than 75%.
65.2.3 Fan Casings
Fan casings shall be constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan installation. Fans
other than those in air handling units shall be provided with flanged outlet connections and spigoted
inlet connections unless otherwise indicated, except that for negative pressures greater than 500 Pa,
inlet connections shall be flanged. A plugged drain point shall be fitted at the lowest point in the fan
casings. Permanent indication shall be provided to show the correct direction of rotation of the fan
impeller. Fan casings shall be provided with removable access panels which shall incorporate purpose
made air seals. The sizes of access panels shall be such as to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of
the impeller.
65.2.4 Material
Impellers shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy of riveted, welded or other approved construction,
with spiders or hubs of robust design.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-4
65.3 AXIAL FLOW FANS
Axial flow aerofoil fan shall be either single or multi-stage to suit the performance duty specified. Two
stage fans shall have contra-rotating impellers and each impeller shall be driven by separate motor.
The axial fan shall be pad mounted type.
Fan shall be supplied complete with mounting feet and vibration isolator. The fans offered are to meet
ISO 2372 vibration standard for class 2 quality grade C machines. The impellers shall be balanced to
G6.3 or better as defined in ISO 1940/1 (6.3mm/s peak to peak or 4.5 mm/s rms).
65.3.1 Fan Casings
Axial flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mould steel or aluminium alloy, stiffened and braced
where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary
for bolting to a base or to supports. Inlet and outlet ducts shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal.
For in-duct mounting fans the length of the fan casing shall be greater than the combined length of the
impeller(s) and motor(s) and electrical connections to the motors shall be through an external terminal
box secured to the casing.
The fan casing and mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from mild steel to BS 1449 Part 1
Grade HR14 with integral rolled flanges. They should have minimum thickness of 2.5mm for fan
diameters up to 560mm, 3mm to 5mm thickness for fan diameter 630mm and above.
65.3.2 Impellers
Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and
the hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to the shaft. Blades shall be aerofoil
section or laminar and capable of pitch adjustment. The pitch angle selected shall be less than 24
degrees.
Each cast aluminium impeller is X-rayed using Real Time Radiography inspection prior to assembly.
The impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and key way. Axial location shall be provided
by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft together with a retaining washer and screw fitted into a tapped
hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in position.
65.3.3 Drive
Where axial flow fans are driven by motors external to the casings of the fans the requirements for
drives and guards shall be met. Unless otherwise indicated, a guard is not required for any part of a
drive which is inside the fan casing. An access panel with purpose made air seal shall be provided in
the fan casing; the access panel shall be sized to facilitate maintenance.
Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor complying
with BS 4999 Part 20 for dust and weatherproof conditions.
65.3.4 Bifurcated Type
The fan shall give the specified air flow at the design static pressure and tested to BS 848 Part 1.
The Contractor shall submit performance curves for the fans. The performance curves shall show the
duty point and include data about static pressure, efficiency, power consumption and noise versus air
volume at different pitch angle. The noise data shall be based on tests carried out in accordance with
BS 848:Part 2.
The fan shall be of the bifurcated axial flow design, capable of withstanding air temperature of at least
320°C continuously. The aerofoil shaped impellers shall be directly coupled to a purpose design motor,
the latter being enclosed in a protection tunnel to isolate it from the oil and particle laden air. The tunnel
shall be kept ventilated by ambient air drawn in by an auxiliary fan mounted on a shaft extension at the
tail end of the motor. The external terminal box and fan casing shall be made of hot dipped galvanised
steel.
The motor shall be directly coupled to the hub and placed at the discharge side of the fan. The blades
shall be securely mounted onto the hub and the pitch angle shall be adjustable at the Site.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-5
65.3.4 Bifurcated Type (Cont’d)
The impellers shall be die-cast in aluminium alloy and give a non-overloading characteristics and have
an adjustable pitch. All the casings are manufactured in hot-dipped galvanised.
The motor shall be totally enclosed, squirrel cage induction design and rated for continuous operation
in ambient temperature of 40°C. The motor shall be fitted with ball bearings of generous size to permit
mounting of the fan in any position through 360 degrees. Insulation shall be to Class F specification of
BS 2757. Performance and rating shall conform to BS 5000 and IEC 34-1, with protection to IEC 34-5
Group IP 54. Reduced voltage starter shall be provided for motors which has rated kW of 2.2kW or
more. The motor shall be pad mounted to the fan casing. Foot-mounted fan motor shall not be
acceptable.
The fan shall be able to withstand severe moisture-laden conditions. The fan shall be suitable for
cleaning by steam jet.
High temperature rated flexible connectors shall be provided both at the inlet and outlet of the fan. The
Contractor shall observe closely all the manufacturer's instructions for the installation of the fan and
frequency/type of lubricant to be used.
65.4 PROPELLER FANS
65.4.1 Impeller
Propeller fans shall be ring mounted or diaphragm mounted as indicated. Impellers shall be of steel or
aluminium and the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and hub shall be formed in one
piece. The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise level and minimum
power consumption and made of Aluminised Clad Steel. The fan shall be completed with anti-vibration
mounting plate and motor side guard.
The motor should be airstream rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures up to 50°C and
insulation material to Class F specification.
Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and crossings welded and hot-dip
galvanised after manufacture shall be fitted to impeller side or motor side or both where appropriate.
Where a fan is directly mounted to an external wall. a louvre shutter shall be furnished.
65.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND MIXED FLOW FANS
Mixed flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel, or aluminium alloy stiffened and braced
where necessary to obviate drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided where necessary
for bolting to a base or supports. Inlet and outlet shall terminate in flanges to facilitate removal. Stator
vanes shall be of mild steel or aluminium alloy. The unit shall be designed to facilitate access to the
impeller. Drives and guards shall be provided in accordance with Section 64 "Ventilation System"
including all clauses and subclauses under it where motors are mounted external to casings. An access
panel with a purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing. The access panel shall be sized
to facilitate maintenance.
In-Line duct fans shall be of direct driven type and have non-overloading characteristics.
Motors shall be totally enclosed with squirrel cage induction type with Class F insulation and shall be
rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 50°C and in humid air conditions up to 100%
relative humidity.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-6
65.6 ROOF EXTRACT UNIT
65.6.1 Weather Cap And Base
The weather cap and base shall be moulded ultra violet stabilised glass reinforced polyester resin,
rendered fire retardant to BS 476:Part 7. Colourant shall conform to BS 4800-08B-21. The unit shall
be load tested to ensure a generous structural factor of safety enabling the unit to withstand all normally
encountered weather conditions. The caps shall be secured to the mounting frame by stainless steel
screws. It shall be arranged in side discharge.
65.6.2 Anti-Backdraught Shutters
The unit shall be equipped with anti-backdraught shutters all around the discharge area. Shutters shall
be aluminium opened by air movement and closed by gravity. Synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided
to ensure quiet operation.
65.6.3 Impeller
65.6.3.1 Impeller Type
The impeller shall be based on propeller type design. The fan blades shall be made of pressed sheet
steel not more than four numbers. The blades and the hub shall be one continuous steel structure
without any screw, rivet and other mechanical bonding. The whole impeller shall be finished with stoved
epoxy powder paint. The impeller shall be mounted on to the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All
screws shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.
65.6.3.2 Centrifugal Type
The impeller shall be based on backward curved centrifugal design. The impeller shall be mounted
onto the motor shaft in a direct drive manner. All screws shall have anti-loosen device on moving parts.
65.6.3.3 Mountings
Fan support arms shall be made of mild steel finished with stoved epoxy powder paint and resiliently
mounted to the base.
65.6.3.4 Mounting Position
The unit shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on a pitch roof up to an
angle of 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.
65.6.4 Motor
65.6.4.1 Totally Enclosed Motor
The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type for direct on line starting. The motor shall be pad
mounted with an isolator fixed in the cowl conforming to IP54 protection. The motor shall have minimum
Class F insulation. The motor shall be single phase capacitor start and run.
Motors shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 50°C and in humid air
conditions up to 100% relative humidity.
65.6.4.2 Flameproof Motor
Flameproof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only
in abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with
BS 4683. The motor shall be Class F Insulation with tapped hole for cable entry.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-7
65.7 WALL/WINDOW FANS
65.7.1 Construction
The impellers, shutters, fans ducts and outer grilles shall be moulded plastic. The outer grilles shall be
projected more than 35mm from external surface. It shall have a solenoid operated backdraught shutter
controlled by the ON/OFF switch.
65.7.2 Motor
65.7.2.1 Totally Enclosed Motor
The motor shall be squirrel cage induction type for direct on line starting. It shall be capacitor start and
run for fan diameter 230mm or above.
65.7.2.2 Flame Proof Motor
Flame proof motor shall be certified to zone 2 hazard where flammable gas is likely to be present only
in abnormal conditions. All petrol storage shall be installed with flameproof motor complying with Ex.d
requirement, BS 4683. It shall have tapped hole for cable entry.
65.8 MOTORS
65.8.1 General
All motors larger than 0.75kW (1 hp) output shall be three phases and designed for operation on
415 volts/3 phases/50 Hz AC supply.
All motors shall comply with the current regulations of the Electricity Department PUB and CP 5. The
motor power factor shall be more than 0.85.
The following types of motor shall be used for different range of power input :
Power Input Type of Motor
Up to 30 kW Squirrel cage induction type design for:

(i) Direct-on-line starting
(ii) Reduce voltage starting
Above 30 kW Wound rotor slip-ring induction type

designed for Rotor Resistance starting
Motors shall be continuously rated to BS 5000 Pt 99 and IEC 34-1 and windings of motors shall have
Class F insulation conforming to BS 2757 and IEC Publication No. 85 and shall be specially suitable for
the high humidity experienced in Singapore. Hydroscopic materials shall not be used either as
insulating material or as winding supports. Varnishes shall be inorganic and suitable for tropical service.
Electric motors shall be adequately rated to drive the fans under all normal conditions without
overloading. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. Terminal boxes shall be totally enclosed of
water-tight design and fitted with cable glands.
65.8.2 Motor Enclosure
Except for motors employed in driving fans, all motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with
IP 54 protection according to IEC 34-5.
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 65-8
65.8.3 Motor Bearings
Motors up to 5kW shall have ball bearings. Motors of 5kW and above shall have roller bearings at the
driving end and deep groove ball bearings at the non-driving end.
Thrust bearings shall be incorporated where end thrusts are encountered. Bearings shall be of medium
duty rating provided with a readily accessible grease nipple and a visible grease relief valve to show
when grease charge has been changed and allow greasing without overheating while motor is operating
and to prevent over-greasing.
65.8.4 Motor Starters
Motor starter shall be provided on each phase with combined thermal overload devices with adjustable
time lags. Under-voltage protection shall not be incorporated in the motor starter.
All motor starters shall comply with the current regulations of Electricity Department, PUB.
Motor starters shall comprise the followings :
(a) Contactors rated in accordance with BS 775 as under :
(i) Class II mechanical duty

(ii) Class UR current rating
(iii) Category A4 making and breaking
(b) Thermal type adjustable overload relays with adjustable time lags, one in each phase line.
Starters shall be of the electro-magnetically operated type complying with BS 587 and BS 4941 and be
rated for frequent intermittent duty.
Star-Delta or auto transformer starter shall be provided for motor with a rating of 2.2kW or more.
Star-Delta starters shall be close transition type with contactor, star and delta contactors mechanically
and electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation, one triple pole overload relay and one
adjustable and calibrated solid state timer with at least 0-30 seconds period to control the star-delta
operation. The resistor banks shall be wire wound porcelain core of sufficient thermal rating.
Resistance values shall be chosen to give high starting torque and low transient current.
Section 66/.....
BLDG17/S65.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-1
SECTION 66
REFUSE HANDLING PLANT INSTALLATION
66.1 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of Works shall include the provision, installation, testing, commissioning of Refuse Handling
Plant (screw type), complete with chute connection, control panels and other necessary mechanical
and electrical parts and accessories (hereinafter referred to as "Refuse Handling Plant") for the
purposes of this Section including all clauses and subclauses under it.
The Contractor shall engage a Specialist from the HDB Approved Refuse Handling Equipment
Suppliers to carry out the Works.
66.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
66.2.1 General
The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications and shall be in compliance with
the requirements of MEWR and other relevant authorities in Singapore. The design concept shall
incorporate the following points:
(a) one man operation, particularly by the driver of the refuse collection truck,
(b) the Refuse Handling Plant shall be able to store minimum refuse as specified and discharge
refuse directly into refuse collection truck. The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed to
operate during the refuse collection time only,
((c) the Refuse Handling Plant shall be incorporated with a screw to automatically discharge refuse
directly into the refuse collection truck,
(d) the connection between the bottom of the centralised refuse chute and the Refuse Handling
Plant shall be vertical and larger than the dimension of the refuse chute opening,
(e) emphasis shall be given to minimise odour, noise and vibration,
(f) sullage water control,
(g) automatic fire protection system,
(h) automatic washing of discharge chute,
(i) automatic/manual control of the operation,
(j) easy and minimal maintenance,
(k) reliability of system.
66.2.2 Capacity
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the Refuse Handling Plant shall have an
effective storage capacity to comply with the requirements of NEA subject to a minimum of 4.2 m3.
For Refuse Handling Plant with an effective storage capacity above 5.0 m3, the supplier and the design
of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be approved by the SO Rep.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-2
66.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (CONT'D)
66.2.3 Discharge Operation
The minimum discharge rate of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be 1 m3 per minute. The discharge
operation shall be synchronised with the sweeping cycle of the compaction blade of the refuse collection
truck such that there is no overspillage of refuse onto the floor of the refuse chamber during the
discharge process. There shall be no remnants of refuse on the discharge chute upon completion of
the discharge process.
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the complete discharge process shall be as
follows:
Effective Storage Capacity (m3) Maximum duration of whole discharge process (Min)
4.2 5
6.0 6
9.0 6
. This is to shorten the time the refuse is exposed to the atmosphere and minimise the problem of foul
odour.
66.2.4 Drainage
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed with an effective and efficient drainage system such that
sullage water and washwater can be discharged to the gully directly. As the refuse chute is flushed
once a week, the Contractor shall consider this in his design of the drainage system. The flushing rate
is between 45 to 60 litres per minute.
66.2.5 Level Indication
A sight glass shall be installed to each Refuse Handling Plant for monitoring whether the refuse in the
Refuse Handling Plant is full.
66.2.6 Odour Control
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed to contain or minimise the emanation of foul odour into
the immediate environment. This is especially important as there are apartments directly above the
refuse chamber.
66.2.7 Noise And Vibration Control
Vibration and noise suppression and/or isolation to the Refuse Handling Plant and building structures
shall be given due consideration such that residents living near the refuse chamber are not
inconvenienced or distressed.
The noise level at a distance of 1m from the open entrance of the refuse room shall not exceed 60 dBA
at any point in time.
The necessary sound and vibration measuring instruments for the Refuse Handling Plant shall be
provided at the time of testing.
66.2.8 Maintenance, Repair And Replacement
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be so designed for good accessibility to all its major parts for
maintenance, repair and replacement purposes.
In case of blockage in the Refuse Handling Plant, the maintenance personnel or workers shall be able
to clear the blockage without having to take apart the Refuse Handling Plant or involving any other
major works that require specialist expertise
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed such that it can be isolated or removed from the refuse
chute for maintenance and repair purposes. All greasing points shall be readily accessible for ease of
maintenance.
Each Refuse Handling Plant shall be identified by code numbers (location & block number), which shall
be approved by the SO Rep, for the ease of fault reporting.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-3
66.2.9 Safety Feature
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be designed and built with an emergency stop facility, anti-jamming
feature and safety feature against possible damages due to accidental collision with the refuse
collection truck. It shall also be built to withstand repeated direct impact from falling refuse from the
specified height of the building without damage to it. A safety shutter shall also be fixed permanently
at the top of each unit of the Refuse Handling Plant so that the Refuse Handling Plant can be isolated
from the refuse chute for maintenance and repair purposes.
66.2.10 Materials And Workmanship
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be manufactured of structural steel to BS 4360 at least Grade 50 or its
equivalent.
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the panels subjected to the direct impact from
the refuse and the bottom panel of Refuse Handling Plant shall be as follows:
No. of storeys of building served Minimum thickness of panels

(mm)
Below 30 12
Above 30 16
Unless otherwise specified, the design requirements of the blades of the screw shaft shall be as follows:
No. of storeys of building served Minimum thickness of blades

(mm)
Below 30 12
Above 30 16
For building above 30 storeys, the refuge handling plant screw shaft shall has a tensile strength of not
less than 6800 kg/cm2.
Other body works of Refuse Handling Plant shall be made of BS 4360 Grade 43 or its equivalent and
the thickness shall not be less than 6mm unless otherwise specified or approved by SO Rep.
All bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners shall be made of stainless steel.
All materials used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be new and of the best quality
of their respective kinds available. They shall be of correct dimensions, sizes and gauges approved by
the SO Rep and free from any Defect or damage upon completion of fabrication, assembly and delivery
of the unit.
All internal welds shall be continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the SO Rep. All welds
shall be smoothly and securely finished. For all welds performed, if in the opinion of the SO Rep that
certain portion of the weld shall be reinforced or redone, the Contractor shall complete the Works as
instructed at his own cost and expense and to the satisfaction of the SO Rep.
No approval or any acceptance by the SO Rep shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under
the Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the Works.
All materials used or to be used in the manufacture of the Refuse Handling Plant and the workmanship
shall be subjected from time to time to such tests as the SO Rep may direct, whether at the place of
manufacture or fabrication or on the Site or at such other place or places as the SO Rep may require.
The cost of any test (including destructive tests) shall be borne by the Contractor and such cost and
expense shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Contract Sum.
66.2.11 Automatic Washing System
An automatic washing system shall be installed to wash the adjustable discharge chute of the Refuse
Handling Plant for a preset time after the completion of the discharge of refuse into the refuse collection
truck.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-4
66.2.12 Automatic Fire Protection System
An automatic fire protection system shall be installed in the refuse chamber and the Refuse Handling
Plant. The system shall be automatically activated if smoke/fire is detected in the refuse chamber and
the Refuse Handling Plant.
The automatic fire protection system shall include heat detector, smoke detector, solenoid valve,
spraying nozzles and alarm system. The automatic fire protection system shall be linked to automatic
refuse chute handling system such that the automatic refuse chute flushing system will be activated in
the event of smoke/fire. Two spraying nozzles shall be installed at the top of the Refuse Handling Plant.
One shall be centrally located in front and the other at the rear of the Refuse Handling Plant. The main
water supply pipe to the nozzles shall be made of 22 mm diameter stainless steel and it shall be painted
in red. An alarm bell shall be installed for the fire protection system.
Two photoelectric smoke detectors shall be installed hanging in front and back of the refuse chamber
room including a waterproof strobe light equipment installed outside the refuse chamber such that the
alarm bell system and strobe light will be activated in the event of smoke/fire in the chamber room. The
control panel system integrates heat and smoke sensors, Fire Protection functions and automatic refuse
chute flushing function using PLC (Programmable Logic Controller).
66.2.13 Stainless Steel Water Pipes
The Contractor shall supply and fix stainless steel water supply pipes from the provision of tee-off in the
refuse chamber for automatic fire protection system and automatic washing system for discharge chute.
The water supply pipe for fire protection system shall be painted in red and shall be installed with double
check valves. The check valves used shall be of the type approved by PUB Water Supply (Network)
Department.
All stainless steel water pipes, fittings and accessories shall be approved by Water Supply (Network)
Department, PUB and to the requirement of BS 4127:Part 2 and its latest amendments.
The internal and external surfaces of the pipes and fittings shall be clean, smooth and free from Defect
that would impair their performance in service. Cutting and fixing shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. All stainless steel pipes shall not be bent.
Unless otherwise specified, light gauge stainless steel pipes shall be used for water supply.
The stainless steel pipe fittings shall be of capillary or compression fittings of copper alloy and shall
comply with BS 864:Part 2 and all PUB latest requirements. Fittings of 15mm size and above shall be
legibly marked with the manufacturer's name of the trade mark.
Pipes shall be well supported by stainless steel supporting clips or hangers.
Maximum Horizontal Maximum Vertical

Nominal Size Support Spacing Support Spacing
(mm) (mm) (mm)
15 600 1200
20 to 28 600 1200
35 to 42 1200 1800
54 and above 1200 1800
66.3 GEARED MOTOR
The Refuse Handling Plant shall be powered by a heavy duty 3-phase AC geared motor of minimum
class F insulation which shall be at least splashproof. The motor shall be capable of performing
intermittent duty without overheating, degradation or degeneration in torque, speed or overall
performance. The geared motor shall be at least 4kW and the service factor shall not be less than one.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-5
The Contractor shall run the electrical wiring from a 3-phase 20A electrical isolator provided in the
centralised refuse chute chamber. All wiring run shall be continuous and new with no splices permitted.
They shall be of the correct sizes and grouped neatly. All wiring installed shall be such that the removal
of an electrical device can be made without the removal or relocation of the wiring bundles and
harnesses adjacent to the device being removed.
All wiring shall be labelled with wiring identification shown on the electrical control and wiring drawings
which shall be endorsed by an appropriate grade of EMA Licensed Electrical Worker for the whole
system. Wire labels shall be the non-metallic sleeve type or hot-stamped into the insulation.
All circuit breakers, disconnectors and switching-type terminal blocks shall be labelled according to the
electrical Drawings. All power wiring shall be PVC insulated to SS50. All wiring shall be carried in metal
conduit or cable trunking. All metal conduit shall be heavy gauge, screwed galvanised steel conduit
complying with IEC 61386. Fixing to walls and other flat surfaces shall be by means of spacer bars
saddled at maximum 1m centres for horizontal runs and 1.5m centres for vertical runs.
Conduit termination to loop-on boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and smooth bore bush. Where
the conduit is or may be in contact with any structural steel work, an efficient and permanent metallic
connection shall be made between the conduit and steel work. All conduits and trunking shall be
electrically and mechanically continuous throughout and shall be efficiently earthed with copper
earthwire and copper tape in conduits/trunking. Copper earthwire or tape shall be of the appropriate
sizes.
Cable trunking and associated fitting shall comply with SS 249. All trunking and fittings shall be
manufactured from electro-galvanised or phosphate-dipped steel and treated with epoxy powder paint
giving a paint thickness of not less than 45 microns. Joining of trunking shall be effected by means of
sound bolts and nuts or screws. Copper earth tape shall be laid in the trunking run. The copper shall
be tinned where it is bolted down.
number of cables to be drawn into the conduits shall not exceed those set out in the relevant table in
the Code of Practice CP5. All cables shall be tested with insulation testing equipment at 500V and a
reading of more than 50 mega-ohm must be obtained before the conductors are connected to any
apparatus.
Where wiring are to be in conduit or duct buried in floor, it shall be terminated in approved junction
boxes adjacent to the Refuse Handling Plant or foundation plinth with water-tight flexible tubing
enclosing the cables between motors and junction boxes. All non-current carrying metal parts of
electrical Plant shall be effectively earthed. Earth continuity conductors shall have a cross-sectional
area of not less than that specified in Table 54A of CP5.
66.5 CONTROL PANELS
The Refuse Handling Plant main control panel shall be provided with the following apparatus, controls
and indicating device for automatic and manual operations.
(a) Circuit breakers.
(b) Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch.
(c) For automatic operation, push buttons for start, stop and emergency stop of the Refuse
Handling Plant shall only be provided; for manual operation, push buttons for individual
functions shall be provided so that independent operation can be carried out.
(d) All necessary timers, control relays, interlocks for starters and contactors.
(e) Approved LED indicating lights with the following colours shall be used:
(i) The colour of the indicating lights for 3-phase incoming supply shall be WHITE and
labelled L1, L2 and L3 respectively.
(ii) Indicating lights for motor shall be GREEN when running, RED for trip.
(f) All internal inter-connecting wiring for starters and other Plant and equipment within the
control panel including all necessary protection.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-6
66.5 CONTROL PANELS (CONT'D)
(g) Voltmeter indicating the phase voltage.
(h) Ammeter with appropriate ampere range.
(i) Engraved "Traffolyte" labels for the control panel, all push buttons, selector switches,
instruments, indicating lights, etc on the surface of the control panel.
(j) Electrical control and wiring drawings of the whole system.
(k) Buzzer to indicate overload, breakdown & jamming etc.
All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved type.
The control panels shall be fabricated from electro-galvanised sheet metal of minimum 1.5 mm
thickness. It shall be adequately braced to form a rigid housing and be damp and dust proof to IP 54.
The control panels shall be located on the right side of the Refuse Handling Plant viewing from the
front and shall be mounted at an appropriate height of at least 1 m above the finished floor level. The
locations of control panels shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. A single common key
shall be used for the Auto/Off/Manual key selector switch, main control panel and fire protection
system main control panel.
A waterproof start and stop remote panel c/w indicating lights shall be installed inside and near the
entrance of the refuse chamber room to activate the refuse chute flushing system manually.
A separate fire protection system main control panel shall be provided with the following for automatic
and manual operations:
1 Programmable Logic Controller (CPU unit with 20 I/O points and expansion I/O units with 8
I/O points (DC))
3 Nos. 4 Amp MCBs unit for control circuit and solenoid valve
1 Safety-isolating transformer AC 230V / 24V - 50VA
1 No. of printed circuit board with 1 zone heat and 2 zones smoke detector monitoring circuit
with a DC 24V power supply.
1 No. of waterproof start & stop button remote panel c/w indicator light.
1 No. Laminated Circuit diagram to be pasted inside the front panel
1 No. of waterproof with stop buttons remote panel for cancelling fire alarm and emergency
lighting.
The inner front panel shall be provided with the following:-
1 No. L1/L2/L3 indicator LED light to show the power supply is ‘on’.
4 Nos. Green indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No) detector zone
initiating circuit are in 'NORMAL' condition respectively.
4 Nos. Yellow indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No) detector zone
initiating circuit are in 'FAULT' condition respectively.
4 Nos. Red indicator LED light to show the smoke (3 Nos.) and heat (1 No.) detector zone
initiating circuit are in 'ALARM' condition respectively.
1 No. flashing LED light to be activated when any smoke or heat initiating circuit is in 'FAULT'
condition.
1 No. Green indicator LED light to show the rooftop solenoid valve is activated.
1 No. Green indicator LED light to show the RHP sprinkler solenoid valve is activated.
1 No. Green push button to 'START' the flushing of the refuse chute.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-7
66.5 CONTROL PANELS (CONT'D)
1 No. Red push button to 'STOP' the flushing of the refuse chute.
2 Nos. Yellow push button to cancel flushing and alarm bell respectively.
1 No. of push button to disable the smoke detector alarm initiating circuit when carry out
thermal fogging.
1 No. Green indicator LED light to indicate the smoke detector initiating circuit in 'disabled'
mode.
1 No. Red push button to be approved by the SO Rep.
1 No. Yellow push button for resetting the counter of the PLC inside the panel.
1 No. Red indicator LED light to show that the water supply been shut off.
Engraved “Traffolyte” labels the control panel, all push buttons, indicating lights, etc on the surface of
the control panel inner door. The enclose protection of the box shall be at least IP 65. The box shall
be made of 1.5mm thick mild steel, electro-galvanised and coated with one layer of epoxy oven-
baked paint.
The fire protection system main control panel shall be wall mounted inside the refuse chamber. The
position and location shall be subjected to the approval of the SO Rep. The alarm bell shall be located
at a location approved by the SO Rep for the maximum audio effect and the unauthorized intervention.
A cancel alarm button shall be fixed on the fire protection system control panel for cancelling the
alarm and emergency light systems. All the electrical components used shall be of the HDB approved
type. The fire protection system main control panel shall be from an approved panel manufacturer.
Provisions shall be made in the control panel to facilitate future expansion and modification of the
control circuit by reserving space for future use, etc.
66.6 PAINTING
(a) General
All steelwork shall be painted to protect them from corrosion. All painting shall be done in
accordance with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice or their equivalents.The
paint or coating manufacturer's written recommendations with regard to mixing, painting,
application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times and overcoating times of each
coat shall be strictly adhered to.
(b) Surface Preparation
remover, and washed with fresh clean potable water to remove all emulsified residues, dust and
other contamination and foreign matters.
All weld areas shall be completely removed of welding flux slag, flux fumes, heat oxides and weld
splatter. All sharp edges, weld seams, millscales and heat oxides shall be grounded off. All loose
rust, non-adherent millscales shall be thoroughly removed.
All steel surfaces to be painted shall be grit-blasted to near white metal equivalent to Swedish
Standard SIS 05 5900 Sa 2½ or its equivalent. Before applying the paint system, it shall be
ensured that all the steel surfaces to be painted are thoroughly dry and well cleaned, free from
all dust, rustscales and millscales.
(c) External Surfaces Of Refuse Handling Plant
The external surfaces of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be painted with the following paint
system :
(i) one full coat of fast drying polyamide-cured epoxy zinc phosphate primer of 50 microns
dry film thickness;
(ii) one full coat of polyamide-cured epoxy pigmented with micaceous iron oxide of
100 microns dry film thickness, and
(iii) one full coat of polyamide-cured high built epoxy mastic of 100 microns dry film thickness.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-8
66.6 PAINTING (CONT'D)
(d) Coating Specification
(i) Epoxy Zinc Phosphate Primer
It shall be a two-component epoxy polyamide-cured primer with excellent adhesion to

steel. It shall be suitable for epoxy systems used on structural steel. It shall contain zinc
phosphate with iron oxide pigments. Its volume solid content shall not be less than 53%
volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time shall not be less than 16 hours.
(ii) Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide Primer
It shall be high build, two pack epoxy polyamide-cured coating containing micaceous iron
oxide. It shall give excellent durability, toughness and abrasion resistance. The volume
solid content shall not be less than 65% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time
shall not be less than 16 hours.
(iii) High Build Epoxy Mastic
It shall be high build, two packs epoxy polyamide-cured coating which offers long term
protection to exposed steelwork against fumes and spillages of mild acids, alkalis, salts
and solvents. The coating shall also offer excellent toughness and durability. The volume
solid content shall not be less than 60% volume solids. Its minimum overcoating time
shall not be less than 16 hours.
(e) Internal Surfaces Of Refuse Handling Plant
To prevent corrosion the internal surfaces of the Refuse Handling Plant shall be painted or coated
with manufacturer's recommendation of paint system, complete with written recommendations
with regard to mixing, painting, application procedures and equipment, drying times, curing times
and overcoating times of each coat.
One month before the completion of the installation, arrange with the SO Rep for the test of performance
and installation of the Refuse Handling Plant.
the Employer, failing which appropriate action shall be taken against the Contractor by the SO Rep.
66.8 MAINTENANCE OF REFUSE HANDLING PLANT
66.8.1 The Contractor shall allow in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for providing routine servicing
and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant by the Specialist in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;
except for clause 23 "Payment" for a period of one year commencing from the Date of Substantial
Completion of the Works or phase or sub-phase of the Works as certified by the Superintending Officer
(hereinafter referred to as the "Maintenance Period" for the purpose of this clause including all
subclauses under it). For the avoidance of doubt, notwithstanding the requirements of the said
Clause 23 "Payment" of the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in
Appendix A44, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for such servicing and maintenance
Works during the Maintenance Period.
66.8.2 Without prejudice to the Contractor's obligations and liabilities under the Contract, the Contractor shall
ensure that his Specialist shall carry out the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling Plant for
an additional period of five years commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive
Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant and Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement
as produced in Appendix A43 and/or Appendix A43(TC); and A44 respectively.
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 66-9
66.8 MAINTENANCE OF REFUSE HANDLING PLANT (CONT’D)
66.8.3 In this respect, subject to the rights of the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s)
exercising their discretion as hereinafter provided, the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist enter
into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s)
as the SO Rep may at his sole discretion decide. In the event the Specialist is to enter into a separate
maintenance agreement with such Town Council(s), the Contractor shall ensure that his Specialist
submit such Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant and
Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A43(TC) and A44
respectively to such Town Council(s). The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including stamp
fees for the preparation and execution of the maintenance agreement.
66.8.4 In the event that the Specialist fails to enter into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer
or such other party or such Town Council(s) before the expiry of the Maintenance Period, the Employer
or such other party or such Town Council(s) shall be entitled to arrange for their own maintenance
contractor to carry out the service and maintenance and all additional costs and expenses incurred in
carrying out the same shall be recoverable from the Contractor.
66.8.5 The Employer or such other party or such Town Council(s) shall have the absolute discretion of not
requiring the Contractor's Specialist to provide the service and maintenance of the Refuse Handling
Plant after the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor agrees that the Employer or such other party or
such Town Council(s) may exercise the said discretion at any time before the expiry of the Defects
Liability Period.
66.9 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS AND PAYMENT FOR MAINTENANCE SERVICES
The Employer and/or Town Council shall have the option of accepting the comprehensive maintenance
services offered by the Contractor's Specialist for the Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five years
commencing after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor hereby agrees that
the option is opened for acceptance up to the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall
refer to the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44 and
shall be deemed to include in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses of other maintenance
requirements which are necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, but not reflected in
Schedule B of the Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement.
Upon the acceptance of the maintenance services offered by the Contractor's Specialist, the Contractor
shall ensure that the Specialist enters into a separate maintenance agreement with the Employer and/or
Town Council, body or corporation for the maintenance service for a period of five years commencing
after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period at a monthly maintenance fee of ONE HUNDRED Dollars
($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant and payments shall only be made upon satisfactory
completion of the maintenance services. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses including
stamp fees for the maintenance agreement.
Section 67/.....
BLDG17/S66.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-1
SECTION 67
AUTOMATIC STANDBY GENERATOR SET
67.1 GENERAL
Where shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide the Automatic Standby Generator Set. The
Specifications and drawings are intended to provide a guide for the minimum requirements and basic
performance and characteristics of the standby generator and the requirement of the installation in the
generator room.
The Contractor is to carry out his own calculations, supply, deliver to site, install, test, commission and
place into service the system described herein. He has to ensure that the works, goods or materials
used shall be suitable and reasonably fit for the purposes for which they are required (hereinafter
referred as "Performance Requirement"). In the event the works, goods or materials to be used as
specified in this Section are upgraded in order to meet the Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and his Specialist shall do all necessary upgrading at no extra cost to the Board, subject always to the
approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative but such approval shall not in any way affect
the Contractor's and his Specialist's duties or obligations arising under the Contract.
The Contractor is required to prepare and submit together with this tender the complete layout and
schematic diagrams, schedule of technical data and the catalogues of all equipment and materials.
The schedule of technical data shall list individual items of equipment with details of manufacturer's
name, model/type number, specifications, etc. Technical pamphlets and literature of all equipment
supplied shall be submitted.
67.2 SCOPE
The work covered in this part shall include the design, supply, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning of the standby generator and maintenance of the generator for a period of one year.
67.3 WORKMANSHIP
All workmanship shall be subject to the approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative.
The Superintending Officer's Representative reserves the right to reject any part of the installation not
complying with this Specification, and the Contractor shall carry out the necessary remedial work or
replacement, free of charge, without delay to the Contract.
No approval or any acceptance by the Superintending Officer's Representative shall relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of
workmanship in the works.
No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the Superintending Officer's
Representative. The Contractor shall afford notice and full opportunity for the examination and
measurement of any work which is about to be covered up or put out of view.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-2
67.4 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
Plant and equipment offered shall be proven in service under site conditions no less than those specified
and shall be fully type tested to the following British Standard Specification/ Code of Practice or other
standards/codes approved by the Superintending Officer's Representative:
Installation, Operation, Maintenance,

Performance And Constructional Requirements SS 535
of Mains Failure Standby Generating Systems
Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven

ISO 8528, BS 7698
alternating current generating sets
Reciprocating internal combustion engines ISO 3046, BS 5514
Alternator BS 5000, IEC 34-1
Low-voltage switchgear and control gear SS 293-1, IEC 439-1
The emission from the diesel generator shall comply with the standards stipulated by the National
Environment Agency (NEA), Environment Pollution Control Act and a Certificate of Clearance shall be
obtained from the regulatory authorities for the generator offered, supplied and installed under this
contract and submitted to the S.O. The installation and operation of the generator shall also comply with
the Environment noise regulations and standards as stipulated by NEA. The Contractor shall provide
all measures including acoustic treatment, enclosure etc. to comply with this requirement.
The Contractor shall submit all relevant type test certificates and reports, and details of service
experience for the type of plant offered, at the time of tendering.
67.5 LAYOUT OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall submit with the Tender the general layout of the generator set, control panel, fuel
tanks, pipe work, exhaust outlets, etc which is to be consistent with the size of the generator plant room.
Only a generator plant system that can be accommodated in the generator plant room shall be
considered. Any alteration or building work necessary within the confine of the generator plant room to
accommodate any system, including the ventilation openings to suit the particular set shall be deemed
to be included in the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the SO Rep before
proceeding with the modifications.
Layout, construction and installation drawings shall be drawn on A1 sheets and details may be produced
on A4 sheets.
The Control Panel, Distribution Board, Batteries inclusive of rack and Daily Fuel Tank with 1000 litre or
amount of fuel to run the engine continuously for eight hours under normal full load conditions is deemed
to be included in the Contract Sum.
67.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE AUTOMATIC STANDBY GENERATING SET
The Contractor shall submit with the Tender, full details of the performance of the engine, alternator,
control equipment etc, and catalogues giving full technical data.
67.6.1 General
The generating set shall comprise a vertically mounted, water cooled, four stroke, compression ignition
diesel engine driving a brushless, self-exciting, self-regulating alternator, complete with fuel tank, control
cubicle and auxiliary equipment.
The generating set shall be designed for fully automatic operation on mains failure.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-3
67.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE AUTOMATIC STANDBY GENERATING SET (CONT’D)
67.6.2 Baseframe
The engine and alternator shall be accurately aligned, coupled, flange-connected and mounted on a
robust fabricated steel baseframe.
Resilient anti-vibration spring mounts shall be fitted to isolate the generator set and reduce vibration
transmitted by the set to the floor.
The Contractor must supply a torsional compatibility analysis of the engine generator system, along
with calculations supporting the compatibility of the baseframe.
67.6.3 Output And Voltage
The generator set shall be capable of delivery of at least an output power as indicated in the drawing
with a power factor of 0.8 lagging at full load voltage of 400 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hertz rated speed.
The specified output shall be the maximum continuous rating as defined by BS 4999: Part 30, and not
the standby rating. In addition, the generating set shall be capable of delivering 110% rated output at
rated voltage and rated speed for one hour during any period of twelve consecutive hours running in
accordance with BS 5000.
67.6.4 Speed
The rated speed of the generating set shall be 1500 rpm.
67.6.5 Voltage Regulation
A rapid response automatic voltage regulator shall be provided to regulate the generated voltage.
The voltage control unit shall be mounted in the control panel. Automatic voltage control if provided by
a solid state unit shall have a frequency sensing device to prevent overloading of exciter components
during under speed conditions. Manual voltage control with an auto/manual selector shall also be
provided. The voltage regulator sensing device shall preferably be a three phase type and shall respond
to average voltage output and not peak voltage output.
(a) Steady State Condition
Under the steady state condition, the automatic voltage regulator or any other voltage stabilizing
system shall be capable of maintaining the voltage to within +2.5% of its set value for all loads
between no load and full-rated load, including cold to hot variations and load power factor
between 0.8 lagging and unity. The load conditions shall include out of balance loading of up to
ten (10) percent between any two phases.
Following transient changes, the voltage shall be restored to within these limits in less than ten
(10) seconds.
(b) Transient Condition
The excitation system shall be designed to promote rapid voltage and frequency recovery
following sudden application of load. The voltage and frequency characteristic shall be in
accordance with Class G2 of ISO 8528. When a load is applied, the transient voltage dip must
not exceed 20%, recovering to 97% of the rated voltage within 1.5 seconds. The transient
frequency dip shall not exceed 10% on rejection of full rated load, recovering to the steady state
frequency band within 5 seconds.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-4
67.6.5 Voltage Regulation (Cont’d)
(c) Transient Voltage Rise
The voltage shall be arranged to fall off with excessive reduction of engine speed. The transient
voltage dip or rise upon the application or rejection of the load up to the rated load shall not
exceed 20%.
67.6.6 Short Circuit Capacity
The alternator shall withstand three phase short circuit conditions without damage. Excitation shall be
maintained under external short circuit fault conditions to produce a short circuit current of
approximately three (3) times full load. The field shall be suppressed under internal fault conditions by
direct field suppression on slip ring machines or by suppression of the exciter field on brushless
machines.
67.6.7 Radio Interference
The whole of the equipment shall be efficiently protected against emission of electromagnetic
interference. Radio interference suppression shall be in accordance with BS 800.
67.6.8 Temperature Rise
The temperature rise shall be in accordance with BS 4999 for the appropriate insulation class in a 40
deg. ambient.
67.6.9 Waveform
The voltage waveform of the generating set shall be as close as practicable to a line wave both at no
load and at full load with a power factor of 0.8 lagging. The line to line voltage waveform shall be in
accordance with BS 4999: Part 101 and the total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5%.
67.6.10 Automatic Features
The generating set shall be provided with the following automatic protective features complete with
indicating lamps.
(a) Shutdown
The generating set shall shutdown under any of the following conditions:-
(i) If the coolant temperature exceeds a safe figure.

(ii) If the speed exceeds a safe figure.
(iii) If the lubricating oil pressure falls below a safe figure.
(iv) If there is an overload on any or all of the phases.
(v) If there is an under or over voltage.
(vi) If it fails to start after three successive attempts.
Failure warning lights and audible alarm sounder shall be provided at the control panel and
connections for remote indications shall be incorporated to indicate that the generating set has
shutdown due to any of the abovementioned causes. The generating set main circuit breaker
shall be opened under any of the above abnormal conditions and interlocked to prevent the
breaker from being closed unless the engine is running and all conditions are restored to normal.
The audible alarm shall be provided with a timer, adjustable for up to 1 hour, for automatic cut-
off. The audible alarm system shall be automatically reset when the warning light is reset.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-5
67.6.10 Automatic Features (Cont’d)
(b) False Start
If the engine fails to start up after three numbers of attempted start, the generating set which is
incorporated with an automatic system shall prevent any further starting and at the same time
set up an audible and visual alarm indicating that the plant has failed to start.
(c) Taking Over The Load
The load shall only be transferred to the generating set by the closing of an output contactor
when the alternator has reached its rated voltage and shall not be more than 10 seconds after
starting of engine.
(d) Alternator Voltage Monitoring
The alternator voltage shall be continuously monitored on three phases. If the voltage drops
below the 10% value, the alternator breaker or contactor shall be opened and an alternator fault
indicated both visually and audibly. Automatic re-energisation of the alternator shall be blocked.
(e) Emergency Shutdown
An emergency push button to disconnect the entire standby generating plant and shutdown the
generating set shall be incorporated in the plant.
(f) Operation Selector Switch
A selector switch shall be provided for the following modes of operation:-
(i) No load test - to test the functionality of the standby generating plant without connection
to the load. The test duration shall be terminated automatically by a timer and adjustable
over 15 minutes.
(ii) Load test whereby the generator is started manually and the complete process of load
take-over by the standby generating plant is tested.
The same provision shall also be made at the remote control panel at the distribution
board.
67.6.11 Alternator
The alternator shall be a brushless, self-exciting, self-regulating type, continuously rated to BS

5000:Part 3 and ISO 8528-3.
The alternator shall have a conventional stator and salient pole revolving field system incorporating, on
a common shaft, the armature of the A.C. exciter and a three phase full wave silicon diode main field
rectifier. The alternator shall be self-excited from its output terminals through a static automatic voltage
regulator.
Rotor windings shall be Class F (155oC), stator and exciter windings shall be Class E (120oC). All
windings shall be suitably impregnated with Class F thermostating insulating varnish for use in tropical
climates.
The alternator enclosure shall be screen protected, drip proof. It shall be fan ventilated.
The alternator shall be fitted with heavy duty ball and roller bearings (single bearing or two bearing type)
packed in suitable grease.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-6
67.6.12 Engine
(a) General
The engine shall be direct injection, cold starting, water cooled, pressure lubricated, four stroke
cycle compression ignition diesel engine conforming with the performance requirements of BS
5514-3.
The engine shall be suitable for running on diesel of BS 2869 Class A2 or equivalent. The engine
fuel consumption per hour at full load shall be stated in the Tender.
(b) Cooling System
Cooling water shall be circulated by a gear driven centrifugal pump through a tropical duty
radiator complete with thermostat and bypass, cooled by an electric fan.
(c) Lubrication System
Lubrication shall be by pressure throughout the whole engine in conjunction with built-in oil-to-
coolant heat exchanger. Main crank pin and camshaft bearings together with the valve gear shall
be lubricated by a gear type pressure pump feeding from a wet sump. An oil temperature
stabilizer shall be fitted.
(d) Exhaust System
The exhaust system shall form a continuous unique path from the engine to the termination
position. Inspection and cleaning doors shall be provided at changes of direction and at the base
of vertical stacks
The selection, sizing and fixing on site of all sections comprising the exhaust system, including
the silencers, shall be suitable for the installation specified.
Flexible, gas tight joints shall be provided between engines and the exhaust system to permit
thermal expansion and to prevent vibration transmission.
The exhaust system shall be adequately supported throughout with spring hangers where
necessary or specified. Where the system is within the confines of the building and wherever
else specified, appropriate thermal insulation material shall be applied to the pipework and
silencers to limit surface temperature to 55C completed with embossed aluminum cladding.
Drain points for the removal of condensate shall be provided at the lowest point of the exhaust
system and at the base of vertical stacks.
A weather terminal shall be provided to exclude rain from exhaust outlet.
Silencers shall be incorporated in the exhaust system to maintain the external noise levels
specified.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-7
67.6.12 Engine
(e) Governor
The governor shall be of the electronic type, integral with fuel injection pumps, thus being
capable of controlling the engine speed from idling up to a pre-set maximum.
The class of governing accuracy shall be A2 as defined by BS 5514-4 and represented as

follows:
Maximum Change of Speed Main

Load Variation At Rated As Percentage Of Rates Recovery
Speed Speed Time
(Second)
(i) On suddenly taking on Transient change 15

-
or off 70% of rated load Permanent change 18
-
(ii) On a change of load

both on and off, by any
Permanent change 1
step of 25% of the rated -
load
(f) Starting System
Starting shall be by means of a totally enclosed axial type 24 volts heavy duty electric starter
motor.
(g) Engine Protection
The engine shall be provided with protection through automatic shutdown of the plant in case of:
(i) Low oil pressure

(ii) High water temperature
(iii) Engine overspeed
(iv) Failure to start after three successive attempts
(v) Low fuel oil level
Failure warning lights and audible alarm bell connections shall be incorporated to indicate that
the plant has shut down due to any of the above-mentioned cases.
(h) Gauges
There shall be oil pressure, oil temperature, water temperature gauges and tachometer mounted
on the engine set.
(i) Pipe Works
All pipe works for water, lubricating oil, fuel oil and exhaust shall be designed to suit the standard
arrangement for a radiator cooled diesel engine system.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-8
67.6.13 Daily Service Fuel Tank
The daily service fuel tank shall have a capacity sufficient for storing fuel to run the engine continuously
for eight hours under normal full load conditions.
It shall be supplied complete with steel stand, dial-type, contents gauge, drain plug, vent pipe, filler cap,
a suitable sump drain tray and connection hoses for fuel flow and return piping. An on/off valve shall be
fitted to the outlet connection on the fuel tank.
(a) Storage Fuel Tank
The Contractor shall provide a storage fuel tank if the daily fuel tank contain more than 1000
litres of fuel. The storage fuel tank shall have siphons long enough to draw the last litre of oil
from the tank. The storage fuel tank shall be floor mounted and shall be supplied complete with
fuel level gauge, fuel filter, drain plug, manhole-cover vent pipe, filler cap and a suitable sump
drain tray.
The fuel tank shall be manufactured and installed to comply with the requirements of BS 799 :
Part 5 and that of the local authority.
(b) Pumps For Fuel Tanks
An electric fuel transfer pump, fuel piping and float switch shall be supplied and fitted for the daily
service fuel tank to enable replenishment of the tank from the storage fuel tank.
A suitable electric pump and sufficient length of flexible hose shall be supplied for filling the
storage tank from a fuel oil drum.
67.6.14 Batteries & Charger
The Contractor shall provide a set of 12 or 24 volt high performance heavy duty Plante lead acid
batteries, complete with floor standing battery rack, necessary cables and clamps, for starting the
generating set. The batteries shall be sized for 6 starting attempts and voltage fall of not less than 1 volt
during locked rotor current and 1.4 volt during current in accordance to SS CP31. The batteries shall
be contained within a purpose made corrosion-resistant frame with GRP cover located close to the
engine. Leads between batteries and engine shall be protected against physical damage.
When the generator is running, the batteries shall be charged by a belt-driven dynamo fitted with
constant voltage control.
In addition, an automatic charger shall be connected to the mains 230 volt supply to provide trickle
charging to the battery set. The charger shall be designed and set to pass the correct trickle charge
current to keep the cells in a fully-charged condition. A manual boost charge facility shall be
incorporated.
The charger shall include a fused A.C. input, transformer, silicon diode/thyristor full wave rectifier,
voltage surge suppressor, D.C. voltmeter and ammeter.
67.6.15 Works Drawings And Schedules
The Contractor shall, before the relevant works proceed, prepare and submit for approval of the
Superintending Officer's Representative, all working drawings based on the Contract Drawings. They
shall take into account any modifications, either to the building or the installation which may have taken
place, incorporating details of the actual items of plant and equipment to be installed.
The contractor shall prepare all necessary schedules of equipment and necessary wiring diagrams,
including internal diagrams for items of electrical equipment and diagrams showing the inter-connection
between different items.
The Contractor shall, prior to commencing manufacture, submit to the Superintending Officer's
Representative for technical appraisal, manufacturer's shop drawings of the duct and pipe work to be
supplied and erected under the terms of the Contract. Drawings shall relate the location of ducts and
pipes with the supporting and adjacent building structure.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-9
67.6.16 Operation And Maintenance Instruction Manuals
The Contractor shall provide the Superintending Officer's Representative, for the generating set, two
copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual covering the following:-
(a) Record drawings of the installation
(b) General description of systems
(c) Setting up and operating instructions for all equipment and systems installed
(d) Control sequences for systems installed
(e) The scheduled details of all equipment settings and actual values maintained in controlled
variables during commissioning
(f) Frequency and details of routine maintenance requirements for all plant and equipment, shown
on a set of schedules produced for this purpose
(g) Manufacturers' literature, including detailed drawings and electrical circuit details, printed
operating and maintenance instructions, for all specific items of equipment and plant supplied
under this Contract.
The manuals shall be encased in A4 size, plastic covered loose leaf ring binders, with hard
covers. Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the binder so that they
may be unfolded without being in any way detached from the rings.
Attention is drawn to the fact that the Works will not be accepted as complete and that final
payment will not be made for the Works until the manuals have been accepted by the
Superintending Officer's Representative as being satisfactory.
The Contractor shall provide training to the Superintending Officer's Representative and the
Board's maintenance staff in the running of the plant and system. The location and function of
all items listed on the record schedules and the procedures for starting up, shutting down,
isolating sections, etc shall be comprehensively explained and demonstrated to the
Superintending Officer's Representative satisfaction.
67.6.17 Tools
A standard tool kit in a wall mounted padlocked metal box shall be provided in the plant room together
with a typed list fixed inside the metal box, of all tools supplied.
There shall be a spanner to fit every size of nut supplied and sufficient tools for overhaul. The list of
such tools shall be included with the tender.
67.6.18 Spare Parts
The Contractor shall provide, on completion, two copies of the Spare Parts Manual for each generating
set. Full details of all engine parts and assembly shall be provided in the manuals.
67.6.19 Fuel
Before handing over the completed works and at the end of the maintenance period, the Contractor
shall provide sufficient diesel to fill up fully the daily service fuel tank and spare fuel for the storage fuel
tank of total amount equal to 1000 litres or fuel to run the engine continuously for eight hours under
normal full load conditions.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-10
67.6.20 Earthing
The Contractor shall provide and fix to the wall of the generator plant room a tinned copper earth bar of
cross-sectional dimensions 31.8mm x 6.3mm on porcelain insulators. A stranded PVC insulated copper
cable shall solidly earth the star point or neutral point of the generator set to the earth bar. The cable
shall be rated for full current capacity of the generator.
The Contractor shall also run a copper tape of cross-sectional dimensions 25mm x 3mm and connect
it between the generating set and earth bar, and between control panel and earth bar.
From the earth bar, two PVC insulated 70mm2 copper cables shall be run to the separate earthing
electrodes which shall be installed outside the plant room.
All metalwork associated with the installation including the baseframe, control panel, cable metal
sheaths and armour, conduit and trunking shall be earthed by bonding conductors whose sizes shall
comply with CP5.
Connections between earth bars, equipment frames etc and stranded copper cables shall be made with
appropriate compression lugs, bolt, nut and lock washers.
67.6.21 Earth Electrode
A minimum of two earth electrodes shall be supplied and installed, outside the generator plant room, at
a minimum distance between the electrodes equal to their buried length.
Each earth electrode shall comprise of two sections of copper weld mild steel rods, 16mm in diameter,
joined with a purpose-made phosphor bronze coupling to give a minimum length of 3.6mm. The earth
electrode shall be driven to about 150mm below ground level using a suitable hammer. A suitable
phosphor bronze clamp shall be provided for connecting the earthing lead to the earth electrode.
The top of each earth electrode shall be housed in a approved galvanised steel frame hinged lid
complete with plastic pot inspection pit to facilitate inspection. The pit of lid dimensions 250mm by
250mm shall be sunk flush with ground level.
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed one ohm. If the earthing resistance
exceeds this figure, the Contractor shall supply and install up to four additional earth electrodes
complete with interconnecting conductors, earth pits and clamps, at his expense, so as to reduce the
resistance to meet the requirement.
Parallel connected earth electrodes shall be spaced at a horizontal distance equal to their buried length.
They shall be interconnected with bare copper tape of cross-sectional dimensions 25 mm x 3 mm buried
300 mm below ground level.
Any hacking and making good of concrete and other building surface for embedding the earthing leads
shall be carried out by the Contractor.
The word `GENERATOR' shall be labelled on the underside of the pit's lid.
67.6.22 Generator Plant Room
The Contractor shall install a framed Single Line Diagram of the main circuit, change-over and supply
scheme, and a framed control circuit diagram in the generator plant room.
A first aid chart shall also be provided and displayed.
The Contractor shall provide a 5 mm thick x 750 mm wide rubber mat, extending the length of the control
panel, placed in front of the control panel.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-11
67.6.23 Ventilation Of Plant Room
The Contractor shall provide suitable ventilation ducts made from aluminium sheets of minimum 1.2
mm thickness, and appropriate stiffeners and install where necessary; electric ventilation fan from the
generator room to provide the required fresh intake air supply for engine combustion and sufficient air
flow for cooling of the generating plant.
The hot air from the engine radiator fan shall be discharged from generator room to nearest open area
above ground level through suitable ventilation ducts fabricated from aluminium sheets of minimum 1.2
mm thickness, and appropriate stiffeners. A hot air discharge attenuator shall be incorporated. The
duct outlet shall be covered with aluminium louvres and galvanised steel wire mesh. Aluminium louvres
provided shall be of same material and construction as those specified for plant rooms and approved
by Superintending Officer's Representative.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to size and locate the ventilation fans, ductwork, intake
and discharge outlets correctly for proper ventilation. Calculations showing adequate cooling of the
generator by the ventilation system proposed shall be submitted by the contractor to the SO’s Rep.
The ventilation fan shall be connected to the control panel and shall be arranged to operate when the
generating set is running.
All wall openings for ventilation fans and hot air discharge shall be provided by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall make good any hacked or affected parts of the building to match existing original
adjacent works to Superintending Officer's Representative. The Contractor shall obtain a Structural
engineer’s approval for hacking of any wall openings.
67.6.24 Sound Treatment Of Plant Room
The Contractor shall provide sound treatment to the plant room.
The sound level at a distance of 1 metre from the entrance of the plant room, tail pipe of the exhaust
silencer pipe, fresh air intake and hot air discharge attenuator shall not be more than 75 + 5 dBA.
67.6.25 Test In Works
Acceptance tests shall be carried out at the works of manufacturer to establish that the generating set
complies with the Specifications and is entirely suitable for its intended purpose.
All tests shall be made in a manner prescribed in the relevant British Standard, BS5514, BS7698, ISO
8528, and ISO 3046 Specification.
It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to define the extent of and carry out the tests which
should include:-
(a) For Engine
(i) Test measurements of the followings:
(a) Cooling water temperature.

(b) Lubricating oil temperature and pressure.
(c) Exhaust gas temperature.
(d) Fuel and lubricating oil consumption.
(e) Protection circuits settings (e.g. overspeed trip, lubricatingoil pressure trip, cooling
water temperature trip).
(f) Brake horse power.
(ii) Functional checks to demonstrate:
(a) the ability of all malfunction and protection and warning devices to respond
correctly to conditions in which they should operate.
(b) the dynamic and steady state characteristics of the governing system.
(c) the ability of the starting system to perform in accordance with the Contract.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-12
67.6.25 Test In Works (Cont’d)
(b) For Alternator
(i) Test measurements of:-
(a) Temperature rise of alternator and exciter windings.

(b) Coil resistances of alternator and exciter windings.
(c) Insulation resistance of alternator and exciter windings.
(ii) Functional checks to demonstrate:-
(a) withstand flash test for 1 minute.

(b) voltage regulation with automatic voltage regulator and manual control (if fitted).
(c) a full load test of sufficient duration for the alternator to reach its final steady
operating temperature followed by one hour at 10% load
The manufacturer shall provide a test report embodying the results of all tests carried out, after
completion of the tests. The test report shall contain:
(a) a description and identification of the equipment tested including fabrication, block and
production number.
(b) the name, address and contract or order number of the Contractor ordering the equipment.
(c) date, place and time of test.
(d) the testing party and the signature of the testing engineer.
(e) the properties tested and the source of the parameters for such properties, that is British
Standards.
(f) the results of the test and any divergency from the Specifications.
No item of equipment subject to inspection and test shall be despatched from the works of the
manufacture until the Superintending Officer's Representative has received and approved in writing the
results of the tests.
Acceptance of test reports and approval of tests by the Superintending Officer's Representative of any
equipment shall not supply the complete equipment, and complete work and installations in accordance
with the Contract Specifications and suitable for the purpose intended.
67.6.26 Tests On Site
(a) General
The Contractor shall arrange with the Superintending Officer's Representative for all tests at
least 7 working days in advance. The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments,
apparatus, consumable stores, fuels, connections, skilled and unskilled labour and services
with proper, reasonable and safe facilities required for the tests. Any costs which may be
involved in the tests shall be included in the lump sum tender by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall satisfy the Superintending Officer's Representative that the instruments and equipment to
be used for any tests are adequate as regards accuracy and calibration for the tests to be
undertaken.
A complete written record shall be made by the Contractor of all inspections and tests. These
records shall be made at the time of the tests and shall be countersigned by the Superintending
Officer's Representative as a true record. A copy of each record sheet shall be included with the
operation and maintenance manual.
Inspection or approval of tests and acceptance of test certificates by the Superintending Officer's
Representative of any equipment, works or installation shall not relieve the Contractor from the
obligation to supply the complete equipment, and complete work and installations in accordance
with the Contract Specifications and suitable for the purpose intended.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-13
67.6.26 Tests On Site (Cont’d)
Three copies of certificates of test shall be submitted to the Superintending Officer's

Representative within 14 days of completion of tests.
Certificates of test shall contain or have attached to them the following information:
(i) the name of Contract and Contract No. as designated by the Superintending Officer's
Representative.
(ii) a description of equipment, system or installation tested including any fabrication, block
or production numbers.
(iii) the name and address of the Contractor.
(iv) date and time of the test.
(v) environmental conditions.
(vi) the testing party and the signature of the Contractor's testing engineer.
(vii) the results of the test and any divergence from Specifications and Drawings.
(viii) signature and stamp of the Contractor's Professional Engineer.
Any faults or defects revealed by the inspection or testing shall be made good and re-testing
shall be made, all at the expense of the Contractor.
(b) Electrical Installation And Earthing
The Contractor shall make an application for testing of the electrical installation and earthing by
the Board's Electrical Testing Unit.
All electrical tests including verification of polarity, measurement of impedance of earth continuity
conductors, effectiveness of earthing, insulation resistance and earthing resistance shall be
made in a manner prescribed in CP5.
(c) Generating Plant
A 12 hour full load test with a one hour overload of 10% shall be carried out at the Contractor's
premises. The speed and voltage variations, recovery times, oil and water temperature and
pressures shall be recorded.
A 4 hour full load running test for the generating plant shall be carried out by the Contractor on
site. The load shall be slowly increased by steps of 25% of the rated load to full load. Then the
rated load shall be suddenly taken off and taken on again. Finally the load shall be slowly
decreased by steps of 25% of rated load to no load. Between load changes, sufficient duration
shall be allowed for the generating plant to reach steady state conditions. The speed and voltage
variations, recovery times, oil and water temperature and pressures shall be recorded.
The operating functions of the control panel, with particular attention to any timing sequences
and protection circuits shall be checked and verified.
Tests shall also be conducted on the automatic operation of the plant on simulated normal supply
failure or up to 20% voltage drop on any phase of the normal supply. The performance of the
starting equipment and the ability of the set to start and take up load within specified time shall
be checked.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-14
67.6.27 Commissioning
Commissioning in this Specification is defined as the energising of electrical distribution systems,

installations and plant after inspections and tests to ensure safety and proper operation; and the
evaluation of performance by means of further inspections and tests to ensure the works operate in
conformity with the design specification
The methods of procedure for commissioning plant shall be agreed between the Contractor and the
Superintending Officer's Representative and shall comply with SS535. Unless previous approval has
been given by the Superintending Officer's Representative, no connections or adjustments shall be
made at plant already commissioned and in use. Moreover no plant shall be charged, energised or
operated without prior approval of the Superintending Officer's Representative.
67.6.28 Defects Liability Period
The Defects Liability period shall commence from the Date of Certification of Substantial Completion
and shall cover a period of one year.
During the Defects Liability period, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, be responsible for making good
all defects and replacing all defective parts or items which may develop not due to ordinary wear and
tear or improper use. Such costs shall include all material, plant, equipment, labour, performance testing
and re-commissioning necessary to satisfy the Superintending Officer's Representative that the
remedial work is acceptable.
67.6.29 Specialist Maintenance During Defects Liability Period
The Tender shall include for any normal service and maintenance required during the one year Defects
Liability period on all plant and equipment supplied under the Contract.
In addition, the Contractor shall perform the quarterly and six monthly tests in accordance to the
standards set in SS535 within the one year Defects Liability period covering the following:-
(a) Initiate automatic starting and stopping of the generating set through simulated mains failure and
restoration of normal supply.
(b) Test run the generating set for a minimum period of half an hour. Before starting, check
lubricating oil, level cooling, water level, fuel level, battery electrolyte level, and refill if necessary.
(c) During running, check and record voltage, current, frequency, power factor, hours counter,
lubricating oil temperature and pressure, engine speed and cooling water temperature.
(d) Check for leakage and loose connections in fuel, lubricating oil and water piping and electrical
wiring.
(e) Check and record battery voltage and charger current. Clean battery terminals and check
tightness of connection.
Each of the above test run and routine maintenance shall be carried out in the presence of the
Superintending Officer's Representative or his representative and reports per Appendix C of SS535
shall be submitted accordingly.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary lubricating oil, battery water, coolant, grease, fuel, etc for
topping up during the routine maintenance.
Should any parts, equipment or material become defective or faulty, the Contractor shall replace and
rectify such defects and faults at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Superintending Officer's
Representative. All efforts shall be made to avoid putting the system out of service in the event of repair.
At the end of the one year period, an oil sampling test shall be carried out using oil sampling analysis
kit provided by the supplier. The laboratory to which oil samples will be sent shall be located at and be
a part of the local generator set supplier's facility, and shall be open to inspection during normal working
hours. Independent laboratories not a part of the engine supplier's facility are disallowed as to
conformance with this specification.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-15
67.6.29 Specialist Maintenance During Defects Liability Period (Cont’d)
Scheduled oil sampling shall be of the atomic absorption spectrophotometer method as opposed to the
spectrographic analysis method and shall be accurate to within a fraction of one part per million for the
following elements:
(a) Iron
(b) Chromium
(c) Copper
(d) Aluminum
(e) Silicon
(f) Lead
In addition, the sample shall be tested for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and anti-freeze.
All equipment needed to take oil samples shall be provided in a kit at the time of acceptance and shall
include the following:
(a) Sample extraction gun (1)

(b) Bottle (10)
(c) Written instructions (1)
(d) Metal storage box (1)
IMMEDIATE notification shall be provided to the owner when analysis shows any critical reading. If
readings are normal, a report showing that the equipment is operating within established parameters
shall be provided.
67.6.30 Emergency Call-Back Service
During the Defects Liability period, the Contractor shall be required to provide at no additional cost to
the Board emergency call-back service and carry out necessary repairs, whether major or minor,
including adjustments of all equipment installed under this contract, at any time within two (2) hours
after notification by the Superintending Officer's Representative or Board's representative. Such repairs
and adjustment shall be completed within the same day or such further extended time as deemed
necessary by the Superintending Officer's Representative.
Should the Contractor fail in attending to these emergency call, the Board reserves the right to appoint
other party, or parties to execute such works, all costs incurred plus charges shall be recovered by the
Board from the Contractor by deduction(s) from any money due or that shall become due to the
Contractor, or made payable direct from the Contractor to the Board.
The Contractor shall employ a supervisor who shall be equipped with telephone pager so that immediate
notification of such emergency call-back service can be made. If this supervisor fails to response after
being paged for more than one hour, it shall be deemed that the Contractor has failed in attending to
the emergency call. The Board reserves the right to take similar action as above to do the work.
67.7 Generator Control
The control shall monitor the incoming supply at the Essential Services Board at all the blocks
continuously. When there is power failure in any one of the blocks, the generator shall start up
automatically. The output contactor shall close when the alternator has reached its rated voltage. The
duration of the entire sequence shall be within 15 seconds from the moment the signal is received to
start the generator to the closing of the output contactor.
When the power is restored, the output contactor shall de-energise and the generator set shall shut
down after a preset time delay. After which, the equipment shall reset for the next duty operation.
The phase voltage in Essential Services Board of each block shall be continuously monitored, power
failure is assumed when any of the phase voltage is 15% below the nominal value. The monitoring
shall be carried out via the sensing cables connected to the incoming circuit breaker in the Essential
Services Board.
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 67-16
67.8 Power and Sensing Cable
The power and sensing cable from the generator room to each Essential Services Board to all the
blocks shall be run in cable tray/trunking or 150mm dia UPVC pipes if crossing underground.
(a) Power Cable
The power cable shall be connected from the Distribution Board in the Generator Room to the
Essential Services Boards using the appropriate size as indicated in the drawing.
(b) Instrumentation Cable (Sensing Cable)
Each instrumentation cable from the Generator Room to the Essential Services Board in all the
blocks shall be at least a 5-core 1.5mm sq fire resistant cable. Where necessary additional cable
shall be provided to cater for the additional sensing requirements. The cable shall be terminated
to the terminal block in an enclosure in the Generator Room before further connection is carried
out to the PLC and the Generator Control panel.
The other end of the cable shall terminate to a terminal block in an enclosure in the Main Switch
Room before further connection is carried out.
Proper labelling must be carried out at the terminal block and the enclosure to ensure easy
identification. Unused core shall be terminated at the terminal block and labelled accordingly.
(c) Sensing Cables To Lift Machine Rooms
The Contractor shall provide the sensing cables to all the lift machine rooms in the residential
blocks. The sensing cables should be installed in metal conduit and separated from other wiring
systems in the building.
The following provision should be provided:
3 core 1.5mm sq sensing voltage free, normally closed fire resistant signal cables (with junction
box or termination block in the lift machine rooms) from power failure sensing device to each lift
machine room for detection of power failure.
3 core 1.5mm sq sensing voltage free, normally closed fire resistant signal cables (with junction
box or termination block in lift machine rooms) from fire alarm panel to each lift machine room.
The contractor shall liaise with the lift supplier on the actual configuration requirements. Any
additional cost incurred for extra sensing cables where required is deemed to have been included
in the tender price.
Section 68/.....
BLDG17/S67.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 68-1
SECTION 68
RESERVED
SECTION 69
RESERVED
Section 70/.....
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 70-1
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES
Appendix
A1 and/or A1(TC) Deed Of Warranty For Pre-Treatment Of Soil For Protection Of Buildings Against
Sub-Terranean Termites
A2 Reserved
A3 Reserved
A4 Reserved
A5 and/or A5(TC) Deed Of Warranty For External Painting
A6 and/or A6(TC) Deed Of Warranty For Cast-In-Situ EPDM Rubber Flooring for Children's Playground
A7 to A10 Reserved
A11 Instruction On Workmen Injury Compensation Policy
A12 Reserved
A13 Conditions For the Supply Of Materials From The Employer
A14 Technical Information On Refuse Chute Flushing System
A15 Application For Final Pressure Test Of Gas Pipe Installation
A16 Appointment of Designated Representative (DR) For Gas Pipe Installation
A17 Approval For Final Pressure Test
A18 Certificate Of Final Pressure Test
A19 Request For Charge-In/Turn-On Of Gas Supply
A20 Approval For Charge-In/Turn-On Of Gas Supply
A21 Statement Of Turn-On Or Charge-In Of Gas Supply
A22 Data On Transfer Pumping System
A23 Testing Data On Transfer Pumping System
A24 Testing Data On Installation Of Telemonitoring System For Transfer Pumping System
A25 Fortnightly/Monthly Routine Inspection Report On Transfer Pumping System During

Maintenance Period
A26 Data On Booster Pumping System
A27 Testing Data On Booster Pumping System
A28 Monthly Routing Inspection Report On Booster Pumping System During

Maintenance Period
BLDG17/S70.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Bldg Spec
Page 70-2
SECTION 70
LISTS OF APPENDICES
(CONT'D)
Appendix
A29 Schedule of Technical Data
A30 Testing Data On Wet Riser System
A31 Bi-Yearly Routine Inspection Report On Down-Comer/Dry Riser System During

Maintenance Period
A32 Monthly/Quarterly Routine Inspection Report On Wet Rising Main System During
Maintenance Period
A33 List "A" - Schedule Of Technical Data
A34 Testing Data On Hose Reel System
A35 Monthly Routine Inspection Report On Hose Reel Pumping System During
Maintenance Period
A36 List of Relevant British Standards
A37 Schedule of Recommended Gauges For Rectangular Duct Installation
A38 Monthly/Annual Test Report - Maintenance Of Fire Alarm System
A39 Mechanical Ventilation System - Preliminary Inspection
A40 Anchor Torque Test For Ventilation System
A41 Ventilation Fan Commissioning Test Record
A42 Schedule "A" - Schedule Of Technical Data Of Plant And Equipment
A43 and/or A43(TC) Articles Of Agreement For Comprehensive Maintenance For Refuse Handling Plant
A44 Conditions Of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement
A45 Procedure To Obtain StarHub Manhole Cover
A46 Performance Compliance Certificate (For Play Equipment)
A47 Certification Form HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET for Confirmation Of Equipotential Nettings

For Playground, Hardcourt, Fitness Corner, Etc. With Reinforced Concrete Base
A48 Performance Compliance Certificate (For Outdoor Fitness Equipment)
A49 Drawings of Refuse Bins, Litter Bins, Bulk Containers And Trolleys
BLDG17/S70.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR

PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUB-TERRANEAN TERMITES
To : Housing & Development Board

Republic of Singapore
STAMP
if stamp duties required
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1) ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Contractor)
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter called the
"Employer") in respect of the above contract works (hereinafter called the "Contract").
(2) ..................................................................................................................................................................
(Name and Address of Specialist)
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil
for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the
Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ........................................................................................................

of the Contract, the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
In consideration of the premises and of the Employer giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Employer as follows :
1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the Warranty Period) that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter
referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements
notwithstanding).
The Warranty Period in respect of the Works shall commence from the Date(s) of Substantial Completion of the
Contract as certified by the Superintending Officer of the Contract.
BLDG17/A1.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1
Page 2
2 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally further warrant that :
(a) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the selection of materials and goods for the Works;
(b) they have exercised all proper skill and care in the design and execution of the Works;
(c) their workmanship is of a standard that may be expected from a contractor with specialised
experience and expertise in his particular trade; and
(d) the Works are fit and suitable for the purpose designed and required in the Contract.
3 It is an express term of the Warranty that the Works when completed and the goods or materials used
shall meet the Performance Requirement of the Contract in respect of the Works. In the event the Works when
completed and/or the goods and materials used should fail to meet such Performance Requirement, the Contractor
and the Specialist shall be precluded from disclaiming liability under the Warranty on the ground that the Works as
completed and/or the goods and materials used accord or comply with the Contract, and in this connection, the
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Employer
against them in respect of their breach of the Warranty.
4 Subject to Clauses 5 and 9 below, if any damage or defects should occur in relation to the Works within
the Warranty Period due to whatever cause, the Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally undertake to
remove and/or rectify and make good such damage or defects including ancillary works within a reasonable period
or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the
Contractor's or Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification
and/or making good work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist
shall fail to comply within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Employer to order such damage
or defects as are referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and
recover from the Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable.
PROVIDED ALWAYS that such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Employer's right to recover
damages against the Contractor and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5 In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Employer or a third party, and
the Contractor and Specialist are required under Clause 4 above to remove, rectify and/or make good such damage
or defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Employer's notice in writing, then
upon completion of such work, the Employer shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the
work which the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer, a person
nominated by him in writing may determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Employer or third
party, and the valuation of such work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a
combination of the methods mentioned below in descending order of priority :
(a) by measurement and valuation at fair market rates and prices; or
(b) if the above method is not applicable, then the valuation shall be based on the actual cost of
necessary materials or goods, labour, Construction Equipment and equipment (other than
ordinary plant) plus 15% which percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools and
supervision, overheads and profits.
6 The approval by the Employer of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
Contractor and/or the Specialist from their responsibility to rectify future occurrence of defects in respect of such
works.
BLDG17/A1.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1
Page 3
7 It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer
against all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Employer in relation to any damage to
property or injury to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the
Specialist's employees, representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public
Liability Insurance Policy for the execution of such works.
8 The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Employer against any compensation payable
by the Employer under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident
arising out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of
this Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a
Workmen's Compensation Policy for the execution of such works.
9 This Warranty shall not be invalidated in the event another person is instructed to execute the
rectification work on account of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under
Clauses 4 and 5 above, nor shall this Warranty be invalidated in the event a third party is engaged without the
consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist to carry out regular maintenance and cleaning of the Works,
provided that in the latter event, any rectification work or part thereof undertaken by the Contractor and/or Specialist
that is occasioned by the negligence of such third party shall be valued in the manner described in Clause 5 above
and paid by the Employer.
10 All differences and/or disputes arising under this Warranty (including questions relating to interpretation)
shall be determined by the Employer's Chief Executive Officer or at the discretion of the Chief Executive Officer,
by a person nominated in writing by him. Any decision by the Chief Executive Officer or his nominee under this
Clause shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings
that may arise under this Warranty unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising
under this Warranty.
11 This Warranty shall remain valid and shall not be affected by any extensions, variations or compositions
granted or entered into with respect to the terms of or obligations under the Contract.
12 This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict between the two
documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
13 The validity, construction and interpretation of this Warranty and all rights, obligations and liabilities
arising hereunder shall be governed by, and interpreted in accordance with, the laws of Singapore.
14 The Employer shall have the absolute discretion to assign the benefit of this Warranty to any third
parties without the consent of the Contractor and/or the Specialist.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF we have hereunto set our hands and seals the day of
20 .
BLDG17/A1.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1(TC)
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR PRE-TREATMENT OF SOIL FOR

PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AGAINST SUB-TERRANEAN TERMITES
To : .....................................................
.....................................................
STAMP
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1) .................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................
(2) .................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Pre-Treatment of Soil
for Protection of Buildings Against Sub-Terranean Termites (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the
Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause ........................ of ....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ...................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Council") this Warranty.
Contractor and the Specialist, the Contractor and the Specialist agree with the Council as follows :
1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of five (5) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from subterranean termite infestation (hereinafter
referred to as "defects") (restriction to soil treatment by virtue of compliance with ENV's requirements
notwithstanding).
BLDG17/A1T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1(TC)
Page 2
Contractor and the Specialist are deemed to have waived this defence in the event a claim is made by the Council
or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing. If such damage or defects are attributable to the Contractor's
or Specialist's breach of warranty under Clause 2 above, then the cost of such removal rectification and/or making
good work shall be borne by the Contractor and/or Specialist. If the Contractor and/or Specialist shall fail to comply
within the period or duration specified, it shall be lawful for the Council to order such damage or defects as are
referred to in such notice to be removed, rectified and/or made good by any other person and recover from the
Contractor and/or Specialist such cost and expense incurred for which they may be liable. PROVIDED ALWAYS
that such instructions shall be issued without prejudice to the Council's right to recover damages against the
Contractor and/or the Specialist by reason of their failure to comply with this Clause.
5 In the event such damage or defects are caused wholly or in part by the Council or a third party, and
or defects including ancillary works within the period or duration specified by the Council's notice in writing, then
upon completion of such work, the Council shall pay the Contractor and Specialist for the work or that part of the
work which the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, a person nominated by him in writing may
determine as occasioned by damage or defects caused by the Council or third party, and the valuation of such
work or such part of the work shall be ascertained in accordance with one or a combination of the methods
mentioned below in descending order of priority :
6 The approval by the Council of any works required under Clauses 4 or 5 above does not absolve the
works.
BLDG17/A1T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A1(TC)
Page 3
7 It is a term of this Warranty that the Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against
all loss damage cost and expense suffered or incurred by the Council in relation to any damage to property or injury
to person caused or occasioned by the acts or omissions of the Contractor's and/or the Specialist's employees,
representatives or workmen in the course of the works undertaken under the terms of this Warranty. The Contractor
and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a Public Liability Insurance Policy for
the execution of such works.
8 The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall indemnify the Council against any compensation payable by
the Council under the Workmen's Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) in connection with any accident arising
out of rectification works undertaken by the Contractor and/or the Specialist pursuant to the provisions of this
Warranty. The Contractor and/or the Specialist shall at their own cost and expense effect and maintain a
rectification works on account of the Contractor's and/or Specialist's failure to discharge their obligations under
and paid by the Council.
shall be determined by the Council's Chairman or at the discretion of the Chairman, by a person nominated in
writing by him. Any decision by the Chairman or his nominee under this Clause shall be final and binding on and
conclusive against the Contractor and/or the Specialist in any proceedings that may arise under this Warranty
unless otherwise determined by the Court in respect of proceedings arising under this Warranty.
20 .
BLDG17/A1T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A2
APPENDIX A3
APPENDIX A4
APPENDIX A2
RESERVED
APPENDIX A3
RESERVED
APPENDIX A4
RESERVED
BLDG17/A2A4.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING

STAMP
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1) ..................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(2) ..................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request
of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of .......................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of Six (6) years (hereinafter
called the "Warranty Period") that the Works shall remain free from defects, including but not limited to blistering,
algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking.
BLDG17/A5.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5
Page 2
works.
BLDG17/A5.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5
Page 3
12 This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict
between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
20 .
BLDG17/A5.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5(TC)
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING
To : .....................................................
.....................................................
STAMP
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1) ..................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(2) ..................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of External Painting Works
(hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the consent of the Employer given at the request
of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The Contractor and the Specialist jointly and severally warrant for a period of six (6) years (hereinafter
algae growth, uneven fading, peeling, discolouration and chalking.
BLDG17/A5T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5(TC)
Page 2
works.
BLDG17/A5T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A5(TC)
Page 3
20 .
BLDG17/A5T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CAST–IN–SITU EPDM

RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND

STAMP
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1) .................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(2) .................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM
Rubber Flooring For Children’s Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause ...................... of ......................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give this Warranty.
fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.
BLDG17/A6.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6
Page 2
works.
BLDG17/A6.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6
Page 3
12 This Warranty shall be read together with the Contract but in case of any conflict
between the two documents the provisions of this Warranty shall prevail.
20 .
BLDG17/A6.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6(TC)
DEED OF WARRANTY FOR CAST–IN–SITU EPDM

RUBBER FLOORING FOR CHILDREN’S PLAYGROUND
To : .....................................................
.....................................................
STAMP
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
CONTRACT NO. ................................................
WHEREAS :
(1) ........................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(2) ...................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") is the specialist engaged by the Contractor in respect of Cast-In-Situ EPDM
Rubber Flooring For Children’s Playground (hereinafter called the "Works") required under the Contract with the
consent of the Employer given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) Pursuant to Clause ........................ of .....................................................................................................

of the Contract the Contractor is obliged and has agreed to give to the ....................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................
fissure, peeling, delamination, disintegration, uneven fading and discolouration.
BLDG17/A6T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6(TC)
Page 2
works.
BLDG17/A6T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A6(TC)
Page 3
20 .
BLDG17/A6T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A7 to APPENDIX A10
APPENDIX A7 to APPENDIX A10
RESERVED
BLDG17/A7A10.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 1
INSTRUCTION ON WORK INJURY COMPENSATION POLICY
1. The Policy shall be issued in the prescribed form produced in Appendix A11 (please do not re-type).
2. The Policy shall include the following requirements :
(a) The Insured shall be "(Name of Contractor to insert) as Contractor and all his sub-contractors, and
the Housing & Development Board as Principal FTRR & I".
(b) The period of insurance shall commence from the date the site is handed over to the Contractor
and shall end upon expiry of the Defects Liability Period under the Contract.
BLDG17/A11.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 2
Policy No. :
Insurer's Company Stamp :
WORK INJURY COMPENSATION POLICY
BLDG17/A11.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 3
Policy No. :
WORK INJURY COMPENSATION POLICY
WHEREAS the Insured carrying on the Business described in the SCHEDULE and no other for the purpose of this
insurance by an application which shall be the basis of this contract and is deemed to be incorporated herein has
applied to the Insurer for the insurance hereinafter contained and has paid or agreed to pay the Premium stated in
the SCHEDULE as consideration for such insurance.
NOW THIS POLICY WITNESSETH that if any employee in the Insured's employment shall sustain personal injury
by accident or disease caused during the Period of Insurance and arising out of and in the course of his employment
by the Insured in the Business, the Insurer will subject to the terms exceptions conditions and warranties, and any
memorandum if applicable, contained herein or endorsed hereon (all of which are hereinafter collectively referred
to as the Terms of this Policy) indemnify the Insured against all sums for which the Insured shall be liable to pay
compensation either under the Legislation or at Common Law, and will in addition pay all costs and expenses
incurred by the Insured with the written consent of the Insurer.
In the event of the death of the Insured the Insurer will indemnify the Insured's legal personal representatives in
accordance with the Terms of this Policy in respect of liability incurred by the Insured provided that such personal
representatives shall as though they were the Insured observe comply fulfil and be subject to the Terms of this
Policy in so far as they can apply.
PROVIDED ALWAYS that in the event of any change in the Legislation or the substitution by other Legislation
therefor this policy shall remain in force and the Insurer reserves the right to charge additional premium therefor.
JURISDICTION
1. This Policy shall be governed by the laws of the Republic of Singapore.
2. The indemnity under this Policy shall not apply in respect of judgements which are not in the first instance
delivered by or obtained from a court of tribunal of competent jurisdiction within the Republic of Singapore.
AVOIDANCE OF CERTAIN TERMS AND RIGHT OF RECOVERY
Nothing in this Policy or any endorsement hereon shall affect :
(a) the right of any person entitled to indemnity under this Policy; or
(b) the right of any other person to recover compensation,
under or by virtue of the Legislation.
BUT the Insured shall repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been
liable to pay but for the Legislation.
BLDG17/A11.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 4
Policy No. :
EXCEPTIONS
The Insurer shall not be liable in respect of :
(a) any employee of the Insured who is not a "employee" within the meaning of the Legislation unless such
employee of the Insured is covered under this Policy by virtue of Clauses 11 and 12 of the Conditions;
(b) any injury by accident or disease attributable to war hostilities (whether war be declared or not) invasion
act of foreign enemies rebellion revolution insurrection or military or usurped power or civil war;
(c) any liability of whatsoever nature directly or indirectly caused by or contributed to by or arising from :
(i) ionising radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear fuel or from any nuclear waste
from the combustion of nuclear fuel radio-active toxic explosive or other hazardous properties of
any explosive nuclear assembly or nuclear component
(ii) pressure waves caused by aircraft or other aerial devices travelling at sonic or supersonic speeds
(d) any injury to any employee of the Insured resulting from an accident if it is proved that the injury to the
employee is directly attributable to the employee having been at the time thereof under the influence of
alcohol or a drug not prescribed by a medical practitioner unless the Insured is liable under the Legislation;
(e) any incapacity or death resulting from a deliberate self-injury or the deliberate aggravation of an accidental
injury.
CONDITIONS
1. This Policy and the SCHEDULE shall be read together as one contract and any word or expression to
which a specific meaning has been attached in any part of this Policy or the SCHEDULE shall bear such
specific meaning wherever it may appear.
2. In so far as it is not prohibited by the Legislation the Insured shall at all times observe, comply and fulfil
the Terms of this Policy.
3. The truth of the statements and answers in the application shall be conditions precedent to any liability of
the Insurer to make any payment under this Policy and shall be the basis of this contract.
4. Every notice or communication to be given or made under this Policy shall be delivered in writing to the
Insurer.
5. The Insured shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent accidents and disease to the Insured's
employee and shall comply with all statutory obligations and requirements.
BLDG17/A11.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 5
Policy No. :
6. (a) In the event of the occurrence of any accident/occupational disease that may give rise to a
claim under this Policy, the Insured shall give notice of the occurrence in accordance with the
time limits set out by Legislation to the Insurer with full particulars. If the notice period is not
stipulated by legislation for a particular occurrence then notice of the occurrence shall be given to
the Insurer within 10 days of the Insured having knowledge of the same.
(b) Every letter claim writ summons and process shall be notified or forwarded to the Insurer
immediately on receipt. Notice shall also be given to the Insurer immediately the Insured shall
have knowledge of any impending prosecution inquest or fatal inquiry in connection with any such
accident or disease.
7. No admission offer promise or payment shall be made by or on behalf of the Insured without the written
consent of the Insurer. The Insurer shall be entitled if it so desires to take over and conduct in the Insured's
name the defence or settlement of any claim or to prosecute in the Insured's name for its own benefit any
claim for indemnity or damages or otherwise and shall have full discretion in the conduct of any
proceedings and in the settlement of any claim and the Insured shall give such information and assistance
as the Insurer may require.
8. The Insurer may cancel this Policy by giving thirty (30) days' notice by registered letter to the Insured at
his last known address and in such event the Insurer will return to the Insured the premium paid less the
actual premium payable for the period during which the Policy had been in force subject to a minimum
premium payment of #$ by the Insured.
This Policy may be cancelled at any time by the Insured by giving seven (7) days' written notice to the
Insurer and provided no claim has arisen during the period which the Policy had been in force the Insured
shall be entitled to a return of premium subject to a minimum premium payment of #$ by
the Insured and subject to any adjustment of premium required by the terms or conditions of this Policy.
The Insurer shall notify the Principal Housing & Development Board before the cancellation of this Policy.
9. This Policy shall cover all * 's insurance

obligations with regard to Work Injury Compensation stated in the Contract between the Principal Housing
& Development Board and *
10. (i) In the event of any employee employed by the within Insured or by the Insured's Contractors as
referred to in (ii) hereon or any dependant of such employee, bringing or making a claim under any
Work Injury Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law against
the Principal Housing & Development Board for personal injury or disease sustained whilst at work
on any Contract covered by this Policy which the Insured may be carrying out for the Principal
Housing & Development Board the Insurer will indemnify the said Principal Housing & Development
Board against such claim and any costs charges and expenses in respect thereof. Provided always
that the Insurer shall be entitled to have the sole conduct and control of all proceedings connected
with claims covered by this. Nothing herein shall be construed as affecting the Insured's right to
recover damages in any other way under the said Legislation.
(ii) The indemnity herein granted is intended to cover the legal liability of the Insured to employees in
the employment of contractors performing work for the Insured while engaged in the business and
occupation in respect of which the Policy is granted but only so far as regards claims under any
Work Injury Compensation Act for the time being in force in Singapore or at Common Law.
*Name of Contractor to be inserted

#
To be filled in by Insurer
BLDG17/A11.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A11
Page 6
Policy No. :
11. In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described
in the Schedule it is hereby agreed that the Insurer will not in the event of any accident or disease arising
out of and in the course of their employment by the Insured in the Business raise the defence that such
employee is not a person employed by way of manual labour within the meaning of the Legislation.
12. In consideration of premium being paid in respect of employees of the Insured in an Occupation described
in the Schedule it is hereby agreed that the Policy is extended to indemnify the Insured in respect of the
Insured's liability at common law for any accident or disease arising out of and in the course of their
employment by the Insured in the Business.
13. All disputes or differences under this Policy shall be referred to Arbitration in accordance with the
Arbitration Act (Chapter 10) or any statutory re-enactment thereof. The making of an Award by an
Arbitrator or Arbitrators as hereinbefore specified shall be a condition precedent to any right of action
against the Insurer.
14. At any time after the happening of any accident or disease giving rise to a claim or series of claims under
this Policy the Insurer may pay to the Insured the full amount of the Insurer's liability and relinquish the
conduct of any claim defence or proceedings and the Insurer shall not be responsible for any damage
loss or liability alleged to have been caused to the Insured in consequence of any alleged act or omission
of the Insurer in connection with such claim defence or proceedings or of the Insurer relinquishing such
conduct nor shall the Insurer be liable for any costs or expenses whatsoever incurred by the Insured or
any claimant or other person after the Insurer shall have relinquished such conduct.
INTERPRETATION
1. ALL references to "Legislation" in this Policy shall mean the Work Injury Compensation Act (Cap 354),
amendments and re-enactments thereof and any regulations made thereunder.
2. Words used in the Policy shall have the same meanings as that defined in the Legislation.
WARRANTY
The Insured warrants that in the event of any failure by him to comply with any of the Terms of this Policy, he shall
repay to the Insurer all sums paid by the Insurer which the Insurer would not have been liable to pay but for the
Legislation.
PREMIUM WARRANTY CLAUSE
1. Notwithstanding anything herein contained but subject to clause 2 hereof, it is hereby agreed and declared
that if the period of insurance is 60 days or more, any premium due must be paid and actually received in
full by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within 60 days of the
inception date of the respective coverage under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note or effective
date of each Endorsement, if any, issued under the Policy, Renewal Certificate or Cover Note.
2. In the event that any premium due is not paid and actually received in full by the Insurer (or the
intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within the 60-day period referred to above, then:-
(a) the respective cover under the Policy, Renewal Certificate, Cover Note or Endorsement is
automatically terminated immediately after the expiry of the said 60-day period;
(b) the automatic termination of the respective cover shall be without prejudice to any liability
incurred within the said 60-day period; and
(c) the Insurer shall be entitled to a pro-rata time on risk premium for the respective coverage subject
to a minimum of $25.00.
3. If the Period of Insurance is less than 60 days, any premium due must be paid and actually received in
full by the Insurer (or the intermediary through whom this Policy was effected) within the Period of
Insurance.
# To be filled in by Insurer
BLDG17/A11.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A12
APPENDIX A12
RESERVED
BLDG17/A12.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD

480 Lorong 6 TOA PAYOH
HDB HUB
SINGAPORE 310480
CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLY OF MATERIALS FROM THE EMPLOYER
1 DEFINITION
1.1 In this "Conditions For The Supply Of Materials From The Employer", the following words and
expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise
requires:
(a) "Employer" : means the Housing & Development Board, Republic of

Singapore.
(b) "Materials" : means Ordinary Portland Cement, Concreting Sand and

20mm Aggregate to be supplied by the Employer.
(c) "Managing Agent" : means the company engaged by the Employer for managing
the supply & distribution of Materials to the Contractor.
(d) "SO Rep" : means the Superintending Officer's Representative. In

addition, for the purposes of managing the supply and
distribution of Materials to the Contractor only, shall also
means the authorised person of Managing Agent.
(e) "Destination of Delivery" : means the Contract Site and/or any other places within
or "Site" Singapore as approved by the SO Rep to which the Materials
shall be delivered.
(f) “Employer’s Supplier” : shall mean the Employer’s supplier of the Materials who shall
be responsible for delivering the Materials to the Site.
(g) “electronic - Direct : means the online web-based system provided by the
Procurement Supply Employer for the submission of Materials’ requirements and
Scheme System” monthly materials orders.
1.2 Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the context requires.
2 SUPPLY ARRANGEMENT
The Materials shall be supplied by the Employer inclusive of delivery to the Destination of Delivery as
requested by the Contractor and approved by the SO Rep. The Employer's delivery service shall be
provided only for Destination of Delivery within Singapore.
3 ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION VIA e-DIRECT PROCUREMENT SUPPLY SCHEME SYSTEM (e-

DPSS)
The Contractor shall be required to use the online web-based electronic-Direct Procurement Supply
Scheme system (hereinafter referred to as “e-DPSS system”) provided by the Employer for the
submission of Materials’ requirements and monthly materials orders.
The e-DPSS system shall be accessible from the HDB BGBiz portal at http://bgbiz.hdb.gov.sg and all
data accessed shall be confined to the Project. The Contractor shall complete and submit the
“Application Access Form” ONE WEEK before the commencement of the Contract. The Contractor
can download the “Application Access Form” from the HDB BGBiz portal under the Administration tab.
BLDG17/A13.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 2
3 ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION VIA e-DIRECT PROCUREMENT SUPPLY SCHEME SYSTEM (e-

DPSS)
(Cont’d)
The e-DPSS system comprises the following modules:
(A) System Administration Module
This module allows the Contractor to view the HDB posted prices of the Protected
Materials and approved listing of Ready Mixed Concrete Plant and Precast Concrete
plants information.
(B) Contract Administration Module
Contract particulars including extension date and billing address could be viewed by the
Contractor in this module.
(C) Contract Form A Module
This module allows the Contractor to submit/update/view online, their respective

contract site information, appointed delivery sites and the schedule of Materials’
Requirement for the respective part(s) of their contract.
(D) Material Ordering Module
The Contractor shall submit monthly orders online for each of the Materials required.
4 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS REQUIREMENT
The Contractor shall complete and submit, the Contract Site Information, Delivery Site Information and
Schedule of Material’s requirement (Schedule A) in the “Contract Form A Module” via the e-DPSS
system. The Form A must be submitted not later than ONE WEEK after the commencement of the
Contract for all the Materials to be obtained from the Employer. No Materials will be delivered prior to
the receipt of the duly completed submission.
5 MONTHLY ORDERS AND QUANTITY SUPPLIED
5.1 The Contractor shall submit monthly orders for each of the Materials required, via the e-DPSS system.
5.2 All monthly order shall be submitted to the Managing Agent by the 20th of each preceding month of
usage. Late submission of the monthly orders may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and
transport and priority will be given to monthly orders submitted before the due date and as approved by
the SO Rep. The Contractor shall bear all consequences for late submission of monthly order. The
Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of late submission
of monthly order. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any late
order.
5.3 The monthly ordered quantities shall indicate the quantities of Materials that the Contractor requires
based on the projected progress of work and concrete mixes. Notwithstanding the quantities submitted
by the Contractor in the monthly orders including any subsequent adjustment in the daily orders, the
SO Rep reserves the right to deliver the quantities which the SO Rep considers are the quantities
reflective of the Contractor's work progress and/or concrete mixes as specified or as approved by the
SO Rep.
In the event that there is a discrepancy between the quantities of Materials indicated in the monthly
orders and the Form A, the latter will prevail.
In such an event, the SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the allocated quantities.
BLDG17/A13.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 3
5 MONTHLY ORDERS AND QUANTITY SUPPLIED (Cont’d)
5.4 Additional orders/loads may be accepted subject to the availability of supply and transport. The
Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or disruption to the works as a result of additional
orders. The Contractor shall allow for at least 2 working days for the processing of any additional order.
5.5 The quantity of Materials delivered shall be determined by the Employer's weighbridges or the
Employer’s Supplier’s weighbridges.
5.6 The Contractor shall consume at least 80% of their monthly orders. Any cancellation of the monthly
orders request greater than 20% of the monthly orders shall be made in writing and endorsed by the
SO Rep before sending to the Managing Agent. For any cancellation of the monthly orders greater than
20% of the monthly orders without the SO Rep’s endorsement, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose
a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.
5.7 Additional orders for any particular month may be accepted only after the Contractor has consumed at
least 80% of the monthly ordered/allocated quantity. The Contractor must submit their written additional
order duly signed by the SO Rep before sending to the Managing Agent (Please refer to 5.4).
5.8 The Contractor shall maintain at least 3 days' stock of Materials at their Site whenever possible.
5.9 If at any time the Employer’s Supplier fails to supply the quantity of the Materials stated in the daily
schedule that is likely to cause disruption to the works, the Contractor shall immediately notify the SO
Rep in writing and copied to the Managing Agent within two working days and follow-up with the
Managing Agent to arrange the delivery.
5.10 For order, supply and e-DPSS enquiry, the Contractor may contact the Managing Agent via
Tel : 6786 1618

Fax : 6786 5996
6 DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
6.1 Notwithstanding the submission by the Contractor of the aforementioned Schedule of Materials
Requirement and the monthly orders of Materials or the revisions thereof, the Contractor shall give at
least TWO WORKING DAYS' PRIOR NOTICE for any changes to the daily delivery or cancellation of
supply. The notice shall reach the Managing Agent before 4.00pm on weekdays and 12 noon on
Saturdays & the eves of public holidays.
6.2 The delivery of Materials shall be made from 8.00am to 6.00pm on Mondays to Saturdays. For any
delivery of Materials to be made after these hours, the Contractor shall be required to make his own
arrangement with the Employer’s Suppliers who are under no obligation to deliver after these hours.
6.3 All deliveries shall be made in full lorry loads and the Contractor shall not request delivery of partial lorry
loads in any case. In this respect, the Contractor shall note that delivery will cease at the last lorry load
before exceeding the quantity stipulated or approved in the Contract (hereinafter known as “Approved
Protected Quantity”). As long as the remaining quantity before exceeding the stipulated quantities are
not more than 20 tonnes, the Contractor is deemed to have met the full requirements of the Stipulated
Contract Quantity and there shall not be any cost recovery.
6.4 The Contractor shall sign and stamp the Delivery Orders with the appropriate stamp (see Table 1). If
the Contractor shall fail to observe this requirement, the SO Rep shall take appropriate action and the
Employer shall not be responsible for any resulting delay.
BLDG17/A13.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 4
6 DAILY DELIVERY OF MATERIALS (Cont’d)
6.4.1 The Delivery Orders can only be stamped once. The Contractor shall inform the Managing Agent
immediately and rectify the error if the Contractor has affixed the wrong Company stamp on the Delivery
Orders. The SO Rep reserves the right to suspend delivery of Material for three (3) days if such default
happens more than three (3) times within a calendar month, or to impose a charge as specified under
the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause on the Contractor per default including the first three (3)
defaults. The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the delivery of Material for seven (7)
days if the Contractor was found to have failed to inform the Managing Agent that they have affixed the
wrong Company stamp. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delays resulting from such
suspensions.
Table 1
Different Types Of Rubber Stamps To Be Used
Information to be produced
Destination of Delivery
on Contractor's Rubber Stamp
1. Contractor's Company Name

Contract Site 2. Contract Site
3. Contract No.

2. Contract Site
Ready-Mixed Company 3. Contract No.
4. RMC Company
5. RMC Site

2. Contract Site
Batching Plant Site
3. Contract No.
4. Batching Plant Site
6.4.2 When a Delivery Order is signed by a Contractor's Representative (whether authorised or otherwise)
with the Contractor's Company stamp, the delivery is deemed to have been made to and accepted by
the Contractor and no dispute shall be raised by the Contractor that the said Materials have not been
received and accepted by the Contractor.
6.5 The Contractor shall immediately inform and request the Managing Agent for instructions should there
be any load of Material wrongly delivered to the Site. The Contractor shall not alter any Delivery Order
without the consent of the Managing Agent. The SO Rep reserves the right to take appropriate action
against the Contractor for any unauthorised alteration of the Delivery Orders.
6.6 The Contractor may submit a report to the Managing Agent for appropriate action if the load of Material
is unloaded at a wrong place within the Site. Notwithstanding this, the Contractor shall still acknowledge
receipt of the Material.
7 QUALITY OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED
The quality of Materials supplied by the Employer shall comply with the Specifications in the Contract.
8 WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR DELIVERY TO PLACES OTHER THAN THE CONTRACT SITE
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the SO Rep for delivery of Materials to ready-mixed
companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or place.
BLDG17/A13.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 5
9 SKETCH MAP AND ACCESS ROAD
9.1 The Contractor shall provide a sketch map in “Contract Form A module”, via the e-DPSS system,
showing the location of the Site and the stockpile areas where the respective Materials should be
delivered.
9.2 The Contractor shall maintain and ensure that all access roads at the Site leading to the stockpile areas
as shown on their sketch map are accessible to the lorries of the Employer’s Supplier. The Contractor
shall provide all necessary assistance and facilities to the Employer’s Supplier.
9.3 The SO Rep reserves the right to immediately suspend the supply of Materials if the access road to the
Site is bad or muddy. The SO Rep shall inform the Contractor of the suspension and the Contractor
shall take immediate action to make good the access roads and inform the Managing Agent accordingly
before delivery of Materials can resume. The Employer shall not be responsible for any delay or
disruption of the work as a result of this aforesaid suspension.
9.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay any summon issued by the National Environment
Agency to the Employer’s Supplier(s) for muddying up public roads due to muddy access within the
Contractor's Site and the Contractor shall keep the Employer fully indemnified against such penalties
and liabilities. The Contractor is advised to employ labourers to wash the lorries of the Employer’
Supplier(s) before the lorries leave the Contractor's Site.
10 ABSENCE OF SITE REPRESENTATIVE OR IN ACCESSIBLE ACCESS
If any load of Materials cannot, upon arrival at Site within the specified time, be unloaded due to the
absence of the Contractor's Site representative or bad access or failure to inform the Managing Agent
of any termination of the usage of ready-mix companies, batching plant sites or to any other location or
place, the load of Material will be returned to the Managing Agent. For such cases, the SO Rep reserves
the right to recover from the Contractor, the costs involved in transporting the Material and to impose a
charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And Irregularities" clause in the Specifications.
11 SIPHONING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall not siphon Materials obtained from the Employer for his own use. Action shall be
taken by the SO Rep to impose a charge on the Contractor as specified in the "Nuisance And
Irregularities" clause in the event of any such breach.
12 LOSS OF DELIVERY ORDERS
If the Contractor loses any Delivery Order and wishes to request for a duplicate copy of the lost Delivery
Order, the SO Rep reserves the right to impose a fee of $50.00 (DOLLARS: FIFTY ONLY) per occasion.
BLDG17/A13.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A13
Page 6
13 METHOD OF PAYMENT
The Contractor shall pay the Employer in full for the value of Materials supplied every month at the rates
specified in the Contract. The amount owed by the Contractor shall be recoverable from the Contractor
by the Employer or may be deducted by the Employer from any monies due or becoming due to the
Contractor.
14 MISCONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORKMEN
The Contractor is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his workmen, agents and staff at
the Site and shall give full cooperation to the Employer’s Supplier’s drivers in the delivery and unloading
of Materials. Any grievances should be directed to the SO Rep in writing. The Contractor shall bear all
the cost plus administrative cost for investigations and other consequential expenses, if their complaints
are proven to be unfounded.
BLDG17/A13.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A14
Page 1
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

Clause 38.9 "Refuse Chute Flushing System"
The Contractor shall provide the following information when making submission to the SO Rep for approval.
Contract Title : __________________________________________
Contract No. : __________________________________________
SO Rep : __________________________________________
Block No. : __________________________________________
Location : __________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
SOLENOID VALVES
Brand : __________________________________________
Type : __________________________________________
Model : __________________________________________
Country of Origin : __________________________________________
Voltage : __ Volts Hz
Coil Insulation : Class _____________________________________
Enclosure Protection : __________________________________________
Flow Rating : l/s when the pressure difference across the value is 1 bar.
Holding Power : w
Operating Temperature : Ambient temp degree celcius
: Fluid temp degree celcius
Operating Pressure Range : 0 to bars
BLDG17/A14.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A14
Page 2
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

Material - Valve Body : __________________________________________
Plunger : __________________________________________
Diaphragm : __________________________________________
Others (please specify) : __________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel Manufacturer : __________________________________________
MCB - Make : __________________________________________
- Type : __________________________________________
- Rating : __________________________________________
ELCB - Make : __________________________________________
- Type : __________________________________________
- Tripping Current : __________________________________________
Printed Circuit Board Manufacturer : __________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of Contractor : __________________________________________
Address : __________________________________________
__________________________________________
Signature : __________________________________________
Name & Position : __________________________________________
Tel No. : __________________________________________
Date : __________________________________________
BLDG17/A14.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A14
Page 3
TESTING DATA ON REFUSE CHUTE FLUSHING SYSTEM

The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system
Contract Title : Contract No. :
Block No. : Ref No. :
Location : Contractor :
A. SOLENOID VALVE - C. CONTROL PANEL Brand Model
1. Brand 1. Timer ( 0 - 30 ) mins
2. Type 2. Control MCB
3. Model 3. Red indicator light
4. Voltage 4. Green indicator light
B. PIPE, FITTING & VALVES Brand 5. Control relay AC 230V
1. Pipe 6. Terminal block
2. Fitting
3. 40mm Ball Stop Valve
4. 40mm Stopcock
5. 32mm Check Valve
Recorded & Submitted by : ________________________________ _________________________

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature)/Date
__________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE

Solenoid Valve Pass/Fail
Tested by : ____________________________ Checked & Verified by : _________________________

(1) TE/HTN/TN ( ) Date STE/HTE ( ) Date
(2) TE/HTN/TN ( )
BLDG17/A14.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A15
Page 1
FORM PH-G2
Our Ref :
Date :
Tel :
Fax :
City Gas Ref No:
To : General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
Attn:
(City Gas' Project Co-ordinator)
APPLICATION FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST OF GAS INSTALLATION AT
(Address of Premises/Development)
PART I
I, hereby, submit my application for testing of the following gas installation work :
(Please tick the appropriate boxes)
□ External and internal gas service pipe □ Internal gas pipe
The abovementioned work was carried out by our appointed LGSW. The as-built drawing (inclusive of line
diagram) is attached.
I confirm that the work has been carried out in accordance with the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002
Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe
Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for Gas Supply and all relevant acts,
regulations and rules.
I will notify all parties of the date for final pressure test.
Name of Designated Representative :
Signature : Date:
I certify that the gas pipe installation for the above project has been completed and is in accordance with
the Public Utilities Act (Cap. 261) (2002 Ed), Public Utilities (Gas Supply) Regulations 1998 Ed, the Code of
Practice for Manufactured Gas Pipe Installation, Singapore Standard, CP51, the Procedures and Requirements for
Gas Supply and all relevant acts, regulations and rules, and is ready for the final pressure test.
Name of Qualified Person (QP):
Signature : Date:
____________________________________________________________________________
PART II (This section is applicable only for minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installation)
I also request that gas be turn-on to the installation upon successful completion of the final pressure test.
After turn-on of the gas supply, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly not to tamper with the gas installation.
Signature of Designated Representative Date

____________________________________________________________________________
cc (1) Developer/Owner
(2) Professional Engineer
(3) Architect (Please see overleaf on Notes)
(4) Main Contractor
BLDG17/A15.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A15
Page 2
NOTES:
a) The applicant shall be the Designated Representative.
b) The Designated Representative must attend the final inspection and final pressure test.
c) Final pressure test and turn-on of gas supply will be carried out in one operation for
the following minor addition and alteration work on existing gas installations:
1 Turn-on of single/multi stall after charge-up to food court/eating house/canteen.
2 Replacement/addition/relocation of appliances, inclusive of minor pipe

extensions.
3 Renewal of corroded gas pipes.
4 Installation of valves.
5 Termination/cap-off of gas pipes.
6 Diversion/alteration/addition of existing service pipes in void deck or ground

floor of residential premises.
BLDG17/A15.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A16
FORM PH-G1B
Our Ref :
Date :
Tel :
Fax :
General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd
111 Somerset Road
#05-05
Singapore 238164
Attn : ___________________________________
(Name of City Gas’ Project Coordinator)
Dear Sir
APPOINTMENT OF DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE (DR) FOR GAS PIPE INSTALLATION AT
(Name of Project with Block No.)
I hereby appoint the following Licensed Gas Service Worker (LGSW) to be my Designated Representative
(DR) to liaise directly with your Project Coordinator on all matters relating to gas pipe installation. However I am
still fully responsible for all gas pipe installation matters in this project.
Name of DR (LGSW) :
Licence No. :
Address :
Tel No. :
Fax No. :
Yours faithfully
NAME & SIGNATURE OF QUALIFIED PERSON

PE NO. :
CONTRACT NO. :
cc
PMgr, Consultant (Attn: ______________)
Mech Engr, Consultant (Attn: ______________)
Note : This Form is to be used by the Qualified Person if he wishes to delegate part of his responsibility to the
DR(LGSW).
BLDG17/A16.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A17
FORM PH-GR2
Our Ref :
Your Ref :
Date :
Tel :
Fax No. :
To : _______________________________ (QP / DR)

_______________________________
_______________________________
Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR FINAL PRESSURE TEST AT ____________________________________________

(Name of Project & Block No.)
1 We are pleased to inform that your application for Final Pressure Test dated _______________ for gas
supply has been approved.
2 The test will be carried out on __________________ at _____________.
3 As the Designated Representative, you are required to be present. You are also required to notify all
parties of the date and time for the Final Pressure Test.
4 For clarification, please contact our Project Coordinator Mr _______________ at Tel _____________.
Yours faithfully
for SENIOR MANAGER

(CUSTOMER SUPPLY)
cc
GDDP, HDB (Attn : ________________)
BLDG17/A17.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A18
FORM PH-G2A
City Gas Ref No:
To: General Manager

City Gas Pte Ltd
Attn:
(Name of City Gas’ Project Co-ordinator)
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PRESSURE TEST
LOCATION:
ADDRESS:
AS-BUILT PLAN NOS:
__ _ _ _ _ _ ___
(1) This is to certify that the gas installation has passed the final pressure test on
_______________. No person shall be allowed to carry out any further work on the
installation without prior written approval from City Gas.
Certified by: ______________________________________

(Designated Representative)
PE No./LGSW No: ______________________
Date: __________________
__ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Approved by: ________________________________________

(City Gas’ Project Co-ordinator)
Date: __________________
cc 1) Architect
2) Owner/Developer
3) Qualified Person
4) Main Contractor
BLDG17/A18.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A19
FORM PH-G3
Our Ref :
Date :
Tel :
Fax :
City Gas Ref No :
To : General Manager
City Gas Pte Ltd.
Attn :
(City Gas' Project Co-ordinator)
REQUEST FOR CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON OF GAS TO
(Address of premises/development)
As-Built Plan Nos :
1. I certify that the site is ready to receive gas. I further certify that the gas installation has passed the final
pressure test , no further work has been carried out on the gas installation after the final pressure test and is safe
for CHARGE-IN/TURN-ON.
2. After charge-in/turn-on of the gas supply to the above project, I will inform all relevant parties accordingly
not to tamper with the gas installation. I also undertake to affix warning labels at all end-points of the gas pipe
installation.
3. I attach a copy of the line drawing of the installation covered under this application. A copy of the line
diagram has been given to the owner for display.
4. The number of end-points in the gas pipe installation is .
Signature of Designated Representative Date
PE No/LGSW No :
Name
Address :
Tel No :
Note : 1) In the case of a designated representative who has been nominated by the Qualified Person, he
should only be allowed to submit this application with the consent of the main contractor and the
Qualified Person.
CONSENT BY QUALIFIED PERSON AND MAIN CONTRACTOR/OWNER

(where applicable)
We consent to the above application.
Name of Qualified Person/Owner : Signature :
PE No : Date :
Name of authorised person on behalf of Main Contractor :

(with company stamp)
Signature : Date :
BLDG17/A19.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A20
FORM PH-GR3
Our Ref :
Date :
Tel :
Fax :
To : ____________________________________________ (QP / DR)
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
Dear Sir
APPROVAL FOR CHARGE-IN / TURN-ON OF GAS SUPPLY AT ___________________________________

(Name of Project & Block No.)
1 We refer to your application for charge-in/turn-on dated __________________ for gas supply to the
above project / block.
2 We are pleased to inform you that your application has been approved and the work will be carried out
on __________________ at ___________.
3 You are required to notify all relevant parties to witness the charge-in.
Yours faithfully
for SENIOR MANAGER

(CUSTOMER SUPPLY)
cc
HDB Project Director (Attn : )
BLDG17/A20.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A21
FORM PH-GR4
Our Ref :
Date :
Tel :
Fax :
To : ________________________________________ (PE / DR)

________________________________________
________________________________________
Dear Sir
STATEMENT OF TURN-ON OR CHARGE-IN OF GAS SUPPLY TO _______________________________

(Name of Project & block no)
1 This is to inform you that in response to your application for turn-on/charge-in of gas supply to the above
premises, we have on __________________(date) at ______________(time) introduced gas into the above gas
pipe installation. Kindly notify all relevant parties that gas has been turned on / charged in to the above premises.
2 You are hereby informed that no further work on the above gas pipe installation can be undertaken
without our written approval.
Yours faithfully
_____________________________________
Name & Signature of authorised officer
City Gas Pte Ltd
I acknowledge that gas has been turned on / charged in on the date and time as indicated above.
________________________________
Signature & Company Stamp of
Applicant / Designated Representative
________________________________
Name & NRIC / Passport No
Witnessed by HDB's Resident Technical Officer (applicable to gas mains only)
_________________________________
Name & Signature of HDB's Resident Technical Officer
cc
HDB Project Director (Attn : ____________________)
BLDG17/A21.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A22
Page 1
DATA ON TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM

Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details Of Transfer Pumping System"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all transfer pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title :
Contract No. :
SO Rep :
Building Block No. :
No. of Storeys :
__________________________________________________________________________________________
WATER SUPPLY
PUB direct water supply to : storey
No. of dwelling units to be supplied from roof tanks F = _______________________
Vertical Head from ground floor to inlet of roof tank H = metres
ROOF TANKS
(a) Total effective capacity of roof tanks required C1 = 650F* = Litres; m3
(b) No. of separate Tank groups (to be interlinked) =
(c) Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height)

Tank 1 = x x = m3
Tank 2 = x x = m3
or;
(d) Precast tanks = No. x 11.83 m3 = m3
*650L per dwelling unit is applicable to 3, 4 & 5 room type of flat. Please refer to HDB design brief or design
guide for the provision of other flat type.
SUCTION TANKS
(a) Capacity of suction tank = m3

Tank internal dimension (Length x Width x Height) = x x _________
or
(b) Precast tank = No. x 3.731 m3 = m3

__________________________________________________________________________________________
PUMP ROOM
Location : _____________________________
Platform Level : m
Floor space available : Length x Width = m2

Height = m
BLDG17/A22.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A22
Page 2

Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System"
PUMP
Discharge Capacity Required : Q1 = 0.05F = l/sec
Vertical Head : H1 = m water
Proposed Pumps : Make ___________________________

Type ___________________________
Model ___________________________
Flow : Q2 l/sec
Total Head : H2 m water
Speed : rpm
Impeller Diameter : mm
Power required : KW
Pump efficiency : %
(Please attach characteristics curve for pumps)
The Contractor must proposed the pump to operate at maximum pump efficiency. However, the flow rate shall
preferably not exceed 10 l/s and the pump efficiency shall not in any case be less than 55%.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
MOTOR
Make : ________________________________
Type : ________________________________
Model : ________________________________
Rated Output : ________________________________ KW
Voltage/Phase/Frequency : ________________________________
No-Load Speed : ________________________________ RPM
Insulation Class : ________________________________
Line Current at Full Load : ________________________________ amp

__________________________________________________________________________________________
COUPLING
Make and Type : ________________________________
Main Dimension : ________________________________
BLDG17/A22.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A22
Page 3

Clause 42.3 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Transfer Pumping System"
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for main incoming supply : Make _________________________________________

Type _________________________________________
Rating _________________________________________
Starter : MAKE, TYPE AND MODEL __________________________

Capacity ________________________________________
Overload release ratings ___________________________
Approximate KW ratings: KW at V ph
Floatless Level Switch : MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________
Time Switch : MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________

Reserve for hrs
Selector Switch : MAKE, TYPE & MODEL ___________________________
Automatic Change Over Relay : _________________________________________
PIPELINES
Diameter of Suction Pipe :
a. Total Length of Suction Line :
No. and Type of Valves Along Suction Line :
Diameter of Discharge Pipe :
Diameter of Rising Main :
b. Total Length of Discharging Line :

No. and Type of Valves Along Discharge Line :
Remarks :
Name of Contractor : _________________________________________________
Address : _________________________________________________
Signature : Name : ___________________________
Telephone No. : Date : ___________________________
BLDG17/A22.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A23
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON WATER TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM

Clause 42.26 "Testing of Transfer Pumping System Installation"
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the transfer
pumping system.
Contract Name : Contract No :
Block No : Ref No :
Street Name : Contractor :
Building Data
No. of Storey : Dwelling units per storey :
Direct Supply : storey Total dwelling units from tanks (F) :
Total Head : m Required pumping capacity (0.05xF) : l/s
Suction Tank: Precast Tank - Base Area of 2.865 m2
Pump / Motor Data Motor Pump

Type TEFC End Suction/Multi-stage
Brand
Model
Serial No 1
Serial No. 2
Coupling (brand / size )
Rated Output (kW) NA
Volt / Phase / Frequency 415 / 3 / 50 Hz NA
Insulation Class/Speed (rpm) / rpm NA
Rated Current (A) NA
Impeller Diameter (mm) NA
Specified capacity (l/s) NA
Fittings Data Ø 80mm (Brand) Ø 100mm (Brand)

Rubber expansion joint NA
Suction gate valve NA
Delivery gate valve
Check valve
BLDG17/A23.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A23
Page 2
Control Panel Data

Starter - Brand/Model
- Type
Starter Changeover Relay - Brand/Model
Starter MCB - Brand/Model
Overload Relay - Brand/Model
- Setting Range
Time switch - Brand/Model
- Serial No
Latching Relay - Brand/Model
8-Pin / 11-Pin Relay - Brand/Model
Suction Tank Module - Brand/Model
Storage Tank Module - Brand/Model
Suction Tank Electrode Holder - Brand
Storage Tank Electrode Holder - Brand
Recorded & Submitted by : _________

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature) Date
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Motor Motor 1 Motor 2

Starting/Changeover Current (A) / /
Running Current (A) R/Y/B / / / /
Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Tested by: _________________

Time for mm of water 1) TO/HTn/Tn ( ) Date
Approximate Capacity (l/s) 2) TO/HTn/Tn ( )
Electrode Length (mm)

ST NL EA BP
E0 Checked & Verified by :
E1 __________________________
E2 STO/HTO ( ) Date
E3 NA
BLDG17/A23.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A24
TESTING DATA ON INSTALLATION OF TELEMONITORING SYSTEM

FOR TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM
Clause 42.27.9 "Testing Of Installation"
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the
Telemonitoring System for Transfer Pumping System.

CONTROL PANEL BACKUP BATTERY

Brand Brand
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Model
Microprocessor (CPU) Voltage
Panel Door Key No. Ampere Hour (AH) Rating
Repair Technician's Key No.
TRANSFORMER RELAYS IN LIFT MOTOR ROOM
Primary Voltage Brand
Secondary Voltage Model
Voltage Ampere (VA) Rating Voltage
Submitted by : _____________________
Name & Company's Stamp Signature/Date
__________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICE USE ONLY
TYPE OF FAULTS FAULT CODE

1. SYSTEM POWER ON BATTERY 5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
2. CONTROL SUPPLY POWER FAILURE 5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
3. RED PHASE POWER FAILURE 5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
4. YELLOW PHASE POWER FAILURE 5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
5. BLUE PHASE POWER FAILURE 5 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
6. EMERGENCY & ALARM START 6 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
7. PUMP No. 1 TRIP 4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
8. PUMP No. 2 TRIP 4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
9. ROOF TANK OVERFLOW 3 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
10. SUCTION TANK OVERFLOW 1 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
11. SUCTION TANK LOW LEVEL 2 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
12. DUTY PUMP FAILURE 4 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
REPAIR TECHNICIAN KEY - SWITCH TURNED ON 0 *YES/NO, IF NO SPECIFY
Tested by : / _________________________
*TE/HTN/TN( ) Date *TE/HTN/TN( ) Date
Checked and Verified by : ____________________________

*STE/HTE ( ) Date
*Delete whichever is not applicable
BLDG17/A24.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A25
FORTNIGHTLY/MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 42.28 "Servicing And Maintenance During Maintenance Period
(Transfer Pumping System)"
To : Head ( Branch Office )
Date of Inspection : Contract Title : _________________________________

Block No. : Pump Room : 1/2# Location : _________________
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
(A) FORTNIGHTLY
1. General Condition of Pumproom
2. Correct Setting of Time Switch
3. Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
4. Power supply selector switch in "On" position
5. Control panel indicating lights
6. Alarm bell and bulb
7. Suction Tank electrode and control module
8. Motor Running Current Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
R * A * A
Rated current : A Y * A * A
Motor Output : KW B * A * A
9. 80mm Check Valve

10. 80mm Gate Valve
11. Alignment of Couplings
12. 100mm Check Valve
13. 100mm Gate Valve
14. Ball Float Valve
(B) MONTHLY
(In addition to items in fortnightly inspection)
1. Motor insulation (megaohms) *
2. Pump mechanical seal
3. Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)
4. Contractors and Relays
5. Storage tank electrode and control module
Signature : ____________________________________
Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : /_________________
Name of Contractor : ____________________________________
Acknowledge By : ____________________________________
HTE/TE/HTn (H&M) ( ) Date
# : Delete as necessary
√ : Check and found in order
X : To rectify immediately
* : Reading by measuring instrument
BLDG17/A25.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A26
Page 1
DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM

Clause 43.2 "Approval Of Drawings And Details Of Booster Pumping System"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data for all booster pumping systems when making submission to the
SO Rep.
Contract Title :
Contract No. :
Superintending Officer's Representative :
Building Block No. :
No. of Storeys :
No. of Dwelling Units Per Storey :
No. of Storeys served by Booster Pump :
No. of Dwelling Units served by Booster Pumps :
No. of Water Tanks on the Roof Top :

_________________________________________________________________________________________
BOOSTER PUMPS
Discharge capacity required : Q l/sec
Pressure Head : H m water
Shut-off Pressure Head : Ns m water
Proposed Booster Pumps : Make _____________________________
Type _____________________________
Model _____________________________
Speed : rpm
Impeller Diameter : mm
Power required : kw
(Please attach characteristics curve for booster pumps)

_________________________________________________________________________________________
BLDG17/A26.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A26
Page 2
DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM

Clause 43.2 "Approval of Drawings and Details of Booster Pumping System"
MOTOR
Make : _____________________________________
Type : _____________________________________
Model : _____________________________________
Rated Output : KW
Voltage/Phase/Frequency : _____________________________________
No-Load Speed : RPM
Insulation Class : _____________________________________
Line Current at Full Load : amp

_________________________________________________________________________________________
CONTROL PANEL
MCB for Main Incoming Supply : Make ________________________________________
Type ________________________________________
Rating ________________________________________
Soft-Starters : BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________
CAPACITY _____________________________________
Overload Release Ratings : _______________________________________________
KW Ratings : kw at v ph
Floatless Level Switch : BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________
Flow Sensor : BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________
Selector Switch : BRAND AND MODEL ____________________________
Automatic Change over relay : _______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Name of Contractor : _________________________________________________
Address : _________________________________________________
Signature : Name : _______________________
Tel No. : Date : _______________________
BLDG17/A26.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A27
TESTING DATA ON BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM

Clause 43.18 "Testing of Booster Pumping System Installation"
Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the booster
pumping system.

Pump Data
Brand Model
Serial No. 1 Rated output kW
Serial No. 2 Rated current Amp
Fittings Data
40mm Ball Stop Valve 15mm Ball Stop Valve
40mm Check Valve 15mm Stop Cock
Pressure Gauge Range Flow Sensor
Control Panel Data

Brand Model Serial No./Range
Soft Starter NA
Overload Relay Amp
Timer Min
Delay Timer
Control Module NA
Control MCB Amp
Starter MCB Amp
Control Relay NA
Latching Relay NA
Recorded & Submitted by : __________

(Contractor's Name)/Company Stamp (Signature) Date
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Booster Pump Pressure Mode 1 Passed / Failed Electrode E0

Pump No. 1 Mode 2 Passed / Failed Length/mm E1
Pump No. 2 Mode 3 Passed / Failed E2
E3
Tested by : Checked & Verified by : _________________________

1) TE/HTn/Tn ( ) Date STE/HTE ( ) Date
2) TE/HTn/Tn ( )
BLDG17/A27.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A28
MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 43.19 "Servicing And Maintenance During Maintenance Period
(Booster Pumping System)"
Date of Inspection : Contract Title: __________________________________
Block No. : Pump Room : 1/2# Location : __________________
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
1. Flow Sensor
2. Soft-starter, relay and control module
3. Power, supply selector switch in "On" position
5. Electrodes in storage tanks
6. Motor Running Current Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
R * A * A
Rated current : A
Y * A * A
Motor Output : KW
B * A * A
7. Motor insulation (megaohms) * *
8. Pump mechanical seal
9. Pressure gauges
10. 40mm check valves and bell stop valves
11. Thrust supports at distribution main
Signature : ________________________________________
√ : Check and found in order Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC: ____________/_______
X : To rectify immediately Name of Contractor : ________________________________
* : Reading by measuring instrument Acknowledge By : __________________________________

HTE/TE/HTn (H&M) ( ) Date
BLDG17/A28.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 1
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements specified in
the Specifications. The requirements specified in the Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should
any materials or equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications
shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
WET RISING MAIN
1. WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS

(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all
equipment, etc offered by the Contractor).
Fire Pump Fire Pump Transfer Pump Transfer Pump

Particulars
Electrical Diesel Driven Electrical Diesel Driven
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Nominal Characteristics
Flow rate (l/min)
Discharge head (bar)
KW
Efficiency (%)
Pump RPM
Churning Pressure (bar)
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 2
1. WET RISING MAIN PUMPSETS (CONT'D)
Transfer Pump Transfer Pump

Particulars Electrical Diesel Driven
Electrical Diesel Driven
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz)
Full load current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Insulation Class
Enclosure Protection Class
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Static Deflection (mm)
Type of Model No.
Motor Starters
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Protecting Devices
Total Operating Wt of
Pumpsets (kg)
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 3
2. JOCKEY PUMPSETS
(The Contractor shall state pump working heads taking into account the systems as designed and all
equipment, etc offered by the Contractor)
Particulars Jockey Pump
Pumps
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model No.
Materials
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Type of Bearings
Nominal Characteristics
Flow rate (l/min.)
Discharge head (bar)
KW
Efficiency
Pump RPM
Type of shaft seal
Motors
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type & Model
KW
RPM
Electrical Rating (V/Phase/Hz)
Full Load Current (A)
Max. Starting Current (A)
Type of Drive/Coupling
Vibration Isolators
Manufacturer
Make/Type/Model
Static Deflection (mm)
Total Operating Wt of Pumpsets (kg)
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 4
3. PIPEWORK (N.B. ONLY ONE MANUFACTURER SHALL BE INDICATED)
Black Galvanized Stainless Ductile Steel Pipes

Particulars
Steel Pipe Steel Pipe Steel Pipe Iron Pipe to BS 3601
Manufacturer
Local Supplier
Country of Origin
Grade (Thickness)
BS Specification
Manufacturer of Pipe
Fittings
4. VALVES, GAUGES & PIPE FITTINGS
Material of Material Other

Particulars Make Type Model
Valve Body of Valve Information
Water Level Gauges NA NA
Water Motor Alarms c/w

alarm gongs and water NA NA
turbines
Fire Brigade Breeching
NA NA
Inlet
Isolating Gate Valves
Alarm Valves
Non-return Valves
Strainers
Drain Cocks
Gauge Cocks
Combined Drain & Test

Valves
Automatic Air Vents
Anti-Vibration Couplings NA NA
Ball Float Valves
Pressure Gauges NA NA
Globe Valve
Pressure Relief Valve
Vortex Inhibitor
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 5
5. CONTROL PANELS
Country of
Particulars Manufacturer Local Supplier
Origin
Wet Rising Main Pump Control Panel
Wet Rising Main Transfer Pump Control Panel
Jockey Pump Control Panel
6. D.C. POWER SUPPLY UNITS
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No./Model
Output Voltage Per Cell Volt
No. of Cell
Operating Voltage Volt
Ampere Hour for 10-hour Rating AH
Dimension mm
Battery Chargers
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Type/List No.
Output Voltage Range Volt
Charging Rate - Normal Amp
- Maximum Amp
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 6
7. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN CONTROL PANELS
Rated Other
Particulars Make Type Model
Voltage Information
Contactors
Ammeters
Voltmeters
Push Buttons
Key Switches
Selector Switches
MCB
Timers
Relays
Indicating Lamps
(transformer operated)
Terminal Boards
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Current Transformers
HRC Fuses
Isolating Switches
MCCB
Earth Leakage Relay
8. ELECTRICAL WIRING & ACCESSORIES
Particulars Manufacturer Country of Origin Local Agent
PVC Cable & Jointing Accessories
Conduit & Accessories
Cable Trunking & Accessories
Cable Tray & Accessories
Floatless Level Control Relay Unit
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A29
Page 7
9. PIPE SPRING HANGER
Make, Type & Model ___________________
Size (mm) ___________________
Rated Capacity (kg) ___________________
Rated Static Deflection (mm) ___________________
Material of Spring ___________________
Spring Constant (kg/m) ___________________
10. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR
Make, Type & Model ___________________
Material ___________________
Maximum Working Pressure/Temperature ___________________
Maximum Vacuum (mm Hg) ___________________
Minimum burst pressure (Kpa) ___________________
Allowable elongation/compression/transverse movement (mm) ___________________
Allowable Angular Movement ___________________
11. DIRECT READING WATER FLOW METER
Make/Type/Model ___________________
Operation water flow range (1/min) ___________________
Accuracy (%) ___________________
____________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor
Date :
BLDG17/A29.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A30
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON WET RISER SYSTEM

Clause 44.5 "Test On Rising Main System"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the wet
riser system.
Block No. : Ref No :
Building Data
Suction Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M Transfer Tank size : ______ x ______ x ______ M
Total Head : (m) Total Head : (m)
Required pumping capacity : (l/s) Required pumping capacity : (l/s)
Jockey Fire Fire Transfer Transfer

Motor Data
Pump 1 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Brand
Type (FM,UL,LPC or other
acceptable by FSSD)
Model
Serial No.
Rated Output (KW)
Volt/Phase/Frequency
Insulation Class/Speed (RPM)
Rated Current (A)

Pump Data
Pump 1 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Brand
Model
Type (FM,UL,LPC or other
acceptable by FSSD)
Serial No.
Impeller Diameter (mm)
Specified capacity (l/s)
BLDG17/A30.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A30
Page 2

Clause 44.5 "Testing on Rising Main System"
riser system.
Control Panel Data

Starter Brand 11-Pin Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Starter Change over Brand 8-Pin Relay Brand
Model Model
Type Type
Starter MCB Brand Latching Relay Brand

Model Model
Type Type
Overload Protector Brand Time Switch Brand
Model Model
Setting Type
Fitting Size Brand Type

Coupling
Rubber expansion joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch
Flow meter
Motorize valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
BLDG17/A30.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A30
Page 3

Clause 44.5 "Testing on Rising Main System"
riser system.
Limit switch
Landing valve
Breeching Inlet
Recorded & Submitted by : ________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________
_
FOR OFFICIAL USE

Motor
Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Starting/Changeover Current (A)
Running Current (A) R

Pump
Pump Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by : __________________________________
1) HTE / TE ( ) Date
2) HTE / TE ( )
Checked & Verified by : __________________________________
BLDG17/A30.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A31
BI-YEARLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

DOWN-COMER / DRYRISER SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 44.6 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Dry Rising Main"
Date of Inspection : Contract Title : ____________________________
Block No. : Location : ________________________________
Items Checked Remedial Action / Date
1. Hydrostatic pressure test for 2 hours*
2. Check and inspect all landing valves

condition (open and shut position)
3. Check landing valve handle secure

with strapper and cap in position
4. Check earthing terminal connection
5. Check Breeching inlets condition
6. Additional requirements from FSSD
Other Comments
# : Delete as necessary Signature : _____________________________________

X : To rectify immediately Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : /_____
+ : Test to be done Yearly Name of Contractor : _____________________________
Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI ( ) Date
BLDG17/A31.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A32
Page 1
MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 44.7 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Wet Rising Main System"
Date of Inspection : Contract Title : __________________________________
Block No. : Pump Room Location (s) : _________________________
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
Monthly/Quaterly
1. General Condition of Pumproom
2. Correct Setting of Time Switch
3. Auto/Manual selector switch in "Auto" position
4 Power supply selector switch in "On" position

6. Alarm bell and bulb
7. Contractors and Relays
8. Check and tighten control panel wiring +

9. Suction Tank electrode and control module
Transfer Transfer
10. (i) Transfer Pump
Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
R A A
Rated current : A
Y A A
Motor Output : KW
B A A
(ii) Fire Pump Fire Pumpset 1 Fire Pumpset 2
R A A
Rated current : A
Y A A
Motor Output : KW
B A A
Jockey
(iii) Jockey Pump
Pumpset 1
R A
Rated current : A
Y A
Motor Output : KW
B A
11. Pump Running Pressure Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2

Transfer Pump (bar) (bar)
Fire pump (bar) (bar)
Jockey Pump (bar)
BLDG17/A32.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A32
Page 2
MONTHLY/QUARTERLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT ON

WET RISING MAIN SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 44.7 "Servicing And Maintenance Procedures For Wet Rising Main System"
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
Fire Fire Transfer Transfer
Jockey
12. Pump / Motor Condition Pumpset Pumpset Pumpset Pumpset
Pump
1 2 1 2
Motor insulation test +
Motor Running condition

Pump mechanical seal
Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)
13. Alignment of Couplings
14. Ball Float Valve condition Tank 1 Tank 2

Transfer tank
Fire tank

19. Discharge and refill water in riser pipe +
20. Check and inspect all landing valves
condition +
21. Check Breeching inlets condition
22. Update Log Book
23. Additional requirements from FSSD
Other Comments :

X : To rectify immediately Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : /______
+ : Test to be done quarterly Name of Contractor : _____________________________
Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI ( ) Date
BLDG17/A32.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A33
Page 1
LIST "A" - SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA
The Contractor shall provide all technical data as set out below. The technical data provided hereunder is for
information only and shall not override any requirements of the Specifications. The requirements of the
Specifications shall be regarded as minimum only and should any materials or equipment described in this
Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specifications shall prevail. Catalogues should be enclosed
to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible.
1. HOSE REEL BOOSTER PUMP
Make _________________________________________
Country of origin _________________________________________
Type _________________________________________
Model _________________________________________
No. of units _________________________________________
Casing material _________________________________________
Impeller material _________________________________________
Shaft material _________________________________________
Flow rate _________________________________________
Head _________________________________________
Speed (r.p.m.) _________________________________________
Impeller diameter _________________________________________
Motor rated output _________________________________________
Motor make, type and model _________________________________________
Voltage/Phase/Frequency _________________________________________
Motor insulation class _________________________________________
Line current at full load _________________________________________
2. MOTOR STATER
Make, type and model _________________________________________

Rating _________________________________________
Overload release rating _________________________________________
Approx. KW rating _______KW at ______V ______Ph
Voltage/Phase _________________________________________
3. FLOATLESS LEVEL CONTROL RELAY UNIT
Make _________________________________________
Type _________________________________________
Model _________________________________________
BLDG17/A33.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A33
Page 2
4. PRESSURE TANK
Country of origin _________________________________________

Make _________________________________________
Type _________________________________________
Model _________________________________________
Capacity _________________________________________
Operating pressure _________________________________________
Maximum working pressure _________________________________________
Casing material _________________________________________
Diaphragm material _________________________________________
Internal coating material _________________________________________
5. RUBBER HOSE
Make _________________________________________
Type _________________________________________
Material` _________________________________________
Diameter (internal) _________________________________________
Length _________________________________________
Working pressure _________________________________________
6. PRESSURE GAUGE
Make, type & model _________________________________________

Range (Bar) _________________________________________
Material in contact with water _________________________________________
Enclosure Protection _________________________________________
7. PRESSURE SWITCH
Make, type & model __________________________________________

Range (Bar) __________________________________________
Maximum working pressure (Bar) __________________________________________
Upper limit (Bar) __________________________________________
Material in contact with water __________________________________________
Enclosure Protection __________________________________________
Voltage/Frequency __________________________________________
8. FLOW SWITCH
Make, type, model __________________________________________

Rang (L/s) __________________________________________
Maximum working pressure (bar) __________________________________________
Material in contact with water __________________________________________
Enclosure protection __________________________________________
Voltage/frequency __________________________________________
BLDG17/A33.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A33
Page 3
9. SOLENOID VALVE
Make, type & model __________________________________________

Body material __________________________________________
Valve seat material __________________________________________
Stem material __________________________________________
Maximum working pressure __________________________________________
Test pressure (Bar) __________________________________________
Uv value (MH/Bar) __________________________________________
10. MISCELLANEOUS
Make Type Model
a. Gate valve _______________ ________________ ______________
b. Check valve _______________ _______________ ______________
c. Strainer _______________ ________________ ______________
d. Floatless level control relay unit _______________ ________________ ______________
e. Globe valve _______________ ________________ ______________
f. Selector switch _______________ ________________ ______________
g. Automatic changeover relay _______________ ________________ ______________
h. Time switch _______________ ________________ ______________
i. Automatic air vent _______________ ________________ ______________
j. Ball float valve _______________ ________________ ______________
k. Shut-off nozzle _______________ ________________ ______________
l. Flexible coupling _______________ ________________ ______________
m. Pipe spring hanger _______________ ________________ ______________
n. Ball stop valve _______________ ________________ ______________
o. Alarm bell _______________ ________________ ______________
p. Auxiliary relay _______________ ________________ ______________
q. Pressure relief valve _______________ ________________ ______________
r. Indicator lamp _______________ ________________ ______________
s. Pipe _______________ ________________ ______________
____________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor/s
Date : __________________
BLDG17/A33.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A34
Page 1
TESTING DATA ON HOSE REEL SYSTEM

Clause 45.5 "Testing And Commissioning"
The Contractor shall furnish the following data and submit to the SO Rep one week before the testing of the hose
reel system.

Building Data
Suction Tank size : M
Suction Tank size : M

Total Head : (m)
Required pumping capacity (l/s)
Hose Reel Hose Reel Hose Reel Hose Reel

Motor Data Motor 1 Motor 2 Pump Data Pump 1 Pump 2
Brand Brand
Type (FM, UL, LPC or Type (FM, UL, LPC or
other acceptable by FSSD) other acceptable by FSSD)
Model Model
Serial No. Serial No.
Rated Output (KW) Impeller Diameter (mm)
Volt/Phase/Frequency Specified capacity (l/s)

Insulation Class/Speed (rpm)
Rated Current (A)
Control Panel Data

Brand Brand
Starter Model 11-Pin Relay Model
Type Type
Brand Brand
Floatless level control
Model 8-Pin Relay Model
Relay
Type Type
Brand Brand
Model Model
Starter MCB Type Latching Relay Type
Model Model
Setting Type
BLDG17/A34.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A34
Page 2

reel system.
Coupling
Rubber expansion
joint
Gate valve
Check valve
Flow switch
Flow meter
Solenoid valve
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch
Limit switch
Pressure tank 1
Pressure tank 2
Rubber hose reel
Recorded & Submitted by : ________________________

BLDG17/A34.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A34
Page 3

reel system.
________________________________________________________________________________________
FOR OFFICIAL USE
Hose Reel Hose Reel

Motor Pump 1 Pump 1
Starting/Changeover Current (A)
Running Current (A) R
Hose Reel Hose Reel

Pump Pump 1 Pump 1
Approximate Capacity (l/s)
Tested by : _________________________________
1) HTE / TE ( ) Date
2) HTE / TE ( )
Checked & Verified by : _________________________________

DEng ( ) Date
BLDG17/A34.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A35
MONTHLY ROUTINE INSPECTION REPORT

ON HOSE REEL PUMPING SYSTEM DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Clause 45.6.4 "Servicing And Maintenance Schedule"
Date of Inspection : Contract Title : __________________________________
Block No. : Pump Room Location : ___________________________
Remedial
Items Checked
Action/Date
Monthly
1 General Condition of Pumproom
2 Correct Setting of Time Switch
3 Auto/Manual Selector Switch in "Auto" Position
4 Power Supply Selector Switch in "on" Position
5 Control Panel indicating Lights
6 Alarm Bell and Bulb
7 Suction Tank Electrode and Control Module
8 Motor Running Current Pumpset 1 Pumpset 2
R * A * A
Rated Current : A
Y * A * A
Motor Output : KW
B * A * A
9 Check Valves
10 Gate Valves
11 Ball Float Valves
12 Motor Insulation (Megaohms) * *
13 Pump Mechanical Seal
14 Pump Lubrication Oil Level (if applicable)
15 Contactors and Relays
16 Hose Reel
17 Pressure and Flow Switches
18 Update Log Book

X : To rectify immediately Inspection conducted by Name/NRIC : _______________
Name of Contractor : _____________________________
Acknowledge By : ________________________________
HHMI/HMI ( ) Date
BLDG17/A35.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A36
LIST OF RELEVANT BRITISH STANDARDS

APPLICABLE TO ELECTRICAL WORKS
Current issues of appropriate British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice with particular reference to this
project for electrical works are :
BS 10 - Flanges and Bolting for Pipes, Valves and Fittings
BS 37 - Electricity meters
BS 81 - Instrument Transformers
BS 88 - Electric Fuses
BS 89 - Electric Indicating Instruments
BS 142 - Electrical Protection Relays
BS 162 - Electrical Power Switch Gear and Associated Apparatus
BS 170 - The Electrical Performance of Fractional Horsepower Electric Motors and Generators
BS 587 - Motor Starters and Controllers
BS 636 - Covered Electrodes for the Manual Arc Welding of Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel
BS 729 - Zinc Coating on Iron and Steel Articles
BS 77 - Contactors
BS 848 - Methods of Testing Fans for General Purposes
BS 861 - Air Break Switches and Isolators
BS 1856 - General Requirements for the Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel
BS 2004 - PVC Insulated Cables and Flexible Cords
BS 2613 - The Electrical Performance of Rotating Electrical Machinery
BS 2757 - Classification of Insulating Materials
BS 3078 - Isolators for Alternating Current System
BS 3601 - Steel Pipes and Tubes for Pressure Purposes
BS 6207 - Mineral Insulated Cables
BS 6346 - PVC Insulated Cables for Electricity Supply
BLDG17/A36.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A37
SCHEDULE OF RECOMMENDED GAUGES FOR

RECTANGULAR DUCT CONSTRUCTION
Dimension of
Longest Side of Duct Steel Metal Gauges Reinforcement
Thru 250 26 Flat drive slip at 1500 centres
251 thru 300 26 Flat drive slip at 1500 centres
501 thru 650 22 25 x 25 x 2 Steel Angle at 2400 centres
BLDG17/A37.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A38
MONTHLY/ANNUAL TEST REPORT

{Pursuant to subclause 63.12.1.1(C)}
MAINTENANCE OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Location : Time : _______________________
Type of Test : Monthly/Annual* Date : _______________________
Alarm Zone
Test
Thermal Isolation
In-situ
Test
Smoke Isolation
In-situ
Detectors+
Test
Flame Isolation
In-situ
Test
Manual
Isolation
Call Point
In-situ
Main Supply Operative Non-Operative Remarks
Charger+ Battery
And Batteries Charger
Emergency Lamp On
Alarm Monitoring
Alarm Transmitter
Station
Alarm Sounder
Alarm+
Ancillary Controls
And Ancillary
Fault Buzzer
Remarks : I hereby certify that the above tests have been

carried out
Tester's Name ___________________________
Signature _______________________________
Witnessed By ____________________________
________________________________________ Signature _______________________________
* Delete if unapplicable.
+ Tick if satisfactory; put asterisk '*' if unsatisfactory and give explanation under the remarks space.
BLDG17/A38.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A39
Page 1
MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM - PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Location of Shelter
Estate : ______________________________________
Block : ______________________________________
Address : ______________________________________
Shelter Type : ______________________________________
Date & Time of Test : ______________________________________
Ventilation Fan
Description Observation Remarks
1. To check the size of anchors
2. Fan base to be mounted properly
3. To check the fan could be rotated by hand smoothly
4. Flexible connection to be installed properly
5. Power cable to be connected properly
Ductwork
Description Design Actual Observation Remarks
1. To check the size of expansion

bolts of ductwork support
2. To check on size and rigidity of

support
3. To check on the interval of

support
4. To check the joint connection of

ductwork
5. To check on proper installation of

flexible connection
6. To damper is installed in correct

position
7. To check damper is installed

rigidly
BLDG17/A39.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A39
Page 2
MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM - PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Ductwork (Cont'd)
Description Design Actual Observation Remarks
8. To check firm sealing around the

damper
9. To ensure damper blade is not

damaged and operate smoothly
Remarks : ______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Tested by : Date : ________________

CONTRACTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
Witnessed by : Date : ________________

HDB PROJECT DIRECTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
BLDG17/A39.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A40
ANCHOR TORQUE TEST FOR VENTILATION SYSTEM
Location and Shelter
Estate : ____________________________________________
Block : ____________________________________________
Address : ____________________________________________
Date & Time of Test : ____________________________________________
S/No Item Tested Design Torque Actual Torque Remarks
Tested by : Date : _______________

CONTRACTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
Witnessed by : Date : _______________

HDB PROJECT DIRECTOR'S
NAME AND SIGNATURE
Note: Please attach layout of points tested.
BLDG17/A40.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A41
VENTILATION FAN COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD
Location of Shelter
Estate : ___________________________________
Block : ___________________________________
Address : ___________________________________
Date & Time of Test : ___________________________________
Plant/Equipment Make/Model : ___________________________________
Plant/Equipment Serial No. : ___________________________________
Plant/Equipment Year of Manufacture : ___________________________________
Test Design Actual Remarks
Air flow (CMH)
Fan static pressure (Pa)
Fan motor starting amperes
Fan motor running amperes
Fan motor operating kW
Fan motor operating voltage
Fan motor speed (rpm)
Noise level (dBA) (at 1m distance)
Efficiency
Condition of ductwork
Vibration isolator
Flexible connection
Supports
Tested By : Approved By : __________________________
Signature : Signature : __________________________
Name of Name of HDB

Contractor : Project Director : __________________________
Date : Date : __________________________
BLDG17/A41.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A42
Page 1
SCHEDULE "A"
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The technical data provided hereunder is for information only and shall not override any requirements of the
Specification. The requirements of the Specification shall be regarded as minimum and should any material or
Plant and equipment described in this Schedule fall below the minimum requirements, the Specification shall
prevail. Catalogues shall be enclosed to provide more comprehensive information wherever possible. All entries
shall be typewritten.
Item Description Particulars
1. DUCTWORK
(a) Round Ducting
Type
Make
Country of Origin
Standard
Material
(b) Acoustical Insulation
Type
Make
Country of Origin
Material
Density
(c) Diffusers
Make/Model
Type
Material
Finish
(d) Grilles
Make/Model
Type
Material
Finish
(e) Flexible Duct Connection
Make/Model
Size
Material
BLDG17/A42.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A42
Page 2
SCHEDULE "A"
2. AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW SUPPLY AIR FAN Axial Flow
(a) Fan
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Air Flow (CMH)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees)

Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length)
(mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB)
Blade Material
Casing Material
Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (°C)
(b) Fan Motor
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Input Power (kW)
Speed (rpm)
Class of Insulation
Rating
Lock Rotor Current (Amp)
Full Load Current (Amp)
Voltage (volt)
Frequency (Hz)
(c) Motor Starter
Make/Brand
Type
BLDG17/A42.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A42
Page 3
SCHEDULE "A"
2. AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW SUPPLY AIR FAN Axial Flow

(CONT'D)
(d) Vibration Isolator
Make/Brand
Type
Material
Isolation Efficiency (%)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Deflection (mm)
(e) Sound Attenuators
Make/Brand
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
Pressure Drop (Pa)
L x W x H (mm x mm x mm)
Insertion Loss - dB
Octave band frequency
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
8000 Hz
(f) Motor Starter
Make
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
L x W x D (mm x mm x mm)
Material
Efficiency (%)
Initial air resistance (Pa)
Final air resistance (Pa)
BLDG17/A42.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A42
Page 4
SCHEDULE "A"
3. AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW EXHAUST AIR FAN Axial Flow
(a) Fan
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Air Flow (CMH)
Static Pressure (Pa)
Fan Blade Pitch Angle (Degrees)

Overall Dimension (Diameter x Length)
(mm x mm)
Operating Weight (kg)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Noise Level at 3 Fan Diameter (dB)
Blade Material
Casing Material
Temperature Tolerance of Fan & Motor (°C)
(b) Fan Motor
Make/Brand
Type
Model
Input Power (kW)
Speed (rpm)
Class of Insulation
Rating
Lock Rotor Current (Amp)
Full Load Current (Amp)
Voltage (volt)
Frequency (Hz)
(c) Motor Starter
Make/Brand
Type
BLDG17/A42.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A42
Page 5
SCHEDULE "A"
3. AEROFOIL AXIAL FLOW EXHAUST AIR FAN Axial Flow

(CONT'D)
(d) Vibration Isolator
Make/Brand
Type
Material
Isolation Efficiency (%)
Rated Capacity (kg)
Rated Deflection (mm)
(e) Sound Attenuators
Make/Brand
Type
Air Qty (CMH)
Pressure Drop (Pa)
L x W x H (mm x mm x mm)
Insertion Loss - dB
Octave band frequency
63 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
8000 Hz
________________________________
Signature & Official Stamp of Contractor
Date : _________________
BLDG17/A42.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43
Page 1
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT FOR COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE

FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT
STAMP
COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT TO

BLOCKS _____ AT .
THIS AGREEMENT is made the day of 20 between THE

HOUSING & DEVELOPMENT BOARD (hereinafter called the "Owner") and ______________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context so admits includes his legal personal
representatives and permitted assigns.
WHEREAS :
(1) __________________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the Contractor") is the contractor of the Owner in respect of the Works described as
_____________ Neighbourhood Contract ______________
(Contract No. ) (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract").
(2) The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under
the Contract with the consent of the Owner given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) The Owner is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine
or vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the
"Plant").
(4) Pursuant to Clause of of the

Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the
maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are
necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.
BLDG17/A43.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43
Page 2
In consideration of the premises and of the Owner giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor
and the Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :
1. SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION
1.1 The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to
maintain the Plant herein specified.
1.2 In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the
Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the
description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE
HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing
after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may
become due under the provisions of this Agreement.
2. OWNER'S OBLIGATION
The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant,
the Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this
Agreement.
3. TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this
Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the
amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.
4. PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rate contained in this Agreement
shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately mentioned or
described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to completion of the
works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties before
execution and completion.
5. CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT
Any person, firm, corporation or organization who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no rights
whatsoever under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act.
6. DOCUMENTS
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement
viz :
(a) These Articles of Agreement;
(b) The Contractor's Offer to the Owner dated in respect of the Contract;
(c) The Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;
(d) The Drawings as listed in the Schedule thereto;
(e) All Amendment/Addendum Letters issued by the Owner;
(f) The Owner's Letter of Acceptance dated accepting the said Contractor's Offer
(including any correspondences referred to in the said Letter of Acceptance).
BLDG17/A43.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43
Page 3
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.
Signed by )
)
, for and on behalf )
)
of the Housing & Development Board in the )
)
presence of : )
) ______________________________
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
) ______________________________
)
Signed by )
)
for and on behalf of the Specialist in the )
)
presence of : )
)
)
) ______________________________
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
) ______________________________
)
BLDG17/A43.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43(TC)
Page 1
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT FOR COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE

STAMP
COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT FOR REFUSE HANDLING PLANT TO

BLOCKS _____ AT .
THIS AGREEMENT is made the __ day of 20 _ between the

________________________________________ (hereinafter called the "Owner")
and
_ (hereinafter called the "Specialist") which expression shall where the context
so admits includes his legal personal representatives and permitted assigns.
WHEREAS :
(1) _______________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the "Contractor") is the contractor of the Housing & Development Board (hereinafter
called the "HDB") in respect of the Works described as Neighbourhood _____
Contract (Contract No. ) (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract").
(2) The Specialist is engaged by the Contractor in respect of the Refuse Handling Plant Works required under
the Contract with the consent of the HDB given at the request of both the Contractor and the Specialist.
(3) The HDB is desirous that certain equipment should be maintained, viz system or equipment or machine
or vehicles etc described in this Agreement for the Refuse Handling Plant (hereinafter referred to as the
"Plant").
(4) Pursuant to Clause of of the

Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to carry out the
maintenance of such Plant, and where applicable to fabricate, modify and do all such things as are
necessary for such maintenance of the Plant.
(5) The Owner has now taken over the management and maintenance of the Plant from the HDB and
pursuant to Clause of the of the
Contract, the Contractor shall ensure and the Specialist hereby agrees and undertakes to execute this
Agreement with the Owner.
BLDG17/A43T.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43(TC)
Page 2
In consideration of the premises and of the HDB giving the consent aforesaid at the request of the Contractor and
the Specialist, the Specialist agree with the Owner as follows :
1. SPECIALIST'S OBLIGATION
1.1 The Specialist warrants that he has the necessary skills, knowledge, expertise and competence to
maintain the Plant herein specified.
1.2 In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Specialist as hereinafter mentioned, the
Specialist hereby covenants with the Owner to maintain the Plant in all respects in accordance with the
description and terms of this Agreement for the monthly Contract Rate of Singapore Dollars ONE
HUNDRED only ($100.00) per unit of Refuse Handling Plant for a period of five (5) years commencing
after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period provided under the Contract or such other sum as may
become due under the provisions of this Agreement.
2. OWNER'S OBLIGATION
The Owner hereby covenants to pay to the Specialist in consideration of the maintenance of the Plant,
the Contract Rate per month or such other sum as may become due under the provisions of this
Agreement.
3. TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This Agreement is a Firm Price Contract and the Contract Rate shall remain firm for the duration of this
Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, there shall be no change in the
amount payable by the Owner to the Specialist for maintenance of the Plant.
4. PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, the Contract Rates contained in this Agreement
shall be inclusive of all ancillary and other works and expenditure, whether separately or specifically
mentioned or described in this Agreement or not, which are either necessary to carry out and bring to
completion of the works described in this Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome
difficulties before execution and completion.
5. CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT
Any person, firm, corporation or organization who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no rights
whatsoever under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act.
5. DOCUMENTS
5.1 The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement
viz :
(a) These Articles of Agreement;

(b) The Contractor's Offer to the HDB dated in respect of the Contract;
(c) The Conditions of Comprehensive Maintenance Agreement as produced in Appendix A44;
(d) The Drawings as listed in the Schedule thereto;
(e) All Amendment/Addendum Letters issued by the HDB;
(f) The HDB Letter of Acceptance dated accepting the said Contractor's Offer
(including any correspondences referred to in the said Letter of Acceptance).
5.2 All references to the Board or Employer in the aforesaid documents shall be deemed to refer to the Owner
and shall be read and construed as such.
BLDG17/A43T.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A43(TC)
Page 3
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Specialist have set their hands the day and year first above written.
Signed by )
)
for and on behalf of the )
)
______________________________ Town Council )
)
in the presence of : )
) _______________________________
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
) _______________________________
)
Signed by )
)
for and on behalf of the Specialist )
)
in the presence of : )
)
)
) _______________________________
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
) _______________________________
)
BLDG17/A43T.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 1
CONDITIONS OF COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
1. (1) In the Agreement (as hereinafter defined) the following words and Definitions
expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them
except where the context otherwise requires :
(a) "Agreement" : means the documents identified as

forming the Contract Documents in the
Articles of Agreement and all such
documents together shall be deemed to
form the Agreement.
(b) "Owner" : means the Housing & Development

Board, Republic of Singapore, or such
Town Council(s) as named in the
Articles of Agreement.
(c) "Specialist" : means the person or firm or corporation

who is maintaining the Plant and
includes the Specialist's legal personal
representatives and permitted assigns.
(d) "Works" : means the maintenance works,

together with necessary temporary
works, described in the Agreement,
including all Variations.
(e) "Plant" : means the system or equipment or

machine or vehicles, etc described in
the Agreement.
(f) "Contract : means the rate named in the Articles

Rate" of Agreement.
1. (2) Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice-versa Singular and Plural
where the context requires.
1. (3) The headings and marginal notes in these Conditions shall not be Headings and
deemed to be part thereof or be taken into consideration in the Marginal Notes
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Agreement.
SCOPE OF WORK
2. The Specialist shall provide and supply all labour, materials, tools, Scope of Works
transport and everything necessary or incidental in so far as they are
specified or can be reasonably inferred, for the maintenance of the Plant
as listed in Schedule A, and for any call-back service mentioned in Clause
5 herein.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 2
SCOPE OF WORK (CONT'D)
2. Cont'd
Maintenance shall include all items and frequencies of works as listed in

Schedule B. The Specialist's obligations shall include any other repair
and/or replacement to the Plant or overhaul to the Plant if deemed
necessary.
The costs of any repair and/or replacement or overhauling including the

costs of spare parts and consumables shall be deemed to be included in
the monthly maintenance fee.
The Specialist shall not use as replacements, any parts which are not
original or parts which have not been approved by the Manufacturer of
the Plant unless he has the prior consent of the Owner.
REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK
3. The Agreement shall remain in full force and effect for a period stated in Commencement
the Appendix. Unless either party hereto shall three months prior to the and Duration of
expiration hereof have notified the other party hereto in writing to the Agreement
contrary then this Agreement shall thereafter continue and remain in full
force and effect which can then be terminated by either party hereto giving
three month's written notice to the other party hereto to that effect.
4. The Specialist shall provide the Owner a work programme covering Work Programme
routine maintenance, repairs and/or replacements, and major overhaul if
applicable, in a form acceptable to the Owner for his agreement. The
commencement dates and times for the Works have to be specified and
the Specialist shall adhere strictly to the works programme approved by
the Owner. The Specialist shall seek the prior approval of the Owner on
any amendment to the work programme.
The proposed work programme shall be submitted to the Owner for

approval at least 14 (fourteen) days in advance. If required, the Specialist
shall submit the programme directly to designated offices as directed by
the Owner from time to time.
5. Call-out Time/Service Time
5. (1) The call-out time is the period of time provided in Clause 6 herein Call-out-Time
and is the time period allowed within which the Specialist's suitably
qualified maintenance personnel are required to arrive at the site
and start work from the time the fault condition has been reported
to the Specialist by any means such as pager, telephone, telex,
facsimile, mail, agent or other means of communication.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 3
REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK (CONT'D)
5. Call-out Time/Service Time (Cont'd)
5. (2) The Specialist shall add no additional cost to the Owner in carrying Service Time
out the necessary repairs and/or replacements to the Plant
installed under this Agreement within the number of hours stated
in the Appendix or such further extended time as deemed
necessary by the Owner, such time known as service time to
commence at the time within call-out time the suitably qualified
maintenance personnel of the Specialist arrived at the site.
Should the Specialist fail to attend within the call-out time, the
Owner reserves the right to appoint other party or parties to
execute such works and all costs incurred shall be recovered by
the Owner from the Specialist by deduction(s) from any money due
or that shall become due to the Specialist, or payable direct from
the Specialist as a debt due to the Owner PROVIDED that and
without prejudice to any other remedies for breach contained in this
Agreement the Owner shall in addition to recover under this
paragraph whatsoever that may result as a consequence of the
Owner having to resort to the provisions of this paragraph.
The Specialist shall be equipped with a telephone pager. Should

the Specialist fail to respond within one hour after being paged it
shall be deemed that the Specialist has failed to make himself
available in which case the paragraph above shall apply.
6. Call-out time for attending to breakdown of the Plant shall not exceed the Agreed damages
time stated in the Appendix. Agreed damages stated in the Appendix for failure to
shall be imposed should the call-out time be exceeded or in the event the respond within
Specialist fails to rectify the breakdown within the service time stated in call-out time/to
the Appendix or such further extended time deemed necessary by the rectify breakdown
Owner. within service time
Normal office hours are taken to be between 8.00 am and 5.30 pm from
Monday to Friday and between 8.00 am and 1.00 pm on Saturday.
The provisions of this paragraph shall apply notwithstanding that the

Specialist shall also be liable under Clause 5(2) herein.
In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the
Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for breach of contract
as the Owner can prove arise from the Specialist's failure to carry out his
obligations herein.
7. The Specialist shall submit to the Owner a monthly report in such form as Service Report
may be approved by the Owner containing details of the periodic
inspections and servicings including all repairs and/or replacements
executed by him. The monthly report shall include a log showing the time
when a report of a fault is received and the time when repair and/or
replacement commences. The Specialist shall record the nature of the
fault and the actual time taken for the necessary repairs and/or
replacements. These records shall be signed by the Owner and the
Specialist shall submit these records to the Owner within the first week of
the following month.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 4
8. (1) Any replacement of any item or any repair to any breakdown of the Replacement and
Plant shall only be carried out by the Specialist with the consent of Repairs
the Owner.
(2) The Specialist shall be deemed to have included in the Contract *Substitute Plant
Rate all the necessary cost incurred in providing temporary and
similar substitute Plant for the Owner's use at premises designed
by the Owner during the period of repair and/or replacement, so as
to enable the Owner to continue working/operations without any
disruption or stoppage.
9. Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist shall Security Deposit
deposit free of interest with the Owner the sum stipulated in the Appendix
to be held by the Owner as security for due performance by the Specialist
of each and every liability and obligation owing by the Specialist to the
Owner, whether of a contractual or tortious nature and whether arising
under the Agreement or otherwise, such sum to be retained or otherwise
properly dealt with by the Owner. The said sum or the recoverable
balance thereof shall be returned to the Specialist upon completion of the
whole of the Works.
Within 14 days after the acceptance of this Tender, the Specialist may in
lieu of the deposit as required under this Clause provided the Owner with
a Security Bond for an equivalent sum drawn in the form approved by the
Owner and issued by a Surety acceptable to the Owner.
The quantum of this Security Deposit/Bond shall be a percentage

(stipulated in the Appendix) of the product of the Contract Rate multiplied
by the period of this Agreement as stated in Clause 3 herein.
10. The Specialist shall bear all stamp fees and other necessary charges, in Specialist to pay
respect of this Agreement and any other document whatsoever to be all stamp fees
executed hereunder.
11. It is hereby agreed that the Owner shall be at liberty without notice to the Owner's right to
Specialist to assign the full benefits of this Agreement to such person assign
body or corporation as may in any manner howsoever be entrusted with
the responsibilities of the duties of the Owner in respect of the Works.
12. The Specialist shall not assign the Agreement or any part thereof or any Assignment or
benefit or interest therein without the prior written consent of the Owner. Sub-lettering
The Specialist shall not make arrangements for the vicarious performance
of any of his duties or functions under the Agreement by any other party,
nor shall any receiver or liquidator of the Specialist be entitled to carry out
such duties or functions.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 5
12. Cont'd
The Specialist shall not sub-let the whole of the Works. Except where
otherwise provided in the Agreement, the Specialist shall not sub-let any
part of the Works without the prior written consent of the Owner and such
consent if given shall not relieve the Specialist of any of his liabilities or
obligations under the Agreement and he shall be responsible for the acts
defaults and neglects of his sub-contractors their agents servants and
workmen as fully as if they were his own acts defaults or neglects.
GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST
13. The Specialist is required to exercise firm control over the conduct of his Behaviour of
agents, servants and workmen, and of his sub-contractors, their agents, Workmen
servants and workmen employed on the Works for the purposes of this
Agreement.
The Specialist shall use or employ in and about the maintenance of the
Plant only such persons as are careful skilled and experienced in their
several skills, trades and callings and the Owner shall be at liberty to
object to and require the Specialist to remove immediately from the
Owner's premises any such person employed by the Specialist in or about
the maintenance of the Plant who in the opinion of the Owner misconduct
himself or is incompetent or negligent in the proper performance of his
duties or whose continued presence is undesirable or unacceptable and
such opinion shall be final and binding on and conclusive against the
Specialist. Such persons shall not be again used or employed upon the
Owner's premises without the prior written permission of the Owner. Any
person so removed shall wherever necessary, be promptly replaced by a
competent substitute.
The Specialist shall ensure that all workmen employed are able to
produce proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted
to premises occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.
14. The Specialist shall keep proper records of all workmen engaged on the Keeping Records
Works and produce them for inspection by the Owner. These records of Workmen
shall include the following information :
(a) Name of Workmen (and alias if any

(b) Identity Card No./Passport No.
(c) Address
(d) Work Permit No., if any
(e) Safety Course Orientation Certificate, if any.
This information must be recorded before any workmen is allowed to

commence duty.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 6
GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST (CONT'D)
15. The Specialist shall comply with all labour laws regarding the engagement Labour Laws
of all workmen. Work Permits from Ministry of Labour must be obtained
from these workmen. The Specialist shall be held solely liable for and
shall indemnify the Owner in respect of all actions against the Owner for
employing foreign workmen without the required permits.
The Specialist shall pay his workmen promptly, and observe workmen's
working hours and holidays in accordance with all Acts of Parliament
Regulations Bye-Laws rules or regulations.
16. Subject to any provision to the contrary contained in the Agreement, none No Night
of the Works shall, save as hereinafter provided, be carried out during the Sunday or Public
night or on Sundays or on public holidays without the permission in writing Holiday Work
of the Owner except when such work is unavoidable or necessary for the
saving of life or property or for the safety of the Works in which case the
Contractor shall immediately inform the Owner.
For the purposes of this Clause, the term "night" shall mean the period
from 5.30 pm to 8.00 am.
The Owner reserves the right to require urgent repairs and/or

replacement work to be carried out during the night or on Sundays or on
public holidays. The Specialist is deemed to have provided for such
services in the Contract Rate.
17. The Specialist shall ensure that no illegal immigrant is employed him Employment of
and/or any sub-contractor in the execution of the Works. The Owner shall Illegal Immigrants
not be responsible for such act or acts by the Specialist and/or any of his
sub-contractors and the Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all
consequences arising thereof.
For the purpose of this Clause "illegal immigrant" means any person who
has entered into the Republic of Singapore in contravention of the
provisions of the Immigration Act or any statutory modification or re-
enactment thereof.
18. The Specialist shall give all notices and pay all fees required to be given Compliance with
or paid by any Act of Parliament Regulation or Bye-law in relation to the rules and
execution of the Works and by the rules or regulations of any local or Regulations
statutory authorities, public bodies or companies whose property or rights
may be affected in any way by the Works.
The Specialist shall ascertain and conform in all respects with the
provisions of any Act of Parliament Regulation and Bye-law that may
apply to the Works and with any rules or regulations of the said local or
statutory authorities public bodies or companies and shall keep the Owner
fully indemnified against penalties and liabilities of every kind arising from
the breach of such Acts Regulations Bye-laws rules or regulations.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 7
19. The Specialist shall give or provide all necessary superintendence during Specialist's
the execution of the Works and as long thereafter as the Owner may Superintendence
consider necessary.
The Specialist shall ensure that he is at all times represented on the

Works by a competent and authorised agent who shall be deemed to be
approved by the Owner provided such agent is not expressly objected to
by the Owner in writing within 14 days from the serving of a notice in
writing upon the Owner by the Specialist of the appointment of such
agent. Such agent shall be on the Works when the Specialist is executing
works to supervise the Works.
The Owner shall have the authority to withdraw his approval of the
authorised agent at any time. If such approval shall be withdrawn the
Specialist shall, after receiving notice in writing of, such withdrawal,
remove the agent from the Works forthwith and shall not thereafter
employ him again on the Works in any capacity and shall promptly replace
him with a competent agent approved by the Owner.
Such authorised agent shall be empowered to receive on behalf of the

Specialist directions and instructions from the Owner.
The Specialist shall ensure that his superintending personnel are able to
produce proper and acceptable identification on demand when admitted
to premises occupied by or on behalf of the Owner.
20. The Specialist shall comply with the Workplace Safety & Health Act and Safety
the Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction
Regulations 1985, and all amendments and re-enactments thereof.
It shall be the duty of the Specialist to comply with such requirements of

the Regulations as affect him or any person employed by him and as
relate to any work act or operation performed or about to be performed
by him.
The Specialist shall not permit an employee to do anything which is not in

accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound
practice.
21. The Specialist shall comply with all the provisions under the Workmen's Workmen's
Compensation Act Cap 354 (1985 Edition) and any statutory modification Compensation
or re-enactment thereof (hereinafter referred to as "the Act").
Notwithstanding any provision in this Contract to the contrary, the Owner

shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or compensation under
the Act in consequence of any accident or injury to any workman or other
person whether in the employment of the Specialist, his servants or
agents or of his sub-contractors, their servants or agents, and the
Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all such claims, demands,
proceedings, damages, cost, charges and expenses arising in
consequence thereof.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(7)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 8
21. Cont'd
The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in
the joint names of the Specialist and the Owner a policy of insurance with
an insurer and on terms approved by the Owner to cover all obligations
and to meet in full the assessment of the Commissioner for Labour in
respect of compensation due upon the death or injury of any workman of
the Specialist, his servant or agents under the Act and in respect of
compensation under Common Law.
The Specialist shall deliver this insurance policy, together with the
premium receipts, to the Owner before proceeding with the Works.
Should the Specialist default in making such delivery upon written request
made by the Owner, the Owner may then effect and maintain such
insurance and deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or become
due to the Specialist or recover the same as a debt due by the Specialist.
If the Specialist fails to maintain and keep in force the insurance required
to be effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in
force such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be
necessary for the purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so
paid from any monies due becoming due to the Specialist or recover the
same as a debt due by the Specialist.
Notwithstanding the provision of the Act, the Specialist shall give notice
in writing to the Owner within 10 days of the occurrence of any accident
which results in death or temporary incapacity of any workman employed
by him or his sub-contractor(s). If a contractor fails to report the
occurrence of the accident within the stipulated time, the Owner shall
impose charges according to the rates tabulated below :
Charges for late reporting

Date of Notification to the
Owner on the occurrence Amount equal to MOM
Minimum
of accident assessment but subject to
Charges
a maximum charge of
More than 10 days but

equal to or less than
$200.00 $1,000.00
30 days from date of
accident
More than 30 days

$200.00 $3,000.00
from date of accident
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(8)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 9
PAYMENT
22. The Agreement is awarded on a firm price basis and the Contract Rate Firm Price
as accepted by the Owner shall remain firm for the duration of the Contract
Agreement. Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement,
there shall be no change in the amount payable by the Owner to the
Specialist for the maintenance to the Plant.
Save as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, the Contract

Rate contained in the Agreement shall be inclusive of all ancillary and
other works and expenditure, whether separately or specifically
mentioned or described in the Agreement or not, which are either
necessary to carry out and bring to execution the Works described in the
Agreement, or which may become necessary to overcome difficulties
before execution.
23. Upon completion of maintenance, the Specialist shall submit his invoice Payment
and the relevant service chits in a form acceptable to the Owner. The
service chits shall indicate the actual works performed in accordance with
the scope of work specified. The Specialist shall ensure all service chits
are duly signed and stamped by the Owner.
If the Plant are not in working condition for a period longer than the
number of days, stated in the Appendix, in a month or such other time as
may be allowed by the Owner arising from whatsoever cause, the
Specialist shall not be entitled to payment for the maintenance for that
month in respect of such Plant.
Work done by the Specialist under this Agreement shall be payable

MONTHLY upon satisfactory completion of the Works. Provided that the
Specialist comply fully with the requirements stated herein he shall be
paid within 30 days from the date of receipt of the Specialist's bills or
invoices by the Owner.
In addition the Owner shall pay to the Specialist all agreed additional costs
for carrying out such other works as may from time to time be required by
the Owner under Clause 27 herein. The Specialist shall claim and the
Owner shall pay for such costs in accordance with the requirements under
Clause 28 herein.
24. The Specialist shall duly and punctually pay to the Owner the billed or any Payment of
other expenses incurred in respect of the supply of materials, services, Owner's Bills and
etc necessary for the proper execution of the Works in this Agreement. Expenses etc
Notwithstanding this, the Owner reserves the right to set off such bills and
expenses against monies due or to become due to the Specialist before
payment of the balance, if any, to him. In this respect, all bills and
expenses incurred by the Owner shall have priority over those incurred
by third parties for the benefit of the Specialist.
25. If at any time during the Agreement the Specialist is found to have claimed Overclaim leading
and was paid for more than the value of works done, the Owner reserves to Overpayment
the right to deduct from the Specialist's subsequent payments and the
sum overpaid together with interests at prevailing commercial rates.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(9)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 10
PAYMENT (CONT'D)
26. All damages (including agreed damages), costs, charges, expenses, Recovery/
debts or sums for which the Specialist is liable to the Owner under any Deduction of
provision of this Agreement between the Owner and the Specialist may Money
be deducted by the Owner from monies due or becoming due to the
Specialist under the Agreement, including any retention monies, financial
bonds or security deposits or bonds.
All damages (including agreed damages), costs, charges, expenses,

debts or sums for which the Specialist is liable to the Owner under any
provision of any other Agreement between the Owner and the Specialist
may be deducted by the Owner from monies due or becoming due to the
Specialist under the Agreement, including any retention monies, financial
bonds or security deposits or bonds.
VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS
27. The Owner may instruct variations. No variation required by the Owner Variations
or subsequently sanctioned by him shall vitiate this Agreement.
"Variation" shall mean any change in the intention of the original

Agreement and shall include any addition, omission, substitution of any
work or alteration of the kind or standard of any material or good to be
used in the Works, and may relate to or include work at other locations
than specified in this Agreement and such variations shall be paid for
under the provisions of the Clause 28 herein.
A variation shall be instructed by means of a Works Order issued by the

Owner to the Contractor.
28. The value of a variation ordered shall be ascertained in accordance with Valuation of
one or a combination of the methods mentioned below in descending Variation
order or priority :
(a) by measurement and valuation at the applicable rates and prices

specified in the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to Tender Form,
if any, or at analogous or pro-rated rates; or
(b) if the above method is not applicable, then by measurement and

valuation at fair market rates and prices; or
(c) if none of the above two methods is applicable, then the valuation
shall be based on the actual cost of necessary materials or goods,
labour and equipment (other than ordinary plant) plus 15% which
percentage shall include the use of all ordinary plant, tools,
equipment and existing scaffolding, supervision, overheads and
profits.
Any disagreement on rates under the provisions of this clause shall not
entitle the Specialist a right to refuse to execute the variation work. The
Specialist shall proceed with the variation works with due diligence The
Specialist may refer the disagreement to Arbitration under Clause 36
herein.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(10)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 11
VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS (CONT'D)
28. Cont'd
Upon completion of the variation work to the satisfaction of the Owner,

the Specialist may submit his claim for variation to the Owner. The value
of the variation assessed by the Owner shall be notified to the Specialist
in writing. Provided always the Owner may at any time amend the value
of a variation previously issued in such manner as he may deem
necessary, and any recovery shall be effected under Clause 26 herein. If
the Specialist disagrees with the value assessed by the Owner, he shall
submit to the Owner any objection to the value in writing within 30 days
of the date of notification failing which the value of the variation as
assessed by the Owner shall be final and binding and conclusive against
the Specialist.
29. If the Specialist proposes to modify the Plant or the Works in order to Specialist's
facilitate repair and/or replacement such that facilities or operating Modification of
conditions are affected, he shall notify the Owner and obtain the consent Plant or Works
in writing of the Owner to the proposed modifications. The Owner may
agree to the modifications if it does not result in any increase in the costs
of maintenance or repairs and/or replacements to the modified Plant. If
consent is given the Specialist shall carry out the modifications at his own
expense at such time to be specified by the Owner.
The Specialist fully agrees and accepts that as a condition to approval of

the modification, any cost saving arising from the approved modifications
shall be valued in accordance with Clause 28 herein and be recovered by
the Owner under Clause 26 herein.
LIABILITIES FOR AND INSURANCES AGAINST

INJURIES AND DAMAGES TO PROPERTY
30. The Specialist shall be responsible for : Damage to

Property and Injury
(a) any death of or injury to any person including those employed by to Persons
the Owner;
(b) any injury or damage to property of every kind of the Owner or of

any other person or corporation; or
(c) any damage to the Plant the subject of this Agreement
from any cause whatsoever arising directly or indirectly out of or in relation

to or in connection with the Works under the Agreement.
In particular and without limiting or prejudicing in any way the generality

of this Clause, the liability of the Specialist under this Clause shall extend
to all damages or injuries which may occur by reason of any act or
omission of the Specialist his servants or agents or of his sub-contractors,
their servants or agents.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(11)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 12
LIABILITIES FOR AND INSURANCES AGAINST
INJURIES AND DAMAGES TO PROPERTY (CONT'D)
30. Cont'd
The Specialist shall indemnify the Owner against all losses, injuries or
damages in respect of the liabilities and risks described in this clause and
against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges
expenses arising in consequence thereof.
The indemnities given by the Specialist under this Clause shall not be
defeated or reduced by reason of any negligence or omission of the
Owner in failing to supervise or control the Specialist's operations or
methods of working, or to detect or prevent or remedy or mitigate
defective Plant, or to ensure proper performance of any other obligation
of the Specialist.
31. The Specialist shall at his own cost and expense effect and maintain in Insurances against
the joint names of the Specialist and the Owner until the completion of the Injuries to Persons
Works, a Public Liability policy with an insurer and on terms approved by and Damage to
the Owner for an amount specified by the Owner against all and every Property
liability and risk described in this Clause and shall deliver the policy and
the receipt for every premium paid by the Specialist to the Owner. The
extent of the insurer's liability under the policy insurance shall be limited
in the manner and to the amount stated in the Appendix.
The existence of any such insurance shall not alter or affect the liability of
the Specialist to the Owner under the provisions of this Clause, and the
Owner may deduct from any monies due or becoming due to the
Specialist all sums that the Specialist may be liable to pay to the Owner
under this Clause, whether or not the same is covered by insurance.
If the Specialist fails to effect and keep in force the insurance required to
be effected under this Clause, then the Owner may effect and keep in
force such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be
necessary for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so
paid from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist or recover
the same as a debt due by the Specialist under Clause 26 herein.
REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATIONS
32. If the Specialist neglects or refuses to maintain any of the Plant to be Remedies in the
performed by him under the Agreement with due diligence and expedition, event of Breach
or refuses or neglects to comply with any reasonable orders given to him
by the Owner in writing in connection with any such Works, or
contravenes any of the provisions of the Agreement, the Owner may give
notice in writing to the Specialist to make good the neglect, refused or
contravention complained of.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(12)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 13
(CONT'D)
32. Cont'd
Should the Specialist fail to comply with the notice within the time
specified therein, the Owner shall be at liberty to employ other party or
parties to execute such part of the said Works as the Specialist may have
failed or neglected to do, or if the Owner shall think fit, it shall be lawful
for him, without prejudice to any other rights he may have under the
Agreement, to take the Works to be performed by the Specialist under the
Agreement wholly or partly out of the Specialist's hands and may himself
complete such Works or any part thereof, or may employ any other party
or parties to complete such Works or any part thereof, and in either of
such event the Owner shall have the free use of such items of
maintenance, test and monitoring equipment and tools as may have been
brought on to the premises of the Owner by the Specialist without being
responsible to the Specialist for fair wear and tear thereof.
The Owner shall also be entitled to retain and apply any portion of the
Contract Rate which may be otherwise due to the Specialist under the
Agreement for the payment of the costs of executing the said Works or
part thereof as the case may be. If the cost of completing the said Works
or any part thereof exceeds the amount payable to the Specialist, the
Specialist shall pay for the excess, failing with such amount shall be
recovered under Clause 26 herein.
The Specialist shall not be entitled to the monthly maintenance rate for
the period within which the default occurs, arising from the Specialist's
neglect, refusal or contravention.
33. If the Specialist fails to comply with the scheduled number of maintenance Non-compliance
submitted under Clause 4 herein, the Specialist fully agrees and accepts with scheduled
to a cost deduction per occasion of an amount stated in the Appendix number of
from the Contract Rate payable in the month in which he was failed to Maintenance
comply with the scheduled number of maintenance. The Owner may
recover such cost deductions as a debt due by the Specialist or deduct
the amount from any monies due or becoming due to the Specialist under
Clause 26 herein. In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any
reason, then the Owner shall be at liberty to recover such damages for
breach of contract as the Owner can prove arising from the Specialist's
failure to carry out the scheduled number of maintenance.
34. If the Specialist shall become bankrupt or have a receiving order made Termination
against him or shall present his petition in bankruptcy or shall make an
arrangement with or assignment in favour of his creditors or shall agree
to carry out the Agreement under a committee of inspection of his
creditors or (being a corporation) shall go into liquidation (other than a
voluntary liquidation for the purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction)
or if the Specialist shall assign the Agreement without the consent in
writing of the Owner first obtained or shall have an execution levied on his
goods or if the Owner shall certify in writing that in his opinion the
Specialist :
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(13)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 14
(CONT'D)
34. Cont'd
(a) has abandoned the Agreement; or
(b) without reasonable excuse has failed to commence on the repair

and/or replacement; or
(c) has suspended the progress of the Works for 14 days after receiving
from the Owner written notice to proceed; or
(d) has failed to remove materials or goods from the Plant or to pull
down and replace work for 14 days after receiving from the Owner
written notice that the said materials or goods or work have been
condemned and rejected; or
(e) despite previous warning by the Owner in writing fails to proceed

with the Works with due expedition and without delay or is otherwise
persistently or fundamentally in breach of his obligations under the
Agreement; or
(f) has assigned to another person or firm or corporation or permits

vicarious performance by another person or firm or corporation of
his duties or functions or has assigned any benefit or interest in the
Agreement without consent of the Owner; or
(g) has failed or refused to dismiss or expel from the Works a person
whose dismissal has been required pursuant to Clause 13 and
Clause 19 herein; or
(h) has removed tools, temporary works, materials or goods from the
Works without the consent of the Owner in a case where the Owner
is reasonably entitled to refuse consent under the terms of this
Agreement and the Specialist has failed or refused to comply within
14 days' written notice from the Owner requiring him to return the
said tools, temporary works, materials or goods to the Works.
(i) has previously received a valid and justified written notice under
paragraphs (c) or (e) hereof with which he has complied at the time
but at any time thereafter has again suspended the progress of the
Works or failed to proceed with the Works with due expedition and
without delay; or
(j) has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance or the

instruction of the Owner to the contrary sub-let any part of the
Agreement; or
(k) has offered or attempted to offer a bribe, commission or gift to any

officer of the Owner; or
(l) has failed to provide the Security Deposit/Bond in accordance with

Clause 9 herein; or
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(14)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 15
(CONT'D)
34. Cont'd
then the Owner may after giving 7 days' notice in writing to the Specialist
terminate the employment of the Specialist therefrom without thereby
avoiding the Agreement or releasing the Specialist from any of his
liabilities or obligations under the Agreement or affecting the rights and
powers conferred on the Owner by the Agreement and may himself
maintain the Plant or may employ any other contractors to maintain the
Plant and the Owner or such other contractors may use for such
maintenance so much of the tools temporary works and materials or
goods. All additional costs incurred by the Owner in fulfilling the
requirements under the Agreement arising from the terminations of the
employment of the Specialist shall be recoverable by the Owner under
Clause 26 herein.
35. It shall be the express intention of both parties to this Agreement that all Supply of Spare
rights and obligations in respect of the Works are distinct and independent Parts after
of all rights and obligations in respect of the supply of spare parts for Plant Termination
currently maintained by the Specialist for the Owner and notwithstanding
the termination of the said Agreement pursuant to the provisions of
Clause 34 herein the rights and obligations in respect of the said supply
of spare parts for the Plant are absolute and are not discharged or
deemed to be discharged by the termination of the said Agreement and
the Owner shall remain entitled to be supplied with spare parts for the
Plant maintained by the Specialist prior to the termination of the said
Agreement, in accordance with the Spare Parts Price List in Appendix to
Tender Form and applicable to the purpose of the Works as and when
required by the Owner for the continuing maintenance of the Plant.
ARBITRATION
36. If at any time any question dispute or difference whatsoever shall arise
between the Owner and the Specialist upon, in relation to, or in
connection with the Agreement, either of them shall as soon as
reasonably practical give to the other notice in writing of the existence of
such question dispute or difference and the same shall be referred to the
arbitration of a person to be agreed upon by the parties and failing such
agreement, a person to be appointed by the Minister for National
Development of Singapore and any such reference shall deem to be a
submission to arbitration within the meaning of the Arbitration Act (Cap
10).
The existence of arbitration proceedings shall not constitute a reason for

the suspension of the Works.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(15)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 16
LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION
37. The Agreement shall in all respects be governed by and its terms Law Applicable/
construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Singapore. For Jurisdiction
the avoidance of doubt the Specialist agrees that, except for the
enforcement of an award made under Clause 36 herein or a judgement
of the Singapore Courts or an appeal from a judgement of the Singapore
Courts to the Privy Council, no court or other tribunal outside Singapore
shall have jurisdiction to entertain or decide actions disputes or
differences in connection with or arising out of this Agreement. For the
further avoidance of doubt, if a court or other tribunal outside Singapore
refuses to accept the agreement contained in the immediately preceding
sentence, any award of an arbitrator or judgement of the Singapore
Courts in connection with or arising out of this Agreement shall be
accepted as binding upon the parties to this Agreement and shall not be
questioned in any proceeding before a court or other tribunal outside
Singapore.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(16)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 17
SCHEDULE A - WORKS
LOCATION DESCRIPTION MODEL/DETAILS QUANTITY
To be confirmed Comprehensive maintenance of refuse Final quantity to

handling Plant. Details of maintenance be confirmed
work shall be provided by the Specialist. based on the
number of
residential blocks
with centralised
refuse chute.
With reference to Clause 2.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(17)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 18
SCHEDULE B - ITEMS AND FREQUENCY OF WORK
ITEM OF WORK FREQUENCY OF WORKS
(a) A thorough visual inspection of the complete installation for defective Monthly
paintwork and signs of corrosion.
(b) Check and ensure that all bolts and nuts for power pack, structure, Monthly
discharge gate, etc, are tightened securely
(c) Check and ensure that limit switches, relays, valves, heat detector, etc Monthly
are in proper working condition.
(d) Check and ensure that all seals are in good working condition. Monthly
(e) Check and ensure that noise and vibration levels are within acceptable Monthly
limit.
(f) Check and ensure that the drainage outlet is not blocked. Monthly
(g) Check motor bearings for wear and tear. Yearly
(h) Carry out insulation test for motor winding. Yearly
(i) Carry out ampere test for motor Monthly
(j) Lubricate bearings. Monthly
(k) Rectify all faults detected and replace all defective or worn parts. Monthly
With reference to Clause 2.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(18)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 19
APPENDIX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
Ref Description Clause No. Details
(i) Commencement and Duration of 3 Duration of Agreement = 5 years commencing

Agreement from 20 to 20 .
(ii) Service Time 5(2) 24 hours.
(iii) Agreed Damages for failure to 6 Anytime during 24 hours of the day
respond within call-out time/to a) Call-out Time : 2 hours
rectify breakdown within service b) Service Time : 24 hours
time c) Agreed Damages : $10.00 per hour
(iv) Service Reports 7 Included
(v) Substitute Plant 8(2) Included
(vi) Security Deposit/Bond 9 Not applicable
(vii) Payment 23 14 days in a month during which the Plant is not

in working condition
(viii) Insurances against Injuries to 31 Included.

Persons and Damages to Public Liability Policy of $1 Million per claim and
Property unlimited for the period of insurance.
(ix) Non-Compliance with Scheduled 33 Cost deduction per occasion of an amount of

No. of Maintenance $180.00 from the Contract Rate.
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(19)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 20

INDEX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
Clause Title Page
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS

1(1) Definitions 1
1(2) Singular and Plural 1
1(3) Heading and Marginal Notes 1
SCOPE OF WORKS
2 Scope of Works 1
REQUIREMENTS UNDER WORK

3 Commencement and Duration of Agreement 2
4 Work Programme 2
5 Call-Out Time/Service Time 2
5(1) Call-Out Time 2
5(2) Service Time 3
6 Agreed Damages for Failure to Respond within Call-Out Time/To Rectify 3
Breakdown within Service Time
7 Service Reports 3
8(1) Replacements and Repairs 4
8(2) Substitute Plant 4
9 Security Deposit 4
10 Specialist to Pay All Stamp Fees 4
11 Owner's Right to Assign 4
12 Assignment or Subletting 4
GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE SPECIALIST

13 Behaviour of Workmen 5
14 Keeping Records of Workmen 5
15 Labour Laws 6
16 No Night Sunday or Public Holiday Work 6
17 Employment of Illegal Immigrants 6
18 Compliance with Rules and Regulations 6
19 Specialist's Superintendence 7
20 Safety 7
21 Workmen's Compensation 7
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(20)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A44
Page 21

INDEX TO COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
Clause Title Page
PAYMENT
22 Firm Price Contract 9
23 Payment 9
24 Payment for Owner's Bills and Expenses, etc 9
25 Overclaim Leading to Overpayment 9
26 Recovery/Deduction of Money 10
VARIATIONS/MODIFICATIONS
27 Variations 10
28 Valuation of Variations 10
29 Specialist's Modification of Plant or Works 11
LIABILITIES FOR AN INSURANCES AGAINST

INJURIES AND DAMAGE TO PROPERTY
30 Damage to Property and Injury to Persons 11
31 Insurance against Injuries to Persons and Damage to Property 12
REMEDIES IN THE EVENT OF BREACH AND TERMINATION

32 Remedies in the Event of Breach 12
33 Non-Compliance with Scheduled Number of Maintenance 13
34 Termination 13
35 Supply of Spare Parts after Termination 15
ARBITRATION
36 Arbitration 15
LAW APPLICABLE/JURISDICTION
37 Law Applicable/Jurisdiction 16
BLDG17/A44.DOCX(21)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A45
APPENDIX A45
RESERVED
BLDG17/A45.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A46
Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
_____________________________
_____________________________
PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
Contract No. _______________________________
Location of Playground: ______________________
Playground Type: ___________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 457: 2007 Playground Equipment For Public Use

SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Playground Equipment
This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety

Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the children playground equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ
Rubber Flooring are in accordance with SS457: 2007 and SS495: 2001 respectively.
______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________
Certification Number
_________________
Date
BLDG17/A46.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A47
HDB-TM(M&E)-EQNET
Head, Technical Management (M&E) Unit
Building Quality Group
Housing & Development Board
HDB Hub, West Wing, 17th Storey
480 Lorong 6 Toa Payoh
Singapore 310480
Dear Sir
CONFIRMATION OF EQUIPOTENTIAL NETTINGS FOR PLAYGROUND, HARDCOURT, FITNESS CORNER, ETC.

WITH REINFORCED CONCRETE BASE
Project Title:
Location Description:
Project Reference No.:
This is to confirm that equipotential nettings have been provided for the below amenities/facilities in accordance
with the SS 555.
(A) Type of Amenities / Facilities Location (near to block no.) Remark
i) _________ _______ ______________
ii) _________ _______ ______________
iii) _________ _______ ______________
Yours faithfully
Name & Signature of Consultant LEW or PE LEW No or PE No.
Date: Tel No.:
Name, Signature and Stamp of Contractor Tel. No.:
BLDG17/A47.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A48
Town Council
( Name & Address of Town Council )
_____________________________
_____________________________
PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
Contract No. _______________________________
Location of outdoor fitness station: ______________________
Outdoor Fitness Station Type: ___________________________
Reference Standards:
SS 534: 2007 Outdoor Fitness Equipment For Public Use

SS 495: 2001 Impact Attenuation Of Surface Systems Under And Around Fitness Equipment
This is to certify that I, ____________________________________________, a Certified Playground Safety

Inspector have inspected, and hereby certify that the outdoor fitness equipments and EPDM Cast-In-Situ Rubber
Flooring are in accordance with SS534: 2007 and SS495: 2001 respectively.
.
______________________________
Certified Playground Safety Inspector
_________________
Certification Number
_________________
Date
BLDG17/A48.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
APPENDIX A49-1
APPENDIX A49-2
APPENDIX A49-3
APPENDIX A49-4
Appendix A49- 5
Appendix A49- 6
Appendix A49- 7
Appendix A49- 8
Appendix A49- 9
APPENDIX A49-10
Page 1
SUMMARY OF UPDATES TO
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR BUILDING WORKS AND
OTHER INSTALLATIONS
(2017 EDITION)
DISCLAIMER
This Summary of Updates is prepared for the information of the tenderers and shall not form part of the
contract documents. This Summary Of Updates is a non-exhaustive indication of the major changes
implemented to the Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations (2017 Edition). Whilst
every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information, HDB is not responsible for any errors
or omissions contained in this Summary Of Updates. HDB expressly disclaims all and any liability and
responsibility to any person, in respect of anything, and of consequences of anything, done or omitted to be
done by any such person in reliance, whether wholly or partially, upon the whole or part of the contents of
this Summary Of Updates.”
BLDG17/A50.DOCX(1)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Page 2
Summary of Updates To
Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations (2017 Edition)
Section No./
S/N Title Changes
Clause No.
Payment Of Employer's Bills,

1 1.1.3 Update on the late payment interest rate.
Expenses, Etc
2 1.10 Workers’ Quarters Minor updating of requirements.
To provide measuring instrument for

3 1.1.19 (i) Measuring Instrument for Tiles’ Lippage
tiles lippage on site.
4 1.1.26.3 (c) Site Supervisors Minor updating of requirements.
Stage completion required based on the

5 1.1.47 Completion of Site Works number of residential blocks in the
contract.
Update on the average number of “wet
Assessment Of Extension Of Time Due
6 1.1.53 days” for the period from Jan 2006 to
To Exceptionally Inclement Weather
Dec 2015.
7 1.1.58 Provision Of Building Service Centre Minor updating of requirements.
To be in-line with PUB’s latest

8 1.1.66 Earth Control Measures specification clause on “Earth Control
Measures”.
To comply with BCA Circular dated 1st
9 Mar 2016 on the Calibration of
2.22 (c) Loading Of Test Piles
Equipment for Pile Load Test by SAC-
SINGLAS Accredited Labs.
Piling Works To Linkways And Precinct

10 2.38 Deletion of Clause.
Pavilions
11 4.5.1 Description Minor updating of requirements
12 4.11 Workability And Consistency

Minor updating to enhance the clarity of
HDB’s requirements.
13 4.12 Placing Of Concrete
14 4.17 Testing Of Hardened Concrete Minor updating of requirements.
BLDG17/A50.DOCX(2)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Page 3
Section No./
S/N Title Changes
Clause No.
15 4.18 Rectification Of Defective Work Minor updating of requirements.
16 6.12.2 (i) (c) Gable End Walls Minor updating of requirements.
Incorporating an alternative facade

17 6.13 Flexible Loop Connector (Facade)
connection into the specifications.
18 9.9 Tiling Minor updating of requirements.
Complete System of Waterproofing

19 14.3 Deletion of the clause.
Treatment And Panel Roofing
Minor updating to the entrance door
eye-viewer and to provide stainless
20 15.10.4 (a) Schedule
steel dust proof socket and cover at
base of door.
“SS5 : Part G4” is no longer in use
21 15.10.9 Re-Cycled Wood Door
and to update to “SS5 : Part G9”.
22 15.11.4 (a) Double Leaf
To provide stainless steel dust proof

23 15.12.4 (b) Double Leaf
socket and cover at base of door.
24 15.13.4 (a) Double Leaf
“SS5 : Part G4” is no longer in use

25 15.16.2 Re-Cycled Wood Door
and to update to “SS5 : Part G9”.
Plywood With Laminate Panel Door
26 15.22 And Timber Door Frame For Service
Closet Minor updating of requirements.
27 15.25 Laminated UPVC Folding Door
28 15.26 Laminated UPVC Swing Door Addition of a new clause.
Single Leaf Solid Timber Veneered

Minor updating of requirements
29 16.4 (b) Entrance Doors With Decorative Inlays
to the entrance door eye-viewer.
To Flats (For Non Fire-Rated Doors)
To provide additional measuring
30 17.4 Steelwork Delivered To Site
instrument to check steel member.
Minor updating of requirements to the
Extruded Aluminium Framed Windows.
31 18.3.3 (g) Hardware
To replace the word “Friction Hinges” to
“Friction Stay” for clarity.
32 18.3.7 (b) Detailing Minor updating of requirements.
33 18.3.8 (a) Glass Minor updating of requirements.
BLDG17/A50.DOCX(3)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Page 4
Section No./
S/N Title Changes
Clause No.
Bronze Anodised Aluminium Framed
Adjustable Louvre Windows With
34 18.4 Minor updating of title.
Polypropylene Glass Holders/Blade
Clips
35 18.5.7 Glazing Minor updating of requirements.
Minor updating of requirements to the

36 18.51.3 (g) Hardware
Extruded Aluminium Framed Windows.
37 19.2.1 Pre-Packed Mortar Screed
38 19.2.6 Schedule Of Screed/Rendering Minor updating of requirements.
39 19.4.1 General
To remove the “SS 57” stain resistance

test and to adopt “ISO 13006/10545”
for stain resistance test with staining
agents:
- Iodine
- Olive oil
40 19.4.4 (d) Chemical Properties
- Green paste
To include household stain resistance

test using:
- Coffee
- Fresh orange juice
41 19.5.1 (d) Cut Tiles

Minor updating of requirements.
Test Certificate And Compliance
42 19.5.3 (b)
Requirement
To remove the “SS 57” stain resistance

agents:
- Iodine
- Olive oil
43 19.5.4 (d) Chemical Properties
- Green paste

test using:
- Coffee
BLDG17/A50.DOCX(4)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Page 5
Section No./
S/N Title Changes
Clause No.
44 19.6.1 (e) Cut Tiles

45 19.6.3 (b) Minor updating of requirements.
Requirement
46 19.6.6 uPVC Laminated Skirting
47 19.7.3 Workmanship
To remove the tile spacers prior to
grouting of tile joints.
48 19.7.8 Grouting To Tile Joints

49 19.9.3 (b) Minor updating of requirements.
Requirement
50 19.9.4 (d) Chemical Properties To remove the “SS 57” stain resistance
51 20.12.4 (f) Chemical Properties agents:
- Iodine
- Olive oil
52 20.12.5 (f) Chemical Properties - Green paste

test using:
53 20.14.3 (d) Chemical Properties - Coffee
PVB (Polyvinyl Butyral) Layers Between

54 22.3 Glass For Casement Window With Addition of a new clause.
Integrated Top Hung In Bathroom
55 23.1.1 Paint
56 23.2.2 (a) Type And Location
Painting Of Nosing Strips Of Concrete

57 23.8 Addition of a new clause.
Steps
Minor updating of requirements and the
specification to accept play equipment
58 25.9.1 Play Equipment certified by International Play
Equipment Manufacturer’s Association
(IPEMA) or TUV-SUD.
Soil Mixture for General Landscaping
59 26.6.4 (b) To amend typo error from “m” to “mm”.
Use
BLDG17/A50.DOCX(5)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)
Page 6
Section No./
S/N Title Changes
Clause No.
60 26.9.1 (j) Preparation Stage

61 26.9.2 (d) Planting Stage
Inclusion of new specification

62 26.10 Landscape Irrigation System requirements for “Landscape Irrigation
System”.
63 34.5 Quality Assurance And Workmanship Minor updating of requirements.
To change the 25mm gap between the

64 35.2 Installation Requirement floor and the bottom of drywall panel to
10mm -15mm.
Technical Requirements Of Dry Internal To remove the minimum fire resistance
65 35.4
Partition Wall rating of 1 hour.
Low Capacity WC Suite And Wash

66 37.20 Updating of sanitary requirements.
Basin
Bib Tap And Drainage Outlet For

67 37.22
Washing Machine
68 50.1.5 Circuits And Connections

69 50.4 Distribution Boards
70 60.4.2 Bitumen Coating
71 62.1 Scope Of Works

Minor updating of requirements to
Provision Of Internal include non-residential units.
72 62.14 Telecommunication Wiring For
Commercial Units
Deed of Warranty For Complete System of

Appendix A4
73 Waterproofing Treatment And Panel Deletion of the warranty requirements.
and A4(TC)
Roofing.
BLDG17/A50.DOCX(6)
Sal(151216)
(DPG)

07. Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations (2017 Edition)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

07. Standard Specifications for Building Works and Other Installations (2017 Edition)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR

SECTION 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1-1

SECTION 2 PILING 2-1

SECTION 3 EXCAVATION 3-1

SECTION 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 4-1

SECTION 5 METAL FORMWORK 5-1

SECTION 6 SEMI-PRECAST CONSTRUCTION 6-1

SECTION 7 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 7-1

SECTION 8 HOUSEHOLD SHELTER 8-1

SECTION 9 REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK 9-1

SECTION 10 RESERVED 10-1

SECTION 11 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 11-1

SECTION 12 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK 12-1

SECTION 13 ROOFING 13-1

SECTION 14 CONCRETE FLAT ROOF 14-1

SECTION 15 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY 15-1

SECTION 16 IRONMONGERY 16-1

SECTION 17 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 17-1

SECTION 18 METALWORK 18-1

SECTION 19 FLOOR FINISHES 19-1

SECTION 20 WALL FINISHES 20-1

SECTION 21 ELECTRICAL AND BROADBAND COAXIAL 21-1

SECTION 22 GLAZING 22-1

SECTION 23 PAINTING AND DECORATING 23-1

SECTION 24 UNDERGROUND PIPE SYSTEM FOR LOW TENSION RETICULATION 24-1

SECTION 25 CHILDREN'S PLAYGROUND, FITNESS STATION AND HARDCOURT 25-1

SECTION 26 LANDSCAPE WORKS 26-1

SECTION 27 MULTI-STOREY CARPARK 27-1

SECTION 28 ELECTRICAL SUB-STATION / UTILITIES CENTRE / 28-1

SECTION 29 EATING HOUSE 29-1

SECTION 30 MISCELLANEOUS (BUILDING) 30-1

SECTION 31 FABRICATION AND PROVISION OF REFUSE BINS, LITTER BINS, 31-1

SECTION 32 SELF-COMPACTING CONCRETE 32-1

SECTION 33 OPTIMISATION OF PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE 33-1

SECTION 34 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE WALL PANELS AND BLOCKS 34-1

SECTION 35 DRY INTERNAL PARTITION WALL 35-1

SECTION 36 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SANITARY, WATER, GAS 36-1

SECTION 37 SANITARY INSTALLATION 37-1

SECTION 38 WATER INSTALLATION 38-1

SECTION 39 GAS PIPE INSTALLATION 39-1

SECTION 40 EATING ESTABLISHMENT, MARKET FACILITIES, RETAIL AND 40-1

SECTION 41 MISCELLANEOUS (SANITARY & WATER INSTALLATION) 41-1

SECTION 42 TRANSFER PUMPING SYSTEM AND TELEMONITORING SYSTEM 42-1

SECTION 43 BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION 43-1

SECTION 44 DRY/WET RISING MAIN INSTALLATION 44-1

SECTION 45 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION 45-1

SECTION 46 CENTRALISED CHUTE FOR RECYCLABLE (CCR) SYSTEM 46-1

SECTION 47 RESERVED 47-1

SECTION 48 RESERVED 47-1

SECTION 49 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS 49-1

SECTION 50 SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHGEARS 50-1

SECTION 51 MAINS AND SUB-MAINS CABLES 51-1

SECTION 52 CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS 52-1

SECTION 53 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURES 53-1

SECTION 54 LUMINARIES 54-1

SECTION 55 EARTHING SYSTEM 55-1

SECTION 56 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 56-1

SECTION 57 PUBLIC LIGHTING 57-1

SECTION 58 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF DWELLING UNITS AND PREMISES 58-1

SECTION 59 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION TO MULTI-STOREY CARPARKS (MSCP), 59-1

SECTION 60 OUTDOOR AMENITIES LIGHTING 60-1

SECTION 61 TELEVISION (TV) SYSTEM INSTALLATION 61-1

SECTION 62 TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING 62-1

SECTION 63 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 63-1